Documente Academic
Documente Profesional
Documente Cultură
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
DIVISION 05 - METALS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
Initial Date
PM Confirmed
Initial Date
PMC Verified
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
1. Shop drawings for all areas requiring traffic regulation, even if such areas are not
shown on the contract drawings to include but not be limited to:
A. Contractor shall maintain and protect vehicular and pedestrian traffic (including plant
staff) through all construction areas.
1. Work shall include but not necessarily be limited to furnishing, erecting and
maintaining temporary traffic control devices including barriers, barricades, cones,
drums, warning signs directional signage and lights.
C. Contractor shall ensure that adequate access is maintained at all times to properties
affected by construction activities.
1. Replace access ways with the same width, standard and surface type as the
existing access facilities.
D. Detour Works and access to the site shall include but not necessarily be limited to:
1. Field surveys,
2. Construction and maintenance of paved and unpaved detour carriage ways
including earthwork,
3. Providing and installing barriers, drainage, lighting, traffic signals, signs,
barricades, and other traffic control devices.
4. Drawings showing details of the proposed Detour Works shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval.
5. Temporary protection of existing utility services as required by the Engineer.
6. Restoration of the Detour sites to their original condition (or such other condition
as directed or approved by the Engineer) when the Detours are no longer required.
2. The Traffic Safety Supervisor's duties and responsibilities shall include but not
necessarily be limited to the following:
a. Maintain traffic flow through and around the construction site as required by
these Contract Documents.
b. Coordinate traffic control procedures with all relevant authorities including
the plant operating staff,
c. Inspect the condition and location of traffic control devices to ensure that they
are in proper working order, clean, visible and conform to these specifications.
d. Establish traffic control requirements and develop the appropriate control
procedures.
e. Provide and maintain such devices as are necessary for safe and efficient
traffic movement. Ensure that these devices are in place at the required time.
There will include backup alarms on equipment and haul trucks.
f. Coordinate traffic control operations, including maintenance, with the
Engineer.
g. Review the Contractor's material storage and handling procedures with respect
to traffic safety and operation.
B. Flagmen
2. Each flagman on duty shall wear appropriate and distinctive apparel as approved
by the Engineer.
B. Dust control shall be by watering using tanker trucks with spray attachments or by
other approved methods at no additional cost to the Employer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. All traffic control devices shall be approved by the Engineer before being used on the
Site.
1. After the initial use is complete, the Contractor may reuse any approved items as
the need arises.
B. All sign panels, barricades, drums, vertical panels and flagmen's paddles shall be
reflectorized.
C. Barricades shall be made of metal or plastic and shall collapse when tipped over.
1. All cones shall be red and shall have a white reflectorized band.
2. Cones shall be capable of remaining upright during normal traffic flow and wind
conditions in the area where they are used.
F. Warning lights shall be Type A (low intensity flashing), or Type C (steady burn).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Provide and maintain traffic control devices, both inside and outside the Contract
Limits, as needed to direct traffic and ensure vehicular and pedestrian safety.
B. Prior to beginning construction, erect the necessary signs, barricades, and other traffic
control devices.
1. Remove or cover all warning signs except those required for public safety during
non-working hours or when construction in that area is completed.
2. Cover signs with either metal or plywood sheets so that the entire sign cannot be
seen by on-coming traffic.
1. Only those devices that apply to conditions actually in existence shall be in place.
D. Reflective materials on signs, drums, barricades, and other devices shall be kept clean,
free from dirt, mud and road grime.
1. Scratches, rips, and tears in the sheeting shall be promptly repaired by the
Contractor to the Engineer's satisfaction.
2. Reflective sheeting materials shall maintain a reflectivity of not less than 50% of
their design intensity values.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The Employer and Engineer are committed to the safety and health of all persons
associated with the operations of the Riyadh Metro Project and its surroundings.
However, the Contractor has the sole responsibility for developing and implementing
the health and safety plan for all work. Safety is a cornerstone of operations and must be
regarded as a paramount priority for every Contractor engaging in work at the Project.
These Contract specifications must not be considered as inclusive of all safety and
health requirements for work at the Project. Instead they are a guideline that must be
addressed while developing the approved Contractor site specific health and safety plan
(SSSP). The Contractor’s SSSP shall be submitted and approved by Engineer prior to
mobilization to the Site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. The Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for safety conditions on the
site including the safety of all persons and property inside and adjacent to the site during
the Contract. These requirements shall apply continuously for the duration of the
Contract and shall not be limited to normal business hours or other time constraints, nor
be reduced or diminished in any way because the Contractor is not given sole
occupation of the site (total or partial). The Contractor is fully responsible for the safety
of workers engaged upon the works, and of all other persons working at or visiting the
site including any employees of other contractors working within the site, and for the
protection of the public in the vicinity of the site. The Contractor shall formulate and
implement their safety plan, in accordance with the requirements of this section.
B. In accordance with the Contract documents, the Contractor shall submit the proposed
Contractor SSSP and following receipt of Engineer’s Representative’s written notice of
“no objection” it shall become the Contractor’s SSSP.
A. The Contractor shall ensure that all operations carried-out under the Contract shall, at all
times, comply in all respects with all applicable laws and best industry practices.
A. The Contractor shall designate a senior member of its staff who shall be responsible and
directly accountable to the Engineer’s Representative in all matters concerning safety.
B. The Contractor shall provide and maintain an organizational structure of safety staff to
effectively implement and manage occupational safety and health on site. Such staff
shall be engaged solely in safety assurance. Responsibilities and task subdivision shall
be clearly identified in the SSSP, and shall show direct lines of communication and
reporting between the Contractor’s safety manager and the Contractor’s representative.
C. The Contractor shall, within 30 days of the notice to proceed, appoint a safety manager
whose full-time duties shall be solely connected with the safety (environmental,
industrial health, and hygiene) aspects of the works and who shall report directly to the
Contractor’s designated program manager. Such an appointment shall be subject to a
statement of no objection by the Engineer’s Representative. The safety manager shall be
suitably qualified and experienced, and shall implement, maintain, and monitor
compliance with the SSSP and all safety procedures, and be based full-time on site.
D. The Contractor shall not remove the appointed safety manager without the prior written
consent of the Engineer’s Representative, and any replacement shall be nominated by
the Contractor at the same time consent is sought.
E. The Contractor shall authorize the safety manager and safety staff to issue stop orders to
employees of the Contractor and its Subcontractors of any tier, including labor-only, to
cease operations and take urgent and appropriate action to make safe the site and
prevent unsafe working practices or other infringements of the SSSP or breach of any
applicable laws.
F. The Contractor shall ensure that each Subcontractor of every tier, including labor-only,
shall have safety supervisory staff that shall have appropriate experience and training.
Such staff shall be responsible for implementing and maintaining the appropriate
elements of the SSSP. They shall devote a substantial amount of their time to such
duties. All Subcontractors shall, at all times, conform to the SSSP.
G. The Contractor shall not commence any work on site until the safety manager has been
appointed, and commenced duties on the site and the appropriate Subcontractor’s safety
staff are in place and the Contractor’s SSSP has been reviewed and approved by the
Engineer.
A. In order to formulate a specific and competent SSSP, the Contractor shall carry-out a
detailed risk assessment against the scope and nature of the Contracted works and the
particular site conditions. The risk assessment shall be conducted by a qualified and
suitably experienced team comprising planning, design, and supervisory staff led by the
safety manager. The documentation arising from this process shall contain a
comprehensive schedule of all perceived risks and the proposed elimination and
mitigation measures necessary to reduce the risk to a minimum. Risk assessment
documentation shall form part of the auditable safety records.
− The SSSP shall be subject to regular review against evolving regulations, the
scope and program of the works, ambient conditions, or as directed by
Engineer’s Representative. For it to be considered adequate, the SSSP shall
contain, but not be limited to, the following elements developed to suit the
works:
− A policy statement signed by the Consortium’s Authorized Representative
declaring that occupational health and safety shall be given the highest
practicable priority in all aspects of the Contract and in the discharge of their
contractual obligations. It shall also clearly state that the Contractor’s
representative shall be directly accountable in all matters of safety at the site.
− An organization chart identifying all full-time safety personnel and all site staff
with particular responsibilities for safety under the Contract and the SSSP. The
chart shall indicate seniority and show reporting lines. In particular, the direct
relationship between the safety manager and the Contractor’s representative
shall be clearly shown. A safety responsibility statement for each position
shown on the chart shall be appended to the chart.
− Details of the authority vested in the safety manager and their staff, which
would enable them to take or instruct appropriate action, including the stoppage
of activities likely to cause injury, in the event of a contravention of the SSSP.
− Details of radio or other communication facilities necessary to enable the safety
manager and the Contractor’s key staff to communicate efficiently and
effectively on safety matters with the Contractor’s personnel at all Site
workplaces and with Engineer’s staff.
− The means by which the Contractor shall ensure that specialist health and safety
procedures proposed by Subcontractors of all levels will be reviewed and
assimilated into the Contractor’s safety plan.
− The means by which the Contractor shall ensure that Subcontractors of all levels
comply with their occupational health and safety standards, and all applicable
laws. This section should include details of any health and safety promotion
initiatives and award scheme.
− Emergency procedures that detail the organization of rescue and damage
limitation teams to deal with emergency situations on site such as, but not
limited to: seismic activity, fire, loss of power, flooding, or the evacuation of a
seriously injured person from a remote or difficult site location, etc. The
emergency procedures shall specify the equipment, its location and the
frequency of practice drills. The Contractor shall also detail how information on
such services and arrangements will be made known to those at work on the
Site.
− Arrangements for training the Contractor’s entire site staff to enable them to
properly undertake their health and safety responsibilities. The Contractor shall
keep records of such training for health and safety audit purposes. Upon
completion of their training, the Contractor’s site staff shall sign a copy of their
assigned safety responsibilities statement which shall also be kept by the
Contractor for audit purposes.
− Arrangements for the induction and job specific health and safety training of all
workers including those of Subcontractors at all level. The proposals shall
include the syllabus, frequency, and application of such training courses. Such
training shall be conducted by suitably qualified persons and repeated at
intervals of six months. All workers shall receive the agreed induction training
before they are allowed to commence work on Site. The identification card
numbers and names of attendees shall be kept for audit purposes. In addition, all
visitors shall receive the agreed to induction safety training prior to being
allowed onto the construction site.
− Arrangements which allows the Contractor to positively identify each individual
who has successfully completed safety training. Those who can not be
identified positively shall not be allowed to work on site.
− Arrangements to ensure that, at least once every week, all workers shall receive,
and participate in, a toolbox talk with their immediate supervisor. Records of
this activity shall be kept for audit purposes. The topic of these talks shall be
decided at the site safety meeting. Guidance notes and advice on how to present
the talks shall be prepared by the Contractor’s safety manager and issued to
those giving the talk. The names of those attending the toolbox talk shall be
noted on the toolbox talk form and initialled by all attending.
− Details of the quantity and specification of all necessary safe condition
monitoring equipment which shall include as a minimum, but is not be limited
to, temperature and sound level meters and appropriate gas monitors.
− The means and frequency by which safety facilities such as scaffolds,
guardrails, working platforms, ladders and other means of access, lifting
appliances, lighting, signing and guarding equipment, shall be inspected, tested,
and maintained. Maintenance and monitoring records for all of the
aforementioned equipment shall be kept for audit purposes. The Contractor
shall ensure that all the inspections and verifications are undertaken by qualified
and competent persons.
− Details of how the Contractor will ensure the protection of authorized visitors
and the prevention of unauthorized entry to site.
− Details of the proposed first aid provisions including medical personnel and
facilities appropriate to site conditions. This shall include arrangements for
transporting the injured (ambulance, stretcher, etc).
− Details of how where and by whom auditable health and safety related records
shall be kept and maintained. In addition to these records, the safety manager
should keep a safety diary to record all safety-related activities and events on a
daily basis. The diary shall be made available to Engineer’s staff on request.
− Details of the Contractor’s arrangements for site safety inspections to be
conducted by the Contractor’s representative. These inspections shall take place
at least monthly by the safety manager and daily by the supporting safety staff.
Reports of these inspections shall include the actions taken to resolve any
problems or shortcomings discovered during the inspection, shall be made
available for audit purposes.
− Details of material and equipment storage.
− Terms of reference, membership, and the proposed frequency of site safety
committee meetings. These meetings shall be chaired by the Contractor’s
representative.
− A comprehensive health and safety inspection checklist for the use of the
Contractor’s site staff when inspecting the site. The checklist shall indicate the
standard to be achieved on any particular aspect of health and safety and be
compiled in such a way that will allow the inspector to easily record actual
findings. Critical substandard items shall be rectified on the spot and signed off
as such. Non-critical substandard items that are not rectified on the spot shall be
brought to the attention of the appropriate manager via the sign off portion of
the checklist for subsequent rectification. When completed the checklist shall be
kept for audit purposes.
− Details of the Contractor’s internal safety audit scheme to be implemented
regarding the safety management system and the physical Site conditions. The
audits shall be performed, against the conditions specified in the SSSP at least
every three months. The audit shall include the work of Subcontractors of all
levels. The documentation generated by the audit process, including score
sheets, shall be made available to Engineer for audit purposes.
− Detailed procedures covering all health and safety aspects of the Contract are
included, but not limited to, the following list when applicable. The Contractor
is advised that, in order to facilitate efficient document and standards review,
they shall consult with Engineer’s safety staff and use Client/Engineer’s
construction health and safety manual for guidance and assistance when
formulating these procedures for inclusion in the SSSP.
i. Work at height,
ii. Control of noise,
iii. Control of dust,
iv. Temporary illumination,
v. Worker welfare and hygiene facilities,
vi. Housekeeping,
vii. Traffic control and site transportation,
viii. Fire control precautions and fire procedures,
ix. Working in confined spaces,
x. Excavation,
xi. Tunneling Works,
xii. Hand held electrical tools,
xiii. Temporary electrical distribution network,
xiv. Welding/cutting operations and equipment,
xv. Personal protective equipment and clothing,
xvi. Lifting accessories (slings and shackles, etc.),
xvii. Cranes, hoists and lifting appliances,
xviii. Scaffolding and work platforms,
xix. Ladders,
xx. Contractor’s plant, machinery and vehicles,
xxi. Work over water,
− The Contractor shall ensure that all persons working on or visiting the site wear,
at least, a safety hard hat of an approved type, safety glasses, strong appropriate
footwear, and high visibility vest. The Contractor shall assess all works areas
and specify the appropriate personal protective equipment according to the
applicable laws, standards and codes of practice. The Contractor shall ensure
that Subcontractor’s workers of any tier, including labor-only, are issued with
the specified PPE.
− The hard hat designation on site is as follows:
− All PPE shall be properly maintained and replaced before the period of
permitted use expires.
− The Contractor shall ensure that all persons on site use the appropriate PPE at
all times. Training in its use shall be provided where necessary. Failure to use
such equipment shall be considered as conduct prejudicial to safety. The use of
safety helmets on site shall be mandatory except in designated areas such as
offices and canteens.
− The Contractor shall assess all materials for their occupational health and
environmental compatibility. A less hazardous product shall be used to replace
any material that is toxic, explosive, carcinogenic, flammable, or which may
otherwise create a hazard. Where this cannot be done, the Contractor shall
conduct a risk assessment and, if appropriate, produce a method statement
specifying the safe method of use or application which shall be sent to the
Engineer’s Representative, in advance, for a statement of no objection. The
Contractor shall maintain a material safety data sheet (MSDS) for all such
materials in the auditable health and safety records.
− Non-prescription drugs and alcohol. Controls shall be established and
maintained to prevent persons under the influence of drugs or alcohol entering
and/or working on the site. No alcohol or non-prescription drugs shall be
allowed on the site.
F. First aid.
− All parts of the Site where work is being carried out and all site offices shall be
provided with appropriately equipped first aid kits. First aid kits shall be in
sturdy weatherproof containers clearly identified and fixed in an obvious and
readily accessible location. All work sites shall have readily accessible first aid
facilities fully equipped and staffed during working hours by appropriately
qualified medical personnel. At all times, at least one person staffing the facility
shall be at least qualified as a registered medical technician. Such facility shall
be able to provide immediate medical assistance for serious injuries, and to deal
with minor injuries. The Contractor shall maintain an adequate number of
personnel trained in basic first aid. Such number shall be not less than one
trained personnel per 50 employees.
G. Fire prevention.
− The Contractor shall establish a fire prevention strategy for all of the Works
under its control and shall provide all necessary and appropriate fire detection
and fire fighting equipment, facilities, and personnel trained in fire fighting.
Warning systems shall be installed at all places where persons may be at risk
from fire and all personnel shall be given instruction in evacuation procedures
and basic fire fighting.
−
H. Noise.
− All construction plant, equipment, and vehicles brought onto site shall be
inspected and tested, as appropriate. Each vehicle, item of Contractor’s Plant,
and equipment shall be given a unique identity number. This number shall be
clearly displayed on the machine at all times. The Contractor’s Plant,
equipment, and vehicles shall fully comply with the applicable laws, be
properly licensed and certificated, and be maintained in line with the
manufacturer’s specification. Copies of all such licences, certificates, and
maintenance sheets, etc. shall be kept in the safety-related documentation files
in the main site office. A system to control delivery vehicles and short term
hired plant shall also be established.
− The Contractor shall provide all necessary temporary access facilities, which
shall be constructed, installed and maintained in accordance with the applicable
laws and codes of practice. In particular, ladders and any supporting structures
shall be regularly inspected to ensure that they are fit for purpose and free from
defects. Any temporary access shall be secured against movement, provide a
good walking surface and incorporate fall protection measures.
− All temporary works shall be checked, approved and marked as approved, prior
to use.
M. Electrical equipment.
− All electrical equipment, including the construction site supply layout, shall be
supplied, operated, and maintained in accordance with the applicable laws,
manufacturers' instructions, and site procedures. Procedures for the operation of
the construction supplies, and the repair and maintenance of electrical
equipment shall be developed as part of the safety plan.
O. Explosives.
− Explosives shall not be used unless unavoidable. Such use shall only be
permitted upon approval from the Employer and the relevant authorities.
Storage and use of explosives shall be in compliance with safety regulations and
permits and all applicable laws.
− All work at a height shall be executed within a properly secured and otherwise
protected area. If such enclosure and protection is impracticable, work shall
only be permitted with the use of well-secured safety lines and safety harness
that meets industry standards or equivalent and appropriate local government
regulations. All personnel in such locations must wear approved and tested
safety harness 100% of the time secured to such safety lines. All personnel
required to wear a safety harness shall be adequately trained in fall protection
before they are allowed to wear the harness and work at heights.
− Where work is being carried out on, over, or adjacent to water, a safe system of
work shall be devised to prevent persons from falling into the water. A suitably
designed and equipped safety boat, or boats as appropriate, shall be provided
and used solely for rescue work. They shall be continuously manned with
appropriately trained staff and be ready to work whenever personnel are at risk
of falling into the water. Suitable and sufficient back-up staff and equipment
should be planned into the operation.
Q. Tunneling operations.
− The safety requirements for tunnelling operations shall comply with the
requirements of the safety plan and applicable standards.
− The site shall be kept in a clean, clear, and uncluttered condition, free of
obstructions and hazards at all times. All material and equipment that is not
used shall be removed, particularly on access routes and walkways. Sanitary
facilities shall be provided within a five minute walk from all intensive work
sites.
− The Contractor shall regularly inspect, test, and maintain all safety equipment,
scaffolds, guardrails, working platforms, hoists, ladders and other means of
access, lifting, lighting, signing and guarding equipment. Such inspection shall
include checks on temporary works certificates, safe working procedures and
personnel protection equipment. Inspection reports shall be filed for each
S. Radiation protection.
− The use of radioactive substances and irradiating apparatus shall comply with
the applicable laws. No operation involving ionizing radiation shall be carried
out without the approval of the Engineer’s Representative. The Contractor shall
ensure that site personnel and members of the public are not exposed to
radiation.
− The Contractor shall ensure that health and safety matters are given a high
degree of publicity on site. Posters and signs written in the languages
understood by the workers which draw attention to site safety, rescue, and
occupational health, shall be made or obtained from appropriate sources and
shall be displayed prominently in relevant areas of the site.
− The Contractor shall establish site safety meetings chaired by the Contractor’s
representative. Attendance shall include the Contractor’s safety manager and
appropriate senior construction personnel. Attendance shall also include senior
representatives of each of the currently active Subcontractors. These meetings
shall be held at least once each month and be scheduled to precede Engineer’s
safety management committee meeting. All such meetings and the agenda shall
be notified in advance to Engineer’s Representative who may attend in person
or send a representative at their discretion. Minutes of meetings shall be kept for
audit purposes and forwarded to Engineer for discussion.
health and safety. The meeting may, from time to time at the discretion of
Engineer’s Representative, be held as a regional or central forum. In such a case
the same obligations will apply.
A. All safety related documentation including, but not limited to, permits, certificates,
reports, and records shall be kept at the site office in a readily accessible location in an
auditable indexed system.
B. All safety records shall be kept in a properly indexed and readily accessible system.
− The safety manager will maintain a daily site safety diary. It shall
comprehensively record all matters pertaining to safety including, but not
limited to: records of inspections, audits, injuries, dangerous occurrences, and
safety violations. It shall be brought up to date by the end of each shift.
− The supporting safety staff shall maintain a daily site safety diary. This diary
shall comprehensively record all matters pertaining to safety including records
of inspections, audits, accidents, dangerous occurrences, safety violations and
rectification, notices of non compliance, stop orders, and other related matters.
− The Contractor shall establish a system for the safety manager to issue non
compliance notices for safety violations and procedures for expeditiously
rectifying such violations.
Representative for use in statistical analysis of the whole project. The report
should include a 90-day forward planning section in which construction issues
with a significant safety implication can be discussed.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes underground conduits and ducts, duct banks, pull boxes and
handholes, manholes, and other underground utility structures.
1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavation, backfill, and related items for ducts,
manholes, and handholes.
2. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete requirements.
3. Division 7 Section "Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing" for waterproofing of
manholes and handholes.
4. Division 7 Section "APP Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing" for
waterproofing of manholes and handholes.
5. Division 7 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing" for dampproofing of manholes and
handholes.
6. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
7. Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding" for ground rods at manholes.
C. Underground Ducts for Electrical Branch Circuits: PVC conduit [encased in concrete].
D. Underground Ducts for Telephone Utility Service: PVC utility duct encased in concrete.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For metal accessories for manholes and handholes, conduits and ducts, duct-
bank materials, and miscellaneous components.
B. Coordination Drawings: Show duct profiles and coordination with other utilities and
underground structures. Include plans and sections drawn to scale.
C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
A. Deliver ducts to Project site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to
prevent bending, warping, and deforming.
B. Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, manholes, and handholes with final arrangement
of other utilities as determined in the field.
B. Coordinate elevations of duct and duct-bank entrances into manholes and handholes with
final profiles of conduits as determined by coordination with other utilities and underground
obstructions. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field
conditions and to ensure duct runs drain to manholes and handholes, and as approved by
Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. PVC Ducts for Outdoor Power and Lighting Cable Installations: Non-sparking type,
suitable for direct burial in ground, minimum tensile strength 500 kg/cm2, impact strength 5
kg/cm2, supplied in standard 6 m lengths, with one end of each length tapered.
B. Duct Supports: Rigid PVC spacers selected to provide minimum duct spacings and concrete
cover depths indicated, while supporting ducts during concreting.
C. Duct Sealing Compound: Non-hardening, safe for human skin contact, not deleterious to
cable insulation, and workable at temperatures as low as 1 deg C. Capable of withstanding
temperature of 149 deg C without slump and of adhering to clean surfaces of plastic ducts,
metallic conduits, conduit coatings, concrete, masonry, lead, cable sheaths, cable jackets,
insulation materials, and common metals.
A. Frames and Covers: BS 497, checkered cast iron or cast steel, recessed type, and of suitable
duty for the particular application. Machine cover-to-frame bearing surfaces
A. Concrete: Comply with Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete and
reinforcement.
B. Concrete Envelope: For duct banks for power distribution systems and outdoor lighting
cable installations crossing water, gas and sewage mains, under roadways and where
required or shown on the Drawings, is to be 21 MPa, 28-day, compressive-strength
reinforced concrete using sulfate-resisting Portland cement. Reinforcement is to consist of
12-mm diameter longitudinal bars at approximately 300-mm centers along bottom and sides
of duct bank with 10-mm diameter U-shaped transversal bars at 400-mm centers. Extend
concrete envelope at least 300 mm beyond each side of crossing, etc.
C. Cable Manholes and Handholes: 21 MPa, 28-day, compressive strength reinforced concrete
using sulfate-resisting Portland cement, with approved waterproof membrane on external
surfaces, and with cable supports where necessary, pull-eyes, and drain pit and drain pipe as
required. Dimensions and reinforcement are to be as shown on the Drawings or in
accordance with approved standard details shown on shop and construction drawings.
A. Precast Units: Interlocking, mating sections, complete with accessory items, hardware, and
features as indicated. Include concrete knockout panels for conduit entrance and sleeve for
ground rod.
D. Covers: Recess on cover accepts finish material in landscaped and paved areas.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions to receive ducts and utility structures for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of underground ducts and utility structures. Do not proceed with installation
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 EARTHWORK
A. Excavation and Backfill: Comply with Division 2 Section "Earthwork" but do not use
heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment.
B. Trenches: Width is to be as small as practicable with sides vertical. Remove mud, rock
projections, boulders and hard spots from trench bottom and trim level. Inform the Engineer
in advance to give him reasonable opportunity to inspect trench for each section of the work.
C. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades,
unless otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is
completed.
D. Restore all areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work.
Restore vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding,
sprigging, and mulching. Perform according to Division 2 Section "Landscaping."
A. Lay and join ducts to required line and level on sand bed, cover with sand and backfill
trench to ground level with excavated soil, free from stones and other debris, well
compacted in layers not exceeding 300 mm thick.
B. Lay approved concrete tiles to fully cover cable duct, extending minimum 50 mm beyond
sides of duct and placed 300 mm below ground level.
C. Provide warning tape or galvanized steel mesh along duct runs at a depth 200 mm below
ground level.
B. Form duct assembly to required line and level, using duct supports spaced to prevent
sagging of ducts and breaking of couplings and watertight seals, and secured with cords (not
tie wires) where necessary.
C. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum of 1:300 (preferably 1% slope) to drain toward manholes and
handholes and away from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs
between 2 manholes to drain in both directions.
E. Provide 3 mm galvanized steel wire inside empty ducts, for future pulling of cables,
extending 1 m beyond duct banks at both ends and securely fixed to wooden bungs sealing
the duct.
F. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support on plastic separators coordinated with duct size and
required duct spacing, and install according to the following:
G. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal
spare ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs.
A. Ducts ending in cable manholes or handholes are to be neatly cut and reamed and set behind
chamfered precast concrete duct end blocks or terminated with appropriate bell-mouth
bushing set in concrete wall. Ducts not ending in cable manholes or handholes are to be
properly capped.
B. Sealing Ends Of Ducts: Completely seal conduits and ducts, active or spare, at entry into
buildings or manholes, with approved plastic moulds or wooden bungs to prevent entry of
rodents, gas and vapor.
A. Drainage: Install drains in bottom of units. Coordinate with drainage provisions indicated.
B. Waterproofing: Apply waterproofing to exterior surfaces of units after concrete has cured at
least 3 days. Apply according to Division 7 Section <"Self-Adhering Sheet
Waterproofing."> <"APP Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing."> After ducts have
been connected and grouted, and before backfilling, waterproof joints and connections and
touch up abrasions and scars. Waterproof exterior of manhole and handhole chimneys after
brick mortar has cured at least 3 days.
C. Dampproofing: Apply dampproofing to exterior surfaces of units after concrete has cured at
least 3 days. Apply according to Division 7 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing." After
ducts have been connected and grouted, and before backfilling, dampproof joints and
connections and touch up abrasions and scars. Dampproof exterior of manhole and
handhole chimneys after brick mortar has cured at least 3 days.
A. Inspection of Duct Systems: Inspect directly buried ducts and underground duct assemblies
in the presence of the Engineer, before backfilling or concreting. Steel mandrel or other
approved device, diameter equal to 90% of inside diameter of duct and 500 mm long, is to
be pulled through entire run of duct and is to pass through without getting stuck. Ducts,
which do not allow mandrel to be pulled through, are to be repaired or replaced to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
C. Correct installations where possible and retest to demonstrate compliance. Remove and
replace defective products and retest.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean ducts with stiff bristle brush pulled through each duct prior to pulling in cables. Pull
brush through full length of ducts. Use round-bristle brush with a diameter 12 mm larger
than the ID of duct.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for compacted subgrade and subbase course, if any,
under unit pavers.
2. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for concrete base course under unit
pavers and for cast-in-place concrete curbs and gutters serving as edge restraint for
unit pavers.
3. Division 9 Section "Stone Paving and Flooring" for dimension stone paving set in
mortar.
4. Division 7 Section "Composite Sheet Waterproofing" for waterproofing and
protection board under plaza deck pavers.
5. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit
pavers with elastomeric sealants.
6. Division 9 Section "Brick Flooring" for brick flooring for interior applications where
chemical-resistant performance is not the primary requirement.
7. Division 9 Section "Chemical-Resistant Brick Flooring" for brick flooring set with
chemical-resistant materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Brick pavers.
2. Concrete pavers.
3. Asphalt pavers.
4. Stone pavers.
5. Bituminous setting materials.
6. Mortar and grout materials.
7. Edge restraints.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of
units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of unit
paver indicated.
1. Include similar Samples of material for joints and accessories involving color
selection.
C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each type of unit paver indicated; in sets for
each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in
these characteristics.
1. Provide Samples with joints grouted and cured, showing the full range of colors to be
expected in the completed Work.
2. Include Samples of exposed edge restraints.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other
information specified.
E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From latex-additive manufacturer indicating the
following:
1. Mortar and grout containing latex additives have been tested with pavers for
compatibility and adhesion.
2. Interpretation of test results relative to mortar and grout performance and written
recommendations for installation practices needed for adhesion.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed unit paver installations
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver, joint material, and setting material from
one source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties.
1. Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether mortar and grout
materials are required to obtain optimum adhesion with, and will be nonstaining to,
installed pavers and other materials constituting paver installation.
2. Submit a sufficient number of pavers and other materials involved in installation to
allow comprehensive testing.
3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the
Work.
4. For materials failing tests, obtain mortar and grout manufacturer's written instructions
for corrective measures, including the use of alternative materials to obtain optimum
bond and prevent staining.
D. Mockups: Before installing unit pavers, build mockups for each form and pattern of unit
pavers required to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with
the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work, including
same base construction, special features for expansion joints, and contiguous work as
indicated:
1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed
by Architect.
2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting unit paver installation.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
7. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
A. Protect unit pavers and aggregate during storage and construction against soiling or
contamination from earth and other materials.
1. Cover pavers with plastic or use other packaging materials that will prevent rust
marks from steel strapping.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do
not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
D. Store asphalt cement and other bituminous materials in tightly closed containers.
A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit paver
work damaged by frost or freezing.
B. Weather Limitations for Bituminous Setting Bed: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Apply asphalt adhesive when ambient temperature is above 50 deg F (10 deg C) and
when temperature has not been below 35 deg F (2 deg C) for 12 hours immediately
before application. Do not apply when base is wet or contains excess moisture.
2. Install bituminous setting bed only when atmospheric temperature is above 40 deg F
(4 deg C) and when base is dry.
C. Weather Limitations for Mortar and Grout: Comply with the following requirements:
shade and windbreaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to
substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F (38 deg C) and higher.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Brick Pavers:
2. Concrete Pavers:
a. Licensee of Symrah Licensing Inc. that markets unit pavers in Project location.
b. Licensee of Uni-Group U.S.A. that markets unit pavers in Project location.
c. Capitol Ornamental Concrete Specialties, Inc.
d. Hanover Architectural Products, Inc.
e. Hastings Pavement Co., Inc.
f. Nicolock.
g. Oldcastle Architectural Products.
h. Sunny Brook Pressed Concrete Co.
i. Wassau Tile, Inc.; Terra-Paving Div.
3. Rough-Stone Pavers:
a. BrickStop Corporation.
b. Permaloc Corporation.
c. Sure-loc Aluminum Edging.
A. Brick Pavers: Light-traffic paving brick; ASTM C 902, Class SX MX, Type I II III,
Application PS PX PA. Provide brick without frogs or cores in surfaces exposed to view in
the completed Work.
B. Brick Pavers: Heavy vehicular paving brick; ASTM C 1272, Type F, Application PX
Type R, Application PS Type R, Application PX Type R, Application PA. Provide brick
without frogs or cores in surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work.
C. Concrete Pavers: Solid, interlocking paving units, ASTM C 936, made from normal-weight
aggregates in sizes and shapes indicated.
D. Stone Pavers: as indicated on drawings, made from granite complying with ASTM C 615.
1. Granite Color and Grain: Mid gray, Light beige and light grey.
2. Size: Mid grey and Beige Granite Pavers; 20 by 500 by 500 mm, 15mm thick.
3. Size: Light Grey Granite pavers; 200 by 200mm, 30mmthick.
1. Coarse Aggregate: Clean, hard, unweathered stone crushed into angular particles
varying in size up to 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
2. Filler: Dust produced from limestone or other material as standard with
manufacturer.
3. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 312, Type III.
4. Dimensional Tolerances: Manufacture unit to standard dimensions indicated with
deviations in any dimension not exceeding plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
5. Finish: Natural smooth finish.
6. Finish: Ground finish.
7. Finish: Ground and sandblasted finish.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
1. 1-3/4 inches (45 mm) high by 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) wide.
2. 3-1/8 inches (79 mm) high by 9-1/2 inches (241 mm) wide.
B. Steel Edge Restraints: Painted commercial steel edging with loops pressed from or welded
to face to receive stakes at 36 inches (900 mm) o.c., and steel stakes 15 inches (380 mm)
long for each loop. Size of edging is as follows:
C. Aluminum Edge Restraints: Extruded-aluminum edging with loops pressed from face to
receive stakes at 12 inches (300 mm) o.c., and aluminum stakes 12 inches (300 mm) long
for each loop. Type and size of edging is as follows:
1. Straight, 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) thick by 4 inches (100 mm) high.
2. L-shaped, 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) thick by 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) high.
D. Precast Concrete Edge Restraints: Precast concrete curbing, made from normal-weight
aggregate, in shapes and sizes indicated.
F. Cork Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1752, Type II.
G. Compressible Foam Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1.
A. Graded Aggregate for Subbase: Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with
ASTM D 448 for Size No. 57.
C. Graded Aggregate for Base: Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448
for Size No. 8.
F. Sand for Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying
with gradation requirements of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate.
G. Stone Screenings for Leveling Course: Sound stone screenings complying with
ASTM D 448 for Size No. 10.
H. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent
passing No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm)
sieve.
A. Primer for Base: ASTM D 2028, cutback asphalt, grade as recommended by unit paver
manufacturer.
C. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 946, for penetrating graded materials; Grade 60-70 (mixing
temperature 145 deg C – 165 deg C).
E. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent
passing No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm)
sieve.
E. Water: Potable.
1. Packaged, dry grout mix consisting of portland cement, graded aggregate, and
ethylene vinyl acetate in the form of a reemulsifiable powder to which only water is
added at Project site.
2. Dry grout mixture indicated below combined at Project site with styrene-butadiene-
rubber or acrylic-resin water emulsion serving as replacement for part or all of gaging
water.
3) Colored Mortar Pigments for Grout: Natural and synthetic iron and
chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar and grout mixes. Use
only pigments that have proved through testing and experience to be
satisfactory for use in portland cement grout.
B. Water: Potable.
A. General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions for
mix proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing times, and
other procedures needed to produce setting-bed and joint materials of uniform quality and
with optimum performance characteristics. Discard mortars and grout when they have
reached their initial set.
B. Cement-Paste Bond Coat: Mix bond coat to a consistency similar to that of thick cream and
consisting of either neat cement and water or cement, sand, and water.
1. For latex-modified portland cement setting-bed mortar, substitute latex admixture for
part or all of water per directions of latex-additive manufacturer.
D. Latex-Modified Portland Cement Setting-Bed Mortar: Proportion and mix portland cement,
aggregate, and latex additive for setting bed to comply with directions of latex-additive
manufacturer and as necessary to produce stiff mixture with a moist surface when bed is
ready to receive pavers.
E. Latex-Modified Portland Cement Slurry Bond Coat: Proportion and mix portland cement,
aggregate, and latex additive for slurry bond coat to comply with directions of latex-additive
manufacturer.
F. Latex-Modified Portland Cement Grout: Add latex additive to dry grout mix in proportion
and concentration recommended by latex-additive manufacturer. Proportion cement and
aggregate to comply with directions of latex-additive manufacturer.
1. Job-Mixed, Pigmented Grout: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients
to produce color required. Do not exceed pigment-to-cement ratio of 1 to 10, by
weight.
2. Job-Mixed, Colored-Aggregate Grout: Produce color required by combining colored
aggregates with portland cement of selected color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Vacuum clean concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles.
B. Remove substances, from concrete substrates, that could impair mortar bond, including
curing and sealing compounds, form oil, and laitance.
C. Proof-roll prepared subgrade surface to check for unstable areas and areas requiring
additional compaction. Proceed with unit paver installation only after deficient subgrades
have been corrected and are ready to receive subbase for unit pavers.
A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, and other defects that might
be visible or cause staining in finished work.
B. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of
colors and textures.
C. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp,
unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly.
Use full units without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable.
E. Pavers over Waterproofing: Exercise care in placing pavers and setting materials over
waterproofing so protection materials are not displaced and waterproofing is not punctured
or otherwise damaged. Carefully replace protection materials that become displaced and
arrange for repair of damaged waterproofing before covering with paving.
F. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage)
nor 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of
paving.
G. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage)
nor 1/8 inch in 24 inches (3 mm in 600 mm) and 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) from
level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.
H. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide for sealant-filled joints at locations and of widths
indicated. Provide joint filler as backing for sealant-filled joints where indicated. Install
joint filler before setting pavers. Sealant materials and installation are specified in
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
I. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide joint filler at locations and of widths indicated.
Install joint filler before setting pavers. Make top of joint filler flush with top of pavers.
J. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers.
K. Provide steps made of pavers as indicated. Install paver steps before installing adjacent
pavers.
1. Where pavers set in mortar bed are indicated for steps constructed adjacent to pavers
set in aggregate setting bed, install steps and allow mortar to cure before placing
aggregate setting bed and remainder of pavers. Cut off mortar bed at a steep angle so
it will not interfere with aggregate setting bed.
A. Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 laboratory density.
B. Place geotextile over prepared subgrade, overlapping ends and edges at least 12 inches (300
mm).
C. Place aggregate subbase and base in thickness indicated. Compact by tamping with plate
vibrator and screed to depth required to allow setting of pavers.
D. Place aggregate subbase and base over compacted subgrade. Provide compacted thickness
indicated. Compact subbase and base to 100 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum
laboratory density and screed to depth required to allow setting of pavers.
E. Place geotextile over compacted base course, overlapping ends and edges at least 12 inches
(300 mm).
F. Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 1-1/2 inches (25 to 38 mm), taking
care that moisture content remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers
are set and compacted.
G. Treat leveling base with soil sterilizer to inhibit growth of grass and weeds.
H. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) and a maximum of 1/8 inch (3
mm), being careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers
hand tight against spacer bars. Use string lines to keep straight lines. Fill gaps between
units that exceed 3/8 inch (10 mm) with pieces cut to fit from full-size unit pavers.
1. When installation is performed with mechanical equipment, use only unit pavers with
spacer bars on sides of each unit.
I. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to
5000-lbf (16- to 22-kN) compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. Perform at least three passes
across paving with vibrator. Vibrate under the following conditions:
1. After edge pavers are installed and there is a completed surface or before surface is
exposed to rain.
2. Before ending each day's work, fully compact installed concrete pavers to within 36
inches (900 mm) of the laying face. Cover open layers with nonstaining plastic
sheets overlapped 48 inches (1200 mm) on each side of the laying face to protect it
from rain.
J. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course.
Vibrate pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand.
Leave a slight surplus of sand on the surface for joint filling.
K. Do not allow traffic on installed pavers until sand has been vibrated into joints.
A. Apply primer to concrete slab or binder course immediately before placing setting bed.
B. Prepare for setting-bed placement by locating 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) deep control bars
approximately 11 feet (3.3 m) apart and parallel to one another, to serve as guides for
striking board. Adjust bars to subgrades required for accurate setting of paving units to
finished grades indicated.
C. Place bituminous setting bed where indicated, in panels, by spreading bituminous material
between control bars. Strike setting bed smooth, firm, even, and not less than 3/4 inch (19
mm) thick. Add fresh bituminous material to low, porous spots after each pass of striking
board. After each panel is completed, advance first control bar to next position in readiness
for striking adjacent panels. Carefully fill depressions that remain after removing depth-
control bars.
1. Roll setting bed with power roller to a nominal depth of 3/4 inch (19 mm) while still
hot. Adjust thickness as necessary to allow accurate setting of unit pavers to finished
grades indicated.
D. Place pavers carefully by hand in straight courses, maintaining accurate alignment and
uniform top surface. Protect newly laid pavers with plywood panels on which workers can
stand. Advance protective panels as work progresses, but maintain protection in areas
subject to continued movement of materials and equipment to avoid creating depressions or
disrupting alignment of pavers. If additional leveling of paving is required, and before
treating joints, roll paving with power roller after sufficient heat has built up in the surface
from several days of hot weather.
E. Joint Treatment: Place unit pavers with hand-tight joints. Fill joints with sand by sweeping
over paved surface until joints are filled.
F. Joint Treatment: Place brick pavers with spaced joints of 3/8-inch (10-mm) width. Fill
joints solid with grout, free of voids and pits. Tool joints as indicated. Clean excess grout
from face of paving units as work progresses. Cure joints to comply with grout
manufacturer's written instructions.
A. Saturate concrete subbase with clean water several hours before placing setting bed.
Remove surface water about one hour before placing setting bed.
B. Apply cement-paste bond coat over surface of concrete subbase about 15 minutes before
placing setting bed. Limit area of bond coat to avoid its drying out before placing setting
bed. Do not exceed 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) thickness for bond coat.
C. Apply mortar bed over bond coat immediately after applying bond coat. Spread and screed
setting bed to uniform thickness at subgrade elevations required for accurate setting of
pavers to finished grades indicated.
D. Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with pavers before initial
set. Cut back, bevel edge, remove, and discard setting-bed material that has reached initial
set before placing pavers.
E. Wet brick pavers before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (30
g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they
are damp but not wet at the time of laying.
F. Place pavers before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately before placing pavers on
setting bed, apply uniform 1/16-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, slurry bond coat to bed or to back of
each paver with a flat trowel.
G. Tamp or beat pavers with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting
bed and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each paver in a single
operation before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set and disturb pavers for
purposes of realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints.
H. Spaced Joint Widths: Provide 3/8 inch (10 mm) nominal joint width with variations not
exceeding plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
I. Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed. Force grout into joints, taking
care not to smear grout on adjoining pavers and other surfaces. After initial set of grout,
finish joints by tooling to produce a slightly concave polished joint, free from drying cracks.
J. Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for seven days, unless otherwise
recommended by latex-additive manufacturer.
A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match
adjoining units and install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment and
with no evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During tooling of joints, enlarge voids or holes and completely fill with mortar or
grout. Point up joints at sealant joints to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly
prepared for sealant application.
C. Cleaning: Remove excess grout from exposed paver surfaces; wash and scrub clean.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes piping, valves, sprinklers and devices, specialties, controls, and
wiring for the irrigation system.
2. Division 2 Section 02510 “Water Distribution” for butterfly valves and valve
chambers and related accessories.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
B. Circuit Piping: Downstream from control valves to sprinklers, specialties, and drain
valves. Piping is under pressure during flow.
C. Minimum Working Pressures: The following are minimum pressure requirements for
piping, valves, and specialties, unless otherwise indicated:
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include pressure rating, rated capacity, settings, and electrical data of
selected models for the following:
1. Water regulators.
2. Valves. Include underground; general-duty, manual control, and quick-coupler types.
3. Valve boxes.
4. Site control including remote control pressure reducing valves-RCPRV, controllers,
drip emitters, drip lines, bubbler assemblies, weather stations, sprayers and sprinklers
B. Shop Drawings: Show combined irrigation system, including plan layout and
locations, types, sizes, capacities, and flow characteristics of piping components.
Include valves, piping, irrigators, accessories, controls, and wiring. Show areas of
sprinkler spray and overspray.
G. Certificate of Compliance
B. Regulatory Requirements:
C. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810 - Page 2 of 19
S08035-SPC-ENV-01 REV B
RIYADH METRO PROJECT
STATIONS AND BUILDINGS CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
D. Special Tests: Whenever required by the Engineer, supply and transport to a testing
laboratory samples of materials selected by the Engineer. Number of samples is not to
be more than 0.5% of total supplied, with at least one from each class, diameter and
manufacturer. Failure of any sample is to be followed by a second and if necessary a
third test from the same batch. A third test failure will result in all material from that
manufacturer being rejected and replaced by material from a different manufacturer,
subject to approval and satisfactory tests. Provide laboratory test report in an
approved form.
1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces.
3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.
1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then, reinstall for
storage.
2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient
dew-point temperature. Support off ground or pavement in watertight enclosures
when outdoor storage is necessary.
C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves if size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig
valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting
or rigging points.
D. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt,
debris, and moisture.
E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed
structural capacity of floor when storing inside.
G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and
bending.
A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility
locations.
B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt or interfere with utilities serving facilities on the
Project site or on adjoining property unless permitted by the Engineer under the
following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility
services according to requirements indicated or directed:
1. Notify the Engineer not less than 72 hours in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without the Engineer's written permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Marking: Unless otherwise specified in the relevant Standards products are to have
legibly cast, stamped or indelibly painted on, the following marks, as appropriate:
1. Ductile iron pipe for water shall be to BS EN 545 or equivalent. Unless otherwise
indicated in the Bill of Quantities or the Drawings, Class K9 shall be used.
2. Spigot and socket ended pipes shall be used for straight runs and adjacent to elbows
or fittings. These joints shall be provided with rubber gaskets, and an external
thrust block is required at elbows or fittings. Anchored or self restrained joints shall
be used for sections adjacent to elbows in areas where space is restricted or indicated
on the Drawings or BOQ. Anchored joints are to be push-in, self anchored type able
to take up the axial forces thus allowing concrete thrust blocks to be dispensed with.
The Contractor shall submit calculations verifying the number of restrained joints
required noting that pipe pressure testing will be made when pipes are partially
backfilled.
3. Flanged pipes wherever specified shall have screwed-on or cast-on flanges to sustain
working pressure of NP 16 minimum.
4. Flanges shall conform to BS EN 1092, Part 2.
5. Factory protection for pipes:
- Externally, pipe shall be coated with metallic zinc to BS EN 545 and followed
by a bitumen coat to BS 3416 of minimum thickness 120 microns. A hot
applied coal tar based material to BS 4164 may replace the bitumen coat.
6. Factory protection for fittings:
1. PIPE, Pressure Pipe: DIN 8074 and DIN 8075, Class 10 or 16 kg/cm2 (as applicable)
or BS 3284 with straight ends for butt welding.
2. FITTINGS for PE Pipe: to be moulded and suitable for class of pipe. IN-line fittings
including couplings, unions, bushing and nipples may be extruded or machined from
extruded stock.
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities – Basic Materials and Methods" for
commonly used joining materials.
B. Transition Couplings:
C. Plastic Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material of gaskets to be as
recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. Bolts, nuts
and washer to be stainless steel grade 316.
D. Pipes utilities inside culverts should be joined using SADIP anchored standard/triduct
joints or approved equal as specified by the manufacturer.
B. Cast-Iron Gate Valves: AWWA C500, cast-iron double disc, bronze disc, and seat
rings or AWWA C509, resilient seated; bronze stem, cast-iron, or ductile-iron body
and bonnet, stem nut, 16 bar working pressure; and ends that fit HDPE pipe flanged
push-on or mechanical joint. Include elastomeric gaskets.
C. Cast-Iron, Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves: MSS SP-70, Type I, solid wedge; nonrising
stem and flanged ends. Include all bronze trim; Class 125, ASTM A 126, cast-iron
body; and handwheel. Interior and Exterior coating to be 300 microns fusion bonded
epoxy coating.
D. Cast-Iron, Rising-Stem Gate Valves: MSS SP-70, Type I, solid wedge; rising stem
and flanged ends. Include all bronze trim; Class 125, ASTM A 126, cast-iron body;
and handwheel.
E. Tapping-Sleeve Assemblies: Comply with MSS SP-60. Include sleeve and valve
compatible with drilling machine.
1. Tapping Sleeve: Ductile-iron or stainless steel, two-piece bolted sleeve with flanged
outlet for new branch connection. Include sleeve matching size and type of pipe
material being tapped and with recessed flange for branch valve.
2. Valve: AWWA, ductile-iron, nonrising-stem, resilient-seated gate valve with one
raised face flange mating tapping-sleeve flange.
F. Electric Remote Control Valves with Pressure Regulation: Heavy-duty, glass-filled, UV-
resistant, nylon body and bonnet with stainless steel studs and flange nuts, and a nylon
reinforced rubber diaphragm. Normally closed, and operated by 24 V, ac solenoid actuated
IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810 - Page 6 of 19
S08035-SPC-ENV-01 REV B
RIYADH METRO PROJECT
STATIONS AND BUILDINGS CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
globe pattern with balanced pressure diaphragm design. Remote Control Valves shall have a
self cleaning scrubber and screen. The Solenoid shall generally be from Rainbird, Hunter,
Toro companies, or approved equal
1. Locking Top Option: Include vandal-resistant, locking feature with two matching
keys.
I. Curb-Stop Service Boxes: Cast iron with telescoping top section of length required
for depth of bury of valve, cover with lettering "IRRIGATION," bottom section with
base of size to fit over curb stop, and 75- mm diameter barrel. Include steel tee-
handle shutoff rod with one pointed end, stem of length to operate curb stop, and
slotted end fitting curb-stop head.
J. Valve Boxes for gate valves: Cast iron with top section and cover with lettering
"IRRIGATION," bottom section with base to fit over valve, 127 mm diameter barrel,
and adjustable cast-iron extension of length required for depth of bury of valve.
Include steel tee-handle, shutoff rod with one pointed end, stem of length to operate
valve, and end fitting valve operating nut.
1. Type: To BS EN 593 [27], double flange with resilient seating, for horizontal use and
suitable for NP 16.
3. Material of component parts shall be from basic materials listed in BS EN 593 [27]
Table 3.
5. Operation by hand wheel. Maximum shut off pressure against which valve is
operated is to be 15 kg/cm2.
6. Factory Protection: Casting surfaces are to be given an initial coat of protective paint
immediately after shot blasting and a second coat on assembly. Protective coating is
to be hot applied coal tar or bitumen to BS 4164 [5], or BS 3416 [4] respectively.
Thickness of coat shall be 250 microns.
IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810 - Page 7 of 19
S08035-SPC-ENV-01 REV B
RIYADH METRO PROJECT
STATIONS AND BUILDINGS CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
M. Flap Valves
1. Type: To be flange mounted, designed for use on end closures to prevent entrance of
backwater. Seating plane is to have 10 deg. inclination.
2. Materials: Cast iron body and cover, bronze seat faces, bronze hinge pins and spring
pins, cast iron follow ring and plated steel ring draw bolts. Materials subject to de-
zincification or de-aluminuzation are not to be used.
4. Factory Protection: Casting surfaces are to be given an initial coat of protective paint
immediately after shot blasting and a second coat on assembly. Protective coating is
to be hot applied coal tar or bitumen to BS 4164 or BS 3416 respectively. Thickness
of coat shall be at least 250 microns.
2.6 IRRIGATORS
1. Type: Subsurface Root Area Watering System with associated pressure compensating
bubblers.
E. Emitters
2. Construction: emitter shall have self piercing inlet barb constructed of durable ultra-
violet resistant plastic.
3. Performance: the emitter shall have a self flushing action to minimize clogging, and
shall operate at a constant flow discharge over a pressure range specified on the
Drawings.
1. Type: fixed, non-rotating spray or stream spray adaptable for full circle, part circle, or
strip wetting pattern, suitable for installation on a pop-up mechanism. Spray head to
have built in check valve and pressure regulated stem.
2. Material: the sprinkler body, stem, nozzle, and screen shall be constructed of heavy
duty, ultra-violet resistant plastic, with a heavy-duty stainless steel retract spring.
3. Construction: spray head to retract flush with the finished ground level when not in
operation. When spraying, net pop-up height to be 150 mm from finished ground
level.
5. Tests: provide test results carried out at factory substantiating required performance
(discharge and radius of throw at prescribed operating pressure and height above
ground) and giving actual precipitation rate and its uniformity as obtained for
uniformity test carried out using catch cans.
1. Type: full or part circle pop-up rotor sprinkler, single nozzle. The part circle sprinkler
shall have adjustable arc coverage from 25° to 360°. The sprinkler shall have a built
in check valve and pressure regulated stem.
2. Material: the sprinkler body, stem, nozzle, and screen shall be constructed of heavy
duty, ultra-violet resistant plastic, with a heavy duty stainless steel retract spring.
3. Construction: sprinkler head to retract flush with the finished ground level when not
in operation. When operating, net pop-up height to be 100 mm from finished ground
level.
5. Tests: provide test results carried out at factory substantiating required performance
(discharge and radius of throw at prescribed operating pressure and height above
ground) and giving actual precipitation rate and its uniformity as obtained for
uniformity test carried out using catch cans.
2.7 SPECIALTIES
B. Drip Tubes: DN15 to DN25 flexible PE or PVC for emitters and other devices, of
length indicated, and with plugged end.
IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810 - Page 9 of 19
S08035-SPC-ENV-01 REV B
RIYADH METRO PROJECT
STATIONS AND BUILDINGS CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
A. Check Valves:
1. Check Valves: AWWA C508, swing-check type with 16 bar working-pressure rating
and resilient seat. Include interior and exterior protection to be 300 microns fusion
bonded epoxy coating" and ends to match piping.
D. Interior and Exterior coating to be 300 microns (minimum) fusion bonded epoxy.
A. 50 mm and under to be full port of 2-piece construction, lever operated with bronze
body and stem, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable PTFE seats and packing, plastic
coated steel handle, threaded end connection for stell piping, and copper compression
or solder end connections for copper piping.
2.11 SPECIALTIES
B. Drip Tubes: DN13 to DN18 flexible PE for emitters and other devices, of length
indicated, and with plugged end.
B. OPERATION: the controller shall have a remote pump start circuit to activate a remote
pump start relay to run the pump during the irrigation cycle.
C. OPERATION: the controller shall allow for opening the first remote control valve before
operating the pump and also for closing the last remote control valve within 15 seconds after
stopping the pump.
F. THE CONTROLLER without exception shall be of the same manufacturer as the remote
control valve.
The computerized central control system shall be capable of controlling a single site with up
to at least 8 locations, upgradable to 16. The control shall include a computer system, as
hereinafter specified. The control equipment shall include Two-wire decoder interface,
decoders, solenoids, isolation valves and flow sensors. The decoder interface shall be
upgradable from 1 wire group to 4 wire groups with the purchase of an “additional wire path”
software module.
Software Specifications
The Site Control software shall operate in the Microsoft® Windows® operating system
environment and shall be capable of operating the "hard-wired" Two-wire interface units. The
control system shall provide continuous "on-line", two-way communication between the
central computers, the interface unit providing "true" central control.
Continuous field unit "feedback" status information shall register at the computer and also at
the decoder interface unit (TWI).
Site Control system shall be capable of operating 50 programs residing in the system at any
one time. The system shall provide up to 6 “start times” per individual schedule and up to 6
“start times” per individual program.
The weather station shall provide automatic response or alarm to the PC. Water Budget
function shall adjust watering time from 0 to 200% in 1% increments. Automatic Rain
Shutdown shall function with the integration of a Rain Sensor. “Dry run” feature shall provide
data for testing and adjustments. Built-in rotor and spray head database shall provide custom
irrigation programs and automatically calculate precipitation rates for each sprinkler model.
Software to allow wireless access via a wireless phone or handheld is required. (Software
shall come pre-installed on a computer)
IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810 - Page 11 of 19
S08035-SPC-ENV-01 REV B
RIYADH METRO PROJECT
STATIONS AND BUILDINGS CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
The Two-Wire Interface (TWI) shall serve as an interface between the central controller and
the Two-Wire Decoder interfacce on the Site Control System.
Features
• TWI operates up to 500 decoder and up to 1000 solenoids, pulse decoders or sensor
decoders per wire group.
• UL-Listed
• Wall Mount: drawn steel, seamless, cabinet with hinged front panel
• Computer data path: hardwire
• Satellite data path: hardwire/2-wire path
Electrical Specifications
The system shall have flow meters on the main line connected by sensors to the main control
system. The main isolation gate valves shall be replaced by isolation valves that are
electrically operated. They are to be connected also to the main control system. The system
shall be capable of sensing an excessive flow in the system and shall shut down the section
that has breakage.
Superior ET Model –weather sensor input to determine evapotranspiration (ET) rates based
upon a field-proven proprietary equation for ET.
ET Override – Allows you to easily set certain programs to ignore ET values when
determining run times.
Rain Bucket – Allows rainfall from one day to be carried over to the following day(s) for
more accurate ET calculations.
Max Rain Fall – User-defined Max Rain Fall can be set to limit the amount of acceptable
rainfall for clay soil types or other areas that are subject to high runoff.
Weather Data Reports – Generate reports to show current or past weather conditions by the
hour, day, week, month or year.
Unlimited Data Storage – Store unlimited weather data at the central control.
The Weather Station should be capable of working with the central control system, generating
alarms that exceed user-defined thresholds in user-defined time periods for:
• Rain
• High or Low Ambient Temperatures
• High Winds
• Rainfall Intensity
The system will reset alarms automatically when temperature, rain or wind conditions are
again within acceptable ranges for irrigation.
• Automatic Shut Off/Turn On – the Control Systems shall automatically shut OFF irrigation
to the entire system or to specific areas only, when alarm conditions are detected at the
weather station. They also automatically turn ON irrigation when weather conditions return to
the acceptable range for irrigation.
• Automatic Notification – The Weather Station can automatically notify via paging, text
messaging or e-mail when alarm conditions exist.
2.15 IDENTIFICATION
1. Solid blue film with metallic core and continuously printed black-letter caption,
"CAUTION--WATER LINE BURIED BELOW."
surface layer suitable for use in aggressive atmospheres likely to the encountered in
sewers and sewage pumping stations. Rungs of tubular construction shall be no less
than 30 mm outer diameter and stringers shall be of a rectangular or channel section,
no less than 70 mm x 25 mm in size. The upper face of non-tubular rungs shall be
finished with a non-slip surface such as silica sand. All remaining surfaces shall be
free of sharp edges, protrusions etc. Each rung shall be able to withstand a point load
of 5000 N. When supported horizontally over a span of 1 m with the climbing face
uppermost and with a load of 1000 N applied at the centre of the span the ladder shall
not deflect more than 15 mm at the point of application of the load and shall show no
permanent deflection after removal of the load. Each ladder fixing shall be capable of
withstanding shear and pull-out loads of 5000 N. All ladders shall comply with BS
5395: Part 3. All fixings shall be stainless steel. When the height of the ladder
exceeds 6m, safety cages shall be used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Installation and testing shall be according to NFPA 14 and 24 and according to the
articles of this part. In case of contradiction, the most stringent standard shall apply.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Set stakes to identify locations of proposed irrigation system components. Obtain the
Engineer's approval before excavation.
B. Install warning tape directly above pressure piping, 300 mm below finished grades,
except 150 mm below subgrade under pavement and slabs.
C. Install piping and wiring in sleeves under sidewalks, roadways, parking lots, and the
like.
D. Drain Pockets: Excavate to sizes indicated or required. Backfill with cleaned gravel
or crushed stone, graded from 75 to 19 mm minimum, to 300 mm below grade.
Cover gravel or crushed stone with sheet of asphalt-saturated felt and backfill
remainder with excavated material.
E. Provide minimum cover over top of underground piping according to the following:
A. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
B. Piping in control-valve boxes and aboveground may be joined with flanges instead of
joints indicated.
1. DN65 and Smaller: PE to BS 6437 Class C or DIN 8074 and DIN 8075 Class 10 or 6
bars pipe (as applicable), PE socket or butt-fusion fittings, and heat-fusion joints.
F. Sleeves: DIN 8074/8075 Class 6 kg/cm² HDPE pipe. Straight with straight ends
suitable for heat fusion. HDPE socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
1. DN80 and Larger: Gate valve, with elastomeric gaskets and stem nut, valve box, and
shutoff rod.
C. Underground, Manual Control Valves: Bronze globe valve with control-valve service
box and valve key.
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities - Basic Materials and Methods" for pipe
joint construction requirements.
C. Dissimilar Piping Material Joints: Construct joints using adapters or couplings that
are compatible with both piping materials, outside diameters, and system working
pressure.
E. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.
G. Install unions adjacent to valves and final connections to other components with
DN50 or smaller pipe connection.
H. Install flanges adjacent to valves and final connections to other components with
DN65 or larger pipe connection.
K. Install HDPE piping in dry weather when temperature is above 4.4 deg. C (40 deg. F).
Allow joints to cure at least 24 hours at temperature above 4.4 deg. C (40 deg. F)
before testing, unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer.
A. Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant
branches.
A. Underground Gate Valves: Install valve with stem pointing up in a valve box with
top flush with grade, comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44.
B. Install freestanding controllers on precast concrete bases not less than 914 by 610 by
100 mm thick, and not less than 150 mm greater in each direction than overall
dimensions of controller.
C. Install control wiring in same trench with piping. Install wiring with loops at control
valves and controllers, at intervals not greater than 30 m, and changes in direction to
allow for expansion. Bundle wiring in same trench at 3 m intervals.
3.11 CONNECTIONS
D. Arrange for electric-power connections to controllers, control valves, and devices that
require power. Electric power, wiring, and disconnect switches are specified in
Division 16 Sections.
1. Provision of test equipment: All items for test have to be provided on site before the
test i.e. pressure gages, instruments, water etc.
2. Carry out tests in the presence of the Engineer's Representative.
3. Fittings and joints: Permanently anchor fittings before testing and leave all joints
exposed for checking.
4. Test sections: Limit test sections to not more than 500 m.
5. Test sections: Test pressure lines between valve chambers whenever possible.
6. Test sections: No testing shall be carried out against or through the pressure reducing
valves. The setting of the pressure reducing valves shall not be changed for testing
purposes.
7. Test plug: Secure end of main and test plug by struts.
8. Closed valve: Do not test against a closed valve unless there is no acceptable
alternative.
IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810 - Page 17 of 19
S08035-SPC-ENV-01 REV B
RIYADH METRO PROJECT
STATIONS AND BUILDINGS CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
9. Apply pressure by manually operated test pump or, in the case of large diameter
mains, by power driven test pump, if approved.
10. Examine exposed joints and repair visible leaks.
11. Failure: Should a test fail, locate and replace or make good defective pipe or replace
and make good faulty joint. Retest main.
12. Records: Keep test records in an approved form. Hand original copy to the Engineer
immediately after completion of test.
13. Carry out hydrostatic test while pipeline is partially backfilled.
1. Fill pipe slowly with water from lowest point. Do not use power-driven pump unless
approved.
2. Fill absorbant pipes with water and allow to stand for at least 24 hours to allow
complete absorption.
3. Entrapped air is to be bled before pressurizing.
4. Pressurizing is to continue until specified test pressure is reached in lowest part of
section under test. Bleed further quantities of entrapped air while raising pressure.
5. Maintain test pressure for specified test duration with pumping stopped.
6. Repressurize to original test pressure and record respective volumes of water
pumped.
7. Failure: Pipeline will be deemed to have failed test if:
a. Visible leaks are detected, regardless of leakage being within specified limits.
b. Volume of water lost during period when pumping was stopped exceeds
allowable leakage.
8. Test pressure: Generally 1.5 times the maximum sustained pressure, minimum
12 kg/cm2 for main lines and 8 kg/cm2 for circuit piping.
9. Test period: 2 hours.
10. Allowable leakage: 0.1 liter/mm diameter/km length/day/30 m of applied pressure.
1. Timing: Carry out test after total backfilling of length under test.
2. Limit of length to be tested at one time is 3 full length pipes unless otherwise
approved.
3. Apparatus: Use rubber ty`red bogies which do not damage lining of pipe and an
adequate supply of electric lamps.
4. Check joints by means of feelers to ensure rubber rings are correctly located.
5. Check pipe barrel for visible cracks.
3.13 IDENTIFICATION
A. Flush dirt and debris from piping before installing sprinklers and other devices.
B. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate of rated operating pressure
required for each sprinkler circuit.
C. Carefully adjust sprinklers so they will be flush with, or not more than 13 mm above,
finish grade.
3.15 COMMISSIONING
1. Verify that specialty valves and their accessories are installed and operate correctly.
2. Verify that specified tests of piping are complete.
3. Verify that sprinklers and devices are correct type.
4. Verify that damaged sprinklers and devices are replaced with new materials.
5. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
6. Adjust operating controls.
B. Operational Tests: Measure and record water flow rate and area coverage at each
sprinkler. Adjust to achieve indicated values.
3.16 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERALLY
1. Benches.
2. Trash receptacles.
3. Phone Booths
4. Banner Poles
5. Bollards
6. Map Boards and Signs
7. Shade Structures
E. Concrete Bollards
A. Design Criteria: Design, fabricate, and install site furniture to withstand high climate
temperatures.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, finishes, field-assembly
requirements, and installation details.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of
size indicated below.
1. Size: Not less than 150-mm long linear components and 100-mm square sheet
components.
D. Product Schedule: For site and street furnishings. Use same designations indicated on
Drawings.
F. Maintenance Data: For site and street furnishings to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of site and street furnishings through one source from
a single manufacturer or as indicated on drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BENCHES
A. Seat: Stone.
B. Base: Concrete
E.
E. Shape: As Drawn.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
B. Unless otherwise indicated, install site and street furnishings after landscaping and paving
have been completed.
C. Install site and street furnishings level, plumb, true, and securely anchored or positioned at
locations indicated on Drawings.
D. Post Setting: Set cast-in support posts in concrete footing with smooth top, shaped to shed
water. Protect portion of posts above footing from concrete splatter. Verify that posts are
set plumb or at correct angle and are aligned and at correct height and spacing. Hold posts
in position during placement and finishing operations until concrete is sufficiently cured.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for protection of existing trees and planting,
topsoil stripping and stockpiling, and site clearing.
2. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavation, filling, and rough grading and for
subsurface aggregate drainage and drainage backfill materials.
3. Division 2 Section "Subdrainage" for below-grade drainage of landscaped areas,
paved areas, and wall perimeters.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Exterior plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which
they are grown, with ball size not less than sizes indicated and diameter and depth
recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of tree or shrub required; wrapped, tied,
rigidly supported, and drum-laced as recommended by ANSI Z60.1.
B. Balled and Potted Stock: Exterior plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they
are grown and placed, unbroken, in a container. Ball size is not less than sizes indicated and
diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of exterior plant
required.
E. Fabric Bag-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted exterior plants established and
grown in-ground in a porous fabric bag with well-established root system reaching sides of
fabric bag. Fabric bag size is not less than diameter, depth, and volume required by
ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of exterior plant.
H. Planting Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to
become topsoil; mixed with soil amendments.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. 5 lb (2.2 kg) of mineral mulch for each color and texture of stone required, in labeled
plastic bags.
2. Edging materials and accessories, of manufacturer's standard size, to verify color
selected.
E. Material Test Reports: For existing surface soil and imported topsoil.
D. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of exterior plants indicated, complying
with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1, "American Standard for Nursery Stock."
E. Tree and Shrub Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1 with branches and
trunks or canes in their normal position. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. Take caliper
measurements 6 inches (150 mm) above ground for trees up to 4-inch (100-mm) caliper
size, and 12 inches (300 mm) above ground for larger sizes. Measure main body of tree or
shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip-to-tip.
F. Observation: Architect may observe trees and shrubs either at place of growth or at site
before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size, and
quality. Architect retains right to observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of
balls and root systems, insects, injuries, and latent defects and to reject unsatisfactory or
defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs
immediately from Project site.
1. Immediately after digging up bare-root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or
other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting.
B. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery, except as approved by Architect. Protect
bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, sweating, whipping, and other
handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to
destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of exterior plants during delivery.
Do not drop exterior plants during delivery.
D. Deliver exterior plants after preparations for planting have been completed and install
immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set exterior plants
trees in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.
1. Heel-in bare-root stock. Soak roots in water for two hours if dried out.
2. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other
acceptable material.
3. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting.
4. Water root systems of exterior plants stored on-site with a fine-mist spray. Water as
often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist condition.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting
periods with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial
Completion.
1. Spring Planting:
2. Fall Planting:
B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit.
C. Coordination with Lawns: Plant trees and shrubs after finish grades are established and
before planting lawns, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
1. When planting trees and shrubs after lawns, protect lawn areas and promptly repair
damage caused by planting operations.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Warrant the following exterior plants, for the warranty period indicated,
against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from
lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or abuse by Owner, or incidents that are beyond
Contractor's control.
1. Warranty Period for Trees and Shrubs: One year from date of Substantial
Completion.
2. Warranty Period for Ground Cover and Plants: Six months from date of Substantial
Completion.
3. Remove dead exterior plants immediately. Replace immediately unless required to
plant in the succeeding planting season.
4. Replace exterior plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy
condition at end of warranty period.
5. A limit of one replacement of each exterior plant will be required, except for losses or
replacements due to failure to comply with requirements.
1.9 MAINTENANCE
A. Trees and Shrubs: Maintain for the following maintenance period by pruning, cultivating,
watering, weeding, fertilizing, restoring planting saucers, tightening and repairing stakes and
guy supports, and resetting to proper grades or vertical position, as required to establish
healthy, viable plantings. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and
disease. Restore or replace damaged tree wrappings.
B. Ground Cover and Plants: Maintain for the following maintenance period by watering,
weeding, fertilizing, and other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General: Furnish nursery-grown trees and shrubs complying with ANSI Z60.1, with healthy
root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully
branched, healthy, vigorous stock free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as
knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.
B. Grade: Provide trees and shrubs of sizes and grades complying with ANSI Z60.1 for type of
trees and shrubs required. Trees and shrubs of a larger size may be used if acceptable to
Architect, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls.
C. Label each tree and shrub with securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation
of botanical and common name.
D. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety and caliper with a securely attached,
waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.
E. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of trees or shrubs is shown, select stock for
uniform height and spread, and number label to assure symmetry in planting.
A. Shade Trees: Single-stem trees with straight trunk, well-balanced crown, and intact leader,
of height and caliper indicated, complying with ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees required.
1. Provide bare-root or container-grown trees and palm trees as per Engineer’s approval.
2. Branching Height: One-third to one-half of tree height.
B. Small Upright and Spreading Trees: Branched or pruned naturally according to species and
type, with relationship of caliper, height, and branching according to ANSI Z60.1; stem
form as follows:
1. Stem Form: Single stem, Multistem, clump, with two or more main stems and
Multistem, shrub, with multiple stems.
2. Provide balled and burlapped, balled and potted, bare-root, container-grown and
fabric bag-grown trees.
C. Multistem Trees: Branched or pruned naturally according to species and type, with
relationship of caliper, height, and branching according to ANSI Z60.1; stem form as
follows:
A. Form and Size: Deciduous shrubs with not less than the minimum number of canes required
by and measured according to ANSI Z60.1 for type, shape, and height of shrub.
2.6 Ground Cover: Provide ground cover of species indicated on drawings, established and well
rooted in pots or similar containers, and complying with ANSI Z60.1 PLANTS
A. Annuals: Provide healthy, disease-free plants of species and variety shown or listed.
Provide only plants that are acclimated to outdoor conditions before delivery and that are in
bud but not yet in bloom.
B. Perennials: Provide healthy, field-grown plants from a commercial nursery, of species and
variety shown or listed.
1. Two-year plants with heavy, well-branched tops, with not less than 3 runners 18
inches (450 mm) or more in length, and with a vigorous well-developed root system.
2. Provide field-grown vines. Vines grown in pots or other containers of adequate size
and acclimated to outside conditions will also be acceptable.
2.7 TOPSOIL
2. Topsoil Source: Import topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources. Obtain
topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or mining sites where
topsoil occurs at least 4 inches (100 mm) deep; do not obtain from agricultural land,
bogs or marshes.
3. Topsoil Source: Amend existing in-place surface soil to produce topsoil. Verify
suitability of surface soil to produce topsoil. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod,
stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.
C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10
percent sulfur.
B. Peat: Sphagnum peat moss, partially decomposed, finely divided or granular texture, with a
pH range of 3.4 to 4.8.
C. Peat: Finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, containing partially
decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat and having a water-absorbing
capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent.
E. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25
percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances,
stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, and material harmful to plant growth.
2.10 FERTILIZER
1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m) of actual nitrogen, 4 percent
phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.
2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in
soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency.
2.11 MULCHES
A. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and
shrubs, consisting of one of the following:
1. Type: Shredded hardwood, Ground or shredded bark, Pine straw, Salt hay or
threshed straw, Wood and bark chips, Pine needles, Peanut, pecan, and cocoa-bean
shells as per Engineer’s approval.
B. Compost Mulch: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to
8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch (25-
mm) sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert
contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows:
C. Mineral Mulch: Hard, durable stone, washed free of loam, sand, clay, and other foreign
substances, of following type, size range, and color:
B. Nonwoven Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq. yd. (101 g/sq. m) minimum.
A. Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough-sawn, sound, new hardwood, redwood, or pressure-
preservative-treated softwood, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2 by 2
inches (50 by 50 mm) by length indicated, pointed at one end.
B. Guy and Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1, galvanized-steel wire, 2-strand,
twisted, 0.106 inch (2.7 mm) in diameter.
C. Guy Cable: 5-strand, 3/16-inch- (4.8-mm-) diameter, galvanized-steel cable, with zinc-
coated turnbuckles, a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) long, with two 3/8-inch (10-mm)
galvanized eyebolts.
D. Hose Chafing Guard: Reinforced rubber or plastic hose at least 1/2 inch (13 mm) in
diameter, black, cut to lengths required to protect tree trunks from damage.
E. Flags: Standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape, white, 6 inches (150 mm) long.
1. Edging Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wide by 5 inches (125 mm) deep.
2. Stakes: Tapered steel, a minimum of 15 inches (380 mm) long.
3. Accessories: Standard tapered ends, corners, and splicers.
4. Finish: Zinc coated.
1. Edging Size: 0.1 inch (2.5 mm) wide by 5 inches (125 mm) deep.
2. Top Profile: Straight, with top 2 inches (50 mm) being 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick.
3. Top Profile: Round top, 1/2 inch (13 mm) in diameter.
4. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard connecting clips or plugs.
1. Steel Edging:
2. Aluminum Edging:
3. Plastic Edging:
B. Trunk-Wrap Tape: Two layers of crinkled paper cemented together with bituminous
material, 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide minimum, with stretch factor of 33 percent.
C. Tree Grates and Frames: ASTM A 48, Class 35 (ASTM A 48M, Class 250) or better, gray-
iron castings of shape, pattern, and size indicated.
D. Tree Grates and Frames: ASTM A 48, Class 35 (ASTM A 48M, Class 250) or better, gray-
iron castings and ASTM A 36/A 36M steel-angle frames of shape, pattern, and size
indicated.
A. Planting Soil Mix: Mix topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the
following quantities:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive exterior plants for compliance with requirements and conditions
affecting installation and performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, and lawns and
existing exterior plants from damage caused by planting operations.
C. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple exterior plantings. Stake
locations, outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Architect's acceptance
of layout before planting. Make minor adjustments as required.
D. Lay out exterior plants at locations directed by Landscape Architect. Stake locations of
individual trees and shrubs and outline areas for multiple plantings.
E. Apply antidesiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film over
trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging, handling, and
transportation.
1. If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with antidesiccant at nursery
before moving and again two weeks after planting.
A. Loosen subgrade of planting beds to a minimum depth of 8 inches (200 mm). Remove
stones larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other
extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
a. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within a
few days.
b. Mix lime with dry soil before mixing fertilizer.
3. Spread planting soil mix to a depth of 8 inches (200 mm) but not less than required to
meet finish grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade
is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.
a. Spread approximately one-half the thickness of planting soil mix over loosened
subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 4 inches (100 mm) of subgrade. Spread
remainder of planting soil mix.
B. Finish Grading: Grade planting beds to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose,
uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish
grades.
C. Restore planting beds if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before
planting.
A. Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular pits with sides sloped inward. Trim base leaving
center area raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage. Do not further disturb
base. Scarify sides of plant pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.
1. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for balled and
burlapped, balled and potted, container-grown and fabric bag-grown stock.
2. Excavate at least 12 inches (300 mm) wider than root spread and deep enough to
accommodate vertical roots for bare-root stock.
3. If drain tile is shown or required under planted areas, excavate to top of porous
backfill over tile.
B. Subsoil removed from excavations may not be used as backfill. Subject to Engineer’s
approval.
1. Hardpan Layer: Drill 6-inch- (150-mm-) diameter holes into free-draining strata or to
a depth of 10 feet (3 m), whichever is less, and backfill with free-draining material.
E. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs.
A. Set balled and burlapped stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of root ball 1
inch (25 mm) above adjacent finish grades.
1. Remove burlap and wire baskets from tops of root balls and partially from sides, but
do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not
use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting
operation.
2. Place planting soil mix around root ball in layers, tamping to settle mix and eliminate
voids and air pockets. When pit is approximately one-half backfilled, water
thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water
is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of planting soil mix.
B. Set container-grown stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of root ball 1 inch
(25 mm) above adjacent finish grades.
1. Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant.
2. Place planting soil mix around root ball in layers, tamping to settle mix and eliminate
voids and air pockets. When pit is approximately one-half backfilled, water
thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water
is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of planting soil mix.
C. Set fabric bag-grown stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of root ball 1 inch
(25 mm) above adjacent finish grades.
1. Carefully remove root ball from fabric bag without damaging root ball or plant. Do
not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting
operation.
2. Place planting soil mix around root ball in layers, tamping to settle mix and eliminate
voids and air pockets. When pit is approximately one-half backfilled, water
thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water
is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of planting soil mix.
D. Set and support bare-root stock in center of pit or trench with root collar or trunk flare 1 inch
(25 mm) below adjacent finish grade. Spread roots without tangling or turning toward
surface, and carefully work backfill around roots by hand. Puddle with water until backfill
layers are completely saturated. Plumb before backfilling, and maintain plumb while
working backfill around roots and placing layers above roots. Tamp final layer of backfill.
Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break.
E. Organic Mulching: Apply 3-inch (75-mm) average thickness of organic mulch extending 12
inches (300 mm) beyond edge of planting pit or trench. Do not place mulch within 3 inches
(75 mm) of trunks or stems.
F. Wrap trees of 2-inch (50-mm) caliper and larger with trunk-wrap tape. Start at base of trunk
and spiral cover trunk to height of first branches. Overlap wrap, exposing half the width,
and securely attach without causing girdling. Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper
pruning, and insect infestation; take corrective measures required before wrapping.
B. Prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs according to standard horticultural practice. Prune
trees to retain required height and spread. Unless otherwise indicated by Architect, do not
cut tree leaders; remove only injured or dead branches from flowering trees. Prune shrubs
to retain natural character. Shrub sizes indicated are sizes after pruning.
A. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of 2- through 5-inch (50- through 125-mm) caliper.
Stake trees of less than 2-inch (50-mm) caliper only as required to prevent wind tip-out.
Use a minimum of 2 stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches (450 mm)
below bottom of backfilled excavation and to extend at least 72 inches (1830 mm) above
grade. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses. Support
trees with two strands of tie wire encased in hose sections at contact points with tree trunk.
Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. Use the number of stakes as follows:
1. Use 2 stakes for trees up to 12 feet (3.6 m) high and 2-1/2 inches (63 mm) or less in
caliper; 3 stakes for trees less than 14 feet (4.2 m) high and up to 4 inches (100 mm)
in caliper. Space stakes equally around trees.
B. Guying and Staking: Guy and stake trees exceeding 14 feet (4.2 m) in height and more
than 3 inches (75 mm) in caliper, unless otherwise indicated. Securely attach no fewer than
3 guys to stakes 30 inches (760 mm) long, driven to grade.
1. For trees more than 6 inches (150 mm) in caliper, anchor guys to pressure-
preservative-treated deadmen 8 inches (200 mm) in diameter and 48 inches (1200
mm) long buried at least 36 inches (900 mm) below grade. Provide turnbuckles for
each guy wire and tighten securely.
2. Attach flags to each guy wire, 30 inches (760 mm) above finish grade.
3. Paint turnbuckles with luminescent white paint.
3.8 PLANTERS
A. Planters: Place a layer of gravel at least 4 inches (100 mm) thick in bottom of planters,
cover with nonwoven fabric, and fill with planter soil mix. Place soil in lightly compacted
layers to an elevation of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) below top of planter, allowing natural
settlement.
1. Planter Soil Mix: One part topsoil, one part coarse sand, one part peat, and 3 lb (1.36
kg) of dolomitic limestone per cubic yard (cubic meter) of mix.
B. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots, and backfill with planting soil.
C. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around
plants to hold water.
D. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.
E. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery
from transplanting shock.
1. Organic Mulch: Apply 3-inch (75-mm) average thickness of organic mulch, and
finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch against plant stems.
2. Mineral Mulch: Apply 3-inch (75-mm) average thickness of mineral mulch, and
finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch against plant stems.
A. Wood Edgings: Install wood headers or edgings where indicated. Anchor with wood stakes
spaced up to 36 inches (900 mm) apart, driven at least 1 inch (25 mm) below top elevation
of header or edging. Use 2 galvanized nails per stake to fasten headers and edging; length
as needed to penetrate both members and provide 1/2-inch (13-mm) clinch at point. Predrill
stakes if needed to avoid splitting.
B. Steel Edging: Install steel edging where indicated according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Anchor with steel stakes spaced approximately 30 inches (760 mm) apart,
driven below top elevation of edging.
D. Plastic Edging: Install plastic edging where indicated according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Anchor with steel stakes spaced approximately 36 inches (900 mm) apart,
driven through upper base grooves or V-lip of edging.
A. Tree Grates: Set grate segments flush with adjoining surfaces as shown on Drawings. Shim
from supporting substrate with soil-resistant plastic. Maintain a 3-inch- (75-mm-) minimum
growth radius around base of tree; break away units of casting, if necessary, according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
A. During exterior planting, keep adjacent pavings and construction clean and work area in an
orderly condition.
B. Protect exterior plants from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other
contractors and trades, and others. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance
periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged exterior planting.
3.14 DISPOSAL
A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil,
trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics
of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant
adjustments.
F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects/engineers and owners, and
any other information required by Engineer.
G. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on
comprehensive testing of current materials:
H. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items
complies with requirements:
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand
from the same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture
from the same manufacturer.
E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding
Code--Reinforcing Steel."
F. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are
indicated:
G. Mockups: Before casting concrete that is exposed to view on surfaces of the completed
structure or building, cast a mockup for each exposed element, including slabs if applicable,
to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, color, tolerances, quality of materials
and standard of workmanship in the completed Work.
1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed
by Engineer.
2. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. In presence of Engineer, damage parts of exposed surfaces as selected by Engineer,
and demonstrate materials and techniques proposed for repairs to match adjacent
undamaged surfaces
4. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting cast-in-place concrete
elements exposed to view.
5. If Engineer determines that any mockup does not meet requirements, demolish and
remove from the site and cast another until the mockup is approved.
6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
1. Before submitting design mixes, review concrete mix design and examine procedures
for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity
directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixes.
c. Ready-mix concrete producer.
d. Concrete subcontractor.
A. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true,
and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of
joints.
E. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally
sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.
F. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 20 by 20 mm, unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 25 mm to the plane of the
exposed concrete surface.
2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 25 mm in diameter
in concrete surface.
3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive
dampproofing or waterproofing.
E. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into
flat sheets.
A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports
according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast
concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as
follows:
1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms,
use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.
B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars, ASTM A 615M, Grade 420. Cut bars true to length
with ends square and free of burrs.
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, gray color, of same type, brand, and source for
entire Project.
D. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, from the same source for entire Project, uniformly
graded, and as follows:
a. Material passing the 0.075-mm sieve must not, in any case, exceed 3 percent,
by weight, of the combined aggregate.
1. Non-potable water may be used when potable water is not available, provided its
impurities do not exceed any of the following values:
2.5 ADMIXTURES
A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-
soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other
admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride.
B. Synthetic Fiber: Fibrillated polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in
concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 15 to 40 mm long.
1. Carbon-Steel Fibers:
a. Bekaert Corporation.
b. Fibercon International.
c. Novocon International Inc.
2. Fibrillated Fibers:
3. Monofilament Fibers:
2.7 WATERSTOPS
A. Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage
of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.
B. Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of
fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.
1. Rubber Waterstops:
a. Fosroc.
b. Greenstreak.
c. Progress Unlimited Inc.
d. Sika Corporation.
e. Westec Barrier Technologies; Div. of Western Textile Products, Inc.
f. Williams Products, Inc.
2. PVC Waterstops:
a. Fosroc.
b. W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Div.
c. Greenstreak.
d. W. R. Meadows, Inc.
e. Paul Murphy Plastics Co.
f. Progress Unlimited Inc.
g. Sika Corporation.
h. Sternson Group.
i. Tamms Industries Co.; Div. of LaPorte Construction Chemicals North
America, Inc.
j. Vinylex Corporation.
k. Westec Barrier Technologies; Div. of Western Textile Products, Inc.
A. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C, of one of the following materials; or polyethylene
sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 0.25 mm thick:
E. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and
manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a 4.75-mm
sieve and 10 to 30 percent passing a 0.15-mm sieve; meeting deleterious substance limits of
ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,
weighing approximately 305 g/sq. m when dry.
D. Water: Potable.
1. Curing Materials:
a. Burke Chemicals.
b. ChemMasters.
c. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Dayton Superior Corporation.
e. Euclid Chemical Co.
f. Fosroc.
g. Kaufman Products, Inc.
h. Lambert Corporation.
i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
j. Master Builders Technologies.
k. W. R. Meadows, Inc.
l. Metalcrete Industries.
m. Richmond Screw Anchor Co.
n. Sika Corporation.
o. Symons Corporation.
p. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.
B. Epoxy Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a
Shore A hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.
C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene.
1. Type II, non-load bearing, for bonding freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.
2. Types I and II, non-load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to
hardened concrete.
3. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to
hardened concrete.
E. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.55-mm- thick galvanized steel sheet.
Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.
F. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, not less than 0.85 mm thick, with
bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of
concrete or debris.
A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory
trial mix or field test data bases, as follows:
B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix
designs for the laboratory trial mix basis.
D. Footings, Upstands, Parapets, Fascia Elements and slab on grade: Proportion normal-
weight concrete mix as follows:
E. Abutment Walls, Underpass Walls, Retaining Walls, Station Building Frame Members,
Suspended Sabs: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows:
F. Viaduct and Bridge Piers, Special Station Columns, Bearing Plinths: Proportion normal-
weight concrete mix as follows:
G. Prestressed Concrete Viaduct and Bridge Decks and Suspended Slabs: Proportion normal-
weight concrete mix as follows:
I. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50 for concrete required to have low
water permeability.
K. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45 for concrete subject to severe or very
severe sulfate or chloride exposure.
1. When air temperature is between 30 and 32 deg C, reduce mixing and delivery time
from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 32 deg C, reduce
mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to
ASTM C 94. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.
1. For mixer capacity of 0.75 cu. m or smaller, continue mixing at least one and one-
half minutes, but not more than five minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any
part of batch is released.
2. For mixer capacity larger than 0.75 cu. m, increase mixing time by 15 seconds for
each additional 0.75 cu. m.
3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating
Project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and
amount of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support
vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied,
until concrete structure can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
1. Class A, 4 mm.
2. Class B, 6 mm.
3. Class C, 10 mm.
4. Class D, 25 mm.
E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces.
Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood
inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support
screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of
formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely
braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at
inconspicuous locations.
J. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads
required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
K. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt,
and other debris just before placing concrete.
L. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks
and maintain proper alignment.
M. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, before placing reinforcement.
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work
that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
A. General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that
does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less
than 10 deg C for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be
damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are
maintained.
B. Leave formwork, for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, that supports
weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved the following:
C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply
new form-release agent.
D. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.
Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete
surfaces unless approved by Engineer.
A. Comply with ACI 318M, ACI 301, and recommendations in ACI 347R for design,
installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring.
C. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and
provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.
A. Vapor Retarder: Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643
and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Cover vapor retarder with fine-graded granular material,
moisten, and compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 mm or
minus 20 mm.
C. Granular Fill: Cover vapor retarder with granular fill, moisten, and compact with
mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 mm or minus 20 mm.
1. Place and compact a 15-mm- thick layer of fine-graded granular material over
granular fill.
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder
before placing concrete.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and
support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack
weld crossing reinforcing bars.
D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize
sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of
adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with
wire.
3.7 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Engineer.
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and
finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 3 mm Repeat grooving of contraction joints
after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 3-mm wide joints into concrete when
cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete
develops random contraction cracks.
1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished
concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 12 mm or more than 25 mm
below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants," are indicated.
3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length
is required, lace or clip sections together.
E. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at
joints where indicated.
3.8 WATERSTOPS
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded
items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement, unless
approved by Engineer.
C. Before placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of
ACI 301.
D. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be
placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a
section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit
concrete to avoid segregation.
E. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 600 mm and in a manner to
avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic, to
avoid cold joints.
2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the
vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 150 mm into
preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun
to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to
consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded
items without causing mix constituents to segregate.
F. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within
limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
G. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work
from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or
low temperatures.
1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 5 deg C, uniformly
heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of
not less than 10 deg C and not more than 27 deg C at point of placement.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place
concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie
holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections
exceeding ACI 347R limits for class of surface specified.
patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 3 mm in
height.
1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete
surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a
uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the
rubbing process.
2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of
thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one
and one-half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add
white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout
will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When
grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for
at least 36 hours.
3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part
portland cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and
water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of
dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding
surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float.
D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed
surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching
adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly
across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-
floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes.
1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to surfaces to receive concrete floor
topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, portland cement terrazzo,
and other bonded cementitious floor finishes.
C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is
small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low
spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth,
granular texture.
1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to
floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-
up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.
D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete
by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is
free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface
defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to
view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a
cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system
2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, measured within 24 hours according to
ASTM E 1155/E 1155M for a randomly trafficked floor surface:
a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and levelness, F(L) 20; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and levelness, F(L) 15.
b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and levelness, F(L) 25; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-
on-grade.
c. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and levelness, F(L) 20; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 15; for
suspended slabs.
d. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 45; and levelness, F(L) 35; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 30; and levelness, F(L) 24.
3. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an
unleveled freestanding 3-m long straightedge, resting on two high spots and placed
anywhere on the surface, does not exceed the following:
a. 5 mm.
E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second
troweling, to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be
installed by either thickset or thin-set method. Immediately after second troweling, and
when concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.
F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and
elsewhere as indicated.
G. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Before final floating, apply slip-resistive aggregate finish
where indicated and to concrete stair treads, platforms, and ramps. Apply according to
manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
H. Mineral Dry-Shake Floor Hardener Finish: After initial floating, apply mineral dry-shake
materials to surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated,
after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend
with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or
required to complete Work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still
green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and
terminations slightly rounded.
C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations
as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations,
complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.
D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated
items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel-
finish concrete surfaces.
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with
recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry,
or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 1 kg/sq. m x h before and during
finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing,
screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported
slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after
loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by one or
a combination of the following methods:
D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed
surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a
combination of the following methods:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with
the following materials:
a. Water.
A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor
treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and
complete surface repairs.
2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than seven days old.
3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet;
and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until
surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous.
B. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to
hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions.
A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six months. Do not fill joints until
construction traffic has permanently ceased.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact
faces of joint clean and dry.
C. Install semirigid epoxy joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 50 mm deep in
formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Engineer. Remove
and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Engineer's approval.
B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to
two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a 1.2-mm sieve, using only enough water for
handling and placing.
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and
stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more
than 13 mm in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 25 mm in depth.
Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and
brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching
mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or
cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and
standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding
color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match
before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly
higher than surrounding surface.
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and
structural performance as determined by Engineer.
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish
and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test
surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.25 mm wide or that
penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of
width, and other objectionable conditions.
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish
repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair
underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to
manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level
surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out
low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 6 mm to match adjacent floor
elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to
manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level
surface.
6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 25 mm or less in
diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas
with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 20 mm clearance
all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply
bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete
except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent
finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
7. Repair random cracks and single holes 25 mm or less in diameter with patching
mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust,
dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent.
Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and
finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least
72 hours.
E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Engineer's approval, using epoxy adhesive
and patching mortar.
F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Engineer's
approval.
B. Joints: Joints shall be designed and constructed in accordance with ACI 504R. Details and
positioning of joints, together with the materials to be used, shall be shown on the
Drawings.
C. Testing: In addition to the testing required in Paragraph 3.18.C, further tests to determine
the water tightness of the structure shall be performed based on the requirements of ACI
350.1-01. Testing shall be performed after completion of the structure, installation of fittings
and accessories, but before the application of internal waterproofing, and before any
backfilling behind the structure's walls has taken place. The following measures should be
considered:
1. All tank penetrations and outlets shall be securely sealed to prevent loss of water
from the tank during the test. Tank penetrations and outlets shall be monitored before
and during the test and shall be repaired from leakage (if any) prior to taking test
measurements.
2. Rate of initial filling of a new tank should not exceed 1.2m/hr (of the tank height).
Tank filling shall be continued until the water surface is at the design maximum water
level or 100 mm below any fixed overflow level, whichever is lower.
3. Test measurements shall be recorded at 24 hr intervals. The test period shall be at
least the theoretical time required to record a drop in the water surface of 10 mm,
which is, according to the acceptance criterion, ( ) days, rounded up, where
h is the water depth in (mm). Test period need not exceed five consecutive days.
4. The change in water volume in the structure shall be calculated and corrected, if
necessary for evaporation, precipitation and temperature. If loss exceeds the required
criterion, the structure shall be considered to have failed the test. The structure shall
also be considered to have failed the test if observed flowing or seeping from the
structure or if moisture can be transferred from exterior surface to a dry hand. The
structure shall not be considered to have failed the acceptance criterion if dampness
or wetness on top of a footing, in the absence of flowing water, is observed.
5. Acceptance criterion and performance of test shall be in accordance with the
requirements of ACI 350.1, standard criterion HST-050, which requires that the drop
in the water surface not exceed 0.05% in 24 hours.
6. Retesting shall be permitted if the first test fails to satisfy the criterion. A second test
may be performed immediately following the first test, provided that no visible
leakage is exhibited. If the tank fails the second test or if it was not tested
immediately after the first test failure, the tank shall only be retested after probable
areas of leakage have been detected and repaired. Tanks shall be retested until they
meet the required criterion.
A. Testing : Sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete
placement according to requirements specified in this Article.
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each
concrete mix exceeding 4 cu. m, but less than 20 cu. m, plus one set for each
additional 40 cu. m or fraction thereof.
2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 75 cu. m or
fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day.
3. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but
not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional
tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 5
deg C and below and when 27 deg C and above, and one test for each composite
sample.
5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one
test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each
concrete mix.
6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set
of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.
a. Cast and field cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each
composite sample.
D. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive
compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no
compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 3.4
MPa.
G. Additional Tests: Make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump,
compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Engineer.
Conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with
ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Engineer.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Exterior cast-in-place architectural concrete, smooth-formed finish.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 03 Section “Cast-in-place Concrete,” for concrete materials, mixes and
admixtures and other cast-in-place concrete materials required to achieve
architectural cast-in-place concrete, and; for reinforcement and formwork including
embedded items, shoring and re-shoring.
2. Division 10 Section “Exterior Screen Assemblies,” for anchoring requirements for
exterior screens attached to cast-in-place architectural concrete.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Architectural Concrete or Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete: Formed concrete that is
exposed to view on surfaces of completed structure or building and that requires special
concrete materials, formwork, placement, or finishes to obtain specified architectural
appearance for both load bearing and non-load bearing elements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Furnish ties with tapered tie cone spreaders that, when removed, will leave holes 19
mm in diameter on concrete surface.
2. Furnish internally disconnecting ties that will leave no metal closer than 38 mm, after
exposing aggregate, from the architectural concrete surface.
C. Form Release Agents: Commercially formulated, colorless form-release agents that will not
bond with, stain, discolor or adversely affect architectural concrete surfaces and will not
impair subsequent treatments of those surfaces.
1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
D. Form Sealers: Types that that will not stain, discolor or adversely affect architectural
concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of those surfaces.
E. Form Joint Tape: Compressible foam tape; pressure sensitive; AAMA 800,
"Specification 810.1, Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape"; minimum 6 mm thick.
F. Form Joint Sealant: Elastomeric sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type M or Type S,
Grade NS, that adheres to form joint substrates.
PART 1 - GENERAL:
1.1 SUMMARY:
A. Work included:
B. Related work:
C. Related documents:
1.2 DEFINITIONS:
A. For the purpose of this Contract, cable and tendon both refer to a bundle of prestressing
strands of the same type and size bundled together to be contained within a duct and
stressed collectively from the same anchorage.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
B. Prestressing System: The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval; full
details of the proposed prestressing system, suppliers of the basic materials and
components and shop drawings for main components. No system shall be incorporated in
the Works until approved by the Engineer.
C. Test Certificates: Submit test certificates for all materials to show compliance with the
specification.
D. Friction Losses: Submit calculation of friction losses in the jack and tendon extensions as
applicable to the ducts and prestressing jacks to be used in the works for the approval of the
Engineer who may order the contractor to carry out a friction test.
F. Testing Report: Submit a report on the testing of the strands and anchorages, if required,
prepared by an independent testing body/laboratory. The report shall include descriptions of
the test rigs, instrumentation, a comparison of test results and the requirements of the
specification, as well as conclusions.
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, and
standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
B. Prestressing operations shall be carried out only under the direction of an experienced and
competent supervisor (minimum experience of 10 years) and all personnel operating the
stressing equipment shall have been properly trained in its use. As an addition to the normal
precautions against accident for the whole of the work, special precautions shall be taken
when working with or near tendons, which have been tensioned or are being tensioned.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
A. All prestressing strands shall be seven-wire super stabilized low relaxation strands -
complying with BS 5896, or ASTM-A-416-90 Grade 270.
2.3 DUCTS:
A. Ducts for prestressing strands shall be either high density Polyethylene (PE) ducts, or
galvanized steel ducts and shall be clean and free from pitting. They shall be capable of
withstanding concrete pressures without excessive deformations and possess sufficient
rigidity to maintain the required profile between supports. They shall have sufficient bond
with concrete and tests shall be carried out to demonstrate that a force equal to 40 per cent
of the ultimate tensile force of the prestressing tendon can be transferred from the tendon,
through the duct to the surrounding concrete at a length of 750 mm.
2.4 ANCHORAGES:
A. Anchorages shall be epoxy coated cast steel anchorages and shall be tested in accordance
with BS 4447. No testing is required if certificates are provided. For each anchorage system
used in the works, the characteristic value of anchorage efficiency shall be not less that
90%. Proprietary anchorages shall be handled and used strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
2.5 GROUT:
A. The grout shall consist only of ordinary Portland cement and water. The water/cement ratio
shall be as low as possible consistent with the necessary workability. Admixtures may be
used with the written permission of the Engineer and shall be applied strictly in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions. Admixtures shall be free of chlorides and shall not
release hydrogen ions. Dry materials shall be measured by weight. Refer to section 03300
for compliance with the specifications for cement, admixtures and water for constituents of
grout.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL:
A. Prestressing tendons shall be clean and free from pitting, loose rust and loose scale at the
time of incorporation in the work.
B. Prestressing strand shall be in coils of sufficiently large diameter to ensure that the strand
pays off reasonably straight.
C. All cutting of strands shall be carried out using a high-speed abrasive cutting wheel or
friction saw at not less than one diameter from the anchor.
F. Tendons and duct former shall be accurately located and maintained in position both
vertically and horizontally as described in the Contract document. Unless otherwise
described in the Contract document the tolerance in the location of the centre line of duct
shall be within +/-5mm.
G. All strands stressed in one operation shall be taken, where possible, from the same parcel.
Each cable shall be tagged with its number from which the coil numbers of the steel used
can be identified. Cables shall not be kinked or twisted. Individual strands for which
extensions are to be measured shall be readily identifiable at each end of the member. No
strand that has become unraveled shall be used.
H. Anchor cones, blocks and plates shall be positioned and maintained during concreting so
that the centerline of the ducts passes axially through the anchorage assembly. They shall be
fixed in place securely such that the reinforcement is not in direct contact with any part of
the anchorage. Plastic spacers may be used to achieve this.
3.2 TENSIONING:
1. The means of attachment of the tendon to the jack shall be safe and secure;
2. Where two or more strands are stressed simultaneously, they shall be approximately
of equal length between anchorage points at the datum of load and extension
measurement;
3. The tensioning apparatus shall be such that a controlled total force is imposed
gradually and no dangerous secondary stresses are induced in the tendons, anchorage
or concrete;
4. The force in the tendons during tensioning shall be measured by direct-reading load
cells or obtained indirectly from gauges fitted in the hydraulic system to determine
the pressure in the jacks. Facilities shall be provided for the measurement of the
extension of the tendon and of any movement in the gripping devices. The load-
measuring device shall be calibrated to an accuracy within +/-2% and checked at
intervals to the approval of the Engineer; Elongation of the tendon shall be measured
to an accuracy within 2% or 2mm, whichever is the more accurate.
5. The tensioning equipment shall be calibrated before the tensioning operation and at
intervals approved by the Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall satisfy himself that the anchorage reinforcement provided on the
Contract drawings is sufficient to resist anchor block stresses and stresses in the anchorage
zone for the type of anchorages to be used in the Works.
C. The prestressing tendons shall be protected in their permanent positions from both
mechanical damage and corrosion.
D. Before tensioning, the Contractor shall demonstrate that all tendons are free to move in the
ducts unless the geometry of the ducts make this impracticable as agreed by the Engineer.
Tensioning shall be carried out in such a manner that the stress in the tendons increases at a
gradual and steady rate.
E. Unless otherwise described in the Contract, concrete shall not be stressed until it has
reached at least the age at which 2 test cubes taken from it attain the specified transfer
strength. The test cubes shall be made and tested as described in BS 1881. They shall be
cured in similar conditions to the concrete to which they relate, and in a manner approved
by the Engineer.
F. The Contractor shall cast sufficient cubes to demonstrate that the required strength of the
concrete at transfer has been reached.
G. The Contractor shall ensure that personnel carrying out the stressing are provided with
particulars of the required tendon loads, order of stressing and extensions. Allowance shall
be made during stressing for the friction in the jack and in the anchorage, although the
former is not necessary when using load cells.
H. Any allowance for draw-in of the tendon during anchoring shall be in accordance with the
Engineer's instructions.
I. Stressing shall continue until the required extension and tendon load are reached or are
approved by the Engineer.
J. The extension shall allow for any draw-in of the tendon occurring at the non-jacking end,
but measurement shall not commence until any slack in the tendon has been taken up.
K. Immediately after anchoring, the forces in the prestressing tendons shall not exceed 75% of
their characteristic strength. During stressing the value may exceed 75% of their
characteristic strength, with the approval of the Engineer, but shall not exceed 80%.
L. After the tendons have been anchored, the force exerted by the tensioning apparatus shall be
decreased gradually and steadily so as to avoid shock to the tendon or the anchorage. Full
records shall be kept of all tensioning operations, including the measured extensions,
pressure-gauge or load-cell readings, and the amount of draw-in at each anchorage. Copies
of these records shall be supplied to the Engineer within 24 hours of each tensioning
operation.
M. Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer tendons shall not be cut less than 3 days after
grouting.
N. If the measured extension differs by more than 5 percent from the estimated extension,
corrective action shall be taken as directed by the Engineer.
O. If the pull-in of the tendons at completion of anchoring is greater than that stipulated by the
Engineer, tensioning shall be carried out afresh.
P. If it is necessary to cut the tendons to enable the ducts to be grouted, this shall be delayed as
long as practicable up to the time of grouting. In all other cases, unless agreed otherwise by
the Engineer, the tendons shall not be cropped less than 3 days after grouting.
R. Anchorages block-outs shall be filled with dense concrete of low permeability of grade
similar to that of the prestressed element.
3.3 GROUTING:
B. Air vents with transparent standpipes shall be provided at crests in the duct profile and
elsewhere as specified. All ducts shall be thoroughly clean before grouting. Ducts formed
without metal sheathing shall be provided with effective drainage and, unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer, shall be flushed with water before grouting. All surplus water
shall be removed by compressed air injection. All anchorages shall be sealed or fitted with
grouting connections.
C. The mixing equipment shall produce a grout of homogeneous consistency and shall be
capable of providing a continuous supply to the injection equipment.
D. The injection equipment shall be capable of continuous operation with little variation of
pressure and shall include a system for re-circulating the grout while actual grouting is not
in progress. Compressed air shall not be used.
E. The equipment shall have a sensibly constant delivery pressure not exceeding 1 N/mm2. All
piping to the grout pump shall have a minimum of bends, valves and changes in diameter.
All baffles to the pump shall be fitted with 1.18 mm sieve strainers. All equipment,
especially piping, shall be thoroughly washed through with clean water after every series of
operations and at the end of use for each day. The interval between washings shall not
exceed 3 hours.
F. The equipment shall be capable of maintaining pressure on completely grouted ducts and
shall be fitted with a valve that can be locked off without loss of pressure in the duct.
G. During the grouting operation the Contractor shall provide adequate flushing-out plant to
facilitate complete removal of the grout in the event of breakdown of the grouting
equipment or other disruption before the grouting operation has been completed.
H. Water shall be added to the mixer first, then the cement. When these are thoroughly mixed,
the admixture if any, shall be added. Mixing shall continue until a uniform consistency is
obtained. The water/cement ratio of the mix shall not exceed 0.45 by weight unless
otherwise agreed by the Engineer. Mixing shall not be by hand.
I. Grouting of the ducts shall be carried out as soon as is practicable after stressing and the
Engineer's permission to commence has been obtained. Injection shall be continuous, and it
shall be slow enough to avoid producing segregation of the grout. The method of injecting
grout shall ensure complete filling of the duct and complete surrounding of the steel. Grout
shall be allowed to flow from the free end of the duct until its consistency is equivalent to
that of the grout injected. The opening shall then be firmly closed. Any vents shall be
closed in a similar manner one after another in direction of the flow. The injection tubes
shall then be sealed off under pressure until the grout has set.
J. The filled ducts shall not be subjected to shock or vibration within 1 day of grouting.
K. Not less than 2 days after grouting, the level of grouting, the injection and vent tubes shall
be inspected and made good as necessary.
L. The Contractor shall keep full records of grouting including the date each duct was grouted,
the proportion of the grout and any admixtures used, the pressure, details of any
interruptions and topping up required. Copies of these records shall be supplied to the
Engineer within 3 days of grouting.
M. Where required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide facilities and attendance for
the radiographic testing of ducts.
3.4 TESTS:
A. Strands:
1. A sample shall be taken from each reel of material on site in the presence of the
Engineer for strength test at an independent laboratory approved by the Engineer. A
reel shall only be accepted if both the breaking load and the 0.1% proof load of the
sample exceed the specified characteristic load given in BS 5896 Table 6.
2. A minimum of 3 samples shall be taken at random from the reels on site in the
presence of the Engineer for relaxation test at an independent laboratory approved by
the Engineer. The reels on site shall only be accepted if the relaxation values
determined by the tests are equal to or lower than the specified relaxation class of BS
5896.
2. These requirements shall be additional to any other requirements of the Contract.
B. testing OF GROUT:
Temperature (20 ± 2) °C
Humidity > 65% R.H.
The grout for the tests shall be made from the materials specified in and mixed in
accordance with the requirements of these Specifications. The temperature of the
freshly mixed grout is to be given in all test reports.
Principle – The test consists of measuring the time a plunger needs to drop through a
defined amount of grout in a tube.
Apparatus
The cylinder shall be filled with about 1.9 liters of glycerol up to approximately
250mm below the rim. After filling the immersion equipment the glycerol shall be
allowed to rest for about 1 hour. The plunger then shall be immersed to expel any air
bubbles from the glycerol, which may have been introduced during the filling of the
cylinder.
After one hour the plunger shall be positioned so that its stop on the tail rod lies on
the spacer placed at the top of the tube. The spacer shall then be pulled away to allow
the plunger to sink to the top of the tube. The immersion time (the time taken for the
plunger to sink shall be recorded in seconds to the nearest second.
The mean value of all measured immersion times shall be (34 ± 1)s. If the mean
value deviates for this figure, the weight of the plunger shall be increased where t
>35s or educed where t <33s. This is done by varying the quantity of the lead pellets
in the plunger. Repeated calibration procedures shall be delayed for at least 30
minutes to ensure expulsion of any air bubbles that may be have been introduced
during a preceding calibration procedure.
Test Procedure
Directly before the test, the inside of the tube and the plunger shall be slightly wetted.
Procedure – The cylinder shall be filled with approximately 1.9 litter of grout up to
approximately 260mm below the rim, so that on introduction the plunger is fully
immersed when its stop on the tail rod lies on the spacer placed at the top of the tube.
The spacer should be pulled away to allow the plunger to sink to the stop on the tube.
Thereafter the plunger should be raised back to its initial position, the spacer inserted
and again pulled away. The immersion time shall be measured, i.e. the time it takes
for the plunger to sink to the point where its tail stop touches on top of the tube. The
immersion times of the grout shall be measured immediately after the mixing process
and after a further 30 minutes. For the latter test, unused grout from the same mix as
that used for the former immersion test shall be used. The grout is to be kept in
motion while carrying out all tests. Each test shall be carried out three times in
succession with the same filling.
Reporting the Results – the result shall be reported as the average of the immersion
times to the nearest second of the second and third immersion, i.e. ignoring the first
immersion time.
Test Procedure
Preparation – The cone shall be mounted with its axis vertical and its largest diameter
uppermost. The sieving medium shall be fixed at the position indicated in figure 2.
During the test the cone shall be prevented from vibrating the container under the
cone outlet. All surfaces of the cone shall be clean and slightly moistened. Close the
lower cone orifice.
Procedure – Pour 1.5 liters of the grout through the sieving medium into the cone
sufficiently slowly to prevent the build-up of air in the grout in the cone. Open the
lower cone orifice and at the same time, start the stopwatch. Measure the time taken
to the nearest 0.5s to fill the container. The presence of lumps on the sieving medium
shall be reported. Two tests shall be carried out, the second 30 minutes thereafter or
alternatively at the end of the grouting period.
Reporting of Results – Report the time taken to the nearest 0.5s. Report also the
presence of lumps.
4. Bleeding Tests
Principle – The test consists in measuring the quantity of water remaining on the
surface of the grout, which has been allowed to stand protected from evaporation.
Procedure
Preparation – Place the cylinder on a surface free from shocks or vibration. The grout
used may be from the same batch as that used for the fluidity test.
Procedure for 25mm diameter cylinder - Pour 95ml to 100ml of grout into the
cylinder. Note the precise level of the grout (v) ignoring the meniscus. After 3 hours,
measure the quantity of water on top of the grout (vl). Taking appropriate measures
to prevent evaporation. The test is carried out on one sample of grout.
Procedure for 50mm diameter cylinder - Pour grout into the cylinder to a height of
approximately 150mm. Note the height to the top of the grout (h) ignoring the
meniscus. After 3 hours, measure the height of water on top of the grout (hl) taking
appropriate measures to prevent evaporation. The test is carried out on one sample of
grout.
vl is the volume of water on the surface of the grout after 3 hours in ml)
hl is the height of water on the surface of the grout after 3 hours (in ml)
Cylinder Method
Can Method
Apparatus
a) Three cans, 120mm high and approximately 100mm in diameter, with lids
capable of preventing the loss of moisture.
b) Measuring rod or sliding callipers
c) Plates
• Stop plate for placing on the can with a diameter of 120mm (see figure
3)
• Stop plate for placing on the grout with a diameter of 96mm (see
figure 4)
Procedure – Place the cans on a surface free of vibration and heat radiation and store
for 24 hours. Immediately after mixing pour the grout into each can using the filling
gauge, to a depth of 100mm. The measurement of the distance form the top edge of
the can to the top of the grout is to be taken:
Reporting of Results – The difference of the average values between first and second
measurement(s) in mm corresponds at 100mm grout level to the volume change in
percent and is reported as the percentage change in volume. Report the percentage
change in volume as the average of the three containers to the nearest 0.1%. Report
increase of volume as (+) and decrease as (-).
Apparatus
Procedure
Molding of the Test Specimens – File moulds and accessories shall be prepared and
the specimens made in accordance with BS EN 196-1, with the exception noted
below.
Each mould (fitted with a hopper) shall be filled with the prepared grout. As an
exception to the procedure in B.S. EN 196-1 and in view of the liquidity of the grout
the test specimens shall not be subjected to any vibration or shock so as to prevent
rapid deterioration of the grout (loss of grout, drying out, bleeding or sedimentation).
Remove the hopper gently. Immediately strike off the excess grout with the metal
straight edge held almost vertically and moved slowly, with a transverse sawing
motion once in each direction. Smooth the surface of the specimens using the same
straight edge held almost flat.
Curing of Test Specimens – The curing of test specimens shall be carried out in
accordance with BS EN 196-1, until they are tested.
Compression Test – The compression tests shall be carried out in accordance with BS
EN 196-1. The compression strength shall be measured on six test specimens from
three prisms broken in flexure.
Reporting of Results – The report shall provide all the results of the compression
tests, in Mpa. The value obtained for each test shall be the mean of the individual
results.
Principle – The compressive strength of grout in this test is determined on the three
cylinders used in the volume change test given in Test 5.
Apparatus
Procedure
After measuring the volume change (see 5) the three cylinders shall be stored in the
air conditioning cabinet at (20 ± 1) °C until they are to be prepared for test.
Immediately prior to test the specimens shall be carefully demolded.
Each specimen is prepared for test by sawing through the cylinder near the upper
surface and then grinding both circular surfaces of the cylinder until the disc to be
loaded in the test has a thickness of 80mm.
Each specimen shall then be placed in the compression test machine and loaded, at a
uniform rate of 0.5 Mpa/s, on its ends until the maximum load (Fc) is reached.
Rc = Fc / A
Where
Fc is the failure load
And shall be measured on three specimens, the mean value of which shall be reported
as the compressive strength.
7. Frequency of Testing – The testing of the grout made from certified or otherwise
quality assured materials shall be carried out prior to the start of grouting operations
and at the following minimum of testing in the course of grouting.
Bleeding: 2 tests per day. One sample is to be taken at the mixer and one sample at
the duct outlet when the grout there has a satisfactory fluidity value.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
B. Design Mixes: For each stamped concrete topping mix. Include alternative mix designs
when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other cir-
cumstances warrant adjustments.
C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on compre-
hensive testing of current materials:
D. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following ma-
terials complies with requirements:
E. Prepare shop drawings showing proposed patterns and colours indicating embeded ser-
vices, utilities and proposed joints.
G. Installer Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out suc-
cessfully by the installer with the same product endorsed by the manufacturer’s repre-
sentative.
1.4 DEFINITION
A. Topping: topping means a layer of cement-sand with or without coarse aggregate or other
material laid on the structural floor or roof to achieve correct level and not receive any
further finish material
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this Sec-
tion with minimum three years documented experience and that is approved, authorized,
or licensed by the product manufacturer to install his product and that is eligible to re-
ceive manufacturer's warranty. Include project names and addresses, names and addresses
of Engineers and Employers, and other information specified
D. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform ma-
terial evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.
E. Mockups: Place concrete floor topping mockups to demonstrate typical joints, surface
finish, bonding, texture, tolerances, and standard of workmanship.
1. Cast mockups approximately 10 sq. m in the location indicated or, if not indicated,
as directed by Engineer.
2. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting construction.
4. If Engineer determines that mockups do not meet requirements, demolish and
remove them from the site and cast others until mockups are approved.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed Work.
6. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time
of Substantial Completion.
A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing
manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage, mixing with other
components, and application.
1. Place concrete floor topping only when ambient temperature and temperature of
base slabs are between 10 and 30 deg C.
B. Close areas to traffic during topping application and, after application, for time period
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMS
1. Use flexible or curved forms that will provide uniform curvature for curves of a
radius of 30.5 m or less.
B. Forms for Textured Finish Concrete: Units of face design, size, arrangement, and confi-
guration indicated. Provide solid backing and form supports to ensure stability of textured
form liners.
C. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond
with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treat-
ments of concrete surfaces.
1. Fine aggregate, consisting of sand or crushed stone screenings, clean, hard, free of
deleterious matter. Grade by weight to conform to ACI 302 and to pass sieves as
follows:
2. Coarse aggregate, consisting of gravel or crushed stone, clean, hard, free of delete-
rious matter. Grade by weight to pass sieves as follows:
D. Steel Reinforcement
2.3 ADMIXTURES
A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent wa-
ter-soluble chloride ions by mass of cement and to be compatible with other admixtures.
Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,
weighing approximately 305 g/sq. m when dry.
D. Water: Potable.
A. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a
Type A Shore durometer hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.
E. Water: Potable.
G. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type V, two-component epoxy resin, capable
of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements.
H. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene.
A. Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301, for each type
and strength of normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field
test data bases.
B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix de-
signs for the laboratory trial mix basis.
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): submit mix for approval to give a 28 day com-
pressive strength of not less than 20 MPa. Minimum cement sand ratio should be
not less than 1 : 4 by volume.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.51.
3. Maximum Slump: 125 mm.
2.8 MIXING
A. Bonding Slurry: Mix 1 part portland cement and 2 parts sand with water and an acrylic-
bonding agent according to manufacturer's written instructions to a thick paint
consistency.
B. Floor Topping: Mix concrete floor topping materials and water in appropriate drum-type
batch machine mixer or truck mixer according to manufacturer's written instructions and
as per division 3 section “Cast In Place Concrete”.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Verify that base slabs are visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by
the plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
C. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Concrete: Remove existing surface treatments and deteriorated and unsound
concrete. Mechanically abrade base slabs to produce a heavily scarified surface profile
with an amplitude of 6 mm.
1. Prepare and clean existing base slabs according to concrete floor topping
manufacturer's written instructions. Fill voids, cracks, and cavities in base slabs.
2. Mechanically remove contaminants from existing concrete that might impair bond
of floor topping.
3. Saw cut contraction and construction joints in existing concrete to a depth of 13
mm and fill with semirigid joint filler.
4. To both sides of joint edges and at perimeter of existing base slab mechanically
remove a 100-mm- wide and 0- to 25-mm- deep, tapered wedge of concrete and
retexture surface .
B. Install joint-filler strips where topping abuts vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals,
foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.
1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with
topping surface, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Terminate full-width, joint-filler strips 13 mm below topping surface where joint
sealants, specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated.
3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one
length is required, lace or clip sections together.
A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pave-
ment to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress
of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after placing concrete.
B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from
concrete without damage.
A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating reinforcement and
with recommendations in CRSI's "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting
reinforcement.
B. Comply with division 3 section “ Cast In Place Concrete for placing steel reinforcement
3.5 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface
plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless other-
wise indicated.
B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and
at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour, unless
pavement terminates at isolation joints.
C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete
curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where in-
dicated.
D. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at
joints where indicated.
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and fi-
nishing each edge of joint with groover tool to the following radius. Repeat groov-
ing of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks
on concrete surfaces.
F. Edging: Tool edges of pavement and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edg-
ing tool to the following radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes.
Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.
C. Deferred Floor Topping: Within 72 hours of placing base slabs, mix and scrub bonding
slurry into dampened concrete to a thickness of 1.6 to 3 mm, without puddling. Place
floor topping while slurry is still tacky.
E. Place concrete floor topping continuously in a single layer, tamping and consolidating to
achieve tight contact with bonding surface. Do not permit cold joints or seams to develop
within pour strip.
1. Hard Trowel Finish: After floating surface, apply first trowel finish and
consolidate concrete floor topping by power-driven trowel without allowing
blisters to develop. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is
smooth and uniform in texture.
G. Construction Joints: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface
plane of concrete floor topping, at locations indicated or as approved by Engineer.
1. Coat face of construction joint with epoxy adhesive at locations where concrete
floor topping is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete floor
topping.
H. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints with power saws equipped
with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 3-mm- wide joints into
concrete floor topping when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage
surface and before random contraction cracks develop.
1. Form joints in concrete floor topping over contraction joints in base slabs, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Construct contraction joints for a combined depth equal to topping thickness and
not less than one-fourth of base-slab thickness.
3. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to one-half of concrete floor topping
thickness, but not less than 13 mm deep.
A. General: Wetting concrete surfaces during screeding, initial floating, or finishing opera-
tions is prohibited.
B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleedwater sheen has disap-
peared and the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Finish
surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Immediately refloat sur-
face to uniform granular texture.
C. Colored Dry-Shake Hardener Finish: After initial floating, apply colored dry-shake ma-
terial to plastic concrete surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and as
follows:
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete floor topping from premature drying and
excessive cold or hot temperatures.
C. Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete floor topping. Cure by one or a
combination of the following methods, according to concrete floor topping
manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than 7 days with
water or absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover
topping surfaces and edges with 300-mm lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-
retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides
and ends lapped at least 300 mm, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure
for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing
period using cover material and waterproof tape.
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in two coats in continuous operations by
power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat
areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application.
Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
A. Prepare and clean contraction joints and install semirigid joint filler, according to
manufacturer's written instructions, once topping has fully cured.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave
contact faces of joint clean and dry.
C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth of contraction joints. Overfill joint and trim
semirigid joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
3.10 REPAIRS
A. Defective Topping: Repair and patch defective concrete floor topping areas, including
areas that have not bonded to concrete substrate.
C. Remove and replace applications of concrete floor topping where test results indicate that
it does not comply with specified requirements.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Screed: a layer of cement-sand, or concrete mix, and other materials, with or without rein-
forcement, laid on the structural floor or roof slab to achieve correct level and receive
another finish material.
1.3 SUMMARY
1. Standard aggregate concrete floor screed underlayment for interior finish flooring.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this Section
with minimum three years documented experience and that is approved, authorized, or li-
censed by the product manufacturer to install his product. Include project names and ad-
dresses, names and addresses of Engineers and Employers, and other information specified
A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manu-
facturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage, mixing with other compo-
nents, and application.
B. Close areas to traffic during screed application and for appropriate time period after applica-
tion as recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1.8 COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Site-Prepared Mix: Cement-sand mix with admixtures applied over structural deck to re-
ceive another finishing material.
B. Premix Mix: Factory prepared mix with fibrous reinforcement and admixtures applied over
structural deck to receive another finishing material.
1. Fine aggregate, consisting of sand or crushed stone screenings, clean, hard, free of de-
leterious matter. Grade by weight to pass sieves as follows:
2. Coarse aggregate, consisting of gravel or crushed stone, clean, hard, free of delete-
rious matter. Grade by weight to pass sieves as follows:
A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weigh-
ing approximately 305 g/sq. m when dry.
B. Water: Potable.
A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of lightweight concrete screed by either la-
boratory trial batch or field-test data methods. For trial batch method, use a qualified inde-
pendent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
B. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to the maximum percentage by weight of cement or ce-
mentitious material permitted by ACI 301.
A. Epoxy Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a
Shore A hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.
B. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork
or self-expanding cork.
C. Water: Potable.
D. Acrylic-Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or sty-
rene butadiene.
E. Admixtures: admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 % water-
soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and compatible with other admixture
and cementitious materials. Do not admixtures containing calcium chloride.
F. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, Type V, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid
curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements.
2.5 MIXING
A. Bonding Slurry: Mix 1 part portland cement and 2 parts sand with water and an acrylic-
bonding agent according to manufacturer's written instructions to a thick paint consistency.
B. Screed Mix: Design mix, with or without admixture, to produce concrete floor topping ma-
terial with the following characteristics:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance of screed.
Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Verify that base slabs meet finish and surface profile requirements in Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Concrete: Remove existing surface treatments and deteriorated and unsound con-
crete. Mechanically abrade base slabs to produce a heavily scarified surface profile with an
amplitude of 6 mm.
1. Prepare and clean existing base slabs according to topping manufacturer's written in-
structions. Fill voids, cracks, and cavities in base slabs.
2. Mechanically remove contaminants from existing concrete that might impair bond of
topping.
3. Saw cut existing contraction and construction joints to a depth of 13 mm and fill with
epoxy joint filler.
B. Install joint-filler strips where screed abuts vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals,
foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.
1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with screed
surface, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips 13 mm below screed surface where joint sea-
lants, specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated.
3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length
is required, lace or clip sections together.
B. Fibrous Reinforcement: For reinforced screeds, apply fibrous reinforcing as per manufactur-
er’s written instructions.
C. Deferred Screed: Within 72 hours of placing base slabs, mix and scrub bonding slurry into
dampened concrete to a thickness of 1.5 to 3 mm, without puddling. Place screed while
slurry is still tacky.
D. Place screed continuously in a single layer, tamping and consolidating to achieve tight con-
tact with bonding surface. Do not permit cold joints or seams to develop within pour strip.
E. Finishing: Consolidate surface with hand float as soon as screed can support equipment and
operator. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and re-
straightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
1. Hard Trowel Finish: After floating surface, apply first trowel finish and consolidate
screed by power-driven trowel so no blisters develop. Continue troweling passes and
restraighten until surface is smooth and uniform in texture.
a. Finish surfaces to specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and levelness,
F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and levelness,
F(L) 15, measured within 24 hours according to ASTM E 1155
(ASTM E 1155M) for a randomly trafficked floor surface.
b. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between screed surface and an
unleveled freestanding 3-m- long straightedge, resting on two high spots and
placed anywhere on the surface, does not exceed 6.4 mm.
F. Construction Joints: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of
screed, at locations indicated or as approved by Engineer.
1. Coat face of construction joint with epoxy adhesive at locations where screed is
placed against hardened or partially hardened screed.
G. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints with power saws equipped with
shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 3-mm- wide joints into concrete when
cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before screed develops
random contraction cracks.
1. Form joints in screed over contraction joints in base slabs, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to one-half of screed thickness, but not
less than 13 mm deep.
A. General: Protect freshly placed screed from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures.
B. Begin curing immediately after finishing screed. Cure by one or a combination of the fol-
lowing methods, according to screed manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with
water or absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover screed
surfaces and edges with 300-mm lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
A. Prepare and clean contraction joints and install epoxy joint filler, according to manufactur-
er's written instructions, once screed has fully cured.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact
faces of joint clean and dry.
C. Install epoxy joint filler full depth of contraction joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler
flush with top of joint after hardening.
3.6 REPAIRS
A. Defective Screed: Repair and patch defective screed areas, including areas that have not
bonded to concrete substrate.
A. Sample Sets: At point of placement, testing and inspecting agency shall take a set of 3
molded-cube samples from the screed mix for the first 90 sq. m plus 1 set of samples for
each subsequent 460 sq. m of screed, or fraction thereof, but not less than 6 samples for each
day's placement. Samples shall be tested according to ASTM C 109M for compliance with
compressive strength requirements.
A. Protect screeds from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use
protective methods and materials approved by Engineer, including temporary covering.
B. Clean screeds not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections intended to in-
stall final finishes.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Provide unit masonry that develops the net-area compressive strengths (f'm) at 28 days indi-
cated in part 2. Determine compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms ac-
cording to ASTM C 1314.
1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to
ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.
2. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention,
and ASTM C 91 for air content.
3. Prism Test: For each type of construction required, according to ASTM C 1314.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product
specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.
2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.
Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show
elevations of reinforced walls.
3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special
applications.
1. Pre-faced CMUs.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following showing the full range of exposed colors, tex-
tures, and dimensions:
1. Exposed CMUs.
2. Pre-faced CMUs.
3. Accessories embedded in the masonry.
E. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with
manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers,
source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix
proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates.
1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup
constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents, unless such
deviations are specifically brought to the attention of the Engineer and approved in
writing.
G. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test re-
sults of the following for compliance with requirements indicated:
I. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items
complies with requirements:
8. Each cement product required for mortar and grout, including name of manufacturer,
brand, type, and weight slips at time of delivery.
9. Each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type. Include statement of net-
area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and net-area compressive
strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
10. Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars.
11. Each type and size of anchor, tie, and metal accessory.
J. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and
proportions of ingredients.
1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification.
Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for
water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.
2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply
with compressive strength requirement.
B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture
and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from sin-
gle source from a single manufacturer for each product required.
C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from singlemanufacturer for each cementitious com-
ponent and from one source or producer for each aggregate.
D. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by
requirements in the Contract Documents.
1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each concrete masonry unit indicated, per
ASTM C 140.
2. Prism Test: For each type of wall construction indicated, per ASTM C 1314.
3. Mortar Test: For mortar properties per ASTM C 270.
G. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and
to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality
Requirements" for mockups.
1. Build sample panels for typical exterior and interior walls in sizes approximately
1500 mm long by 1200 mm high by full thickness.
2. Clean exposed faces of panels with masonry cleaner indicated.
3. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.
4. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units;
relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints;
aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities
specifically approved by Engineer in writing.
a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless such deviations are
specifically approved by Engineer in writing.
H. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockups for each type of unit masonry construction in sizes approximately
2400 mm long by 1800 mm high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes
and accessories.
5. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
1.8 WARRANTIES
A. Unit Masonry Warranty: Provide warranty in which Manufacturer and Contractor are jointly
and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace, without limitations, all or any part
of the unit masonry which fails or becomes defective in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period. Failure includes, but is not limited to cracking, failure of bonding
to concrete structure, and failure to support safely the required loads.
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an en-
closed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If
units become wet, do not install until they are dry.
1. Protect Type I concrete masonry units from moisture absorption so that, at the time of
installation, the moisture content is not more than the maximum allowed at the time
of delivery.
B. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and
emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on
elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with wea-
therproof cover.
C. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of
dirt and oil.
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 600 mm down both sides and hold cover securely in
place.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at
least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns.
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be
left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact
with such masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by coverings
spread on ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted
and integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity
conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial
shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of
units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do
not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.
B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for
fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by
equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers,
bonding, and other special conditions.
2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners, unless indicated as bullnose.
B. CMU units designations: Currently, six ASTM standards apply to units intended primarily
for construction of concrete masonry walls, beams, columns, or specialty applications:
a. Normal-weight units: more than 125 lb/cu. ft. (2002 kg/cu. m):
Thickness w 15 mm plaster
Hollow kg/m2 bare one side both sides
(PSF)
100 mm 90 (18.5) 43 44 45
150 mm 135 45 46 47
(27.75)
200 mm 180 (37) 47 48 49
250 mm 225 48 49 50
(46.25)
300 mm 270 (55.5) 50 51 52
Thickness w 15 mm plaster
Solid kg/m2 bare one side both sides
(PSF)
100 mm 200 47 48 48
(41.50)
150 mm 300 51 52 53
(62.25)
200 mm 400 (83) 55 56 57
250 mm 500 58 59 60
(103.75)
300 mm 600 62 63 64
(124.5)
6. Thermal conductivity for Lightweight units, K: less than 0.29 Watt/m2 deg K
7. Size (Width): Manufactured to the following dimensions:
8. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Where units are to be left exposed, provide color and texture matching the
range represented by Engineer's sample.
9. Where masonry units are to receive a direct application of plaster, provide textured-
face units made with gap-graded aggregates.
D. Insulated Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 129 (non-load bearing) and as follows:
a. CBIS/Korfil www.cbisinc.com
b. Thermo Block; Emirates Concrete Products (Emcon)
http://www.emconblocks.com
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color in-
dicated.
1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand
or crushed stone.
2. For joints less than 6 mm thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the
1.18-mm sieve.
F. Pre-blended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a pre-blended
mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend in-
gredients before delivering to Project site. Comply with ASTM C 270 Property Specifica-
tion as specified in other Part 2 Articles.
G. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270 Property Specification as specified in
other Part 2 Articles.
H. Water: Potable.
2.4 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M,
(Grade 420).
C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with
single pair of side rods.
A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that
comply with the following unless otherwise indicated.
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/
A 153M, Class B-2 coating.
2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 316.
3. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, Z180 zinc
coating.
4. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial
Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.
5. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 316.
6. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
7. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM a 666, Type 304.
B. Corrugated Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than 22 mm wide with corrugations having a
wavelength of 7.6 to 12.7 mm and an amplitude of 1.5 to 2.5 mm made from 1.52-mm-
thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.
C. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway
through veneer but with at least 16-mm cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent
90 degrees and extend 50 mm parallel to face of veneer.
D. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 100 mm wide.
1. Z-shaped ties with ends bent 90 degrees to provide hooks not less than 50 mm long
may be used for masonry constructed from solid units.
2. Where wythes do not align, use adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections
having a maximum adjustment of 32 mm.
3. Wire: Fabricate from 6.35-mm- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.
E. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow
vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to
plane of wall.
1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 6.35-mm- diameter, hot-dip
galvanized steel wire.
2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 25 mm of masonry
face, made from 6.35-mm- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.
F. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or
horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of
wall.
1. Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and
attached to tie section; formed from 2.66-mm- thick, steel sheet, galvanized after
fabrication.
2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 25 mm of masonry
face, made from 6.35-mm- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.
3. Corrugated Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than 22 mm wide with corrugations
having a wavelength of 7.6 to 12.7 mm and an amplitude of 1.5 to 2.5 mm made from
2.66-mm- thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication with dovetail tabs for
inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and sized to extend to within 25 mm of
masonry face.
G. Partition Top anchors: 2.66-mm- thick metal plate with 9.5-mm- diameter metal rod 152
mm long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to
move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
H. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 38 mm wide by 6.35 mm thick by 610 mm long,
with ends turned up 51 mm or with cross pins unless otherwise indicated.
I. Where indicated and directed by Engineer, provide Stainless-Steel for ties and anchors.
B. Dovetail Slots in Concrete: Furnish dovetail slots with filler strips, of slot size indicated,
fabricated from 0.86-mm, galvanized steel sheet.
C. Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM F 568M, Property
Class 4.6; with ASTM A 563M hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip
galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.
1. Load Capacity: Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the
load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when
installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted
by a qualified independent testing agency.
2. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5 unless otherwise indicated.
3. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group
A4 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 738M, and nuts, ASTM F 836M.
A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual" and as follows:
D. Single-Wythe CMU Flashing System: System of CMU cell flashing pans and interlocking
CMU web covers made from high-density polyethylene incorporating chemical stabilizers
that prevent UV degradation. Cell flashing pans have integral weep spouts that are designed
to be built into mortar bed joints and weep collected moisture to the exterior of CMU walls
and that extend into the cell to prevent clogging with mortar.
1. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type
recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.
2. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing urethane sealant; of type,
grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and
trim and remain watertight.
F. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard
products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to
each other and to substrates.
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene,
urethane or PVC.
C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,
Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
D. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning ma-
sonry unit cells and hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 3.77-mm
steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars
indicated.
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, re-
tarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Pre-blended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a pre-blended
mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend in-
gredients before delivering to Project site. Comply with ASTM C 270 Property Specifica-
tion:
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270 Property Specification. For job-
mixed mortars, minimum properties shall be as follows:
Aggregate Ratio (Measured in Damp, Loose Conditions): Not less than 2 1⁄4 and not more
than 3 1⁄2 the sum of the separate volumes of cementitious materials
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that
will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of
grout spaces and pour height.
2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for
specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 14 MPa.
3. Provide grout with a slump of 203 to 279 mm as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions
detrimental to performance of work.
2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify
actual locations of piping connections.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A. Thickness: Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of
widths indicated.
B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.
C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.
D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous
pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean,
sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is
specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and
textures.
F. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing
masonry.
3.3 TOLERANCES
1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 12 mm or
minus 6 mm.
2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or
minus 12 mm.
3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than
plus or minus 6 mm in a story height or 12 mm total.
1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 6
mm in 3 m, or 12 mm maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not
vary from level by more than 3 mm in 3 m, 6 mm in 6 m, or 12 mm maximum.
3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 6 mm in 3 m, 9
mm in 6 m, or 12 mm maximum.
4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 3 mm in 3 m, 6
mm in 6 m, or 12 mm maximum.
5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 6 mm in 3 m, 9 mm in 6
m, or 12 mm maximum.
6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 6
mm in 3 m, or 12 mm maximum.
7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by
more than 1.5 mm except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances
specified for warpage of units.
C. Joints:
1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 3
mm, with a maximum thickness limited to 12 mm.
2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by
more than 3 mm.
3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 9
mm or minus 6 mm.
4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or
minus 3 mm. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by
more than 3 mm.
5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight
line by more than 1.5 mm from one masonry unit to the next.
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and
offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where
possible, at other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in
running bond unless otherwise indicated; do not use units with less than nominal 100-mm
horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not
less than 50 mm. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use
units with less than nominal 100-mm horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those
in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to
receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before
laying fresh masonry.
E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other
Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.
G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of
metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 600 mm under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts,
and similar items unless otherwise indicated.
I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or
roof structure above unless otherwise indicated.
1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure
above.
2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout
cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout
to provide 13-mm clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space
anchors 1200 mm o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
3. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile,
slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above
approaches final position.
4. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure
above to comply with Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."
1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed
joints.
2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on
footings.
4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course
on footings where cells are not grouted.
B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with
sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or
slush head joints.
C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness unless otherwise indicated.
D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other
than paint) unless otherwise indicated.
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of
16 mm on exterior side of walls, 13 mm elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 150
mm.
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.
E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns,
offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.
A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structural
steel or concrete to comply with the following:
1. Provide an open space not less than 25 mm wide between masonry and structural
steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and
other rigid materials.
2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 610 mm o.c. vertically and 915 mm
o.c. horizontally.
A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry
progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision
to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.
B. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods:
1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of control
joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for
application of sealant.
2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at
joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of
sealant.
4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit
masonry is complete for application of sealant.
3.9 LINTELS
A. Provide concrete lintels where shown and where openings of more than 305 mm for brick-
size units and 610 mm for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other
supporting lintels.
3.10 FLASHING
A. General: Install embedded flashing in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other
obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.
1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could
puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing
on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal
penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing
manufacturer.
2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 150 mm into masonry at
each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 150 mm at ends and turn up not less
than 50 mm to form end dams.
3. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 38
mm or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric
sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for
application indicated.
4. Install metal drip edges with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed
edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with
requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for application indicated.
5. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is
completed.
C. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to
comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges
located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face
of wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at
CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell.
D. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to
be built into masonry.
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support
reinforced masonry elements during construction.
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained
enough strength to resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for
grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 1520 mm.
A. Testing and Inspecting: Engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and
prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to
perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified
requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-
prepared mortar.
2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of
grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.
D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 464 sq. m of wall area or portion thereof.
E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for
compressive strength.
F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according
to ASTM C 780.
G. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C 1314 at 7 days
and at 28 days.
3.13 PARGING
A. Parge exterior faces of below-grade masonry walls, where indicated, in 2 uniform coats to a
total thickness of 19 mm. Dampen wall before applying first coat and scarify first coat to
ensure full bond to subsequent coat.
B. Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface with a maximum surface
variation of 3 mm per 300 mm. Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom.
C. Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured.
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units;
install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent
construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application,
where indicated.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as
follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape
hoes or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain Engineer's approval of sample cleaning before
proceeding with cleaning of masonry.
3. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A
applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.
B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-
contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with
fill material as fill is placed.
C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as
described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include glass block , cementitious
materials, , waterproofing admixtures for mortar, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for glass unit masonry, including
vertical and horizontal coursing, anchors, reinforcement, and expansion strips.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
their preparation.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's actual glass-block units and joint materials
involving color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: Panels consisting of four full-size glass-block units with mortar
joints.
1. Provide Samples for each form, pattern, and color of glass block and color of joint
material indicated or selected by Engineer.
A. Source Limitations for Glass Block: Obtain each type and pattern of glass block through
one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Source Limitations for Accessory Materials: Obtain each cementitious material, admixture
and accessory component through one source from a single manufacturer and each
aggregate from one source or producer.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of typical exterior and interior panel, 1200 by 1200 mm in size.
2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
A. Store glass block in unopened cartons on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry
location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with
waterproof sheeting, securely tied.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do
not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D. Store accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and
oil.
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation of glass unit masonry assemblies only when
ambient and material temperatures are 5 deg C or higher.
A. Sequence and coordinate completion of glass unit masonry assemblies so sealants can be
installed immediately after mortar has attained final set.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Hollow Glass Block: Hollow units made from transparent glass, with manufacturer's
standard edge coating.
B. Glass Blocks With Plastic Trim: Transparent or translucent proprietary hollow glass blocks
with plastic trim, providing good thermal insulation and protection against burglary and fire,
to the sizes, pattern and color shown on the Drawings and to approval. Provide
manufacturer's standard accessories.
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II, natural color, white, or a blend to
produce mortar color indicated.
1. Where joints are indicated to be raked out and pointed, gray cement may be used for
setting mortar.
D. Pre-blended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a pre-blended
mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend in-
gredients before delivering to Project site. Comply with ASTM C 270 Property Specifica-
tion as specified in other Part 2 Articles.
E. Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270 Property Specification as specified in other Part 2 Ar-
ticles.
F. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for
use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in
masonry mortar.
1. For pointing mortar and joints narrower than 6 mm, use aggregate graded with 100
percent passing 1.18-mm sieve.
2. White Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
2. Liquid polymeric water-repellent mortar admixture that does not reduce flexural bond
strength of mortar.
I. Water: Potable.
A. Panel Reinforcement: Ladder-type units, butt welded, not lapped and welded; complying
with ASTM A 951 in straight lengths of not less than 3 m, and as follows:
C. Fasteners, General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 or Type 316 stainless-
steel fasteners at exterior walls and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at interior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class
required.
D. Carbon-Steel Bolts: ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6 with hex nuts, ASTM A 563M, if
applicable.
F. Postinstalled Anchors: Provide metal expansion sleeve anchors or metal impact expansion
anchors of type and size necessary for installation indicated, as recommended by
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Sealant Accessories: Provide sealant accessories, including primers, bond-breaker tape, and
cylindrical sealant backing, that comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants."
B. Mortar for Glass Unit Masonry Assemblies: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion
Specification for Type S mortar.
C. Pre-blended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a pre-blended
mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend in-
gredients before delivering to Project site. Comply with ASTM C 270 Property Specifica-
tion:
D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with
other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement
products.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine sills, jambs, and heads surrounding glass unit masonry assemblies for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A. Apply a heavy coat of asphalt emulsion to sill and adhere expansion strips to jambs and
heads with asphalt emulsion. Allow asphalt emulsion to dry before placing mortar. Trim
expansion strips to width required to fit glass block and to full lengths of heads and jambs.
B. Set glass block with completely filled bed and head joints, with no furrowing, accurately
spaced and coordinated with other construction. Maintain 6-mm exposed joint widths,
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install panel reinforcement in horizontal joints at spacing indicated and continuously from
end to end of panels; comply with the following requirements:
1. Vertical Spacing of Panel Reinforcement for Exterior Panels: Every other course but
not more than 407 mm o.c., starting with first course above sill.
2. Vertical Spacing of Panel Reinforcement for Interior Panels: Not more than 407 mm
o.c..
3. Do not bridge expansion joints with panel reinforcement.
4. Place panel reinforcement in joints immediately above and below all openings within
glass unit masonry assemblies.
5. Lap panel reinforcement not less than 150 mm if more than 1 length is necessary.
6. Embed panel reinforcement in mortar bed by placing lower half of mortar bed first,
pressing panel reinforcement into place and covering with upper half of mortar bed.
D. Install panel anchors at locations indicated and in same horizontal joints where panel
reinforcement occurs. Extend panel anchors at least 300 mm into joints, and bend within
expansion joints at edges of panels and across the head. Attach panel anchors as follows:
1. For in-place unit masonry assemblies and concrete, attach panel anchors with 6-mm-
diameter bolt-size, postinstalled anchors, 2 per panel anchor.
2. For new unit masonry assemblies, embed other ends of panel anchors, after bending
portions crossing expansion joint, in horizontal mortar joints closest in elevation to
joints in glass unit masonry assemblies containing panel anchors.
3. For steel members, attach panel anchors with 6-mm- diameter through bolts and nuts
or bolts in tapped holes in steel members.
E. Use rubber mallet to tap units into position. Do not use steel tools, and do not allow units to
come into contact with metal accessories and frames.
F. Use plastic spacers or temporary wedges in mortar joints to produce uniform joint widths
and to prevent mortar from being squeezed out of joints.
1. If temporary wedges are used, remove them after mortar has set and fill voids with
mortar.
1. If temporary wedges are used, remove them before raking out and pointing joints.
2. Point joints at both faces of exterior panels with mortar.
I. Point joints with mortar by filling raked joints and voids. Place and compact pointing
mortar in layers not more than 10 mm thick. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow to
become thumbprint hard before applying next layer.
1. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when pointing mortar is thumbprint hard. Use a
smooth plastic jointer larger than joint width.
J. Clean glass unit masonry assemblies as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears
immediately, using a clean, wet sponge or a scrub brush with stiff fiber bristles. Do not use
harsh cleaners, acids, abrasives, steel wool, or wire brushes when removing mortar or
cleaning glass unit masonry assemblies.
K. Install sealant at jambs, heads, mullions and other locations indicated. Prepare joints,
including installation of primer and bond-breaker tape or cylindrical sealant backing, and
apply elastomeric sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
L. Construction Tolerances: Set glass block to comply with the following tolerances:
1. Variation from Plumb: For lines and surfaces of vertical elements and arris, do not
exceed 6 mm in 3 m, 9 mm in 6 m, or 12 mm in 12 m or more.
2. Variation from Level: For bed joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 6
mm in 6 m or 12 mm in 12 m or more.
3. Variation of Linear Building Line: For positions shown in plan and related portions
of walls and partitions, do not exceed 12 mm in 6 m or 19 mm in 12 m or more.
4. Variation in Mortar-Joint Thickness: Do not vary from joint thickness indicated by
more than plus or minus 1.5 mm.
3.3 CLEANING
A. On surfaces adjacent to glass unit masonry assemblies, remove mortar, sealants, and other
residue resulting from glass-block installation, in a manner approved by manufacturers of
materials involved.
C. Perform final cleaning of glass unit masonry assemblies when surface is not exposed to
direct sunlight. Start at top of panel using generous amounts of clean water. Remove water
with clean, dry, soft cloths; change cloths frequently to eliminate dried mortar particles and
aggregate.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Division 03 Section “Cast-in-place Concrete,” for concrete surfaces to receive stone wall
facing.
2. Division 04 Section “Unit Masonry,” for masonry walls to receive stone wall facing.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Dimension Stone Cladding Assembly: An exterior wall covering system consisting of
dimension stone panels together with anchors, fasteners, and sealants used to secure the stone to
the building structure and to produce a weather-resistant covering.
A. Product Data:
1. For each variety of stone. Include data on physical properties required by referenced
ASTM standards, and chemical analysis.
2. For stone accessories and other manufactured products.
3. Setting and jointing materials.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply
with requirements for regional materials.
2. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For sealants, documentation including printed
statement of VOC content.
C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for stone paneling system, including
dimensions and profiles of stone units.
1. Show locations and details of joints both within stone paneling system and between stone
paneling system and other finish materials.
2. Show locations and details of anchors, including locations of supporting construction.
3. Show direction of veining, grain, or other directional pattern.
D. Samples:
1. For each stone type indicated. Include at least five samples in each set for each type of
stone, exhibiting extremes of the full range of color and other visual characteristics
expected in completed Work. Samples will establish the standard by which stone
provided will be judged.
2. For each color of joint material required. Label Samples to indicate types and amounts of
pigments used.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For dimension stone cladding assembly indicated, to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Stone Test Reports: For each stone variety proposed for use on Project, provide test data
indicating compliance with required physical properties, other than abrasion resistance,
according to referenced ASTM standards. Base reports on testing done within previous
three years.
2. Compatibility Test Report: From manufacturers’ test laboratories, indicating that
jointing, setting and sealer materials will not discolor or adversely affect the adjoining
stone. Include interpretation of test results and recommendations for primers and
substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
D. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of finish, from one
quarry, whether specified in this Section or in another Section, with resources to provide
materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
E. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious
component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.
G. Mockups: Build 2 m by 2 m mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of each type of wall facing of not less than one structural bay.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. General: Design stone anchors and anchoring systems according to ASTM C 1242.
1. Stone anchors shall withstand not less than two times the weight of the stone cladding in
both compression and tension.
C. Structural Performance: Provide dimension stone cladding system capable of withstanding the
effects of gravity loads, wind loads and equipment loads, as indicated.
D. Seismic Performance: Provide dimension stone cladding system capable of withstanding the
effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7 and authorities having
jurisdiction, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes.
F. Horizontal Building Movement (Interstory Drift): Allow for maximum horizontal building
movement equal to quotient resulting from dividing floor-to-floor height at any floor by 400.
G. Shrinkage and Creep: Allow for progressive vertical shortening of building frame equal to 3
mm in 3 m.
H. Safety Factors for Stone: Design dimension stone cladding system to withstand loads indicated
without exceeding allowable working stress of stone determined by dividing stone's average
ultimate strength, as established by testing, by the following minimum safety factors:
I. Design stone anchors to withstand loads indicated without exceeding allowable working
stresses established by the following:
1. For Cast-in-Place and Post installed Fasteners in Concrete: One-fourth of tested capacity
when installed in concrete with compressive strength indicated.
2. For Post-Installed Fasteners in Masonry: One-sixth of tested capacity when installed in
masonry units indicated.
J. Provisions for Fabrication and Erection Tolerances: Allow for fabrication and erection
tolerances of building's structural system specified in other Sections.
K. Control of Corrosion and Staining: Prevent galvanic and other forms of corrosion as well as
staining by isolating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
Use materials that do not stain exposed surfaces of stone and joint materials.
L. Joint Appearance:
M. Installation Tolerances:
1. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of walls, do not exceed 6 mm in
3 m, 10 mm in 6 m, or 12 mm in 12 m or more. For external corners, corners and jambs
within 6 m of an entrance, expansion joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 3
mm in 3 m, 6 mm in 6 m, or 10 mm in 12 m or more.
2. Variation from Level: For lintels, sills, horizontal bands, horizontal grooves, and other
conspicuous lines, do not exceed 3 mm in 3 m, 6 mm in 6 m, or 10 mm maximum.
3. Variation of Linear Building Line: For positions shown in plan and related portions of
walls and partitions, do not exceed 6 mm in 6 m or 12 mm in 12 m or more.
4. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For thickness of walls from dimensions
indicated, do not exceed plus or minus 6 mm.
5. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary from average joint width more than plus or minus
3 mm or a quarter of nominal joint width, whichever is less. For joints within 1500 mm
of each other, do not vary more than 3 mm or a quarter of nominal joint width, whichever
is less from one to the other.
6. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stone Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 1.5-mm
difference between planes of adjacent units.
A. Use materials that will not stain, discolor or adversely affect mortar and stone.
B. Sustainable Design:
2.3 STONE
A. Stone Types: As selected by Engineer from the specified types. Stone to comply with the
following.
B. Colors, Color Ranges and Finishes: To match Engineer's samples. Natural variations in
appearance are acceptable if installed stone units match range of colors and other appearance
characteristics represented in approved samples and mockups.
C. Thickness: To comply with performance requirements and not less than thicknesses indicated.
A. General: Provide packaged pointing mortar or individual materials for pointing mortar mixed at
Project site, complying with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N or Type S as
applicable to stone type, and the following:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II. Provide natural color or white
cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.
a. Use low-alkali cement containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when
tested according to ASTM C 114, to limit staining, when recommended by stone
source.
5. Aggregate: ASTM C 144, except with 100 percent passing 1.18 mm sieve.
A. Fabricate anchors from stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304,
temper as required to support loads imposed without exceeding allowable design stresses.
Fabricate dowels and pins for anchors from stainless steel, ASTM A 276, Type 304.
B. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Anchors: Annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers;
ASTM F 738M for bolts and ASTM F 836M for nuts, Alloy Group 1 A1.
A. Temporary Setting Shims: Rigid plastic shims, non-staining to stone, of thickness needed to
prevent point loading of stone on anchors, and of depths to suit anchors without intruding into
required depths of pointing materials.
B. Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants,” and that do not stain stone.
C. Stone Sealer: Colorless, stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical properties of
stone surfaces, hydrophobic water-based impregnating no-sheen type suitable for natural stone.
Sealer shall protect the stone from staining during setting and grouting process and allow
evaporation of water from setting materials, as demonstrated by tests performed by qualified
testing agencies.
A. General: Fabricate stone units in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements
indicated, and on Shop Drawings.
B. Pattern Arrangement: Fabricate and arrange stone units with veining and other natural
markings on approved mockups.
C. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to match approved samples and mockups.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
B. This Section includes structural steel and architecturally exposed structural steel.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
2. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field
welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld.
3. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.
Identify high-strength bolted slip-critical, direct-tension, or tensioned shear/bearing
connections.
4. Include Shop Drawings signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer re-
sponsible for their preparation.
5. Methods of erection and calculations of erection stresses
6. Methods of bracing and temporary guys.
7. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate
welds by standard AWS A2.1 and A2.4 symbols, and show size, length, and type of
each weld.
8. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and
other anchorage to be installed as work of others sections.
D. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects/engineers and owners, and
other information specified.
1. Structural steel (each type), including certified copies of mill reports covering chemi-
cal and physical properties.
2. Bolts, nuts, and washers, including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.
3. Direct-tension indicators.
4. Shear stud connectors.
5. Shop primers.
6. Shrinkage-resistant grout.
7. Welding electrodes
F. Test Reports: Submit copies of reports of tests conducted on shop and field bolted and
welded connections. Include data on type(s) of tests conducted and test results. State com-
pliance or non-compliance with specifications.
G. Fabricator and Erector: submit the name of the proposed fabricator and erector with refer-
ence of work of a similar nature carried out by him on other projects, with relevant dates.
H. Surveys: Submit for information certified copies of each survey conducted by an approved
engineer, showing elevations and locations of base plates and anchor bolts to receive struc-
tural steel, and final elevations and locations for major members. Indicate discrepancies be-
tween actual installation and contract documents.
I. Paint: Submit manufacturer's full technical specification, method of application and guaran-
tee.
J. Method Statement: Submit for approval, Quality Control method statement in accordance
with quality assurance procedures, and Erection method statement.
L. As-Built Drawings: At project close-out, submit record “As- Built” drawings of completed
work products, in accordance with requirements of the Specification as indicated in Division
1.
A. Quality System: Comply with ISO 9001/9002 Quality System as a minimum. Incorporate all
the standard procedures supplied by the Engineer and the Employer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed structural steel
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a
record of successful in-service performance.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in fabricating structural steel similar
to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to fabricate structural steel without delaying the
Work.
F. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding
Code-Steel."
1. Present evidence that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests
for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
H. Quality Control: Submit for approval a method statement of the system of quality control to
be used in fabrication and erection, complying with AISC, and AWS including proposed
welding procedure. An approved quality control engineer is to be assigned for the complete
duration of the work to ensure proper performance.
A. Deliver structural steel to Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure continui-
ty of installation.
B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members
off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and pack-
aged materials from erosion and deterioration.
1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and re-lubricate bolts and nuts that be-
come dry or rusty before use.
2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage
to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or struc-
tures as directed.
C. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-place con-
crete or masonry, in ample time to not to delay work.
D. Manufactured items are to be delivered in original packages, containers etc. bearing name of
manufacturer and brand. Each piece of material is to bear the official grade and trade mark
of the association under whose rules it is graded or is to be accompanied by a certificate of
inspection issued by that association.
1.7 SEQUENCING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of work which will be exposed to view, use only
materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, rust and scale
seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. Remove such blemishes by
grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating and application of surface
finishes.
1. Carbon Steel: ASTM A 36M having a minimum yield stress of 240 N/mm2 or equal,
to be used only when specified.
2. High-Strength, Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steel: ASTM A 572M, Grade 50
having a minimum yield stress of 345 N/mm2 or equal typically used unless other-
wise noted.
3. High-Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Steel: ASTM A 913 having a minimum yield
stress 460 N/mm2 or according to BS5950-1:2000 with a minimum yield strength of
460 N/mm2 or equal.
C. Cold-Formed Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade C. Having a minimum yield
stress of 345 N/mm2 or equal.
1. ASTM A53 type E, Grade B, having a minimum yield stress of 246 N/mm2 or equal.
To be used only when specified.
2. ASTM A618, Grade III, having a minimum yield stress of 345 N/mm2 or equal.
3. ASTM A 913 having a minimum yield stress 460 N/mm2 or according to BS5950-
1:2000 with a minimum yield strength of 460 N/mm2 or equal.
E. Cold rolled steel Z and C sections to be ASTM A653M grade HSLAS, type A, Grade 50
(340) and ASTM A924/A924M, having a minimum yield stress 345 Mpa, or equal, and
shall be galvanized in accordance with the ASTM A653 M with zinc coated to achieve the
specified life to first maintenance.
F. Stainless steel plates for Teflon bearings to conform to AISI TP 316 or BS 970, grade 316
S16.
G. Polytetra fluoroethylene (PTFE) sheets are to conform to ASTM D4894 and ASTM D 4895.
H. Headed Stud-Type Shear Connectors: to AWS D1.1, type B, minimum yield strength of
345 N/mm2 [50000 PSI] at 0.2% offset, made from steel to ASTM A108, with mechanical
properties to ASTM A370, and applied in accordance with Recommended Practices for Stud
Welding.
1. Unheaded Rods: ASTM F1554 with minimum yield strength of 248 N/mm2,
2. Unheaded Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 55 with minimum yield strength of 345
4T T 4
N/mm2.
3. Unheaded Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 105 with minimum yield strength of 634
N/mm2, to be used only when specified.
4. Headed Bolts: ASTM A 490M, Type 1, or DIN 6914 gradeb10.9 heavy hex steel
4T 4T
J. Nonhigh-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307, Grade A, regular low-carbon
4T
hexagonal head steel bolts and nuts and washers, to be used only when specified.
K. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490M, Type 1, or DIN 6914 grade 10.9
4T 4T
heavy hex steel structural bolts, heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel
washers, uncoated. Typically used unless otherwise noted.
L. High Strength Steel castings: conform to ASTH A148M grade 795-655 or approved equal.
M. Welding Materials: Conform to AWS Code and AWS Filler Metal Specifications. Select
materials which are suitable for use with types of steel to be joined. Unless otherwise indi-
cated, connections are designed for:
1. Metal-Arc Welding Electrodes: to E70XX series of the Specification for Mild Steel
Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes, AWS A5.1, or the Specification for Low-Alloy
Steel Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes, AWS A5.5.
2. Bare Electrodes and Granular Flux used in the submerged-arc process are to conform
to F7 X-EXXX AWS flux classifications of the Specification for Base Mild Steel
Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding, AWS A5.17, or A5.23 or the of
AISC "Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings".
P. Structural Steel Painting: the protective coating system is to be one of the systems recom-
mended in SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) to give a life to first maintenance of 20
years taking into consideration climatic conditions on site and exposure of the steelworks.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and assemble structural steel in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate struc-
tural steel according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section and in Shop Draw-
to be
ings. used only when specified.
B. Fabricate architecturally exposed structural steel with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and
free of surface blemishes, including pitting, rust and scale seam marks, roller marks, rolled
trade names, and roughness.
D. Finishing: Accurately mill ends of columns and other members transmitting loads in bear-
ing.
F. Steel Wall Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall framing to
be attached to structural steel framing. Straighten as required to provide uniform, square,
and true members in completed wall framing.
G. Welded Door Frames: Build up welded door frames attached to structural steel framing.
Weld exposed joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug-weld fixed steel bar stops to
frames. Secure removable stops to frames with countersunk, cross-recessed head machine
screws, uniformly spaced not more than 250 mm o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
H. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing and for
passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on Shop Drawings.
1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame-cut holes or
enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.
2. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items as indicated to receive other
work.
I. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding of units, before start of
finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in final structure free of
markings, burrs, and other defects.
J. Materials and workmanship are subject to inspection and test by the Engineer, who is to
have access at all times to all parts of the workshop where steelworks is being fabricated and
is to be provided with reasonable inspection facilities.
M. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated.
O. Welded Construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of
welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Unless shown on the drawings site welding will only be permitted for minor connec-
tions subject to written approval from the Engineer.
2. Do not place any welds, except those shown on the drawings, without approval even
for temporary attachment and repair of faulty plates.
3. Use run on and run off plates to ensure full throat thickness at ends of butt welds as
follows:
A. Shop install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Struc-
tural Joints Using ASTM A 490 Bolts."
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of
welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of
axes without warp.
2. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally
exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent surface
bleeding of back-side welding on exposed steel surfaces. Grind smooth exposed fillet
welds 13 mm and larger. Grind flush butt welds. Dress exposed welds.
B. Apply all specified coats of paint to surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly or erec-
tion. Change color of successive coats to distinguish them from previous ones.
C. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steelworks to be painted.
Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag or flux deposits. Clean steel in accor-
dance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) to SP-10 "Near - White Blast Clean-
ing" (equivalent to SA 2 1/2).
D. For surfaces to receive fire proof spraying, compatibility of the primer material and the fire
proof spraying should be ensured.
E. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation (in any case within four hours), apply struc-
tural steel primer paint in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and at a rate to pro-
vide the specified dry film thickness. Use painting methods which result in full coverage of
joints, corners, edges and exposed surfaces.
F. Painting: Provide all paint coatings in shop except the final finish coat (which has to be ap-
plied after erection) all in accordance with the requirements of the Steel Structure Painting
Council (SSPC), as specified in Clause 2.1, and as per manufacturer's recommendation.
G. Guarantee: Provide a written guarantee that the protective coating system on all steel
works, including the works subject to fire proof spraying, will give a minimum life to first
maintenance of 20 years in the climatic conditions prevailing on site and for the exposure of
the steel work.
2.5 GALVANIZING
A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel in-
dicated for galvanizing according to ASTM A 123.
A. Contractor will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop in-
spections and tests and to prepare test reports, subject to the engineer approval, on contrac-
tor expense.
1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether test
specimens comply with or deviate from requirements.
2. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural steel Work is being fa-
bricated or produced so required inspection and testing can be accomplished.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test re-
ports indicate do not comply with specified requirements.
D. Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to AISC specifications and
RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 490 Bolts."
1. Direct-tension indicator gaps will be verified to comply with ASTM F 959, Table 2.
E. Testing agency may inspect structural steel at plant before shipment; however. Engineer re-
serves right, at any time before final acceptance, to reject material not complying with speci-
fied requirements.Retain above or below.
F. Shop Welding: Inspect and test during fabrication of structural steel assemblies, as follows:
1. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and loca-
tions of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct defi-
ciencies.
2. Perform visual inspection of all welds.
3. Perform non destructive tests of welds on 10% of all fillet weld lengths as a first test-
ing round, depending on its results, the Engineer might instruct the Contractor to ex-
tend the testing process and/or to replace welder at no extra cost. Selection of tested
samples to be approved by the Engineer. Non-destructive tests of butt welds to be
done on 100% of the welded lengths.
G. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors will be inspected and tested
according to requirements of AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows:
1. Bend tests will be performed when visual inspections reveal either less than a conti-
nuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.
2. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors when weld fracture occurs on
shear connectors already tested, according to requirements of AWS D1.1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Before erection proceeds, and with the steel erector present, verify elevations of concrete
and masonry bearing surfaces and locations of anchorages for compliance with require-
ments.
B. Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structur-
al steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads
equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural
steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-
in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC
specifications referenced in this Section.
B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing
materials and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom sur-
face of base and bearing plates.
1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts
as required.
2. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.
Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or
bearing plate prior to packing with grout.
3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Finish
exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure.
C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges."
D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before per-
manently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be
in permanent contact. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in
elevations and alignment.
F. Remove erection bolts on welded, architecturally exposed structural steel; fill holes with
plug welds; and grind smooth at exposed surfaces.
I. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins. Ream holes that
must be enlarged to admit bolts.
M. Raise or lower to correct level using sawn steel packs not larger than necessary for the pur-
pose
N. Notify the Engineer when space beneath any column base is less than 10 mm or more than
50 mm.
O. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for
shop painting.
P. Apply final coat of paint only in accordance with the requirements of the Steel Structures
Painting Council (SSPC), as specified in Clause 2.1 and 2.3, and as per manufacturer's rec-
ommendation.
Q. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, align-
ment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
R. Ensure that the capacity of plant and equipment used for erection are suitable and are in
first class working order.
T. Inspect foundations before starting erection for line and level, anchor bolts for position, pro-
truding length, condition and slackness.
A. Install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A 490 Bolts."
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of
welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Comply with AISC specifications referenced in this Section for bearing, adequacy of
temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field
welds.
2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of
axes without warp.
3. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally
exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent surface
bleeding of back-side welding on exposed steel surfaces. Grind smooth exposed fillet
welds 13 mm and larger. Grind flush butt welds. Dress exposed welds.
A. On the contractor’s expenses, employer will engage an independent testing and inspecting
agency to perform field inspections and tests and to prepare test reports.
1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested
Work complies with or deviates from requirements.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test re-
ports indicate do not comply with specified requirements.
1. Direct-tension indicator gaps will be verified to comply with ASTM F 959, Table 2.
E. Field Welding: Inspect and test during erection of structural steel as follows:
1. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and loca-
tions of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct defi-
ciencies.
2. Perform visual inspection of all welds.
3. Perform non destructive tests of welds on 10% of all fillet weld lengths as a first test-
ing round, depending on its results, the Engineer might instruct the Contractor to ex-
tend the testing process and/or to replace welder at no extra cost. Selection of tested
samples to be approved by the Engineer. Non-destructive tests of butt welds to be
done on 100% of the welded lengths.
F. Weld defects: cracks, overlaps, lack of penetration or incomplete fusion shall not be al-
lowed.
G. Lamination tests: carry out ultrasonic testing for lamination on all head plates for moment
connections (15 mm thick or above) in accordance with DIN 54120 or ASTM E164.
H. Non-shrink grout: prepare 50 mm cubes and test for compressive strength in accordance
with ASTM C109.
I. In addition to visual inspection, field-welded shear connectors will be inspected and tested
according to requirements of AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows:
1. Bend tests will be performed when visual inspections reveal either less than a conti-
nuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.
2. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors when weld fracture occurs on
shear connectors already tested, according to requirements of AWS D1.1..
J. Tolerances: The permissible deviation of fabricated and erected structures are to be in ac-
cordance with the limitations of the AISC.
K. Equipment: provide necessary facilities and equipment for specified tests in the fabrication
shop and on site. Calibrate load measuring equipment at regular intervals agreed with Engi-
neer.
L. Results: submit three copies of test and examination results to Engineer immediately they
are available.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for
shop painting.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038
mm).
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint on structural steel are included in Division 9 Section "Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Architecturally exposed structural-steel framing, including shop painting and
field touch-up painting..
B. Related Requirements:
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1. Design Concept Drawings: Plans, sections, elevations, full size framing details and
details at adjoining construction, and erection tolerances.
2. Outline technical specifications describing proposed materials.
3. Method Statement: For fabrication, handling, installation and protection. Indicate
factory-fabricated and site-assembled items.
4. Maintenance Program: Outline maintenance program identifying service life of products
and maintenance requirements.
5. Quality Control/Assurance:
a. List and details of key personnel to be assigned to the project and a list of previous
projects completed of similar in scope and type to the work indicated.
b. List of tests and inspections included.
6. Items of non-compliance with the specification.
7. Proposed fabricators and installers.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including finishing materials.
1. Structural steel primer, intermediate and finish paint systems. Submit paint
manufacturer's certification that specified paint will achieve required slip coefficient for
friction type connections and complies with referenced standards.
2. Shrinkage-resistant grout.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For paints, primers, coatings, adhesives and sealants,
required to have low VOC content.
2. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products required to have recycled content.
C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of AESS components. Shop Drawings for structural steel
may be used for AESS provided items of AESS are specifically identified and requirements
below are met for AESS.
1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
2. Include embedment drawings.
3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,
and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed
and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. Indicate grinding, finish,
and profile of welds.
4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.
Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections. Indicate
orientation of bolt heads.
5. Indicate exposed surfaces and edges and surface preparation being used.
6. Indicate special tolerances and erection requirements.
D. Samples: Submit finished samples of AESS category to set quality standards for exposed welds,
bolts and finishes.
1. Two steel plates, 9.5 by 200 by 100 mm, with long edges joined by a groove weld, and
with weld ground smooth.
2. Steel plate, 9.5 by 200 by 200 mm, with one end of a short length of rectangular steel
tube, 100 by 150 by 9.5 mm, welded to plate with a continuous fillet weld, and with weld
ground smooth and blended.
3. Two bolted connections illustrating bolt heads, nuts, washers and threads, and alignment
of bolts in close proximity.
4. Round steel tube or pipe, of typical diameter, with end of another round steel tube or
pipe, of typical diameter, welded to its side at a 45-degree angle with a continuous fillet
weld, and with weld ground smooth and blended. Include a sample of a reprepresentative
continuous fillet weld joining two tubes or pipes, finished in accordance with AESS
Category 3 AESS.
B. Welders’ certificates.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified company specializing in performing the work of this section
with minimum five years documented experience or, an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.
D. Reference Standards: Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents,
comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following:
1. AISC "Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings" (including all supplements).
2. AISC "Specification for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel".
3. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges", except in Paragraph
4.2.1, delete the first and second sentences.
4. Industrial Fasteners Institute "Fastener Standards Book".
5. AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts".
6. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code".
7. SSPC "Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 2, Systems and Specifications".
8. Where the language in the documents specified is in the form of a recommendation or
suggestion, such recommendations or suggestions shall be deemed to be mandatory under
this Contract.
E. Mockups: Build mockups of AESS to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
F. Preinstallation Meeting:
1. Arrange and conduct meeting at Project site at least 2 weeks prior to the starting of AESS
fabrication operations.
2. Require attendance of Engineer, installer, fabricator, primer manufacturer’s
representatives, painting manufacturer’s field representatives and installers of related
work.
3. Review shipping, special handling, attachment of safety cables and temporary erection
bracing, touch up painting, protection, sequence of work, and other requirements for
AESS.
A. Source Quality Control: Testing and inspection of architecturally exposed structural steel will
be performed by a testing agency retained by the Owner, as specified in . Source Quality
Control in Division 05 Section “Structural Steel.”
1. Field Quality Control: Consultant will observe AESS in place to determine acceptability
relating to aesthetic effects, including appearance quality of welds, bolts and surface
finishes including locations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Performance Criteria: Architecturally exposed structural steel, serves as a support for the
exterior walls and is subject to compliance with performance criteria shown and specified for
the exterior walls. Coordinate with performance criteria on drawings, or specified in Division
08, exterior wall sections as required to provide a complete installation complying with
performance criteria.
B. Design of Members and Connections: Details shown are typical and apply to similar
conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at the site without causing a delay in
the work. Dimensions are shown based on an assumed design temperature of 21 deg. C.
Fabrication and erection procedures shall take into account the ambient temperature range at the
time of the respective operations.
C. Appearance:
1. Set AESS structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated, and free of for
twists, kinks, warping, gouges, and other imperfections, and compliant with specified
requirements.
2. Treatment of Exposed Bolts: Conceal bolts to greatest extent possible. Where exposed
bolts are permitted, use minimal number of bolts, orient in acceptable layout and finish as
selected by Engineer.
3. Finished shop and field-applied touch-up painting shall completely cover surfaces to
provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage.
Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface
imperfections are not acceptable.
D. Erection Tolerances:
1. Individual Pieces: Plumbed, leveled and aligned in accordance with the requirements of
the "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" except as follows:
a. Plumbness of individual columns shall be held to 1:1000.
b. All measurements relating to the above shall be on the theoretical centerline of the
columns.
2.2 MATERIALS
B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B, custom-formed to profiles and radii indicated.
C. Other Materials: Comply with the requirements Division 05 Section “Structural Steel”,
supplemented by the requirements of this Section.
A. Apply prime coats, intermediate coats and finish coats of paint, utilizing contrasting colors
between primer and intermediate coats, to maximum extent possible, in the shop; minimize field
touch painting. Coordinate commencement of painting with requirements of Part 1 “Source
Quality Control” article.
B. Prepare surfaces and apply materials in compliance with paint manufacturer’s instructions;
prepare surfaces to SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3 commercial blast-cleaning, or better and provide
24 hours' drying before recoating.
C. Block out high-strength bolted connections after receiving prime coats, for finishing with
specified intermediate and final coats of paint in the field.
1. Zinc rich primer in a crosslinked epoxy or organic resin, two coats, using one of the
following:
a. "859" (Carboline Co.); 2.5 - 4.0 mils minimum dry film thickness.
b. "90-97 Tneme-Zinc" (Tnemec Company, Inc.); 2.5 - 3.5 mils minimum dry film
thickness.
c. "Amercoat 68HS" (Ameron Protective Coatings), 3 mils minimum dry film
thickness.
2. Intermediate Coat: Compatible with, and of the same manufacturer as, the primer.
Provide the respective dry film thickness specified; satin gloss finish coat; using one of
the following:
a. "Carboguard 888" (Carboline Co.). 4.0 - 6.0 mils dry film thickness.
b. "Tnemec 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II" (Tnemec Co. Inc.); 4.0 - 6.0 mils dry film
thickness.
c. "Amerlock 400" (Ameron). 5.0 - 8.0 mils dry film thickness.
3. Final Coat: Compatible with, and of the same manufacturer as, the primer. Provide the
respective dry film thickness specified; satin finish coat; one of the following:
a. "Carbothane 133 Series " (Carboline Co.). 3.0 - 5.0 mils dry film thickness.
b. "Series 175 Endura-Shield III" (Tnemec Co. Inc.); 3.0 - 5.0 mils dry film
thickness.
c. "Amershield" (Ameron Products). 4.0 - 5.0 mils dry film thickness.
E. Field Touch Paint: Same materials as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for
touching up shop-painted surfaces; clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning
or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate and assemble AESS to the maximum extent possible. Fabricate items of
Architecturally exposed structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as
indicated on final shop drawings.
1. Welded members and componenents to greatest extent possible; minimize field weling
and bolting.
2. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding of units, before start
of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in final structure
free of markings, burrs, and other defects.
B. Architecturally exposed structural steel members including built-up members shall conform to
the tolerance requirements specified in "Specifications for Architecturally Exposed Structural
Steel". Grind abrasions and other defects where finished appearance will be affected.
C. Curved Members: Fabricate indicated members to curved shape by rolling to final shape in
fabrication shop.
1. Distortion of webs, stems, outstanding flanges, and legs of angles shall not be visible
from a distance of 6 m under any lighting conditions.
2. Tolerances for walls of hollow steel sections after rolling shall be approximately 13 mm.
D. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfacesnot more that
1/16 in. larger than the connector diameter. Do not make or enlarge holes by burning.
Remove outside burrs resulting from drilling operations.
E. Fill dents in architecturally exposed structural steel with metallic filler and grind flush and
smooth.
F. Holes: Provide holes, threaded-studs and nuts required for securing other work to structural
steel and for other work to pass through steel framing members.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts
indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.
2. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are
not specified in other Sections.
B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
F. Welding certificates.
G. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
H. Warranty: Sample copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty complying with specified re-
quirements, and stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions of warranty.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous
with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with
paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and
topcoats are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages and steel weld plates and angles for casting into
concrete. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages,
including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to
be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for
installation.
1.8 WARRANTY
1. All metal fabrications are guaranteed to be of good material and workmanship and
free from defects that render it unserviceable for the use for which it is intended.
2. Warranty shall also include:
B. Special Warranty for Metal Finishes: Provide written warranty signed by Contractor and
backed up by coating Manufacturer in which the contractor agrees to repair finishes that fail
in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Cracking.
2. Checking.
3. Peeling.
4. Chalking: in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214
5. Crazing.
6. Color Fading: more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244
7. Color retention.
C. Warranty Period for Metal Finishes: 10 years for clear anodic finish, from date of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
B. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
D. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
G. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
H. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with
MFMA-4.
I. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M,
unless otherwise indicated.
E. Bronze Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Bars: ASTM B 36/B 36M, Alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntz
metal, 60 percent copper).
F. Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (extruded architectural bronze).
G. Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C83600 (leaded red brass) or No. C84400
(leaded semired brass).
H. Nickel Silver Extrusions: ASTM B 151/B 151M, Alloy UNS No. C74500.
I. Nickel Silver Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded nickel
bronze).
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior
use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or
ASTM F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class
required.
B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6; with
hex nuts, ASTM A 563M; and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325M, Type 3; with hex nuts,
ASTM A 563M, Class 8S3; and, where indicated, flat washers.
E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563;
and, where indicated, flat washers.
1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being
fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
L. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times
the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when
installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a
qualified independent testing agency.
M. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise
indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or
ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip
galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Material for Exterior Locations and where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group
A4 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 738M, and nuts, ASTM F 836M.
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Section "High-Performance
Coatings."
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble
units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that
maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
coordinated installation.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a
radius of approximately 1 mm unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on
exposed surfaces.
C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of
adjacent surface.
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head
(countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to
exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware,
screws, and similar items.
I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space
anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated
loads.
1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with
integrally welded steel strap anchors, 3.2 by 38 mm, with a minimum 150-mm
embedment and 50-mm hook, not less than 200 mm from ends and corners of units
and 600 mm o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive
adjacent construction.
D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with primer specified in Division 9 Section
"High-Performance Coatings" where indicated.
A. General:
B. Steel Ladders:
A. Provide metal ships' ladders where indicated. Fabricate of open-type construction with
channel or plate stringers and pipe and tube railings unless otherwise indicated. Provide
brackets and fittings for installation.
B. Galvanize steel ships' ladders, including treads, railings, brackets, and fasteners.
C. Prime steel ships' ladders, including treads, railings, brackets, and fasteners, with primer
specified in Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings."
1. Thickness: As indicated.
B. Provide grating sections where indicated fabricated from welded or pressure-locked steel
bar grating. Limit openings in gratings to no more than 12 mm in least dimension.
D. Include steel angle stiffeners, and fixed and removable sections as indicated.
E. Provide flush steel bar drop handles for lifting removable sections, one at each end of each
section.
A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles
shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use
concealed field splices where possible.
B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation
with other work.
1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or
masonry construction.
D. Prime miscellaneous steel trim with primer specified in Division 9 Section "High-
Performance Coatings."
B. Fabricate bollards with 9.5-mm- thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill
baseplates at all four corners for 19-mm anchor bolts.
1. Where bollards are to be anchored to sloping concrete slabs, angle baseplates for
plumb alignment of bollards.
C. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe or tubing with 6.4-mm- thick steel
plate welded to bottom of sleeve. Make sleeves not less than 200 mm deep and 19 mm
larger than OD of bollard.
D. Fabricate internal sleeves for removable bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe or 6.4-mm
wall-thickness steel tubing with an OD approximately 1.5 mm less than ID of bollards.
Match drill sleeve and bollard for 19 mm steel machine bolt.
A. Fabricate pipe guards from 9.5-mm- thick by 300-mm- wide steel plate, bent to fit flat
against the wall or column at both ends and to fit around pipe with 50-mm clearance
between pipe and pipe guard. Drill each end for two 19-mm anchor bolts.
A. Extruded Units: Aluminum, with abrasive filler consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon
carbide, or a combination of both, in an epoxy-resin binder. Fabricate units in lengths
necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions.
2. Provide ribbed units, with abrasive filler strips projecting 1.5 mm above aluminum
extrusion.
3. Nosings: Square-back units, 75 mm wide, for casting into concrete steps unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Drill for mechanical anchors and countersink. Locate holes not more than 100 mm from
ends and not more than 300 mm o.c., evenly spaced between ends, unless otherwise
indicated. Provide closer spacing if recommended by manufacturer.
1. Provide two rows of holes for units more than 125 mm wide, with two holes aligned
at ends and intermediate holes staggered.
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete
construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
B. Galvanize plates.
A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported
from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no
fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into
surrounding surface.
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M
for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron
products.
1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint
adhesion.
B. Shop prime iron and steel items unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on
fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
1. Shop prime with primers specified in Division 9 painting Sections unless primers
specified in Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings" are indicated.
C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated
below:
D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application
Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
2. Shop prime uncoated railings with primers specified in Division 9 painting Sections
unless primers specified in Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings" are
indicated.
A. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.
C. When removing tool and die marks is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove
embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation;
with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established
lines and levels.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that
are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size
limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of
adjacent surface.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners
for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood
screws, and other connectors.
E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact
with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being
supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop
Drawings.
B. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure
girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through
top plates of pipe columns.
1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete
or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.
C. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout
column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.
1. Grout base plates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and
leveled.
A. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days
before installing.
B. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Fill
annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout; mixed and placed to
comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 3 mm
toward bollard.
C. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings for bollards located in landscaping areas.
Center and align bollards in holes 75 mm above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and
vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has
cured.
D. Anchor internal sleeves for removable bollards in concrete by inserting into pipe sleeves
preset into concrete . Fill annular space around internal sleeves solidly with nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written
instructions. Slope grout up approximately 3 mm toward internal sleeve.
E. Place removable bollards over internal sleeves and secure with 19-mm machine bolts and
nuts. After tightening nuts, drill holes in bolts for inserting padlocks. Employer will furnish
padlocks.
A. Provide pipe guards at exposed vertical pipes in parking garage where not protected by
curbs or other barriers. Install by bolting to wall or column with expansion anchors.
Provide four 19-mm bolts at each pipe guard. Mount pipe guards with top edge 660 mm
above driving surface.
B. For nosings embedded in concrete steps or curbs, align nosings flush with riser faces and
level with tread surfaces.
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to
improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members
have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims
but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.
1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not
exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids
remain.
A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 Section "High-Performance
Coatings."
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
C. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the
following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
2. Infill of Guards:
D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating
metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or
design, including mechanical finishes on stainless steel.
1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top
rails, posts, and balusters.
2. Fittings and brackets.
3. Assembled Sample of railing system, made from full-size components, including top
rail, post, handrail, and infill. Sample need not be full height.
H. Welding certificates.
I. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
K. Warranty: Sample copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty complying with specified re-
quirements, and stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions of warranty.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single
manufacturer.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous
with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with
paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and
topcoats are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such
items to Project site in time for installation.
C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support
railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Pipe and Tube Railings Warranty: Provide complete warranty in which Manufacturer,
Contractor and Installer are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace
without limitations, all or any part of the metal fabrications specified in this section which
fails or becomes defective in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. All pipe and tube railings are guaranteed to be of good material and workmanship and
free from defects that render it unserviceable for the use for which it is intended.
2. Warranty shall also include:
a. Deterioration in pipe and tube railings materials and coatings; other than due to
normal ageing and weathering; and any defects in adhesives, sealants, fixings,
coverings and other components of the work.
4. To be protected by the guarantee, pipe and tube railings products must be stored in a
suitable enclosure recommended and approved by the manufacturer of pipe and tube
railings items.
5. Warranty Period: five (5) years Total Warranty from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks,
roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish
as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.
B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40),
unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.
D. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M,
unless otherwise indicated.
D. Plate and Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 316L.
2.5 FASTENERS
B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and
class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of
construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching
them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
D. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Section "High-Performance
Coatings."
E. Intermediate Coats and Topcoats: Provide products that comply with Division 9 Section
"High-Performance Coatings."
2.7 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,
member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to
support structural loads.
B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that
maintain structural value of joined pieces.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a
radius of approximately 1 mm unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on
exposed surfaces.
D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar
items.
H. Welded Connections (for steel handrails): Cope components at connections to provide close
fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at
fittings.
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness
shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
I. Nonwelded Connections (for stainless steel handrails): Connect members with concealed
mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth,
rigid, hairline joints.
1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is
manufacturer's standard splicing method.
K. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required;
maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting,
cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close
ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 6 mm or less.
N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous
fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise
indicated.
1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-
resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural
supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.
O. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry
work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings.
Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
P. For railing posts set in concrete, provide stainless-steel sleeves not less than 150 mm long
with inside dimensions not less than 13 mm greater than outside dimensions of post, with
metal plate forming bottom closure.
Q. For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from stainless-steel tube or pipe whose
ID is sized for a close fit with posts; limit movement of post without lateral load, measured
at top, to not more than one-fortieth of post height. Provide socket covers designed and
fabricated to resist being dislodged.
1. Provide chain with eye, snap hook, and staple across gaps formed by removable
railing sections at locations indicated. Fabricate from same metal as railings.
R. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of
open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
A. Galvanized Railings:
1. Hot-dip galvanize steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication.
2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.
3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.
4. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint
adhesion.
5. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to
remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
B. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and
other ferrous components.
C. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean
railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.
E. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
requirements indicated below:
F. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification
No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not
be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.
1. Shop prime uncoated railings with primers specified in Division 9 Section "High-
Performance Coatings" are indicated.
2. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces.
A. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to
verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer.
Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.
B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately
in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of
rack.
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or
finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or
other means without further cutting or fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 2 mm in 1 m.
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from
parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 5 mm in 3
m.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary
for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
A. Nonwelded Connections (for stainless steel handrails): Use mechanical or adhesive joints
for permanently connecting railing components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking
screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings.
B. Welded Connections (for steel handrails): Use fully welded joints for permanently
connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in
"Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field.
C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than
required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending
50 mm beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate
joint within 150 mm of post.
A. Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have
been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. Form or core-drill holes not less than 125 mm deep and 20 mm larger than OD of post for
installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular
space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to
comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, welded to post after placing
anchoring material.
D. Leave anchorage joint exposed with 3-mm buildup, sloped away from post.
E. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by
conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:
1. For stainless-steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to supporting surfaces.
2. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.
F. Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in concrete.
A. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and welded to
railing ends or connected to railing ends using nonwelded connections as applicable to type
of railing.
B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and welded to
railing ends or connected to railing ends using nonwelded connections as applicable to type
of railing.
C. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Provide
brackets with 38-mm clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface.
Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural
loads.
1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger
bolt.
2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support
structural loads.
D. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:
1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and
hanger or lag bolts.
2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
3. For steel-framed partitions, use self-tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to
concealed steel reinforcements.
4. For steel-framed partitions, use toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel framing
or through concealed steel reinforcements.
A. Clean stainless steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with
clean water.
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 Section "High-Performance
Coatings."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary
protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at
time of Substantial Completion.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Related Requirements:
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products required to have recycled content.
C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including top rails, posts, and
infill materials.
2. Assembled Sample of railing system, made from full-size components, including top rail,
post, and infill. Sample need not be full height.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of metal products certifying that products furnished
comply with requirements.
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. Infill of Guards:
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes.
D. Installation Tolerances:
A. Recycled Content: Provide metal materials having recycled content in compliance with Credit
MR 4.
B. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller
marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
2.3 ALUMINUM
A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and
finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability
properties of alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required. Increase
alloy and temper values to suit structural performance requirements.
C. Extruded Structural Round Tubing: ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063-T6, Standard Weight
(Schedule 40) pipe.
D. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209M, Alloy 6061-T6. Tension-leveled, smooth aluminum sheet free
from alloy and mill stamps.
E. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247 (ASTM B 247M), Alloy 6061-T6.
G. Mesh Infill:
1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements provide Futura 240 PC mesh
manufactured by GKD Metal Fabrics, distributed by Fryer Noble, www.fryernoble.com,
and as follows.
a. Base Metal: Aluminum, paint grade, and to comply with structural performance
requirements.
2. Mesh Perimeter Trim: Unless otherwise indicated, edge panels with minimal appearance
U-shaped channels made from aluminum sheet, not less than 1.1 mm thick; welded.
Welds not visible in final construction.
A. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railings: Provide concealed fasteners of type, grade, and class
required to produce connections suitable for securing adjoining railing sections indicated and
capable of withstanding design loads.
1. Provide post-installed anchors to attach brackets and flanges to vertical substrates, and as
follows:
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,
member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to
support structural loads.
B. Shop weld railings in largest units possible; minimize field assembly. Use connections that
maintain structural value of joined pieces. Weld infill panels to adjoining rails and post as
indicated.
1. Cope components at connections to provide close fit. Weld all around at connections.
2. Finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and
welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1 mm unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.
D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
E. Fabricate connections that are exposed to weather in a manner that excludes water. Provide
weep holes where water may accumulate.
F. Form changes in direction by bending to uniform radii selected by Engineer, unless otherwise
indicated.
H. Fabricate railing posts for setting in concrete. Provide stainless-steel sleeves not less than 150
mm long with inside dimensions not less than 13 mm greater than outside dimensions of post,
with metal plate forming bottom closure.
I. Brackets and Flanges: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported
rails.
B. Control of Corrosion: Coat, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint, concealed surfaces of
aluminum that are in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for gratings. Include plans, eleva-
tions, sections, and details of connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide
templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analy-
sis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to dem-
onstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects/ engineers and Employers, and any
other information specified or required by Engineer.
C. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with applicable requirements of the following:
1. Non-Heavy-Duty Metal Bar Gratings: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar
Grating Manual for Steel, Stainless Steel, and Aluminum Gratings and Stair Treads."
2. Heavy-Duty Metal Bar Gratings: Comply with NAAMM MBG 532, "Heavy-Duty
Metal Bar Grating Manual."
A. Field Measurements: Where gratings are indicated to fit to other construction, verify di-
mensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate mea-
surements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delaying the Work.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for gratings, grating frames, and supports. Furnish
setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, con-
crete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in con-
crete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Gratings Warranty: Provide complete warranty in which Manufacturer, Contractor and In-
staller are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace without limita-
tions, all or any part of the gratings specified in this section which fails or becomes defec-
tive in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. All gratings are guaranteed to be of good material and workmanship and free from
defects that render it unserviceable for the use for which it is intended.
2. Warranty shall also include:
a. Deterioration in gratings materials and coatings; other than due to normal age-
ing and weathering; and any defects in sealants, fixings, coverings and other
components of the work.
4. To be protected by the guarantee, metal bar gratings products must be stored suitable
dry enclosure recommended and approved by the manufacturer of gratings items.
5. Warranty Period: five (5) years Total Warranty from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 230, with Z275
coating.
E. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
to be welded.
A. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 316.
2.4 PAINT
C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except con-
taining no asbestos fibers, or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated
fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into exte-
rior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6; with hex
nuts, ASTM A 563M; and, where indicated, flat washers.
E. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with ca-
pability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed
in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as de-
termined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Shop Assembly: Fabricate grating sections in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize
field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark
units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to
support indicated loads.
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corro-
sion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
G. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and
space anchoring devices to secure gratings, frames, and supports rigidly in place and to sup-
port indicated loads.
1. Fabricate toeplates to fit grating units and weld to units in shop, unless otherwise in-
dicated.
2. Toeplate Height: 100 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
A. Medium duty gratings manufactured from Hot-dip galvanized steel. Bearing bars and cross
bars are to be of rectangular section with size and spacing as per manufacturer's written rec-
ommendation for the span and type of loading indicated. Cross bars are to be locked at right
angles to and in the same plane as, the top surface of bearing bars. Properties shall be as fol-
lows:
1. Grating Mark: As indicated, but with bearing bar size not less than that required com-
plying with structural performance requirements.
2. Type: Pressure locked
3. Traffic Surface for steel Bar Gratings: Plain
4. Steel Finish: Hot-dip galvanized with a coating weight of not less than 550 g/sq. m of
coated surface. Shop paint with epoxy primer, intermediate and top-coats of epoxy
high build coating.
5. Cut Outs: Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetrations indicated. Arrange
cutouts to permit grating removal without disturbing items penetrating gratings
6. Fabricate removable grating sections with banding bars attached by welding to entire
perimeter of each section. Include anchors and fasteners of type indicated or, if not
indicated, as recommended by manufacturer for attaching to supports.
a. Provide not less than four weld lugs for each heavy-duty grating section, with
each lug shop welded to two bearing bars.
b. Furnish threaded bolts with nuts and washers for securing grating to supports.
B. Medium and Heavy duty gratings manufactured from Hot-dip galvanized steel or stainless
steel grade 316. Bearing bars and cross bars are to be of rectangular section with size and
spacing as per manufacturer's written recommendation for the span and type of loading indi-
cated. Cross bars are to be locked at right angles to and in the same plane as, the top surface
of bearing bars. Properties shall be as follows:
1. Grating Mark: As indicated, but with bearing bar size not less than that required com-
plying with structural performance requirements.
2. Type (for steel): Welded.
3. Type (for stainless steel): Pressure locked.
4. Traffic Surface for steel Bar Gratings: Plain or serrated as indicated.
5. Steel Finish: Hot-dip galvanized with a coating weight of not less than 550 g/sq. m of
coated surface. Shop paint with epoxy primer, intermediate and top-coats of epoxy
high build coating.
6. Cut Outs: Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetrations indicated. Arrange
cutouts to permit grating removal without disturbing items penetrating gratings
7. Fabricate removable grating sections with banding bars attached by welding to entire
perimeter of each section. Include anchors and fasteners of type indicated or, if not
indicated, as recommended by manufacturer for attaching to supports.
a. Provide not less than four weld lugs for each heavy-duty grating section, with
each lug shop welded to two bearing bars.
b. Furnish threaded bolts with nuts and washers for securing grating to supports.
A. Steel Frames and Supports: Fabricate from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of
welded construction to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive grat-
ings. Miter and weld connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut, drill, and tap units to re-
ceive hardware and similar items.
B. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into maso-
nry.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, space anchors 600 mm o.c. and provide minimum anchor
units in the form of steel straps 32 mm wide by 6 mm thick by 200 mm long.
1. Exterior.
2. Interior, where indicated.
2.9 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
C. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by the hot-dip
process complying with ASTM A 123.
D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with min-
imum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and envi-
ronmental exposure conditions of installed items:
1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
E. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of gratings, frames, and supports, except those with
galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry, unless otherwise in-
dicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop paint-
ing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where neces-
sary for securing gratings to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete
and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from estab-
lished lines and levels and free from rack.
C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into con-
crete or masonry.
D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that
are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limi-
tations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip gal-
vanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corro-
sion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
A. General: Install gratings to comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating
standards that apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation clear-
ances and standard anchoring details.
B. Attach removable units to supporting members with type and size of clips and fasteners in-
dicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by grating manufacturer for type of installation
conditions shown.
C. Attach non-removable units to supporting members by welding where both materials are the
same; otherwise, fasten by bolting as indicated above.
A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coat-
ings."
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Glass-supported railings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Railings: Guards, handrails, and similar devices used for protection of occupants at open-
sided floor areas, pedestrian guidance and support, visual separation, or wall protection.
C. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the
following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
2. Infill of Guards:
D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating
metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
1. Build laboratory mockups at testing agency facility; use personnel, materials, and
methods of construction that will be used at Project site.
2. Test railings according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
3. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of the dates and times when laboratory
mockups will be tested.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design.
1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top
rails, posts, and balusters.
2. Each type of glass required.
3. Fittings and brackets.
4. Assembled Samples of railing systems, made from full-size components, including
top rail, post, handrail, and infill. Show method of finishing members at
intersections. Samples need not be full height.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single
manufacturer.
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Engineer, except with
Engineer's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive
explanatory data to Engineer for review.
F. Safety Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark glass with certification label of the SGCC or
another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall
indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with
which glass complies.
G. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous
with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such
items to Project site in time for installation.
B. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support
railings temporarily by any means that do not suit structural performance requirements.
1.10 WARRANTY
1. All ornamental railings are guaranteed to be of good material and workmanship and
free from defects that render it unserviceable for the use for which it is intended.
2. Warranty shall also include:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks,
roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Provide cast-metal brackets with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded
hanger bolt.
2. Provide either formed- or cast-metal brackets with predrilled hole for exposed bolt
anchorage.
D. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666, Type 316.
2. Wire Rope: 7-by-19 wire rope made from wire complying with ASTM A 492,
Type 316.
3. Wire-Rope Fittings: Connectors of types indicated, fabricated from stainless steel,
and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to minimum breaking
strength of wire rope with which they are used.
2.5 FASTENERS
B. Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class
required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of
construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
C. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching
railings to other work unless otherwise indicated.
D. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times
the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when
installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a
qualified independent testing agency.
1. Material for Exterior Locations and where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group
A4 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 738M, and nuts, ASTM F 836M.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,
member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to
support structural loads.
B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that
maintain structural value of joined pieces.
D. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a
radius of approximately 1 mm unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on
exposed surfaces.
E. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
G. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar
items.
1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is
manufacturer's standard splicing method.
1. As detailed.
K. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required;
maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting,
cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
L. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close
ends of returns, unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 6 mm or less.
N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous
fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise
indicated.
1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-
resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural
supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.
O. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry
work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings.
Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
P. For railing posts set in concrete, provide stainless-steel sleeves not less than 150 mm long
with inside dimensions not less than 13 mm greater than outside dimensions of post, with
metal plate forming bottom closure.
Q. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of
open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.
A. General: Fabricate to sizes and shapes required; provide for proper edge clearance and bite
on glazing panels.
B. Structural Balusters: Provide laminated, tempered glass panels for both straight and curved
sections.
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
C. When removing tool and die marks is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove
embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to
verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer.
Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.
B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately
in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of
rack.
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or
finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or
other means without further cutting or fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 2 mm in 1 m.
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from
parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 5 mm in
3 m.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary
for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
B. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than
required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending
50 mm beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate
joint within 150 mm of post.
A. Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts
have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. Form or core-drill holes not less than 125 mm deep and 20 mm larger than OD of post for
installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular
space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to
comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, attached to post with set screws.
A. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with flanges connected to railing ends and
anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts.
B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and connected to
railing ends using nonwelded connections.
C. Attach handrails to walls with wall brackets except where end flanges are used. Provide
brackets with 38-mm clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface.
Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural
loads.
1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger
bolt.
2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support
structural loads.
D. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:
1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and
hanger or lag bolts.
2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
3. For steel-framed partitions, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or concealed steel
reinforcements using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support
structural loads.
4. For steel-framed partitions, fasten brackets with toggle bolts installed through flanges
of steel framing or through concealed steel reinforcements.
1. Attach base channel to building structure, then insert and connect factory-fabricated
and -assembled glass panels.
2. Adjust spacing of glass panels so gaps between panels are equal before securing in
position.
3. Erect glass railings under direct supervision of manufacturer's authorized technical
personnel.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform
field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.
B. Extent and Testing Methodology: Testing agency will randomly select completed railing
assemblies for testing that are representative of different railing designs and conditions in
the completed Work. Railings will be tested according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935
for compliance with performance requirements.
C. Remove and replace railings where test results indicate that they do not comply with
specified requirements unless they can be repaired in a manner satisfactory to Engineer and
will comply with specified requirements.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean stainless steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap, rinsing with clean
water, and wiping dry.
B. Clean and polish glass as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Wash both exposed
surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for
inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary
protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at
time of Substantial Completion.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Maximum Joint Width: Widest linear gap a joint system tolerates and in which it performs
its designed function without damaging its functional capabilities.
B. Construction joint: The surface where two successive placements of concrete meet, across
which it may be desirable to achieve bond and through which reinforcement may be
continuous.
C. Contraction Joint or Control joint: Formed, sawed, or tooled groove in a concrete structure
to create a weakened plane and regulate the location of cracking resulting from the
dimensional change of different parts of the structure.
D. Expansion joint:
F. Minimum Joint Width: Narrowest linear gap a joint system tolerates and in which it
performs its designed function without damaging its functional capabilities.
G. Movement Capability: Value obtained from the difference between widest and narrowest
widths of a joint opening typically expressed in numerical values (mm or inches) or a
percentage (plus or minus) of nominal value of joint width.
H. Nominal Joint Width: The width of the linear opening specified in practice and in which the
joint system is installed. For joint widths refer to TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile
Installation
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Provide the following for each joint system specified:
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of joint system indicated.
1. Include manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors and finishes
available for each exposed metal and elastomeric seal material.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of architectural joint system indicated.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain architectural joint systems through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Engineer, except with
Engineer's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive
explanatory data to Engineer for review.
1.6 WARRANTY
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of exterior wall and soffit joint systems with roof expansion
assemblies to ensure that wall transitions are watertight.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221M, Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209M, Alloy 6061-T6
for sheet and plate.
D. Strip Seals: ASTM E 1783; preformed elastomeric membrane or tubular extrusions having
an internal baffle system and secured in or over a joint by a metal locking rail.
G. Fire Barriers: Any material or material combination, when fire tested after cycling,
designated to resist the passage of flame and hot gases through a movement joint and to
meet performance criteria for required rating period.
H. Moisture Barrier: Flexible elastomeric material, PVC , minimum 30 mils thick, EPDM,
minimum 45 mils thick or Santoprene.
I. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, clips, fasteners, set screws, spacers, and
other accessories compatible with material in contact, as indicated or required for complete
installations.
A. General: Provide architectural joint systems of design, basic profile, materials, and
operation indicated. Provide units with capability to accommodate variations in adjacent
surfaces.
1. Furnish units in longest practicable lengths to minimize field splicing. Install with
hairline mitered corners where joint changes direction or abuts other materials.
2. Include factory-fabricated closure materials and transition pieces, tee-joints, corners,
curbs, cross-connections, and other accessories as required to provide continuous
joint systems.
B. Design architectural joint systems for the following size and movement characteristics:
4. Fire-Resistance Rating: Provide joint system and fire-barrier assembly with a rating
not less than that indicated in fire zoning plans.
5. Moisture Barrier: Manufacturer's standard.
4. Fire-Resistance Rating: Provide joint system and fire-barrier assembly with a rating
not less than that indicated in fire zoning plans.
5. Moisture Barrier: Manufacturer's standard.
4. Fire-Resistance Rating: Provide joint system and fire-barrier assembly with a rating
not less than that indicated in fire zoning plans.
5. Moisture Barrier: Manufacturer's standard.
4. Fire-Resistance Rating: Provide joint system and fire-barrier assembly with a rating
not less than that indicated in fire zoning plans.
5. Moisture Barrier: Manufacturer's standard.
4. Fire-Resistance Rating: Provide joint system and fire-barrier assembly with a rating
not less than that indicated in fire zoning plans.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces and blockouts where architectural joint systems will be installed for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
B. Repair concrete slabs and blockouts using manufacturer's recommended repair grout of
compressive strength adequate for anticipated structural loadings.
C. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions for installing joint
systems. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction indicated and
to provide for secure attachment of joint systems.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling, and installing
architectural joint assemblies and materials unless more stringent requirements are
indicated.
B. Metal Frames: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install joint systems.
1. Install in true alignment and proper relationship to joints and adjoining finished
surfaces measured from established lines and levels.
2. Adjust for differences between actual structural gap and nominal design gap due to
ambient temperature at time of installation. Notify Engineer where discrepancies
occur that will affect proper joint installation and performance.
3. Cut and fit ends to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal without
buckling of frames.
4. Locate in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces.
5. Heavy-Duty Systems: Repair or grout blockout as required for continuous frame
support and to bring frame to proper level. Shimming is not allowed.
6. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 75 mm
from each end and not more than 600 mm o.c.
C. Seals in Metal Frames: Install elastomeric seals and membranes in frames to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions. Install with minimum number of end joints.
1. Fire Barriers: Install fire barriers to provide continuous, uninterrupted fire resistance
throughout length of joint, including transitions and field splices.
H. Water Barrier: Provide water barrier at exterior joints and where called for on Drawings.
Provide drainage fittings at a maximum of 15.2 m or where indicated.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete. When
protective covering is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections. Where necessary due to
heavy construction traffic, remove and properly store cover plates or seals and install
temporary protection over joints. Reinstall cover plates or seals prior to Substantial
Completion of the Work.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 38 mm actual or greater but less than 114 mm actual in
least dimension.
B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the
following:
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in
effect for Project:
1. Preservative-treated wood.
2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.
3. Power-driven fasteners.
4. Powder-actuated fasteners.
5. Expansion anchors.
6. Metal framing anchors.
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for
air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
B. Deliver interior wood materials that are to be exposed to view only after building is
enclosed and weatherproof, wet work other than painting is dry, and HVAC system is
operating and maintaining temperature and humidity at occupancy levels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp
on end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade
compliance issued by grading agency.
3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum
dressed sizes for dry lumber.
4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not in
contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated
according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC
Board of Review.
1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back
of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued
by inspection agency.
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior
masonry or concrete walls.
4. Wood framing members that are less than 460 mm above the ground in crawl spaces
or unexcavated areas.
5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27
(plywood).
1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back
of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued
by inspection agency.
C. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations
that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.
A. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent for 38-mm actual thickness or less, 19 percent for
more than 38-mm actual thickness.
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of
other construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Cants.
4. Furring.
5. Grounds.
6. Utility shelving.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 15
percent maximum moisture content and the following species:
C. For exposed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and the
following species and grades:
1. Eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Premium or
2 Common (Sterling) grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
2. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.
D. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content andthe
following species and grades:
E. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade
lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects
that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.
F. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
G. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots
capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
B. Softwood Lumber Trim for Transparent (Stain or Clear) Finish: Provide one of the
following species and grade:
1. Grade Superior or C & Btr Finish Douglas fir-larch or Douglas fir-south; NLGA,
WCLIB, or WWPA.
2. Clear Heart western red cedar; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
C. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent (Stain or Clear) Finish: Clear closed grain
hardwoods.
D. Lumber Trim for Opaque (Painted) Finish: Either finger-jointed or solid lumber, of the
following species and grades:
1. Moldings for Transparent (Stain or Clear) Finish: N-grade closed grain hardwoods,
selected for compatible grain and color.
2. Moldings for Opaque (Painted) Finish: P-grade white pine.
B. Shelf Cleats: 19-by-140-mm boards with hole and notch to receive clothes rods, of same
species and grade indicated above for interior lumber trim for opaque finish.
C. Shelf Brackets: Prime-painted formed steel with provision to support clothes rod where rod
is indicated.
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC, fire-
retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 19-mm nominal
thickness.
2.9 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified in this Article for material and manufacture.
E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer
heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being
fastened.
G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6; with
ASTM A 563M hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed
in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete
as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted.
Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements
for attaching other construction.
C. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials,
fixtures, specialty items, and trim.
1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections
where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels.
Space clips not more than 406 mm o.c.
G. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated
and as follows:
1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than
2438 mm o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted
to close furred spaces.
2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level,
at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 2438 mm o.c. Where fire blocking
is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of
same width as framing members and 38-mm actual- thickness.
3. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not
more than 6 m o.c.
H. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or
with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere
with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints
or optimum joint arrangement.
I. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.
K. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not
fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish
materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting
wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated.
A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to
shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate
locations with other work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with
surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as
required for tolerance of finish work.
C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 19-by-38-mm actual- size furring vertically at
400 mm o.c.
A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum
lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 610 mm long except where
necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns
and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout
length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate
treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet,
apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with
EPA-registered label.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips
for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork
installation.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For panel products, fire-retardant-treated materials and finishing materials
and processes.
1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
1. Lumber with or for transparent finish, not less than 300 sq. cm, for each species and
cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge.
2. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent-
finished woodwork.
3. Veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 300 by 600 mm, for each
species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish as specified.
4. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, 300 sq. cm for lumber
and 200 by 250 mm for panels, for each finish system and color, with exposed
surface finished.
5. Submit samples for choice and approval of veneer matching.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-
service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels and certificates indicating that
woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.
F. Mockups: Before fabricating and installing interior architectural woodwork, build mockups
for each form of construction and finish required to verify selections made under sample
Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.
Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the
completed Work:
1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed
by Engineer.
2. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
fabricated and installed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting interior architectural
woodwork fabrication.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
6. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and installer are
jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace architectural woodwork that
does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Failures
include, but are not limited to, cracking, deforming, discoloration, fading, moisture
penetration or otherwise deteriorating beyond normal weathering.
C. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Employer may
have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents.
A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage
woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other
than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with
requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other
related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural
woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for
each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: American Red oak, Douglas Fir, western red
cedar and suede.
C. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Douglas fir, white pine and white hardwoods.
A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with
requirements in this Article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with
fire-test-response characteristics specified.
1. Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced
woodworking standard or that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective.
1. For panels 19 mm thick and less, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2 except
for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 11 MPa; modulus of
elasticity, 2070 MPa; internal bond, 550 kPa; and screw-holding capacity on face
and edge, 1100 and 1000 N, respectively.
2. For panels 20 to 32 mm thick, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-1 except for
the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 9 MPa; modulus of
elasticity, 1720 MPa; linear expansion, 0.50 percent; and screw-holding capacity on
face and edge, 1100 and 780 N, respectively.
3. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Duraflake FR" by
Weyerhaeuser.
B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure
anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside
face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-
steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for
wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in
installation areas.
C. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before
fabrication.
1. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication
will be complete.
2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.
Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be
removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check
measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings
before disassembling for shipment.
E. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, and similar
items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce
accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.
A. Grade: Premium.
B. Wood Species and Cut: Douglas fir, western red cedar and red oak.
1. Provide split species on trim that faces areas with different wood species, matching
each face of woodwork to species and cut of finish wood surfaces in areas finished.
C. For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for
width.
D. For rails wider or thicker than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for
width or thickness.
E. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members,
except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
F. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require
field assembly.
G. Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and
prepare for field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together.
A. Grade: Premium.
C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members,
except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
D. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require
field assembly.
E. Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and
prepare for field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together.
A. Grade: Premium.
C. For frames or jambs wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue
for width.
D. Fire-Rated Interior Frames and Jambs: Products fabricated from fire-retardant particleboard
or fire-retardant medium-density fiberboard with veneered, exposed surfaces and listed and
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for
fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
A. Grade: Premium.
C. Shop Priming: Shop apply the prime coat including backpriming, if any, for transparent-
finished items specified to be field finished. Refer to Division 9 painting Sections for
material and application requirements.
D. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing
architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-
grain surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require
backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset
decorative panels.
E. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. AWI Finish System: Catalyzed polyurethane.
3. Staining: Match Engineer's sample.
4. Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from
closed-grain wood before staining and finishing.
5. Filled Finish for Open-Grain Woods: After staining (if any), apply paste wood filler
to open-grain woods and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood.
6. Sheen: Semigloss, 46-60 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per
ASTM D 523.
F. Opaque Finish:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. AWI Finish System: Catalyzed polyurethane.
3. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
4. Sheen: Semigloss, 46-60 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per
ASTM D 523.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in
Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.
B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements
for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.
C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 3 mm in 2400 mm.
D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged
finish at cuts.
G. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-
length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do
not use pieces less than 2400 mm long, except where shorter single-length pieces are
necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.
1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth,
and finish same as wood base if finished.
2. Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing.
3. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 3
mm in 2400 mm.
H. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail
holes with matching filler where exposed.
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform
appearance.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for method of
application, primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and protection course.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers through one
source from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by
manufacturer of primary materials.
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit asphalt dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers'
written instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Asphalt Dampproofing:
a. Cormix.
b. Fosroc.
c. Master Builders Technologies.
d. Meadows, W. R., Inc.
e. Owens Corning; Trumbull Division.
f. Sika Corporation.
g. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.
a. Cartonal.
b. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Construction Products Div.
B. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as
recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for surface smoothness and other
conditions affecting performance of work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from
being stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from
entering and clogging weep holes and drains.
B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints,
and apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime material manufacturer.
1. Apply vertically from finished-grade line to top of footing or foundation, extend over
top and down face of footing or foundation.
2. Extend onto blinding beds, intersecting walls andfootings, but do not extend onto
surfaces exposed to view when Project is completed, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external corners,
changes in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where indicated as "reinforced," by
embedding an 200-mm wide strip of asphalt-coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of
dampproofing. Dampproofing coat required for embedding fabric is in addition to
other coats required.
C. Apply a uniform coat of hot asphalt by mopping or spraying at not less than 98 kg or
1 L/sq. m.
D. Apply a second coat as specified above. Apply double thickness of second coat where first
application has failed to produce a smooth, shiny, impervious coat.
A. On Concrete Footings, Foundations, Foundation Columns and Walls: Apply two brush or
spray coats at not less than 0.5 L/sq. m for first coat and 0.4 L/sq. m for second coat, or one
trowel coat at not less than 1.6 L/sq. m.
B. On Unparged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply primer and two brush or spray coats at not
less than 0.5 L/sq. m for first coat and 0.4 L/sq. m for second coat, or primer and one
trowel coat at not less than 1.6 L/sq. m.
C. On Unparged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply primer and one trowel coat at not less
than 1.6 L/sq. m.
D. On Backs of Concrete Retaining Walls: Apply one brush or spray coat at not less than 0.5
L/sq. m.
E. On Backs of Masonry Retaining Walls: Apply primer and one brush or spray coat at not
less than 0.5 L/sq. m.
A. On Concrete Footings, Foundations, Foundation Columns and Walls: Apply two brush or
spray coats at not less than 0.6 L/sq. m for first coat and 0.4 L/sq. m for second coat, one
fibered brush or spray coat at not less than 1.2 L/sq. m, or one trowel coat at not less than
1.6 L/sq. m.
B. On Unparged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply primer and two brush or spray coats at not
less than 0.6 L/sq. m for first coat and 0.4 L/sq. m for second coat, primer and one fibered
brush or spray coat at not less than 1.2 L/sq. m, or primer and one trowel coat at not less
than 2 L/sq. m.
C. On Unparged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply primer and one trowel coat at not less
than 2 L/sq. m.
D. On Backs of Concrete Retaining Walls: Apply one brush or spray coat at not less than 0.5
L/sq. m.
E. On Backs of Masonry Retaining Walls: Apply primer and one brush or spray coat at not
less than 0.5 L/sq. m.
3.8 CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Division 2 Section "Foundation Drainage Systems" for drainage panels and geotextile
filter fabrics.
2. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete curing and finishing.
3. Division 5 Section "Architectural Joint Systems" for expansion-joint systems.
4. Division 7 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing" for asphalt damproofing to below-
grade surfaces.
5. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint-sealant materials and installation.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and
treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of
waterproofing.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate
joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with
adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.
E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency acceptable to Engineer,
indicating and interpreting test results of waterproofing for compliance with requirements,
based on comprehensive testing of current waterproofing formulations.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1. Construct mockup in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
directed by Engineer.
2. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockup will be
constructed.
3. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockup before starting sheet waterproofing.
4. If Engineer determines mockup does not comply with requirements, reapply
waterproofing until mockup isapproved.
5. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
A. Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and
directions for storing and mixing with other components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected
location and within temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer.
C. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to
a damp or wet substrate.
1.8 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
a. Cartonal.
b. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Construction Products Div.
D. Sheet Strips: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt composite sheet strips of same material and
thickness as sheet waterproofing.
E. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold fluid applied, trowel grade or
low viscosity.
G. Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes
recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance.
1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by
waterproofing manufacturer.
2. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by
plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray
affecting other construction.
C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other
penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets,
holes, and other voids.
E. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from
joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.
1. Install sheet strips and center over treated construction and contraction joints and
cracks exceeding a width of 1.5 mm.
F. Bridge and cover isolation joints, expansion joints and discontinuous deck-to-wall and deck-
to-deck joints with overlapping sheet strips.
1. Invert and loosely lay first sheet strip over center of joint. Firmly adhere second
sheet strip to first and overlap to substrate.
G. Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM D 6135.
1. Install membrane strips centered over vertical inside corners. Install 20-mm fillets of
liquid membrane on horizontal inside corners and as follows:
H. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations
through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to ASTM D 6135.
B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will
be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24
hours.
C. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets
and maintain uniform 75-mm- minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams
and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation.
1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between minus 4 and plus 5 deg C,
install self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt sheets produced for low-temperature
application. Do not use low-temperature sheets if ambient or substrate temperature is
higher than 16 deg C.
D. Two-Ply Application: Install sheets to form a membrane with lap widths not less than 50
percent of sheet widths to provide a minimum of 2 thicknesses of sheet membrane over
areas to receive waterproofing.
E. Horizontal Application: Apply sheets from low point to high point of decks to ensure that
side laps shed water.
F. Apply continuous sheets over sheet strips bridging substrate cracks, construction, and
contraction joints.
H. Install sheet waterproofing and auxiliary materials to tie into adjacent waterproofing.
I. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements.
Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheets extending 150 mm beyond
repaired areas in all directions.
J. Correct deficiencies in or remove sheet waterproofing that does not comply with
requirements, repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.
A. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to recommendations in
ASTM D 5957, after completing waterproofing but before overlying construction is placed.
Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable water.
B. Engage an independent testing agency acceptable to Engineer, to observe flood testing and
examine underside of decks and terminations for evidence of leaks during flood testing.
B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
C. Protect installed waterproofing and protection course from damage due to ultraviolet light,
harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings
where installation may be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by
permanent construction immediately after installation.
D. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 2 Section "Foundation Drainage Systems" for drainage panels and geotextile
filter fabrics.
2. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete curing and finishing.
3. Division 5 Section "Architectural Joint Systems" for expansion-joint systems.
4. Division 7 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing" for asphalt damproofing to below-
grade surfaces.
5. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint-sealant materials and installation.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and
treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of
waterproofing.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate
joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with
adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.
E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency acceptable to Engineer,
indicating and interpreting test results of waterproofing for compliance with requirements,
based on comprehensive testing of current waterproofing formulations.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1. Construct mockup in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
directed by Engineer.
2. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockup will be
constructed.
3. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockup before starting sheet waterproofing.
4. If Engineer determines mockup does not comply with requirements, reapply
waterproofing until mockup is approved.
5. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
A. Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and
directions for storing and mixing with other components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected
location and within temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer.
C. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.
1.8 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
a. Attab.
b. Bitumat.
c. Derbit, SpA.
d. Nord Bitumi, SpA.
a. Cartonal.
b. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Construction Products Div.
A. APP-Modified Bituminous Sheet, Smooth Surfaced: ASTM D 6222, Grade S, Type I or II,
polyester reinforced, atactic-polypropylene-modified bituminous sheet, smooth surfaced;
suitable for application indicated and installation method specified; for use as follows
1. Use: Base and top plies of two-ply, modified bituminous sheet waterproofing.
B. Physical Properties: Provide APP-modified bituminous sheet materials with the following
properties when tested according to ASTM D 5147:
C. Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type III or Type IV, as recommended by sheet waterproofing
manufacturer.
1. Label each container or provide certification with each load of bulk asphalt
identifying type of asphalt and indicating softening point, minimum flash point,
equiviscous temperature, and finished blowing temperature.
E. Waterproofing and Sheet Flashing Accessories: Provide sealants, pourable sealers, cone
and vent flashings, inside and outside corner flashings, termination reglets and bars, and
other accessories recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use.
F. Protection Course: The following or, at Contractor's option, alternative means of protection
as recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use, and acceptable to
Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance.
1. Do not proceed with installation until after the minimum concrete curing period
recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture
by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
3. Notify Engineer in writing of anticipated problems using waterproofing over
substrate.
4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide
clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application.
B. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other
penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
C. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets,
holes, and other voids.
D. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrate. Remove dust and dirt from
joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.
E. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray
affecting other construction.
F. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations
through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
G. Install and secure cants, reinforcement strips, flashings and miscellaneous accessories to
comply with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements for treatments at
construction joints, horizontal to vertical surface intersections, inside and outside corners,
perimeters, and edges.
1. Unroll sheet and allow to relax for the minimum time period required by
manufacturer.
C. Horizontal Application: Apply sheets from low point to high point to ensure that side laps
shed water
D. Laps: Accurately align sheets, without stretching, and maintain uniform side and end laps
of minimum dimensions required. Stagger end laps. Heat-weld side and end laps and
completely seal by rolling, leaving no voids.
1. Repair tears and voids in laps and lapped seams not completely sealed.
E. Repair tears and voids in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten
fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 150 mm beyond repaired
areas in all directions.
F. Correct deficiencies to satisfaction of Engineer, or remove sheet waterproofing that does not
comply with requirements, repair and prepare substrates, re-apply waterproofing and repair
flashings.
A. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to ASTM D 5957, after
completing waterproofing but before overlying construction is placed. Install temporary
containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable water.
B. Engage an independent testing agency acceptable to Engineer, to observe flood testing and
examine underside of decks and terminations for evidence of leaks during flood testing.
B. Protect installed waterproofing and protection course from damage due to ultraviolet light,
harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings
where installation may be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by
permanent construction immediately after installation.
C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Section:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written
instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested
physical and performance properties of waterproofing.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate
joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with
adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.
1. Include setting drawings showing layout, sizes, sections, profiles, and joint details of
pedestal-supported concrete pavers.
E. Installer Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out
successfully by the installer with the same product endorsed by the manufacturer’s
representative.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this Section
with minimum three years documented experience and that is approved, authorized, or
licensed by the product manufacturer to install his product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's warranty.
C. Coverage Rate: for liquid applied coatings, calculate the quantity of material needed for the
work in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. Submit calculations for
Engineer’s approval. Divide the areas to be coated and allocate the appropriate quantity of
coating material for each area.
D. Mockups: Before beginning installation, install waterproofing to 9.3 sq. mof deck to
demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, corner treatment, thickness,
texture, and execution quality. Install pavers and paver supports to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
A. Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken, labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, shelf life, and
directions for storing and mixing with other components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected
location and within the temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer.
C. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to
a damp or wet substrate, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures
are less than 3 deg C above dew point.
1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when such weather
conditions are imminent during application and curing period.
1.7 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Protection Course for interior areas: board, one piece cellular extrusion of polypropylene
copolymer 4 mm thick.
B. Protection Course for plaza deck pavers location: ASTM D 6506, semirigid sheets of
fiberglass or mineral-reinforced-asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-
saturated fibrous liners and as follows:
2.5 INSULATION
a. DiversiFoam Products.
A. Plaza Deck Pavers: Heavyweight, hydraulically pressed, concrete units, square edged,
manufactured for use as plaza deck pavers; minimum compressive strength of 52 MPa,
ASTM C 140; absorption not greater than 5 percent, ASTM C 140; no breakage and
maximum 1 percent mass loss when tested for freeze-thaw resistance according to
ASTM C 67.
B. Paver Pedestals unless otherwise detailed: Paver manufacturer's standard SBR rubber, high-
density polyethylene, or polyurethane paver support assembly, including adjustable or
stackable pedestals, shims, and spacer tabs for joint spacing of 3 to 5 mm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by
waterproofing manufacturer.
2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture
by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage or overspray
affecting other construction.
C. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of
waterproofing fluids.
D. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, acid residues,
and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
1. Abrasive blast clean concrete surfaces uniformly to expose top surface of fine
aggregate according to ASTM D 4259 with a self-contained, recirculating, blast-
cleaning apparatus. Remove material to provide a sound surface free of laitance,
E. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other
voids.
C. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications, and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the
first preparation coat when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
1. Provide sealant cants around penetrations and at inside corners of deck-to-wall butt
joints when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 898and
waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and
cracks, complying with ASTM D 4258, before coating surfaces.
B. Install sheet flashing and bond to deck and wall substrates where indicated or required
according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Extend sheet flashings onto perpendicular surfaces and other work penetrating
substrate according to ASTM C 898.
E. Install protection course with butted joints over nominally cured membrane before starting
subsequent construction operations.
A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or
deck substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives that do not
penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile fabric to maintain continuity.
Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction.
A. Install one or more layers of board insulation to achieve required thickness over
waterproofed surfaces. Cut and fit to within 19 mm of projections and penetrations.
1. Fill paver pedestal with concrete mix, strike smooth with top of pedestal, and cure
according to ACI 301.
C. Loosely lay pavers on pedestals, maintaining a uniform open joint width. Tightly seat
pavers against spacers to eliminate lateral movement or drift of paving assembly. Align
joint patterns parallel in each direction.
D. Install pavers to not vary more than 1.6 mm in elevation between adjacent pavers or more
than 1.6 mm from surface plane elevation of individual paver.
E. Maintain tolerances of paving installation within 1:48 of surface plane in any direction.
B. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to recommendations in
ASTM D 5957, after completing waterproofing but before overlaying construction is placed.
Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable water.
C. Engage an independent testing agency to observe flood testing and examine underside of
decks and terminations for evidence of leaks during flood testing.
B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
C. Protect installed board insulation from damage due to ultraviolet light, harmful weather
exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Immediately after installation, provide
temporary coverings where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and
protected by permanent construction.
D. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. Include recommendations for substrate
preparation, method of application, number of coats and coverage.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and details of waterproofing preparation and application.
Show expansion joint details and waterproofing application at obstructions and penetrations.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain crystalline waterproofing products and materials through one
source from a single manufacturer.
A. Proceed with waterproofing work only after pipe sleeves, vents, curbs, inserts, drains, and
other projections through the substrate to be waterproofed have been completed. Proceed
only after concrete and masonry substrate defects, including honeycombs, voids, and cracks,
have been repaired to provide a sound substrate free of forming materials, including reveal
inserts.
1.6 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 MATERIALS
D. Water: Potable.
E. Crystalline Waterproofing: A blend of portland cement, specially treated sand, and active
chemicals formulated to penetrate by capillary action into concrete and to chemically react
with free lime in the presence of water to develop crystalline growth within concrete
capillaries. This produces impervious, dense, waterproof concrete with properties meeting
or exceeding the following criteria:
F. Patching Compound: Ready-mixed cementitious waterproofing and repair mortar for filling
and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other imperfections with properties
meeting or exceeding the following:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls, floors, and other surfaces where waterproofing is to be applied, for
compliance with requirements for surface preparation, cleaning, and other conditions
affecting waterproofing performance.
1. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect other work from dripping or splatter from crystalline waterproofing during
application. Provide temporary enclosure to confine operation, to prevent polluting the air,
and to ensure adequate ambient temperatures and ventilation conditions for application.
B. Stop active water leaks with plugging and patching compounds according to waterproofing
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Schedule cleaning and surface preparation so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning
and preparation process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces.
E. Mask-off surfaces adjoining areas to receive waterproofing treatment where surface damage
or discoloration might result from application of waterproofing. Do not allow crystalline
waterproofing or crystalline compound to migrate into reveals or annular spaces intended
for resilient sealants or gaskets, such as joint spaces between pipes and pipe sleeves.
F. At cracks in concrete, remove loosened chips and cut square reveal approximately 25 mm
deep.
3.3 APPLICATION
C. Protect all adjacent surfaces. Dampen surfaces with water before applying waterproofing.
D. Apply waterproofing coating evenly and fill voids and pores of substrate with waterproofing
slurry. Keep tools clean and free from build-up.
E. Apply the number of coats at the rates recommended by the manufacturer for each coat.
After allowing previous coat to cure, dampen the wall before applying additional coats.
G. Waterproofing Treatment Extensions: Apply treatment to columns that are integral with
walls to be treated, and extend treatment onto interior, nontreated walls that intersect
exterior, treated walls, for a distance of 600 mm for cast-in-place concrete and 1200 mm for
masonry. Where floors (but not walls) are treated, extend treatment 300 mm high onto
exterior walls and onto both exterior and interior columns. Unless otherwise indicated,
extend treatment to every surface of substrate in area indicated for treatment, including stair
treads and risers, pipe trenches, pipe chases, pits, sumps, and similar offsets and features.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect applied crystalline waterproofing from rapid drying, severe weather exposure, and
water accumulation. Maintain completed Work in moist condition for not less than seven
days by covering with impervious sheeting or by other curing procedures recommended by
waterproofing manufacturer.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Show extent of each traffic coating. Include details for treating substrate
joints and cracks, flashings, deck penetrations, and other termination conditions.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors,
textures, and patterns available for each type of finish product indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of traffic coating required, prepared on rigid
backing and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work.
F. Material Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency acceptable to Engineer
indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of traffic coatings with requirements,
based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations within the last three years.
L. Applicator Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out
successfully by the Applicator with the same product endorsed by the manufacturer’s
representative.
D. Mockups: Apply mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Engineer will select one representative surface for each traffic coating and each
substrate to receive traffic coatings. Apply each coating to at least 20 sq. m of each
substrate to demonstrate surface preparation, joint and crack treatment, thickness,
texture, color, and standard of workmanship.
2. Remove and reapply mockups until they are approved by Engineer.
3. Keep approved mockups undisturbed during construction as a standard for judging
completed traffic coatings.
4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
E. Coverage Rate: for liquid applied coatings, calculate the quantity of material needed for the
work in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. Submit calculations for
Engineer’s approval. Divide the areas to be coated and allocate the appropriate quantity of
coating material for each area.
A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers with seals unbroken and bearing
manufacturer's labels showing the following information:
B. Store materials in a clean, dry location protected from exposure to direct sunlight. In
storage areas, maintain environmental conditions within range recommended in writing by
manufacturer.
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply traffic coatings within the range of ambient and
substrate temperatures recommended in writing by manufacturer. Do not apply traffic
coatings to damp or wet substrates, when temperatures are below 5 deg C, when relative
humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 3 deg C above dew point.
1. Do not apply traffic coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist, or when such weather
conditions are imminent during the application and curing period. Apply only when
frost-free conditions occur throughout the depth of the substrate.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Employer of
other rights Employer may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall
be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
1. Deterioration of traffic coatings includes, but is not limited to, the following:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
C. VOC Content: Provide traffic coatings and pavement marking paints, for use inside the
weatherproofing system, with VOC content of 150 g/L when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C. Vehicular Traffic Coating Grade: Use heavy-duty grade at ramps and turning areas; use
medium duty grade at driving aisles and parking bays, all as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Material: Epoxy.
E. Preparatory and Base Coats: Single- or multicomponent aromatic liquid urethane elastomer.
G. Topcoat: Single- or multicomponent, aromatic liquid urethane elastomer for internal use
and Single- or multicomponent, aromatic liquid urethane elastomer with UV inhibitors for
external use.
I. Aggregate: Uniformly graded washed silica sand of particle sizes, shape, and minimum
hardness recommended in writing by traffic coating manufacturer.
A. Pavement-Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate free, ready mixed,
complying with FS TT-P-1952, with drying time of less than 45 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements and for
other conditions affecting performance of traffic coatings.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Applicator, listing conditions
detrimental to performance.
2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates.
3. Begin coating application only after minimum concrete curing and drying period
recommended by traffic coating manufacturer has passed, after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected, and after surfaces are dry.
4. Verify that substrates are visibly dry and free of moisture.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean and prepare substrates according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written
recommendations to produce clean, dust-free, dry substrate for traffic coating application.
B. Mask adjoining surfaces not receiving traffic coatings, deck drains, and other deck substrate
penetrations to prevent spillage, leaking, and migration of coatings.
1. Remove grease, oil, paints, and other penetrating contaminants from concrete.
2. Remove concrete fins, ridges, and other projections.
3. Remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, concrete hardeners, form-
release agents, and other incompatible materials that might affect coating adhesion.
4. Remove remaining loose material to provide a sound surface, and clean surfaces
according to ASTM D 4258.
A. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through traffic
coatings and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 1127 and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Provide sealant cants at penetrations and at reinforced and nonreinforced deck-to-wall butt
joints.
D. Install sheet flashings at deck-to-wall expansion and dynamic joints, and bond to deck and
wall substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrates according to ASTM C 1127 and
traffic coating manufacturer's written recommendations. Before coating surfaces, remove
dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.
A. Apply traffic coating material according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written
recommendations.
A. Do not apply traffic paint for striping and other markings until traffic coating has cured
according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Apply traffic paint for striping and other markings with mechanical equipment to produce
uniform straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates for a (0.38-mm-)
minimum wet film thickness.
C. Spread glass beads uniformly into wet traffic paint at a rate of (0.72 kg/L).
A. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control
testing:
1. Samples of material delivered to Project site shall be taken, identified, sealed, and
certified in presence of Engineer.
2. Testing agency shall perform tests for characteristics specified, using applicable
referenced testing procedures or, if not referenced, using tests cited in manufacturer's
product data.
3. Testing agency shall verify thickness of coatings during traffic coating application.
4. If test results show traffic coating materials do not comply with requirements, remove
noncomplying materials, prepare surfaces, and reapply traffic coatings.
B. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to recommendations in
ASTM D 5957, after traffic coating has completely cured. Install temporary containment
assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable water.
C. Final Traffic Coating Inspection: Arrange for traffic coating manufacturer's technical
personnel to inspect membrane installation on completion.
B. Protect traffic coatings from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
C. Clean spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes penetrating water-repellent treatments for the following vertical and
horizontal surfaces:
1. Concrete (unpainted).
B. Related Sections:
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Field Samples: Engineer will select one representative surface for each substrate to receive
water repellents. Apply water repellent to each substrate, with either partial or full coverage
as directed. Comply with application requirements of this Section.
C. Qualification Data: For qualified Applicator and testing agency to comply with
"Performance Requirements" and as supplemented in "Quality Assurance" Article.
E. Installer Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out
successfully by the installer with the same product endorsed by the manufacturer’s
representative.
A. Limitations: Proceed with application only when the following existing and forecasted
weather and substrate conditions permit water repellents to be applied according to
manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements:
1. Concrete surfaces and mortar have cured for not less than 28 days.
2. Building has been closed in for not less than 30 days before treating wall assemblies.
3. Ambient temperature is above 4.4 deg C and below 37.8 deg C and will remain so
for 24 hours.
4. Substrate is not frozen and substrate-surface temperature is above 4.4 deg C and
below 37.8 deg C.
5. Rain or snow is not predicted within 24 hours.
6. Not less than seven days have passed since surfaces were last wet.
7. Windy conditions do not exist that might cause water repellent to be blown onto
vegetation or surfaces not intended to be treated.
1.8 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Silane/Siloxane-Blend, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, silane and siloxane blend with
400 g/L or less of VOCs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements and conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry according to water-repellent manufacturer's
requirements. Check moisture content in three representative locations by method
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Inspect for previously applied treatments that may inhibit penetration or performance
of water repellents.
3. Verify that there is no efflorescence or other removable residues that would be
trapped beneath the application of water repellent.
4. Verify that required repairs are complete, cured, and dry before applying water
repellent.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Cleaning: Before application of water repellent, clean substrate of substances that could
impair penetration or performance of product according to water-repellent manufacturer's
written instructions and as follows:
B. Protect adjoining work, including mortar and sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow-
over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there
is the possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live vegetation.
C. Coordination with Sealant Joints: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints
adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured.
1. Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and
compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and
sealant materials identical to those required.
3.3 APPLICATION
C. Apply a second saturation coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting
of surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if written
instructions are not applicable to Project conditions.
A. Testing of Water-Repellent Material: Employer reserves the right to invoke the following
procedure at any time and as often as Employer deems necessary during the period when
water repellent is being applied:
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of water-repellent material with
product requirements.
3. Employer may direct Contractor to stop applying water repellents if test results show
material being used does not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall
remove noncomplying material from Project site, pay for testing, and correct
deficiency of surfaces treated with rejected materials, as approved by Engineer..
B. Coverage Test: In the presence of Engineer, hose down a dry, repellent-treated surface to
verify complete and uniform product application. A change in surface color will indicate
incomplete application.
1. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of the dates and times when surfaces will be
tested.
2. Reapply water repellent until coverage test indicates complete coverage.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged
by water-repellent application as work progresses. Correct damage to work of other trades
caused by water-repellent application, as approved by Engineer.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
B. Related Sections:
1.3 DEFINITION
A. General Performance: Metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies shall comply with
performance requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication,
installation, or other defects in construction.
C. Air Infiltration: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.3 L/s per sq. m of wall
area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference:
D. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to
ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference:
1. Wind Loads:
a. Basic Wind Speed: 161 km/hr (100 MPH) according to UBC latest edition
unless otherwise shown on structural drawings.
2. Seismic Loads: Seismic Zone 2A according to UBC latest edition unless otherwise
shown on structural drawings.
3. Deflection Limits: Metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies shall withstand wind
loads with horizontal deflections no greater than 1/175 of the span at the perimeter
and 1/60 of the span anywhere in the panel.
F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of
joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on
surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type
of metal-faced composite wall panel and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal-faced composite wall
panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment
system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish among
factory-, shop-, and field-assembled work.
1. Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1:10:
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal-faced composite wall panel indicated
with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of
size indicated below:
1. Metal-Faced Composite Wall Panels: Minimum 300 x 300 mm. Include fasteners,
closures, and other metal-faced composite wall panel accessories.
2. Trim and Closures: 300 mm long. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories.
3. Accessories: 300-mm- long Samples for each type of accessory.
4. Exposed Gaskets: 300 mm long.
5. Exposed Sealants: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint
sealants in 13-mm- wide joints formed between two 150-mm- long strips of material
matching the appearance of metal-faced composite wall panels adjacent to joint
sealants.
F. Coordination Drawings: Exterior elevations, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items
involved:
H. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the
following:
1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal-faced composite wall panel from single
source from single manufacturer.
C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit samples of materials that will
contact joint sealants to joint-sealant manufacturers for testing indicated in subparagraphs
below:
1. Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and other
specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion
of joint sealants to joint substrates.
a. Perform tests under environmental conditions replicating those that will exist
during installation.
2. Submit no fewer than nine pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates,
shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
3. Schedule enough time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures, including use of specially formulated primers.
D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of typical wall panel as directed by Engineer; approximately one bay
wide by one story high by full thickness, including supports, attachments, and
accessories.
A. Deliver components, sheets, metal-faced composite wall panels, and other manufactured
items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal-faced composite wall panels for
protection during transportation and handling.
B. Unload, store, and erect metal-faced composite wall panels in a manner to prevent bending,
warping, twisting, and surface damage.
C. Store metal-faced composite wall panels vertically, covered with suitable weathertight and
ventilated covering. Store metal-faced composite wall panels to ensure dryness, with
positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal-faced composite wall panels in
contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Do
not allow storage space to exceed 49 deg C.
D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal-faced composite wall panel for period of
panel installation.
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit assembly of metal-faced composite wall panels to be performed according
to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.
B. Field Measurements: Verify locations of structural members and wall opening dimensions
by field measurements before metal-faced composite wall panel fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing,
trim, and construction of studs, soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof,
secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer and Installer
are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace components of metal roof
panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Aluminum Sheet: Coil-coated sheet, ASTM B 209M, alloy as standard with manufacturer,
with temper as required to suit forming operations and structural performance required.
B. Panel Sealants:
G. Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance,
holding power, and other properties required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing
members to substrates.
B. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs,
and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners
with heads matching color of metal-faced composite wall panels by means of plastic caps or
factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal-faced composite
wall panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips,
flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and
finish of metal-faced composite wall panels unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.46-mm- minimum thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized)
steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Provide
flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance.
Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed
openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim
with same finish system as adjacent metal-faced composite wall panels.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal-faced composite wall panels and accessories at the
factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as
necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing.
Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.
C. Metal-Faced Composite Wall Panels: Factory form panels in a continuous process with no
glues or adhesives between dissimilar materials. Trim and square edges of sheets with no
displacement of face sheets or protrusion of core material.
1. Form panel lines, breaks, and angles to be sharp and true, with surfaces free from
warp and buckle.
2. Fabricate panels with sharply cut edges, with no displacement of face sheets or
protrusion of core material.
3. Fabricate panels with panel stiffeners, as required to comply with deflection limits,
attached to back of panels with structural silicone sealant or bond tape.
4. Dimensional Tolerances:
D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal,
and other characteristics of item indicated.
1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed
edges folded back to form hems.
2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form
seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
3. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate
elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.
4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are
not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by metal-faced
composite wall panel manufacturer.
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-
half of the range of approved Samples. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed
to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, metal-faced composite wall panel supports, and
other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural
panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment
tolerances required by metal-faced composite wall panel manufacturer.
2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or
blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal-faced
composite wall panel manufacturer.
3. Verify that weather-resistant sheathing paper has been installed over sheathing or
backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.
B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal-faced composite wall
panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of panels before
panel installation.
C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of the Work.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subgirts, base angles, sills, furring, and other miscellaneous
wall panel support members and anchorage according to ASTM C 754 and metal-faced
composite wall panel manufacturer's written instructions.
components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural
movement.
B. Fasteners:
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action as recommended by metal-faced composite wall panel
manufacturer.
D. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required
for weathertight performance of metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies. Provide
types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by
panel manufacturer.
1. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section
"Joint Sealants."
F. Provide one of the following installations to comply with design and as approved by
Engineer:
1. Clip Installation: Attach panel clips to supports at each metal-faced composite wall
panel joint at locations, spacings, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer.
Attach routed-and-returned flanges of wall panels to panel clips with manufacturer's
standard fasteners.
a. Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent panels with sealant
backing and sealant. Install sealant backing and sealant according to
requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
a. Install wall panels to allow individual panels to "free float" and be installed and
removed without disturbing adjacent panels.
b. Do not apply sealants to joints unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting
and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other
components.
1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and
tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded
back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result
in waterproof and weather-resistant performance.
2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 3 m with no joints allowed within 610 mm
of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or
would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of
intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 25 mm deep, filled with mastic sealant
(concealed within joints).
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal-faced composite wall panel units within
installed tolerance of 6 mm in 6 m, nonaccumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as
indicated and within 3-mm offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Water Penetration: Test areas of installed system indicated on Drawings for compliance
with system performance requirements according to ASTM E 1105 at minimum differential
pressure of 20 percent of inward-acting, wind-load design pressure as defined by
SEI/ASCE 7, but not less than 300 Pa.
C. Water-Spray Test: After completing the installation of 23-m- by-2-story minimum area of
metal-faced composite wall panel assembly, test assembly for water penetration according
to AAMA 501.2 in a 2-bay area directed by Engineer.
E. Metal-faced composite wall panels will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
3.7 CLEANING
B. After metal-faced composite wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels
of obstructions, dirt, and sealant.
C. Replace metal-faced composite wall panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated
beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing
and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section.
A. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand
specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without
failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in
construction. Membrane roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.
B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another
under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
C. Roofing System Design: Provide membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that
have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift
pressure calculated according to ASCE/SEI 7.
E. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system with initial solar reflectance not less than 0.70
and emissivity not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes:
1. Sheet roofing, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam.
2. Roof insulation.
3. 4.5 kg of aggregate ballast in gradation and color indicated.
4. Roof paver, full sized, in each color and texture required.
5. Termination bars.
G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of membrane roofing system, from the ICC-
ES.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation, fasteners for membrane
roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or approved by membrane
roofing manufacturer.
D. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class A; for application and roof slopes
indicated, as determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by a qualified
testing agency. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and
labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture,
approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other
components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected
location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect
stored liquid material from direct sunlight.
1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated
shelf life.
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent
deflection of deck.
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written
instructions and warranty requirements.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Roofing Warranty: Provide complete total system warranty in which Manufacturer Installer
and Contractor are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace, without
limitations, all or any part of the membrane roofing system which fails or becomes defective
in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes, but is not
limited to: water penetration, deterioration in membranes and coatings; other than due to
normal ageing and weathering; and any defects in adhesion, sealants, flashings, fixings,
coverings and other components of the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Sheet Flashing: 1.5-mm- thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to application.
J. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet
flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, reinforced EPDM
securement strips, T-joint covers, in-seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and
other accessories, all from the manufacturer of the roofing system or as approved by him.
K. Liquid coating, specifically formulated for coating EPDM membrane roofing, as follows:
1. Type: Hypalon.
2. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
A. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D 4397, 0.15 mm thick, minimum, with maximum permeance
rating of 7.5 ng/Pa x s x sq. m.
B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below,
with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively:
1. Available Manufacturers:
2. Type VI, 29 kg/cu. m. (40 psi, 1.8 lbs/cu. ft. minimum) for roof covered with ballast.
3. Type VII, 35 kg/cu. m (60 psi, 2.2 lbs/cu. ft. minimum) for roof covered with
concrete pavers.
A. Aggregate Ballast: Provide aggregate ballast that will withstand weather exposure without
significant deterioration and will not contribute to membrane degradation, of the following
type and size:
2.8 WALKWAYS
A. Walkway Roof Pavers: Heavyweight, hydraulically pressed, concrete units, square edged,
factory cast for use as roof pavers; absorption not greater than 5 percent, ASTM C 140; no
breakage and maximum 1 percent mass loss when tested for freeze-thaw resistance,
ASTM C 67; and as follows:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:
1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced
and that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place.
2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at
penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
3. Verify that minimum concrete drying period recommended by roofing system
manufacturer has passed.
4. Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary
moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
5. Verify that concrete curing compounds that will impair adhesion of roofing
components to roof deck have been removed.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing
installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp
projections.
B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling
or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is
taking place or when rain is forecast.
C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water
from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain
is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining
roofing.
A. Polyethylene Film: Loosely lay polyethylene-film vapor retarder in a single layer over area
to receive vapor retarder, side and end lapping each sheet a minimum of 50 mm and 150
mm, respectively.
B. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to prevent air
movement into membrane roofing system.
B. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions
for installing roof insulation.
C. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall
insulation thickness is 68 mm or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each
succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 150 mm in each
direction.
D. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and
does not restrict flow of water.
E. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints
staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 6
mm with insulation.
A. Adhere membrane roofing over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing
system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll membrane roofing and allow to relax
before installing.
C. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum
dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of membrane roofing at rate required
by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing membrane roofing. Do not
apply to splice area of membrane roofing.
F. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
G. Mechanically and adhesively fasten sheet securely at the perimeter of each roof level, roof
section, expansion joint, curb, skylight, interior wall, penthouse, at any angle change which
exceeds 16 cm/m, and at other penetrations in accordance with manufacturer’s details. The
additional membrane securement may be provided by angle membrane reinforcing strip or
Seam Fastening Plates
1. Install additional membrane securement at roof-to-upstand angle, and then turn the
roof membrane onto the upstand.
2. Washers/pressure plates to lie completely flat and not less than 10 mm from edge
being fixed.
3. Extend Overlapping sheet beyond washers/pressure plates by not less than 50 mm.
H. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and
firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping membrane roofing according to manufacturer's
written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal
exposed edges of membrane roofing terminations.
I. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements.
J. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal
membrane roofing in place with clamping ring.
K. Install membrane roofing and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing membrane roofing to
maintain weather-tightness of transition.
A. Loosely lay membrane roofing over area to receive roofing according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll membrane roofing and allow to relax before
installing.
1. Comply with requirements in SPRI RP-4 for System 1 unless otherwise indicated.
C. Accurately align membrane roofing, without stretching, and maintain uniform side and end
laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
E. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of deck where possible.
F. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and
firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping membrane roofing according to manufacturer's
written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal
exposed edges of membrane roofing terminations.
H. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements.
I. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal
membrane roofing in place with clamping ring.
J. Install membrane roofing and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing to maintain
weather-tightness of transition.
L. Install protection mat over membrane roofing, overlapping a minimum of 150 mm. Install
an additional protection mat layer at projections, pipes, vents, and drains, overlapping a
minimum of 300 mm.
M. Aggregate Ballast: Apply uniformly over membrane roofing at the rate required by
membrane roofing system manufacturer, but not less than the following, spreading with care
to minimize possibility of damage to membrane roofing system. Lay ballast as membrane
roofing is installed, leaving membrane roofing ballasted at the end of the workday.
1. Ballast Weight: 50 to 60 kg/sq. m, Size 3 aggregate.
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according
to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and
allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.
C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet
flashing.
D. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping
sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of
sheet flashing terminations.
E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through
termination bars.
B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to
inspect roofing installation on completion.
C. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to recommendations in
ASTM D 5957, after completing waterproofing but before overlying construction is placed.
Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable water.
1. Notify the Engineer 48 hours in advance of the date and time of each test.
2. Subject to the Engineer’s approval, divide large roof areas into sections with ap-
proved barriers.
3. Externally cover and seal all roof outlets and protect against damage from water pres-
sure with temporary curbs. Do not use plugs to seal outlets.
4. Flood to an average depth of 100 mm, or as agreed with Engineer, but in no case
higher than existing kerb level. Maintain 50 mm of clearance from top of sheet
flashings.
5. Maintain test for 48 hours. Monitor water level and inspect for leaks at regular inter-
vals.
6. On completion of test, slowly drain roof area, ensuring that outlets do not overload or
flood.
7. Where leaks have occurred, submit detailed proposals and obtain approval for re-
medial measures.
8. After completion of remedial works, retest the affected roof areas.
D. Engage an independent testing agency to observe testing and examine underside of decks
and terminations for evidence of leaks during flood testing.
E. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections
indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction
period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing
for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies
to Engineer and Employer.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with
requirements, repair substrates and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a
condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according
to warranty requirements.
C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and
procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through the fol-
lowing fire-resistance-rated assemblies, including both empty openings and openings con-
taining penetrating items:
1. Floors.
2. Roofs.
3. Walls and partitions.
4. Smoke barriers.
5. Construction enclosing compartmentalized areas.
A. General: For the following constructions, provide through-penetration firestop systems that
are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist
passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly
penetrated.
C. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop sys-
tems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where
systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in oc-
cupiable floor areas:
4. Penetrating items larger than 100-mm- diameter nominal pipe or 100 sq. cm in
overall cross-sectional area.
D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical
damage, provide products that after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to these condi-
tions both during and after construction.
1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide
moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems.
2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 100 mm in width and exposed
to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor
loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other means.
3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop
systems not requiring removal of insulation.
E. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-
spread ratings of less than 25 and smoke-developed ratings of less than 450, as determined
per ASTM E 84.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of through-penetration firestop system product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each kind of construc-
tion condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and kind of penetrating
item. Include firestop design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to En-
gineer that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.
D. Installer Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out success-
fully by the installer with the same product endorsed by the manufacturer’s representative.
Include project names and addresses, names and addresses of engineers and employers, and
other information specified
F. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through-penetration fire-
stop system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current prod-
ucts.
G. Field-Constructed Mockup: Prior to installing firestopping, erect mockups for each different
through-penetration firestop system indicated to verify selections made and to demonstrate
qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following require-
ments, using materials indicated for final installations.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetra-
tion and construction condition indicated, from a single manufacturer.
B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their deteri-
oration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.
1.8 COORDINATION
C. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become con-
cealed behind other construction until Employer's inspecting agency and building inspector,
if required by Engineer, have examined each installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Only firestop products which have been third party tested in accordance with UL1479 -
ASTM E-814 for specific fire rated construction penetrations shall be considered and used.
Items shall be tested to specific parameters including the type and number of penetrating
items, the size of the penetrating items, the maximum allowable annular space, and rated for
the hourly requirement of the structure.
B. Openings in fire resistant walls shall be provided with appropriate fire stop compounds that
maintain the specified fire resistance and prevent the passage of smoke. Non metallic pipes
exceeding 40mm in diameter shall be provided with fire stop jackets on both sides of the fire
resistant wall. Ducts protection shall be as specified in mechanical specification.
C. Openings in floor slabs shall be provided with appropriate fire stop compounds that main-
tain a minimum fire resistance rating of 60 min. Non metallic pipes exceeding 40 mm in di-
ameter shall be provided with fire stop jackets on floors underside. Ducts protection shall
be as specified in mechanical specification.
D. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one
another, with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating
through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demon-
strated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field expe-
rience.
E. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are
needed to install fill materials and to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article.
Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and
approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Ac-
cessories include, but are not limited to, the following items:
a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation.
b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials
to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
c. Fire-rated form board.
d. Fillers for sealants.
1. Substrate primers.
2. Collars.
B. Latex Sealants: Intumescent single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-
emulsify during exposure to moisture. Use for sealing nominal openings with penetrations
of non-combustible items including; cast and steel pipe, copper pipe, conduit, electrical me-
tallic tubing (EMT)
1. Use Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal
surfaces.
2. Use nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a
nonslumping, gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag
grade for both opening conditions.
3. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
D. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with in-
tumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.
1. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
H. Mortars: Prepackaged, dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic ce-
ment, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to
form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. Use for large size - complex penetrations which
accommodate individual or combinations of cable trays, multiple steel or copper pipes, elec-
trical conduits, busways, or electrical/data/telecommunications cables
J. Openings in hazardous location: for sealing openings in area’s requiring hazardous location
protection , or in those which require an environmental seal against water or dust, or for
clean room applications, or for those area’s where cables - electrical/data telecommunica-
tions - require strain relief security against cable pull out. Use for sealing multiple cables
passing through a single opening.
2.4 MIXING
A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration
firestop system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials,
water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers,
mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality
with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting per-
formance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign
materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems.
2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces
capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems.
Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from con-
tacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would
otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used
to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without
disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates.
1. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other
accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.
C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following re-
sults:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
B. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only
after inspection reports are issued.
C. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they
comply with requirements.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system man-
ufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure
through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substan-
tial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and re-
move damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install
new materials to produce through-penetration firestop systems complying with specified re-
quirements.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Sections:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. TRAFFICABLE SEALANT: To qualify for traffic use under ASTM C 920 requirements,
elastomeric sealants must demonstrate a Shore A hardness of not less than 25 or more than
50.
C. MEDIUM MODULUS: Tensile strength of not less than 310 kPa or more than 517 kPa.
Movement capabilities of ±50%.
D. HIGH MODULUS: Tensile strength of more 517 kPa. Joint movement is limited to ±25%
or less.
1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation
techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint
substrates.
2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each kind of material, including joint
substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous
materials.
3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the
Work.
4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers.
5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation
data that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products
for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching
those submitted.
B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion
to Project joint substrates as follows:
1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by
Engineer.
2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:
3. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be
erected.
4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical
representative present.
5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include
data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For
sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.
6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing
adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with
requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere
to joint substrates during testing.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured
sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide
Samples with joint sealants in 13-mm- wide joints formed between two 150-mm- long
strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
E. Installer Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out
successfully by the installer with the same product endorsed by the manufacturer’s
representative.
G. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of engineers and employers, and any other information
specified or required by Engineer.
H. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.
I. Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate: For each
sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program.
1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
L. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation
methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in
"Preconstruction Testing" Article.
M. Preconstruction Non- Staining Test Reports: provide laboratory test report showing that
proposed sealants do not stain natural stones used.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single
manufacturer.
D. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are
indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation
methods specified in this Section.
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by
joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 5 deg C.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
from joint substrates.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer Installer and Contrac-
tor are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace, without limitations,
all or any part of the elastomeric joint sealant assembly that do not comply with perfor-
mance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
Failure includes, but is not limited to: water penetration, adhesive and cohesive failures, de-
terioration in sealants; other than due to normal ageing and weathering; and any other de-
fects in other components of the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field
experience.
B. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements
indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing
ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint
substrates.
1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints
that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone
testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized
water, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in
repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
E. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
Color Translucent
Durometer - Shore A ASTM D 22 = 45 Shore A
Elongation ASTM D 412 = 500 %
Peel Strength ASTM C 794 = 25 ppi 446 kg/m
Room Temperature Cure – Hours 168 Hours to 336 Hours
Service Temperature High = 177 Deg C
Service Temperature Low = -62 Deg C
Shelf Life = 360 Days
Tack-Free Time-50% RH 15 Minutes
Tensile Strength ASTM D 412 = 1.40 MPa [200 psi]
Water Resistant yes
Working Time 5 to 10 Minutes
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Tape Sealant: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape sealant with a
solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous
surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape manufacturers for
application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with
ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
B. Expanded Cellular Tape Sealant: Closed-cell, PVC foam tape sealant; factory coated with
adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and
complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with
joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface
skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing
optimum sealant performance.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
joint-sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following
requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion
of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings
tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer),
old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and
frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of
developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining
after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free
compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
c. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer
with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such
contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape
immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of
joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at
position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative
to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between
sealants and backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to
form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to
ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant
system.
2. Apply silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with
preformed silicone-sealant system manufacturer's written instructions and covering a
bonding area of not less than 10 mm. Hold edge of sealant bead 6 mm inside
masking tape.
3. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet
extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform
contact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate.
4. Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in
vertical joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut
silicone extrusion with a razor knife.
H. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after
removing protective wrapping. Do not pull or stretch material. Produce seal continuity at
ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures, apply
heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
a. Perform 10 tests for the first 300 m of joint length for each kind of sealant and
joint substrate.
b. Perform 1 test for each 300 m of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor
per elevation.
2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint
Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in
ASTM C 1521.
4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were
installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether
joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant
configuration, and sealant dimensions.
5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same
procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are
clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.
B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from
testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory.
Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other
requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with
indicated requirements.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants
and of products in which joints occur.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so
sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite
such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are
indistinguishable from original work.
1. Joint Locations:
1. Joint Locations:
1. Joint Locations:
1. Joint Locations:
1. Joint Locations:
a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.
2. Joint Sealant: Mildew resistant, single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Silicone.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of
colors.
1. Joint Location:
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Steel doors.
2. Steel door frames.
3. Fire-rated door and frame assemblies.
4. Louvers in doors.
1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for installing anchors and grouting
frames in masonry construction.
2. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for wood doors installed in steel frames.
3. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)" for door
hardware and weather stripping.
4. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for spot-grouting frames installed in
steel-framed gypsum board partitions.
5. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting factory-primed interior doors and
frames.
6. Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings" for field painting factory-primed
exterior doors and frames.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
B. Fire Resisting Door: A door which has been constructed in such a manner that when in-
stalled in an assembly and tested, it will pass ASTM 2074, NFPA 252 or UL 10B and 10C,
and can be rated as resisting fire for the specified duration. A fire resisting door must have
been tested and carry the identifying label of an approved independent testing and inspec-
tion agency or laboratory, confirming its fire resistance rating.
C. Fire Door Assembly: The door frame, door leaf, all hardware and accessories and vision
lites tested as one assembly.
D. Smoke Door: A fire resisting door which, in addition to having intumescent seals to seal hot
smoke, also has approved quality draught seals to seal cold smoke, installed in accordance
with NFPA 105 “Installation of Smoke-Control Door Assemblies”. A smoke door must
have been tested and carry the identifying label of an approved independent testing and in-
spection agency or laboratory, confirming its rating.
A. Fire Resisting Doors and Assemblies: all fire resisting doors, shutters, grilles, screens, pa-
nels and the like, together with associated component assemblies shall have been tested and
must carry the identifying label of an approved independent testing and inspection agency or
laboratory, confirming their fire resistance rating. The Contractor shall demonstrate that the
selected independent testing agency will conduct random field inspection follow-ups to con-
firm that the submitted doors are identical to the tested specimens. Alternatively, if the se-
lected approved independent testing agency does not support a follow-up program then the
Contractor can select a further approved agency, local or international, to fulfill this obliga-
tion. In addition, fire doors are to be designed and manufactured in a system conforming to
ISO 9001.
B. Fire Labels: all fire labels shall be issued by the testing laboratory. Alternatively, labels may
be produced by the door assembly manufacturer provided:
1. The manufacturer has a quality assurance system to ISO 9002 or approved equal.
2. The label produced shall bear a serial number, the name of the testing laboratory and
the date and number of the license.
3. The testing laboratory or a certified quality control office shall certify the consistency
of the door assembly production as per the tested specimen.
4. The testing laboratory authorizes the manufacturer to produce the labels on the condi-
tions listed above.
C. Fire Resisting Door Components: all components of fire resisting doors and assemblies, in-
cluding but not limited to: door leaves, frames, ironmongery, hardware and glazing, shall
carry identifying labels of an approved independent testing and inspection agency or labora-
tory, confirming their individual fire resistance rating. The rating of all door components
shall be equal to the rating of the door assembly and to the same standard.
1. Door leaves and frames shall be labeled and from same manufacturer.
2. Door Hardware shall be as tested or labeled.
3. Latch throw shall be as per test report or label
D. Fire Resisting Door Closers: all fire resisting doors shall be fitted with door closers that au-
tomatically close and positively latch the door by means of electro magnetic devices con-
nected to fire alarm system.
E. Fire Resisting Door Enclosures: the space between the top of the fire resisting door assem-
bly and the structural soffit above shall be closed by a wall or an appropriate panel with a
fire rating equal to or exceeding that of the door.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated, include door designation, type,
level and model, material description, core description, construction details, label com-
pliance, sound and fire-resistance ratings, and finishes.
B. Test Certificate: certificate of test from approved independent testing laboratory describing
the fire test and confirming the fire rating of the fire door system and its components.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for factory-finished doors and frames.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepare a sample not
less than 75 by 125 mm and of same thickness and material indicated for final unit of Work.
F. Door Schedule: Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings in preparing sche-
dule for doors and frames.
A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent re-
quirements are indicated.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufactur-
er.
C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and la-
beled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at
positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assem-
blies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with stan-
dard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies ex-
cept for size.
2. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated, provide doors that have a maximum
transmitted temperature end point of not more than (250 deg C) above ambient after
30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.
E. Mockups: Before installing steel doors and frames, build mockups to verify selections made
under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and
execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indi-
cated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Engineer.
2. Build mockups for each steel door and frames, and anchorage system components.
3. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
4. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before fabricating custom steel doors and
frames.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
F. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Sub-
stantial Completion.
1.7 WARRANTY
1. Structural failures.
2. Faulty operation of movable parts and hardware.
3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weather-
ing.
B. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or
replacement of defective doors.
A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit
and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-
finished doors and frames.
B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if damage
is found. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and
are acceptable to Engineer. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be repaired as
directed.
C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 100-mm-
high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a
humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide
minimum 6-mm spaces between stacked doors to permit air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
a. Al Kuhaimi
b. Amweld Building Products, Inc.
c. Benchmark Commercial Doors; a division of General Products Co., Inc.
d. Ceco Door Products; a United Dominion Company.
e. Copco Door Co.
f. Curries Company.
g. Deansteel Manufacturing, Inc.
h. Fitzpatrick
i. Kewanee Corporation (The).
j. Mesker Door, Inc.
k. Pioneer Industries Inc.
l. Republic Builders Products.
m. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand.
n. Overly
o. IR Martin Roberts
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with
an ZF120 zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.
B. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS),
Class B coating; mill phosphatized; suitable for unexposed applications; stretcher-leveled
standard of flatness where used for face sheets.
2.3 DOORS
A. Fire Doors: Fire resisting doors, as indicated on the Drawings, satisfying the requirements of
ASTM E 152 and NFPA 80; flush fitting steel construction with welded internal frame, in-
ner and outer skins galvanised steel sheets and infill of approved thermal insulating material
complete with frame, vision panel, fire resisting hardware, and all necessary accessories and
fixings. Raised thresholds are not permitted.
1. Provide intumescent strips either on door edges or on the door frame where required
by the relevant codes and standards.
2. Doors are to be self-closing and are to be released automatically from hold-open posi-
tion in case of fire by electro magnetic devices connected to fire alarm system.
C. Interior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing
ANSI 250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level:
1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).
D. Exterior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing
ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level:
1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).
E. Door Louvers: Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, that comply with
SDI 111C, with blades or baffles formed of 0.5-mm- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into
0.8-mm- thick steel frame.
2.4 FRAMES
A. General: Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other
openings that comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, fabricate stops to receive three silencers
on strike jambs of single-door frames and two silencers on heads of double-door frames.
D. Plaster Guards: Provide 0.4-mm- thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to close
off interior of openings; place at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials
might obstruct hardware operation.
E. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 1.0-mm- thick, electrolytic zinc-
coated or metallic-coated steel sheet.
F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc-coated items are to
be built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be rigid,
neat in appearance, and free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit
and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanent-
ly factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site.
B. Exterior Door Construction: For exterior locations and elsewhere as indicated, fabricate
doors, panels, and frames from metallic-coated steel sheet. Close top and bottom edges of
doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of 1.3-mm- thick, metal-
lic-coated steel channels with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges.
C. Interior Door and Panel Faces: Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles
and rails of nonflush units, from the following material:
D. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction that produces a door comply-
ing with SDI standards.
E. Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Not more than 3.2 mm at jambs and heads, except
not more than 6.4 mm between pairs of doors. Not more than 19 mm at bottom.
I. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors
and Frames."
J. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from ei-
ther cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.
K. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for
exposed screws and bolts.
M. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hard-
ware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware suppli-
er. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A115 Series specifica-
tions for door and frame preparation for hardware.
1. For concealed overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcement, and pro-
visions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners and seam-
less face joints.
2. Fabricate knock-down, drywall slip-on frames for in-place gypsum board partitions.
3. For exterior applications, fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously
welded corners and seamless face joints.
4. Provide welded frames with temporary spreader bars.
5. Provide terminated stops where indicated.
O. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for
surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site.
2.6 FINISHES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufac-
turer's data, and as specified.
B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set
frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anc-
hors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders,
leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
1. Except for frames located in existing walls or partitions, place frames before con-
struction of enclosing walls and ceilings.
2. In masonry construction, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent
to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Accept-
able anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors.
3. Fill space behind welded steel frames with cement grout.
4. In metal-stud partitions, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent
to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Attach
wall anchors to studs with screws.
5. For in-place gypsum board partitions, install knock-down, drywall slip-on frames.
6. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
7. For openings 2286 mm or more in height, install an additional anchor at hinge and
strike jambs.
C. Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in
frames, within clearances specified in ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with
SDI 122 and ANSI/DHI A115.1G.
A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or damaged
areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Fire Resisting Door: A door which has been constructed in such a manner that when in-
stalled in an assembly and tested, it will pass ASTM E 2074 and NFPA 252 or UL 10B and
10C, and can be rated as resisting fire for the specified duration. A fire resisting door must
have been tested and carry the identifying label of an approved independent testing and in-
spection agency or laboratory, confirming its fire resistance rating.
B. Fire Door Assembly: The door frame, door leaf, all hardware and accessories and vision
lites tested as one assembly.
C. Smoke Door: A fire resisting door which, in addition to having intumescent seals to seal hot
smoke, also has approved quality draught seals to seal cold smoke, installed in accordance
with NFPA 105 “Installation of Smoke-Control Door Assemblies”. A smoke door must
have been tested and carry the identifying label of an approved independent testing and in-
spection agency or laboratory, confirming its rating.
A. Fire Resisting Doors And Assemblies: all fire resisting doors, shutters, grilles, screens, pa-
nels and the like, together with associated component assemblies shall have been tested and
must carry the identifying label of an approved independent testing and inspection agency or
laboratory, confirming their fire resistance rating. The Contractor shall demonstrate that the
selected independent testing agency will conduct random field inspection follow-ups to con-
firm that the submitted doors are identical to the tested specimens. Alternatively, if the se-
lected approved independent testing agency does not support a follow-up program then the
Contractor can select a further approved agency, local or international, to fulfill this obliga-
tion. In addition, fire doors are to be designed and manufactured in a system conforming to
ISO 9001.
B. Fire Labels: all fire labels shall be issued by the testing laboratory. Alternatively, labels may
be produced by the door assembly manufacturer provided:
1. The manufacturer has a quality assurance system to ISO 9002 or approved equal.
2. The label produced shall bear a serial number, the name of the testing laboratory and
the date and number of the license.
3. The testing laboratory or a certified quality control office shall certify the consistency
of the door assembly production as per the tested specimen.
4. The testing laboratory authorizes the manufacturer to produce the labels on the condi-
tions listed above.
C. Fire Resisting Door Components: all components of fire resisting doors and assemblies, in-
cluding but not limited to: door leaves, frames, ironmongery, hardware and glazing, shall
carry identifying labels of an approved independent testing and inspection agency or labora-
tory, confirming their individual fire resistance rating. The rating of all door components
shall be equal to the rating of the door assembly.
1. Door leaves and frames shall be labeled and from same manufacturer.
2. Door Hardware shall be as tested or labeled.
3. Latch throw shall be as per test report or label
D. Fire Resisting Door Closers: all fire resisting doors shall be fitted with door closers that au-
tomatically close and positively latch the door.
E. Fire Resisting Door Enclosures: the space between the top of the fire resisting door assem-
bly and the structural soffit above shall be closed by a wall or an appropriate panel with a
fire rating equal to or exceeding that of the door.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, trim for
openings, and louvers.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of
door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware
blocking; and other pertinent data.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Color charts consisting of actual materials in small sections
for the following:
1. Faces of factory-finished doors with opaque finish. Show the full range of colors
available.
1. Corner sections of doors approximately 200 by 250 mm with door faces and edgings
representing the typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid
lumber required. Finish sample with same materials proposed for factory-finished
doors.
2. Louver blade and frame sections, 150 mm long, for each material and finish speci-
fied.
3. Frames for light openings, 150 mm long, for each material, type, and finish required.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufactur-
er.
C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings
indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
A. Protect doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deteriora-
tion. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instruc-
tions.
B. Mark each door with individual opening numbers used on Shop Drawings. Use removable
tags or concealed markings.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature
and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation
areas during the remainder of the construction period to comply with requirements of the re-
ferenced quality standard for Project's geographical location.
1.9 WARRANTY
1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to re-
pair or replacement of defective doors.
2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time after the date of Sub-
stantial Completion:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Faces: Medium-density overlay over standard thickness, hardwood face veneers for
exterior doors; hardboard for interior doors.
1. Construction: Construction and core specified above for type of face indicated or
manufacturer's standard mineral-core construction as required to provide fire rating
indicated.
2. Blocking: For mineral-core doors, provide composite blocking with improved screw-
holding capability approved for use in doors of fire ratings indicated and as follows:
a. Doors are to be complete with concealed intumescent seals either on all door
edges or on the door frame where required by code.
4. Pairs: Furnish formed-steel edges and astragals for pairs of fire-rated doors, unless
otherwise indicated.
a. Doors are to be complete with concealed intumescent seals either on all door
edges or on the door frame where required by code.
5. Pairs for fire-rated doors: Provide fire-rated pairs with fire-retardant stiles that are la-
beled and listed for kinds of applications indicated without formed-steel edges and as-
tragals.
A. Wood Door Frames And Linings: Frames, complete with casings, fabricated from solid pre-
servative treated western red cedar or douglas fir members finished to receive paint or clear
finish, as shown on the Drawings.
B. Fire-Rated Interior Door and Sidelight Frames: Frames, complete with casings, fabricated
from solid fire-retardant-treated wood western red cedar or douglas fir. Frame units are
identical in construction to units tested in fire door assemblies per ASTM E 152 by UL,
Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable Engineer. Identify
fire-rated frames with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
A. Wood Louvers: Door manufacturer's standard solid wood louvers, unless otherwise indi-
cated.
a. Color: As selected by Engineer from full range of industry colors and color
densities.
D. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of
1.2-mm- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet, factory primed and approved for use in doors of fire
rating indicated.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clear-
ances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comp-
ly with requirements of NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply
with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings,
DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.
C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed sur-
faces, and finish as specified for associated doors.
1. Fixed Transom Panels: Fabricate fixed panels with solid lumber transom bottom rail
and door top rail, both rabbeted as indicated. Provide factory-installed spring bolts for
concealed attachment into jambs of metal door frames.
D. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of
referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
E. Exterior Doors: Factory treat exterior doors with water repellent after manufacturing has
been completed.
A. Doors for Opaque Finish to be field-finished: Shop prime exposed portions of doors for
paint finish with one coat of wood primer specified in Division 9 Section "Interior Paint-
ing."
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard's requirements for factory finishing.
B. Finish wood doors at factory where indicated in schedules or on Drawings as factory fi-
nished.
C. Opaque Finish: Comply with requirements indicated for grade, finish system, color, and
sheen.
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Finish: AWI System OP-2 catalyzed lacquer unless otherwise indicated.
3. Color: Match approved sample for color selected by Engineer from manufacturer's
standard colors.
4. Sheen: Semigloss.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and
swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describ-
ing Products)."
B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's writ-
ten instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors are without
damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 08211
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawing and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for blocking out openings for access
doors and frames in concrete.
2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for anchoring and grouting access
door frames set in masonry construction.
3. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)" for cylinder
locks and master keying.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated. Include construction details
relative to materials, individual components and profiles, finishes, and fire ratings (if
required) for access doors and frames.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of customized doors and frames.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
C. Samples: For each door face material, at least 75 by 125 mm in size, in specified finish.
D. Schedule: Provide complete door and frame schedule, including types, general locations,
sizes, construction details, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to
installation.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain doors and frames through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to
access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the
following test method and that are labeled and listed by UL, ITS, or another testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access
to concealed equipment, and indicate on schedule specified in "Submittals" Article.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Access Doors:
2.2 MATERIALS
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of
scale, pitting, and surface defects; pickled and oiled; with minimum thickness indicated
representing specified nominal thickness according to ASTM A 568/A 568M.
D. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), with
Class C coating and phosphate treatment to prepare surface for painting; with minimum
thickness indicated representing specified nominal thickness according to
ASTM A 568/A 568M for uncoated base metal.
E. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with
ZF180 zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating or Z180 mill-phosphatized zinc coating;
stretcher-leveled standard of flatness; with minimum thickness indicated representing
specified thickness according to ASTM A 924/A 924M.
F. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
G. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.76-mm zinc-coated steel sheet formed to receive
joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum board.
H. Plaster Bead: Casing bead formed from 0.76-mm zinc-coated steel sheet with flange
formed out of expanded metal lath and in size to suit thickness of plaster.
2.3 PAINT
A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Painting Sections and "High-
Performance Coatings".
A. Flush, Insulated, Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from
steel or metallic-coated steel sheet.
B. Flush, Uninsulated, Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated
from steel or metallic-coated steel sheet.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide access door assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for
installation.
B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide
materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed
pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
C. Steel Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.
Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of
supports indicated.
D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when
closed.
1. For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
A. Galvanizing of Steel Shapes and Plates: Hot-dip galvanize items indicated to comply with
applicable standard listed below:
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil
and other contaminants. For galvanized surfaces, apply, after cleaning, a conversion coating
suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. For metallic-coated surfaces, clean welds,
mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified
below to comply with ASTM A 780.
C. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after cleaning
and pretreating.
1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
B. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications. Comply with SSPC-PA 1,
"Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door and floor
door installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as
locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels
aligned with adjacent finish surfaces.
B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Service doors.
2. Insulated service doors.
3. Counter doors.
4. Fire-rated service doors.
5. Fire-rated counter doors
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Operation Cycle: One complete cycle of a door begins with the door in the closed position.
The door is then moved to the open position and back to the closed position.
A. Structural Performance: Provide overhead coiling doors capable of withstanding the effects
of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent
deformation of door components:
1. Basic Wind Speed: 161 km/hr (100 MPH) according to UBC latest edition unless
otherwise shown on structural drawings.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. Include details
of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and
finishes. Provide roughing-in diagrams, operating instructions, and maintenance
information. Include the following:
B. Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not dimensioned or detailed in
manufacturer's data sheets.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems. Differentiate
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring and between components
provided by door manufacturer and those provided by others.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for units with factory-applied finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: Of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of
size indicated below and of same thickness and material indicated for Work. Where finishes
involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of
variations expected.
F. Installer Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out
successfully by the installer with the same product endorsed by the manufacturer’s
representative.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1. Obtain operators and controls from the overhead coiling door manufacturer.
C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are
identical to door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per
UL 10b, and that are labeled and listed for fire ratings indicated by UL, FM, ITS/Warnock
Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies,
provide certification by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that
doors comply with all standard construction requirements of tested and labeled fire-rated
door assemblies, except for size.
E. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Door Curtain: Fabricate overhead coiling door curtain of interlocking slats, designed to
withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of material thickness recommended by door
manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows:
B. Endlocks (For service doors): Malleable-iron castings galvanized after fabrication, secured
to curtain slats with galvanized rivets, or high-strength nylon. Provide locks on not less than
alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement.
C. Endlocks (For counter doors): Manufacturer's standard locks on not less than alternate
curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement.
D. Windlocks: Malleable-iron castings secured to curtain slats with galvanized rivets or high-
strength nylon, as required to comply with wind load.
E. Bottom Bar (For service doors): Consisting of 2 angles, each not less than 38 by 38 by 3
mm thick, either galvanized or stainless-steel or aluminum extrusions to suit type of curtain
slats.
F. Bottom Bar (For counter doors): Manufacturer's standard continuous channel or tubular
shape, either stainless-steel or aluminum extrusions to suit type of curtain slats.
G. Curtain Jamb Guides (For service doors): Fabricate curtain jamb guides of steel angles, or
channels and angles, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to
operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Build up units with not less than 5-mm- thick,
galvanized steel sections complying with ASTM A 36M, and ASTM A 123. Slot bolt holes
for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain
and a continuous bar for holding windlocks.
H. Curtain Jamb Guides (For counter doors): Fabricate curtain jamb guides of angles, or
channels and angles of material and finish to match curtain slats, with sufficient depth and
strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading.
Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal-to-metal contact and minimize
noise of travel and removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain.
A. Hood: Form to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head and
act as weatherseal. Contour to suit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and
reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Provide closed ends for surface-mounted hoods
and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting projecting beyond wall face. Provide
intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sag.
1. Fabricate steel hoods, for steel doors, of not less than 0.7-mm thick, hot-dip
galvanized steel sheet with Z275 zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 653M.
2. Include automatic drop baffle to guard against passage of smoke or flame.
3. Shape: Round.
4. Exterior Mounted Door: Fabricate hood with sealant-joint bead profile for applying
joint sealant.
B. Integral Frame, Hood, and Fascia (For counter doors): Provide welded assemblies of the
following sheet metal:
1. Fabricate of not less than 1.6-mm- thick, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with Z275
zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 653M.
C. Integral Sills: Fabricate sills as integral part of frame assembly of same sheet metal, but not
less than 2.0 mm thick.
1. Provide motor-operated doors with combination bottom weatherseal and sensor edge.
2. In addition, provide replaceable, adjustable, continuous, flexible, 3-mm- thick seals
of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene at door jambs for a weathertight installation.
1. Provide pull-down straps or pole hooks for doors more than 2130 mm high.
H. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by
padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side.
I. Fabricate locking device assembly with lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cam
plate, and adjustable locking bar to engage through slots in tracks.
K. Where door unit is power operated, provide safety interlock switch to disengage power
supply when door is locked.
L. Provide automatic-closing device inoperative during normal door operations, with governor
unit complying with requirements of NFPA 80, with easily tested and reset release
mechanism, and designed to be activated by the following:
C. Provide spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion
springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment
accessible from outside barrel. Provide cast-steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to
barrel and shaft.
D. Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of cold-rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring
ends and carry torsional load.
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
A. Provide manual operators, unless electric door operators are indicated. When not shown,
provide chain-hoist operator unit.
B. Push-up Operation: Design counterbalance mechanism so required lift or pull for door
operation does not exceed 111 N.
A. General: Provide electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and
provided by door manufacturer for door and operational life specified, with electric motor
and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake,
clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and
accessories required for proper operation.
D. Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and
without affecting emergency auxiliary operator.
E. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6,
with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V, ac or dc.
F. Door-Operator Type (For doors that do not exceed 2400 mm in height): Provide wall-,
hood-, or bracket-mounted, jackshaft, gear-head-type door operator unit consisting of
electric motor, enclosed worm-gear running-in-oil primary drive, chain and sprocket
secondary drive, and quick disconnect-release for manual operation.
G. Door-Operator Type (For doors that exceed 2400 mm in height): Provide wall-, hood-, or
bracket-mounted, jackshaft, gear-head hoist-type door operator unit consisting of electric
motor, enclosed worm-gear running-in-oil primary drive, chain and sprocket secondary
drive, and auxiliary chain-hoist and floor level disconnect.
J. Obstruction Detection Device: Provide each motorized door with indicated external
automatic safety sensor able to protect full width of door opening. Activation of sensor
immediately stops and reverses downward door travel.
1. Sensor Edge: Provide each motorized door with an automatic safety sensor edge,
located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with
sensor immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. Connect to control
circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable.
K. Limit Switches: Provide adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to
automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions.
L. Provide electric operators with ADA-compliant audible alarm and visual indicator lights.
1. 3-channel universal coaxial receiver to open, close, and stop door, 1 per operator.
2. Multifunction remote control.
3. Remote antenna mounting kit.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install door and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and
head mold strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports according to Shop
Drawings, manufacturer's written instructions, and as specified.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or
distortion and fitting weathertight for entire perimeter.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section “WPS 1.02: Platform Screen Doors” of “Volume 2.3 – Particular Technical
Specifications, WPS 1 – Transit System," for technical functionalities and main
performances for platform screen doors sub system.
2. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealant requirements and procedures.
3. Division 08 Section “Automatic Entrance Doors,” for exterior automatic entrance doors.
4. Division 08 Section “Automatic Door Operators,” for operators to automatic doors
excluding platform screen doors.
5. Division 08 Section "Glazing," for glass glazing requirements and procedures.
6. Division 26 “Electrical,” for electrical roughing-in of automatic doors, power supplies.
A. Submit the following information to demonstrate an ability to perform the work as specified.
1. Design Concept Drawings: Plans, sections, elevations, full size framing details and
details at adjoining construction, and erection tolerances.
2. Product Data: List of proposed materials, manufacturers and suppliers. Include technical
data for each principal product, material and finish. Indicate location of each product.
3. Method Statement: For fabrication, handling, installation and protection. Indicate
whether storefront assemblies are factory-assembled or site-assembled.
4. Maintenance Program: Outline maintenance program identifying service life of products
and maintenance requirements.
5. Quality Control: List and details of key personnel to be assigned to the project and a list
of previous projects completed of similar in scope and type to the work indicated.
6. Proof of Contractor’s Professional Liability Insurance for Design indemnity certificate.
7. Items of non-compliance with the specification.
8. Samples of proposed warranties.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For glazing sealants used inside the weatherproofing
system, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.
2. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products required to have recycled content.
C. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed storefronts and doors. Include plans, elevations,
sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.
3. Include details of equipment and wiring diagrams for electrically operated doors.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard
sizes.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of automatic door. Include emergency-exit features of
automatic doors and break-out panels in screens serving as a required means of egress.
C. Product Test Reports: For aluminum-framed storefronts and doors, for tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or by a qualified testing agency.
G. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed storefronts and doors including life cycle
maintenance procedures, to include in maintenance manuals.
B. Fabricator/ Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs personnel trained and approved for
fabrication/ installation of assemblies indicated for this Project by the manufacturer, and with
not less than five years of documented experience in that field on a minimum of three projects
of similar nature.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.
1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Engineer, except with
Engineer's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to
Engineer for review.
E. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 1401 for design and installation of
storefront systems.
1.6 MOCKUPS
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of typical wall area as directed by Engineer for each type of storefront and
door, including platform screens and screen doors. Coordinate mockup with requirements
of Sections of “Related Requirements” article.
2. Perform testing on mockups by a qualified testing agency. Adjust mockups until
assemblies comply with performance requirements.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
A. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed storefronts and doors to comply with the
following maximum tolerances:
B. Erection Tolerances: Install glazed aluminum curtain walls to comply with the following
maximum tolerances:
1. Plumb: 3.2 mm in 3 m; 6 mm in 12 m.
2. Level: 3.2 mm in 6 m; 6 mm in 12 m.
3. Alignment:
4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 3.2 mm in 3.7 m; 12.7 mm over total length.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following tests and
inspections on representative areas of aluminum-framed storefronts. Coordinate testing with
requirements of Section of “Related Requirements” article.
C. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts will be considered defective if they do not pass
tests and inspections.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer and fabricator jointly agree to repair or replace components of
aluminum-framed storefronts and doors that do not comply with requirements or that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
B. Special Warranty for Metal Finishes: Provide written warranty in which Manufacturer and
Installer are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair finishes that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Cracking.
2. Checking.
3. Peeling.
4. Chalking: in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214
5. Crazing.
6. Color Fading: more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244
7. Color retention.
C. Warranty Period for Metal Finishes: 10 years for clear anodic finish, from date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
C. Structural Loads:
1. Deflection Normal to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/270 of clear span or an amount that
restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 6 mm, whichever is less.
2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which
reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces
edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components to less
than 3.2 mm.
1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies, excluding
buildings contiguous structure, do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,
assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or
permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.
F. Seismic Performance: Sloped glazing assemblies shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to applicable code, unless otherwise indicated. Glass fallout shall
not occur during a seismic event.
G. Structural-Sealant Joints:
H. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by structural-
sealant-glazed storefront system without failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for
preconstruction adhesion and compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant shall occur before
adhesive failure.
1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving no
sealant material behind.
2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not separate
from each substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal
strength.
I. Vibration and Noise: Vibration harmonics, wind whistles, noises caused by thermal movement,
thermal movement or live load movements transmitted to or from other building elements,
loosening, weakening, or fracturing of attachments or components of system, not permitted.
J. Forced-Entry Resistance for Swing Doors: Comply with Performance Grade requirements
acceptable to Engineer, and according to ASTM F 842.
K. Opening Force for Power-Operated Doors: Comply with the following unless more stringent
requirements are required by applicable code or authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Power-Operated Doors: Not more than 222 N required to manually set door in motion if
power fails, and not more than 67 N required to open door to minimum required width.
2. Breakaway Device for Power-Operated Doors: Not more than 222 N required for a
breakaway door or panel to open.
L. Entrapment-Prevention Force: Comply with the following unless more stringent requirements
are required by applicable code or authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Power-Operated Sliding Doors: Not more than 133 N required to prevent stopped door
from closing.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, use the same manufacturer employed
to provide the glazed aluminum curtain walls as specified in Division 08 Section glazed
aluminum curtain walls.
A. Recycled Content: Provide metal materials having recycled content in compliance with Credit
MR 4.
2.4 FRAMING
1. Construction: Nonthermal.
2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on two sides and structural sealant
on two sides.
3. Glazing Plane: Front.
4. Finish: Clear anodic finish generally; high-performance organic finish to framing not
visible from platform area public side.
5. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system.
6. Provide framing and headers for concealing automatic door equipment.
7. Platform Screen Framing: Comply with applicable requirements for automatic sliding
doors and break-out panels in platform screens with Section “WPS 1.02: Platform Screen
Doors” of “Volume 2.3 – Particular Technical Specifications, WPS 1 – Transit System,"
and modify framing construction as applicable, to acceptance of Engineer.
C. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not
integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.
E. Materials:
1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
A. Opaque Glass Signage Panels: Opaque glass one side or both sides flush with adjoining glass,
metal-faced back panels flush adjoining framing.
A. Doors, General: Manufacturer's standard glazed doors for manual-swing and sliding operation.
Comply with applicable requirements for automatic sliding doors and break-out panels in
platform screens with Section “WPS 1.02: Platform Screen Doors” of “Volume 2.3 – Particular
Technical Specifications, WPS 1 – Transit System," and modify door construction as
applicable, to acceptance of Engineer.
A. Door Hardware, General: Provide hardware as specified Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
B. Automatic Door Equipment: Provide carrier assemblies, roller tracks, door operators, controls,
and accessories required for a complete installation.
2.8 GLAZING
1. Uncoated Tinted Float Glass: Class 2, complying with other requirements specified for
float glass; tint color as selected by Engineer.
2. Back-Painted Glass: Clear float glass, minimum 6 mm thick, back painted with low cure
baked acrylic (LCBA), applied to unexposed surface, producing an opaque finish;
seamed edges.
B. Glass Schedule:
D. Structural Glazing Sealants: ASTM C 1184, chemically curing silicone formulation that is
compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and
tested for use as structural sealant and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer for use in
storefront system indicated.
2.9 ACCESSORIES
1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from
thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
2.10 FABRICATION
C. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.
F. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and
for installing entrance door hardware.
G. Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing door hardware and automatic door equipment.
H. Door Hardware Installation: Factory install door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut,
drill, and tap for factory-installed door hardware before applying finishes.
I. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to
Shop Drawings.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Sections:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
B. Activation Device: Device that, when actuated, sends an electrical signal to the door
operator to open the door.
D. Safety Device: Device that, to avoid injury, prevents a door from opening or closing.
E. For automatic door terminology, refer to BHMA A156.10 for definitions of terms.
B. Structural Performance: Automatic entrances shall withstand the effects of gravity loads
and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according
to UBC 1997.
1. Basic Wind Speed: 161 km/hr (100 MPH) according to UBC latest edition unless
otherwise shown on structural drawings.
2. Seismic Loads: Seismic Zone 2A according to UBC latest edition unless otherwise
shown on structural drawings.
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain
and nighttime-sky heat loss.
D. Operating Temperature Range: Provide automatic entrances that operate within minus 29 to
plus 50 deg C.
E. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 6.4 L/s x
sq. m of fixed entrance system area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum
static-air-pressure difference of 300 Pa.
F. Opening-Force Requirements:
1. Power-Operated Doors: Not more than 222 N required to manually set door in
motion if power fails, and not more than 67 N required to open door to minimum
required width.
2. Breakaway Device for Power-Operated Doors: Not more than 222 N required for a
breakaway door or panel to open.
3. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 22 N to fully open door.
1. Power-Operated Sliding Doors: Not more than 133 N required to prevent stopped
door from closing.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for automatic
entrances. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and
furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For automatic entrances. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
hardware mounting heights, and attachments to other work.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
their preparation.
2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
3. Activation and safety devices.
4. Include hardware schedule and indicate hardware types, functions, quantities, and
locations.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's
standard sizes.
J. Maintenance Data: For automatic entrances, safety devices, and control systems to include
in maintenance manuals.
1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from Installer's
place of business to Project site.
D. Source Limitations for Automatic Entrances: Obtain automatic entrances from single
source from single manufacturer.
1. Review methods and procedures related to automatic entrances including, but not
limited to, the following:
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Templates: Obtain templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory
prepared for installing automatic entrances, and distribute to parties involved. Check Shop
Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and
installing automatic entrances to comply with indicated requirements.
B. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness,
hand, function, and finish. Coordinate hardware for automatic entrances with hardware
required for rest of Project.
1.9 WARRANTY
2. Warranty Period: 10 years for clear anodic finish, from date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
a. Biparting-Sliding Units:
2. Configuration: Biparting-sliding doors, with two sliding leaves and sidelites on each
side.
3. Operator Features:
a. Rollers: Minimum of two ball-bearing roller wheels and two antirise rollers
for each active leaf.
5. Activation Device: Motion sensor mounted on each side of door header to detect
pedestrians in activating zone and to open door.
6. Safety Devices: Two photoelectric beams mounted in sidelite jambs to detect
pedestrians in presence zone and to prevent door from closing.
7. Finish: Finish framing, door(s), sidelite(s), and header with Class I, clear anodic
finish.
B. Stile and Rail Doors: Manufacturer's standard 45-mm- thick, glazed doors with minimum
3.2-mm- thick, extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members. Mechanically fasten
corners with reinforcing brackets that are welded, or incorporate concealed tie-rods that
span full length of top and bottom rails.
C. Headers: Fabricated from minimum 3.2-mm- thick, extruded aluminum and extending full
width of automatic entrance units to conceal door operators and controls. Provide hinged or
removable access panels for service and adjustment of door operators and controls. Secure
panels to prevent unauthorized access.
A. Door Operators: Provide door operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door
size, weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; and for long-term, maintenance-free
operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated.
1. Door Operator Performance: Provide door operators that will open and close doors
and maintain them in fully closed position when subjected to Project's design wind
loads.
2. Electromechanical Operators: Concealed, self-contained, overhead unit powered by
fractional-horsepower, permanent-magnet dc motor; with closing speed controlled
mechanically by gear train and dynamically by braking action of electric motor; with
solid-state microprocessor controller; UL 325; and with manual operation with power
off.
D. Electrical Interlocks: Unless units are equipped with self-protecting devices or circuits,
provide electrical interlocks to prevent activation of operator when door is locked, latched,
or bolted.
E. Opening-Width Control: Two-position switch that in the normal position allows sliding
doors to travel to full opening width and in the alternate position reduces opening to a
selected partial opening width.
2.5 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide units in sizes and types recommended by automatic entrance and
hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. Finish exposed parts to match
door finish unless otherwise indicated.
B. Manual Opening for Power-Operated Swinging Doors: Provide hardware that in a power
failure allows door to open with a manual force not to exceed 133 N according to
BHMA A156.10.
C. Breakaway Device for Power-Operated Doors: Provide breakaway device that allows door
to swing out in direction of egress to full 90 degrees from any operating position.
Maximum force to open door shall be 222 N according to BHMA A156.10. Interrupt
powered operation of door operator while in breakaway mode.
E. Automatic Locking for Sliding Door where directed by Engineer: Electrically controlled
device mounted in header that automatically locks door against sliding when in closed
position. Provide fail secure operation if power fails.
1. Include concealed, vertical-rod exit devices, UL 305, with latching into threshold and
overhead carrier assembly and released by full-width panic bar; and that prevent
emergency breakaway doors from swinging and that permit emergency egress.
2. Include locking devices for sidelites, to prevent manual break out.
F. Dustproof Strikes for All-Glass Sliding Doors: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door
Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)."
1. Sliding Type: AAMA 701, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with
nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing.
2.6 FABRICATION
a. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and
structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices.
b. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
4. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by
manufacturer for this purpose.
1. Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies with manufacturer's standard welded
or mechanical joints. Provide subframes and reinforcement as required for a
complete system to support required loads.
2. Perform fabrication operations in manner that prevents damage to exposed finish
surfaces.
3. Form profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
4. Provide components with concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices.
5. Fabricate components with accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to
produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
6. Fabricate exterior components to drain water passing joints and condensation and
moisture occurring or migrating within system to the exterior.
7. Provide anchorage and alignment brackets for concealed support of assembly from
building structure.
8. Allow for thermal expansion of exterior units.
D. Door Operators: Factory fabricated and installed in headers, including adjusting and testing.
E. Glazing: Fabricate framing with minimum glazing edge clearances for thickness and type
of glazing indicated, according to GANA's "Glazing Manual."
F. Hardware: Factory install hardware to greatest extent possible; remove only as required for
final finishing operation and for delivery to and installation at Project site. Cut, drill, and
tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes.
1. Provide sliding-type weather stripping, mortised into door, at perimeter of doors and
breakaway sidelites.
1. General: Factory install devices in doors and headers as required by BHMA A156.10
for type of door and direction of travel.
2. Install photoelectric beams in vertical jambs of sidelites, with dimension above
finished floor as follows:
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
C. Apply organic and anodic finishes to formed metal after fabrication unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the
range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, header support, and other conditions affecting performance of automatic
entrances.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints
free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight.
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by
manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by
painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
B. Entrances: Install automatic entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines
and grades without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place.
C. Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system as specified
in Division 16 Sections.
E. Activation and Safety Devices: Install and adjust devices to provide detection field and
functions indicated.
1. Set bottom-guide track system, framing members and flashings in full sealant bed.
2. Seal perimeter of framing members with sealant.
H. Wiring within Automatic Entrance Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to
terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's written limitations on
bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.
A. Inspection: Engage Installer's certified inspector to test and inspect automatic entrances and
prepare test and inspection reports.
1. Certified inspector shall test and inspect each automatic entrance to determine
compliance of installed systems with applicable BHMA standards.
2. Inspection Report: Certified inspector shall submit report in writing to Engineer and
Contractor within 24 hours after inspection.
B. Work will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust door operators, controls, and hardware for smooth and safe operation and for
weathertight closure; comply with requirements in BHMA A156.10.
C. Readjust door operators and controls after repeated operation of completed installation
equivalent to 3 days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles). Lubricate hardware,
operating equipment, and other moving parts.
A. Clean glass and metal surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess glazing and
sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Repair damaged finish to match original
finish.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1. AW: Architectural.
1. Design pressure number in pascals used to determine the structural test pressure and
water test pressure.
C. Structural Test Pressure: For uniform load structural test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the
design pressure.
D. Minimum Test Size: Smallest size permitted for performance class (gateway test size).
Products must be tested at minimum test size or at a size larger than minimum test size to
comply with requirements for performance class.
E. Types of Windows
1. Fixed windows.
H. Fabricator: the fabricator of window or curtain wall joinery components based on system
provided by manufacturer.
1. Basic Wind Speed: 161 km/hr (100 MPH) according to UBC latest edition unless
otherwise shown on structural drawings.
2. Deflection: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to
less than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 19 mm, whichever is less, at design pressure
based on testing performed according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform
Load Deflection Test or structural computations.
B. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for
thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and
surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat
gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other
work, operational clearances, installation details, and the following:
a. Structural test pressures and design pressures from wind loads indicated.
b. Deflection limitations of glass framing systems.
D. Samples for Verification: For aluminum windows and components required, prepared on
Samples of size indicated below.
1. Main Framing Member: 300-mm- long, full-size sections of extrusions with factory-
applied finish.
2. Window Corner Fabrication: 300-by-300-mm- long, full-size window corner
including full-size sections of extrusions with factory-applied finish, weather
stripping, and glazing.
3. Operable Window: Full-size unit with factory-applied finish.
4. Hardware: Full-size units with factory-applied finishes.
5. Weather Stripping: 300-mm- long sections.
E. Product Schedule: For aluminum windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
F. Qualification Data: For Manufacturer, Fabricator, Installer, professional engineer and testing
agency.
1. Installer Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out
successfully by the installer with the same product endorsed by the manufacturer’s
representative.
G. Field quality-control test reports: From a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by
Contractor and approved by the Engineer
I. Maintenance Data: For operating hardware, weather stripping and finishes to include in
maintenance manuals.
1. A qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum
three years documented experience and that is approved, authorized, or licensed by
the product manufacturer to install his product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's warranty. Include project names and addresses, names and addresses
of Engineers and Employers, and other information specified
2. Installer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed
to assume engineering responsibility.
3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for aluminum windows, including
Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard
units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
C. Coating Applicator: apply coatings to metal work only by applicators licensed by the
coating manufacturer.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Engineer, except with
Engineer's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive
explanatory data to Engineer for review.
H. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
4. Review and discuss the sequence of work required to construct a watertight and
weathertight exterior building envelope.
5. Inspect and discuss the condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed
by other trades.
1.8 WARRANTY
2. Warranty Period:
B. Special Warranty for Metal Finishes: Provide written warranty signed by Contractor and
backed up by coating Manufacturer in which the contractor agrees to repair finishes that fail
in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Cracking.
2. Checking.
3. Peeling.
4. Chalking: in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214
5. Crazing.
6. Color Fading: more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244
7. Color retention.
C. Warranty Period for Metal Finishes: 10 years for clear anodic finish, from date of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. EFCO Corporation.
2. Graham Architectural Products Corp.
3. Heuck.
4. Kawneer; an Alcoa Company.
5. Wausau Window and Wall Systems.
6. Window Technologies, Inc.; Century Manufacturing, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw anchor into aluminum less than 3.2 mm thick,
reinforce interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw
threads, or provide standard, noncorrosive, pressed-in, splined grommet nuts.
G. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated windows, provide window manufacturer's
standard, permanently elastic, nonshrinking, and nonmigrating type recommended by
sealant manufacturer for joint size and movement.
2.3 WINDOW
F. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Provide glazed windows rated for not less than 30 STC
when tested for laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined
by ASTM E 413.
G. Air Infiltration: shall be to the type of window specified when tested in accordance with
AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Air Infiltration Test.
1. Test Pressure: 20 percent of positive design pressure, but not more than 720 Pa.
J. Life-Cycle Testing: Test according to AAMA 910 and comply with AAMA/ WDMA 101/
I.S.2/NAFS.
2.4 GLAZING
A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass units and
glazing requirements applicable to glazed aluminum window units.
2.5 HARDWARE
2.6 ACCESSORIES
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling
components and anchoring windows.
B. Fabricate aluminum windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator
framing.
1. Provide thermal-break construction that has been in use for not less than three years
and has been tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance and
condensation and to show adequate strength and security of glass retention.
2. Provide thermal barriers tested according to AAMA 505; determine the allowable
design shear flow per the appendix in AAMA 505.
3. Provide hardware with low conductivity or nonmetallic material for hardware
bridging thermal breaks at frame or vent sash.
D. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and
ventilator.
E. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to
exterior.
F. Provide water-shed members above side-hinged ventilators and similar lines of natural
water penetration.
G. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete
with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection
tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and
building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of
withstanding design loads of window units.
H. Subframes: Provide subframes with anchors for window units as shown, of profile and
dimensions indicated but not less than 1.6-mm- thick extruded aluminum. Miter or cope
corners, and weld and dress smooth with concealed mechanical joint fasteners. Finish to
match window units. Provide subframes capable of withstanding design loads of window
units.
I. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze aluminum windows in the factory where practical and
possible for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section
"Glazing" and with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS.
J. Glazing Stops: Provide snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 8 Section
"Glazing" and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator
frames.
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate,
and operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather
barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight window
installation.
1. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other
construction debris.
2. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets
at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within
76 mm of opening.
3. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag;
without sharp edges or offsets at joints.
4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for
installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components.
B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal
movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall
flashing and other adjacent construction.
C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight
construction.
D. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and
moisture migrating within windows to the exterior.
E. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic
action at points of contact with other materials.
3.3 FINISHES
A. Application of Finishes: prepare substrates and apply finishes in strict accordance with
Manufacturer’ printed instructions and by applicators licensed by the coating manufacturer.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and
prepare test reports.
1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether
tested work complies with or deviates from requirements.
B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of installed windows shall take place as follows:
1. Testing Methodology: Testing of windows for air infiltration and water resistance
shall be performed according to AAMA 502, Test Method A, by applying same test
pressures required to determine compliance with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS in
Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.
2. Testing Extent: Three mockup windows as selected by Engineer and a qualified
independent testing and inspecting agency. Windows shall be tested immediately
after installation.
3. Test Reports: Shall be prepared according to AAMA 502.
C. Remove and replace noncomplying aluminum window and retest as specified above.
A. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, hardware and accessories for a tight fit at contact
points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate
hardware and moving parts.
B. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective
coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged
during construction period.
E. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from
construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below
exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact
window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
a. Swinging doors.
b. Non-fire-rated sliding doors.
c. Other doors to the extent indicated.
1. Division 8 Section "Standard Steel Doors and Frames" for astragals provided as part
of fire-rated labeled assemblies and for door silencers provided as part of hollow-
metal frames.
2. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for astragals and integral intumescent seals
provided as part of fire-rated labeled assemblies.
3. Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames" for access door hardware, including
cylinders.
4. Division 8 Section "Overhead Coiling Doors" for door hardware provided as part of
overhead door assemblies.
5. Division 8 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for entrance door
hardware, including cylinders.
6. Division 8 Section "Automatic Entrance Doors" for entrance door hardware,
including cylinders.
7. Division 16 Sections for connections to electrical power system and for low-voltage
wiring work.
C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following.
Coordinating, purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this Section.
1. Pivots, thresholds, weather stripping and cylinders for locks specified in other
Sections.
2. Permanent cores to be installed by Employer.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include the following:
a. System schematic.
b. Point-to-point wiring diagram.
c. Riser diagram.
d. Elevation of each door.
2. Detail interface between electrified door hardware and fire alarm, access control,
security and building control system.
3. Operation Narrative: Describe the operation of doors controlled by electrified door
hardware.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each finish, color, and texture required for each type of
door hardware indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: Submit minimum 51-by-102-mm plate Samples of each type of
finish required, except primed finish.
E. Samples for Verification: For exposed door hardware of each type, in specified finish, full
size. Tag with full description for coordination with the door hardware sets. Submit
Samples before, or concurrent with, submission of the final door hardware sets.
1. Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain
undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final
check of operation, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of keying
requirements.
1. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire doors
complies with listed fire door assemblies.
I. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals.
Include final hardware and keying schedule.
10) List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and
frame.
c. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final door hardware sets at earliest possible
date, particularly where approval of the door hardware sets must precede
fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule.
Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door
hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the door
hardware sets.
1.4 REFERENCES
B. NFPA 101-2006: Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this Section
and who has completed door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that
indicated for this Project with minimum three years documented experience and that is
approved, authorized, or licensed by the product manufacturer to install his product and that
is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty. Include project names and addresses, names
and addresses of Engineers and Employers, and other information specified
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for
fire ratings indicated, based on testing according toNFPA 252 .
E. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Labels: all hardware components of fire resisting doors assemblies including, but not limited
hinges, locks, bolts, door closers shall carry the identifying labels of an approved
independent testing and inspection agency or laboratory, confirming their fire resistance
rating. The rating of all door components shall be equal to the rating of the door assembly.
G. Door Closers: all fire resisting doors assemblies shall be fitted with door closers to close and
positively latch the door.
1. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in and other preparatory work performed by
other trades.
2. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware.
3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,
Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
4. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.
J. Hardware Schedule: The manufacturer's names and references included in the schedule are
only included to establish the minimum standards required and to establish guidelines as to
shape, function, material and finish of the hardware items required. Hardware items, which
are similar to those setout in the schedule and in accordance with minimum standards set out
in part 2, can be selected from any of the approved manufacturers listed in Part 2.
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered
to Project site.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final door hardware
sets, and include basic installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each
item or package.
C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Employer.
D. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Employer by registered mail or overnight package
service.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of recessed pivots and closers with floor construction.
Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements
are specified in Division 3.
B. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified
to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to
confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to
comply with indicated requirements.
D. Existing Openings: Where new hardware components are scheduled for application to
existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field
verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening
conditions and to provide for proper operation.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Assembly Warranty: Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, and
Installer are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace components of
door hardware systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Employer's continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of door hardware.
A. Furnish full-size units of door hardware described below, before installation begins, that
match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and
identified with labels describing contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this
Section and door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule.
1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated.
2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of
operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.
B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive
qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets"
Article. Products are identified by descriptive titles corresponding to requirements specified
in Part 2.
C. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply
to product selection:
B. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves)
into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units.
1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes.
2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames.
3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors.
4. Screws: Phillips flat-head; machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal doors
and wood screws for wood doors and frames. Finish screw heads to match surface of
hinges.
2.3 HINGES
A. Butts and Hinges: Listed under Category A in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory."
C. Available Manufacturers:
C. Available Manufacturers:
D. Double-Acting Door Pivots: BHMA A156.4, Grade 2, consisting of one top and one bottom
assembly with bearings; nonferrous bottom jamb bracket; wrought brass or bronze.
G. Center Pivot Sets: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, type and size required for application
indicated; complying with the following:
1. Top Pivots: Walking-beam type with retractable pin and oil-impregnated bronze
bearing; mortised into door and frame.
2. Bottom Pivots: Recessed in floor in cement case, and mortised into door; with thrust
ball bearing.
3. Base Metal: Steel.
H. Offset Pivot Sets: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, type and size required for application indicated;
complying with the following:
1. Offset: 19 mm.
2. Fire Rated: Listed for use with labeled fire doors where indicated.
3. Top Pivots: Walking-beam type with retractable pin and oil-impregnated bronze
bearing; mortised into door and frame.
4. Bottom Pivots: Recessed in floor in cement case, and mortised into door; with thrust
ball bearing.
5. Base Metal: Stainless steel.
I. Intermediate Pivot Sets: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, type and size required for application
indicated; with oil-impregnated bronze bearing; complying with the following:
1. Offset: 19 mm.
2. Mounting: Full mortise.
3. Knuckle: Standard.
4. Fire Rated: Listed for use with labeled fire doors where indicated.
5. Base Metal: Stainless steel.
K. Double-Acting, Gravity Pivot: BHMA A156.17, Grade 1, malleable iron, surface applied,
adjustable tension.
1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of
the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 22 N.
C. Lock Trim:
1. Levers: Cast.
2. Knobs: Wrought.
3. Escutcheons (Roses): Cast.
4. Dummy Trim: Match knob and lever lock trim and escutcheons.
5. Lockset Designs: Provide design indicated on Drawings or, if sets are provided by
another manufacturer, provide designs that match those designated.
D. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire
doors, and as follows:
E. Rabbeted Meeting Doors: Provide special rabbeted front and strike on locksets for rabbeted
meeting stiles.
G. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latchbolt or lock bolt, with
curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, and as follows:
A. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in door hardware sets comply
with the following:
B. Mortise Locks: Stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; BHMA A156.13, Grade 1;
Series 1000. Listed under Category F in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory."
1. Available Manufacturers:
A. Exit Locks: BHMA A156.29, Grade 1, surface mounted; battery powered, housed in metal
case; with red-and-white lettering reading "EMERGENCY EXIT PUSH TO OPEN--
ALARM WILL SOUND." Include the following features:
1. Low-battery alert.
2. Outside key control.
3. Audible alarm that sounds when unauthorized use of door occurs.
4. Silent alarm with remote signal capability for connection to remote indicating panel.
5. Strike: Mortise.
6. Single-Door Type: Activated by horizontal bar.
7. Pairs-of-Door Type: Activated by horizontal bar.
B. Available Manufacturers:
A. Bolt Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire
doors, and as follows:
1. Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 13-mm- diameter rods of brass, bronze, or stainless
steel with minimum 305-mm- long rod for doors up to 2134 mm in height. Provide
longer rods as necessary for doors exceeding 2134 mm.
2. Available Manufacturers:
D. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; designed for mortising into door edge.
1. Available Manufacturers:
E. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1; designed for mortising
into door edge.
1. Available Manufacturers:
C. Fire-Rated Surface Bolts: 203-mm steel bolt with 2 steel guides; minimum 25-mm throw;
listed and labeled for fire-rated doors; with universal strike.
D. Automatic Flush Bolts: Fabricated from steel and brass components, with spring-activated
bolts that automatically retract when active leaf is opened and that automatically engage
when active door depresses bolt trigger; listed and labeled for fire-rated doors. Provide
brass or stainless-steel cover plate, top and bottom strikes, guides, guide supports, wear
plates, and shims.
E. Self-Latching Flush Bolts: Fabricated from steel and brass components, with spring-
activated bolts that automatically engage when active door depresses trigger; listed and
labeled for fire-rated doors. Bolts are manually retracted by a slide in the bolt face. Provide
brass or stainless-steel cover plate, top and bottom strikes, guides, guide supports, wear
plates, and shims.
F. Manual-Extension Flush Bolts: Fabricated from extruded brass or aluminum, with 305-mm
rod actuated by flat lever; listed and labeled for fire-rated doors. Provide matching strike.
G. Slide Flush Bolts: Cast brass, with rod actuated by slide. Provide matching strike.
H. Tubular Bolts: Polished-brass or polished-bronze, oval turn knob and escutcheon; minimum
14-mm steel bolt with 13-mm throw.
I. Dustproof Strikes:
1. Jamb Type: Polished wrought brass, with 19-mm- diameter, spring-tension plunger.
2. Floor Type: Polished wrought brass, with 19-mm- diameter, spring-tension plunger.
3. Locking Floor Type: Polished wrought brass, with 19-mm- diameter, spring-tension
plunger that can be locked in the up position by rotating plunger.
A. Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1. Listed under Category G in BHMA's "Certified
Product Directory."
B. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating
devices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1.
1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of
the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 22 N.
C. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.
D. Fire Exit Devices: Devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic
protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252.
E. Fire-Exit Removable Mullions: Provide removable mullions for use with fire exit devices
complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing
according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. Mullions shall be used only with exit devices for
which they have been tested.
F. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar.
G. Outside Trim: Lever with cylinder unless otherwise indicated; material and finish to match
locksets, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Through Bolts: For exit devices and trim on metal doors, non-fire-rated wood doors and
fire-rated wood doors.
I. Available Manufacturers:
1. Type: BHMA A156.3, Type 7, for wood doors and Type 8, for metal doors.
2. Actuating Bar: Push pad.
3. Material: Stainless steel.
1. Type: BHMA A156.3, Type 12, mortise and concealed vertical rod.
2. Actuating Bar: Push pad.
3. Material: Stainless steel.
2. Delayed Egress: Depressing push bar for more than 3 seconds initiates irreversible
alarm and 15-second delay for egress. Fire alarm voids 15-second delay.
3. Electric Latch Retraction: Remote signal activates continuous-duty solenoid that
retracts latch.
4. Electric Locking/Unlocking: Remote signal controls locking of outside trim;
complying with the following:
5. Push-Bar Monitor: Signal initiated to remote alarm when push bar is actuated.
6. Push-Bar Alarm: Signal initiated to audible, battery-powered, internal alarm when
push bar is actuated.
K. Tube-Steel Removable Mullions: BHMA A156.3, with malleable-iron top and bottom
retainers, and prepared for strikes as follows:
C. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with
the following:
1. Interchangeable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; usable with
other manufacturers' cylinders.
2. Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; for use only with
core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware.
1. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of
construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.
2. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent
cores. Provide 10 construction master keys.
2.13 KEYING
1. Great-Grand Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key, a master
key, a grand master key, and a great-grand master key.
2. Keyed Alike: Key all cylinders to same change key.
1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and
include the following notation:
2. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following:
A. Key Control Cabinet: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1; metal cabinet with baked-enamel finish;
containing key-holding hooks, labels, 2 sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key-
gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers; with key capacity of 150
percent of the number of locks.
B. Cross-Index System: Multiple-index system for recording key information. Include three
receipt forms for each key-holding hook. Set up by key control manufacturer.
1. Available Manufacturers:
C. Key Control System Software: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1; multiple-index system for
recording and reporting key-holder listings, tracking keys and lock and key history, and
printing receipts for transactions. Include instruction manual.
1. Available Manufacturers:
D. Key Lock Boxes: Designed for storage of 10 keys, with tamper switches to connect to
intrusion detection system.
1. Available Manufacturers:
C. Available Manufacturers:
C. Available Manufacturers:
A. Flat Push Plates: 1.3 mm thick, 102 mm wide by 406 mm high; with square corners and
beveled edges, secured with exposed screws.
B. Cold-Forged Push Plates: 1.3 mm thick, 102 mm wide by 406 mm high; with square
corners and beveled edges, secured with exposed screws.
C. Push-Pull Plates: 3.2 mm thick, 102 mm wide by 406 mm high; with square corners,
beveled edges, and raised integral lip; secured with exposed screws.
G. Pull-Plate Door Pulls: 1.3-mm- thick plate, 102 mm wide by 406 mm high, with square
corners and beveled edges; 19-mm constant-diameter pull, with minimum clearance of 38
mm from face of door; fastened at 203 mm o.c.
H. Straight Push-Pull Door Pulls: Push-pull plate minimum 125 mm wide by 300 mm high,
with minimum clearance of 38 mm from face of door.
I. Offset Push-Pull Door Pulls: Push-pull plate minimum 125 mm wide by 300 mm high,
with minimum clearance of 38 mm from face of door, and offset 50 mm.
J. Single Push Bar: Horizontal bar, with minimum clearance of 38 mm from face of door, and
as follows:
K. Double Pull Bar: Two horizontal bars connected by matching vertical pull bar and spaced at
200 mm o.c.; with minimum clearance of 38 mm from face of door, and as follows:
A. Carry-Open Bars: Provide carry-open bars for inactive leaves of pairs of doors unless
automatic or self-latching bolts are used.
B. Flat Overlapping Astragals: Flat metal bar, surface mounted on face of door with screws;
minimum 3.2 mm thick by 50 mm wide by full height of door; and base metal as follows:
C. Rigid, Housed Astragals: Gasket material held in place by metal housing; fastened to face
of door with screws.
A. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating
devices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1.
B. Surface Closers: closers shall be tested for 10 million cycles of operation with minimum
warranty of 10 years. They shall be suitable for door capacity as per the manufactures
recommendations.
C. Hold-Open Closers/Detectors: Coordinate and interface integral smoke detector and closer
device with fire alarm system.
D. Flush Floor Plates: Provide finish cover plates for floor closers unless thresholds are
indicated. Match door hardware finish, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Recessed Floor Plates: Provide recessed floor plates with insert of floor finish material for
floor closers unless thresholds are indicated. Provide extended closer spindle to
accommodate thickness of floor finish.
G. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1. Listed under Category C in BHMA's "Certified
Product Directory." Provide type of arm required for closer to be located on non-public side
of door, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Available Manufacturers:
1. Available Manufacturers:
I. Closer Holder Release Devices: BHMA A156.15. Listed under Category C in BHMA's
"Certified Product Directory."
2.20 CLOSERS
A. Traditional Surface Closers: Rack-and-pinion hydraulic type; with adjustable sweep and
latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves; with forged-steel main arm; enclosed in a
cast-aluminum alloy shell; complying with the following:
E. Overhead Concealed Closers: Rack-and-pinion hydraulic type; with adjustable sweep and
latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves; mortised into head frame; with cast-metal
body and exposed cover plate; complying with the following:
1. Type: Concealed arm and track, butt or pivot hung, single acting unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Arm: Regular.
3. Track: Regular.
4. Cover Plate Material: Aluminum unless otherwise indicated.
5. Backcheck: Adjustable.
6. Closing Power Adjustment: At least 50 percent more than minimum tested value.
F. Floor Concealed Closers: Rack-and-pinion hydraulic type; with adjustable sweep and latch
speeds controlled by key-operated valves; with cement case and cast-iron closer body case;
for single-acting doors; complying with the following:
2. Fire Rated: Listed for use with labeled fire doors where indicated.
3. Function: Regular.
4. Backcheck: Adjustable.
5. Closing Power Adjustment: At least 50 percent more than minimum tested value.
6. Case Depth: Regular, 100 mm.
G. Closer Holder Release Devices: Closer connected with separate or integral releasing and
fire- or smoke-detecting devices. Door shall become self-closing on interruption of signal
to release device. Comply with the following:
A. Size: 38 mm less than door width on push side and 13 mm less than door width on pull
side, by height specified in door hardware sets.
C. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; beveled top and 2 sides; fabricated from the
following material:
A. Armor Plates: 914 mm high by door width, with allowance for frame stops.
B. Kick Plates: 305 mm high by door width, with allowance for frame stops.
D. Stretcher Plates: 203 mm high by door width, with allowance for frame stops.
E. Nonmortise Angle Door Edging: Minimum 1.3-mm- thick metal sheet formed into angle
shape; with 32-mm length of leg on face of door; surface mounted on door.
F. Mortise Angle Door Edging: Minimum 1.3-mm- thick metal sheet formed into angle
shape; with 22-mm length of leg on face of door; mortised into edge of door.
G. Nonmortise Cap Door Edging: Minimum 1.3-mm- thick metal sheet formed into "U"
shape; with 32-mm length of leg on faces of door; surface mounted on door.
H. Mortise Cap Door Edging: Minimum 1.3-mm- thick metal sheet formed into "U" shape;
with 22-mm length of leg on faces of door; mortised into edge of door.
1. Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or
indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or
wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders.
C. Combination Floor and Wall Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1.
E. Electromagnetic Door Holders: Coordinate with fire detectors and interface with fire alarm
system for labeled fire door assemblies.
F. Silencers for Wood Door Frames: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum
16 by 19 mm; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.
G. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum
diameter 13 mm; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.
H. Available Manufacturers:
A. Chain Door Stops: Welded chain, each end attached to compression springs, both covered
with protective sleeve; surface-screw application.
B. Rigid Wall Stops: Polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum; 89 mm long, with rubber
bumper; surface-screw application.
C. Wall Bumpers: Polished cast brass or aluminum with rubber bumper; 64-mm diameter,
minimum 19-mm projection from wall, with backplate for concealed fastener installation;
with convex bumper configuration.
D. Roller-Type Bumpers: Polished cast brass or bronze; minimum 111-mm projection from
wall; attached by surface screws.
E. Rigid Floor Stops: Polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum, with rubber bumper; surface-
screw application.
F. Dome-Type Floor Stops: Polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum, with rubber bumper;
and as follows:
1. Height: Minimum 25 mm high, for doors without threshold and 35 mm high, for
doors with threshold.
H. Combination Floor Stop and Holders: Polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum; encased
spring bumper with metal plunger and stop; and as follows:
1. Operation: Automatic hold open and release by pushing door unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Application: Surface screw.
I. Manual Combination Floor Stop and Holders: Polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum;
89 mm long, with holder, keeper, and rubber bumper; surface-screw application.
J. Combination Wall Stop and Holders: Polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum; encased
spring bumper with metal plunger and stop; surface-screw application; and as follows:
1. Operation: Automatic hold open and release by pushing door unless otherwise
indicated.
K. Manual Combination Wall Stop and Holders: Polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum; 89
mm long, with holder, keeper, and rubber bumper; surface-screw application.
A. Overhead Concealed Slide Holders: BHMA A156.8, Type 1; hold open and release by push
and pull of door unless control is set in inactive position; with stop and shock absorber;
adjustable holding pressure; for single and double-acting doors opening 110 degrees.
B. Overhead Concealed Slide Stops: BHMA A156.8, Type 1; release by push and pull of door
unless control is set in inactive position; with stop and shock absorber; adjustable holding
pressure; for single and double-acting doors opening 110 degrees.
C. Overhead Surface-Mounted Slide Holders: BHMA A156.8, Type 2; hold open and release
by push and pull of door unless control is set in inactive position; with stop and shock
absorber; adjustable holding pressure; for single-acting doors opening 110 degrees.
E. Overhead Surface-Mounted, Jointed-Arm Holders: BHMA A156.8, Type 3; hold open and
release by push and pull of door; control capable of being set in inactive position; with stop
and shock absorber; for single-acting doors opening 110 degrees.
J. Overhead Surface-Mounted Rod Holders: BHMA A156.8, Type 8; hold open and release
by push and pull of door unless roller cam is set in inactive position; with stop and shock
absorber; adjustable spring tension; for single-acting doors opening 110 degrees.
K. Overhead Surface-Mounted Rod Stops: BHMA A156.8, Type 8; release by push and pull
of door unless roller cam is set in inactive position; with stop and shock absorber; adjustable
spring tension; for single-acting doors opening 110 degrees.
L. Overhead Surface-Mounted Cantilever Holders: BHMA A156.8, Type 9; hold open and
release by push and pull of door or thumb turn; with stop and shock absorber; for single-
acting doors opening 110 degrees.
M. Overhead Surface-Mounted Cantilever Stops: BHMA A156.8, Type 9; release by push and
pull of door or thumb turn; with stop and shock absorber; for single-acting doors opening
110 degrees.
B. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke,
light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide
noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.
2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are
closed.
3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is
closed.
C. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.000774 cu. m/s per m of crack length for gasketing other
than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283.
D. Smoke-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for
smoke-control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.
E. Fire-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire
ratings indicated, based on testing according to UBC Standard 7-2.
F. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting
agency, for sound ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1408.
G. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are
easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
I. Available Manufacturers:
1. Hager Companies.
2. M-D Building Products, Inc.
3. National Guard Products.
A. Adhesive-Backed Perimeter Gasketing: Gasket material applied to frame rabbet with self-
adhesive.
B. Spring-Metal Perimeter Gasketing: Metal gasket material fastened to frame rabbet with
nails or screws.
C. Rigid, Housed, Perimeter Gasketing: Gasket material held in place by metal housing;
fastened to frame stop with screws.
E. Interlocking Perimeter Gasketing: Metal gasket material consisting of two pieces, one
fastened to door and one fastened to frame, that interlock when door is closed; mounted
with screws.
F. Overlapping Astragals for Meeting Stiles: Gasket material held in place by metal housing
and overlapping when doors are closed; mounted to face of meeting stile with screws.
G. Meeting Astragals for Meeting Stiles: Gasket material held in place by metal housing;
mounted with screws.
H. Adjustable Astragals for Meeting Stiles: Screw-adjustable gasket material held in place by
metal housing; mounted with screws.
I. Door Sweeps: Gasket material held in place by flat metal housing or flange; surface
mounted to face of door with screws.
J. Door Shoes: Gasket material held in place by metal housing; mounted to bottom edge of
door with screws.
K. Automatic Door Bottoms: Gasket material held in place by metal housing that
automatically drops to form seal when door is closed; mounted to bottom edge of door with
screws.
1. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not
more than 13 mm high and 19 mm high for exterior sliding doors.
C. Available Manufacturers:
1. Hager Companies.
2. M-D Building Products, Inc.
3. National Guard Products.
4. Pemko Manufacturing Co.
5. Reese Enterprises.
6. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
7. Sealeze; a Unit of Jason Incorporated.
8. Zero International.
2.29 THRESHOLDS
E. Latching/Rabbeted Thresholds with Gasket: Fluted-top metal member with gasket; type and
base metal as follows:
1. Type: Offset.
2. Base Metal: Aluminum.
3. Gasket Material: Silicone.
G. Ramped Thresholds: Modular, interlocking, sloped, fluted-top metal assemblies with closed
return ends; 1:12 slope; and base metal as follows:
H. Saddle Thresholds for Floor Closers: Fluted top; type and base metal as follows:
1. Type: Type A, for center-hung doors; ends not mitered unless otherwise indicated.
2. Base Metal: Aluminum.
A. General: BHMA A156.14; consisting of complete sets including rails, hangers, supports,
bumpers, floor guides, and accessories indicated.
B. Horizontal Sliding Door Hardware: Grade 1; rated for minimum door weight of 681 kg.
D. Available Manufacturers:
3. Hanger Configuration: Four-wheel hanger assembly with double drop strap unless
otherwise indicated.
4. Accessories:
B. Bypassing Sliding Door Hardware: Rails and door hardware that allow vertical adjustment.
A. Boxed Power Supplies: Modular unit in NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure; filtered and
regulated; voltage rating and type matching requirements of door hardware served; and
listed and labeled for use with fire alarm systems.
1. Available Manufacturers:
B. Chain Door Guards: Polished cast brass or bronze or extruded brass; consisting of plate
slotted to receive 150-mm- long welded chain secured to an anchor plate. Guard shall
allow door to be opened 75 mm with chain engaged in slotted plate. Equip with chain
holder.
C. Coat Hooks: Two curved hooks with rounded ends; 76-mm projection from wall; surface-
screw applied; fabricated from burnished cast aluminum.
D. Rod-Type Door Guards: Straight door-mounted rod that engages U-shaped, jamb-mounted
rod. U-shaped rod can swing 180 degrees away from door; guard allows door to be slightly
opened when engaged. Fabricated from polished cast aluminum.
E. Door Knockers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; solid brass, with engraved number and
nameplates.
F. Door Position Switches: Magnetically operated reed switch designed for concealed
mounting.
G. Garment Hooks: One long hat hook and one small coat hook; 95-mm projection from wall
with 178-mm overall height; surface-screw applied; fabricated from burnished cast
aluminum.
H. Letter Box Plates: Spring-loaded front plate with brass spring; inside covered gravity flap
or hood; fabricated from aluminum; of the following type:
1. Regular Size, Inswinging: Minimum 0.9-mm metal thickness, with minimum 178-
by-41-mm opening.
2. Regular Size, Outswinging: Minimum 0.9-mm metal thickness, with minimum 178-
by-38-mm opening.
3. Magazine Size, Outswinging: Minimum 1.3-mm metal thickness, with minimum
279-by-48-mm opening.
I. Door and Frame Transfer Devices: Steel housing for mortise in hinge stile of door, with
flexible tube for wiring bundle; accommodating doors that swing open to 120 degrees.
2.34 FABRICATION
A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade
name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and
as otherwise approved by Engineer.
B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method
indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness.
Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and
BHMA A156.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if
different from specified standard.
1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed,
except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts
for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only
means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on
hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.
2. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire-rated applications:
3. Steel Through Bolts: For the following fire-rated applications unless door blocking is
provided:
2.35 FINISHES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction,
and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring
connections before electrified door hardware installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
1. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to
ANSI A250.6.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows unless
otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware
for Wood Flush Doors."
B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where
cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to
be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of
surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not
install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment
substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners.
Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
C. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system
cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.
D. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above
accessible ceilings. Verify location with Engineer.
E. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying
with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
1. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state
in each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements,
including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door
to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted
to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of
heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Division 8 Section "Automatic Entrance Doors" for entrance doors packaged with
automatic door operators and controls.
2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)" for door
hardware that must be coordinated with automatic door operator.
3. Division 8 door Sections for doors that need reinforcement for automatic door
operators.
4. Division 15 Sections for compressed-air supply and connections to building's
compressed-air system.
5. Division 16 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for
automatic door operators.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Activation Device: Device that, when actuated, sends electrical signal to automatic door
operator to open door.
A. Opening and Closing Forces: Not more than 67 N applied 25 mm from the latch edge of the
door.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for automatic door operators.
Include locations and elevations of entrances showing activation and safety devices.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work for guide
rails.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed component and door control
indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: For exposed components and activation and safety devices with
factory-applied color finishes.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For automatic door operators to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from Installer's
place of business to Project site.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic door operators through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and locations of recesses in concrete floors for recessed control mats that
control automatic door operators. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are
specified in Division 3.
B. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and
other work specified to be factory prepared for installing automatic door operators. Check
Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and
installing automatic door operators to comply with indicated requirements.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with
labels describing contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated, complying with standards indicated below:
A. General: Provide operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight,
and movement; for condition of exposure; and for long-term, maintenance-free operation
under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated.
1. Where indicated for center-pivoted doors, provide emergency breakout feature for
reverse swing of doors.
B. Performance Requirements:
1. Not more than 180 N applied 25 mm from latch edge of door to prevent stopped door
from opening or closing.
2. If power fails, not more than 133 N applied 25 mm from latch edge of door to
manually open door.
F. Features:
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, door and frame supports, and other conditions affecting performance of
automatic door operators.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions
detrimental to performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical systems to verify actual locations of power connections
before automatic door operator installation.
C. Examine roughing-in for compressed-air piping systems to verify actual locations of piping
connections before automatic door operator installation.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install complete automatic door operator system, including activation and safety
devices, control wiring, and remote power units.
B. Power Door Operator Installation Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.10 for installation.
C. Automatic Door Operators: Install door operator system, including control wiring, as
follows:
D. Activation and Safety Devices: Install devices and wiring, including connections to
automatic door operators, according to BHMA A156.10 and as follows:
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform
field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Testing and Inspecting: After installation has been completed, testing and inspecting of
each automatic door operator shall be performed to verify compliance with applicable
BHMA standards.
C. Remove and replace automatic door operators where test results indicate they do not comply
with specified requirements.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust automatic door operators and activation and safety devices to operate smoothly,
easily, and properly, and for safe operation and weathertight closure.
1. Adjust doors with low-energy door operators to close according to BHMA A156.19.
D. Readjust automatic door operators and activation and safety devices after repeated operation
of completed installation equivalent to three days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles).
Lubricate hardware, operating equipment, and other moving parts.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those
specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this
Section:
1. Windows.
2. Doors.
3. Glazed curtain walls.
4. Storefront framing.
5. Glazed entrances.
6. Sloped glazing.
7. Skylights.
B. Related Sections:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined
in referenced glazing publications.
D. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the
manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for main-
taining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects in-
clude peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.
E. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to
the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for
maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.
Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass,
and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.
F. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use that is attri-
buted to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices
for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.
Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces
of glass.
G. Deterioration of Heat Treated Glass: Failure of the heat-treated glass that is attributed to the
manufacturing process due to the presence of nickel sulphide particles causing spontaneous
breakage of the glass units.
A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and
impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable
to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or
gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects
in construction.
B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing
only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions.
Provide glass lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not
less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed
the following criteria:
1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300,
according to the following requirements:
1. Basic Wind Speed: 161 km/hr (100 MPH) according to UBC latest edition unless
otherwise shown on structural drawings.
2. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design
glass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration
load.
3. Sloped Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped more than 15 degrees from vertical, design
glass to resist each of the following combinations of loads:
a. Outward design wind pressure minus the weight of the glass. Base design on
glass type factors for short-duration load.
b. Half of the inward design wind pressure plus the weight of the glass plus the
design snow load. Base design on glass type factors for long-duration load.
4. Probability of Breakage for Sloped Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped more than 15
degrees from vertical, design glass for a probability of breakage not greater than
0.001.
5. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-
glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side
length or 25 mm, whichever is less.
6. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential
shading within individual glass lites.
D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.
E. Heat Treated Glass: Provide heat-treated glass that is free from nickel sulphide. Provide cer-
tificate from supplier that all heat-treated glass units have successfully passed heat-soak test
A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tape
sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and
compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.
1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current
sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.
2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation
techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to
glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.
3. Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates,
shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the
Work.
5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 300
mm square.
C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For gaskets, sealants and colored spacers, in 300-mm
lengths. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the
adjoining framing system.
D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use
same designations indicated on Drawings.
1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations
within previous 36-month period.
I. Loading Requirements: Submit calculation sheets showing that the specified glass can with-
stand the actual loading requirements indicated:
1. Thickness
2. Kind of heat treatment
3. Safety.
J. Full Heat-Soak Test: Provide certificate from supplier that all heat-treated glass units have
successfully passed full heat-soak test to an approved international specifications such as
EN 14179 or DIN 18516 which ever is the more stringent
E. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain coated float glass, laminated glass and insulating glass
from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.
F. Source Limitations for Glass Sputter-Coated with Solar-Control Low-E Coatings: Where
solar-control low-e coatings of a primary glass manufacturer that has established a certified
fabricator program is specified, obtain sputter-coated solar-control low-e-coated glass in
fabricated units from a manufacturer that is certified by coated-glass manufacturer.
G. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single
manufacturer for each product and installation method.
2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and
AAMA TIR-A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped
Glazing."
4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American
Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential
Use."
I. Processing Limitations for High Performance Glazing: cut and process high performance
glass, laminated glass and double glazed units in automated machines designed specifically
for the purpose.
1. Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified in
Part 2 articles for glazing lites more than 0.84 sq. m in exposed surface area of one
side, provide glazing products that comply with Category II materials, for lites 0.84
sq. m or less in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that
comply with Category I or II materials, except for hazardous locations where
Category II materials are required by 16 CFR 1201 and regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
J. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark
glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to
Engineer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety
glazing standard with which glass complies.
1. Glazing for Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with
NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to Engineer/ authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated,
based on testing according to NFPA 252.
2. Glazing for Fire-Rated Window Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with
NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to Engineer/ authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing
according to NFPA 257.
3. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201.
M. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and
when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 4.4 deg C.
1.10 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply
to product selection:
b. Glastrosch
c. Pilkington
d. PPG Industries
e. Saint Gobain
f. Visteon (Ford)
g. Viracon
1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm.
B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated
float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance
Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-
treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with
"Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide
Kind FT heat-treated float glass.
C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties
specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated
below:
1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick
minimum.
2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated.
3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for
overall unit and for each lite.
4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's
WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as W/sq. m x K.
5. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,
according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.
6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.
B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless
otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated.
C. Heat Soaking: All heat treated glass shall be heat soak tested. After the test, the probability
of failure in service should be less than one in 130 tons, or 5,000 m2 of 10 mm of heat
treated glass.
D. Ceramic-Coated Vision Glass: Heat-treated float glass, Condition C; with ceramic enamel
applied by silk-screened process; complying with Specification No. 95-1-31 in GANA's
Tempering Division's "Engineering Standards Manual" and with other requirements
specified.
A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201
for Category II materials, and with other requirements specified. Use materials that have a
proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties
after fabrication and installation.
B. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article and in "Laminated
Glass" Article as indicated by designations in "Insulating-Glass Types" Article.
B. Laminated Glass with Intumescent Interlayers: Laminated glass made from multiple plies
of uncoated, clear float glass; with intumescent interlayers; complying with testing
requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.
A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required
to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:
C. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames
with molded corner units and zipper lock-strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.
A. General:
1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with
other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass
units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions
existing at time of installation.
3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's
full range.
C. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Products that are approved by testing
agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they are used for
applications and fire-protection ratings indicated.
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with
adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary
sealant.
2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination
with a full bead of liquid sealant.
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus
or minus 5.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size
and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant
performance.
G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency
that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and
fire-protection rating indicated.
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and
face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of
product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system
performance requirements.
B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges
with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.
A. Glass Type : Clear float glass and fully tempered float glass.
A. Glass Type (GL): Clear laminated glass with two plies of fully tempered float glass.
a. Overhead glazing
b. Glass handrails
B. Glass Type: Ceramic-coated laminated glass with two plies of fully tempered float glass.
A. Glass Type: Fire-rated glazing with 250 deg C temperature rise limitation; laminated glass
with intumescent interlayers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with
the following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and
offsets at corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.
3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before
glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as
needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials
that will leave visible marks in the completed work.
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass
from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge
damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair
performance and appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction testing.
E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 1270 mm.
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets
and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face
clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.
2. Provide 3-mm minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness
of tape.
H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving
sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and
according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.
K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or
gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when
installation is subjected to movement.
L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended
by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt
joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are
flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes
to make them fit opening.
C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs.
Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not
lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.
G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting
dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable
stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in
place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks
and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets
formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket
applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce
a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with
sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks
and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and
pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress
gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal
gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between
glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from
extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers
or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative
to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or
bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide
supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated.
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed
streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with
glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt,
scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass
manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged
from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before
date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
B. Related Sections:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Mirrors. Include description of materials and process used to produce each type of
silvered flat glass mirror specified that indicates sources of glass, glass coating
components, edge sealer, and quality-control provisions.
B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachments
to other work.
E. Product Certificates: For each type of mirror and mirror mastic, from manufacturer.
F. Preconstruction Test Reports: From mirror manufacturer indicating that mirror mastic was
tested for compatibility and adhesion with mirror backing film and substrates on which
mirrors are installed.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project
who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.
B. Source Limitations for Mirrors: Obtain mirrors from single source from single
manufacturer.
C. Source Limitations for Mirror Accessories: Obtain mirror glazing accessories from single
source.
1. GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer
to this publication for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in
this Section or in referenced standards.
2. GANA Mirror Division's "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the
Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors."
E. Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to mirror
manufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of mastic with mirror backing film and
substrates on which mirrors are installed.
B. Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling
mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of
glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy.
1.7 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus
or minus 5.
B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manufacturer
for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges.
f. Pecora Corporation.
g. Royal Adhesives & Sealants; Gunther Mirror Mastics Division.
h. Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.
C. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in
finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed.
D. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. Provide
toothed or lead-shield expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide
galvanized anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where
indicated.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Mirror Sizes: To suit Project conditions,cut mirrors to final sizes and shapes.
B. Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible
surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors.
1. Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer after edge treatment to prevent chemical or
atmospheric penetration of glass coating.
2. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory
immediately after cutting to final sizes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for
compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces are dry.
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with
referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids
distorting reflected images.
B. Provide a minimum air space of 3 mm between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air
circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.
C. Wall-Mounted Mirrors: Install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. Attach mirror
hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or
inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of
mirrors.
1. Mirror Clips: Place a felt or plastic pad between mirror and each clip to prevent
spalling of mirror edges. Locate clips where indicated.
2. Install mastic as follows:
A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations.
C. Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture
from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time.
D. Wash exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for
inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash mirrors as recommended in
writing by mirror manufacturer.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
B. Related Sections:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
C. Fabricator: the fabricator of window or curtain wall joinery components based on system
provided by manufacturer.
A. General: Provide conventionally glazed aluminum curtain wall system that has the follow-
ing capabilities based on preconstruction testing:
1. That forms a complete integrated and functional system that is fit to the purpose and
produced by an international manufacturer having not less than fifteen years docu-
mented experience in that field.
2. Withstands loads and thermal and structural movement requirements indicated with-
out failure. Failure includes the following:
1. Structural loads.
2. Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall withstand movements of supporting
structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift, twist,
column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and
concentrated live loads.
3. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
4. Failure also includes the following:
C. Structural Loads:
1. Wind Loads: Basic Wind Speed: 161 km/hr (100 MPH) according to UBC latest
edition unless otherwise shown on structural drawings.
2. Seismic Loads: Seismic Zone 2A according to UBC latest edition unless otherwise
shown on structural drawings.
3. Periodic Maintenance-Equipment Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not
evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,
assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress,
and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.
1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to
4.1 m and to 1/240 of clear span plus 6.35 mm for spans greater than 4.1 m) or an
amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 19 mm, whichever
is less.
2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which
reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which
reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed
components to less than 3.2 mm.
F. Thermal Movements: Provide glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems that allow for thermal
movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface
temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both
solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No evidence of water penetration through fixed
glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-
pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than
720 Pa.
H. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: No evidence of water penetration through fixed
glazing and framing areas when tested according to AAMA 501.1 at dynamic pressure equal
to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 720 Pa.
1. Maximum Water Leakage: According to AAMA 501.1. Water leakage does not
include water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained to exterior.
I. Energy Performance: Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall have certified and labeled energy
performance ratings in accordance with NFRC.
1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-
factor of not more than 2.55 W/sq. m x K as determined according to NFRC 100.
2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat
gain coefficient of no greater than 0.35 as determined according to NFRC 200.
3. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of
0.7 L/s per sq. m of fixed wall area as determined according to ASTM E 283 at a
minimum static-air-pressure differential of 300 Pa.
4. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-
certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 55 as determined according to
NFRC 500.
J. Sound Transmission: Provide glazed aluminum curtain walls with fixed glazing and
framing areas having the following sound-transmission characteristics:
A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Provide glazed aluminum curtain walls that comply with
test-performance requirements indicated, as evidenced by reports based on Project-specific
preconstruction testing by a qualified testing agency.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For glazed aluminum curtain walls. Include plans, elevations, sections,
full-size details, and attachments to other work.
1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining
moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.
2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of glazed
aluminum curtain walls, showing the following:
a. Resubmit Shop Drawings with changes made to glazed aluminum curtain walls
to successfully complete preconstruction testing.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glazed aluminum curtain walls indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by
the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
G. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and preconstruction testing agency and testing
agency.
H. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
I. Welding certificates.
J. Energy Performance Certificates: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each glazed
aluminum curtain wall.
M. Maintenance Data: For glazed aluminum curtain walls to include in maintenance manuals.
D. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.
1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Engineer, except with
Engineer's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory
data to Engineer for review.
F. Unless the curtain wall manufacturer has the AAMA Gold Label Certification Program on
products similar the ones specified verifying the performance of his products; the contractor
shall perform all laboratory tests mentioned in this specification.
H. Energy Performance Standards: Comply with NFRC for minimum standards of energy
performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication. Comply with more
stringent requirements if indicated.
I. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for glazed aluminum
curtain walls by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
1.10 WARRANTY
B. Special Warranty for Metal Finishes: Provide written warranty in which Manufacturer and
Installer are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair finishes that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Cracking.
2. Checking.
3. Peeling.
4. Chalking: in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214
5. Crazing.
6. Color Fading: more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244
7. Color retention.
C. Warranty Period for Metal Finishes: 10 years for clear anodic finish, from date of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
2.3 FRAMING
1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from
thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
2.4 GLAZING
A. Insulated Spandrel Panels: Laminated, metal-faced flat panels with no deviations in plane
exceeding 0.8 percent of panel dimension in width or length.
2.8 FABRICATION
1. Internal guttering system or other means to drain water passing joints, condensation
occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum
curtain wall to exterior.
2. Pressure-equalized system or double barrier design with primary air and vapor barrier
at interior side of glazed aluminum curtain wall and secondary seal weeped and
vented to exterior.
1. Provide thermal-break construction that has been in use for not less than three years
and has been tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance and
condensation and to show adequate strength and security of glass retention.
2. Provide thermal barriers tested according to AAMA 505; determine the allowable
design shear flow per the appendix in AAMA 505.
3. Provide hardware with low conductivity or nonmetallic material for hardware
bridging thermal breaks at frame or vent sash.
E. Curtain-Wall Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear-block system unless
otherwise indicated.
G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to
Shop Drawings.
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing
nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by
painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior.
D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
E. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust
weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation.
A. Erection Tolerances: Install glazed aluminum curtain walls to comply with the following
maximum tolerances:
1. Plumb: 3.2 mm in 3 m; 6 mm in 12 m.
2. Level: 3.2 mm in 6 m; 6 mm in 12 m.
3. Alignment:
4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 3.2 mm in 3.7 m; 12.7 mm over total length.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform tests and
inspections.
B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas of glazed aluminum curtain
walls shall take place as installation proceeds to determine compliance of installed
assemblies with specified requirements.
1. Air Infiltration: Areas shall be tested for air leakage of 1.5 times the rate specified for
laboratory testing in "Performance Requirements" Article, but not more than 0.70 L/s
per sq. m, of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 783 at a minimum
static-air-pressure differential of 300 Pa.
a. Test Area: One bay wide, but not less than 9.1 m, by one story of glazed
aluminum curtain wall.
b. Perform tests in each test area as directed by Engineer. Perform at least three
tests, prior to 10, 35, and 70 percent completion.
a. Test Area: One bay wide, but not less than 9.1 m, by one story of glazed
aluminum curtain wall.
b. Perform tests in each test area as directed by Engineer. Perform at least three
tests, prior to 10, 35, and 70 percent completion.
3. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated
by Engineer shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water
penetration.
C. Glazed aluminum curtain walls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for installation of joint sealants installed with
glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems.
2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for insulating-glass requirements.
3. Division 10 Section "Exterior Screens" for screen assemblies attached to glazed alu-
minum curtain-wall systems.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products required to have recycled content.
C. Shop Drawings: For glazed aluminum curtain walls. Include plans, elevations, sections,
full-size details, and attachments to other work.
1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining
moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.
2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of glazed
aluminum curtain walls, showing the following:
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glazed aluminum curtain walls indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by
the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, professional engineer, and testing agency.
B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Energy Performance Certificates: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each glazed
aluminum curtain wall.
B. Fabricator/ Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs personnel trained and approved
for fabrication/ installation of assemblies indicated for this Project by the manufacturer, and
with not less than five years of documented experience in that field on a minimum of three
projects of similar nature.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.
1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Engineer, except with
Engineer's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data
to Engineer for review.
1. AAMA Gold Label Certification Program on products similar to the ones specified.
2. Laboratory test reports indicating tests performed on assemblies similar to those
specified in this Section, indicating compliance with the performance requirements,
and performed by a qualified testing agency.
G. Energy Performance Standards: Comply with NFRC for minimum standards of energy
performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication. Comply with more
stringent requirements if indicated.
I. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
A. Erection Tolerances: Install glazed aluminum curtain walls to comply with the following
maximum tolerances:
1. Plumb: 3.2 mm in 3 m; 6 mm in 12 m.
2. Level: 3.2 mm in 6 m; 6 mm in 12 m.
3. Alignment:
4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 3.2 mm in 3.7 m; 12.7 mm over total length.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform tests and
inspections.
B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas of glazed aluminum curtain
walls shall take place as installation proceeds to determine compliance of installed
assemblies with specified requirements.
2. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated
by Engineer shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water
penetration.
C. Glazed aluminum curtain walls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
1.7 WARRANTY
B. Special Warranty for Metal Finishes: Provide written warranty in which Manufacturer and
Installer are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair finishes that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Cracking.
2. Checking.
3. Peeling.
4. Chalking: in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214
5. Crazing.
6. Color Fading: more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244
7. Color retention.
C. Warranty Period for Metal Finishes: 10 years for clear anodic finish, from date of
Substantial Completion.
1. Structural loads.
2. Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall withstand movements of supporting
structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift, twist,
column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and
concentrated live loads.
3. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
4. Failure also includes the following:
C. Structural Loads:
1. Wind Loads: Basic Wind Speed: 161 km/hr (100 MPH) according to applicable code,
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Periodic Maintenance-Equipment Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not
evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,
assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress,
and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.
1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to
4.1 m and to 1/240 of clear span plus 6.35 mm for spans greater than 4.1 m, or an
amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 19 mm, whichever
is less.
F. Thermal Movements: Provide glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems that allow for thermal
movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface
temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both
solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No evidence of water penetration through fixed
glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-
pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than
720 Pa.
H. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: No evidence of water penetration through fixed
glazing and framing areas when tested according to AAMA 501.1 at dynamic pressure equal
to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 720 Pa.
1. Maximum Water Leakage: According to AAMA 501.1. Water leakage does not
include water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained to exterior.
I. Seismic Performance: Curtain wall assemblies shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to applicable code, unless otherwise indicated. Glass fallout
shall not occur during a seismic event.
J. Energy Performance: Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall have certified and labeled energy
performance ratings in accordance with NFRC.
1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-
factor of not more than 2.55 W/sq. m x K as determined according to NFRC 100.
2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat
gain coefficient of no greater than 0.35 as determined according to NFRC 200.
3. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of
0.7 L/s per sq. m of fixed wall area as determined according to ASTM E 283 at a
minimum static-air-pressure differential of 300 Pa.
4. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-
certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 55 as determined according to
NFRC 500.
K. Structural-Sealant Joints:
1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving no
sealant material behind.
2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not
separate from each substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds
sealant's internal strength.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Recycled Content: Provide metal materials having recycled content in compliance with
Credit MR 4.
2.4 FRAMING
D. Materials:
1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and
finish indicated.
1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from
thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
2.5 GLAZING
A. Glass: Low-E-coated, clear insulating glass units, tempered as required by applicable code,
and complying with Division 08 Section "Glazing."
C. Structural Glazing Sealants: ASTM C 1184, chemically curing silicone formulation that is
compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated
and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer for
use in curtain wall system indicated.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
2.7 FABRICATION
1. Internal guttering system or other means to drain water passing joints, condensation
occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum
curtain wall to exterior.
2. Pressure-equalized system or double barrier design with primary air and vapor barrier
at interior side of glazed aluminum curtain wall and secondary seal weeped and
vented to exterior.
1. Provide thermal-break construction that has been in use for not less than three years
and has been tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance and
condensation and to show adequate strength and security of glass retention.
2. Provide thermal barriers tested according to AAMA 505; determine the allowable
design shear flow per the appendix in AAMA 505.
3. Provide hardware with low conductivity or nonmetallic material for hardware
bridging thermal breaks at frame or vent sash.
E. Curtain-Wall Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear-block system unless
otherwise indicated.
G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to
Shop Drawings.
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Curved and facetted four-side structural-sealant-glazed sloped glazing for roof and wall-
roof assemblies, supported on building’s steel tube structure.
2. Glazed-in insulated metal roof panels.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 05 Section “Structural Steel”, for steel tube structure.
2. Division 8 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" for vertical glazed aluminum
curtain walls except those assemblies in Park-and Ride.
3. Division 8 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls – Park-and-Ride" for vertical
glazed aluminum curtain walls for Park-and-Ride.
4. Division 08 Section “Glazing.”
5. Division 08 Section “Overhead Glazing Assemblies.”
6. Division 13 Section "Photovoltaic Collectors," for architectural requirements for
photovoltaic collectors supported by sloped glazed and metal roof panel assemblies.
7. Division 16 Section "Photovoltaic System," for electrical wiring, conduit and equipment
for photovoltaic system.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products required to have recycled content.
C. Shop Drawings: For sloped glazing assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size
details, and attachments to other work.
1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining
moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.
2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of sloped
glazing assemblies, showing the following:
a. Joinery, including concealed welds.
b. Anchorage.
c. Expansion provisions.
d. Glazing.
e. Metal panels.
f. Flashing and drainage.
g. Erection tolerances.
3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor
barriers.
D. Fabrication Sample: Full size, of each glass and metal panel module showing details of the
following:
1. Joinery, including concealed welds.
2. Anchorage.
3. Expansion provisions.
4. Glazing.
5. Flashing and drainage.
6. Exposed finishes.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sloped glazing assemblies indicated, to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.6 MOCKUPS
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of typical sloped glazing area as directed by Engineer.
2. Testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in "Field Quality
Control" Article.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
3. Perform tests under environmental conditions that duplicate those under which
assemblies will be installed.
4. For materials that fail tests, determine corrective measures necessary to prepare each
material to ensure compatibility with and adhesion of sealants including specially
formulated primers. After performing these corrective measures on the minimum number
of samples required for each material, retest materials.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer and fabricator jointly agree to repair or replace components of
sloped glazing assemblies that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
c. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
d. Water penetration through glazing and framing areas.
2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or
replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within
specified warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving no
sealant material behind.
2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not separate
from each substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal
strength.
N. Life Cycle Performance: Design sloped glazing assemblies to comply with life cycle
performance requirements indicated. Where not indicated, design for assemblies with a service
life of 60 years.
O. Drainage of Water: Design sloped glazing to freely drain and prevent accumulation of water at
lower extremities of glazing at mullion.
P. Joints: Accurately fitted and secure joints and corners; joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.
Q. Fasteners and Attachments: Concealed from view.
R. Vibration, Harmonics or Wind Whistles: Not permitted.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following, or comparable product by another acceptable manufacturer.
1. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc.
2. EFCO Corporation.
3. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company.
4. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company.
5. Wausau Window and Wall Systems.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of sloped glazing assembly system, including
framing and accessories, from single manufacturer.
2.4 FRAMING
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard, formed- or extruded-aluminum framing members
of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Framing-Member Type: Skin type, supported by structural-steel members indicated.
2. Framing Configuration: Provide the following:
a. Bent to radii indicated.
b. Standard flat members for facetted framing.
3. Glass and Metal Panel Retention: Field-installed or factory-installed at Contractor’s
option, structural sealant-glazed onto framing members, as indicated.
B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
C. Materials:
1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209M.
b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221M.
c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
2.5 GLAZING
A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Comply with Division 08 Section "Glazing."
1. Outdoor Lite: Clear, laminated or laminated-tempered glass, Low E coating on surface
#2; laminated glass as follows:
a. Curved Glass Panels: Translucent interlayer of color and pattern as selected by
Engineer.
b. Flat Glass Panels: Clear interlayer.
2. Interspace Content: Argon, 90 percent minimum.
3. Sealing System: Dual seal, non-metallic spacer, Warm-Edge technology; color selected
by Engineer.
4. Indoor Lite: Clear, laminated glass.
5. Profile: Curved or flat as indicated.
6. Maximum Glass Unit Thickness: 38 mm.
7. Minimum Glass Thickness: 6 mm.
8. Provide safety glazing labeling.
B. Single Glass: Clear tempered laminated glass with translucent interlayer of color and pattern as
selected by Engineer.
C. Structural Glazing Sealants: ASTM C 1184, chemically curing silicone formulation that is
compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated
and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer for use
in sloped glazing assembly indicated.
1. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of colors.
D. Weatherseal Sealants: ASTM C 920 for Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and O;
chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other
system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant,
weatherseal-sealant, and sloped glazing assemblies manufacturers for this use.
1. Color: Match structural sealant.
E. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black,
resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.
B. Construction:
1. Outdoor Sheet: Prefinished aluminum, minimum 6 mm thickness.
2. Panel Core: Core insulation completely filling void spaces; aluminum stiffeners
continuously welded, as required to comply with performance requirements.
3. Indoor Sheet: Prefinished aluminum, minimum 4 mm thickness.
4. Profile: Curved, and designed for glazing-in to sloped glazing framing glazing rebate, as
indicated. Mechanical fasteners at structSecureme
5. Maximum Panel Thickness: As indicated.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from
thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
3. Exposed Fasteners: Not permitted.
B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 25 mm that
accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with
adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer.
C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding
flashing compatible with adjacent materials.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration
of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or
grinding.
1. Print-through or visible evidence of welds on metal panels not permitted.
C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with
AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat
and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply
with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for installation of joint sealants installed with
overhead glazing assemblies.
2. Division 8 Section "Aluminum-Framed Storefronts and Doors" for entrance and
storefront systems installed with overhead glazing assemblies.
3. Division 8 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" for conventionally glazed
curtain walls.
4. Division 8 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls – Park-and-Ride" for vertical
glazed aluminum curtain walls for Park-and-Ride.
5. Division 8 Section "Sloped Glazed and Metal Roof Panel Assemblies" for sloped
glazing assemblies.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
B. Fabricator: the fabricator of overhead glazing joinery components based on system provided
by manufacturer.
B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing
only. Confirm glass thicknesses and heat treatment required by analyzing Project loads and
in-service conditions. Provide glass lites in the thickness designations and heat treatment
indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed
or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria:
1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300.
E. Structural Performance: Overhead glazing assemblies shall withstand the wind loads, the
effects of gravity loads, and loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated
according to UBC latest edition unless otherwise shown on structural drawings:
1. Wind Loads:
1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not
evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,
assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress,
and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.
1. Deflection Normal to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to
4.1 m and to 1/240 of clear span plus 6.35 mm for spans more than 4.1 m or an
amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 19.1 mm,
whichever is less.
2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which
reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which
reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed
components to less than 3.2 mm.
H. Flexural Members: Design for lateral bracing of compression flanges by cross members
with minimum depth equal to 50 percent of braced flexural member. Glazing does not
provide lateral support.
I. Seismic Performance: Overhead glazing assemblies shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to UBC latest edition unless otherwise shown on structural
drawings:.
J. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No evidence of water penetration through fixed
glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-
pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than
720 Pa.
K. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: No evidence of water penetration through fixed
glazing and framing areas when tested according to AAMA 501.1 at dynamic pressure equal
to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 720 Pa.
1. Maximum Water Leakage: According to AAMA 501.1. Water leakage does not
include water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained to exterior.
L. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from the following maximum change
(range) in ambient and surface temperature:
M. Energy Performance: Overhead glazing assemblies shall have certified and labeled energy-
performance ratings according to the NFRC.
1. Thermal Transmittance (U-Factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-
factor of not more than 2.55 W/sq. m x K as determined according to NFRC 100.
2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an SHGC of
not more than 0.35 as determined according to NFRC 200.
3. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of
0.7 L/s per sq. of fixed area as determined according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum
static-air-pressure differential of 300 Pa.
4. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-
certified CR rating of not less than 55 as determined according to NFRC 500.
O. Sound Transmission: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have the following
characteristics:
P. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by structural-
sealant glazing without failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for preconstruction
adhesion and compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant shall occur before adhesive failure.
1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving no
sealant material behind.
2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not
separate from each substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds
sealant's internal strength.
Q. Structural-Sealant Joints:
1. Build laboratory mockups at testing agency facility; use personnel, materials, and
methods of construction that will be used at Project site.
2. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of the dates and times when laboratory
mockups will be tested.
1. Test a minimum of five production-run samples each of metal, glazing, and other
material.
2. Prepare samples using techniques and primers required for installed assemblies.
3. Perform tests under environmental conditions that duplicate those under which
assemblies will be installed.
4. For materials that fail tests, determine corrective measures necessary to prepare each
material to ensure compatibility with and adhesion of sealants including, but not
limited to, specially formulated primers. After performing these corrective measures
on the minimum number of samples required for each material, retest materials.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
C. Installer Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out
successfully by the installer with the same product endorsed by the manufacturer’s
representative.
D. Shop Drawings: For overhead glazing assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining
moisture within the assembly to the exterior.
2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of
assembly, showing the following:
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's
standard sizes.
I. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and preconstruction testing agency and testing
agency.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test
of assembled components or on calculation.
L. Preconstruction Test Reports: For overhead glazing assemblies and elastomeric glazing
sealants.
C. Coating Applicator: apply coatings to metal work only by applicators licensed by the
coating manufacturer.
E. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.
1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Engineer, except with
Engineer's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory
data to Engineer for review.
G. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 1401 for design and installation.
I. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1.9 WARRANTY
B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or
replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within
specified warranty period.
C. Special Warranty for Metal Finishes: Provide written warranty signed by Contractor and
backed up by coating Manufacturer in which the contractor agrees to repair finishes that fail
in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Cracking.
2. Checking.
3. Peeling.
4. Chalking: in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214
5. Crazing.
6. Color Fading: more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244
7. Color retention.
D. Warranty Period for Metal Finishes: 10 years for clear anodic finish, from date of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
B. Stainless Steel
C. Support Fitting (Spider): proprietary bracket made of cast austenitic stainless steel to
ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8M by lost wax method , to safely clamp the panel and
allow transmission of load to the supporting structure. Provide all compatible necessary
fixing accessories such as bushes, neoprene or pre-cured silicon gaskets and spring plates.
Routels, fasteners and accessories to be made from compatible stainless steel type 316.
Provide mockup sample(s) of the complete system for Engineer’s approval.
D. Support Fitting: Bracket and bolt made of austenitic stainless steel 316 S16, to safely clamp
the panel and allow transmission of load to the Aluminum mullion and steel structure.
Provide all compatible necessary fixing accessories such as bushes, neoprene or pre-cured
silicon gaskets and spring plates.
2.3 FRAMING
1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from
thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
G. Exposed Flashing and Closures: Manufacturer's standard aluminum components not less
than 1.524 mm thick.
2.4 GLAZING
B. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.
C. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless
otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated.
D. Heat Soaking: All heat treated glass shall be heat soak tested. After the test, the probability
of failure in service should be less than one in 130 tons, or 5,000 m2 of 10 mm of heat
treated glass.
1. High Modulus Structural Sealant: ASTM C 1184, neutral chemically curing silicone
formulation that is compatible with system components with which it comes in
contact, specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant, and approved
by structural-sealant manufacturer for use in overhead glazing assemblies indicated.
2. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and
O; chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with structural sealant
and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by
structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and overhead glazing assembly manufacturers
for this use.
2.6 FABRICATION
2. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.
3. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
4. Factory install glazing to comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
F. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to
Shop Drawings.
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into
surrounding surface.
A. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer, applying sealant or tape, or installing
nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by
painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
3. Where aluminum will contact pressure-treated wood, separate dissimilar materials by
method recommended by overhead glazing assembly manufacturer.
C. Install continuous sill closure with weatherproof expansion joints and locked and sealed or
welded corners. Locate weep holes at rafters.
D. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within the overhead glazing assembly to exterior.
E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
A. General: Install overhead glazing assemblies to comply with the following maximum
tolerances:
1. Level: 3 mm in 6 m; 6 mm in 12 m.
2. Alignment: Limit offset from true alignment to 0.8 mm where surfaces abut in line,
edge to edge, at corners, or where a reveal or protruding element separates aligned
surfaces by less than 76 mm; otherwise limit offset to 3 mm.
3. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 3 mm in 3.7 m;
13 mm over total length.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
2. Air Infiltration: Areas shall be tested for air leakage of 1.5 times the rate specified for
laboratory testing in "Performance Requirements" Article, but not more than 2.25 L/s
per sq. m, of assembly surface area when tested according to ASTM E 783 at a
minimum static-air-pressure differential of 300 Pa.
a. Test Area: One bay wide, but not less than 9.1 by 9.1 m of overhead glazing
assembly.
b. Perform tests in each test area as directed by Engineer. Perform at least three
tests prior to 10, 35, and 70 percent completion.
a. Test Area: One bay wide, but not less than 9.1 by 9.1 m of overhead glazing
assembly.
b. Perform tests in each test area as directed by Engineer. Perform at least three
tests prior to 10, 35, and 70 percent completion.
4. Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated
by Engineer shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water
penetration.
C. Overhead glazing assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following: suspended tempered glass wall and glass mullion
framing system mechanically attached with concealed perimeter glazing frame, metal
anchors, suspension devices, planar fittings, integral and perimeter sealants
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation materials and firesafing field
installed in conjunction with mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall
system.
2. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for through-penetration
fire-stop systems and firesafing field installed in conjunction with structural-sealant-
glazed curtain wall system.
3. Division 8 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts."
4. Division 8 Section "Glazing."
5. Division 8 Section " Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls"
6. Division 8 Section "Sloped Glazing Systems."
7. Division 8 Section "Overhead Glazing Asseblies"
8. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
C. Fabricator: the fabricator of window or curtain wall joinery components based on system
provided by manufacturer.
A. General: Provide Structural suspended tempered glass curtain wall system that is
mechanically attached and comprises structural sealant on four sides, with intermediate
vertical mullions on interior and planar fittings and that has the following capabilities based
on preconstruction testing:
1. That forms a complete integrated and functional system that is fit to the purpose and
produced by an international manufacturer having not less than fifteen years
documented experience in that field.
2. that is provided from a single source as a complete system including all related
accessories.
3. Withstands loads and thermal and structural movement requirements indicated
without failure. Failure includes the following:
A. System Design: Design and size components to withstand dead loads and live loads caused
by positive and negative wind loads acting normal to plane of wall, including building
corners.
B. Wind Loads:
1. Basic Wind Speed: 161 km/hr (100 MPH) according to UBC latest edition unless
otherwise shown on structural drawings.
1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not
evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,
assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural
distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent
of span.
3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.
1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to
4.1 m and to 1/240 of clear span plus 6.35 mm for spans greater than 4.1 m) or an
amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 19 mm, whichever
is less.
2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which
reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which
reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed
components to less than 3.2 mm.
E. Seismic Loads:
F. Dead Loads: Provide mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall system members
that do not deflect an amount which will reduce glazing bite below 75 percent of design
dimension when carrying full dead load. Provide a minimum 3.20-mm clearance between
members and top of fixed panels, glazing, or other fixed part immediately below. Provide a
minimum 1.60-mm clearance between members and operable windows and doors.
G. Live Loads: Provide mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall system, including
anchorage, that accommodates supporting structure's deflection from uniformly distributed
and concentrated live loads indicated without failure of materials or permanent
deformation.
H. Air Infiltration: Provide mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall system with
permanent resistance to air leakage through system of not more than 0.7 L/s/ m2 of fixed
wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static-air-pressure difference of 300
Pa.
I. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide mechanically attached structural glass
curtain wall that does not evidence water leakage when tested according to ASTM E 331 at
minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward acting wind-load design pressure as
defined by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," but not
less than 720 Pa.
1. Maximum Water Leakage: According to AAMA 501.1. Water leakage does not
include water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained to exterior.
J. Thermal Movement: Provide mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall system,
including anchorage, that accommodates thermal movements of system and supporting
elements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface
temperatures without buckling, damaging stresses on glazing, failure of joint sealants,
damaging loads on fasteners, noise or vibration, and other detrimental effects. Base
engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and
nighttime-sky heat loss
K. Structural Support Movement: Provide mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall
system that accommodates structural movements including, but not limited to, sway, twist,
column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection.
M. Average Thermal Conductance: Provide mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall
system with an average U-value of not more than 3.75 W/sq. m x K when tested according
to AAMA 1503.1.
N. Sound Transmission: Provide mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall system
with minimum STC 32 according to ASTM E 413 and an OITC 26 according to ASTM E
1332.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each product specified, including details of construction relative to
materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include
structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
D. Samples for verification of each type of exposed finish required in manufacturer's standard
sizes. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets
showing the full range of variations expected.
1. Joinery.
2. Anchorage.
3. Expansion provisions.
4. Glazing.
5. Flashing and drainage.
6. Mechanical fixings.
1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.
2. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining
moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.
3. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of
structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls, showing the following:
H. Welder certificates indicating that welders comply with requirements specified in "Quality
Assurance" Article.
J. Installer Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out
successfully by the installer with the same product endorsed by the manufacturer’s
representative.
K. Preconstruction test reports from a qualified independent testing agency approved by the
Engineer indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance with performance
requirements of mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall system.
L. Field test reports from a qualified independent inspecting and testing agency indicating and
interpreting test results relative to compliance with performance requirements of
mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall system.
E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall
system from one source and by a single manufacturer.
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Engineer, except with
Engineer's approval and only to the extent needed to comply with performance
H. Mockups: Prior to installing mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall system,
construct mockups for each form of construction and finish required to verify selections
made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of
materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for Work.
1. Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated,
as directed by Engineer.
2. Notify Engineer 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before start of Work.
5. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed Work.
1. Inspect and discuss condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by
other trades.
2. Review structural loading limitations.
3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,
Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
4. Review required inspecting, testing, and certifying procedures.
5. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with
unfavorable conditions.
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and show
recorded measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.9 WARRANTY
B. Special Warranty for Metal Finishes: Provide written warranty in which Manufacturer and
Installer are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair finishes that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Cracking.
2. Checking.
3. Peeling.
4. Chalking: in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214
5. Crazing.
6. Color Fading: more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244
7. Color retention.
C. Warranty Period for Metal Finishes: 10 years for clear anodic finish, from date of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated, complying with the requirements of standards indicated below.
B. Stainless Steel:
D. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666, Type 316.
F. Wire Rope: 7-by-19 wire rope made from wire complying with ASTM A 492, Type 316.
G. Support Fitting (Spider): proprietary bracket made of cast austenitic stainless steel to
ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8M by lost wax method, to safely clamp the panel and
allow transmission of load to the supporting structure. Provide all compatible necessary
fixing accessories such as bushes, neoprene or pre-cured silicon gaskets and spring plates.
Routels, fasteners and accessories to be made from compatible stainless steel type 316.
Provide mockup sample(s) of the complete system for Engineer’s approval.
I. Spacers, Setting Blocks, Gaskets, and Bond Breakers: Manufacturer's standard permanent,
nonmigrating types compatible with sealants and suitable for joint movement and system
performance requirements.
2.3 SEALANTS
B. Outer Seal: Use neutral-cure silicone sealants compatible with the double glazed unit
peripheral seal.
C. Inner Seal: Use neutral-cure silicone sealants compatible with the double glazed unit
peripheral seal.
D. Secondary Sealant: Use neutral-cure silicone sealants Compatible with other system
components with which it comes in contact and that accommodates a 50 percent increase or
decrease in joint width at the time of application when measured according to
ASTM C 719.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate mechanically attached structural glass curtain wall system according to
Shop Drawings. Fabricate components that, when assembled, will have accurately fitted
joints with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according
to Shop Drawings.
B. Forming: Form shapes with sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or deformations,
before finishing.
C. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices.
E. Metal Protection: Protect against bi-metallic corrosion (galvanic action) by painting contact
surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this
purpose.
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative
to applying and designating finishes.
A. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of mechanically attached structural
glass curtain wall system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected or accommodations acceptable to Engineer have been made.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protecting, handling, and
installing mechanically attached glazed curtain wall system. Do not install damaged
components. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated. Provide means to drain
water to the exterior to produce a permanently weatherproof system.
C. Install framing components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
D. Anchorage: After system components are positioned, fix connections to building structure
as indicated on Shop Drawings.
B. Air Infiltration: Test areas of installed system indicated on Drawings for compliance with
system performance requirements according to ASTM E 783.
C. Water Penetration: Test areas of installed system indicated on Drawings for compliance
with system performance requirements according to ASTM E 1105 at minimum differential
pressure of 20 percent of inward acting wind-load design pressure as defined by ASCE 7,
"Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," but not less than 299 Pa.
D. Water Spray Test: After completing the installation of 23-m- by-2-story minimum area of
mechanically-attached curtain wall system, test system for water penetration according to
AAMA 501.2 in a 2-bay area directed by Engineer.
E. Repair or remove Work that does not meet requirements or that is damaged by testing;
replace to conform to specified requirements.
3.4 PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-
bearing and exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling
joists; and roof trusses.
2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z180, hot-dip galvanized unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use steel studs and runners.
1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 51-mm- deep
flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit
into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 305 mm of the top of
studs to provide lateral bracing.
2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 51-mm- deep
flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer
runner sized to friction fit inside runner.
3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes
applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in
thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of
studs.
D. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract
with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to
accommodate depth of studs.
a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System attached to studs with Fire Trak Posi Klip.
b. Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System.
c. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.
d. Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series.
E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width
indicated.
1. Depth: 38 mm.
2. Clip Angle: Not less than 38 by 38 mm, 1.72-mm- thick, galvanized steel.
H. Resilient Furring Channels: 13-mm- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound
transmission.
1. Depth: 19 mm.
2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum
uncoated-steel thickness of 0.8 mm.
3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 1.59-mm-
diameter wire, or double strand of 1.21-mm- diameter wire.
J. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 32 mm, wall attachment
flange of 22 mm, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.45 mm, and depth required to fit
insulation thickness indicated.
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 1.59-mm- diameter
wire, or double strand of 1.21-mm- diameter wire.
C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 4.12 mm in
diameter.
1. Depth: 64 mm.
G. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system
composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding
power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal
frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in
advance of time needed for coordination and construction.
1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or
ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive
materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates
fastened to building structure not more than 610 mm o.c.
2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent
necessary for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness
of fire-resistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated.
Protect adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage.
1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that
apply to framing installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy
trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at
exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to
structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are
indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating
partitions above ceiling.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as
required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of
openings to match framing required above door heads.
4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor
to underside of solid structure.
E. Direct Furring:
F. Z-Furring Members:
G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more
than 3 mm from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by
building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within
ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers
in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for
substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by
attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and
appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to
deteriorate or otherwise fail.
5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts
that extend through forms.
7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.
F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension
systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to
each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 3 mm in 3.6 m
measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between
parallel members that will receive finishes.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior portland cement plasterwork on metal lath, unit masonry and monolithic
concrete.
B. Related Sections:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints including
plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat indicated; 305 by
305 mm, and prepared on rigid backing.
E. Mix Designs: For each type of plaster. Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.
1. Include test reports for plaster mixes required to comply with property specification.
Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for
water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.
2. pull out test at 28 days: > 0.5N/mm2
1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the
listings of another qualified testing agency.
C. Mockups: Before plastering, install mockups of at least 10.0 sq. m in surface area to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.5 WARRANTIES
A. Portland Cement Plaster Warranty: Provide warranty in which Manufacturer and Contractor
are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace, without limitations, all or
any part of the Portland Cement Plaster which fails or becomes defective in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes, but is not limited to
cracking, failure of bonding to concrete structure.
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other
causes.
B. Interior Plasterwork: Maintain room temperatures at greater than 4.4 deg C for at least 48
hours before plaster application, and continuously during and after application.
1. Avoid conditions that result in plaster drying out during curing period. Distribute
heat evenly; prevent concentrated or uneven heat on plaster.
2. Ventilate building spaces as required to remove water in excess of that required for
hydrating plaster in a manner that prevents drafts of air from contacting surfaces
during plaster application and until plaster is dry.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z180, hot-dip galvanized
zinc coating.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with
thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.
B. Metal Accessories:
a. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated.
b. Bull nose cornerbead, radius 19.1 mm minimum, with expanded flanges; use at
locations indicated on Drawings.
A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of
damaging plaster, lath, or accessories.
B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 13 mm long, free of
contaminants, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster.
D. Steel Drill Screws: For metal-to-metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, as
required by thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application;
in lengths required to achieve penetration through joined materials of no fewer than three
exposed threads.
E. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063.
F. Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 1.21-mm
diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass,
slag wool, or rock wool.
1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two
minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in
mixes, but do not exceed 0.6 kg of fiber/cu. m of cementitious materials.
B. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat
plasterwork as follows:
a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 2-1/2
to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.
b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3 to 5
parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but not less than volume of
aggregate used in scratch coat.
c. Admixtures and workability aids, as per manufacturer’s printed instructions.
C. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Concrete: Single base coats for two-coat plasterwork as
follows:
1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 2-
1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.
2. Portland and Masonry Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland
cement and 1 part masonry cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of
cementitious material.
3. Plastic Cement Mix: Use 1 part plastic cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate.
D. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Concrete Masonry: Single base coats for two-coat
plasterwork as follows:
1. Base Coat: 1 part portland cement, 5 parts aggregate, aerating plasticiser as per manu-
facturer’s recommendation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal
frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful
effects caused by plastering.
B. Prepare solid substrates for plaster that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability
required to bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926.
B. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Where required, install blankets before installing lath unless
blankets are readily installed after lath has been installed on one side.
C. Acoustical Sealant: Where required, seal joints between edges of plasterwork and abutting
construction with acoustical sealant.
C. Control Joints: Install control joints in specific locations approved by Engineer for visual
effect as follows:
1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 6.4 mm in 3 m from a true plane in finished
plaster surfaces, as measured by a 3-m straightedge placed on surface.
2. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories
that act as a plaster ground unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not
terminate plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster
sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal.
3. Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field-applied finishes indicated.
C. Walls; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat
plasterwork, on masonry , on concrete; 20-mm thickness.
D. Ceilings; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat
plasterwork; 20 mm thick on concrete.
E. Walls; Base-Coat Mix: Scratch coat for two-coat plasterwork, 10 mm thick on concrete
masonry and 6 mm thick on concrete.
F. Ceilings; Base-Coat Mix: Scratch coat for two-coat plasterwork, 6 mm thick on concrete.
G. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide float finish to match Engineer's sample.
A. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check
cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to
substrate has failed.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from
door frames, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls,
and other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarders installed
in assemblies that incorporate gypsum board.
2. Division 9 Section "Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing" for non-structural framing and
suspension systems that support gypsum board.
3. Division 9 painting Sections for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Wall: Vertical building element used to enclosed or separate spaces. Walls include fixed
partitions.
B. System Description:
3. Fire Resistance Ratings: Where assemblies with fire ratings are indicated, provide
materials and installations which are identical to assemblies tested in accordance with
ASTM E119 by testing laboratories acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
5. Interface With Adjacent Systems: Integrate design and connections with adjacent
construction.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 300-mm- long length for each trim accessory
indicated.
2. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated
and on same backing indicated for Work.
A. Single Source Responsibility: Except where specified otherwise, obtain gypsum board
products, trim, joint treatment, and accessories from single manufacturer or from
manufacturers recommended by prime manufacturer of gypsum board products.
B. Certifications:
E. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 9 sq. m
in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and
execution.
a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.
b. Each texture finish indicated.
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels
flat to prevent sagging.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Assembly Warranty: Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, and
Installer are jointly and severally responsible and agree to repair or replace components of
gypsum board assemblies that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each
area and that correspond with support system indicated.
A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to
type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.
B. Regular Type:
C. Type X:
D. Type C:
E. Flexible Type: Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be more flexible than standard
regular-type gypsum board of same thickness.
F. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board.
G. Foil-Backed Type:
I. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces.
A. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 931/C 931M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with
manufacturer's standard edges.
a. Cornerbead.
b. Bullnose bead.
c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
f. Expansion (control) joint.
g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
a. Cornerbead.
b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
c. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and
removable strip covering slot opening.
2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties
of ASTM B 221M, Alloy 6063-T5.
3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish
materials specified.
B. Joint Tape:
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface
areas, use setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners,
and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping
compound.
1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type,
sandable topping compound.
2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board
manufacturer.
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.84 to 2.84 mm thick.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by
panel manufacturer.
D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass,
slag wool, or rock wool.
C. Aggregate Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, aggregated, drying-type texture finish for spray
application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal
frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting
performance.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to
avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of
adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends
with not more than 1.5 mm of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place
tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of
partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above
ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 0.7 sq. m in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of
floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural
members; allow 6.4- to 9.5-mm- wide joints to install sealant.
H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is
attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner
construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber,
including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members, or provide
control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
K. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are
readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
B. Single-Layer Application:
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate
courses of panels.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
C. Multilayer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers
on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right
angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 400 mm
minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by
fire-resistance-rated assembly.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers
vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-
layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.
3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer
either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with
vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer
over furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with
screws.
E. Curved Surfaces:
A. Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports.
1. Install with 6.4-mm open space where panels abut other construction or structural
penetrations.
2. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.
A. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Install at showers, tubs, and where indicated.
Install with 6.4-mm gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.
D. Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install regular-type gypsum wallboard panels to produce a
flat surface except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to receive water-resistant
panels.
E. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to
produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations
approved by Engineer for visual effect.
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces
for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not
intended for tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
ASTM C 840:
1. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections.
A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other
surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and
smooth.
B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to
produce a uniform texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other
evidence of thin application or of application patterns.
C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive
texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If,
despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove
droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's
written recommendations.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Paver tile.
2. Glazed wall tile.
3. Special-purpose tile.
4. Waterproof membrane for thin-set tile installations.
5. Stone thresholds installed as part of tile installations.
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for monolithic slab finishes specified for
tile substrates.
2. Division 7 Section "Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing" for waterproofing under
thickset mortar beds.
3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and
isolation joints in tile surfaces.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus
joint width indicated.
B. Facial Dimension: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499).
D. Water-Absorption Properties:
1. Impervious Tile (Fully Vitrified ) a tiles with water absorption generally less than
0.5%
2. Vitreous Tile (Vitrified Tiles ): a tile with water absorption more than 0.5%, but less
than 3.0%
3. Semi-Vitreous Tile: a tile with water absorption more than 3% but less than 7%
4. Non-Vitreous Tile: a tile with water absorption more than 7.0%.
E. Porcelain Tiles: are impervious (Fully vitrified) tiles with full body light colored, and have
abrasive hardness rating of 100 (ASTM C 501)
F. Natural Clay Tiles: are either impervious or vitreous and have an abrasive hardness rating
of 50 (ASTM C 501).
G. Glazed Wall Tiles: nonvitreous Porcelain body of average water absorption more than
7.0%, but not exceeding 18%.
H. Paver Tiles: dust-pressed or extruded tiles, surface area greater than 40 sq. cm.
A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with
the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028:
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of tile, mortar, grout, and other products specified.
C. Tile Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or
sections of tiles showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each
type and composition of tile indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color
selection.
D. Grout Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual
sections of grout showing the full range of colors available for each type of grout indicated.
E. Samples for Verification: Of each item listed below, prepared on Samples of size and
construction indicated. Where products involve normal color and texture variations, include
Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.
1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and texture required, at least
300 mm square, mounted on solid backing , and with grouted joints using product
complying with specified requirements and approved for completed work in color or
colors selected by Engineer.
2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color required.
F. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile
manufacturer and Installer.
G. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the products furnished comply
with requirements.
H. Installer Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out
successfully by the installer with the same product.
I. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names of Engineers and Employers, and other any information
required by Engineer.
J. Tile Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance of special-purpose tile
with specified requirements.
K. Setting Material Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance of tile-
setting and -grouting products with specified requirements.
B. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety
of tile from one source with resources to provide products from the same production run for
each contiguous area of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without
delaying the Work.
C. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform
quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and
each aggregate from one source or producer.
D. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in
this Section from one source and by a single manufacturer for each product:
1. Stone thresholds.
2. Joint sealants.
3. Waterproofing.
E. Mockups: Before installing tile, construct mockups for each form of construction and finish
required to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the
following requirements, using materials indicated for completed Work.
1. Locate mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
directed by Engineer.
2. Notify Engineer 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before proceeding with final unit of Work.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels
intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile
packages.
B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other
causes.
C. Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated
surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding
surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is completed and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained to comply with
referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
A. Deliver extra materials to Employer. Furnish extra materials described below that match
products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified
with labels describing contents.
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount
installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications
for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI
standards referenced in "Setting Materials" and "Grouting Materials" articles.
C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for
tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and
other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the
following requirements:
1. Provide Engineer's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors, textures, and
patterns for products of type indicated.
2. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining flat tile.
D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during
Sample submittals, blend tile in the factory and package so tile units taken from one
package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match
approved Samples.
F. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect
exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating them with a
continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile
surfaces.
A. Unglazed Paver Tile: Provide flat tile complying with the following requirements:
1. Composition: Porcelain
2. Facial Dimensions: As shown on drawings.
3. Thickness: 9 mm minimum.
4. Face: Pattern of design indicated, with square or cushion edges.
5. For latex-portland cement mortared and grouted paver tile, precoat with temporary
protective coating.
B. Glazed Wall Tile: Provide flat tile complying with the following requirements:
1. Composition: Porcelain
2. Module Size: As shown on drawings.
3. Thickness: 6 mm minimum.
4. Face: Pattern of design indicated, with manufacturer's standard edges.
C. Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to
comply with the following requirements:
1. Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where
applicable.
2. Shapes: As follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:
A. General: Provide stone thresholds that are uniform in color and finish, fabricated to sizes
and profiles indicated to provide transition between tile surfaces and adjoining finished
floor surfaces.
1. Fabricate thresholds to heights indicated, but not more than 12.7 mm above adjoining
finished floor surfaces, with transition edges beveled on a slope of no greater than
1:2.
B. Marble Thresholds: Provide marble thresholds complying with ASTM C 503 requirements
for exterior use and with a minimum abrasive-hardness value of 10 per ASTM C 241.
A. Provide products that comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Cold Fluid-Applied
Waterproofing".
1. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded wire fabric, 50.8 by 50.8 mm by 1.57-
mm diameter; comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82, except for minimum wire
size.
D. Semi Dry Mortar Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of prepackaged dry-mortar mix and
liquid-latex additive consisting of 1 part ordinary Portland cement and 3-4 parts sand (by
volume). Use Latex Additive as per manufacturer's printed recommendations.
A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement and white
or colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated.
C. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A 118.6 for materials described in Section H-2.4,
composed as follows:
a. Unsanded Dry-Grout Mix: Dry-set grout complying with ANSI A118.6 for
materials described in Section H-2.3, for joints 3.2 mm and narrower.
b. Sanded Dry-Grout Mix: Commercial portland cement grout complying with
ANSI A 118.6 for materials described in Section H-2.1, for joints 3.2 mm and
wider.
c. Latex Additive: Styrene butadiene rubber.
B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed
joints, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Edge Strips: White-zinc-alloy terrazzo strips, 3.2 mm wide at top edge with integral
provision for anchorage to mortar bed or substrate, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil
with a melting point of 49 to 60 deg C per ASTM D 87.
D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile
and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile
and grout manufacturers.
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout
manufacturers' written instructions.
C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time,
and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum
performance characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
installed tile.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free from oil, waxy films,
and curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced
ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for installations indicated.
2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and
mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been
completed before installing tile.
3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint
locations; if not coordinated, adjust latter in consultation with Engineer.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that contain soap,
wax, oil, or silicone and are incompatible with tile-setting materials by using a terrazzo or
concrete grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire
brush.
B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with dry-set or latex-portland cement
mortars that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 series of
tile installation standards for installations indicated.
C. Provide substrates for wall tile installed with dry-set or latex-portland cement mortars that
comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 series of tile
installation standards for installations indicated.
1. Use cement plaster, with expanded mesh reinforcement where necessary, and
patching compounds per tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions to
fill cracks, holes, and depressions.
D. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample
submittals, verify that tile has been blended in the factory and packaged so tile units taken
from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and
match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles
at Project site before installing.
E. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to
prevent adhesion or staining of exposed tile surfaces by grout, protect exposed surfaces of
tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating them with a continuous film of
temporary protective coating indicated below, taking care not to coat unexposed tile
surfaces:
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 series of tile
installation standards in "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types
of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation
schedules.
B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply
with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a
complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly
at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without
marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in
items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and
other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when
adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are the same size. Lay out tile work and center
tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile
1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets the same width as joints
within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.
F. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,
contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials,
mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
H. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following tile installation standards:
1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement, dry-set, commercial portland cement,
and latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10.
B. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to
determine that it is watertight.
A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Ceramic Tile Floor Installation
Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 series of
tile installation standards.
B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:
C. Back Buttering: For installations indicated, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by
complying with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced
ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards:
D. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting
bed as abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would
otherwise be exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish.
E. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring
meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.
A. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the
Ceramic Tile Wall Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation
methods and ANSI setting-bed standards.
B. Install metal lath and scratch coat to walls to comply with ANSI A108.1A, Section 4.1.
C. Joint Widths: Install tile on walls with the following joint widths:
D. Back Buttering: For installations indicated, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by
complying with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced
ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards:
A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they
are free of foreign matter.
B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken,
unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Engineer, that
ensure tile is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile
surfaces.
a. Setting Bed: ANSI A 108.1b, dry-set or latex mortar bed bonded to cured
setting bed.
b. Grout: epoxy grout, ANSI A118.3.
4. TCA F121: Cement mortar bed bonded to waterproof membrane over concrete
subfloor.
3. TCA W211: Cement mortar bed bonded to clean, sound, dimensionally stable
masonry or concrete.
4. TCA W222: one-coat cement mortar bed over solid backing and solid anchorage for
metal lath.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items
involved:
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish
required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
1. Acoustical Panel: Set of full-size Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.
2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 300-mm- long
Samples of each type, finish, and color.
H. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling and components and anchor
and fastener type.
B. Source Limitations:
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single
manufacturer.
2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension
system through one source from a single manufacturer.
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the
following requirements:
E. Seismic Standard: Provide acoustical panel ceilings designed and installed to withstand the
effects of earthquake motions according to the following:
F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in
original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where
they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are
enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is
complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels
indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before
beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face
of test specimen is 400 mm away from test surface per ASTM E 795.
B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each
product type.
B. Classification: Provide fire-resistance-rated panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type,
form, and pattern as follows:
1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted.
2. Pattern: C (perforated, small holes) unless otherwise indicated.
I. Thickness: 19 mm.
B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for
Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating
finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system
indicated.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
"Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or
loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined
by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified
testing and inspecting agency.
D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,
Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less
than 3.5-mm- diameter wire.
E. Hanger Rods and Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive
paint.
F. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 22 mm wide; formed with 1-mm- thick,
galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 coating designation;
with bolted connections and 8-mm- diameter bolts.
I. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure
acoustical panels in-place.
B. Narrow-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll
formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip
galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than Z90 coating designation, with
prefinished 15-mm- wide metal caps on flanges.
B. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not
indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with
seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as
that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.
1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details
and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed
runners, unless otherwise indicated.
2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter
required to fit penetration exactly.
B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag,
paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing
airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction
as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical
panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
acoustical panel ceilings.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths
at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and
comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with seismic design requirements
indicated as applicable to this project, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's
"Ceiling Systems Handbook."
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within
ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension
system.
2. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire-resistance-rated
ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing,
countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support
standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and
hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a
minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and
that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated
temperatures.
5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate
framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure
and appropriate for both structure to which hangers are attached and type of hanger
involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail
due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten
hangers to postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors that extend through forms
into concrete.
7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required,
install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger
wires.
8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
10. Space hangers not more than 1200 mm o.c. along each member supported directly
from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 200 mm
from ends of each member.
11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of
four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for
hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten
bracing wires into concrete with postinstalled anchors.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one
another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a
neat, precise fit.
2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges
of suspension system runners and moldings.
3. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having
jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel
manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Install clean-room gasket system in areas indicated, sealing each panel and fixture as
recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions.
5. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-
resistance-rated assembly.
A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special
inspections and prepare reports:
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and
prepare test reports.
C. Tests and Inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed installations of acoustical panel
ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners shall take place in successive stages, in areas of
extent and using methods as follows. Do not proceed with installations of acoustical panel
ceiling hangers for the next area until test results for previously completed installations of
acoustical panel ceiling hangers show compliance with requirements.
1. Extent of Each Test Area: When installation of ceiling suspension systems on each
floor has reached 20 percent completion but no panels have been installed.
a. Within each test area, testing agency will select 1 of every 10 postinstalled
anchors used to attach hangers to concrete and will test them for 890 N of
tension; it will also select one of every 2 postinstalled anchors used to attach
bracing wires to concrete and will test them for 1957 N of tension.
b. When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with
requirements, testing agency will test those anchors not previously tested until
20 pass consecutively and then will resume initial testing frequency.
D. Remove and replace acoustical panel ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners that do not
pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning
and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot
be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Acoustical metal pans and associated suspension system for interior and
exterior ceilings.
B. Related Requirements:
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products required to have recycled content.
2. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For sealants and adhesives required to to have a low
VOC content.
C. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required,
prepared on Samples of size indicated below:
1. Metal Pans: Set of full-size Samples of each type, finish, color, and pattern of hole
perforation designs. Show pan edge profile, details of hinged access panels and hold-
down clips.
2. Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 300 mm long
Samples of each type, finish, and color.
3. Sound Absorbing Materials: Sample of each type matching size of Sample metal pan.
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to 1: 50 scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items
involved:
4. Items penetrating or attached to finished ceiling including lighting fixtures, Air outlets
and inlets, speakers, sprinklers, access panels.
5. Perimeter moldings.
6. Panel identifications.
C. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical metal pan ceiling, for tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, demonstrating compliance with performance requirements.
D. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical metal pan ceiling suspension system and anchor and
fastener type.
A. Quality Standards: Install ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M, manufacturer's
written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area, not less than 10 sq. m, for each type of ceiling.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform tests and inspections to
verify seismic design compliance, and as follows.
1. Tests and inspections of completed installations of acoustical metal panel ceiling hangers,
anchors, and fasteners in successive stages in accordance with CISCA's "Guidelines for
Seismic Restraint of Direct-Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies - Seismic Zones 3 & 4".
B. Acoustical metal panel ceiling hangers, anchors, and fasteners will be considered defective if
they do not pass tests and inspections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Accessibility to Ceiling Spaces: Determine quantity and location of hinged access panels
according locations and types of equipment and servicing requirements indicated in services
documents of the Contract documents.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical metal ceiling pan and supporting suspension
system from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Recycled Content: Provide metal ceiling materials having recycled content in compliance with
Credit MR 4.
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Panz Metal Lay-in
Ceiling Panels USG Interiors, Inc. or comparable product by another acceptable manufacturer.
B. Panel Types:
1. Perforated Panels: Manufacturer’s standard units; perforated aluminum facing (pan); with
manufacturer’s sound-absorbent pads.
C. Pan Fabrication: Manufacturer's standard units of sizes indicated, formed from metal indicated
to set in exposed suspension grid and finished to comply with requirements indicated.
D. Pan Edge Detail: Manufacturer's standard Fine line (FL) edge detail.
F. Panel Identification: Identify each perforated panel on concealed side, with the following
permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings.
G. Sound-Absorbing Media: Provide fabric layers, fibrous insulation and associated materials to
achieve sound ratings specified in Project Acoustic Report, as tested by qualified testing agency
on products and assemblies indicated, and as follows:
A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems
of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable
ASTM C 635/C 635M requirements.
B. Suspension Systems: Provide systems complete with carriers, runners, splice sections,
connector clips, alignment clips, leveling clips, hangers, molding, trim, retention clips, load-
resisting struts, and other suspension components required to support ceiling units and other
ceiling-supported construction.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M,
Table 1, Direct Hung, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops
for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a
load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing
according to ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified
testing and inspecting agency.
D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times the hanger design load indicated in
ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, Direct Hung, is less than yield stress of wire, but provide
not less than 3.5 mm diameter wire.
E. Hanger Rods and Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
F. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 22 mm wide; formed with 1 mm thick,
galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 coating designation; with
bolted connections and 8 mm diameter bolts.
I. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical
metal pans in place.
J. Hold-Down Clips: Manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced to secure acoustical metal
pans in place at each pan, except at access panels.
K. Exposed Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Provide exposed members as indicated or as required
to comply with seismic requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, to conceal edges of and
penetrations through ceiling, to conceal edges of pans and runners, for fixture trim and adapters,
for fasciae at changes in ceiling height, and for other conditions; of metal and finish matching
acoustical metal pan ceiling units unless otherwise indicated.
1. Perimeter Molding: Manufacturer’s standard Shadow line with reveal edge, designed for
use with panels and tee system.
2. For Circular Penetrations of Ceiling: Fabricate edge moldings to diameter required to fit
penetration exactly.
2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR INTERIOR ACOUSTICAL LAY-IN METAL PAN
CEILING
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide DXI Identitee Tee
System by USG Interiors, Inc. or comparable product by another acceptable manufacturer.
B. Direct-Hung Tee System: Designed to support metal pans that lay into main runners, consisting
of main runners supported by hangers attached directly to building structure, and complying
with the following requirements:
C. Access Panels: For access at locations indicated, provide hinged metal pan ceiling units as
specified for adjoining ceiling panels; accessible by key or tool.
1. Access Key or Tool: Provide manufacturer's standard key or tool for opening access
panels; four for each station.
B. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective
in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building
construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
A. General:
B. Metal Finishes: Finish carriers and panels with manufacturer’s color-coated standard baked
paint complying with coating manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation,
pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
C. Installer Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out
successfully by the installer with the same product endorsed by the manufacturer’s
representative.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color and other
decorative finishes.
E. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish
required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
1. Cell Grids: Set of full-size module Samples of each type, finish, and color.
2. Beam Grids: Set of 300-mm- long Samples of each type, finish, and color; a 300-
mm- long spliced section; and a 150-mm- long per leg corner section.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each color, finish, and type of suspended decorative grid from
one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance, physical
properties, and performance.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this Section
with minimum three years documented experience and that is approved, authorized, or
licensed by the product manufacturer to install his product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's warranty. Include project names and addresses, names and addresses of
Engineers and Employers, and other information specified
D. Seismic Standard: Provide suspended decorative grids designed and installed to withstand
the effects of earthquake motions according to the following:
E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install suspended decorative grids until spaces are
enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is
complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels
indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of suspended decorative grids with other construction that
penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-
suppression system, and partition assemblies.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply
for product selection:
A. Sheet Metal Characteristics: Provide sheet metal selected for surface flatness, smoothness,
and freedom from surface blemishes where exposed to view in finished unit. Do not use
materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, variations in
flatness exceeding those permitted by referenced standards for stretcher-leveled metal sheet,
stains, discolorations, or other imperfections.
B. Grid Fabrication: Components formed from metal indicated. Manufacturer's standard units
of size, shape, and profile indicated, finished to comply with requirements
indicated. Provide cells factory assembled into modular panel.
C. Cover Profiles and Trim: Provide manufacturer's standard cover profiles and trim for
exposed members, and as indicated or required, for edges of grids, at changes in ceiling
height, and for other conditions, of same metal and finish as suspended decorative grids.
E. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
Direct Hung, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1. Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,
Table 1, Direct Hung) will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than
3.5-mm- diameter wire.
G. Hanger Rods and Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive
paint.
H. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 22 mm wide; formed with 1-mm- thick,
galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 coating designation;
with bolted connections and 8-mm- diameter bolts.
J. Exposed Metal Edge Moldings, Covers, Trim, and Fixture Filler Panels: Provide exposed
members as indicated or required to conceal edges of and penetrations through ceiling, to
conceal edges of beams, to cover runner webs, for fixture trim and adapters, for fasciae at
changes in ceiling height, and for other conditions; of metal and finish matching suspended
decorative grids, unless otherwise indicated.
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to
which suspended decorative grids attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and
anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of suspended decorative grids.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of suspended decorative grids to balance
border widths at opposite edges of each space. Comply with layout shown on reflected
ceiling plans.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install suspended decorative grids to comply with seismic requirements indicated
as applicable to this project, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling
Systems Handbook."
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within
ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal
forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with the location of hangers at spacings required to support
standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and
hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension
members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established
by referenced standards and publications.
4. Secure hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for structure to
which hangers are attached and for type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a
manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or
elevated temperatures.
5. Do not support grids directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten
hangers to drilled-in anchors that extend through forms into concrete.
6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
7. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
8. Space hangers not more than 1200 mm o.c. along each member supported directly
from hangers, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of
four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for
hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten
bracing wires into concrete with postinstalled anchors.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of each suspended decorative
grid and where necessary to conceal edges of grids.
1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 400 mm o.c. and not
more than 75 mm from ends, level with ceiling system to a tolerance of 3 mm in 3.6
m. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
E. Install suspended decorative grids in coordination with suspension system and exposed
moldings and trim.
1. Align joints in adjacent courses to form uniform, straight joints parallel to room axis
in both directions, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Fit adjoining units to form flush, tight joints.
3. Where grid edges are visible, install cover profiles, unless other trim is indicated.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of suspended decorative grids, including trim and edge moldings
after removing strippable, temporary protective covering if any. Comply with
manufacturer's written instructions for stripping of temporary protective covering, cleaning,
and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace grid components that cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage, including
dented and deformed grids.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Stone slabs for interior flooring.
B. Related Requirements:
.1 Division 03 Section “Cast-in-place Concrete,” for cast-in-place concrete floors to re-
ceive stone flooring.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
.1 For each variety of stone. Include data on physical properties required by referenced
ASTM standards.
.2 For stone accessories and other manufactured products.
.3 Setting and jointing materials. Indicate setting methods.
B. LEED Submittals:
.1 Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply
with requirements for regional materials.
.2 Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For sealants and adhesives required to have low
VOC content.
C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Indicate
joint widths and edge treatments.
D. Samples of each stone type and grout samples. Include range showing variation of colors.
.1 For each stone type indicated, in sets of Samples not less than 300 mm square.
Include five or more Samples in each set and show the full range of variations in
appearance characteristics and edge treatments expected in completed Work.
.2 For each color of grout required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.2 Maximum VOC Content: Provide sealants and adhesives with VOC content in com-
pliance with requirements of Credit IEQ 4.1.
2.3 STONE
A. General: Natural, quarried, free of efflorescence. Provide stone types of classification
suitable for application indicated for service life of building, and as evidenced by test
reports.
B. Granite Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 615.
C. Marble Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 503.
D. Stone Flooring:
.1 Material Types: As indicated.
.2 Abrasion Resistance: Minimum abrasive-hardness value of 10, as determined per
ASTM C 241.
.3 Sizes: As indicated.
.4 Stone Edges: As selected by Engineer.
.5 Thickness: 30 mm minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
.6 Colors and Finishes: To match Engineer’s reference Samples.
.7 Static Coefficient of Friction: ASTM C 1028, minimum value of 0.6 for level surfac-
es. Use higher values when required by applicable codes.
2.5 GROUT
A. Polymer Modified Cement Grout: ANSI A118.7.
A. Control Joint Materials: Engineer will select from one or both of the following:
.1 Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants,” and that do not stain
stone.
.2 Preformed Strip: Stainless steel, selected by Engineer from Dilex series by Schluter-
Systems Ltd, or comparable product by another acceptable manufacturer.
B. Floor Sealer: Colorless, slip and stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical
properties of stone surfaces, hydrophobic water-based impregnating no-sheen type suitable
for natural stone.
.1 Sealer shall protect the stone and jointing materials from the following, as
demonstrated by tests performed by qualified testing agencies, using materials
specified for the Work:
a. Staining during setting and grouting process and allow evaporation of water
from setting materials.
b. Ingress of water, water-borne salts and oil-based substances.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base,
reducer strips, and other accessories installed with sheet vinyl floor coverings.
2. Division 9 Section "Static-Control Resilient Floor Coverings" for sheet vinyl floor
coverings designed to control electrostatic discharge (ESD).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
C. Installer Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out
successfully by the installer with the same product endorsed by the manufacturer’s
representative.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor covering indicated.
E. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 150-by-230-mm
sections of each different color and pattern of floor covering required.
1. For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 230
mm long, of each color required.
F. Heat-Welded Seam Samples: For each flooring product and welding bead color and pattern
combination required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 150-by-230-mm
Sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project that are
competent in heat-welding techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering
installation.
1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project that are trained or certified
by floor covering manufacturer for heat-welding techniques required.
C. Mockups: Apply mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution and to set quality
standard for fabrication and installation.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Employer
of other rights Employer may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and
shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
A. Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather,
with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not
less than 10 deg C or more than 32 deg C. Store rolls upright.
A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 21
deg C or more than 29 deg C, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time
periods:
E. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Furnish not less than 3 linear m for every 150 linear m or fraction thereof, in roll form
and in full roll width for each color, pattern, and type of floor covering installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Altro Floors.
2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
3. Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO.
4. Congoleum Corporation.
5. Forbo Industries, Inc.
6. Lonseal, Inc.
7. Mannington Mills, Inc.
8. Marley Floors, Ltd.
9. Polyflor/Bonar Floors Inc.
10. Tarkett Inc.
11. TOLI International.
B. Description: Non-slip static dissipative vinyl tile. Tile must meet specifications required by
equipment manufacturer. Install according to tile manufacturer’s directions.
H. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per
ASTM E 648.
C. Hardness: Manufacturer's standard hardness, measured using Shore, Type A durometer per
ASTM D 2240.
G. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Engineer from full range of industry colors.
1. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range to contrast with floor
covering.
D. Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories:
E. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required
to protect exposed edges of floor coverings, and in maximum available lengths to minimize
running joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements
specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions,
scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor coverings.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
3. Moisture Testing:
C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor covering
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in
substrates.
E. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at
least 48 hours in advance of installation.
1. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are
to be installed.
F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before
installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and
dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Unroll sheet vinyl floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
C. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent
fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and
nosings.
D. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
E. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent
marking device.
F. Install floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in
installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of floor
coverings installed on covers. Tightly adhere floor covering edges to substrates that abut
covers and to cover perimeters.
G. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
H. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and use welding bead to
permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to
produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces.
I. Integral Flash Cove Base: Cove floor coverings 152 mm or dimension indicated up vertical
surfaces. Support floor coverings at horizontal and vertical junction by cove strip. Butt at
top against cap strip.
A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation:
B. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction
period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1. Apply protective floor polish to surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and
blemishes if recommended in writing by manufacturer.
2. Cover floor coverings with undyed, untreated building paper until Substantial
Completion.
3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor coverings. Place plywood or
hardboard panels over floor coverings and under objects while they are being moved.
Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Wall base.
2. Molding accessories.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 9 Section "Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings" for resilient sheet floor coverings.
2. Division 9 Section "Static-Control Resilient Floor Coverings" for resilient floor
coverings designed to control electrostatic discharge.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-
size Samples but not less than 300 mm long, of each resilient product color, texture, and
pattern required.
B. Mockups: Apply mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution and to set quality
standard for fabrication and installation.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Employer
of other rights Employer may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and
shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather,
with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not
less than 10 deg C or more than 32 deg C.
A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 21
deg C or more than 35 deg C, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time
periods:
C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Furnish not less than 3 linear m for every 150 linear m or fraction thereof, of each
type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
D. Style: Butt-to (cove with extended square-edge toe that fits flush to floor covering).
J. Surface: Smooth.
A. Description: Cap for cove carpet, Cap for cove resilient sheet floor covering, Carpet bar for
tackless installations, Carpet edge for glue-down applications, Nosing for carpet, Nosing for
resilient floor covering, Reducer strip for resilient floor covering, Joiner for tile and carpet
and Transition strips.
1. Altro Floors.
2. Burke Mercer Flooring Products.
3. Johnsonite.
B. Material: Vinyl.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements
specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions,
scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
B. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and
that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by
manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
C. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in
substrates.
D. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at
least 48 hours in advance of installation.
1. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space
where they are to be installed.
E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and
dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall
base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
A. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates
throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would
otherwise be exposed.
B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from
construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of
construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes resilient floor coverings designed to control electrostatic discharge
(ESD) as follows:
1. Static-dissipative solid vinyl floor tile and vinyl sheet floor covering.
2. Conductive solid vinyl floor tile and vinyl sheet floor covering.
1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base,
reducer strips, and other accessories installed with static-control resilient floor
coverings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
C. Installer Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out
successfully by the installer with the same product endorsed by the manufacturer’s
representative.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor covering and exposed accessory
indicated.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of floor covering indicated and of size indicated
below:
F. Seam Samples: For seamless installation technique indicated and for each flooring product,
color, and pattern required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 150-by-230-mm
Sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this Section
with minimum three years documented experience and that is trained, approved, authorized,
or licensed by the product manufacturer to install his product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's warranty. Include project names and addresses, names and addresses of
Engineers and Employers, and other information specified
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per
ASTM E 648.
A. Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather,
with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer but not
less than 10 deg C or more than 32 deg C.
A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 21
deg C or more than 29 deg C, in spaces to receive floor coverings for at least 48 hours
before and during installation and for at least 48 hours after installation unless
manufacturer's written recommendations specify a longer time period.
D. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Floor Tile: Furnish not less than 1 box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each
color, pattern, and size of floor tile installed.
2. Sheet Floor Covering: Furnish not less than 3 linear m for each 152 linear m or
fraction thereof, in roll form for each color, pattern, and type of sheet floor covering
installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Static-Dissipative Solid Vinyl Floor Tile: ASTM F 1700, Class I (monolithic), Type A
(smooth surface); tiles 305 by 305 mm; in manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less
than 2.0 mm thick.
C. Static-Control Properties:
1. Electrical Resistance: Test per ASTM F 150 with 100-V applied voltage.
a. Average greater than 1 megohm and less than or equal to 1000 megohms when
test specimens are tested surface to ground.
b. Average no less than 1 megohm and less than or equal to 1000 megohms when
installed floor coverings are tested surface to ground.
2. Static Generation: Less than 300 V when tested per AATCC-134 at 20 percent
relative humidity with conductive footwear.
3. Static Decay: 5000 to 0 V in less than 0.25 seconds when tested per FED-STD-
101/4046.1.
A. Conductive Solid Vinyl Floor Tile: ASTM F 1700, Class I (monolithic), Type A (smooth
surface); tiles 300 by 300 mm; in manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 2.0
mm thick.
B. Conductive Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering: ASTM F 1913 (unbacked) or ASTM F 1303,
Type II, Grade I, Class B (nonfoamed plastic backing); in manufacturer's standard roll size;
in manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 2.0 mm thick.
C. Static-Control Properties:
1. Electrical Resistance: Test per ASTM F 150 with 500-V applied voltage.
a. Average greater than 25,000 ohms and less than 1 megohm when test
specimens and installed floor coverings are tested surface to surface (point to
point).
b. Average no less than 25,000 ohms with no single measurement less than
10,000 ohms when installed floor coverings are tested surface to ground.
2. Static Generation: Less than 100 V when tested per AATCC-134 at 20 percent
relative humidity with conductive footwear.
3. Static Decay: 5000 to 0 V in less than 0.03 seconds when tested per FED-STD-
101/4046.1.
C. Grounding Strips: Provided and approved by floor covering manufacturer and that produce
conductive continuity of floor covering system to ground connection.
D. Seamless-Installation Accessories:
1. Cove Strip: 25-mm radius support strip provided or approved by floor covering
manufacturer.
2. Cap Strip: Square metal, vinyl, or rubber cap provided or approved by floor covering
manufacturer.
3. Corners: Metal inside and outside corners and end stops provided or approved by
floor covering manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer and manufacturer's representative present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions
affecting performance.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements
specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions,
scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion or static-control
characteristics of floor coverings.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor
covering adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical
methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
3. Moisture Testing:
C. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in
substrates.
D. Access Flooring Panels: Remove protective film of oil or other coating using method
recommended by access flooring manufacturer.
E. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at
least 48 hours in advance of installation.
1. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are
to be installed.
F. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before
installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and
dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Embed grounding strips in static-control adhesive. Extend strips beyond perimeter of static-
control resilient floor covering surfaces to ground points.
C. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent
fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and
nosings.
D. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
E. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent
marking device.
F. Install floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar items in
installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of floor
coverings installed on covers. Tightly adhere floor covering edges to substrates that abut
covers and to cover perimeters.
G. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
H. Seamless Installation:
1. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and heat weld with
welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare,
weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering
surfaces.
I. Integral Flash Cove Base: Cove floor coverings 152 mm up vertical surfaces. Support floor
coverings at horizontal and vertical junction with cove strip. Butt at top against cap strip.
A. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets,
so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut
widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
B. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or
deformed tiles.
C. In each space where conductive solid vinyl floor tile is installed, install maintenance tile
identifying conductive floor tile in location approved by Engineer.
A. Unroll sheet floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
A. Testing: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to test electrical
resistance of static-control resilient floor covering systems for compliance with
requirements.
1. Arrange for testing after installation adhesives have fully cured and floor covering
systems have stabilized to ambient conditions.
2. Arrange for testing of floor coverings before and after performing polish procedures.
B. Remove and replace static-control floor coverings where test results indicate that they do
not comply with specified requirements.
A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes from floor covering surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly.
B. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction
period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by manufacturer.
a. Verify that both polish and its application method are approved by tile
manufacturer and that polish will not leave an insulating film that reduces tile's
effectiveness for static control.
2. Cover floor coverings with undyed, untreated building paper until Substantial
Completion.
3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor coverings. Place plywood or
hardboard panels over floor coverings and under objects while they are being moved.
Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels.
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. Include manufacturer's technical data,
installation instructions, and recommendations for each resinous flooring component
required.
C. Installer Experience: List of five projects (minimum) of a similar nature carried out
successfully by the installer with the same product endorsed by the manufacturer’s
representative.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors,
textures, and patterns available for each resinous flooring system indicated.
E. Samples for Verification: Of each resinous flooring system required, 150 mm square,
applied by Installer for this Project to a rigid backing, in color, texture, and finish indicated.
Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing
the full range of variations expected.
F. Product Schedule: Use designations indicated in the Resinous Flooring Schedule and room
designations indicated on Drawings in product schedule.
H. Material Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency indicating and
interpreting test results of the resinous flooring's reaction to chemicals and other reagents
and substantiating compliance with requirements.
I. Material Certificates: In lieu of material test reports, when permitted by Engineer, signed by
manufacturers certifying that materials furnished comply with requirements.
J. Maintenance Data: For resinous flooring to include in the maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.
1. Engage an installer who employs only persons trained and approved by resinous
flooring manufacturer for installing resinous flooring systems specified.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain primary resinous flooring materials, including primers, resins,
hardening agents, and sealing or finish coats, through one source from a single
manufacturer. Provide secondary materials including patching and fill material, joint
sealant, and repair materials of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of
primary materials.
C. Field Samples: On floor area selected by Engineer, provide full-thickness resinous flooring
system samples that are at least 1200 mm square to demonstrate texture, color, thickness,
chemical resistance, cleanability, and other features of each resinous flooring system
required. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place field samples.
1. If field samples are unacceptable, make adjustments to comply with requirements and
apply additional samples until field samples are approved.
2. After field samples are approved, these surfaces will be used to evaluate resinous
flooring.
3. Obtain Engineer's approval of field samples before applying resinous flooring.
4. Final approval of colors will be from field samples, not samples submitted for
verification.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Employer
of other rights Employer may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and
shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing
manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixing with
other components.
B. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate
permanent lighting conditions during resinous flooring installation.
C. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for not less than 24 hours
after application, unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Resinous Flooring: Resinous floor surfacing system consisting of primer; body coat(s)
including resin, hardener, aggregates, and colorants, if any; and sealing or finish coat(s).
Comply with requirements indicated in the Resinous Flooring Schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written
instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry, and neutral substrate for resinous
flooring application.
B. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence,
curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminates
incompatible with resinous flooring.
C. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous flooring
manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from reflecting
through resinous flooring according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.2 APPLICATION
1. Broadcast aggregates and, after resin is cured, remove excess aggregates to provide
surface texture indicated.
G. Apply troweled or screeded body coat(s) in thickness indicated. Hand or power trowel and
grout to fill voids. When cured, sand to remove trowel marks and roughness.
H. Integral Cove Base: Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces at locations indicated. Round
internal and external corners. Install cove base according to manufacturer's written
instructions and details including taping, mixing, priming, troweling, sanding, and
topcoating of cove base.
I. Apply sealing or finish coat(s), including grout coat, if any, of type recommended by
resinous flooring manufacturer to produce finish indicated. Apply in number of coats and at
spreading rates recommended in writing by manufacturer.
A. Core Sampling: At the direction of Employer and at locations designated by Employer, take
1 core sample per 93 sq. m of resinous flooring, or portion of, to verify thickness. For each
sample that fails to comply with requirements, take 2 additional samples. Repair damage
caused by coring and correct deficiencies at no additional cost to Employer.
B. Material Sampling: Employer may at any time and any number of times during flooring
application require material samples for testing for compliance with requirements.
A. Protect resinous flooring from damage and wear during the remainder of construction
period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended
in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer.
B. Clean resinous flooring not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections
intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each Project area. Use cleaning
materials and procedures recommended in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer.
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. System thickness varies from 1.6 to 6.4 mm when applied as slurry with
broadcast aggregates and 4.8 mm or thicker when troweled or screeded.
a. Primer. High-Build primer, 100 % solids epoxy primer for filling irregular or
highly profiled floors.
8. Physical Properties: Provide resinous flooring system with the following minimum
physical property requirements when tested according to standard test methods
indicated:
1) Dry: 0.79.
2) Wet (distilled water): > 0.95.
a. Acetic acid.
b. Citric acid
c. Lactic acid
d. Hydrochloric acid
e. Nitric acid
f. Phosphoric acid
g. Sulfuric acid
h. Acetone
i. Methyl ethyl ketone
j. Methanol
k. Ethanol
l. Toluene
m. Xylene
n. Gasoline
o. Sodium hypochloride
p. Any additional required for system indicated above.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Interior stone facing panels set on mortar pads and secured with anchors.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 03 Section “Cast-in-place Concrete,” for concrete surfaces to receive stone wall
facing.
2. Division 04 Section “Unit Masonry,” for masonry walls to receive stone wall facing.
A. Product Data:
1. For each variety of stone. Include data on physical properties required by referenced
ASTM standards, and chemical analysis.
2. For stone accessories and other manufactured products.
3. Setting and jointing materials.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply
with requirements for regional materials.
2. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For sealants, documentation including printed
statement of VOC content.
C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for stone paneling system, including
dimensions and profiles of stone units.
1. Show locations and details of joints both within stone paneling system and between stone
paneling system and other finish materials.
2. Show locations and details of anchors, including locations of supporting construction.
3. Show direction of veining, grain, or other directional pattern.
D. Samples:
1. For each stone type indicated. Include at least five samples in each set for each type of
stone, exhibiting extremes of the full range of color and other visual characteristics
expected in completed Work. Samples will establish the standard by which stone
provided will be judged.
2. For each color of joint material required. Label Samples to indicate types and amounts of
pigments used.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For stone wall facing assembly indicated, to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Stone Test Reports: For each stone variety proposed for use on Project, provide test data
indicating compliance with required physical properties, other than abrasion resistance,
according to referenced ASTM standards. Base reports on testing done within previous
three years.
2. Compatibility Test Report: From manufacturers’ test laboratories, indicating that
jointing, setting and sealer materials will not discolor or adversely affect the adjoining
stone. Include interpretation of test results and recommendations for primers and
substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
D. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of finish, from one
quarry, whether specified in this Section or in another Section, with resources to provide
materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
E. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious
component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.
G. Mockups: Build 2 m by 2 m mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of each type of wall facing of not less than one structural bay.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. General: Design stone anchors and anchoring systems according to ASTM C 1242.
C. Structural Performance: Provide dimension stone cladding system capable of withstanding the
effects of gravity and equipment loads as indicated.
1. Stone anchors shall withstand not less than two times the weight of the stone cladding in
both compression and tension.
D. Seismic Performance: Provide dimension stone cladding system capable of withstanding the
effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7 and authorities having
jurisdiction, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Shrinkage and Creep: Allow for progressive vertical shortening of building frame equal to 3
mm in 3 m.
F. Safety Factors for Stone: Design dimension stone cladding system to withstand loads indicated
without exceeding allowable working stress of stone determined by dividing stone's average
ultimate strength, as established by testing, by the following minimum safety factors:
G. Design stone anchors to withstand loads indicated without exceeding allowable working
stresses established by the following:
H. Provisions for Fabrication and Erection Tolerances: Allow for fabrication and erection
tolerances of building's structural system specified in other Sections.
I. Control of Corrosion and Staining: Prevent galvanic and other forms of corrosion as well as
staining by isolating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
Use materials that do not stain exposed surfaces of stone and joint materials.
J. Joint Appearance:
K. Installation Tolerances:
1. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of walls, do not exceed 6 mm in
3 m, 10 mm in 6 m, or 12 mm in 12 m or more. For external corners, corners and jambs
within 6 m of an entrance, expansion joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 3
mm in 3 m, 6 mm in 6 m, or 10 mm in 12 m or more.
2. Variation from Level: For lintels, sills, horizontal bands, horizontal grooves, and other
conspicuous lines, do not exceed 3 mm in 3 m, 6 mm in 6 m, or 10 mm maximum.
3. Variation of Linear Building Line: For positions shown in plan and related portions of
walls and partitions, do not exceed 6 mm in 6 m or 12 mm in 12 m or more.
4. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For thickness of walls from dimensions
indicated, do not exceed plus or minus 6 mm.
5. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary from average joint width more than plus or minus
3 mm or a quarter of nominal joint width, whichever is less. For joints within 1500 mm
of each other, do not vary more than 3 mm or a quarter of nominal joint width, whichever
is less from one to the other.
6. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stone Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 1.5-mm
difference between planes of adjacent units.
A. Use materials that will not stain, discolor or adversely affect mortar and stone.
B. Sustainable Design:
1. Provide setting and pointing mortar materials that comply with requirements of
Credit MR 5.
2. Maximum VOC Content: Provide sealants and adhesives with VOC content in
compliance with requirements of Credit IEQ 4.1.
2.3 STONE
A. Stone Types: As selected by Engineer from the specified types. Stone to comply with the
following.
B. Colors, Color Ranges and Finishes: To match Engineer's samples. Natural variations in
appearance are acceptable if installed stone units match range of colors and other appearance
characteristics represented in approved samples and mockups.
C. Thickness: To comply with performance requirements and not less than thicknesses indicated.
A. Provide packaged setting mortar or individual materials for setting mortar mixed at Project site,
complying with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, and the following:
a. Use low-alkali cement containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when
tested according to ASTM C 114, to limit staining, when recommended by stone
source.
2.5 GROUT
A. General: Provide packaged pointing mortar or individual materials for pointing mortar mixed at
Project site, complying with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N or Type S as
applicable to stone type, and the following:
a. Use low-alkali cement containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when
tested according to ASTM C 114, to limit staining, when recommended by stone
source.
7. Water: Potable.
A. Fabricate anchors from stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304,
temper as required to support loads imposed without exceeding allowable design stresses.
Fabricate dowels and pins for anchors from stainless steel, ASTM A 276, Type 304.
B. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Anchors: Annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers;
ASTM F 738M for bolts and ASTM F 836M for nuts, Alloy Group 1 A1.
A. Temporary Setting Shims: Rigid plastic shims, nonstaining to stone, of thickness needed to
prevent point loading of stone on anchors, and of depths to suit anchors without intruding into
required depths of pointing materials.
B. Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants,” and that do not stain stone.
C. Stone Sealer: Colorless, stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical properties of
stone surfaces, hydrophobic water-based impregnating no-sheen type suitable for natural stone.
Sealer shall protect the stone from staining during setting and grouting process and allow
evaporation of water from setting materials, as demonstrated by tests performed by qualified
testing agencies.
A. General: Fabricate stone units in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements
indicated, and on Shop Drawings.
B. Pattern Arrangement: Fabricate and arrange stone units with veining and other natural
markings on approved mockups.
C. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to match approved samples and mockups.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the
following exterior substrates:
1. Concrete.
2. Concrete masonry units (CMU).
3. Wood.
4. Exterior portland cement (stucco).
1. Division 5 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this
Section.
2. Division 6 Sections for shop priming carpentry with primers specified in this Section.
3. Division 8 Sections for factory priming windows and doors with primers specified in
this Section.
4. Division 9 Section "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of
paint systems on interior substrates.
5. Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings" for special-use coatings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured
at an 85-degree meter.
2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
4. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured
at a 60-degree meter.
1. Paint gloss shall be defined as the sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with
the following MPI values:
Units Units
Gloss Level Description @ 60 degrees @ 85 degrees
G1 Matte or Flat finish 0 to 5 10 max.
G2 Velvet finish 0 to 10 10 to 35
G3 Eggshell finish 10 to 25 10 to 35
G4 Satin finish 20 to 35 35 min.
G5 Semi-Gloss finish 35 to 70
G6 Gloss finish 70 to 85
G7 High-Gloss finish > 85
2. Gloss level ratings of all painted surfaces shall be as specified herein and as noted on
Finish Schedule.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat
indicated.
A. MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved
Products List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.
E. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and
finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Engineer will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application
of each paint system specified in Part 3.
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 7 deg C.
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures
are between 10 and 35 deg C.
B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent;
at temperatures less than 3 deg C above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as
materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 3.8 L of each material
and color applied.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Employer of other rights the Employer may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by
the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty for paint finishes: Warranty in accordance with MPI Painting Manual
requirements shall warrant that all painting work has been performed in accordance with
MPI Painting Manual requirements. Contractor and Manufacturer are jointly and severally
responsible and shall agree to repair or replace paint coatings that fail within the specified
warranty period. Contractor and Manufacturer shall reimburse the Employer for the cost of
material and labor. Failures include, but are not limited to:
C. Warranty Period for Paint Coatings: 5 years from the date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one
another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
2.4 PRIMERS/SEALERS
2.6 FILLERS
A. Fillers: Fillers in powder form for mixing with water and consisting of acrylic resins and
appropriate fillers. It is to be used on exterior concrete or plastered wall surfaces as
recommended for particular purpose by the paint manufacturer. Adherence to wall surfaces
is not to be less than 2 MPa.
1. Planirex; Jardin-Toupret
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of
work.
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3. Wood: 15 percent.
4. Plaster: 12 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces are dry.
3.2 PREPARATION
B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be
painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide
surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk.
Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if
moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in
manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Wood Substrates:
1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic
wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
G. Plaster Substrates: Do not begin paint application until plaster is fully cured and dry.
3.3 APPLICATION
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final
installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.
B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats
of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured
film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp
lines and color breaks.
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Employer reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at
any time and as often as Employer deems necessary during the period when paints are being
applied:
1. Engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being
used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed,
and certified in presence of Contractor.
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of paint materials with product
requirements.
3. Employer may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials
being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove
noncomplying-paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces
painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected
materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials,
the two paints are incompatible.
4. Painted exterior and interior surfaces shall be considered to lack uniformity and
soundness if any of the following defects are apparent to the Painting Inspection
Agency inspector:
a. brush / roller marks, streaks, laps, runs, sags, drips, heavy stippling, hiding or
shadowing by inefficient application methods, skipped or missed areas, and
foreign materials in paint coatings.
b. evidence of poor coverage at rivet heads, plate edges, lap joints, crevices,
pockets, corners and re-entrant angles.
c. damage due to touching before paint is sufficiently dry or any other
contributory cause.
d. damage due to application on moist surfaces or caused by inadequate
protection from the weather.
e. damage and/or contamination of paint due to blown contaminants (dust, spray
paint, etc.).
5. Painted surfaces shall be considered unacceptable if any of the following are evident
under natural lighting source for exterior surfaces and final lighting source (including
daylight) for interior surfaces:
a. visible defects are evident on vertical surfaces when viewed at normal viewing
angles from a distance of not less than 1000 mm (39”).
b. visible defects are evident on horizontal surfaces when viewed at normal
viewing angles from a distance of not less than 1000 mm (39”).
c. visible defects are evident on ceiling, soffit and other overhead surfaces when
viewed at normal viewing angles.
d. when the final coat on any surface exhibits a lack of uniformity of color, sheen,
texture, and hiding across full surface area.
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials
from Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to
work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by
Engineer, and leave in an undamaged condition.
B. CMU Substrates:
D. Stucco Substrates:
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the
following interior substrates:
1. Concrete.
2. Concrete masonry units (CMU).
3. Galvanized metal.
4. Wood.
5. Gypsum board.
6. Plaster.
1. Division 5 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this
Section.
2. Division 6 Sections for shop priming carpentry with primers specified in this Section.
3. Division 8 Sections for factory priming windows and doors with primers specified in
this Section.
4. Division 9 Section "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of
paint systems on exterior substrates.
5. Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings" for special-use coatings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured
at an 85-degree meter.
2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
4. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured
at a 60-degree meter.
1. Paint gloss shall be defined as the sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with
the following MPI values:
2. Gloss level ratings of all painted surfaces shall be as specified herein and as noted on
Finish Schedule.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of
topcoat indicated.
A. MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved
Products List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.
E. Source Limitations: Obtain fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system
from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
F. Performance Of Paints: Paints shall be fit for purpose and manufactured specifically for the
applications indicated and uses intended, taking into account the type, nature, location, and
aesthetic and utility requirements of the project
1. Opacity: paint shall cover or hide the substrate to the Engineer's satisfaction.
2. Cleanability: paint shall not absorb dirt and shall be capable of being washed or
scrubbed periodically, to the Engineer's satisfaction, without adverse effect on its
attributes or appearance.
3. Scrub resistance wet and dry: paint shall resist abrasion caused by scrubbing in
accordance with ASTM D 2486.
4. Adhesion: paint shall adhere firmly to the substrate without peeling.
5. Exposure resistance: paint shall resist yellowing and weathering caused by UV rays
and ozone.
G. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and
finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Engineer will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application
of each paint system specified in Part 3.
2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services
have been activated.
3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 7 deg C.
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures
are between 10 and 35 deg C.
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 3
deg C above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as
materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 3.8 L of each material
and color applied.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Employer of other rights the Employer may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by
the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty for paint finishes: Warranty in accordance with MPI Painting Manual
requirements shall warrant that all painting work has been performed in accordance with
MPI Painting Manual requirements. Contractor and Manufacturer are jointly and severally
responsible and shall repair or replace paint coatings that fail within the specified warranty
period. Contractor and Manufacturer shall reimburse the Employer for the cost of material
C. Warranty Period for Paint Coatings: 5 years from the date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one
another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
2.4 PRIMERS/SEALERS
2.6 FILLERS
A. Fillers: Fillers in paste form consisting of acrylic resins and appropriate fillers. It is to be
used on interior concrete or plastered wall surfaces as recommended for particular purpose
by the paint manufacturer. Adherence to wall surfaces is not to be less than 50 N/cm2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of
work.
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3. Wood: 15 percent.
4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
5. Plaster: 12 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces are dry.
3.2 PREPARATION
B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be
painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide
surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk.
Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if
moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in
manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal
fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces
that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
G. Wood Substrates:
1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic
wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
H. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry
and sanded smooth.
I. Plaster Substrates: Do not begin paint application until plaster is fully cured and dry.
3.3 APPLICATION
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar
hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats
of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured
film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp
lines and color breaks.
E. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and
occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Mechanical Work:
2. Electrical Work:
a. Switchgear.
b. Panelboards.
c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field
painting.
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Employer reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at
any time and as often as Employer deems necessary during the period when paints are being
applied:
1. Engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being
used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed,
and certified in presence of Contractor.
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
3. Employer may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials
being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove
noncomplying-paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces
painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected
materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials,
the two paints are incompatible.
4. Painted exterior and interior surfaces shall be considered to lack uniformity and
soundness if any of the following defects are apparent to the Painting Inspection
Agency inspector:
a. brush / roller marks, streaks, laps, runs, sags, drips, heavy stippling, hiding or
shadowing by inefficient application methods, skipped or missed areas, and
foreign materials in paint coatings.
b. evidence of poor coverage at rivet heads, plate edges, lap joints, crevices,
pockets, corners and re-entrant angles.
c. damage due to touching before paint is sufficiently dry or any other
contributory cause.
d. damage due to application on moist surfaces or caused by inadequate
protection from the weather.
e. damage and/or contamination of paint due to blown contaminants (dust, spray
paint, etc.).
5. Painted surfaces shall be considered unacceptable if any of the following are evident
under natural lighting source for exterior surfaces and final lighting source (including
daylight) for interior surfaces:
a. visible defects are evident on vertical surfaces when viewed at normal viewing
angles from a distance of not less than 1000 mm (39”).
b. visible defects are evident on horizontal surfaces when viewed at normal
viewing angles from a distance of not less than 1000 mm (39”).
c. visible defects are evident on ceiling, soffit and other overhead surfaces when
viewed at normal viewing angles.
d. when the final coat on any surface exhibits a lack of uniformity of color, sheen,
texture, and hiding across full surface area.
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials
from Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to
work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by
Engineer, and leave in an undamaged condition.
B. CMU Substrates:
C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
F. Plaster Substrates:
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Exterior Substrates:
2. Interior Substrates:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured
at an 85-degree meter.
2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
4. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured
at a 60-degree meter.
1. Paint gloss shall be defined as the sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with
the following MPI values:
2. Gloss level ratings of all painted surfaces shall be as specified herein and as noted on
Finish Schedule.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat product indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of
finish coat indicated.
D. Product List: For each product indicated. Cross-reference products to coating system and
locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in
schedules.
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved
Products List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" for products and coating systems indicated.
B. Coverage Rate: for liquid applied coatings, calculate the quantity of material needed for the
work in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. Submit calculations for
Engineer’s approval. Divide the areas to be coated and allocate the appropriate quantity of
coating material for each area.
C. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each coating system indicated to verify preliminary
selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality
standards for materials and execution.
1. Engineer will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application
of each type of coating and substrate.
2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services
have been activated.
3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 7 deg C.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Employer of other rights the Employer may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by
the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Warranty in accordance with MPI Painting Manual requirements shall warrant that all
painting work has been performed in accordance with MPI Painting Manual requirements.
Contractor and Manufacturer are jointly and severally responsible and shall repair or
replace paint coatings that fail within the specified warranty period. Contractor and
Manufacturer shall reimburse the Employer for the cost of material and labor. Failures
include, but are not limited to:
C. Warranty Period for Paint Coatings: 5 years from the date of Substantial Completion.
A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air
temperatures are between 10 and 35 deg C.
B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85
percent; at temperatures less than 3 deg C above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as
materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 3.8 L of each material
and color applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General
1. All paint materials shall have good flowing and brushing properties and shall dry or
cure free of blemishes, sags, air entrapment, etc. Refer to 3.7, Field Quality Control /
Standard of Acceptance requirements.
2. Where required, paints and coatings shall meet flame spread and smoke developed
ratings designated by local
B. Equipment:
1. Painting and Decorating Equipment: to best trade standards for type of product and
application.
2. Spray Painting Equipment: of ample capacity, suited to the type and consistency of
paint or coating being applied and kept clean and in good working order at all times.
1. Unless otherwise specified herein or pre-approved, all paint shall be ready-mixed and
pre-tinted. Re-mix all paint in containers prior to and during application to ensure
break-up of lumps, complete dispersion of settled pigment, and color and gloss
uniformity.
2. Paste, powder or catalyzed paint mixes shall be mixed in strict accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Where thinner is used, addition shall not exceed paint manufacturer's
recommendations. Do not use kerosene or any such organic solvents to thin water-
based paints.
4. If required, thin paint for spraying according in strict accordance with paint
manufacturer's instructions. If directions are not on container, obtain instructions in
writing from manufacturer and provide copy of instructions to Consultant.
D. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one
another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system.
1. A solvent based, two component, epoxy, high solids coating for unfilled, interior and
exterior block surfaces that are to be coated with a chemically resistant finish.
Resistant to water, alkalis, chemicals and solvents. Application is predominantly by
roller or brush.
2. VOC Content: Minimum E Range of E2.
1. A solvent based, two or three component, epoxy type anticorrosive primer for cleaned
new or repaired ferrous metal surfaces exposed to moderate industrial or marine
environments. Must be top-coated to attain maximum protective qualities. Minimum
recommended surface preparation is SSPC SP-6 Commercial Blast, but in some
repainting work, hand or power tool cleaning may be the maximum attainable.
Application is primarily airless and conventional spray, but brushes or rollers may be
used for small detail or touch-up work.
2. VOC Content: Minimum E Range of E2.
1. Solvent based, two component, epoxy - polyamide type, anticorrosive primer for
exterior and interior, ferrous and galvanized metal surfaces. Specified for use over
new, cleaned metals and as a spot primer or full coat over previous epoxy coatings
that have been properly prepared with hand, power tool or abrasive blasting cleaning
methods. Application methods will include using brushes, rollers, and airless and
conventional spray.
2. VOC Content: Minimum E Range of E3.
1. A two component, vinyl butyral/phosphoric acid wash primer used over cleaned
metal surfaces and zinc rich primers, as a tie coat for subsequent priming with
anticorrosive primers or finish coatings. Application is generally only by spray but
small areas may be brushed. Film thickness should not be less or greater than 7.5 - 10
microns as this can affect adhesion.
2. VOC Content: Minimum E Range of E2.
1. A two component epoxy, high solids, low gloss coating for use on interior or exterior
concrete, masonry and primed metal surfaces. Metal surfaces may be primed with
conventional epoxy primers, epoxy zinc rich primers or inorganic zinc rich primers.
For increased durability, this product may be top coated with epoxy or polyurethane
enamels.
2. VOC Content: Minimum E Range of E2.
1. A solvent based two-component epoxy, non-slip coating for interior and exterior
metal decks. Resistant to abrasion, solvents, fuel and oils. Application by trowel,
roller and spray, and may be touched up by brush.
2. VOC Content: Minimum E Range of E2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of
work.
a. Concrete: 12 percent.
b. Masonry (CMU): 12 percent.
3.2 PREPARATION
B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be
coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide
surface-applied protection before surface preparation and coating.
1. After completing coating operations, reinstall items that were removed; use workers
skilled in the trades involved.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk.
Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Clean surfaces with pressurized water. Use pressure range of 27 580 to 68 950 kPa.
2. Abrasive blast clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-Off
Blast Cleaning."
E. CMU Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture
content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's
written instructions.
G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal
fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces
that promote adhesion of subsequently applied coatings.
3.3 APPLICATION
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated.
2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment
or furniture with prime coat only.
3. Coat back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged
items to match exposed surfaces.
B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats
of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but
provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured
film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and
color breaks.
A. Employer reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as
Employer deems necessary during the period when coatings are being applied:
1. Engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating material being
used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed,
and certified in presence of Contractor.
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with specified requirements.
3. Employer may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show
materials being used do not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall
remove noncomplying coating materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat
surfaces coated with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove
rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with complying
materials, the two coatings are incompatible.
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials
from Project site.
B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings
by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished
surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by
cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Engineer, and leave in an
undamaged condition.
C. CMU Substrates:
D. Steel Substrates:
E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
C. CMU Substrates:
D. Steel Substrates:
E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes solar reflective pedestrian traffic-bearing coatings for exterior concrete roof
decks.
B. Related Requirements:
A. Product Data: For each type of product, including details for treating substrate joints and
cracks, terminations and penetrations.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Test Reports for Credit SS 7.2: For coatings required to have Solar Reflectance
Index requirement.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace traffic coating that fails in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Material Compatibility: Provide primers; base-, intermediate-, and topcoat; and accessory
materials that are compatible with one another and with substrate under conditions of service
and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
E. Energy Performance: Provide traffic coating with an initial Solar Reflectance Index of not less
than 78 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980 based on the testing of identical products
by a qualified testing agency.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed in perimeter joints between
louver frames and adjoining construction.
2. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for louvers in hollow-metal doors and
frames.
3. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for louvers in wood doors.
4. Division 15 Sections for louvers that are a part of mechanical equipment.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply
to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
B. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it to
channels in jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from opening.
A. Structural Performance: Provide louvers capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads
and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without
permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade
rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be
considered to act on vertical projection of louvers.
1. Wind Loads: Basic Wind speed 130 km/hr, Exposure C as per UBC 1997.
B. Seismic Loads:
C. Thermal Movements: Provide louvers that allow for thermal movements resulting from the
following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing
buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other Work. Show blade profiles, angles, and spacing.
1. For installed louvers and vents indicated to comply with design loads, include
structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents through one source from a single
manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.
A. Field Measurements: Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication and
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Louvers:
2.2 MATERIALS
B. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel,
unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials.
A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
coordinated installation.
B. Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and handling
limitations, fabricate units to permit field-bolted assembly with close-fitting joints in jambs
and mullions, reinforced with splice plates.
D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with
allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances,
and perimeter sealant joints.
F. Where indicated, provide subsills made of same material as louvers or extended sills for
recessed louvers.
G. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed
from view, unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections
between frame members necessary.
a. Free Area: Not less than 0.79 m2 for 1.2-m- wide by 1.2-m- high louver.
b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 4.6 m/s.
c. Air Performance: Not more than 37-Pa static pressure drop at 4.6-m/s free-area
velocity.
B. Secure screens to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of
150 mm from each corner and at 300 mm o.c.
C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated.
1. Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are
attached.
2. Finish same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached.
3. Type: Non-rewirable, U-shaped frames for permanently securing screen mesh.
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
A. Repair sheet finish by grinding and polishing irregularities, weld spatter, scratches, and
forming marks to match surrounding finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent
work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws
where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.
D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as
indicated.
E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so
no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field
to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.
G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation
progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation.
A. Clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary covering, to
remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate until
final cleaning.
B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not
harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.
C. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence
remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by
Engineer, remove damaged units and replace with new units.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Custom, fixed perforated exterior metal screen assemblies, including
structural metal supports.
B. Related Requirements:
B. LEED Submittals:
C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of exterior screen panels; details of
edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, and provisions
to shed moisture accumulating on and with components. Distinguish among shop-assembled
and field-assembled work.
D. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated
below:
1. Perforated Screen Panels: 600 mm by actual panel width. Include trim and show method
of attachment to supporting members.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of metal products certifying that products furnished
comply with requirements.
E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of typical screen; approximately one bay wide by one story high by full
thickness, attachments, and accessories.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. General Performance: Exterior screen panel assemblies shall comply with performance
requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other
defects in construction.
C. Structural Performance: Provide exterior screen panel assemblies capable of withstanding the
effects of the loads indicated on the Drawings, and stresses within limits and under conditions
indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 330.
1. Wind Loads: Basic Wind Speed: 161 km/hr (100 MPH) according to applicable code,
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Periodic Maintenance-Equipment Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Deflection Limits: Exterior screen assemblies shall withstand wind loads with horizontal
deflections no greater than 1/240 of the span.
4. Screens Acting as Guards: Provide screens acting as guards capable of withstanding the
loads specified in the “Structural Performance” of Division 05 Section “Aluminum Tube
Railings.
D. Seismic Performance: Screen assemblies shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to applicable code.
E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes.
F. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align exterior screen panel units within installed tolerance of
6 mm in 6 m, non-accumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as indicated and within 3
mm offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
B. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller
marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and
finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability
properties of alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required. Increase
alloy and temper values to suit structural performance requirements.
B. Flat Bars and Angles: ASTM B209, 5053-H32 or 6063-T5 or equivalent alloy and temper
D. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209M, Alloy 6061-T6. Tension-leveled, smooth aluminum sheet
free from alloy and mill stamps.
1. Perforated Panels: Factory-formed from single sheets; type, hole size and shape, and
pattern as selected by Engineer, and to comply with structural performance requirements.
a. Unless otherwise indicated, edge panels with U-shaped channels made from metal
sheet, of same metal as perforated metal and not less than 1.1 mm thick; welded.
Welds not visible in final construction.
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
A. Fasteners and Anchors: Stainless steel screws or bolts, Type 316, and consistent with design of
system.
B. Fasteners for Connecting Perforated Panels to Support Framing: Provide fasteners of type,
grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for securing adjoining railing sections
indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
1. Provide post-installed anchors to attach screen support framing to vertical substrates, and
as follows:
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate screen assemblies to comply with requirements indicated for design,
dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that
required to support structural loads.
B. Shop weld assemblies to greatest extent possible; minimize field assembly. Use connections
that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Conceal fasten or weld perforated panels to
adjoining supports.
1. Cope components at connections to provide close fit. Weld all around at connections.
2. Finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and
welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius
of approximately 1 mm unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.
D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
E. Fabricate connections that are exposed to weather in a manner that excludes water. Provide
weep holes where water may accumulate.
1. Brackets and Flanges: Formed metal of same type of material and finish as support
framing.
B. Control of Corrosion: Coat, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint, concealed surfaces of
aluminum that are in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and
other components. Show mounting methods, grounds, mounting heights, layout, spacing,
reinforcement, accessories, and installation details.
1. Provide message list for each sign, including large-scale details of wording, lettering,
and braille layout.
2. Wiring Diagrams: For internally illuminated signs.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign material indicated that involves color
selection.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign, include the following Samples to verify
color selected:
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm specializing in performing the work of this Section
with minimum three years documented experience and that is approved, authorized, or
licensed by the product manufacturer to install his product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's warranty. Include project names and addresses, names and addresses of
Engineers and Employers, and other information specified
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each sign type through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and
with code provisions as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Employer
of other rights Employer may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and
shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.7 COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply
for product selection:
A. General: Provide panel signs that comply with requirements indicated for materials,
thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction.
1. Produce smooth panel sign surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed
conditions within tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 mm measured diagonally.
B. Available Manufacturers:
C. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper
recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and
with not less than the strength and durability properties of 5005-H15.
D. Frames: Fabricate frames to profile indicated; comply with the following requirements for
materials and corner conditions:
F. Brackets: Fabricate brackets and fittings for bracket-mounted signs from extruded
aluminum to suit panel sign construction and mounting conditions indicated. Factory-paint
brackets in color matching background color of panel sign unless otherwise shown on
Engineer’s approved sample.
G. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with requirements indicated
on artwork supplied on electronic media by Engineer for size, style, spacing, content,
mounting height and location, material, finishes, and colors of signage.
A. Indoor LED Sign: Provide internally illuminated-sign units with the following
characteristics unless otherwise approved by Enigneer and indicated on manufacturer’s
written instructions.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Mounting Methods: Use concealed fasteners and silicone adhesive fabricated from
materials that are not corrosive to sign material and mounting surface. Where otherwise
designed, comply with manufacturer’s written instructions.
B. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts
for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed
steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as
required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
A. Powder-Coat-Applied Finish: polyester powder coating for galvanized steel and aluminum
alloy components is to be approved type to meet the requirements of AAMA 2603
consisting of powder particles of resinous material and additives to improve performance.
The coating is to be electrostatically sprayed on the object to produce a hard, durable
coating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts, and electrical power provided under other
sections of Work are sized and located to accommodate signs.
C. Examine supporting members to ensure that surfaces are at elevations indicated or required
to comply with authorities having jurisdiction and are free from dirt and other deleterious
matter.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types
described and in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free from
distortion and other defects in appearance.
B. Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using methods indicated
below. Where otherwise shown drawings, comply with manufacturer’s written instructions
and complying with Illuminated Led signs designed for Platform doors.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type
of metal locker and bench.
B. Shop Drawings: For metal lockers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For metal lockers and locker benches, in manufacturer's standard
sizes.
F. Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing, and replacing locker doors and latching
mechanisms to include in maintenance manuals.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain metal lockers, locker benches, and accessories from single
source from single manufacturer.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Where metal lockers and benches are indicated to comply with
accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers
Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act
(ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and ICC/ANSI A117.1.
A. Do not deliver metal lockers until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for their
installation.
B. Deliver master and control keys to Employer by registered mail or overnight package
service.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other
related units of work specified in other Sections to ensure that metal lockers can be
supported and installed as indicated.
1.8 WARRANTY
a. Structural failures.
b. Faulty operation of latches and other door hardware.
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Full-size units of the following metal locker hardware items equal to 10 percent of
amount installed for each type and finish installed, but no fewer than five units:
a. Locks.
b. Identification plates.
c. Hooks.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B,
suitable for exposed applications.
B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
ZF180 zinc-iron, alloy (galvannealed) coating designation.
E. Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel, slotless-type, exposed bolt heads; with self-locking
nuts or lock washers for nuts on moving parts.
F. Anchors: Material, type, and size required for secure anchorage to each substrate.
D. Body: Assembled by welding body components together. Fabricate from unperforated steel
sheet with thicknesses as follows:
E. Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 1.52-mm nominal-thickness steel sheet; lapped
and factory welded at corners; with top and bottom main frames factory welded into vertical
main frames. Form continuous, integral door strike full height on vertical main frames.
F. Doors: One piece; fabricated from 1.90-mm nominal-thickness steel sheet; formed into
channel shape with double bend at vertical edges and with right-angle single bend at
horizontal edges.
G. Hinges: Welded to door and attached to door frame with no fewer than two factory-
installed rivets per hinge that are completely concealed and tamper resistant when door is
closed; fabricated to swing 180 degrees; self-closing.
1. Knuckle Hinges: Steel, full loop, five or seven knuckles, tight pin; minimum 51 mm
high. Provide no fewer than three hinges for each door more than 1067 mm high.
H. Recessed Door Handle and Latch: Stainless-steel cup with integral door pull, recessed so
locking device does not protrude beyond face of door; pry and vandal resistant.
1. Multipoint Latching: Finger-lift latch control designed for use with built-in
combination locks or padlocks; positive automatic latching and prelocking.
a. Latch Hooks: Equip doors 1219 mm and higher with three latch hooks and
doors less than 1219 mm high with two latch hooks; fabricated from 3.04-mm
nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded to full-height door strikes; with resilient
silencer on each latch hook.
b. Latching Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard, rattle-free latching mechanism
and moving components isolated to prevent metal-to-metal contact, and
incorporating a prelocking device that allows locker door to be locked while
door is open and then closed without unlocking or damaging lock or latching
mechanism.
J. Equipment: Equip each metal locker with identification plate and the following unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Single-Tier Units: Shelf, one double-prong ceiling hook, and two single-prong wall
hooks.
2. Coat Rods: For each compartment of single-tier metal lockers.
K. Accessories:
2. Continuous Zee Base: Fabricated from, manufacturer's standard thickness, but not
less than 1.52-mm nominal-thickness steel sheet.
B. Bench Tops: Manufacturer's standard one-piece units, with rounded corners and edges.
C. Fixed Pedestals: Manufacturer's standard supports, with predrilled fastener holes for
attaching bench top and anchoring to floor, complete with fasteners and anchors, and as
follows:
1. Tubular Steel: 38-mm- diameter steel tubing threaded on both ends, with standard
pipe flange at top and bell-shaped cast-iron base; with baked-enamel or powder-coat
finish; anchored with exposed fasteners.
D. Freestanding Pedestals: Manufacturer's standard supports, with predrilled fastener holes for
attaching bench top, complete with fasteners, and as follows:
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, and without warp and with metal faces flat and free of
dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch and free of sharp edges and
burrs.
1. Form body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from one-piece steel sheet unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for complete
installation.
B. Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom, and
back; and common intermediate uprights separating compartments. Factory weld frame
members of each metal locker together to form a rigid, one-piece assembly.
C. All-Welded Construction: Factory preassemble metal lockers by welding all joints, seams,
and connections; with no bolts, nuts, screws, or rivets used in assembly of main locker
groups. Factory weld main locker groups into one-piece structures. Grind exposed welds
flush.
H. Continuous Base: Formed into channel or zee profile for stiffness, and fabricated in lengths
as long as practical to enclose base and base ends of metal lockers; finished to match
lockers.
J. Individual Sloping Tops: Fabricated in width to fit one locker frame in lieu of flat locker
tops; with integral back; finished to match lockers. Provide wedge-shaped divider panels
between lockers.
K. Recess Trim: Fabricated with minimum 64-mm face width and in lengths as long as
practical; finished to match lockers.
L. Filler Panels: Fabricated in an unequal leg angle shape; finished to match lockers. Provide
slip-joint filler angle formed to receive filler panel.
M. Boxed End Panels: Fabricated with 25-mm- wide edge dimension, and designed for
concealing fasteners and holes at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to
match lockers.
N. Finished End Panels: Designed for concealing unused penetrations and fasteners, except for
perimeter fasteners, at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match
lockers.
O. Center Dividers: Full-depth, vertical partitions between bottom and shelf; finished to match
lockers.
A. Factory finish steel surfaces and accessories except stainless-steel and chrome-plated
surfaces.
B. Provide one of the following finishes to comply with drawings and as approved by
Engineer:
A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross
scratches.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls, floors, and support bases, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims.
1. Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not
more than 910 mm o.c. Using concealed fasteners, install anchors through backup
reinforcing plates, channels, or blocking as required to prevent metal distortion.
2. Anchor single rows of metal lockers to walls near top and bottom of lockers.
3. Anchor back-to-back metal lockers to floor.
B. All-Welded Metal Lockers: Connect groups together with standard fasteners, with no
exposed fasteners on face frames.
C. Equipment and Accessories: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures
accurately together to form tight, hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates.
a. Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least two
aluminum rivets.
b. Attach plates to upper shelf of each open-front metal locker, centered, with a
least two aluminum rivets.
D. Fixed Locker Benches: Provide no fewer than two pedestals for each bench, uniformly
spaced not more than 1830 mm apart. Securely fasten tops of pedestals to undersides of
bench tops, and anchor bases to floor.
A. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without
binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.
B. Protect metal lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit use
during construction.
C. Touch up marred finishes, or replace metal lockers that cannot be restored to factory-
finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by
locker manufacturer.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
3. Fire-protection accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections
of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of
cabinet finish indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed cabinet finish required, prepared on
Samples of size indicated below and of same thickness and material indicated for the
Work. If finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets
showing the full range of variations expected.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets through one source from a
single manufacturer.
B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10,
"Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers."
C. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an
independent testing agency acceptable to Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated
and provided by Employer under separate Contract are accommodated.
B. Coordinate size of cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of hoses, hose valves, and
hose racks indicated are accommodated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Fire Extinguishers:
a. Amerex Corporation.
b. Ansul Incorporated.
c. Badger; Div. of Figgie Fire Protection Systems.
d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company.
e. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.
f. General Fire Extinguisher Corporation.
g. J.L. Industries, Inc.
h. Kidde: Walter Kidde, The Fire Extinguisher Co.
i. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
j. Modern Metal Products; Div. of Technico.
k. Moon/American, Inc.
l. Potter-Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.
2. Fire-Protection Cabinets:
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666/A 666M, Type 302 or Type 304 alloy.
A. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each cabinet and other
locations indicated.
B. The letter indicates the class of fire on which an extinguisher has been found to be
Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type FE-1: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 4.5-kg (10-lb) nominal
capacity, in enameled-steel container.
D. Automatic Fire Extinguisher- Dry chemical Type AFE-1: UL-rated 10-A B:C, 6-kg
nominal capacity, in manufacturer's standard enameled-metal container, ceiling mounted.
A. Cabinet Construction: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door,
and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and
grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Listed and labeled to meet requirements of ASTM E 814 for
fire-resistance rating of wall where it is installed.
1. Semi recessed: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of shallow depth to suit
style of trim indicated.
D. Cabinet Trim Style: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded,
and ground smooth.
1. Exposed Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping
surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge
(backbend).
1. Stainless-steel sheet.
1. Stainless-steel sheet.
1. Provide minimum 13-mm thick door frames, fabricated with tubular stiles and
rails, and hollow-metal design.
2. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
B. Break-Glass Strike: Provide manufacturer's standard metal strike, complete with chain
and mounting clip, secured to cabinet.
C. Lettered Door Handle: Provide one-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word "FIRE"
embossed into face.
D. Door Locks: Provide cylinder lock, with all cabinets keyed alike.
E. Identification: Provide lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter
style, color, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Engineer.
a. Orientation: Horizontal.
F. All the identification & lettering shall be made in Arabic and approved by the local fire
authority.
A. Colors and Textures: For other than stainless steel, color and textures to be as selected by
Engineer from manufacturer's full range for these characteristics.
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, mill scale, rust, and other
contaminants that could impair paint bond using manufacturer's standard methods.
B. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below
immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
D. Polyester Powder Coating: Approved type to meet the requirements of AAMA 603 or BS
6496 and BS 6497, consisting of powder particles of resinous material and additives to
E. Stainless Steel finish is preferred. Steel finish may be accepted pending sample approval
and finishing quality.
A. General: Remove or blend tool and die marks and stretch lines into finish. Grind and
polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured polished finish indicated, free
of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.
D. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign
matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for hose valves, hose racks, and cabinets to verify actual locations
of piping connections before cabinet installation.
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and
semirecessed cabinets are to be installed.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Prepare recesses for cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.
2. Fasten mounting brackets to structure and cabinets, square and plumb.
3. Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
A. Install cabinet with not more than 1.5-mm tolerance between pipe OD and knockout OD.
Center pipe within knockout.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that cabinets and doors are
without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Requirements:
B. Samples:
C. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products required to have recycled content.
D. Shop Drawings:
B. Welding certificates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Wind Loads: Basic Wind Speed: 161 km/hr (100 MPH) according to applicable code,
unless otherwise indicated.
Periodic Maintenance-Equipment Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
Deflection Limits: Shading assemblies shall withstand wind loads with horizontal deflections no
greater than 1/240 of the span.
D. Seismic Performance: Shading assemblies shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to applicable code.
E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes.
F. Vibration and Noise: Vibration harmonics, wind whistles, noises caused by thermal
movement, thermal movement or live load movements transmitted to or from other building
elements, loosening, weakening, or fracturing of attachments or components of system, not
permitted.
H. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align shading units within installed tolerance of 6 mm in
6 m, non-accumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as indicated and within 3 mm
offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
K. Structural-Sealant Joints:
L. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by shading
assembly without failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for preconstruction
adhesion and compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant shall occur before adhesive failure.
1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving no
sealant material behind.
2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not
separate from each substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds
sealant's internal strength.
B. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks,
roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
C. General:
A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and
finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and
durability properties of alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form
required. Increase alloy and temper values to suit structural performance requirements.
D. Plate: ASTM B 209M, Alloy 6061-T6. Tension-leveled, smooth aluminum sheet free from
alloy and mill stamps.
2.4 GLASS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
B. Structural Glazing Sealants: ASTM C 1184, chemically curing silicone formulation that is
compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated
and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer for
use in shading assemblies indicated.
A. Fasteners for Connecting Support Framing Components: Provide fasteners of type, grade,
and class required to produce connections suitable for securing adjoining framing sections
indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate shading assemblies to comply with requirements indicated for design,
dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that
required to support structural loads.
B. Shop weld assemblies to greatest extent possible; minimize field assembly. Use
connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
1. Cope components at connections to provide close fit. Weld all around at connections.
2. Finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing
and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a
radius of approximately 1 mm unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on
exposed surfaces.
D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
E. Fabricate connections that are exposed to weather in a manner that excludes water. Provide
weep holes where water may accumulate.
1. Brackets and Flanges: Formed metal of same type of material and finish as support
framing.
A. Shop Paint:
B. Control of Corrosion: Coat, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint, concealed surfaces of
aluminum that are in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for
wall-mounted telephone specialties.
2. Division 16 Sections for telephones, electrical and telephone connections for
telephone enclosures.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of telephone specialty required. Include construction details,
dimensions of components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of telephone specialty required showing fully dimensioned
plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show anchors, grounds, and reinforcement for items
attached to permanent construction. Include information not fully detailed in Product Data.
1. Include Setting Drawings, templates, and installation instructions for anchor bolts and
other anchorages.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
A. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA),
Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)" and ICC A117.1.
B. Source Limitations for Telephone Specialties: Provide each type of telephone specialty as a
complete unit produced by a single manufacturer, including necessary mounting accessories,
fittings, and fastenings.
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Engineer, except with
Engineer's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive
explanatory data to Engineer for review.
A. Do not deliver interior telephone-enclosure units until construction is ready for their
installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 MATERIALS
C. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS),
Type B, Z275 coating designation.
E. Acoustical Panels: Metal panels with not less than 10 000 perforations/sq. m and with
nonflaking or encased glass-fiber sound-absorption blankets or boards. Where double-wall
panels are indicated, provide perforated metal sheet at interior of enclosures and
unperforated metal sheet at exterior.
G. Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated), Type I
(transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear).
H. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast) or Category A-2 (continuous cast),
Finish 1 (smooth or polished), clear.
A. General: Provide in-line groupings of multiple, fully enclosed telephone booths of sizes and
configurations indicated.
1. Glazing: Glaze wall panels and doors with 6.0-mm-thick tempered glass. Glass shall
be replaceable from inside telephone booth without major disassembly.
2. Walls: as detailed, if not shown walls to comply with Shop drawings for dimensions
and locations of glazed panels.
a. Where two telephone booths abut, provide joining closure moldings with single
wall between adjacent telephone booths.
4. Doors: Equal leaf bifold, inward-folding, full-length glazed doors; 0.8-mm stainless-
steel, double-wall interlocking construction.
5. Base and Floor: Integral stainless-steel base, open on three sides, with vinyl floor on
3.0-mm steel sheet for interior telephone booths.
6. Base and Floor: Integral stainless-steel base, open on 3 sides, and 3.18-mm nominal
thickness, stainless-steel floor plate for exterior telephone booths.
7. Roof and Ceiling Assembly: Combination roof and ceiling assembly consisting of
one-piece flat weatherproof roof and hinged, translucent-plastic ceiling panel.
C. Fascia: Stainless-steel fascia panel for full group of telephone booths, covering telephone
booth lintels.
D. Signs: One illuminated sign face for each exposed direction of each telephone booth or
group of telephone booths.
E. Trim: Stainless-steel telephone booth separator trim pieces, end trim, and ceiling trim to
integrate telephone booth groups into surrounding wall surfaces.
1. Provide groupings of enclosures with common divider walls between adjacent units.
B. Enclosure Body: Circular, double wall, stainless steel, 356 mm deep and 711 mm in
diameter, forming shelf, sides, and top; with flat, stainless-steel acoustical-panel back.
1. Side Walls: One of the following to comply with design and detailed shop drawings:
A. General: Provide fully recessed telephone housings of sizes and configurations indicated.
1. Telephone Mounting: Provide for flush mounting Bell Type 2, panel-style, coin-
operated telephone, unless otherwise approved by Engineer.
2. Shelf: Full-width, stainless-steel writing shelf.
B. Pedestals: Heavy-gage steel pedestals for floor mounting with concealed mounting bolts.
Include stainless-steel covers for exposed pedestal components.
B. Mounting Frames: Provide heavy-gage steel mounting frames for floor mounting with
concealed mounting bolts. Include stainless-steel covering for anchor bolts.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices for installing units where set
in concrete or built into masonry. Coordinate delivery of inserts and anchoring devices with
other work to avoid delaying installation.
B. Fasteners: Provide suitable screws, bolts, and other fastening devices of same material as
items being fastened, except provide stainless-steel fasteners for exterior applications
exposed to weather. Use tamperproof fasteners where exposed to view.
2.9 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate units to be square, rigid, and free of dents or distortion, with edges flat.
1. Weld metal members together to form rigid, one-piece structures. Grind, fill, and
dress welds to produce smooth, flush, exposed surfaces in which welds are not visible
after final finishing is completed.
2. Ease exposed metal edges unless hemmed and ground smooth.
2.10 FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM AMP 503 for recommendations for applying and
designating finishes.
B. Stainless-Steel Finishes: Finish designations comply with the system established by the
American Iron and Steel Institute for designating finishes for stainless-steel sheet, as defined
in NAAMM AMP 503.
C. Steel Finishes:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Use only materials and
procedures recommended by manufacturer. Replace units that cannot be restored to their
factory-finished appearance.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:
B. Samples: Full size, for each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish
requirements.
1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.
C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of
each accessory required.
D. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide
products of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances
required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment,
operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.
B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent
delaying the Work.
1.6 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.8-mm minimum nominal thickness, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Brass: ASTM B 19 flat products; ASTM B 16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products
with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings.
C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.9-
mm minimum nominal thickness.
D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with Z180 hot-dip zinc coating.
E. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-
and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.
H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm
thick.
D. Waste Receptacle:
F. Liquid-Soap Dispenser:
G. Grab Bar:
a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip
area.
I. Mirror Unit:
1. Description: 32-mm OD; fabricated from nominal 1.3-mm- thick stainless steel.
2. Mounting Flanges: Stainless-steel flanges designed for exposed fasteners.
3. Finish: No. 4 (satin).
C. Shower Curtain:
E. Soap Dish:
B. Warm-Air Dryer:
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors
and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage
and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.
B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and
resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 1112 N, when tested according
to method in ASTM F 446.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Related Requirements:
B. Shop Drawings:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide floor grilles manufactured
by Bolar, www.bolar.com, or comparable products from other acceptable manufacturer.
A. Design floor grilles to withstand the minimum following loads without deformation:
C. Grille Direction: Bars perpendicular to direction of user travel, to greatest extent possible.
D. Installed Grille: Grille wearing surface flush with adjacent floor finish; bars and frames square,
rigid with tight joints at corners; assembly free of deformities and rattle.
E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC A117.1, and applicable
code.
F. Sustainable Design:
1. Provide stainless steel materials with recycled content complying with Credit MR 4.
G. Grille Locations: Type 1, general application; Type 2, for tactile warning locations, and where
indicated.
B. Floor Grilles:
1. Tread Rails, Floor Grille Type 1: 4.7 mm wide by 50 mm deep ‘T’ profile, 3 mm thickness.
2. Tread Rails, Floor Grille Type 2: 9.5 mm wide by 25 mm deep ‘T’ profile, 3 mm thickness.
3. Maximum Span: 610 mm.
4. Maximum Individual Panel Size: 1200 by 1200 mm.
5. Finish: No. 4 finish.
6. Frames: Manufacturer's standard frames, including perimeter frames, of size and style
for grille type, for permanent recessed installation in floor, complete with installation
anchorages and accessories; same material and finish as grilles. Provide concealed
frameless supports except at perimeter frame.
C. Frames: Manufacturer's standard frames, including perimeter frames, of size and style for grille
type, for permanent recessed installation in floor, complete with installation anchorages and
accessories; same material and finish as grilles. Provide concealed frameless supports except at
perimeter frame.
D. Support System: Manufacturer's special deep-pit stainless steel frame and support system with
intermediate support beams, sized and spaced as recommended by manufacturer for indicated
spans and equipped with vinyl support cushions.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
B. Stainless-Steel Angles: ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 479/A 479M, corrosion resistant, Type 304.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate floor grilles to greatest extent possible in sizes as indicated. Unless otherwise
indicated, provide each grille as a single unit; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in grilles
are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes.
B. Fabricate frame members in single lengths or, where frame dimensions exceed maximum
available lengths, provide minimum number of pieces possible, with hairline joints equally
spaced and pieces spliced together by straight connecting pins.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 08 Section “Sloped-Glazed and Metal Roof Panel Assemblies”, for assemblies
supporting photovoltaic collectors.
2. Division 16 Section "Photovoltaic System," for electrical design requirements, wiring,
conduit and equipment for photovoltaic system.
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include proposed level of scratch resistance to panels
and test method used.
B. Shop Drawings:
C. Samples: One full size sample of each type and size of panel including associated supports and
visible electrical materials forming part of module.
B. Test and Evaluation Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified
requirements.
C. Mockup: Construct mockup to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Coordinate with and include mock-up requirements of related sections.
2. Construct to sizes and at locations as directed by Engineer.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer and fabricator jointly agree to repair or replace components of
photovoltaic collector assemblies that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials
or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
c. Deterioration of materials beyond normal weathering.
d. Water penetration.
2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
D. Modules:
1. Modules shall not have negative power tolerance.
2. Cell Efficiency: Minimum 18 percent.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Collector Mounting Supports: Stainless steel castings with stainless steel anchors designed for
anchoring to sloped glazed and metal roof panel assemblies specified in Division 08 Section
“Sloped Glazed And Metal Roof Panel Assemblies.”
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Architectural requirements for photovoltaic (solar electric modules) collectors
for roof of Parking Structure of Park and Ride.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Product Data: List of proposed materials, manufacturers and suppliers. Include technical
data for each principal product, material and finish.
2. Method Statement: For fabrication, handling, installation and protection.
3. Maintenance Program: Outline maintenance program identifying service life of products
and maintenance requirements.
4. Quality Control: List and details of key personnel to be assigned to the project and a list
of previous projects completed of similar in scope and type to the work indicated.
5. Proof of Contractor’s Professional Liability Insurance for Design indemnity certificate.
6. Items of non-compliance with the specification.
7. Samples of proposed warranties.
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include proposed level of scratch resistance to panels
and test method used.
B. Shop Drawings:
C. Samples: One full size sample of each type and size of panel including associated supports and
visible electrical materials forming part of module.
B. Test and Evaluation Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified
requirements.
D. Maintenance Data: For photovoltaic panel assemblies including life cycle maintenance
procedures, to include in maintenance manuals.
C. Mockup: Construct mockup to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer and fabricator jointly agree to repair or replace components of
photovoltaic collector assemblies that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials
or workmanship within specified warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
a. Glass breakage.
D. Modules:
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
a. Color: Black.
b. Shape: Square.
c. Equip cells with dual interconnect ribbons soldered using a continuous flow
process fully spanning both top and bottom of each cell to ensure cell
interconnectivity, including when glass is shattered.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Collector Mounting Supports: Aluminum extrusions and plate designed and sized to comply
with performance requirements, and as specified in Division 05 Section “Metal Fabrications.”
B. Provide stainless steel fasteners, bolts and nuts, and post-installer anchors, exterior grade, as
specified in Division 05 Section “Metal Fabrications.”
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Modular contactors mounted in the lighting panelboards to control the public area
lighting. Mechanically latch contactor for normal circuits.
2. Control cables connected the lighting panelboards to BMS system.
C. Connection to BMS system, including interface elements such as software protocol, relays,
transducers, etc., as detailed in Division 15 Sections and BMS schedules, and shown on
Drawings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include dimensions and data on features, components, and ratings for
lighting controls.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail assemblies of standard components, custom assembled for specific
application on Project. Indicate dimensions, weights, arrangement of components, and
clearance and access requirements.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail specific systems tailored to this Project and differentiate
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects/engineers and owners, and
other information specified or required by Engineer.
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
F. Maintenance Data: For lighting control equipment and system components to include in
maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include software-operating manuals.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain low-voltage lighting control system components from a single
manufacturer.
1.5 COORDINATION
B. Coordinate lighting controls specified in this Section with work specified in other Sections,
including the following:
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver
extra materials to Employer.
1. Modular Single-Pole Relays: 1 for every 10 installed. Furnish at least one of each
type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manual switch operation energizes and de-energizes one or more groups of lighting fixtures
or other loads by closing and opening one or more relays in the supply circuits to the fixture
groups. Switches are hard-wired to the relays they operate.
B. A control signal from a manual switch, an internal timing and control unit, or an external
sensor or other control signal source is routed to the system control module. This module
processes signal according to its programming and routes an "open" or "close" command to
one or more relays in the power-supply circuits to groups of lighting fixtures or other loads.
B. Low-Voltage Control Cable: Multiple conductor, color-coded, 0.6 mm2 copper, minimum
as specified in Section 16120..
1. Sheath: PVC, except in plenum-type spaces use sheath listed for plenums.
2. Ordinary Switch Circuits: Three conductors, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Switch Circuits with Pilot Lights or Locator Feature: Five conductors, unless
otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment level and plumb and according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Mounting heights indicated are to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit
for wall-mounting items.
A. Install wiring between control devices as specified in Division 16 Section "Conductors and
Cables" for low-voltage connections and Division 16 Section "Communication and Data-
Processing Equipment" for digital circuits.
B. Wiring Method: Install all wiring in raceway as specified in Division 16 Section "Raceways
and Boxes."
D. Ground equipment.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 16 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods."
B. Label each system control module with a unique designation. Make designations on
elevated components readable from floor.
A. Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least seven days'
advance notice.
B. Electrical Tests: Use particular caution when testing devices containing solid-state
components. Perform the following according to manufacturer's written instructions:
C. Correct deficiencies, make necessary adjustments, and retest. Verify that specified
requirements are met.
D. Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and
workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Record repairs and adjustments.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Cleaning: Clean equipment and devices internally and externally using methods and
materials recommended by manufacturers, and repair damaged finishes.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fire alarm systems with manual stations, detectors, signal equipment,
controls, and devices.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
B. The system shall provide automatic detection of fire in all areas including but not limited to
platform, offices, retail, utility, critical rooms and areas above false ceiling and under raised
floor via automatic fire detection devices as well as manual means.
D. The type of Fire Alarm sensors shall be selected based on the protected space:
1. Public spaces and store rooms shall be provided with spot type smoke sensors.
2. Telecom, technical, electrical spaces shall be provided with spot type smoke sensors.
3. Mechanical rooms shall be provided with spot type multi-criteria sensors.
4. High ceiling spaces shall be provided with beam detector or air sampling smoke detector
where appropriate.
5. Areas to be protected by active fire suppression systems (e.g. FM200 System) shall be fully
interfaced to the fire alarm system using five monitor modules for 1st stage alarm, 2nd stage
alarm, trouble, gas release and abort stage.
E. The Fire Alarm System shall be interfaced with other systems including but not limited to
the following:
G. The Public Address system shall be used to broadcast the Fire Alarm messages which shall
take precedence and override normal direct and pre-recorded announcements for the Public
Address System as described in Volume 2.3 WPS 1.11 – Public Address.
H. Emergency Communication System shall be used in case of fire as described in Volume 2.3
WPS 1.10 – Telephone and Intercom System.
I. Fire Command Center shall be provided for underground stations as per NFPA 130.
J. Fiber Optic Cables shall be provided to connect the stations local Fire Alarm Control Panels and the
Operating Control Center.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1. Detectors characteristic curves of coverage area against ceiling height and air
movement speed.
2. Personal computer including dual processor type and speed, auxiliaries, software-
package, printer and the like.
B. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plans and elevation views of components. Show
access and workspace requirements. Include at least the following:
1. Detailed floor layouts showing all outlets with label reference and exact routing of
cabling and wireways.
2. Detailed system schematic diagram. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed
and field-installed wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all
terminals and interconnections identified.
3. Detailed equipment layout in rooms and closets including elevations and typical
installation details.
4. Battery: Sizing calculations.
5. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming and labeling.
6. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including
method of operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of
FIRE ALARM 13851 - Page 2 of 20
S08035-SPC-EL-01 REV 1
RIYADH METRO PROJECT
STATIONS AND BUILDINGS CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
operations for manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs.
Manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.
7. Cause and Effect Matrix: Show in a matrix format, the effect of every initiating
device on the MFACP/ FACP, notification devices and all system peripherals.
C. Coordination Drawings: Plans, sections, and elevations drawn to scale and coordinating
installation of smoke detectors in ducts and access to them. Show the following near each
duct smoke provision of detector installation:
D. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include but not limited to the
following:
1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.
2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with
data files.
3. Device address list.
4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects/engineers and owners, and
other information specified or required by Engineer.
I. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
J. Maintenance Data: For fire alarm systems to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.
L. Sound Levels: Measure and submit audible sound levels. Verify that 15 decibels (dB)
above ambient noise levels or 5 dB above the maximum sound level that occurs at the
location for 60 seconds or more, but not greater than 120 dB, are achieved.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain fire alarm system components through one source from a single
manufacturer.
D. Compliance with Local Requirements: Comply with applicable building code, local
ordinances and regulations, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match product installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount
installed, but not less than one unit.
2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount installed, but not less
than one unit.
3. Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors, and Flame Detectors: Quantity equal to 2 percent
of amount of each type installed, but not less than one unit of each type.
4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 1 percent of amount of each type installed, but not
less than one unit of each type.
5. Printer Ribbons: Six spares.
6. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamper-proofed components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
3. Simplex (USA).
4. Gamewell-FCI (USA).
5. Siemens (GERMANY).
6. GE Security–EST General Electric
B. System Supervision: Automatically detect and report open circuit, short circuit, and ground
fault of wiring for initiating device, signaling line, and notification-appliance circuits.
C. Priority of Signals: Automatic alarm response functions resulting from an alarm signal from
one zone or device are not altered by subsequent alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals. An
alarm signal is the highest priority. Supervisory and trouble signals have second- and third-
level priority. Higher-priority signals take precedence over signals of lower priority, even
when the lower-priority condition occurs first. Annunciate and display all alarm,
supervisory, and trouble signals regardless of priority or order received.
D. Noninterference: A signal on one zone shall not prevent the receipt of signals from other
zones.
E. System Reset: All zones are manually re-settable from the MFACP/ FACP after initiating
devices are restored to normal.
G. System Alarm Capability during Circuit Fault Conditions: System wiring and circuit
arrangement prevent alarm capability reduction when an open circuit, ground or wire-to-
wire short occurs, or an open circuit and a ground occur at the same time in an initiating
device circuit, signal line circuit, or notification-appliance circuit.
H. Loss of primary power at the FACP initiates a trouble signal at the MFACP and FACP. The
MFAC indicates when the fire alarm system is operating on the secondary power supply.
a. Local alarm in the control unit for the period of a programmable time T1.
b. During this delay time (T1), an internal (staff) alarm (stage 1) only is to be
given. If the alarm is not acknowledged before timer T1 runs out, this is to
result in notification-appliance operation (stage 2) as detailed in subparagraph
2.2I.2 below.
2. Notification-appliance operation.
a. Alarm signal in floor of incidence floors above and below; alert signal in
remaining parts of building.
b. Alarm throughout the building.
c. Activation of visual strobes.
J. Alarm Silencing, System Reset and Indication: Controlled by switches in the MFACP/
FACP.
1. Notification-appliance operation.
2. Flashing of the device location indicating light for the device that has operated.
L. Operating a heat detector in the elevator shaft shuts down elevator power by operating a
shunt trip in a circuit breaker feeding the elevator.
M. Water-flow alarm for connection to sprinkler in an elevator shaft and elevator machine room
shuts down elevators associated with the location without time delay.
1. A field-mounted relay actuated by the fire detector or the MFACP/ FACP closes the
shunt trip circuit and operates building notification appliances.
N. Smoke detection for zones or detectors with alarm verification initiates the following:
FIRE ALARM 13851 - Page 6 of 20
S08035-SPC-EL-01 REV 1
RIYADH METRO PROJECT
STATIONS AND BUILDINGS CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
1. A supervisory, audible, and visible "fire-pump power failure" signal indication at the
MFACP/ FACP.
2. Recording of the event by the system printer.
3. Transmission of trouble signal to remote alarm receiving station.
1. A "trouble" signal indication at the MFACP/ FACP for the device or zone involved.
2. Recording of the event by the system printer.
3. Transmission of trouble signal to remote alarm receiving station.
T. Printout of Events: On receipt of the signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events.
Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble),
and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed
indications. Also print system-reset event, including the same information for device,
location, date, and time. Commands initiate the printout of a list of existing alarm,
supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events.
A. Description: Fabricated of metal or plastic, and finished in red with molded, raised-letter
operating instructions of contrasting color.
Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, breaking-glass type;
with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status
(normal, alarm, or trouble) to MFACP/FACP
1. Station Reset: Key or wrench operated; double-pole, double-throw; switch rated for
the voltage and current at which it operates.
2. Indoors Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure, hinged at the
top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an
integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false alarm operation.
3. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure, hinged at
the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.
4. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate manual-station status
(normal, alarm, or trouble) to the MFACP/ FACP.
A. Description: Equip for mounting as indicated and have screw terminals for system
connections.
B. Horns: 24-V dc with voltage variations between 18 V and 32 V and provision for housing
the operating mechanism behind a grille.
1. .
2. Horn Type: For indoor applications, electronic type, with volume control
incorporated inside the unit, mounted on flush box as shown on the Drawings, and
giving 95 dB(A) sound level at 3 m in all directions, with a sound frequency in the
range 500 Hz to 1000 Hz. The horn is to operate in both continuous and alternating
tones.
3. Horn with strobe light: same specifications as the horn type but with strobe light of
150 cd.
A. Description: LED indicating light near each smoke detector that may not be readily visible,
and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch. Light is connected to flash
when the associated device is in an alarm or trouble mode. Lamp is flush mounted in a
single gang wall plate. A red, laminated, phenolic-resin identification plate at the indicating
light identifies, in engraved white letters, device initiating the signal and room where the
smoke detector or valve is located. For water-flow switches, the identification plate also
designates protected spaces downstream from the water-flow switch.
A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete
with matching doorplate.
2.9 MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL/ FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL
A. Cabinet: Lockable steel enclosure. Arrange interior components so operations required for
testing or for normal maintenance of the system are performed from the front of the
enclosure. If more than one unit is required to form a complete control panel, fabricate with
matching modular unit enclosure to accommodate components and to allow ample gutter
space for field wiring and interconnecting panels.
B. Alarm and Supervisory Systems: Separate and independent in the MFACP/ FACP. Alarm-
initiating zone boards consist of plug-in cards. Construction requiring removal of field
wiring for module replacement is unacceptable.
C. Control Modules: Include types and capacities required to perform all functions of fire
alarm systems.
D. Indications: Local, visible, and audible signals announce alarm, supervisory, and trouble
conditions. Each type of audible alarm has a different sound.
E. Indicating Lights and System Controls: Individual LED devices identify zones transmitting
signals. Zone lights distinguish between alarm and trouble signals, and indicate the type of
device originating the signal. Manual switches and push-to-test buttons do not require a key
to operate. Controls include the following:
F. Resetting Controls: Prevent the resetting of alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals while the
alarm or trouble condition still exists.
1. .
G. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human
operator at the MFAC and addressable system components, including annunciation,
supervision, and control.
H. Instructions: Printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover
in a stainless steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate
response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system
under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.
I. The Fire Alarm System shall be interfaced with other systems including but not limited to
the following:
1. Security controlled doors, gates and pedestrian controls.
2. Metro SCADA/ Signaling system.
3. Building management system.
4. Fire extinguishing system.
5. Smoke extraction/ ventilation system.
6. Elevator/ Escalator controllers.
7. Electromagnetic door locks / holders.
B. Personal Computer: Provide a state of the art personal computer with 20 inch color LCD,
keyboard, mouse, CD drive, printer and all necessary interface / network cards and
auxiliaries. The central control unit is to be equipped with dual microprocessor in "hot -
standby" mode in such a way that failure of either one, the other one will automatically take
over all functions of the central control unit. The failure of any CPU is to be associated with
an audible alert signal and distinctive visual signal "PROCESSOR FAILURE" presented at
the system main console terminal. Central processor architecture is to have the following
serial input-output interfaces:
C. Software Configuration: The manufacturer shall be responsible for the provision of all
system software packages, which make up the complete operational system. At least the
following standard software modules are to be incorporated:
1. Operating program.
2. System database (process image).
3. Network monitoring and control.
4. Display priority control.
5. Command priority control.
6. Output message generator.
7. Peripheral drivers.
8. Text/graphic editors.
9. Help facility.
10. Service assistance.
11. Diagnosis.
12. Auxiliary programs.
E. Alarms: The system console is to automatically display and log alarm and change-of-status
messages received from FACP’s. The system console is to provide optimal conditions for
successful intervention by means of rapid and simple processing and displaying all
necessary data in plain text and graphics. The alarm message information is to contain the
following information:
F. Programming: The NRT is to use dialog box technology to address, interrogate, control,
and/or modify intelligent points on each fire alarm node. This is to include, and not be
limited to:
1. Activating outputs.
2. Enabling or disabling points.
3. Adding or removing intelligent points.
4. Viewing intelligent detector sensitivity levels and modifying point information
(custom messages, detector type, verification, day/night selection etc.).
H. History File: The NRT is to be capable of storing network events in a history file. Events
are to be stored on hard disk and be capable of back-up storage on a DVD/ CD. The history
buffer is to have three modes of display. The first mode is to allow the operator to view
events in a chronological order. A filter is to be available for displaying chronological
events by year, month, date, time, alarms only, troubles only, both alarms and troubles,
security breaches, supervisory alarms, and points disabled. The second is to allow the
operator to view events in a number of easy-to-read graph styles, such as, bar graph, point
graph, line graph, or spline graph. Graphing is to include the ability to select alarms,
troubles or alarms and troubles, then the ability to display on a by year, month, or day basis.
The third mode is to allow the operator to display stored (hard or DVD/ CD) events in a
variety of useful formats. Selections are to be available for displaying events by year,
month, date, time, alarms only, troubles only, and both alarms and troubles, security
breaches, supervisory alarms, and points disabled. The ability to print NRT history files is
also to be available.
I. Graphical Information: The NRT is to include the ability to display system information in a
graphical (floor plan and elevations) form. A pull-down menu is to be included allowing
selection of graphical views of the facility, or subset thereof. Each view, created in a CAD
environment, is to include icons created for intelligent devices. These devices are to change
in color when an event occurs. The device is to annunciate in RED when in alarm, BLUE
for security activation, and YELLOW for trouble or to confirm acknowledgement. Each
device in the graphic display is to support a text memo file where pertinent information
about the location of the device may be stored. By selecting a device in the graphic
presentation, the operator of the NRT is to have the ability to log onto the corresponding
node and interrogate the associated intelligent point. Graphics are to be stored in a resident
RAM memory and backed-up by a DVD/ CD memory with the possibility to compose,
modify or edit the graphic schematics, text, symbols and zone allocations on-site without
jeopardizing the fire alarm system operation. Provide license and tools to software to revise
/ add equipment, floors or areas. Selection and activation of a certain graphic display is to
be either automatic (event driven) or by manual request via the terminal. Graphics
presentation shall have a minimum of four hierarchical levels:
1. Area overview.
2. Building overview.
3. Floor overview.
4. Room overview.
K. Help: The NRT is to include help screens, available to aid the user without leaving the
selected application screen.
L. Passwords: The NRT is to have a flexible way of assigning operator passwords. There is to
be an unlimited number of possible operators, each with specific levels of control. Each
operator is to have his/her own password. Operator password and control selection is to be
available to a high level "administrator" who is to have complete control over levels of
control. If no action has taken place on the NRT after 10 minutes, the current operator is to
be logged out and require a new log-in.
M. Printer Port: The NRT shall include an industry-standard EIA-232 port for a printer.
A. General: Components include valve-regulated, recombinant lead acid battery; charger; and
an automatic transfer switch.
C. Integral Automatic Transfer Switch: Transfers the load to the battery without loss of signals
or status indications when normal power fails.
A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module listed for use in providing a multiplex system
address for listed fire and sprinkler alarm-initiating devices with normally open contacts.
B. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to the elevator controller to initiate
elevator recall or to a circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown.
A. Functional Performance: Unit receives an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from the
MFAC panel, and automatically captures one or two telephone lines and dials a preset
number for a remote central station. When contact is made with the central station(s), the
signal is transmitted. The unit supervises up to two telephone lines. Where supervising two
lines, if service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, the unit initiates a
local trouble signal and transmits a signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote
alarm receiving station over the remaining line. When telephone service is restored, unit
automatically reports that event to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone
lines, the local trouble signal is initiated.
A. Description: Listed and labeled as an integral part of the fire alarm system.
B. The system is to have a strip printer capable of being mounted directly in the main MFAC
enclosure. Alarms are to be printed in easy-to-read RED, other messages, such as a trouble,
are to be printed in BLACK. This printer is to receive power from the system power supply
and shall operate via battery back up if AC mains are lost.
C. The printer is to provide hard-copy printout of all changes in status of the system and shall
time-stamp such printouts with the current time-of-day and date. The printer is to be
standard carriage with 80-characters per line and is to use standard pin-feed paper. The
printer is to be enclosed in a separate cabinet suitable for placement on a desktop or table.
The printer shall communicate with the control panel using an interface complying with
Electrical Industries Association (EIA) standard EIA-232D.
2.15 WIRE
PART 3 - Wires and Cables: Comply with BS 5839 Part 1, section 17.3, and certified to have passed
IEC 331 and 332 flame resistance and fire retardant tests. Cables are to be MICC or silicone rubber
insulated, with overall PVC sheath bonding to coated aluminum foil (FP 200 by Pirelli Cables) or
other equal and approved.EXECUTION
A. Connect the MFACP/ FACP with a disconnect switch with lockable handle or cover.
C. Water-Flow Detectors and Valve Supervisory Switches: Connect for each sprinkler valve
station required to be supervised.
D. Ceiling-Mounted Smoke Detectors: Not less than 100 mm from a side wall to the near
edge. For exposed solid-joist construction, mount detectors on the bottom of joists. On
smooth ceilings, install not more than 9 m apart in any direction.
E. Wall-Mounted Smoke Detectors: At least 100 mm, but not more than 300 mm, below the
ceiling.
F. Smoke Detectors near Air Registers: Install no closer than 1520 mm.
G. The selection and placement of smoke detectors shall take into account both the
performance characteristics of the detector and the areas into which the detectors are to be
installed to prevent nuisance alarms or improper operation after installation. Smoke
detectors shall not be installed in areas where air velocity is greater than 1.5m/sec, and shall
not be located in a direct airflow. If siting of detectors in such areas is unavoidable, use
detectors specifically designed for use in such conditions.
1. Verify that each unit is listed for the complete range of air velocity, temperature, and
humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.
2. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of the duct.
I. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with
sprinkler rating and location.
J. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 150 mm below the ceiling. Install
bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism
concealed behind a grille. Combine audible and visible alarms at the same location into a
single unit.
K. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.
L. MFAC: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 1800 mm above the finished
floor.
A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway according to Division 16 Section "Raceways and
Boxes." Conceal raceway except in unfinished spaces and as indicated.
C. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull and outlet boxes, cabinets, or
equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.
D. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building
power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color-code for
supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-
initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm
system junction boxes and covers red.
E. Risers: Install at least two vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system. Separate
risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum one-hour-rated wall, so the loss of
one riser does not prevent the receipt or transmission of signal from other floors or zones.
F. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 25-mm conduit between the MFAC and the
transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring as
needed to suit monitoring function.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
3.4 GROUNDING
A. Ground cable shields and equipment according to system manufacturer's written instructions
to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize, to the greatest extent possible, ground loops,
common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.
B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment rack or cabinet. Isolate from power
system and equipment grounding.
C. Install grounding electrodes of type, size, location, and quantity as indicated. Comply with
installation requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
D. Ground equipment and conductor and cable shields. For audio circuits, minimize, to the
greatest extent possible, ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and
other impairments. Provide 5-ohm ground at main equipment location. Measure, record,
and report ground resistance.
B. Pre-testing: After installation, align, adjust, and balance the system and perform complete
pre-testing. Determine, through pre-testing, the compliance of the system with requirements
of Drawings and Specifications. Correct deficiencies observed in pre-testing. Replace
malfunctioning or damaged items with new ones, and retest until satisfactory performance
and conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for systematic recording of acceptance test
results.
D. Final Test Notice: Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice in writing when the system is
ready for final acceptance testing.
1. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground.
2. Test all conductors for short circuits using an insulation-testing device.
3. With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of the circuit and measure the circuit
resistance with an ohmmeter. Record the circuit resistance of each circuit on record
(as-built) drawings.
4. Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer's
operation and maintenance manual.
5. Test initiating and indicating circuits for proper signal transmission under open circuit
conditions. One connection each should be opened at not less than 10 percent of
initiating and indicating devices. Observe proper signal transmission according to
class of wiring used.
6. Test each initiating and indicating device for alarm operation and proper response at
the control unit. Test smoke detectors with actual products of combustion.
7. Test the system for all specified functions according to the approved operation and
maintenance manual. Systematically initiate specified functional performance items
at each station, including making all possible alarm and monitoring initiations and
using all communications options. For each item, observe related performance at all
devices required to be affected by the item under all system sequences. Observe
indicating lights, displays and signal tones. Observe all voice audio for routing,
clarity, quality, freedom from noise and distortion, and proper volume level.
8. Test Both Primary and Secondary Power: Verify by test that the secondary power
system is capable of operating the system for the period and in the manner specified.
F. Re-testing: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by
such deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total system meets specified
requirements and complies with applicable standards.
G. Report of Tests and Inspections: Provide a written record of inspections, tests, and detailed
test results in the form of a test log. Submit log on the satisfactory completion of tests.
H. Tag all equipment, stations, and other components at which tests have been satisfactorily
completed.
A. Cleaning: Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and
marred finish to match original finish. Clean unit internally using methods and materials
recommended by manufacturer.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fire-suppression piping and equipment for the following building systems:
1. Automatic wet-type, Class III, fire-suppression standpipes and branches for sprinklers.
2. Wet-pipe, fire-suppression sprinklers, including piping, valves, specialties, and automatic
sprinklers.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
B. Hose Connection: Valve with threaded outlet matching fire hose coupling thread for attaching fire
hose.
C. Hose Station: Hose connection, fire hose rack, and fire hose.
A. Verify the design of standpipes and sprinklers for compliance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 14, and
obtain approval from Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Verify the design of standpipes and obtain approval from Engineer and authorities having
jurisdiction. Include minimum residual pressures at hydraulically remote outlets according to the
following:
C. Verify design of sprinkler piping according to the following and obtain approval from Engineer
and authorities having jurisdiction:
1. Include 10 percent margin of safety for available water flow and pressure.
2. Include losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.
3. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications: As per NFPA 13 requirements.
4. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design: As follows:
a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 6.3 mL/s over 139-sq. m (0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft.)
area.
b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 9.5 mL/s over 139-sq. m (0.15 gpm over
1500- sq. ft.) area.
c. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 12.6 mL/s over 139-sq. m (0.20 gpm over
1500- sq. ft.) area.
a. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 9.5 mL/s (0.15 gpm) over entire area.
b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 12.6 mL/s (0.20 gpm) over entire area.
D. Components and Installation: Capable of producing piping systems with 1200-kPa (175-psig)
minimum working-pressure rating, unless otherwise indicated.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1. Pipe and fitting materials and methods of joining for standpipe piping.
2. Pipe and fitting materials and methods of joining for sprinkler piping.
3. Pipe hangers and supports.
4. Piping seismic restraints.
5. Valves, including specialty valves, accessories, and devices.
6. Alarm devices. Include electrical data.
7. Fire department connections. Include type; number, size, and arrangement of inlets; caps
and chains; size and direction of outlet; escutcheon and marking; and finish.
8. Hose connections. Include size, type, and finish.
9. Hose stations. Include size, type, and finish of hose connections; type and length of fire
hoses; finish of fire hose couplings; type, material, and finish of nozzles; and finish of rack.
10. Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow characteristics, mounting,
finish, and other pertinent data.
B. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have
been approved by Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction. Include hydraulic calculations.
C. Field Test Reports and Certificates: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and "Commissioning"
Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Include "Contractor's
Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's Material and Test
Certificate for Underground Piping."
D. Maintenance Data: For each type of standpipe and sprinkler specialty to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has designed, installed and obtained
approvals for fire-suppression piping similar to that indicated for this Project.
B. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a
qualified professional engineer. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.
suppression piping that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and
extent.
D. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose equipment, specialties, and accessories are listed by
product name and manufacturer in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" and FM's "Fire
Protection Approval Guide" and that comply with other requirements indicated.
E. Standpipe and Sprinkler Components: Listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking by a testing
agency acceptable to Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to Engineer.
G. NFPA Standards: Equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing complying with the
following:
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounting steel cabinet and hinged cover, with space for
a minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include the number of sprinklers
required by NFPA 13 and wrench for sprinklers. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers
and wrench for each type of sprinkler on Project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
a. Gamewell Co.
b. Grinnell Corp.
c. Pittway Corp.; System Sensor Div.
d. Potter Electric Signal Co.
f. Viking Corp.
g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
5. Sprinklers:
b. Peterson Products
c. Grinell
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
2.3 PIPES
A. Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, ASTM A 135, or ASTM A 795; Schedule 40 in DN150
(NPS 6) and smaller, and Schedule 30 in DN200 (NPS 8) and larger.
D. Steel, Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed and FM-approved, ASTM A 47M (ASTM A 47),
malleable iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron; with dimensions matching steel pipe and ends
factory grooved according to AWWA C606.
A. Steel, Keyed Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include
ASTM A 536, ductile-iron housing, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts and nuts. Include listing for
dry-pipe service for couplings for dry piping.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and check valves not
required to be UL listed and FM approved.
A. General: UL listed and FM approved, with minimum 1200-kPa (175-psig) nonshock working-
pressure rating. Valves for grooved-end piping may be furnished with grooved ends instead of
type of ends specified.
B. Gate Valves, DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: UL 262; cast-bronze, threaded ends; solid wedge;
OS&Y; and rising stem.
C. Indicating Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Smaller: UL 1091; butterfly or ball-type, bronze body
with threaded ends; and integral indicating device.
G. Swing Check Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: UL 312, cast-iron body and bolted cap, with
bronze disc or cast-iron disc with bronze-disc ring and flanged ends.
H. Split-Clapper Check Valves, DN100 (NPS 4) and Larger: UL 312, cast-iron body with rubber
seal, bronze-alloy discs, and stainless-steel spring and hinge pin.
A. Alarm Check Valves: UL 193, 1200-kPa (175-psig) working pressure; designed for horizontal or
vertical installation, with cast-iron flanged inlet and outlet, bronze grooved seat with O-ring seals,
and single-hinge pin and latch design. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electric sprinkler alarm
switch, pressure gages, retarding chamber, and fill-line attachment with strainer.
C. Ball Drip Valves: UL 1726, automatic drain valve, DN20 (NPS 3/4), ball check device with
threaded ends.
A. Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, DN15 (NPS 1/2) pipe nipple, and
bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with
operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental opening.
2.10 SPRINKLERS
B. Sprinkler Types and Categories: Nominal 12.7-mm (1/2-inch) orifice for "Ordinary" temperature
classification rating, unless otherwise indicated or required by application.
a. Orifice: 12.7 mm (1/2 inch), with discharge coefficient K between 5.3 and 5.8.
b. Orifice: 13.5 mm (17/32 inch), with discharge coefficient K between 7.4 and 8.2.
F. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting
applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with
sprinklers.
G. Sprinkler Guards: Wire-cage type, including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
A. Specialty Fittings: UL listed and FM approved; made of steel, ductile iron, or other materials
compatible with piping.
B. Mechanical-T Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing with pressure-responsive gasket, bolts, and
threaded or locking-lug outlet.
D. Drop-Nipple Fittings: UL 1474, with threaded inlet, threaded outlet, and seals; adjustable.
E. Sprinkler, Drain and Alarm Test Fittings: UL-listed, cast- or ductile-iron body; with threaded inlet
and outlet, test valve, and orifice and sight glass.
F. Sprinkler, Branch-Line Test Fittings: UL-listed, brass body; with threaded inlet and capped drain
outlet and threaded outlet for sprinkler.
G. Sprinkler, Inspector's Test Fittings: UL-listed, cast- or ductile-iron housing; with threaded inlet
and drain outlet and sight glass.
A. Description: UL 668, 2070-kPa (300-psig) minimum pressure rating, brass, hose valve for
connecting fire hose. Include 90-degree angle pattern design; female NPS inlet and male hose
outlet; and lugged cap, gasket, and chain. Include DN40 or DN65 (NPS 1-1/2 or NPS 2-1/2) as
indicated, and hose valve threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department
threads.
A. Provide recessed and surface-mounted cabinets where indicated. (Class III with fire department
valve) Cabinets shall be prime grade, stainless-steel 316. On each jamb, provide at least two
anchors or reinforcements spaced approximately 610 mm apart for building in or attaching the
cabinets to adjacent construction. Doors shall be flush hollow metal type with full glazed opening.
Provide door with continuous concealed hinge, latch and pull. Hinge door for 180 degree opening.
Glass shall conform to ASTM C 1036 and shall be tempered, Quality q 8 (glazing quality),
diamond or square wire mesh, 6.35 mm thick. Fabricate cabinet with sufficient interior space to
store one fire extinguisher.
B. Description: UL 47, semiautomatic hose stations. Include brass chrome plated, rack nipple; hose
rack; and the following features:
1. Valves: UL 668, 2070 kPa minimum pressure rating, 90- degree angle pattern hose valve
with female NPS inlet and outlet, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Threads and Gaskets: NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department threads.
3. Flow-Restricting Devices: DN40 brass, adjustable for DN40 fire hose inlet.
4. Fire Hose: NFPA 1961 and UL 219, lined fire hose with couplings, gaskets, and nozzle.
Include the following fire hose materials:
5. Nozzles: UL 401.
6. Drain Valves: UL 1726.
7. Mountings: Pipe clamp or wall bracket for freestanding units.
8. Mountings: Pipe escutcheon for cabinet-mounted units.
9. Fire extinguisher as shown on detail drawings.
C. DN65 and DN40 Hose Stations: DN65 hose valve with male threaded outlet, cap, and chain and
DN40 hose valve; hose rack with water-retention device and pins for folded, DN40 lined hose;
and DN40 lined hose with swivel inlet coupling and nozzle.
1. FHC-1, Recessed/surface mounted as per architectural plan, 30 m Hose, Class III (65mm
valve, linen hose).
3. FHC-3, recessed/Surface mounted as per architectural plan, 30m rubber hose and 30m
linen reel for (65mm valve, and 40mm/25mm rubber hose reel).
A. Wall, Fire Department Connections: UL 405; cast-brass body with brass, wall, escutcheon plate;
brass, lugged caps with gaskets and brass chains; and brass, lugged swivel connections. Include
inlets with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department sizes and threads,
outlet with pipe threads, extension pipe nipples, check devices or clappers for inlets, and
escutcheon plate with marking "AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE."
B. Exposed, Freestanding, Fire Department Connections: UL 405, cast-brass body, inlets with
threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department sizes and threads, and bottom
outlet with pipe threads. Include brass, lugged caps, gaskets, and brass chains; brass, lugged
swivel connection and drop clapper for each hose-connection inlet; 450-mm high brass sleeve; and
round, floor, brass, escutcheon plate with marking "AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE."
E. Valve Supervisory Switches: UL 753; electrical; single-pole, double throw; with normally closed
contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
F. Indicator-Post Supervisory Switches: UL 753; electrical; single-pole, double throw; with normally
closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled indicator-post valve is in other than fully
open position.
A. Pressure Gages: UL 393, 90- to 115-mm diameter dial with dial range of 0 to 1725 kPa (0 to
250 psig).
1. Panels: UL listed and FM approved when used with thermal detectors and Class A
detector circuit wiring. Electrical characteristics are 220-V ac, 60 Hz, with 24-V dc
rechargeable batteries.
2. Manual Control Stations: Electric operation, metal enclosure, labeled "MANUAL
CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and a cover held closed by breakable
strut.
3. Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, DN15 (NPS 1/2) pipe nipple,
and bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL
STATION" with operating instructions and a cover held closed by breakable strut.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system
design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article in Part 1 of this Section.
3.2 EARTHWORK
3.3 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for hose connections and stations to verify actual locations of piping
connections before installation.
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable thickness, fire- and smoke-rated construction, framing
for hose-station cabinets, and other conditions where hose connections and stations are to be
installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Flanges, unions, and transition and special fittings with pressure ratings the same as or higher than
system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground applications, unless otherwise indicated.
1. DN100 (NPS 4) and Smaller: Standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends; steel,
grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
2. DN125 and DN150 (NPS 5 and NPS 6): Standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends;
steel, grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
3. DN200 (NPS 8) and Larger: Standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends; steel, grooved-
end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
4. DN65 to DN90 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2): Standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends;
steel, grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
5. DN100 (NPS 4): Standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends; steel, grooved-end
fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
6. DN125 and DN150 (NPS 5 and NPS 6): Standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends;
steel, grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
2. General-Duty Valves: For applications where UL-listed and FM-approved valves are not
required by NFPA 13 and NFPA 14.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
B. Steel-Piping, Grooved Joints: Use Schedule 40 steel pipe with cut or roll-grooved ends and
Schedule 30 or thinner steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; steel, grooved-end fittings; and steel,
keyed couplings. Assemble joints with couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts according to
coupling manufacturer's written instructions. Use gaskets listed for dry-pipe service for dry
piping.
C. Press-Seal-Fitting Joints: Use UL-listed tool and procedure and follow fitting manufacturer's
written instructions. Include use of specific equipment, pressure-sealing tool, and accessories.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location
and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from Engineer
and authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Engineer before deviating
from approved working plans.
C. Install underground service-entrance piping according to NFPA 24 and with restrained joints.
D. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in
pipe sizes.
E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes DN50 (NPS 2) and smaller. Unions are not required
on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved joints.
F. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having DN65 (NPS 2-1/2)
and larger connections.
G. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler piping, complete with shutoff valve, sized and
located according to NFPA 13.
I. Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when
sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.
K. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check valves.
Drain to floor drain or outside building.
M. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials. Install according to
NFPA 13 for sprinkler piping and to NFPA 14 for standpipes.
N. Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to protect from earthquake damage.
O. Install piping with grooved joints according to manufacturer's written instructions. Construct rigid
piping joints, unless otherwise indicated.
P. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each
standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than DN8 (NPS 1/4) and with soft
metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to
permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for installing general-duty valves. Install fire-protection
specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14,
manufacturer's written instructions, and authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Valves for Wall Fire Hydrants: Install gate valve with nonrising stem in supply pipe.
D. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of check
valves in potable-water supply sources.
E. Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in vertical position for proper direction of flow, including
bypass check valve and retard chamber drain-line connection.
F. Dry-Pipe Valves: Install trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm connections, ball drip
valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line attachment.
1. Air-Pressure Maintenance Devices for Dry-Pipe Systems: Install shutoff valves to permit
servicing without shutting down sprinkler system; bypass valve for quick system filling;
pressure regulator or switch to maintain system pressure; strainer; pressure ratings with 95-
to 410-kPa (14- to 60-psig) adjustable range; and 1200-kPa (175-psig) maximum inlet
pressure.
2. Install air compressor and compressed-air supply piping.
G. Deluge Valves: Install in vertical position, in proper direction of flow, in main supply to deluge
system.
C. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing. Use dry-type
sprinklers with water supply from heated space.
B. Install DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) hose connections with quick-disconnect DN65 to DN40 (NPS 2-1/2 by
NPS 1-1/2) reducer adapter and flow- restricting device, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install wall-mounting-type hose connections in cabinets. Include pipe escutcheons, with finish
matching valves, inside cabinet where water-supply piping penetrates cabinet. Install valves at
angle required for connection of fire hose. Refer to Division 10 Section "Fire-Protection
Specialties" for cabinets.
A. Install freestanding hose stations for access and minimum passage restriction.
B. Install DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) hose connections with quick-disconnect DN65 by DN40 (NPS 2-1/2 by
NPS 1-1/2) reducer adapter and flow- restricting device, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install wall-mounting, rack-type hose stations in cabinets. Include pipe escutcheons, with finish
matching valves, inside cabinet where water-supply piping penetrates cabinet. Install valves at
angle required for connection of fire hose. Cabinets are specified in Division 10 Section "Fire-
Protection Specialties."
3.13 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect water-supply piping and standpipes and sprinklers to fire system. Include backflow
preventers.
B. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection. Drain to floor drain or
outside building.
C. Connect piping to specialty valves, hose valves, specialties, fire department connections, and
accessories.
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13
and NFPA 14 and in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."
A. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler piping according to NFPA 13, "System Acceptance" Chapter.
B. Flush, test, and inspect standpipes according to NFPA 14, "Tests and Inspection" Chapter.
C. Replace piping system components that do not pass test procedures and retest to demonstrate
compliance. Repeat procedure until satisfactory results are obtained.
D. Report test results promptly and in writing to Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.
3.16 CLEANING
B. Remove and replace sprinklers having paint other than factory finish.
3.17 PROTECTION
3.18 COMMISSIONING
A. Verify that specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and accessories are installed and operate
correctly.
B. Verify that excess-pressure pumps and accessories are installed and operate correctly.
C. Verify that air compressors and their accessories are installed and operate correctly.
E. Verify that damaged sprinklers and sprinklers with paint or coating not specified are replaced with
new, correct type.
F. Verify that sprinklers are correct types, have correct finishes and temperature ratings, and have
guards as required for each application.
I. Pressurize and check dry-pipe sprinkler piping air-pressure maintenance devices and air
compressors.
J. Verify that hose connections and fire department connections have threads compatible with local
fire department equipment.
3.19 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate equipment, specialties and accessories, and train Employer's maintenance personnel
to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-suppression piping and equipment. Refer to Division 1.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fire-suppression sprinklers, piping, and equipment for the following
building systems:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Verify the design of sprinklers for conformance with NFPA 13, and obtain approval from
Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Verify the design of sprinkler piping according to the following and obtain approval from
Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction:
1. Include 10 percent margin of safety for available water flow and pressure.
2. Include losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.
3. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications: As per NFPA 13 requirements.
4. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design: As follows:
a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 6.3 mL/s over 139-sq. m (0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft.)
area.
b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 9.5 mL/s over 139-sq. m (0.15 gpm over
1500-sq. ft.) area.
c. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 12.6 mL/s over 139-sq. m (0.20 gpm over
1500-sq. ft.) area.
d. Extra-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 18.9 mL/s over 232-sq. m (0.30 gpm over
2500-sq. ft.) area.
e. Extra-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 25.2 mL/s over 232-sq. m (0.40 gpm over
2500-sq. ft.) area.
C. Components and Installation: Capable of producing piping systems with 1200-kPa (175-psig)
minimum working-pressure rating, unless otherwise indicated.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1. Pipe and fitting materials and methods of joining for sprinkler piping.
2. Pipe hangers and supports.
3. Piping seismic restraints.
4. Valves, including specialty valves, accessories, and devices.
5. Alarm devices. Include electrical data.
6. Fire department connections. Include type; number, size, and arrangement of inlets; caps
and chains; size and direction of outlet; escutcheon and marking; and finish.
7. Excess-pressure pumps. Include electrical data.
8. Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow characteristics, mounting,
finish, and other pertinent data.
C. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that
have been approved by Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction. Include hydraulic
calculations, if applicable.
D. Field Test Reports and Certificates: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's
Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's Material and Test
Certificate for Underground Piping."
E. Maintenance Data: For each type of sprinkler specialty to include in maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has designed, installed and obtained
approvals for fire-suppression piping similar to that indicated for this Project.
B. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by
a qualified professional engineer. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.
D. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose equipment, specialties, and accessories are listed by
product name and manufacturer in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" and FM's "Fire
Protection Approval Guide" and that comply with other requirements indicated.
F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to Engineer.
G. NFPA Standards: Equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing complying with
the following:
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounting steel cabinet and hinged cover, with space
for a minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include the number of
sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and wrench for sprinklers. Include separate cabinet with
sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler on Project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
a. Gamewell Co.
b. Grinnell Corp.
c. Pittway Corp.; System Sensor Div.
d. Potter Electric Signal Co.
e. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
f. Viking Corp.
g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
5. Sprinklers:
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
2.3 PIPES
A. Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, ASTM A 135, or ASTM A 795 hot-dip galvanized-
steel pipe where indicated; Schedule 40 in DN150 (NPS 6) and smaller, and Schedule 30
in DN200 (NPS 8) and larger.
C. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, ASME B16.9, or ASME B16.11.
E. Steel, Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed and FM-approved, ASTM A 47M (ASTM A 47),
malleable iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron; with dimensions matching steel pipe and ends
factory grooved according to AWWA C606.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for pipe-flange gasket
materials and welding filler metals.
B. Steel, Keyed Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include
ASTM A 536, ductile-iron housing, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts and nuts. Include listing for
dry-pipe service for couplings for dry piping.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and check valves not
required to be UL listed and FM approved.
A. General: UL listed and FM approved, with minimum 1200-kPa (175-psig) non-shock working-
pressure rating. Valves for grooved-end piping may be furnished with grooved ends instead of
type of ends specified.
B. Gate Valves, DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: UL 262; cast-bronze, threaded ends; solid wedge;
OS&Y; and rising stem.
C. Indicating Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Smaller: UL 1091; butterfly or ball-type, bronze
body with threaded ends; and integral indicating device.
D. Gate Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: UL 262, iron body, bronze mounted, taper wedge,
OS&Y, and rising stem. Include replaceable, bronze, wedge facing rings and flanged ends; and
integral indicating device.
F. Swing Check Valves, DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: UL 312 or MSS SP-80, Class 150; bronze
body with bronze disc and threaded ends.
G. Swing Check Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: UL 312, cast-iron body and bolted cap,
with bronze disc or cast-iron disc with bronze-disc ring and flanged ends.
H. Split-Clapper Check Valves, DN100 (NPS 4) and Larger: UL 312, cast-iron body with rubber
seal, bronze-alloy discs, and stainless-steel spring and hinge pin.
A. Alarm Check Valves: UL 193, 1200-kPa (175-psig) working pressure, designed for horizontal
or vertical installation, with cast-iron flanged inlet and outlet, bronze grooved seat with O-ring
seals, and single-hinge pin and latch design. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electric
sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages, retarding chamber, and fill-line attachment with strainer.
B. Dry-Pipe Valves: UL 260; differential type; 1200-kPa (175-psig) working pressure; with cast-
iron flanged inlet and outlet, bronze seat with O-ring seals, and single-hinge pin and latch
design. Include UL 1486, quick-opening devices, trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level,
alarm connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line
attachment.
D. Ball Drip Valves: UL 1726, automatic drain valve, DN20 (NPS 3/4), ball check device with
threaded ends.
2.9 SPRINKLERS
B. Sprinkler Types and Categories: Nominal 12.7-mm (1/2-inch) orifice for "Ordinary"
temperature classification rating, unless otherwise indicated or required by application.
F. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting
applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with
sprinklers.
G. Sprinkler Guards: Wire-cage type, including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
A. Specialty Fittings: UL listed and FM approved; made of steel, ductile iron, or other materials
compatible with piping.
C. Mechanical-T Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing with pressure-responsive gasket, bolts, and
threaded or locking-lug outlet.
E. Drop-Nipple Fittings: UL 1474, with threaded inlet, threaded outlet, and seals; adjustable.
F. Sprinkler, Drain and Alarm Test Fittings: UL-listed, cast- or ductile-iron body; with threaded
inlet and outlet, test valve, and orifice and sight glass.
G. Sprinkler, Branch-Line Test Fittings: UL-listed, brass body; with threaded inlet and capped
drain outlet and threaded outlet for sprinkler.
H. Sprinkler, Inspector's Test Fittings: UL-listed, cast- or ductile-iron housing; with threaded inlet
and drain outlet and sight glass.
A. Wall, Fire Department Connections: UL 405; cast-brass body with brass, wall, escutcheon plate;
brass, lugged caps with gaskets and brass chains; and brass, lugged swivel connections. Include
inlets with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department sizes and
threads, outlet with pipe threads, extension pipe nipples, check devices or clappers for inlets, and
escutcheon plate with marking "AUTO SPKR."
B. Exposed, Freestanding, Fire Department Connections: UL 405, cast-brass body, inlets with
threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department sizes and threads, and
bottom outlet with pipe threads. Include brass, lugged caps, gaskets, and brass chains; brass,
lugged swivel connection and drop clapper for each hose-connection inlet; 450-mm high brass
sleeve; and round, floor, brass, escutcheon plate with marking "AUTO SPKR."
1. Finish Including Sleeve: Polished brass.
E. Valve Supervisory Switches: UL 753; electrical; single-pole, double throw; with normally
closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
A. Pressure Gages: UL 393, 90- to 115-mm diameter dial with dial range of 0 to 1725 kPa (0 to
250 psig).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system
design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article in Part 1 of this Section.
3.2 EARTHWORK
B. Flanges, unions, and transition and special fittings with pressure ratings the same as or higher
than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground applications, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Use galvanized, standard-
weight steel pipe with threaded ends; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded
joints.
D. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Use galvanized, standard-
weight steel pipe with grooved ends; steel, grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and
grooved joints.
1. DN100 (NPS 4) and Smaller: Standard-weight steel pipe with threaded ends, cast- or
malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
2. DN100 (NPS 4) and Smaller: Standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends; steel,
grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
3. DN125 and DN150 (NPS 5 and NPS 6): Standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends;
steel, grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
4. DN125 and DN150 (NPS 5 and NPS 6): Standard-weight steel pipe with plain ends, steel
welding fittings, and welded joints.
5. DN125 and DN150 (NPS 5 and NPS 6): Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with
grooved ends; steel, grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
1. DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) and Smaller: Standard-weight steel pipe with threaded ends, cast- or
malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
2. DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) and smaller: Galvanized, Standard-weight steel pipe with threaded
ends, cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
3. DN50 (NPS 2): Standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends; steel, grooved-end
fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
4. DN50 (NPS 2): Galvanized, Standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends; steel,
grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
5. DN65 to DN75 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3): Standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends;
steel, grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
6. DN65 to DN75 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3): Galvanized, Standard-weight steel pipe with
grooved ends; steel, grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
7. DN100 (NPS 4): Standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends; steel, grooved-end
fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
8. DN100 (NPS 4): Galvanized, Standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends; steel,
grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
2. General-Duty Valves: For applications where UL-listed and FM-approved valves are not
required by NFPA 13.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
C. Steel-Piping, Grooved Joints: Use Schedule 40 steel pipe with cut or roll-grooved ends and
Schedule 30 or thinner steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; steel, grooved-end fittings; and steel,
keyed couplings. Assemble joints with couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts according to
coupling manufacturer's written instructions. Use gaskets listed for dry-pipe service for dry
piping.
A. Connect sprinkler piping to water-service piping of size and in location indicated for service
entrance to building. Refer to Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for exterior piping.
B. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at
connection to water-service piping. Refer to Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for
backflow preventers.
A. Connect sprinkler piping to building interior water distribution piping. Refer to Division 15
Section "Water Distribution Piping" for interior piping.
B. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at
connection to water distribution piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for
backflow preventers.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from
Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Engineer before
deviating from approved working plans.
C. Install underground service-entrance piping according to NFPA 24 and with restrained joints.
D. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions
in pipe sizes.
E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes DN50 (NPS 2) and smaller. Unions are not
required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved joints.
F. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having DN65 (NPS 2-1/2)
and larger connections.
G. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler piping, complete with shutoff valve, sized and
located according to NFPA 13.
I. Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to sprinkler risers
when sprinkler branch piping is connected to sprinkler risers.
J. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check valves.
Drain to floor drain or outside building.
L. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials and installation.
M. Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to protect from earthquake damage.
N. Install piping with grooved joints according to manufacturer's written instructions. Construct
rigid piping joints, unless otherwise indicated.
O. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main and at each sprinkler test connection. Include
pressure gages with connection not less than DN8 (NPS 1/4) and with soft metal seated globe
valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and
install where they will not be subject to freezing.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for installing general-duty valves. Install fire-protection
specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13, manufacturer's
written instructions, and authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Valves for Wall Fire Hydrants: Install gate valve with nonrising stem in supply pipe.
D. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of
check valves in potable-water supply sources.
E. Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in vertical position for proper direction of flow, including
bypass check valve and retard chamber drain-line connection.
C. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing. Use dry-type
sprinklers with water supply from heated space.
3.13 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect water-supply piping and sprinklers to fire pumps. Include backflow preventers.
B. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection. Drain to floor drain
or outside building.
C. Connect piping to specialty valves, specialties, fire department connections, and accessories.
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in
NFPA 13 and in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."
A. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler piping according to NFPA 13, "System Acceptance" Chapter.
B. Replace piping system components that do not pass test procedures and retest to demonstrate
compliance. Repeat procedure until satisfactory results are obtained.
C. Report test results promptly and in writing to Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.
3.16 CLEANING
B. Remove and replace sprinklers having paint other than factory finish.
3.17 PROTECTION
3.18 COMMISSIONING
FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 13916 - Page 13 of 14
S08035-SPC-ME-01 REV 1
RIYADH METRO PROJECT
STATIONS AND BUILDINGS CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
A. Verify that specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and accessories are installed and operate
correctly.
B. Verify that excess-pressure pumps and accessories are installed and operate correctly.
D. Verify that damaged sprinklers and sprinklers with paint or coating not specified are replaced
with new, correct type.
E. Verify that sprinklers are correct types, have correct finishes and temperature ratings, and have
guards as required for each application.
G. Verify that fire department connections have threads compatible with local fire department
equipment.
3.19 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes electric-drive, horizontal fire pumps for building fire-suppression systems
and the following:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Fire Pump: Horizontal-type fire pump used to supply water at rated capacity and total head
required for fire-suppression service.
B. Fire-Pump Unit: Assembly with fire pump, driver, controller, and related accessories.
E. Split-Case Fire Pump: Axially split-case, centrifugal fire pump with its housing split parallel to
shaft.
B. Pump Equipment, Accessory, and Piping Pressure Rating: 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum
working-pressure rating, and maximum to suit system operating pressure.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; certified pump performance curves with each selection
point indicated; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories
for each fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-pump unit and flow-measuring system.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, methods of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection
for each fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-pump unit.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
2. Shop Drawings may be incorporated into other Division 13 fire-suppression piping system
Shop Drawings.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of fire pumps and fire-pump controllers certifying
that products furnished comply with requirements.
D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-pump units through one source
with responsibility and accountability to respond to and resolve problems regarding compatibility,
installation, performance, and acceptance of units.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, and dimensional requirements of
fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-pump units and are based on specific models indicated.
Other manufacturers' pump units with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer
to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."
D. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on equipment made to specified standards.
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction pertaining to materials, hose threads, and
installation.
G. Comply with NFPA 20, "Centrifugal Fire Pumps," for fire pumps, drivers, controllers, accessories,
and installation.
A. Preparation for Shipping: After assembling and testing fire pumps and pressure-maintenance
pumps, protect flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces, pipe openings, and nozzles.
B. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
C. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, or other foreign matter.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
4. Fire-Pump Controllers:
a. Firetrol, Inc.
b. Hubbell Industrial Controls, Inc.
c. Joslyn Clark Controls, Inc.
d. Master Control Systems, Inc.
e. Metron, Inc.
5. Pressure-Maintenance-Pump Controllers:
a. Firetrol, Inc.
b. Hubbell Industrial Controls, Inc.
c. Joslyn Clark Controls, Inc.
d. Master Control Systems, Inc.
e. Metron, Inc.
6. Alarm Panels:
a. Firetrol, Inc.
b. Hubbell Industrial Controls, Inc.
c. Joslyn Clark Controls, Inc.
d. Master Control Systems, Inc.
e. Metron, Inc.
7. Flow-Measuring Systems:
1. Characteristics: Capable of furnishing not less than 150 percent of rated capacity at not
less than 65 percent of total rated head. Shutoff head is limited to 140 percent of total rated
head.
2. Casing: Axially split cast iron with suction and discharge flanges machined to
ASME B16.1, Class 250 flanges.
3. Impeller: Cast bronze of construction to match fire pump, statically and dynamically
balanced, and keyed to shaft.
4. Wear Rings: Replaceable, bronze.
5. Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft with bronze sleeve.
6. Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron housing.
7. Seals: Stuffing box with minimum of four rings of graphite-impregnated braided yarn and
bronze packing gland.
8. Coupling: Flexible and capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment.
Include metal coupling guard.
9. Driver: Electric motor.
10. Finish: Manufacturer's standard red paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested unit
before shipping.
11. Nameplate: Complete with capacities, characteristics, and other pertinent data.
B. Vertically Mounted, Split-Case Fire Pumps: UL 448, factory-assembled and -tested, electric-
drive, Include pump and driver mounted on same base and connected with coupling.
1. Characteristics: Capable of furnishing not less than 150 percent of rated capacity at not
less than 65 percent of total rated head. Shutoff head is limited to 140 percent of total rated
head.
2. Casing: Axially split cast iron with suction and discharge flanges machined to
ASME B16.1, Class 250 flanges.
3. Impeller: Cast bronze of construction to match fire pump, statically and dynamically
balanced, and keyed to shaft.
4. Wear Rings: Replaceable, bronze.
5. Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft with bronze sleeve.
1. Finish: Manufacturer's standard red paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested unit
before shipping.
2. Nameplate: Complete with motor horsepower, characteristics, and other pertinent data.
A. Description: Combined automatic and nonautomatic operation; factory assembled and wired;
factory tested for capacities and electrical characteristics; and with the following features:
A. Description: UL 218 and NFPA 20; listed for electric-drive, fire-pump service and service
entrance.
B. Rate controllers for scheduled horsepower. Include short-circuit withstand rating at least equal to
short-circuit current available at controller location. Take into account cable size and distance
from substation or supply transformers.
C. Automatic Transfer Switches: UL 218 and UL 1008 and requirements for and attached to fire-
pump controllers. Include enclosure complying with UL 50, Type 2, with automatic transfer
switch with rating at least equal to fire-pump driver-motor horsepower. Include ampere rating not
less than 115 percent of motor full-load current and suitable for switching motor-locked rotor
current.
D. Controllers: As follows:
A. Description: UL 508; factory-assembled, -wired, and -tested across-the-line type for combined
automatic and nonautomatic operation.
1. Enclosure: UL 508 and NEMA 250, Type 2, wall-mounting type for field electrical wiring.
A. Match fire-pump suction and discharge ratings as required for fire-pump capacity rating. Include
the following:
A. Match pressure-maintenance-pump suction and discharge ratings as required for pump capacity
rating. Include the following:
A. Description: FM-approved, fire-pump, flow-measuring systems that indicate flow to not less than
175 percent of fire-pump rated capacity. Include sensor of size to match pipe, tubing, flow meter,
and fittings.
A. Factory Tests: Hydrostatically test and test run fire pumps before shipping. Test at 150 percent of
shutoff head plus suction head, but not less than 250 psig (1725 kPa). Produce certified test curves
showing head capacity and brake horsepower of each pump.
2.12 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged nonshrink and nonmetallic
grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, equipment foundations, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation and other conditions affecting fire-pump performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for fire pumps, pressure-maintenance pumps, and
controllers. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Division 15 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods."
3.3 INSTALLATION
B. Install pumps and controllers to provide access for periodic maintenance, including removal of
motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C. Set base-mounting-type pumps on concrete bases. Disconnect coupling halves before setting. Do
not reconnect couplings until alignment operations have been completed.
1. Support pump baseplate on rectangular metal blocks and shims or on metal wedges having
small taper, at points near foundation bolts to provide 3/4- to 1-1/2-inch (19- to 38-mm)
gap between pump base and foundation for grouting.
2. Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level. Check coupling
faces and pump suction and discharge flanges to verify that they are level and plumb.
D. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or greater than diameter of fire-pump nozzles.
F. Support pumps and piping separately so weight of piping does not rest on pumps.
G. Install piping accessories, hangers and supports, anchors, valves, meters and gages, and equipment
supports.
H. Install flow meters and sensors where indicated. Install flow-measuring-system components and
make connections according to manufacturer's written instructions.
I. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not
specified to be factory mounted. Furnish copies of manufacturers' wiring diagram Submittals to
electrical Installer.
3.4 ALIGNMENT
A. Align fire-pump and driver shafts after complete unit has been leveled on foundation, grout has
set, and foundation bolts have been tightened.
B. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Fill baseplate
completely with grout, with metal blocks and shims or wedges in place. Tighten foundation bolts
after grout has hardened. Check alignment and make required corrections.
1. Adjust alignment of pump and driver shafts for angular and parallel alignment by one
method in HI 1.1-1.5, Section 1.4, "Installation, Operation and Maintenance."
2. Alignment Tolerances: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Align vertically mounted, split-case pump and driver shafts after complete unit has been made
plumb on foundation, grout has set, and foundation bolts have been tightened. Follow pump
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 13 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific connection
requirements:
1. Install piping adjacent to fire and pressure-maintenance pumps to allow service and
maintenance.
2. Connect water supply to fire and pressure-maintenance pumps.
3. Connect fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-pump discharge piping to building fire-
suppression piping.
4. Connect relief-valve discharge to point of disposal.
C. Connect fire-pump controllers to building fire alarm system. Refer to Division 16 Section "Fire
Alarm Systems."
F. Ground equipment.
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until
no leaks exist.
2. Check suction line connections for tightness so no air gets into pumps.
3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units,
and retest.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
5. Furnish fire hoses in number, size, and length required to reach storm drain or other
acceptable location to dispose of fire-pump test water. Fire hoses are for field-acceptance
tests only and are not property of Owner.
6. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following preventive-maintenance operations
and checks:
a. Prime pump by opening suction valve and closing drains, and prepare pump for
operation.
b. Open sealing liquid supply valves if pump is so fitted.
c. Start motor.
d. Open discharge valve slowly.
e. Observe leakage from stuffing boxes and adjust sealing liquid valve for proper flow
to ensure lubrication of packing. Do not tighten gland immediately but let packing
run in before reducing leakage through stuffing boxes.
f. Check general mechanical operation of pump and motor.
B. Perform field tests for each fire-pump unit and system piping when installation is complete.
Comply with operating instructions and procedures in NFPA 20 to demonstrate compliance with
requirements. Where possible, field correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to demonstrate
compliance. Replace equipment that cannot be satisfactorily corrected or that does not perform as
indicated, than retest to demonstrate compliance. Verify that each fire-pump unit performs as
indicated. Report test results in writing.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and
stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining units.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."
3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
4. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Description: Engineered system for discharge and total flooding of hazard areas with "FM-
200," made by Great Lakes Chemical Corp.
A. Design clean-agent extinguishing system and obtain approval from Engineer and authorities
having jurisdiction. Design system for Class A, B, or C fires as appropriate for area being
protected and include safety factor. Use clean agent indicated and in concentration suitable
for normally occupied areas.
B. Performance Requirements: Discharge FM-200 within 10 seconds and maintain 7.1 percent
concentration by volume at 21 deg C (70 deg F) for 10-minute holding time in hazard areas.
1. FM-200 concentration in hazard areas greater than 9.0 percent immediately after
discharge or less than 5.8 percent throughout holding time will not be accepted
without written authorization from Employer and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. System Capabilities: Minimum 4278-kPa (620-psig) calculated working pressure and
2484-kPa (360-psig) initial charging pressure.
C. Verified Detection: Include devices located in single zone. Sound alarm on activating
single-detection device, and discharge extinguishing agent on actuating second-detection
device.
F. Operating abort switches will delay extinguishing-agent discharge while being activated,
and switches must be reset to prevent agent discharge. Release of switch will discharge
agent.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include design
calculations. Include the following for hazard-area enclosure, drawn to scale:
C. Approved Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 2001, that have been
approved by Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction. Include design calculations.
D. Field Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and "Commissioning" Articles
in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain extinguishing agent and equipment through one source.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of clean-
agent extinguishing systems and are based on the specific system selected. Other
manufacturers' systems with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to
Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
E. ASME Compliance: Fabricate piping to comply with ASME B31.1, "Power Piping."
F. FM Compliance: Provide components that are FM approved and are listed in FM's "Fire
Protection Approval Guide."
G. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label clean-agent extinguishing systems to comply with
NFPA 2001, "Clean Agent Extinguishing Systems."
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver
extra materials to Employer.
1. Detection Devices: Not less than 20 percent of amount of each type installed.
2. Container Valves: Not less than 10 percent of amount of each size and type installed.
3. Nozzles: Not less than 20 percent of amount of each type installed.
4. Extinguishing Agent: Not less than 100 percent of amount installed in largest hazard
area. Include pressure-rated containers with valves.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
a. Cerberus Pyrotronics.
b. Chemetron Fire Systems.
c. Fike Corp.; Fire Protection Systems Div.
d. Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.
e. Modular Protection Corp.
A. Refer to Part 3 piping applications Article retained for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and
joining materials.
B. Piping, Valves, and Discharge Nozzles: Comply with types and standards listed in
NFPA 2001, Section "Distribution," and Appendix A, for charging pressure of system.
A. Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type S, Grade A or ASTM A 106, Grade A; Schedule 80.
B. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 300, unless Class 600 is indicated.
D. Steel, Grooved-End Fittings: FM approved and UL listed, ASTM A 47M (ASTM A 47)
malleable iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iron, with dimensions matching steel pipe and ends
factory grooved according to AWWA C606.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic joining
materials.
B. Steel, Keyed Couplings: UL 213, AWWA C606, approved or listed for halon or clean-
agent service, and matching steel-pipe dimensions. Include ASTM A 536, ductile-iron
housing, rubber gasket, and steel bolts and nuts.
2.6 VALVES
B. Container Valves: With rupture disc or solenoid, capable of immediate and total agent
discharge and suitable for intended flow capacity.
D. Valves in Manifolds: Check valve; installed to prevent loss of extinguishing agent when
container is removed from manifold.
A. Description: Steel tanks complying with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section VIII, for unfired pressure vessels. Include minimum working-pressure rating that
matches system charging pressure, valve, pressure switch, and pressure gage.
B. Power Requirements: 240-V ac; with electrical contacts for connection to system
components and fire alarm system, and transformer or rectifier as needed to produce power
at voltage required for accessories and alarm devices.
a. Detection circuit.
b. Manual pull-station circuit.
c. Alarm circuit.
d. Release circuit.
A. Description: Comply with NFPA 2001 and NFPA 72, and include the following types:
2.13 SWITCHES
C. Horns: 90 to 94 dBA.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with hazard-area
leakage requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting work
performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A. Flanged pipe and fittings and flanged joints may be used to connect to specialties and
accessories and where required for maintenance.
D. DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Black steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded
joints.
A. Install clean-agent extinguishing piping and other components level and plumb and
according to manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Grooved Piping Joints: Groove pipe ends according to AWWA C606 dimensions.
Assemble grooved-end steel pipe and steel, grooved-end fittings with steel, keyed couplings
and lubricant according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Install pipe and fittings, valves, and discharge nozzles according to requirements listed in
NFPA 2001, Section "Distribution," and related Appendix A paragraphs; and ASME B31.1.
2. Support piping using supports and methods according to NFPA 13 and Division 15
Section "Hangers and Supports."
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following
are specific connection requirements:
C. Connect electrical devices to control panel and to building's fire alarm system. Electrical
power, wiring, and devices are specified in Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm."
3.5 LABELING
B. Comply with operating instructions and procedures of NFPA 2001, Section "Approval of
Installations." Include the following inspections and tests to demonstrate compliance with
requirements:
1. Report test results promptly and in writing to Engineer and authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. After installing clean-agent extinguishing piping system and after electrical circuitry
has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
ATS, Section 7, "Inspection and Test Procedures," and Section 8, "System Function
Tests." Certify compliance with test parameters.
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with
new units, and retest.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
B. Verify that extinguishing system is installed and connected according to the Contract
Documents.
C. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with the Contract Documents.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes piping and equipment for the following building systems:
1. Automatic wet-type, Class I standpipes.
2. Automatic wet-type, Class II standpipes.
3. Automatic wet-type, Class III standpipes.
4. Manual wet-type, Class I standpipes.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Hose Connection: Valve with threaded outlet matching fire hose coupling thread for attaching
fire hose.
B. Hose Station: Hose connection, fire hose rack, and fire hose.
A. Verify the design of standpipes for compliance with NFPA, and obtain approval from Engineer
and authorities having jurisdiction. Include minimum residual pressures at hydraulically remote
outlets according to the following:
B. Components and Installation: Capable of producing piping systems with 1200-kPa (175-psig)
minimum working-pressure rating, unless otherwise indicated.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1. Pipe and fitting materials and methods of joining for standpipe piping.
2. Pipe hangers and supports.
3. Piping seismic restraints.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Field Test Reports and Certificates: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 14. Include "Contractor's
Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's Material and Test
Certificate for Underground Piping."
E. Maintenance Data: For each type of standpipe specialty to include in maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has designed, installed and obtained
approvals for fire-suppression piping similar to that indicated for this Project.
B. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by
a qualified professional engineer. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.
D. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose equipment, specialties, and accessories are listed by
product name and manufacturer in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" and FM's "Fire
Protection Approval Guide" and that comply with other requirements indicated.
E. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
Section IX.
G. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to Engineer.
H. NFPA Standard: Equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing complying with
NFPA 14, "Standpipe and Hose Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
STANDPIPES AND HOSES 13975 - Page 2 of 15
S08035-SPC-ME-01 REV 1
RIYADH METRO PROJECT
STATIONS AND BUILDINGS CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
a. Gamewell Co.
b. Grinnell Corp.
c. Pittway Corp.; System Sensor Div.
d. Potter Electric Signal Co.
e. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
f. Viking Corp.
g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
6. Fire-Protection-Service Valves:
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
2.3 PIPES
A. Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, ASTM A 135, or ASTM A 795; Schedule 40 in
DN150 (NPS 6) and smaller, and Schedule 30 in DN200 (NPS 8) and larger.
C. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, ASME B16.9, or ASME B16.11.
E. Steel, Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed and FM-approved, ASTM A 47M (ASTM A 47),
malleable iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron; with dimensions matching steel pipe and ends
factory grooved according to AWWA C606.
A. Refer to Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for pipe-flange gasket materials and
welding filler metals.
B. Steel, Keyed Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include
ASTM A 536, ductile-iron housing, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts and nuts. Include listing for
dry-pipe service for couplings for dry piping.
A. Refer to Section "Valves" for gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and check valves not required to be UL
listed and FM approved.
A. General: UL listed and FM approved, with minimum 1200-kPa (175-psig) nonshock working-
pressure rating. Valves for grooved-end piping may be furnished with grooved ends instead of
type of ends specified.
B. Gate Valves, DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: UL 262; cast-bronze, threaded ends; solid wedge;
OS&Y; and rising stem.
C. Gate Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: UL 262, iron body, bronze mounted, taper wedge,
OS&Y, and rising stem. Include replaceable, bronze, wedge facing rings and flanged ends.
D. Swing Check Valves, DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: UL 312 or MSS SP-80, Class 150; bronze
body with bronze disc and threaded ends.
E. Swing Check Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: UL 312, cast-iron body and bolted cap,
with bronze disc or cast-iron disc with bronze-disc ring and flanged ends.
F. Split-Clapper Check Valves, DN100 (NPS 4) and Larger: UL 312, cast-iron body with rubber
seal, bronze-alloy discs, and stainless-steel spring and hinge pin.
B. Ball Drip Valves: UL 1726, automatic drain valve, DN20 (NPS 3/4), ball check device with
threaded ends.
A. Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, DN15 (NPS 1/2) pipe nipple, and
bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with
operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental opening.
A. Description: UL 668, 2070-kPa (300-psig) minimum pressure rating, brass, hose valve for
connection of fire hose. Include 90-degree angle pattern design; female NPS inlet and male hose
outlet; and lugged cap, gasket, and chain. Include DN40 or DN65 (NPS 1-1/2 or NPS 2-1/2) as
indicated, and hose valve threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department
threads.
A. Description: UL 47, semiautomatic hose stations. Include brass, rack nipple; hose rack; and the
following features:
1. Valves: UL 668, 2070-kPa (300-psig) minimum pressure rating, 90-degree angle pattern
hose valve with female NPS inlet and outlet, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Threads and Gaskets: NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department threads.
3. Flow-Restricting Devices: DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) brass, adjustable for DN40 (NPS 1-1/2)
fire hose inlet.
4. Fire Hose: NFPA 1961 and UL 219, lined fire hose with couplings, gaskets, and nozzle.
Include the following fire hose materials:
5. Nozzles: UL 401.
6. Drain Valves: UL 1726.
7. Mountings: Pipe clamp or wall bracket for freestanding units.
8. Mountings: Pipe escutcheon for cabinet-mounted units.
B. DN65 and DN40 (NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 1-1/2) Hose Stations: DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) hose valve with
male threaded outlet, cap, and chain and DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) hose valve; hose rack with water-
retention device and pins for folded, DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) lined hose; and DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) lined
hose with swivel inlet coupling and nozzle.
A. Description: FM-approved, low-profile-type, hose station for roof mounting. Include the
following:
1. Housing: Sheet-steel construction with steel reinforcement and modified to hold not less
than length of fire hose indicated.
2. Shutoff Valve: DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) gate valve with extended stem.
3. Hose Connection: DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) valve.
4. Fittings: Brass.
5. Hose: DN40 (NPS 1-1/2), lined and suitable for exterior service. Include two 23-m (75-
foot) lengths coupled together.
6. Nozzle: DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) brass, adjustable from shutoff to fog spray or straight stream.
7. Nozzle: Brass, adjustable-fog type.
8. Drain Valve: DN15 (NPS 1/2) gate valve with extended stem.
9. Finish: Red enamel paint.
10. Roof Curb: Matching housing dimensions.
11. Mounting Materials: Structural steel and wood blocking as recommended in writing by
manufacturer.
2.13 MONITORS
A. Description: UL-listed, stationary, single-waterway type for 47.3-L/s (750-gpm) water stream.
Include the following features:
A. Description: Cast-brass body with brass, wall, escutcheon plates; brass, lugged caps with
gaskets and brass chains; and brass, lugged swivel connections. Include outlets with threads
according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department sizes and threads, inlet with pipe
threads, extension pipe nipple, and valve control.
A. Wall, Fire Department Connections: UL 405; cast-brass body with brass, wall, escutcheon plate;
brass, lugged caps with gaskets and brass chains; and brass, lugged swivel connections. Include
inlets with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department sizes and
threads, outlet with pipe threads, extension pipe nipples, check devices or clappers for inlets, and
escutcheon plate with marking "STANDPIPE."
B. Exposed, Freestanding, Fire Department Connections: UL 405, cast-brass body, inlets with
threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department sizes and threads, and
bottom outlet with pipe threads. Include brass, lugged caps, gaskets, and brass chains; brass,
lugged swivel connection and drop clapper for each hose-connection inlet; 460-mm- (18-inch-)
high brass sleeve; and round, floor, brass, escutcheon plate with marking "STANDPIPE."
D. Valve Supervisory Switches: UL 753; electrical; single-pole, double throw; with normally
closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
A. Pressure Gages: UL 393, 90- to 115-mm diameter dial with dial range of 0 to 1725 kPa (0 to
250 psig).
1. Panels: UL listed and FM approved when used with thermal detectors and Class A
detector circuit wiring. Electrical characteristics are [120-V] [220-V] ac, [50 Hz] [60
Hz], with 24-V dc rechargeable batteries.
2. Manual Control Stations: Electric operation, metal enclosure, labeled "MANUAL
CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and a cover held closed by breakable
strut.
3. Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, DN15 (NPS 1/2) pipe nipple,
and bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL
STATION" with operating instructions and a cover held closed by breakable strut.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 291. Use results for system design
calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article in Part 1 of this Section.
3.2 EARTHWORK
3.3 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for hose connections and stations to verify actual locations of piping
connections before installation.
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable thickness, fire- and smoke-rated construction, framing
for hose-station cabinets, and other conditions where hose connections and stations are to be
installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Flanges, unions, and transition and special fittings with pressure ratings the same as or higher
than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground applications, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Use galvanized, standard-
weight steel pipe with threaded ends; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded
joints.
D. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Use galvanized, standard-
weight steel pipe with grooved ends; steel, grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and
grooved joints.
E. Underground Service-Entrance Piping: Use ductile-iron, mechanical-joint pipe and fittings and
restrained joints.
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
2. General-Duty Valves: For applications where UL-listed and FM-approved valves are not
required by NFPA 14.
A. Refer to Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction.
C. Steel-Piping, Grooved Joints: Use Schedule 40 steel pipe with cut or roll-grooved ends and
Schedule 30 or thinner steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; steel, grooved-end fittings; and steel,
keyed couplings. Assemble joints with couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts according to
STANDPIPES AND HOSES 13975 - Page 10 of 15
S08035-SPC-ME-01 REV 1
RIYADH METRO PROJECT
STATIONS AND BUILDINGS CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
coupling manufacturer's written instructions. Use gaskets listed for dry-pipe service for dry
piping.
A. Connect standpipe piping to water-service piping of size and in location indicated for service
entrance to building. Refer to Section "Water Distribution" for exterior piping.
B. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at
connection to water-service piping. Refer to Section "Water Distribution" for backflow
preventers.
A. Connect standpipe piping to building interior water distribution piping. Refer to Section "Water
Distribution Piping" for interior piping.
B. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at
connection to water distribution piping. Refer to Section "Plumbing Specialties" for backflow
preventers.
A. Refer to Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation.
B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from
Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Engineer before
deviating from approved working plans.
C. Install underground service-entrance piping according to NFPA 24 and with restrained joints.
D. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions
in pipe sizes.
E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes DN50 (NPS 2) and smaller. Unions are not
required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved joints.
F. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having DN65 (NPS 2-1/2)
and larger connections.
H. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check valves.
Drain to floor drain or outside building.
J. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials. Install according to
NFPA 14.
STANDPIPES AND HOSES 13975 - Page 11 of 15
S08035-SPC-ME-01 REV 1
RIYADH METRO PROJECT
STATIONS AND BUILDINGS CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
K. Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to protect from earthquake damage.
L. Install piping with grooved joints according to manufacturer's written instructions. Construct
rigid piping joints, unless otherwise indicated.
M. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each
standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than DN8 (NPS 1/4) and with soft
metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to
permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.
A. Refer to Section "Valves" for installing general-duty valves. Install fire-protection specialty
valves, trim, fittings, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14,
manufacturer's written instructions, and authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Valves for Wall Fire Hydrants: Install gate valve with nonrising stem in supply pipe.
D. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of
check valves in potable-water supply sources.
E. Dry-Pipe Valves: Install trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm connections, ball
drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line attachment.
1. Air-Pressure Maintenance Devices for Dry-Pipe Systems: Install shutoff valves to permit
servicing without shutting down sprinkler system; bypass valve for quick system filling;
pressure regulator or switch to maintain system pressure; strainer; pressure ratings with
95- to 410-kPa (14- to 60-psig) adjustable range; and 1200-kPa (175-psig) maximum
inlet pressure.
2. Install air compressor and compressed-air supply piping.
3. Install compressed-air supply piping from building compressed-air piping system.
F. Deluge Valves: Install in vertical position, in proper direction of flow, in main supply to deluge
system.
B. Install freestanding hose connections for access and minimum passage restriction.
C. Install DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) hose-connection valves with flow-restricting device, unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Install DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) hose connections with quick-disconnect DN65 to DN40 (NPS 2-1/2
by NPS 1-1/2) reducer adapter and flow-restricting device, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Install wall-mounting-type hose connections in cabinets. Include pipe escutcheons, with finish
matching valves, inside cabinet where water-supply piping penetrates cabinet. Install valves at
STANDPIPES AND HOSES 13975 - Page 12 of 15
S08035-SPC-ME-01 REV 1
RIYADH METRO PROJECT
STATIONS AND BUILDINGS CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
angle required for connection of fire hose. Refer to Section "Fire-Protection Specialties" for
cabinets.
A. Install freestanding hose stations for access and minimum passage restriction.
B. Install DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) hose-station valves with flow-restricting device, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Install DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) hose connections with quick-disconnect DN65 by DN40 (NPS 2-1/2
by NPS 1-1/2) reducer adapter and flow-restricting device, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install freestanding hose stations with support or bracket attached to standpipe or substrate.
E. Install wall-mounting, rack-type hose stations in cabinets. Include pipe escutcheons, with finish
matching valves, inside cabinet where water-supply piping penetrates cabinet. Install valves at
angle required for connection of fire hose. Cabinets are specified in Section "Fire-Protection
Specialties."
3.14 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect water-supply piping and standpipes to fire pumps. Include backflow preventers.
B. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection. Drain to floor drain
or outside building.
C. Connect piping to specialty valves, hose valves, specialties, fire department connections, and
accessories.
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in
NFPA 14 and in Section "Mechanical Identification."
A. Flush, test, and inspect standpipes according to NFPA 14, "Tests and Inspection" Chapter.
B. Replace piping system components that do not pass test procedures and retest to demonstrate
compliance. Repeat procedure until satisfactory results are obtained.
C. Report test results promptly and in writing to Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.
3.17 COMMISSIONING
A. Verify that specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and accessories are installed and operate
correctly.
B. Verify that air compressors and their accessories are installed and operate correctly.
E. Verify that hose connections and fire department connections have threads compatible with local
fire department equipment.
G. Pressurize and check dry-pipe valve air-pressure maintenance devices and air compressors.
3.18 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring
devices in concrete.
2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices
in masonry.
3. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for attachment plates, angle brackets, and other
preparation of structural steel for fastening guide-rail brackets.
4. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for attachment plates, angle brackets, divider
beams, and other steel framing for supporting guide-rail brackets.
5. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for hot-rolled steel subsills and entrance frames
that are a part of steel frame.
6. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for hot-rolled steel subsills and entrance
frames.
7. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for pit ladders.
8. Division 5 Section "Ornamental Metalwork" for combination hall push-button
stations.
9. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting.
10. Division 9 Sections for finish flooring in elevator cars.
11. Division 15 Sections for ventilating hoistways and machine rooms.
12. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
13. Division 16 Sections for electrical service to elevators, including fused disconnect
switches, standby power source, and transfer switch.
14. Division 16 Sections for security card access equipment used to restrict elevator use.
A. Provide all labour, materials equipment and services necessary to furnish, deliver and install
all work of this section as shown on the drawing as specified herein and/or as required by
job conditions. Elevator installation is to comprise all elevators as described in attachment
A.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. The following terms used on Drawings and in the Specification are synonymous and may be
used interchangeably:
B. Electric Traction Elevators: Elevators in which cars are hoisted by wire ropes using
electrically driven traction sheaves and are defined to include driving machines; cars;
hoistway doors; guide rails; guide-rail brackets; roping; buffers; counterweights; signals;
control systems; electrical wiring within elevator system; and devices for operations, safety,
security, required performance at rated speed and capacity, and for complete elevator
installation.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each elevator. Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety
features, finishes, and similar information.
B. Shop Drawings: For each elevator. Show plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details
indicating service at each landing, machine room layout, coordination with building
structure, and relationships with other construction. Indicate variations from specified
requirements, maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of
support, and locations of equipment and signals. Include maximum and average power
demands.
C. Samples: For exposed finishes for car, hoistway doors, and signal equipment; 75 mm
square samples of sheet materials; and 100 mm lengths of running trim members.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects/engineers and owners, and
other information specified or required by Engineer.
E. Maintenance Manuals: For each different electric traction elevator, including operation and
maintenance instructions, parts listing with sources indicated, recommended parts inventory
listing, emergency instructions, and similar information. Include all diagnostic and repair
information available to manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance personnel. Submit for
Employer's information at project closeout as specified in Division 1.
1.7 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Kone (Finland).
2. Fujitec Inc. (Japan).
3. Mitsubishi (Japan).
4. Otis Elevator Co. (USA or France).
5. Schindler Elevator Corp. (Switzerland).
6. Thyssen (Germany).
B. Geared Machine-Worm and Shaft: Accurately machined from one piece of high tensile
solid forged steel, and provided with approved thrust bearings designed to take thrust of
worm in both directions. Worm rim is to be best quality phosphor bronze or other approved
material, hobbed accurately after fitting to gear spider. Provide approved means for fixing
rim to spider and to prevent possible loosening of unit in operation.
C. Geared Machine-Reduction Gear Assembly: Self lubricating, enclosed in cast iron, oil and
dust tight casing, with adequate lubricating oil capacity.
E. Geared Machine-Manual Brake Release: Provide means for manual release of brake, to
allow manual winding of unit in emergencies. Necessary levers and handles are to be
handed to the Employer, with instructions for use. Brake emergency release is to be self
resetting.
I. Gearless Machine-Brake: Dual independent brake unit are to be provided on the machine,
and is to be noiseless. Spring applied, magnetically released, self cooling and capable of
holding car securely under maximum speed and load conditions. Brake is to be designed
for automatic and instantaneous application immediately after power is interrupted on
motor. Brake springs are to work in compression.
J. Gearless Machine-Manual Brake Release: Provide means for manual release of brakes, to
allow manual winding of unit in emergencies. Emergency levers and handles are to be
handed to the Employer, with instructions for use. Brake emergency release is to be self-
resetting.
K. Variable Speed A.C. Motor: Induction type, 3-phase, reversible, with electronically
controlled speed, using controlled semi-conductor power rectifiers (thyristors) in main
circuit and solid-state electronically computed acceleration and deceleration equipment in
control circuits. Speed measurement and feed back control are to be through a
tachogenerator mounted on the machine, measuring actual revolutions of drive and
comparing with programmed reference level. Deceleration is to be electronically controlled
by eddy-current braking, feeding motor winding with thyristor controlled d.c. current.
Acceleration and deceleration are not to exceed 1 m/s/s.
L. Motor shall have high starting torque and low starting current and to be rated for continuous
operation in the maximum ambient temperature specified, and 180 starts per hour for
machine roomless lifts. Insulation class of winding is to be Class F or higher with
temperature rise not exceeding Class B. Starting/acceleration RMS current to be limited by
appropriate means to maximum 2.5 times the normal current.
M. Permanent Magnet Motor: Can be used in lieu of induction motor. Permanent magnet
motor shall be synchronous motor, direct current double independent electro-mechanical
brake and integral drive sheave.
N. Motor for gearless machines are to be permanent magnet synchronous type unless otherwise
indicated or specified.
O. Machine Motor Assembly: Motor, traction sheaves, brake, gearbox and bearings are to be
one unit assembly mounted on common bed plate. Assembly is to be adequately isolated
from main building structure by cork or other approved material, to prevent transmission of
noise and vibration.
P. Lifting Tackle: Provide and fix steel joists and hand-operated winch of adequate strength in
each machine room for lifting and moving each assembly.
Q. Traction and Deflection Sheaves: Traction sheave is to be fine grained cast iron of suitable
hardness, accurately grooved for number and size of hoisting ropes, and is to give constant
traction and long rope life. Bearings for sheaves are to be ball or roller of approved type.
Diameter of sheave is to be not less than forty times overall diameter of ropes. Deflection
and secondary sheaves are to be of same material and grooved similarly to traction sheave,
and are to be protected by keepers to prevent rope from leaving the sheave with clearance
between keepers and sheave not exceeding half rope diameter and provided by steel wire
mesh extending over the hole rope run above the machine bed plate for personnel
protection.
R. Variable speed AC electric motors are to be suitable for operator with variable voltage,
variable frequency (VVVF) gearless drives and controllers as specified.
S. Chains: Duplicate heavy duty high tensile multiple leaf chains, with safety factor of at least
10.
T. Cylinder: Place in a suitable casing of iron or steel. Cylinder casing is to be 100 mm larger
in diameter than cylinder. Whole assembly is to be mounted on lowest slab or pit surface
and is not to penetrate into ground.
U. Packing: Provide special type packing to eliminate leakage under widely variable load
conditions.
W. Motor drive unit controlling the motor speed: shall be capable of keeping the elevator.
Service under the conditions specified in “Electrical Equipment” Article. Drive unit power
factor to exceed 0.9.
X. Motor Rating: it’s the Contractor responsibility, and in accordance with the standards
requirements, to provide and install, for each elevator, the motor drive properly sized and
suitable to lift the required rated passengers’ capacity in addition to the specified car
dimensions, structure, finishes, etc. The Engineer is to be informed about any discrepancy
at the tender stage.
2.3 CAR
A. Construction: Structural steel frame members suitably braced and fastened together, and
clad internally and externally with sheet metal at least 1.5 mm thick, which is not to drum
during normal operation. Materials are to be fire resisting.
B. Noise Level Inside the Car is not to exceed the following values:
1. 50 dBA at full speed in both directions with fan off,
2. 55 dBA at full speed in both directions with fan on at high speed.
C. Noise Level Outside Car is not to exceed 55 dBA when measured at one meter in front of
car entrance during a full door open and close cycle and a reversal cycle, in addition to a lift
traveling at full speed inside the shaft.
D. Car Horizontal Acceleration: Lateral quaking, peak to peak, is not to exceed 15 m in the
frequency range of 1 to 10 Hz.
E. Reinforce roof to sustain 150-kg load on any 0.2 m2, and 50 kg at any point. Provide trap
door at least 500 x 600 mm, opening outward and capable of being opened from both sides.
Opening of trap is to activate electrical interlock preventing operation of elevator.
F. Platform: Fill frame with timber sub-floor and provide specified top floor finish. Protect
underside of platform with sheet steel covering, at least 1.5 mm thick. Sill is to be anti-slip,
with provision for car doors.
H. Isolating Cushion: Rubber pads supported on auxiliary steel frame fastened to car frame are
to form isolating cushion between car and car frame.
I. Guide Devices: Adjustable and renewable, and fastened to top and bottom of car frame.
J. Balustrade and kick-plates are to be fitted to car roof in all lifts as per EN081-1: 1998
requirements.
K. Ventilation and Lighting: each car is to have necessary lighting and adequately rated, silent
running, properly padded and rigidly fixed exhaust fan of approved type and manufacture.
Fan and lights are to switch on automatically when car is called or when landing doors are
opened, remain switched on whilst car is in operation, and switch off by time relay 30 – 60
seconds after car has stopped. Lighting level is to be minimum 200 lux. Fan is to be
provided to bring air into car through the ventilation slots near the wall base and to exhaust
through the ceiling. Fan is to be 2-speed. A screen grill over the fan is to be provided for
mechanical protection of fan. Lighting type and arrangement is subject to
Engineer/Architect approval. Battery is to be provided to operate fan and two of the lighting
fixtures for at least one hour.
M. Inspection lamp sockets is to be provided below the car. Socket is to be standard VDE type.
N. Indicators and control stations are to be provided in each car as specified in sub-section
14210-2- hereof.
O. Car Inspection Station is to be provided on top of the car to include the following:
When the station is switched to inspection, the lift speed is not to exceed 0.63 m/s and all
operating devices in the cab are to be inoperative.
Q. Service telephone or internet set : Provide small cabinet with lockable cover for
telephone/intercom set.
R. Padded Covers are to be provided for each service lift to protect car finishes from damage at
times lift is used to carry freight. Hooks or other means are to be provided inside the cars for
hanging padded covers.
A. Counterweight: Structural steel frame fitted with cast iron sub-weights secured with tie rods
or steel sub-weights with locks at the top. Weight is to equal total car weight plus 40 to
50% of contract specified capacity. Counterweight is to be screened to a height of 2 m
from bottom of pit and fitted with renewable guide shoes at top and bottom. Blocking is to
be provided between counter weight and buffer strike plate for at least 250 mm per 60 rope
length.
B. Guide Shoes are to be rolling type for speeds exceeding 1.6 m/sec and sliding type for
speeds 1.6 m/sec and below. Guide shoes are to be adjustable, renewable, and fastened to
top and bottom of car and counterweight frames.
C. Guide Rails: highest quality steel T-sections with tongue and grove joints for the car and
counterweight. Hollow sections are not acceptable. Guide rails sections are to be connected
with machine fish plates. For all counterweights and for cars with use suitable rail sizes to
EN81-1:1998 and profiles as per ISO standards. When rail length exceeds 30 m means are
to be provided to absorb rail expansion and structural settlement. Guide rail fixings are to
be heavy steel brackets using metal C-inserts in concrete walls. Guide rail and fixings are to
withstand sudden application of safety gear under maximum load.
D. Inserts: coordinate with builder's works to furnish required concrete inserts and similar
anchorage devices for the installation of guide rails, machinery, and other components of lift
work where installation of devices is indicated as work. Provide necessary shop drawings
for the required works.
E. Suspension Ropes: special acid quality steel or high grade traction steel, single factory
production patch with safety factor as specified by EN 81-1: 1998, or above 14 whichever is
greater. Ropes are to be securely attached to car and counterweight and are to have
independent means of adjustment. There are to be minimum three ropes, each of minimum
8 mm diameter for lifts with traction sheaves. Provide test certificates of compliance with
appropriate Code and/or Standard prior to shipment. For travels above 60 m, provide steel
cord governor ropes to limit movement of the governor tension wheel due to changing
humidity values.
G. Compensation Ropes: provide compensation for the weight of the hoistway ropes and
unbalanced portion of the traveling cables whenever the travel exceeds 30 m so that the
system balance is not to vary more than 50 kg over the entire range of travel.
I. Compensation Ropes: compensation ropes are to be attached to the underside of the car and
to the counterweight passing under a weighed compensation sheave in the pit. Provide
lockdown as described in EN81-1:1998 to the compensation sheave assembly, whenever
rope compensation is applied. Provisions are to be made for equalizing tension in the
compensating ropes. The guide sheave is to be provided with bearings of anti-friction
bearing metal, ball or roller type. The guide sheave is to operate in guides, and the guide
structure is to be securely fastened in place. Provide metal guards to prevent ropes jumping
off sheave and to prevent foreign objects from falling between ropes and sheave grooves
and to protect workmen. Provide upper and lower travel limit switched on the
compensation guide sheave. When actuated, power to the drive and brake shall be removed.
J. Buffers: are to be approved design, oil type for speeds exceeding 1.0 m/sec and spring type
or polyurethane buffers for speeds 1.0 m/sec and below. Buffers are to be installed under
each car and counterweight. Use reduced stroke buffers with associated terminal slowdown
devices where runbys are restrictive. Buffers are to be tested by a qualified testing
laboratory and approved as complying with the governing code.
K. Spring Type or Polyurethane Buffers are to be in full compliance with the requirements of the EN 81-
1:1998 Code
L. Oil Buffers: provide oil buffers with necessary blocking and horizontal steel braces. Oil
buffers are to bring the care and counterweight to rest from governor tripping speed at an
average rate of retardation not exceeding gravity. Oil buffers are to be of the spring return
type and shall have means of the checking oil supply level. Oil buffers are to have a
marking plate indicating the manufacturer's name, the buffers identification number and the
stroke.
N. Safety Gear: is to hold car securely under maximum load and governor tripping speed
conditions. Jaws of here are to engage guide rails through self-aligning shoes with surfaces
carefully machined parallel to guide rail face. Pressure of jaws on the two guides is to be
equal. Safety gear is to bring car to stop from governor tripping speed. Make provisions to
release the car safety. In no event the safety is to be released by downward motion of the
car. Raising the car to reset the safety gear is to be allowed. An electrical safety plank
switch is to be provided to interrupt the powder to the hoist machine when the safety gear is
set.
O. Safety Gear Type Test is to be type tested in accordance with EN 81-1 by an approved
independent test body. Certified type test report is to be submitted for approval. Install a
car safety marking plate of corrosion resistant metal and, in addition to the data required by
the governing code, indicate the manufacturer's name and manufacturer's catalogue
designation number for the safety gear.
P. Governor is to be accurately adjusted and sealed to trip safety gear according to EN81-1
requirements. Operation of governor on over speed is also a switch disconnecting power
from motor and brake control circuits, which are to be open before safety gear is applied.
Restoration of powder is not to be possible until safety gear has been manually re-set.
Governor is to be sealed and tagged in accordance with EN 81-1.
Q. Governor Ropes: the over speed governor is to be driven by a wire rope designed for that
purpose with minimum diameter of 6 mm and to be easily detachable from the safety gear.
The ratio between the pitch diameter of the pulleys for the over speed governor ropes and
the nominal rope diameter shall be at least 30. The over speed governor rope is to be
tensioned by a tensioning guided pulley. Design the governor rope-tripping device so that no
appreciable damage to or deformation of the governor rope is to result from the stopping
action of the device in operating the car safety.
R. Counter Weight Safety Gear: provide a governor actuated mechanical safety gear under the
counterweight for all lifts having occupied space below their hoistways.
2.5 DOORS
A. Opening Sizes: Landing and car door openings are to be same size.
B. Automatic Sliding Car And Landing Doors: Power operated type, to open silently, and to
have the following features:
1. Hangers and tracks of two-point suspension ball or roller bearing type; doors guided at
bottom by gibs in grooved sill; grooves and tracks cleaned automatically by operation
of doors.
2. Safety device, extending full height of each door and projecting beyond front edge, to
automatically open car and landing doors if it touches an obstruction.
3. Light-beam and photo-electric cell device to open doors when light-beam is
interrupted and to automatically optimize time of opening and re-closing.
4. Doors are to open automatically and simultaneously when car stops at required floor,
are to remain open for a reasonable, adjustable period, and automatically and
simultaneously close, as set in elevator control sequence.
5. 'Door Open' push button on car control panel is to reverse door closing operation, but
is not to open an interlocked door.
6. Door contact to prevent operation of the car unless the car door is in the closed
position. The door contacts are not be readily accessible from the inside of the car.
7. Nudging facility so that if the doors are held. Open for a predetermined time (15 to 20
seconds) by interrupting the lighting beams or by holding the door, or by pressing the
door open button, a buzzer is to sound and the doors is to start to close at reduced rate
of speed. Doors are to continue to close unless the door force limits is not exceeded,
which is to cause doors to reopen or stop. Process is to continue until obstruction is
removed from entrance.
8. All landing doors to be 2 hours fire related as per British Standards, except glass door
of panoramic lifts.
C. Electric door operator, driven by electric motor minimum IP 21, is to open and close car and
landing doors simultaneously where a car door is provided. Door operation is to be
automatically controlled by elevator control system, with facility to manually reverse door
closing operation from car control panel. Doors are to be mechanically secured and
electrically interlocked when closed. Electric door operator is to have the following
features:
1. Multi-speed electric motor driving unit, mounted on car frame (independently from
car body), with necessary gears, levers and door arms to achieve smooth operation of
doors in both directions and an opening speed higher than closing speed.
2. Digital closed-loop system to monitor and control the door speed.
3. Torque limiting clutch to prevent harm to persons caught by closing door, but to
overcome small obstructions in bottom guide track.
4. Manual opening of doors is to be possible in the event of power failure, if car is at
landing, landing door is to open with car door; mechanism is to reset automatically.
5. For installations, in which doors commence opening while car is leveling to landing,
mechanical and electrical devices are to ensure no dangerous situation can occur
during this period.
D. Emergency Doors: for express runs exceeding 11m, provide emergency landing door every
11m. Emergency landing doors are to be automatic, sliding, central opening, of same type,
size and finish of the landing doors of the same lift group, 2 hours fire rated and to be
provided by the lift supplier.
E. Door Frames and Sills: Door support units fitted at landing entrance are to be self-
contained, comprising sill, two angle uprights and head. Non-slip sill is to be fitted at each
landing and car entrance. Architraves are to be fixed at each landing.
A. Motor Drive: unless otherwise indicated or specified, use 3-phase, solid state, and variable-
voltage variable-frequency (VVVF) power drive with regulated closed loop speed
monitoring control system. Drive is to utilize IGBT power semi-conductors having means
for heat dissipation and overheat protection (include thermal overload). Drive units are to be
provided with isolation transformers and smoothing reactors to eliminate mechanical
vibration from ripple voltage transients. Matched motor (high efficiency vector design)
including encoder for speed feedback is to be provided. Air blower is to be used for thermal
dissipation over the entire range of operation and stall.
B. Continuous Operation: drive is to be designed for continuous operation at rated speed and
rated load, and for 10 minutes at rated speed and 110 percent of rated load, without
overheating. Ensure that, in such operating conditions, normal power sources are not
adversely affected and emergency generator circuits (and loads connected to the emergency
power bus) are not adversely affected during Standby Power operation. Protect each power
feed line against surge currents. Prevent runaway in the event of closed loop feedback
circuit failure.
C. Electronic Negative Feedback System: is to be used to limit current through IGBT’s and
motor, incorporating:
D. Power Line Noise is to be limited to a voltage distortion factor and line notch as defined in
IEEE 519-1981 Edition, "Guide for Harmonic Control and Reactive Compensation of Static
Power Converters". The total voltage distortion is not to exceed 3 percent. Necessary filters
are to be provided to limit the feedback current harmonics to 10%.
E. Overall Drive System Response: arrange system response so that the elapsed time between
fault detection and removal of electric power does not exceed 0.1 second. Overall drive
efficiency is to be greater than 95 percent. Power factor is to be 0.95 minimum.
F. Power Supply: equipments are to be designed to operate at ± 10 percent supply voltage and
± 3 percent supply frequency, without damage to any equipment and to operate at ± 5
percent supply voltage and ± 3 percent supply frequency without affecting operational
performance quality. Protective devices are to be provided for both over-voltage and under-
voltage conditions. Protect against loss of phase, phase reversal or overload. Incoming
power supply is to be provided with contactor inside the control panel.
digital control, with adjustments that do not vary, drift or age with line voltage
changes.
over-torque detection, to shut down the drive and protect the motor.
diagnostic record of the history of the lift operating conditions, from the
instant of the last fault occurrence back 30 days minimum, and to include the
following as a minimum:
Emergency Faults
Fire service activation
Inspection mode
Independent Service
Time out of service
Car out of service
Safety Edge failure
Emergency Power
quiet motor operation, based on high switching frequencies and low harmonic
content.
I. Wiring: install copper wiring runs are to be neatly installed. Wire is to be terminated at
studs or terminal strips, with connections to ensure substantial electrical and mechanical
integrity. All major components are to be exactly identified as indicated on wiring diagrams
by engravings or tags mounted immediately adjacent to the component.
J. Enclosure is to be a sheet metal cabinet totally enclosed, IP 21 with removable hinged doors
(key-locked) and with filtered ventilation sufficient to maintain interior temperature at a
reasonable level.
K. Auxiliary Emergency Supply: control system is to operate from rectified a.c. supply, at a
suitably selected and approved d.c. voltage. Negative terminal is to be connected to earth.
Battery is to be sealed nickel cadmium type, capable of operating intercom, car fan, car
lights and alarm circuits for 4 hours, in the event of power failure.
2.8 CONTROLLER
A. Enclosure: Vertical, totally enclosed cubicle type, constructed from sheet steel, with hinged
doors at front and ventilation louvers or other approved method to ensure that inside
temperature does not exceed safe limit for equipment.
B. Components are to include all contactors, relays, logic circuits, selectors, timing devices,
control transformers and apparatus associated with control of elevator in machine room.
Circuit breaker and isolator may be wall mounted outside controller cubicle, next to main
supply feeder, but opening of cubicle door is to trip circuit breaker, cutting off power
supply.
interlocked to prevent contacts for one direction closing whilst contacts for other direction
are closed.
D. Insulation for coils and other insulated components is to be Class B or better, suitable for
ambient temperatures at location.
F. Auxiliary Emergency Supply: Control system is to operate from rectified a.c. supply, at a
suitably selected and approved d.c. voltage. Negative terminal is to be connected to earth.
Battery is to be sealed lead-acid type, capable of operating all controls, car fan, lights and
alarm circuits for 6 hours, in the event of power failure.
G. Interface with BMS: each equipment shall be provided with additional free contact points
required for direct interfacing with the BMS provide and 5% spare contacts capacity for
additional future requirements. It’s the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure proper
interfacing through the provision of dedicated interfaces, after coordination with the BMS
Contractor.
C. Wires and cables inside machine room are to be silicon rubber or PVC insulated, 600/1000
V grade, flame retardant. MICC and silicon rubber insulated cables are to be used for high
ambient temperatures. Conductors are to be copper.
D. Conduits and Wireways: Wiring and unarmored cables are to be enclosed in heavy gauge
galvanized steel conduits or wireways as per EN81-1: 1998.
A. General: Provide all necessary car, landing and other control accessories as required by
specified control system.
B. Car locked service cabinet is to be flush mounted, located below the car call buttons and
contain the switches required to operate and maintain the lift, including, but not limited to
the following:
D. Car control station is to project below bottom of car platform. Trailing control cable is to
terminate at terminal block on control station. Access to terminals is to be from inside car.
E. Car control station is to project above car roof and is to contain necessary control pushes for
maintenance, lamp with switch and convenience power socket.
F. Directional Indicator Inside Car: Arrow in green display, fitted in car control panel to
indicate to passengers entering, the direction of travel.
G. Chime for passengers’ elevators / Gong for service elevators is to be provided to indicate
arrival.
I. Position indicators are to be dynamic LED, display, and indicating floor, fitted in car control
panel and above landing entrance at main floor. Position indicators are to have finished face
plates of material specified in schedules for back of the house elevators and as per ID
specification in ID’s area..
J. Hall Push Buttons At Landings: Comprise up and down pushes and associated illuminated
arrows to indicate registered call. Terminal landings are to have one push and one arrow.
Illuminated arrow is to switch off when call is answered. Push buttons are to be most up-to-
date, mechanical, soft touch, plated metal framed and squarely fitting in face panel Refer to
refer to ID specifications for finishes of non-public lifts.
K. Hall Push Button Operation: prevent simultaneous up and down call registration by delaying
acceptance of second call registration for 4 seconds (adjustable).
L. Elevator bank control panel is to be provided for each elevator bank, and conveniently
located in main elevator lobby or control/supervisory room. Arrangement and design of
panel are to be approved. Control and operating devices are to be properly identified by
engraved signs. Panel is to include the following:
1. Illuminated position and travel direction indicators for each elevator of the bank.
2. Service switches, and internal regulating or adjusting devices etc. in accordance with
system requirements.
3. Control switches, alarm sounder and signal lights as needed.
M. Fireman switch, installed in a locked cabinet with break glass feature, is to be provided for
each elevator bank. Cabinets are to be located at main landing floor, in an approved easily
accessible position. Identification and inscription are to be engraved on the face plate.
Refer to "Control Systems" Article for description of operation.
N. Hall Fireman Key Switch: two positions (ON-OFF) key operated fireman switch is to be
provided for each fire fighter lift, located at main landing floor in an approved easily
accessible position. The key is to be removable in both “ON” and “OFF” positions.
Identification and inscription are to be engraved on the face plate. Contractor is to
coordinate between lift packages for providing common fire man-key switches for all
package
A. Interlock: No car is to be able to move unless car and corresponding landing doors are fully
closed and interlocked. It is not to be possible to open landing door, except that at which car
is stopped, and any other door without the use of special tamperproof key.
B. Emergency Stop: Operation of emergency stop device in any car is to bring this car to an
immediate stop and it is to remain stopped until device is reset. This is not to cancel
registered calls.
C. Independent Operation: All passenger lifts are to be provided with independent operation
features and when independent key switch is turned “on”, lift is to be removed from
automatic operation and is to respond only to car calls. Door is not to close until for another
landing is pressed. Switch is to be located on car operating panel.
D. Operation from Emergency Generator Supply: in the event of normal power supply failure
all lifts are to stop. Upon receiving signal that emergency a.c. power supply is on, control
system is to return lifts one at a time, in sequence, directly to main floor. When lift arrives
at main floor, doors are to open and remain open, and lift is to remain stopped. One lift of
each group in addition to all fire fighter lifts is then to be operational, and is to respond to
car and landing calls. After restoration of normal power supply all lifts are to resume
normal service automatically. Transfer to and from emergency supply is to be carried out
through dry contacts in the respective Automatic Transfer Switches.
E. Operation from Emergency Power Batteries: If the normal power supply fails to start, lifts
are to automatically switch to battery operation. Each lift is to move in the “light” direction
at maintenance speed and is to stop at the nearest available floor, open its door for passenger
to exit then close and wait for the operation from the Emergency Supply, when normal
power is restored before the lift has reached the next available floor the lifts operating on
emergency battery power is to stop at the next available floor and be automatically removed
from service. Emergency battery power is then to be disconnected and normal power is to
sealed lead acid type.
F. Excess Load: Load-weighing device installed in car is to prevent car from starting in either
direction if maximum loading is exceeded (adjustable from 100% of cull capacity and set at
100%). Buzzer is to sound and an 'overweight' light is to be illuminated until car is below
maximum load. Excess load is to cause car to by-pass landing calls if car is loaded above
normal but within an acceptable load limit.
G. Overload bypass: excess load is to cause car to bypass landing calls if car is loaded above
normal but within an acceptable load limit. Load capacity is to be set at 70% (adjustable
from 60 – 80% of full load capacity) car load factor of 70% is to be used for all traffic
analysis.
Cancel all cars and landing calls, prevent operation of door photocells if provided and bring
all cars to stop at main landing, with automatic doors open. Resetting of switch manually is
not to be possible. Operation of special switch is to separate elevator control, cancel all
landing calls and prevent operation of photocells of doors. Car is to resume operation
manually from car push buttons.
Automatically illuminate all Lighting fixture installed inside the machine room and
firefighter elevator shaft.
I. Anti-Nuisance Feature: in the event of car loading or operation is not commensurate with
the number of car call registered, all calls are to be cancelled.
J. Fire Emergency Service: meet local civil defense regulations for lifts fire emergency
operating conditions – fire emergency operation mode of lifts is to be activated via the
following:
The main landing floor for the fire fighter lifts under fire conditions, at which the hall
fireman key switches are to be installed, is the floor where the main fire control room
is located. It could be different from the main landing floor for same lifts under
normal conditions.
When a hall fireman key-operated switch is put in the "on" position, all relevant hotel
lifts which are on automatic service are to return non-stop to the main landing floor
and the doors are to open and remain open.
Car(s) travelling away from the main landing floor are to stop at the next available
floor without opening their doors and return directly to the main landing floor.
For cars equipped with automatic power-operated doors, standing at a floor other than
the main landing floor with doors open, the doors are to close immediately and the
car is to proceed to the main landing floor.
Door reopening devices for power-operated doors which are sensitive to smoke, heat
or flame are to be rendered inoperative.
All car and landing floor call buttons are to be rendered inoperative and all call
registered lights and direction lanterns are to be switched off and remain inoperative.
when the switch is in the "off" position the lift shall revert to normal operation.
The activation of fire alarm detection device in any lift lobby, other than at the main
landing floor, is to cause all cars that serve that lobby to return non-stop to the main
landing floor and their doors are to open and remain open.
The activation of fire alarm detection device in any lift machine room is to cause all
lifts having any equipment located in that machine room, and any associated lifts of a
group automatic operation, to return non-stop to the main landing floor and their
doors are to open and remain open.
The activation of fire alarm detection device in any lift hoistway is to cause all lifts
having any equipment located in the hoistway and any associated lifts in a group
automatic operation, to return non-stop to the main landing floor and their doors are
to open and remain open.
If the fire alarm detection device at the main landing floor is activated, the cars are to
return non-stop to an alternate level, approved by the concerned authority, and their
doors are to open and remain open.
The operation of the lift requires the manual resetting of the fire alarm system.
M. Fire Fighter Lifts: only fire fighter lifts can resume operation under fire emergency
conditions from car push buttons by activation of the car fire emergency key switch. The car
fire emergency switch is to be effective only when the hall fireman key switch at the main
landing floor is in the "on" position or the fire alarm detection device (if provided) is
activated and the car is at the main landing floor. The car key is to be removable only in the
"off" position. When the car key switch is in the "on" position, it is to bring the lift into the
emergency mode. Emergency operation from inside the car is to be cancelled when the hall
fireman key switch is switched to the "off" position with the car at the main landing floor
N. Fire Fighter Lift Operation Under Fire Emergency Conditions is to be as follows after
activation of the car fire emergency key switch:
A. Generally: Supply loose equipment, spare parts and accessories as required for normal
operation and routine maintenance of the systems and as detailed by the Contractor in his
offer for spare parts and accessories. Supply is to include, but is not limited to, the
following:
1. Loose Equipment: Operating handles, emergency brake release keys and the like.
2. Spare Parts: One complete set of main contacts and control coil for each type of
power contactor, solid-state PC cards, contacts and control coils for each type of
control relay, two each of transistors, diodes, rectifiers, resistors etc. used in control
circuits, one complete set of indicating lamps, fuses, capacitors, circuit-breakers,
contact points etc., air filters, brushes, bearings and the like, as necessary for two
years operation.
3. Tools and Accessories: Tools and equipment required for routine checking,
maintenance, testing and control of installations, with appropriate portable measuring
and test instruments.
B. Identification: Parts are to be packed in sealed plastic bags with identifying labels and
factory part list numbers.
locate the alarm button and car call buttons on the car operating panel where possible
as required by part M.
provide car control buttons and hall push buttons with tactile marking, the tactile
marking shall be in compliance with part M.
the centerline of the hall push button stations is to be 1100 mm above the floor where
possible.
the hall lanterns are to sound once for the "up" direction and twice for the “down"
direction.
A. System: computerized lift remote monitoring and command system complete including
software and necessary data and communication network is to be provided for all elevators
moving walk and escalators of the project. All material and installation requirements of the
communication network within the project are to be coordinated with lift supplier and are to
be as per his requirements. Panel is to be located at the control room.
B. Software Package: the software is to cover all required monitoring and command functions,
maintenance program requirements in coordination with the maintenance contract and
necessary communications and interfaces with lift control system and other concerned
systems.
C. System: lift remote monitoring and command system is to include a state-of-art, multicolour
high resolution, minimum 17-inch display, personal computer with adequate mass storage
capacity and a dedicated high quality printer. Monitoring and command facility is to be
provided in each machine room, either through local fixed or portable computer unit.
Equipment specifications are to be submitted for the Engineer’s approval.
Graphic status display of an elevation representation for all cars in a group are to be shown
in the same time for each group including the following as a minimum:
Floor status
Car status
Hall calls
Tabular status display is to include as a minimum the same information as above except for
registered hall and car calls.
E. Lift Alarm and Event Data Display: lift remote monitoring and command system is to
monitor various discrete signals from the lift system and retain a log of alarms, fault and
events. An audible alarm with adjustable volume and silencer is to automatically sound at
each lift failure and or alarm condition.
F. Security Display and Command Operation: system is to display one group at a time and is to
allow through keyboard commands modification of the security status of the car in the
group, including floors the car is allowed to serve, floors that the car is secured from serving
and floors that are cut out from having hall calls registered from them.
G. Interactive Lift Operations Display and Control: the ability to use the keyboard to initiate
and display interactive lift, including but not limited to, the following is to be provided:
Alarm messages
H. Traffic Analysis Display: system is to be capable for viewing various reports generated from
the data including the following as a minimum:
I. Historical Data: system is to be capable of providing full historical data for minimum 30
days, and tendering for modes of operations, failures, alarms, maintenance requirements as a
minimum.
I-O tables and charts, showing output bus and input signals,
A. Intercom: provide an intercommunication system for all lifts. System is to provide two-way
communication between the lift car stations and the master stations.
master station in the main control room of each tower and podium.
D. Master Station is to be provided with selector push buttons, annunciator lights for each
connected station, speaker microphone, volume control and function buttons. The intercom
system is to include test button to verify audio circuit path.
E. Car Intercom Call: an intercom call is to be placed from the lift car station by pressing the
emergency alarm push button. This action is to cause the lamp in the corresponding button
of all the designated master stations to flash and an intermittent tone to be heard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements,
installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of elevator work.
Examine hoistways, hoistway openings, pits, and machine rooms, as constructed; verify
critical dimensions; and examine supporting structure and other conditions under which
elevator work is to be installed. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work required during
installation.
B. Coordination: Coordinate elevator work with work of other trades for proper time and
sequence to avoid construction delays. Use established benchmarks, lines, and levels to
ensure dimensional coordination of the Work. Ccordinate equipment installations with the
building construction to prevent alteration to structure and cutting of holes and chases after
equipment installation has started. Ensure provision of pit screen separators between
adjacent elevators and for screening off counterweight to a height of 2.5 m from bottom of
pit for safety of maintenance personnel and provide steel access ladders for pits having no
external doors. Carry out necessary coordination with electrical works to provide necessary
power supply, interfaces, dry contacts and connection with automatic transfer switch and
fire alarm system.
C. Assembly: equipment is, as far as possible, to be factory assembled, wired and tested. Site
work is to be limited to installation and assembly of parts dismantled at factory for
transportation, or otherwise to work not possible at factory.
D. Workmanship: Carry out work in a neat, workmanlike and efficient manner in accordance
with specified requirements. Installation is to be performed by skilled personnel,
specialized in elevator installation, who are in the permanent employment of the
manufacturer or manufacturer's authorized dealer.
F. Builder's Work: Carry out all builders’ work necessarily required in connection with
installation of elevators, including but not limited to, forming or cutting chases, rebates, etc.,
grouting, supports, steelwork, scaffolding, etc. Provide convenience power, lighting and
other services required, from assigned terminal points, to carry out construction work.
G. Elevator Shafts: Ensure that entrance shaft wall is in same vertical plane as face of landing
doors and that whole face is perfectly smooth. Gap between shaft wall and car door sill is
not to exceed 10 mm for whole length of shaft.
H. Fixing Elevator Guide Rails: Keep rails in proper alignment using steel splice plates of
adequate strength. Verticality of rail is to be within 0.2% tolerance. Space fixing brackets
to minimize rail vibration during operation, and at not more than 2 m centres.
of sills and doors until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe,
workable dimension at each landing.
N. Set sills flush with finished: Floor surface at landing coordinate with other trades to
facilitate and ensure proper grouting of sills.
A. TESTS: after installation is complete and before hand- over, carry out all tests required by
the Governing Regulations and Standards and including but not limited to the following:
Load the car to various percentages of rated capacity, and test load related features
including: dispatch, bypass, anti-nuisance, levelling, door operation, etc.
Test performance parameters in both travel directions and for various loads (0%, 40%
& 100% of rated capacity): speed, operating time, levelling, door operation, dwell
times, door protection, acceleration and jerk rate.
Inspect machinery spaces, electrical and mechanical devices on the car and in the
hoistway, for conformance with specified requirements and to industry standards.
Run the car to simulate responses to all lift and machine room inspection and service
utilities.
Check control system features, including all special or emergency services and
utilities. Obtain (or simulate) signals initiating special and emergency services and
utilities, and run the lift to demonstrate its response characteristics.
If equipment does not meet specified requirements, make necessary corrections and
provide again (similarly) for another test sequence.
Carry out any other tests the Engineer may require to check safety and compliance of
installation with the Specification. Tests are to be witnessed by the Engineer and, if
required, by the authority concerned.
B. Performance Test: approximately nine months after Substantial Completion of the entire lift
plant supply test weights and a senior team to carry out performance testing including but
not limited to the following:
Assist the Engineer with tests and inspections of car, drive and control system, as
well as other operating features.
special or emergency services and utility features. Record operation for typical day
and night traffic over 24-hours, as directed by Lift Consultant.
Submit detailed raw test data (both hard and soft copy) to the Engineer, as well as
hard copy reports with data summaries, for such time-intervals and recording
conditions as stipulated by the Engineer.
Submit real time videotape (or approved equivalent) for review by the Engineer.
If equipment does not meet specified requirements, make necessary corrections and
provide again (similarly) for another test sequence
C. Equipment Failure: make good any damage to equipment caused by tests or damage to
building caused by failure of any part of the installation, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
E. Advise Employer, Engineer, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and
times tests are to be performed on elevators.
F. Tests: After installation is complete and prior to Substantial Completion, carry out all tests
including free-fall tests, load and speed tests, and other tests required by the Governing
Regulations and Standards. Carry out any other tests the Engineer may require to check
safety and compliance of installation with specified requirements. Tests are to be witnessed
by the Engineer and, if required, by the authorities having jurisdiction.
G. Equipment Failure: Repair and make good any damage to equipment caused by tests or
damage to building caused by failure of any part of the installation, to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
H. Organization of Tests: Provide all labor, materials and instruments required for tests.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
B. Braking Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and install escalators to stop the escalator in the
up-running mode at a rate no greater than that allowed by the "Code" for the down-running
mode.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each escalator. Include capacities, sizes, performances, safety features,
finishes, and similar information.
B. Shop Drawings: For each escalator. Show plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale
details indicating coordination with building structure and relationships with other
construction. Indicate variations from specified requirements, maximum dynamic and static
loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and power requirements. Indicate
access and ventilation for escalator machine space and wellways.
C. Samples: For exposed finishes, 75-mm square samples of sheet materials, and 100-mm
lengths of running trim members.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects/engineers and owners, and
other information specified or required by Engineer.
E. Maintenance Manuals: For each different escalator, including operation and maintenance
instructions, parts listing with sources indicated, recommended parts inventory listing,
emergency instructions, and similar information. Include all diagnostic and repair
information available to manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance personnel. Submit for
Employer's information at project closeout as specified in Division 1.
G. Certificates and Permits: Provide Employer with inspection and acceptance certificates and
operating permits as required by governing authorities for normal, unrestricted use of
escalators.
1.7 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
1. Kone (Finland)
2. Fujitec, Inc (Japan)
3. Mitsubishi (Japan)
4. Otis Elevator Co. (USA or France)
5. Shindler Elevator Corp (Switzerland)
A. Escalators Components: are to be designed to give a life of 150,000 hours based upon the
load profile specified by the BS EN-115. The escalators are to be of proven technology and
designed to have low energy consumption, low operational cost and are to be environment
friendly.
C. Machine Soffit: Smooth steel plate, 4 mm thick, welded and made oil-tight to side members
of main truss, installed beneath step band over whole area of escalator, and having oil drain
pit in bottom reversing station.
D. Floor Coverings: Stationary parts of escalator are to be heavy duty aluminium profiles.
Groove beds of floor surfaces are to be black anodized, and upper surfaces are to be
smoothed to the base metal frames, and set flush with finished floor. Floor coverings in area
of machine installations are to be squarely seated and tighty fitted to prevent noise
development.
E. Steps: Die-cast, corrosion proof, aluminium alloy with front edges grooved vertically so
that edges of tread surfaces enmesh in grooves. Tread and front-edge surfaces of steps are
not to end in a groove under balustrade skirting. Front edge between tread and front face is
to be rounded or bevelled. Four support rollers to each step are to be at least 76 mm outside
diameter and are to run on ball bearings completely encapsulated against dust and water (RS
sealing), with lifetime lubrication, without lube nipples. Step chain rollers are to be fitted
outside or inside chain link plates, depending upon manufacturer's design, and are to be at
least 80 mm diameter. Running treads (tires) of rollers are to be non-ageing, hardwearing,
noise-dampening and oil and acid-resistant synthetic rubber (e.g. NBR nitrile rubber).
Treads are to be at least 15 mm thick and 25 mm wide. Rapid removal of steps is to be
possible at both upper and lower ends of escalator without removing balustrade panels or
skirting plates. Assembled steps and any attachments to steps are not allowed.
F. Comb Plates And Combs: Comb segments are to be die-cast aluminium alloy, maximum
200 mm wide, easily exchanged, and with safety contacts on comb teeth. Combs are to be
bevelled so that there is no danger of persons tripping when leaving escalator. Bevel angle
is not to exceed 20 degrees to horizontal. Tread surface of comb plates is to be finished as
floor coverings.
G. Handrails: Endless, high-quality vulcanized rubber composition with fabric insert, sliding
layer of nylon webbing and steel cord. Required frictional contact to handrail drive wheel is
to be ensured by drive mechanism. Handrail guides are to be stainless steel with minimum
breaking strength of 25 kN.
H. Lighting: provide four comb lights at each end. Lighting details are subject to Engineer /
Architects approval.
I. Lubrication: Main drive chain, step band chains and handrail drive chain are to be
connected to automatic lubricating system with electrical lube oil pump and dosing unit. Oil
supply is to be sufficient for at least one month's operation. Float switch is to be provided to
monitor oil level in reservoir and to give alarm to control cabinet in the event of low
lubricant level. All bearing points of rotating components are to be fitted with roller/ball
bearings, hermetically sealed against dirt and water. Where bearings require lubrication by
grease guns, functional discharge openings are to be provided for used grease..
J. Bolted Connections: Secure bolts by self- locking nuts or locking rings. Only high-tensile
bolts are to be used.
K. Corrosion Protection: Main supporting truss is to be shot-blasted and finished with two
coats zinc dust paint, and one coat iron mica (each coat 40 microns). All traces of rust are to
be thoroughly removed from steel components before painting.
L. Balustrades: Inner balustrades, skirtings, outer balustrades, central balustrades and floor
coverings are to be as shown on Drawings, and to the following specification:
1. Inner balustrades are to be designed to be slim line type and made of toughened
safety glass thickness 10mm . Handrail guides are to be practically invisible and sit
centrally on the glass panel. The balustrade is to be all glass with vertically arranged
panels, without supports. Height of the balustrade is to be minimum 1000mm over the
entire length of the escalator. Glass panel joints are to be in line with the inner and
outer decking joints. The trims between glass panels and inner and outer deckings are
to be made of aluminium profiles black colour.
2. Inner and outer deckings are to be made of at least 2mm thick stainless steel (finish
according to Engineer/Architect’s choice). Deckings are to be done in the curved
version, mitered version is not allowed.
4. Visible sides and underside of each escalator are to be cladded with bended stainless
steel panels of 1.5 mm thickness. Joints of this cladding-panels are to be in line with
joints of glass panels. Finish is to be according to the Engineer/Architect’s choice.
A. Generally: complete drive unit including the handrail driving system is to be according to
the manufacturer’s standard located within the upper truss envelop. All drive components
are to be easy accessible. All drive components are to be designed for a continuous running
of 22 hours per day / 7 days a week under an appropriate load profile (see below). Provide
an automatic lubrication system for drive chains, and include drive chain monitoring
contacts. Each escalator is to be equipped with an auxiliary brake. Design the escalator gear
in such a way that an oil change is not necessary for at least 30,000 hours. An oil level
switch is to be provided to monitor the gear box oil level. The overall mechanical efficiency
of the complete drive including motor is not to be less than 90%. Details of complete drive
system are to be submitted with the tender. The load profile is to be 6h at full load, 6h at
50% load, 6h at 25% load, 4h at standby speed (no load).
B. Input stage of drive is to be a worm-gear for noise suppression. Worm shaft is to be case
hardened and ground, and gear rim of worm wheel is to be hard-wearing special bronze.
D. Drive components, including motor, and variable voltage variable frequency (VVVF) for
nominal speed, standby speed and service speed are to be suitable for continuous operation.
E. Bearings used in machine transmissions are to be top quality roller/ball bearings with
minimal noise development. Plain friction or sleeve bearings are not to be used.
G. Electric Motor: Totally enclosed, fan cooled protection IP 65, fitted with low noise life-time
lubricated roller/ball bearings, especially designed for escalators according to the
manufacturer standard. Motor is to be provided in class F insulation with temperature rise
not exceeding class B limits.
J. Safety brake is to be provided, in addition to service brake, on main drive shaft assembly,
and is to engage after an adjustable time-lag setting. Safety brake is to be actuated by brake
release solenoid, manually resettable only, and is to engage in the event of power failure, by
stop push button, or operation of any safety device.
K. Step Guides: Guides for step chains and step rollers are to be hot-dip galvanized steel
sections with smooth and even surfaces. Joints are to be formed diagonally in direction of
travel. Guides are to be designed so that front edges of emerging steps, and rear edges of
disappearing steps, follow a horizontal path at least equal to depth of three steps. Guides are
to ensure that gap between step and balustrade skirting does not exceed 4 mm at either side
or 7 mm at both sides cumulatively.
L. Step Chains: High precision rolled, flat link, hardened chains, provided in pairs of equal
length. Pins, sleeves and rollers are to be case-hardened and ground. Spur racks or gear
chains are not to be used. Step chains and chain pins are to be 14.6 mm minimum diameter.
Material for chain pins is to be 23 Cr Mo B33. Chain pitch is not to exceed 135 mm.
A. Generally: Electrical installation comprises connection of all wiring systems from control
cabinet to various control devices.
B. Control Cabinet: Each escalator is to have individual instrument and control gear cabinet
with transparent front cover, protection IP 55, shed mounted and located within upper
escalator station (drive station), and comprising main circuit breaker, motor control gear,
protective devices, relays, cut-off and tripping displays, etc.
C. Control equipment is to include, in addition to the above, a fault finding digital panel with
warning lights, located behind lockable cover in upper balustrade newel. Each safety
contact is to be connected to one warning light. Cancelling is only to be possible using a
separate switch in the balustrade. Key operated switch (up/down) for starting escalator is to
be provided in handrail newel.
F. Main Circuit Breaker: Thermal magnetic type, with inverse time-overcurrent, instantaneous
and adjustable earth fault protection. Circuit breaker is to be lockable, and with shunt trip
coil for safety trips.
G. Terminal Identification: All terminals are to be marked. All cables are to have coding
colours and numbered ferrules.
H. Wiring is to be arranged neatly and clearly in conduits and terminated on shrouded terminal
blocks.
I. Electrical cables in main truss are to be moisture and heat resistant and flame retardant with
PVC/E insulation and sheathing, and are to have 1000 V rating.
J. Maintenance power circuit at 220V, 60 Hz is to be provided for power and lighting sockets.
Dual sockets for power and lighting are to be provided at drive and tensioning stations.
L. Maintenance sockets for plugging in maintenance push button control device for testing
operation of escalator are to be provided at upper and lower stations, with maintenance
control extension device and sufficient cable length.
A. Operation: Safety devices are to automatically interrupt power supply to drive motor and
brake, thereby inducing braking of escalator.
A. Generally: Supply loose equipment, spare parts and accessories as required for normal
operation and routine maintenance of the escalator(s) and as detailed by the Contractor in
his offer, for two years continuous operation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine escalator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements,
installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of escalator work.
Examine supporting structure, machine spaces, and pits; verify critical dimensions; and
examine conditions under which escalator work is to be installed. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. For the record, prepare a written report, endorsed by the Installer, listing dimensional
discrepancies and conditions detrimental to the performance of escalator work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work during installation.
B. Set escalators true to line and level, properly supported, and anchored to building structure.
Use established benchmarks, lines, and levels to ensure dimensional coordination of the
Work.
C. Adjust installed components for smooth, efficient operation, complying with required
tolerances and free of hazardous conditions. Lubricate operating parts, including bearings,
tracks, chains, guides, and hardware. Test operating devices, equipment, signals, controls,
and safety devices. Install oil drip pan and check to ensure that no oil drips outside of pan.
D. Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that
cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit,
or provide new units as required.
E. Assembly: Equipment is, as far as possible, to be factory assembled, wired and tested. Site
work is to be limited to installation and assembly of parts dismantled at factory for
transportation, or otherwise to work not possible at factory.
F. Workmanship: Carry out work in a neat, workmanlike and efficient manner in accordance
with the specified requirements. Installation is to be performed by skilled personnel,
specialized in escalator installation, who are in the permanent employment of the
manufacturer or manufacturer's authorized dealer.
H. Builder's Work: Carry out all builders’ work necessarily required in connection with
installation of escalators, including but not limited to forming or cutting chases, rebates, etc.,
grouting, supports, steelwork, scaffolding, etc. Provide convenience power, lighting and
other services required from assigned terminal points, to carry out construction work.
J. Fire Protection: Coordinate installations with mechanical works, for provision of fire/smoke
detection and fire fighting systems.
A. Tests: After installation is complete and prior to Substantial Completion, carry out all tests
required by the Governing Regulations and Standards. Carry out any other tests the
Engineer may require to check safety and compliance of installation with specified
requirements. Tests are to be witnessed by the Engineer and, if required, by the authorities
having jurisdiction. IF equipment does not meet specified requirements, make appropriate
corrections and provide again (similarly) for another test sequence.
B. Equipment Failure: Repair and make good any damage to equipment caused by tests, or
damage to building caused by failure of any part of the installation, to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
C. Organization of Tests: Provide all labour, materials and instruments required for tests.
D. Before test run, ensure that step bands, skirtings and comb segments are in order, no foreign
bodies are in or on escalator, all steps are fitted, main circuit breaker is in closed position,
control switch is in on position, safety devices and protective switches are in operation,
series of safety contacts are closed and manual control device is connected to inspection run
power socket.
E. Test run is to include checking starting from installed service panel, reversing direction of
running from manual control device and checking that actual running direction corresponds
with direction setting, allowing running in each direction for several cycles. Any
adjustments are to be made with inspection control device connected.
G. After testing, check, and if necessary, re-adjust spring tensions on return shaft, handrail
pretension, drive rollers, step inlet and outlet, sag, skirtings, gaps etc., brake stopping
distance, and gear oil level.
A. Factory inspection visits are to cover complete checking and testing of selected units
according to requirements of the specified regulations and standards as well as special
requirements finishes, software and controls. Inspection visits are also to cover spot
checking of manufacture work progress to ensure conformance of the equipment being
fabricated with requirements of the contract. Inspection and test procedures and programs
are to be submitted for approval prior to factory visit.
B. Factory visits are to include for business class air tickets, five star hotel full
accommodations, transportation and all inspections/test expenses.
C. Allow for six man-visit for the Consultant and Client representative to cover all types of
escalators.
A. Acceptance Testing: Upon nominal completion of each escalator installation, and before
permitting the use of escalators (either temporary or permanent), perform acceptance tests as
required and recommended by the "Code" and by governing regulations or agencies.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
3.7 PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement
other Division 15 Sections.
B. Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in Division 15 piping system Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above
ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact
by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather
conditions and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
A. In addition to the requirements shown or specified, comply with the latest current applicable
standards, specifications or codes published by the following organizations:
A. Climatic Conditions: The outdoor design conditions to be adopted for the project are as
follows:
1. Climatic Conditions:
2. Outside Temperatures:
1) Summer
2) Winter
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For dielectric fittings, flexible connectors, mechanical sleeve seals, and
identification materials and devices.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation for metal supports and anchorage for
mechanical materials and equipment.
1. Planned piping layout, including valve and specialty locations and valve-stem
movement.
2. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation.
3. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, accessories, and specialties,
including space for disassembly required for periodic maintenance.
4. Equipment and accessory service connections and support details.
5. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.
6. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.
7. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.
8. Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into building
during construction.
9. Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and
ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.
10. Reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installation of air outlets and inlets,
light fixtures, communication system components, sprinklers, ceiling access panels
and other ceiling-mounted items.
11. Mechanical equipment rooms.
12. Interstitial space.
E. Samples: Of color, lettering style, and other graphic representation required for each
identification material and device.
H. Where US material or reference standards are specified or indicated, compliance with the
equivalent British Standard (BS) is acceptable.
A. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing
angles of identification devices.
D. Products Criteria:
render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during
the warranty period of the contract.
3. Multiple Units: When 2 or more units of materials or equipment of the same type or
class are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer.
4. Assembled Units: Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which use components
made by others, assume complete responsibility for the final assembled product.
5. Nameplates: Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or identifiable trademark shall
be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment, or name or trademark cast
integrally with equipment, stamped or otherwise permanently marked on each item of
equipment.
6. Asbestos products or equipment or materials containing asbestos shall not be used.
F. Provide copies of approved equipment submittals to the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
Subcontractor.
G. Electrical Requirements: Furnish motors, controllers, disconnects and contactors with their
respective pieces of equipment. Motors, controllers, disconnects and contactors shall
conform to and have electrical connections provided under division 16. Furnish internal
wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment.
Extended voltage range motors will not be permitted. Controllers and contactors shall have
a maximum of 220-volt control circuits, and shall have auxiliary contacts for use with the
controls furnished. Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70 and
requirements specified herein.
1.8 WELDING
A. The Contractor is entirely responsible for the quality of the welding and shall:
1. Conduct tests of the welding procedures used by his organization, determine the
suitability of the procedures used, determine that the welds made will meet the
required tests, and also determine that the welding operators have the ability to make
sound welds under standard conditions.
B. Qualification of Welders: Rules of procedure for qualification of all welders and general
requirements for fusion welding shall conform with the applicable portions of ASME B31.1,
Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications, and AWS B2.1, and / or, as
approved by the Qualifications."
C. Examining Welder: Examine each welder at job site, in the presence of the Resident
Engineer, to determine the ability of the welder to meet the qualifications required. Test
welders for piping for all positions, including welds with the axis horizontal (not rolled) and
with the axis vertical. Each welder shall be allowed to weld only in the position in which he
has qualified and shall be required to identify his welds with his specific code marking
signifying his name and number assigned.
D. Examination Results: Provide the Resident Engineer with a list of names and corresponding
code markings. Retest welders who fail to meet the prescribed welding qualifications.
Disqualify welders, who fail the second test, for work on the project.
E. Beveling: Field bevels and shop bevels shall be done by mechanical means or by flame
cutting. Where beveling is done by flame cutting, surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of
scale and oxidation just prior to welding. Conform to specified standards.
F. Alignment: Utilize split welding rings or approved alternate method for joints on all pipes
above 50 mm to assure proper alignment, complete weld penetration, and prevention of
weld spatter reaching the interior of the pipe.
G. Erection: Piping shall not be split, bent, flattened, or otherwise damaged either before,
during, or after installation.
H. Defective Welds: Replace and re-inspect defective welds. Repairing defective welds by
adding weld material over the defect or by peening will not be permitted. Welders
responsible for defective welds must be re-qualified.
I. Electrodes: Electrodes shall be stored in a dry heated area, and be kept free of moisture and
dampness during the fabrication operations. Discard electrodes that have lost part of their
coating.
A. Metallic materials shall be protected against corrosion. Equipment enclosures shall be given
rust-inhibiting treatment and standard finish by the manufacturer. Aluminum shall not be
used in contact with earth, and where connected to dissimilar metal, shall be protected by
approved fittings, barrier material, or treatment. Ferrous parts such as anchors, bolts,
braces, boxes, bodies, clamps, fittings, guards, nuts, pins, rods, shims, thimbles, washers,
and miscellaneous parts not of corrosion-resistant steel or nonferrous materials shall be hot-
dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123/A 123M for exterior locations and
cadmium-plated in conformance with ASTM B 766 for interior locations.
A. The equipment supplied shall be packed for protection against damage during handling,
transport, warehousing and installation. The efficiency of the packing shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall repair or replace any damaged items,
at no additional cost, as instructed by the Engineer even after delivery of the equipment, if it
is proven that the damage was caused by packing, storage, or handling deficiencies.
B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
C. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed
structural capacity of floor, if stored inside.
D. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.
E. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
F. The following markings shall be factory applied using indelible ink on the external part of
each volume:
A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other trades and building components.
B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction to allow for mechanical installations.
D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for
efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning
before closing in building.
F. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors if mechanical items requiring access
are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8
Section "Access Doors and Frames."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 or British Standard for factory-threaded pipe and pipe
fittings.
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed
below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping
system contents.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 3.2 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-
face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated; Bolts, Nuts and washers,
stainless steel for potable/domestic water piping, galvanized for other piping systems.
D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Alloy Sn95: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent silver, with 0.10 percent
lead content.
2. Alloy E: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent copper, with 0.10 percent
maximum lead content.
3. Alloy HA: Tin-antimony-silver-copper zinc, with 0.10 percent maximum lead
content.
4. Alloy HB: Tin-antimony-silver-copper nickel, with 0.10 percent maximum lead
content.
5. Alloy Sb5: 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony, with 0.20 percent maximum lead
content.
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for
wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
J. Flanged, Ductile-Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA C110, rubber gasket, carbon-
steel bolts and nuts.
A. General: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals, to
prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion.
B. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld-
neck end types and matching piping system materials.
D. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 1725 kPa minimum working
pressure at 82 deg. C.
1. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 1035 or 2070 kPa
minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
H. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 2070 kPa minimum working pressure at
107 deg. C.
A. General: Fabricated from materials suitable for system fluid and that will provide flexible
pipe connections. Include 860 kPa minimum working-pressure rating, unless higher
working pressure is indicated, and ends according to the following:
B. Bronze-Hose, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, bronze, inner tubing covered with bronze
wire braid. Include copper-tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze welded to hose.
A. Description: Modular design, with interlocking rubber links shaped to continuously fill
annular space between pipe and sleeve. Include connecting bolts and pressure plates.
A. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations:
1. Steel Sheet Metal: 0.6 mm minimum thickness, galvanized, round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
3. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange.
Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
B. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep-pattern type if required to
conceal protruding fittings and sleeves.
1. ID: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping.
2. OD: Completely cover opening.
3. Cast Brass: One piece, with set screw and polished chrome-plated finish.
4. Cast Brass: Split casting, with concealed hinge, set screw and polished chrome-
plated finish.
5. Stamped Steel: One piece, with set screw and chrome-plated finish.
6. Stamped Steel: One piece, with spring clips and chrome-plated finish.
7. Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, set screw, and chrome-plated
finish.
8. Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome-plated
finish.
9. Cast-Iron Floor Plate: One-piece casting.
C. Screws: Provide Stainless Steel screws for outdoor and wet applications
2.7 GROUT
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. General: Install piping as described below, unless piping Sections specify otherwise.
Individual Division 15 piping Sections specify unique piping installation requirements.
B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate
general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements
were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design
considerations. Install piping as indicated, unless deviations to layout are approved on
Coordination Drawings.
D. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
E. Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and
service areas.
G. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls.
Diagonal runs are prohibited, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements.
Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal.
J. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.
M. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wall board
partitions, and suspended ceilings according to the following:
1. Chrome-Plated Piping: Cast brass, one piece, with set screw, and polished chrome-
plated finish. Use split-casting escutcheons if required, for existing piping.
2. Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set screw.
3. Uninsulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates.
4. Insulated Piping: Cast brass or stamped steel; with concealed hinge, spring clips, and
chrome-plated finish.
5. Piping in Utility Areas: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set-screw or spring clips.
N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, and concrete floor and
roof slabs.
O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board
partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe
or pipe insulation, using elastomeric joint sealants. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants" for materials.
5. Use Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O, neutral-curing silicone sealant, unless
otherwise indicated.
Q. Underground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Install Steel Pipe for sleeves. Seal pipe
penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 25 mm annular clear space
between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
R. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and
floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping materials. Refer to
Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials.
U. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in
individual piping Specification Sections:
1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings
before assembly.
3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS' "Soldering Manual," Chapter
"The Soldering of Pipe and Tube"; or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
4. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS' "Brazing Handbook," Chapter
"Pipe and Tube."
5. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs
and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
a. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and
solvent cements.
b. CPVC Piping: ASTM D 2846 and ASTM F 493.
c. PVC Pressure Piping: ASTM D 2672.
d. PVC Nonpressure Piping: ASTM D 2855.
9. Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with
clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657 procedures and
manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install unions, in piping DN50 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment with DN50 or smaller threaded pipe
connection.
2. Install flanges, in piping DN65 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment with flanged pipe connection.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials
of dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
A. Install equipment to provide maximum possible headroom, if mounting heights are not
indicated.
B. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown
only in diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to the Engineer.
C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Install flexible connectors on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parallel to
equipment shafts if possible.
A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal
direction of flow.
d. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of
concealed piping.
e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
f. Spaced at maximum of 15 m intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to
7.5 m in congested areas of piping and equipment.
g. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately
spaced markers.
1. Lettering Size: Minimum 6 mm high lettering for name of unit if viewing distance is
less than 600 mm, 13 mm high lettering for distances up to 1800 mm, and
proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering
two-thirds to three-fourths of size of principal lettering.
2. Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish between
multiple units, inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and
emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.
C. Duct Systems: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake, and relief ducts with duct
markers; or provide stenciled signs and arrows, showing duct system service and direction
of flow.
A. Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for paint materials, surface preparation, and
application of paint.
B. Apply paint to exposed piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Interior, Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include finish coat
over enamel undercoat and primer.
2. Interior, Galvanized-Steel Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include 2
finish coats over galvanized metal primer.
3. Interior, Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include finish coat
over enamel undercoat and primer.
4. Exterior, Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include 2 finish
coats over rust-inhibitive metal primer.
5. Exterior, Galvanized-Steel Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include 2
finish coats over galvanized metal primer.
6. Exterior, Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include 2 finish
coats over rust-inhibitive metal primer.
D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials
and procedures to match original factory finish.
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated or otherwise required, but not less than
100 mm larger in both directions than supported unit. Follow supported equipment
manufacturer's setting templates for anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 21 MPa, 28-day
compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-
in-Place Concrete."
A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
C. Floor Mounted Support: Provide base plate and concrete plinths beneath each floor mounted
metallic supports.
3.7 DEMOLITION
C. Accessible Work: Remove indicated exposed pipe and ductwork in its entirety.
F. Temporary Disconnection: Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational
equipment indicated for relocation.
A. Contractor shall install his work in such a manner and at such time as will require a
minimum of cutting and patching of the building structure. Holes in exposed locations, in or
through existing floors, shall be drilled and smoothed by sanding. Use of a jackhammer will
be permitted only where specifically approved. Holes through masonry walls to
accommodate sleeves shall be made with an iron pipe masonry core saw.
B. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary
for mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
3.9 GROUTING
A. Install nonmetallic, nonshrink, grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump
and other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
F. Place grout on concrete bases to provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
3.10 INSTALLATION
A. Materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the
contract drawings and approved recommendations of the manufacturers. Installation shall
be accomplished by workers skilled in this type of work. Installation shall be made so that
there is no degradation of the designed fire ratings of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors.
B. No installation shall be permitted which blocks or otherwise impedes access to any existing
machine or system.
C. All hinged doors shall swing open a minimum of 120 degrees. The area in front of all
access doors shall be clear a minimum of one meter.
3.11 CLEANING
A. Exposed surfaces of piping and equipment that have become covered with dirt, plaster, or
other material during handling and construction shall be thoroughly cleaned before such
surfaces are prepared for final finish painting or are enclosed within the building structure.
B. Before final acceptance, mechanical equipment, including piping, ducting, and fixtures,
shall be clean and free from dirt, grease, and finger marks.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Di-
vision 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment.
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for materials for attaching hangers and sup-
ports to building structure.
2. Division 9 Section "Painting" for hangers and supports.
3. Division 13 Sections on fire-suppression piping for fire-suppression pipe hangers.
4. Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation vapor barrier materials and ther-
mal hanger shield inserts.
5. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for vi-
bration isolation and seismic restraint devices.
6. Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.
B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."
A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
C. Design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.
D. Design and obtain approval from Engineer for seismic restraint hangers and supports for
piping and equipment.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and ther-
mal-hanger shield insert indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for multiple piping
supports and trapeze hangers. Include seismic and design calculations justifying forces, siz-
es, embedments and characteristics of components and fabrication details.
A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for
each multiple pipe support, trapeze, and seismic restraint by a qualified professional engi-
neer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Pipe Hangers:
a. B-Line Systems, Inc.
b. Grinnell Corp.
c. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.
d. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components. Re-
fer to "Hanger and Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger
and support types.
1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field-
applied finish.
2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments
are in direct contact with copper tubing.
1. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments
are in direct contact with copper tubing.
1. Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium sili-
cate with vapor barrier.
2. Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium sili-
cate.
3. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of
pipe.
4. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
5. Insert Length: Extend 50 mm beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below
ambient air temperature.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with
pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where
used.
B. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
C. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.
D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic,
dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both inte-
rior and exterior applications.
2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
3. Design Mix: 34.5-MPa, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified
in piping system Specification Sections.
C. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as speci-
fied in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated stationary pipes, DN15 to DN750 (NPS 1/2 to NPS 30).
2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 49 to 232 deg C (120 to
450 deg F) pipes, DN100 to DN400 (NPS 4 to NPS 16), requiring up to 100 mm of
insulation.
3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of
pipes, DN20 to DN600 (NPS 3/4to NPS 24), requiring clamp flexibility and up to
100 mm of insulation.
4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, DN15 to
DN600 (NPS 1/2 to NPS 24), if little or no insulation is required.
5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, DN15 to DN100 (NPS 1/2 to
NPS 4), to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
6. Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, DN20 to DN200 (NPS 3/4to NPS 8).
7. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated sta-
tionary pipes, DN15 to DN200 (NPS 1/2 to NPS 8).
8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, DN15 to DN200 (NPS 1/2 to NPS 8).
9. Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsu-
lated stationary pipes, DN15 to DN50 (NPS 1/2 to NPS 2).
10. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11):
For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, DN10 to DN200 (NPS 3/8 to
NPS 8).
11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, DN10 to DN80 (NPS 3/8 to NPS 3).
12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipe, DN15 to DN750 (NPS 1/2 to
NPS 30).
13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or con-
traction.
14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, DN100 to DN900
(NPS 4 to NPS 36), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, DN100 to DN900
(NPS 4 to NPS 36), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange
and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for
pipes, DN65 to DN900 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36), if vertical adjustment is required,
with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
17. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, DN25 to DN750 (NPS 1
to NPS 30), from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and con-
traction might occur.
18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, DN65 to
DN500 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20), from single rod if horizontal movement caused by
expansion and contraction might occur.
19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, DN50 to DN1050 (NPS 2
to NPS 42), if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might oc-
cur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.
20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, DN50 to DN600
(NPS 2 to NPS 24), if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contrac-
tion might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.
21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, DN50 to
DN750 (NPS 2 to NPS 30), if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might
be required in addition to expansion and contraction.
D. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping sys-
tem Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, DN20 to
DN500 (NPS 3/4to NPS 20).
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,
DN20 to DN500 (NPS 3/4to NPS 20), if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
E. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping sys-
tem Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 150 mm for heavy loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 49 to 232 deg C (120 to 450 deg F) piping instal-
lations.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types
of building attachments.
5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 49 to 232 deg C (120 to 450 deg F)
piping installations.
F. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of
beams, channels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of
beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if
loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tan-
gent to flange edge.
8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel
I-beams for heavy loads.
10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel
I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from
above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is re-
quired.
15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear
horizontal movement where head room is limited.
G. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to pre-
vent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of
high-density, 690-kPa (100-psi) minimum compressive-strength, water-repellent-
treated calcium silicate, same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor barrier and
encased in 360-degree sheet metal shield.
H. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping move-
ment.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not ex-
ceed 32 mm.
3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger
with springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variabili-
ty factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from
hanger.
6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit va-
riability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system
from base support.
7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system
from trapeze support.
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of
stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment.
Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability.
These supports include the following types:
A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install
hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from
building structure.
B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and
support together on field-assembled channel systems.
C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal
piping and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for indi-
vidual pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being sup-
ported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.
D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space at-
tachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expan-
sion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is
placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
E. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and com-
pletely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install
fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and
stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.
Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees.
a. DN8 to DN90 (NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2): 300 mm long and 1.22 mm (0.048
inch) thick.
b. DN100 (NPS 4): 300 mm long and 1.52 mm (0.06 inch) thick.
c. DN125 and DN150 (NPS 5 and NPS 6): 450 mm long and 1.52 mm (0.06
inch) thick.
d. DN200 to DN350 (NPS 8 to NPS 14): 600 mm long and 1.91 mm (0.075 inch)
thick.
e. DN400 to DN600 (NPS 16 to NPS 24): 600 mm long and 2.67 mm (0.105
inch) thick.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equip-
ment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot
be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, ap-
pearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the
following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corro-
sion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and con-
tours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas im-
mediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop paint-
ing. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm.
B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and ab-
raded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 Section "Paint-
ing."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galva-
nizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes vibration isolators, vibration isolation bases, vibration isolation roof
curbs, and seismic restraints and snubbers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Indicate types, styles, materials, and finishes for each type of isolator
specified. Include load deflection curves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show designs and calculations, certified by a professional engineer, for the
following:
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and
the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
A. Project seismic zone is as applicable for Riyadh with a service factor of 0.15.
A. General Requirements: The requirements for seismic protection measures described in this
section shall be applied to the mechanical equipment and systems listed below.
C. Mechanical Systems: The following mechanical systems shall be installed as required on the
drawings and other Sections of the Specification and shall be seismically protected in
accordance with this Specification:
1. All Piping Inside the Building Except as Specifically Stated Below Under "Items Not
Covered By This Section".
2. Chilled water distribution systems outside of buildings.
3. Fuel piping outside of buildings.
4. All water supply systems.
5. Storm and sanitary sewer systems.
6. Water storage tanks.
D. Contractor Designed Bracing: The Contractor shall design the bracing in accordance with
SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual. Design shall be performed by a certified engineer.
Resistance to lateral forces induced by earthquakes shall be accomplished without
consideration of friction resulting from gravity loads.
E. Items Not Covered By This Section: Fire Protection Systems. Seismic protection of piping
for fire protection systems shall be installed as specified in Division 13.
F. Items Requiring No Seismic Restraints: Seismic restraints are not required for the following
items:
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of vibration isolation and seismic-restraint devices with
other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures,
HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping and vibration isolation bases. Cast
anchor-bolt inserts into base. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are
specified in Division 3 Sections.
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These
items are specified in Division 7.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Isolator Pads: Oil and water resistant and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of the
equipment supported.
1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 1.2 times the rated vertical stiffness.
4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to a 6-mm thick,
rubber isolator pad attached to the baseplate underside. Size baseplates to limit floor
loading to 690 kPa (100 psig).
6. Top Plates: Provide threaded studs for fastening and leveling equipment.
7. Finishes: Manufacturer's standard corrosive-resistant finish.
D. Restrained Spring Isolators: Vertically restrained, freestanding, laterally stable, steel open-
spring-type isolators.
1. Housing: Welded steel with resilient vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension
due to wind loads or when weight is removed. Factory-drilled baseplate for bolting to
structure and bonded to a 6-mm thick, rubber isolator pad attached to the baseplate
underside. Provide adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 0.8 times the rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
6. Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components on isolators for interior use. Hot-dip
galvanized for metal components on isolators for exterior use.
F. Spring Hangers: Combination spring and elastomeric hanger with coil spring and
elastomeric insert in compression.
1. Frame: Formed steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for 30
degrees of angular hanger rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation
efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components. Color-code to indicate capacity
range.
A. Thrust Restraints: Combination spring and elastomeric restraints with coil spring and
elastomeric insert in compression. Factory set for thrust.
1. Frame: Formed steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for 30
degrees of angular hanger rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation
efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
5. Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components. Color-code to indicate capacity
range.
D. Restraining Cables: Galvanized steel aircraft cables with end connections made of steel
assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two clamping bolts for cable
engagement.
E. Anchor Bolts: Seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor
bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488/E 488M.
A. Fabricated Steel Bases: Structural-steel bases and rails designed and fabricated by the
isolation equipment manufacturer. Include equipment static loadings, power transmission,
component misalignment, and cantilever loadings.
1. Fabricate bases to shapes required, with welded structural-steel shapes, plates, and
bars conforming to ASTM A 36M (ASTM A 36). Include support brackets to anchor
base to isolation units. Include prelocated equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary
motor slide bases or rails.
2. Design and fabricate bases to result in the lowest possible mounting height with not
less than 25-mm clearance above the floor.
3. Concrete-Filled Inertia Bases: Weld reinforcing bars to the structural frame. Pour
concrete into base with relocated equipment anchor bolts.
4. Weld steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation mountings, and provide for anchor
bolts and equipment support.
5. Configure inertia bases to accommodate equipment supported.
6. Pump Bases: Size to support pump and piping elbows.
7. Factory Finish: Manufacturer's standard corrosive-resistant finish.
A. Description: Factory-assembled, fully enclosed, insulated, air- and watertight curb designed
to resiliently support roof-mounted equipment and to withstand 56-m/s (125-mph) wind
impinging laterally against the side of the equipment. Design restraints to meet seismic
requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for
compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
performance.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Anchor interior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation bases. Bolt
isolator baseplates to structural floors as required.
C. Anchor exterior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation bases. Bolt
isolator baseplates to structural supports as required.
D. Fill concrete inertia bases, after installing base frame, with 21-MPa concrete, and trowel to a
smooth, hard finish. Cast-in-place concrete is specified in Division 3.
B. Snubbers: Install the required number of seismic snubbers on each spring-mounted piece of
equipment. Locate snubbers as close as possible to the vibration isolators and bolt to
supporting structure.
C. Install restraining cables at each trapeze and individual pipe hanger. At trapeze anchor
locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Install cables so they do not bend across sharp edges of
adjacent equipment or building structure.
D. Install steel angles or channel, sized to prevent buckling, clamped with ductile-iron clamps
to hanger rods for trapeze and individual pipe hangers. At trapeze anchor locations, shackle
piping to trapeze. Requirements apply equally to hanging equipment. Do not weld angles
to rods.
A. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating
height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact
during normal operations.
C. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight.
G. Adjust seismic restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of
operation.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: Of color, lettering style, and graphic representation required for each
identification material and device.
A. Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems" for lettering
size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.
B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General: Manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each
application as referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more than one type is specified
for application, selection is the Contractor's option, but provide one selection for each
product category..
1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating
and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data.
1. Material: Brass.
2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd gloss black enamel, unless otherwise
indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.
3. Identification Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd enamel in colors according to
ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Pipes, Including Insulation: Full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at
each location.
1. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering, to accommodate both
directions, or as separate unit, on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
G. Snap-on Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, semirigid, snap on,
color-coded, complying with ASME A13.1.
a. Direction of airflow.
b. Duct service such as supply, return and exhaust.
c. Duct origin.
d. Duct destination.
e. Design liters per second.
1. Width: 40 mm on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 150 mm; 65 mm for
larger pipes.
2. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 6 mm letters for piping system abbreviation and 13
mm sequenced numbers. Include 4 mm hole for fastener.
1. Material: 0.8 mm thick, polished brass, or aluminum for indoor and internal
applications, and stainless steel for external and wet applications.
2. Size: 40 mm diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
M. Valve Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on masonry walls
for each page of valve schedule. Include screws.
1. Engraving: Engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match
equipment identification.
2. Thickness: 3 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.
Q. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in
mechanical identification with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, letters,
and terms indicated for proper identification, operation, and maintenance of mechanical
systems and equipment.
1. Multiple Systems: Identify individual system number and service if multiple systems
of same name are indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow.
C. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes smaller than 150 mm OD by following method:
1. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 20
mm wide, lapped a minimum of 40 mm at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full
circumference of pipe.
D. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes 150 mm in diameter and larger by following
method:
1. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 40
mm wide, lapped a minimum of 75 mm at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full
circumference of pipe.
E. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine
rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, ceilings, and plenums; and
exterior nonconcealed locations according to the following:
Refrigerant-suction REFRIG-SUCTION
Refrigerant-discharge REFRIG-DISCH
Refrigerant-liquid REFRIG-LIQUID
4. All presently used services shall be classified under the aforesaid categories as
deemed relevant. If new services are identified and cannot be logically classified
under any of the aforesaid categories, then such services shall be provided with a
new, separate abbreviated standard, as approved by the Engineer.
5. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, the abbreviations shall be imprinted
clearly in English letters of 12 mm height and 3 mm depth, as per lettering sample
shown, on a 100 mm diameter, 10 mm thick circular cast-aluminum stud which has
an insert length of at least 100 mm, to allow it to be set into concrete. The insert
section shall have a thickness sufficient to prevent break-off of the stud and shall be
provided with “back-cut” indentations to ensure that the route marker is firmly held in
place by the surrounding concrete.
6. The route markers shall be set into the ground surface at finished grade level (FGL) in
areas where concrete/tile paving or asphalt is provided. At locations where the FGL
finish is bare earth, the route markers shall be embedded onto the top of a concrete
pillar which is buried into the earth as detailed below.
7. The concrete pillars shall be of class P1, filled into 150 mm diameter GRP pipe 600
mm long. The pillars shall be buried into the ground to a depth of 400 mm with the
remaining 200 mm projecting above FGL.
8. The route markers shall be placed along the center line of the underground service
route and shall be located at every 75 m along straight runs of the underground
service and at every bend on the route. Spacing on curved sections shall be suitably
reduced in consultation with the Engineer. Where the underground service is laid in
pre-formed raceways that are provided with covers, that cannot accept embedding of
the route marker studs, these shall be located at FGL adjacent to the relevant raceway,
as approved by the Engineer.
9. Samples of all the various route markers shall be submitted for approval to the
Engineer.
A. Install on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within
factory-fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixture supply stops, shutoff valves, faucets,
convenience and lawn-watering hose connections, and HVAC terminal devices and similar
roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in valve schedule.
B. Valve Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, color scheme, and
with captions similar to those indicated in the following:
A. Install engraved plastic-laminate signs or equipment markers on or near each major item of
mechanical equipment. Include signs for the following general categories of equipment:
1. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such
as gas outlets.
2. Fire department hose valves and hose stations.
3. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units.
4. Fuel-burning units, including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills, and absorption units.
5. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.
6. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and similar
equipment.
7. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
8. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units, Variable Air Volume (VAV)
boxes, fan coil units, controls and components.
9. Tanks and pressure vessels.
10. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water-treatment systems, and similar equipment.
B. Plasticized Tags: Install within concealed space, to reduce amount of text in exposed sign
outside concealment, if equipment to be identified is concealed above acoustical ceiling or
similar concealment.
1. Identify operational valves and similar minor equipment items located in unoccupied
spaces, including machine rooms, by installing plasticized tags.
C. Duct Systems: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake, and relief ducts with duct
markers; or provide stenciled signs and arrows showing service and direction of flow.
1. Location: Locate signs near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at
maximum intervals of 15 m in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by
removable ceiling system.
A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked
by work of this or other Divisions.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Di-
vision 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes semi-rigid and flexible duct, plenum, and breeching insulation; insu-
lating cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field
applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and field-applied jacket. Identify each Sample, de-
scribing product and intended use. Submit 300-mm square sections of each sample materi-
al.
1. Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for each type of
field-applied finish material indicated.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to Engineer, indicating,
interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, at-
tachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests.
E. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with re-
quirements.
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully a craft training program
certified by an agency acceptable to Engineer.
B. Specified k factors are at 24 °C mean temperature unless stated otherwise. Where optional
thermal insulation material is approved by the Engineer to be used, select thickness to pro-
vide thermal conductance no greater than that for the specified material.
D. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish
listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build mockups
according to the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:
2. Build mockups with cutaway sections to allow observation of application details for
insulation materials, mastics, attachments, and jackets.
3. Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Engineer.
4. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
5. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting insulation application.
6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
8. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
1.6 COORDINATION
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation application may begin
on segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Manson.
b. Fiberglass Ltd.
c. Johns-Manville.
d. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
e. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
f. Schuller International, Inc.
g. St. Gobain.
A. Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IB, without facing and with all-service jacket manufac-
tured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.
B. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with all-service jacket manufac-
tured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.
B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant, all purpose, kraft
paper and aluminum foil (FSK).
C. Aluminum Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets manufactured from aluminum alloy complying
with ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209), and having an integrally bonded moisture barrier over
entire surface in contact with insulation. Metal thickness and corrugation dimensions are
scheduled at the end of this Section.
A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape.
Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 270 g/sq. m.
C. Wire: 2.0-mm, nickel-copper alloy; 1.6-mm, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 1.6-mm, soft-
annealed, galvanized steel.
D. Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and wash-
er manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for
insulation thickness indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and
other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that
will adversely affect insulation application.
A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the
length of ducts and fittings.
B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thickness re-
quired for each duct system.
C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use ac-
cessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
E. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.
G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder
integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply insula-
tion continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
K. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal
ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain
vapor retarder.
N. Install vapor-retarder mastic on ducts and plenums scheduled to receive vapor retarders.
1. Ducts with Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor-
retarder mastic and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Repair
punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-retarder seal.
2. Ducts without Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and secure with
outward clinching staples and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insula-
tion.
O. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof
flashing.
P. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and
partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions.
R. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at underside of floor assembly and at floor support
at top of floor.
1. For insulation indicated to have vapor retarders, taper termination and seal insulation
ends with vapor-retarder mastic.
A. Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with adhesive and
anchor pins and speed washers.
a. On duct sides with dimensions 450 mm and smaller, along longitudinal center-
line of duct. Space 75 mm maximum from insulation end joints, and 400 mm
o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 450 mm. Space 400 mm o.c. each
way, and 75 mm maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and
clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts
and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
B. Board Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure board insulation with adhesive and anc-
hor pins and speed washers.
a. On duct sides with dimensions 450 mm and smaller, along longitudinal center-
line of duct. Space 75 mm maximum from insulation end joints, and 400 mm
o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 450 mm. Space 400 mm o.c. each
way, and 75 mm maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and
clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts
and plenums.
d. Do not over-compress insulation during installation.
4. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with in-
sulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation fac-
ing.
5. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing
50 mm from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent in-
sulation segment with 13-mm staples, 25 mm o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive
tape having same facing as insulation.
6. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation
segment for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to
outside and inside radius of elbows. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct el-
bows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation sur-
face with 150-mm wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on
alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 150 mm o.c.
8. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indi-
cated to receive vapor retarder.
1. Secure single layer of insulation to duct with stainless-steel bands. Tighten bands
without deforming the insulation material.
2. Apply two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 75 mm.
Secure inner layer with 1.6-mm, soft-annealed, stainless-steel wire. Secure outer
layer with stainless-steel bands.
3. On exposed applications, without metal jacket, finish insulation with a skim coat of
mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to surface of installed insulation. When dry,
apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth or tape.
Overlap edges at least 25 mm. Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth
or tape. Thin the finish coat to achieve smooth finish.
A. Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with
factory-applied jackets.
1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 50-mm overlap at seams and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 1.6-mm thick coats of jacket manufacturer's recom-
mended adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.
3.8 FINISHES
A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as speci-
fied in Division 9 Section "Painting."
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Engineer. Vary first and second coats to allow visual in-
spection of the completed Work.
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of
this Section.
D. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following
systems, materials, and equipment:
1. Fibrous-glass ducts.
2. Metal ducts with duct liner.
3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
4. Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections.
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Vibration-control devices.
7. Testing agency labels and stamps.
8. Nameplates and data plates.
9. Access panels and doors in air-distribution systems.
A. Service: Supply-air ducts in concealed spaces and exposed to view in air-conditioned area.
B. Service: Return-air ducts in concealed spaces and exposed to view in air-conditioned area.
C. Service: Supply-air ducts exposed, unlined ductwork and equipment in unfinished areas,
mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, and attics containing air handling units.
D. Service: Return-air ducts exposed, unlined ductwork and equipment in unfinished areas,
mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, and attics containing air handling units.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper where concealed; stainless steel jacket where
exposed to view; aluminum jacket in mechanical rooms.
5. Vapor Retarder Required: No.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes blanket, board, and block insulation; insulating cements; field-applied
jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
1. Division 15 Section "Duct Insulation" for insulation materials and application for
ducts and plenums.
2. Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation for piping systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field
applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and field-applied jacket. Identify each Sample,
describing product and intended use. Submit 300-mm square sections of each sample
material.
1. Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for each type of
field-applied finish material indicated.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to Engineer, interpreting,
and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments,
cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests.
E. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with
requirements.
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed a craft training
program certified by an agency acceptable to Engineer.
C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish
listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build mockups
according to the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:
2. Build mockups with cutaway sections to allow observation of application details for
insulation materials, mastics, attachments, and jackets.
3. Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Engineer.
4. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
5. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting insulation application.
6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
8. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
1.6 COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Manson.
b. Fiberglass Ltd.
c. Johns-Manville.
d. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
e. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
f. Schuller International, Inc.
g. St. Gobain.
2. Cellular-Glass Insulation:
a. Pittsburgh-Corning Corp.
b. Kingspan Tarec Industrial
c. Cell U Foam
B. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with all-service jacket
manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.
B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant, all purpose, kraft
paper and aluminum foil (FSK).
C. Aluminum Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets manufactured from aluminum alloy complying
with ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209), and having an integrally bonded moisture barrier over
entire surface in contact with insulation. Metal thickness and corrugation dimensions are
scheduled at the end of this Section.
A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape.
Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 270 g/sq. m.
C. Wire: 2.0-mm, nickel-copper alloy; 1.6-mm, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 1.6-mm, soft-
annealed, galvanized steel.
D. Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and
washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length
sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and
other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that
will adversely affect insulation application.
A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the
length of equipment.
B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each equipment system.
C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either the
wet or dry state.
D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
E. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.
G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder
integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply
insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
K. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal
ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain
vapor retarder.
1. Vibration-control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
A. Blankets, Board, and Block Applications for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation with
adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.
6. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing
7. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel bands.
8. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 75 mm.
9. Apply insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors and other
elements that require frequent removal for service.
10. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and
nameplates.
11. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation
indicated to receive vapor retarder.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Applications for Tanks and Vessels: Apply
insulation over entire surface of tanks and vessels according to the manufacturer's written
instructions.
A. Apply glass-cloth jacket where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with
factory-applied jackets.
1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 50-mm overlap at seams and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 1.6-mm thick coats of jacket manufacturer's
recommended adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.
B. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated.
C. PVC Jackets: Apply jacket with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and
vessels for horizontal applications. Secure and seal seams and end joints with
manufacturer's welding adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and
the finish bead along the seam and joint edge.
3.6 FINISHES
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Engineer. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
C. Reinstall insulation and covers on pumps and tanks uncovered for inspection according to
these Specifications.
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of
this Section.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements;
field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field
applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for each type of
insulation and hanger.
2. Attachment and covering of heat trace inside insulation.
3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type
of insulation.
5. Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections.
6. Application of field-applied jackets.
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket. Identify each Sample, describing product
and intended use. Submit Samples in the following sizes:
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) long by NPS 2 (DN50).
2. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) square.
3. Jacket Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) long by NPS 2 (DN50).
4. Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for each type of
field-applied finish material indicated.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include
dates of tests.
E. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with
requirements.
C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish
listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build mockups
according to the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:
2. Build mockups with cutaway sections to allow observation of application details for
insulation materials, mastics, attachments, and jackets.
3. Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Engineer.
4. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
5. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting insulation application.
6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
8. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat-trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of
piping that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Manson.
b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
d. Schuller International, Inc.
b. Master Bond
c. Reltek
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with
the following:
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory-applied,
all-purpose, vapor-retarder jacket.
2. Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing.
3. Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following classes and
grades:
a. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass-fiber
insulation, for sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging
cloth to unfaced glass-fiber insulation.
b. Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass-fiber insulation to metal surfaces.
D. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for
dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.
B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and
aluminum foil.
C. PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick; roll stock
ready for shop or field cutting and forming.
1. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,
reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply
covers for lavatories for the disabled.
2. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
E. Aluminum Jacket: Aluminum roll stock, ready for shop or field cutting and forming to
indicated sizes. Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 3003 alloy, H-14 temper.
1. Finish and Thickness: Smooth finish, 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick.
2. Moisture Barrier: 1-mil- (0.025-mm-) thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft
paper.
3. Elbows: Preformed, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows; same
material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape.
Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd. (270 g/sq. m).
B. Bands: 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch (0.5 mm) thick.
2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) thick.
3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch (0.18 mm) thick.
4. Brass: 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick.
5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and
other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of
piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Insulation materials shall be installed in a first class manner with smooth and even surfaces,
with jackets and facings drawn tight and smoothly cemented down at all laps. Insulation
shall be continuous through all sleeves and openings. Vapor barriers shall be continuous and
uninterrupted throughout systems with operating temperature 16 °C (60 °F) and below. Lap
and seal vapor barrier over ends and exposed edges of insulation. Anchors, supports and
other metal projections through insulation on cold surfaces shall be insulated and vapor
sealed for a minimum length of 150 mm (6 inches).
C. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each piping system.
D. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet
or dry state.
E. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.
F. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
G. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
H. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.
J. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
L. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-
retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for applying
insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties.
M. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic.
insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation
material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation
to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the
insulation material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields
over jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the hanger,
support, and shield.
N. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated,
taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation
material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams
and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.
5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids
with vapor-retarder mastic.
Q. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof
flashing.
S. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and
floors.
1. For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retarder mastic where
floor supports penetrate vapor retarder.
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands
without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with
vapor-retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of 15 to
20 feet (4.5 to 6 m) to form a vapor retarder between pipe insulation segments.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples
at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the
insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.
1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When premolded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply mitered
sections of pipe insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness equal to
adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.
3. Seal insulation with canvas jacket and sealing compound recommended by the
insulation material manufacturer.
1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When premolded insulation sections are not available, apply glass-fiber blanket
insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow
valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation
for access to stainer basket without disturbing insulation.
3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Seal insulation with canvas jacket and sealing compound recommended by the
insulation material manufacturer.
1. Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe insulation
and attached according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Apply cut segments of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to
permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
For check valves, fabricate removable sections of insulation arranged to allow access
to stainer basket.
3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow
passage of air to the pipe surface.
1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch (300-mm)
intervals and tighten without deforming insulation materials.
2. Apply two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches
(75 mm). Secure inner layer with 0.062-inch (1.6-mm), soft-annealed, stainless-steel
wire spaced at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel
bands at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals.
1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When premolded sections of insulation are not available, apply mitered sections of
calcium silicate insulation. Secure insulation materials with stainless-steel wire.
3. Finish insulation of fittings the same as pipe insulation.
A. Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with
factory-applied jackets.
1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at seams and
joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick coats of jacket
manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.
B. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated.
C. Apply PVC jacket where indicated, with 1-inch (25-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and
end joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
D. Apply metal jacket where indicated, with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and
end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with
weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with
stainless-steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints.
3.8 FINISHES
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
the insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Engineer. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following
systems, materials, and equipment:
1. Flexible connectors.
2. Vibration-control devices.
3. Fire-suppression piping.
4. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Below-grade piping, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury.
C. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection according to
these Specifications.
A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor retarders,
and field-applied jackets.
B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material,
thickness, and jacket requirements.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper where concealed; aluminum jacket where
exposed to view or in mechanical rooms.
5. Vapor Retarder Required: No.
6. Finish: None.
B. Service: Roof drain bodies and horizontal rainwater piping directly under roof slab.
A. This application schedule is for aboveground insulation outside the building. Loose-fill
insulation, for belowground piping, is specified in Division 2 piping distribution Sections.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general duty valves common to several mechanical piping systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure and
temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and
arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. Include list
indicating valve and its application.
B. Maintenance data for valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified
in Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting, servicing,
disassembling, and repairing.
B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping and
ASME B31.1 for power piping.
C. MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents referenced.
2. Store indoors and maintain valve temperature higher than ambient dew-point
temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight
enclosures.
C. Use a sling to handle large valves. Rig to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use
handwheels and stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Valves:
A. Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems, except as specified below.
1. Non-rising stem valves may be used only where headroom prevents full extension of
rising stems.
B. Internal and external parts of all cast-iron and ductile-iron valves installed under ground and
or exposed to outdoors shall be factory coated with 7.5 mm (300 micron) fusion bonded
epoxy coating.
1. Valves installed above ground and indoors: apply coating for internal and external
parts.
E. Operators: Use specified operators and handwheels, except provide the following special
operator features:
3. Chain-Wheel Operators: For valves DN100 (4 inches) and larger, installed 2400 mm
(96 inches) or higher above finished floor elevation.
4. Gear-Drive Operators: For quarter-turn valves DN200 (8 inches) and larger.
G. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections.
I. Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast iron, ASME B16.5 for steel, and ASME B16.24 for bronze
valves.
1. Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting point
below 450 deg C (840 deg F) for gate, globe, and check valves; below 216 deg C
(421 deg F) for ball valves.
A. Gate Valves, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 1380-kPa (200-psi)
cold working pressure (CWP), or Class 150, 2070-kPa (300-psi) CWP; ASTM B 62 cast-
bronze body and screwed-in bonnet, solid-bronze wedge, copper-silicon alloy non-rising
stem, teflon-impregnated packing with bronze packing nut, threaded or soldered end
connections; and with aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.
B. Gate Valves, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, 1380-kPa (200-psi)
CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, solid cast-iron wedge, brass-alloy stem,
outside screw and yoke, teflon-impregnated packing with 2-piece packing gland assembly,
flanged end connections; and with cast-iron handwheel.
A. Ball Valves, DN100 (4 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 4140-kPa (600-psi)
CWP, ASTM B 584 bronze body and bonnet, 2-piece construction; chrome-plated brass
ball, standard port for DN15 (1/2-inch) valves and smaller and conventional port for DN20
(3/4-inch) valves and larger; blowout proof; bronze or brass stem; Teflon, PTFE seats and
seals; threaded or soldered end connections: Operator: Vinyl-covered steel lever handle.
A. Plug Valves: Lubricated, MSS SP-78, 1200-kPa (175-psi) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron
body and bonnet, cast-iron plug, Buna N, Viton, or teflon packing, flanged or grooved end
connections:
1. Operator: Lever.
2. Operator: Worm and gear with handwheel, sizes DN150 (6 inches) and larger.
3. Operator: Worm and gear with chain wheel, sizes DN150 (6 inches) and larger, 2400
mm (96 inches) or higher above floor.
A. Globe Valves, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 1380-kPa (200-
psi) CWP, or Class 150, 2070-kPa (300-psi) CWP; ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and
screwed bonnet, rubber, bronze, or teflon disc, silicon bronze-alloy stem, teflon-
impregnated packing with bronze nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and with
aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.
B. Globe Valves, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: MSS SP-85, Class 125, 1380-kPa (200-psi)
CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bolted bonnet with bronze fittings, renewable
bronze seat and disc, brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, teflon-impregnated packing
with cast-iron follower, flanged end connections; and with cast-iron handwheel.
A. Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67, 1380-kPa (200-psi) CWP, 1035- kPa (150-psi) maximum
pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel
stem, field-replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals, lug, or grooved style:
A. Swing Check Valves, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 1380-kPa
(200-psi) CWP, or Class 150, 2070-kPa (300-psi) CWP; horizontal swing, Y-pattern,
ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and cap, rotating bronze disc with rubber seat or composition
seat, threaded or soldered end connections:
B. Swing Check Valves, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: MSS SP-71, Class 125, 1380-kPa (200-
psi) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bolted cap, horizontal-swing, weighted non-
slam, brass disc, flanged or grooved end connections.
C. Air Cushioned Check Valves, DN 150 and Larger: Cast iron, ASTM A126, AWWA C508
having integral flanges, stainless steel shaft, lever and weight, air cushioned side mounted
cylinder, cast iron disk, double clevis connected to ductile iron disc arm, flanged or grooved
connection.
D. Lift Check Valves: Class 125, bronze body and cap (main components), horizontal or
vertical pattern, lift-type, non-slam, silent type, bronze disc EPFM rubber disc with
stainless-steel holder threaded connections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of valves. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion.
Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during
shipping and handling.
C. Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operation.
D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for
proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material
composition suitable for service, and freedom from defects and damage.
3.2 INSTALLATION
C. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow servicing,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
D. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.
G. For chain-wheel operators, extend chains to 1500 mm (60 inches) above finished floor
elevation.
B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush
to a bright finish. Clean valve socket.
C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube.
E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having composition discs.
F. Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside valve.
Rotate tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux.
G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder melts on contact. Feed solder
until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating valve. Once
the solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush.
A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal seat or wall
to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.
C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except where dry
seal threading is specified.
D. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the
pipe is being threaded.
B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets
as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts
gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.
C. For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for
proper shutoff and retention.
1. Copper Tube Size, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: Solder ends, except provide
threaded ends for heating hot water and low-pressure steam service.
2. Steel Pipe Sizes, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: Threaded or grooved end.
3. Steel Pipe Sizes, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: Grooved end or flanged.
A. General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shutoff duty; globe and ball
valves for throttling duty. Refer to piping system Specification Sections for specific valve
applications and arrangements.
1. Ball Valves: Class 150, 4140-kPa (600-psi) CWP, with stem extension.
2. Plug Valves: Neoprene-faced plug, Buna N packing.
3. Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system, and bronze
or teflon disc.
4. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or elastomer-coated
ductile iron disc; EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.
5. Bronze Swing Check: Class 125, with rubber seat.
1. Ball Valves: Class 150, 4140-kPa (600-psi) CWP, with stem extension and memory
stop.
2. Plug Valves: Buna N packing.
3. Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze body with bronze or teflon disc; or Class 125, cast-
iron body.
4. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or elastomer-coated
ductile iron disc; EPDM sleeve and stem seals.
5. Check Valves: Class 125, bronze body swing check with rubber seat; Class 125, cast-
iron body swing check; Class 125, cast-iron body wafer check; or Class 125, cast-iron
body lift check.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes pipe expansion fittings and loops for mechanical piping systems.
A. Compatibility: Products suitable for piping system fluids, materials, working pressures, and
temperatures.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Design Calculations: For thermal expansion of piping systems and selection and
design of expansion fittings and loops.
2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each indicated. Show dimensions and methods
of assembly.
3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and anchorage.
D. Schedule: Indicate manufacturer's number, size, location, and features for each expansion
fitting and loop.
A. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for
expansion fittings and loops by a qualified professional engineer.
B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
3. Guides:
A. Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints: 1200-kPa (175-psig) minimum pressure rating, with end
fittings and external tie rods for limiting maximum travel, and flanged-end connections,
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Rubber Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1123, fabric-reinforced butyl rubber, and pressure rated
for 1200 kPa at 116 deg C (175 psig at 240 deg F) minimum.
1. Joints for Copper Piping: Copper fittings with solder-joint end connections.
a. DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Bronze hoses and double-braid bronze sheaths
with 4800 kPa at 21 deg C (700 psig at 70 deg F) and 3450 kPa at 232 deg C
(500 psig at 450 deg F) minimum pressure ratings.
b. DN65 to DN100 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4): Stainless-steel hoses and double-
braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 2890 kPa at 21 deg C (420 psig at 70 deg F)
and 2170 kPa at 232 deg C (315 psig at 450 deg F) minimum pressure ratings.
A. Slip Expansion Joints: Carbon-steel, packing-type pipe expansion joint designed for
repacking under pressure and pressure rated for 1725 kPa at 204 deg C (250 psig at 400
deg F) minimum with compound limit stops, flanged or weld ends to match piping system,
drip connection if used for steam piping systems, and flanged-end connections, unless
otherwise indicated.
2.4 GUIDES
A. Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for alignment of
piping and two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.
B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head.
D. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in
hardened portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for
application.
E. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud bonding system anchor for use with hardened portland
cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.
1. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component epoxy resin
suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be installed.
2. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud, unless
otherwise indicated.
3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
F. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 21 MPa minimum. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete" for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete.
G. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged nonshrink and nonmetallic
grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
B. Install expansion fittings in sizes matching pipe size in which they are installed.
A. Install pipe bends and loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly
absorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.
1. Steel Anchors: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
2. Concrete Anchors: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to
structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1.
E. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for expansion fittings, guides, and anchors installed
on or in concrete.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm.
B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 Section
"Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes meters and gages for mechanical systems and water meters installed
outside the building.
1. Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for water meters outside the building.
2. Division 2 Section "Natural Gas Distribution" for gas meters outside the building.
3. Division 13 Sections for fire-pump flow-measuring systems.
4. Division 15 Section "Fuel Gas Piping" for gas meters.
5. Division 15 Section "Steam and Condensate Piping" for steam and condensate
meters.
6. Mechanical equipment Sections that specify meters and gages as part of factory-
fabricated equipment.
C. Utility-Furnished Products: Water meters will be furnished to site, ready for installation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance curves for each
meter, gage, fitting, specialty, and accessory specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Include schedule indicating manufacturer's number, scale range, fittings,
and location for each meter and gage.
E. Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1. Include data for the following:
1. Flow-measuring systems.
2. Flowmeters.
3. Thermal-energy flowmeters.
4. Water meters.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Thermometers:
2. Pressure Gages:
3. Test Plugs:
4. Flow Elements:
k. Taco, Inc.
5. Flowmeters:
6. Flow Indicators:
7. Water Meters:
8. Energy Meters.
1. Domestic Hot Water: 0 to 115 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions (30 to 240 deg F,
with 2-degree scale divisions).
2. Domestic Cold Water: minus 18 to plus 38 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions (0 to
100 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions).
3. Hot Water: 0 to 100 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions (30 to 212 deg F, with 2-
degree scale divisions).
4. Chilled Water: minus 18 to plus 38 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions (0 to 100
deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions).
5. Steam and Condensate: 10 to 205 deg C, with 3-degree scale divisions (50 to 400
deg F, with 5-degree scale divisions).
B. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to
maximum of 1.5 percent of range span.
A. Description: ASTM E 1.
B. Case: Die cast and aluminum finished in baked-epoxy enamel, glass front, spring secured,
230 mm (9 inches) long.
C. Adjustable Joint: Finish to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360-degree
adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
F. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for separable socket; of length to suit
installation.
B. Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, with 115-mm- (4-1/2-inch-) diameter, glass lens.
C. Adjustable Joint: Finish to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360-degree
adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
G. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for separable socket; of length to suit
installation.
B. Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, with 115-mm- (4-1/2-inch-) diameter, glass lens.
F. Bulb: Copper with separable socket for liquids; averaging element for air.
C. Adjustable Joint: Finish to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360-degree
adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
D. Stem: Dustproof and leakproof 3-mm- (1/8-inch-) diameter, tapered-end stem with nominal
length of 125 mm (5 inches).
A. Description: Fitting with protective socket for installation in threaded pipe fitting to hold
fixed thermometer stem.
A. Description: Fitting with protective well for installation in threaded pipe fitting to hold test
thermometer.
A. Description: Flanged-fitting bracket for mounting in hole of duct, with threaded end for
attaching thermometer.
B. Case: Drawn steel, brass, or aluminum with 115-mm- (4-1/2-inch-) diameter, glass lens.
1. Vacuum: 100 kPa of vacuum to 103 kPa of pressure (30 inches Hg of vacuum to 15
psig of pressure).
2. Fluids under Pressure: Two times the operating pressure.
B. Syphons: DN8 (NPS 1/4) coil of brass tubing with threaded ends.
C. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, DN8 (NPS 1/4) brass bushing with corrosion-resistant porous-
metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.
D. Core Insert: Self-sealing valve, suitable for inserting 3-mm (1/8-inch) OD probe from dial-
type thermometer or pressure gage.
E. Core Material for Air, Water, Oil, and Gas: Minus 7 to plus 93 deg C (20 to 200 deg F),
chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.
F. Core Material for Air and Water: Minus 35 to plus 136 deg C (Minus 30 to plus 275 deg F),
ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
G. Test-Plug Cap: Gasketed and threaded cap, with retention chain or strap.
H. Test Kit: Pressure gage and adapter with probe, two bimetal dial thermometers, and
carrying case.
1. Pressure Gage and Thermometer Ranges: Approximately two times the system's
operating conditions.
A. System includes calibrated flow element, separate meter, hoses or tubing, valves, fittings,
and conversion chart compatible with flow element, meter, and system fluid.
B. Permanent Meters: Suitable for wall or bracket mounting. Include 150-mm- (6-inch-)
diameter, or equivalent, dial with fittings and copper tubing for connecting to flow element.
1. Construction: Bronze, brass, or factory-primed steel; with brass fittings and attached
tag with flow conversion data. Include ends threaded for DN50 (NPS 2) and smaller
elements and flanged or welded for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger elements.
2. Pressure Rating: 1725 kPa (250 psig).
3. Temperature Rating: 121 deg C (250 deg F).
E. Pitot-Tube Flow Elements: Differential-pressure design with probe made for insertion into
piping.
A. Description: Insertion type; measures flow directly in liters per second (gallons per minute).
A. In-Line Vortex-Shedding Flowmeter: Made for installation between pipe flanges; measures
flow directly in liters per second (gallons per minute).
B. Insertion Vortex-Shedding Flowmeter: Made for installation in large piping; measures flow
directly in liters per second.
A. Description: Instrument for visual verification of flow; made for installation in piping
systems.
1. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body, with sight glass and plastic pelton-
wheel indicator.
2. Pressure Rating: 860 kPa (125 psig).
3. Temperature Rating: 93 deg C (200 deg F).
A. Description: AWWA C700, displacement type, bronze case. Registers flow in liters or
cubic meters as required by utility.
B. Description: AWWA C701, turbine type. Registers flow in liters (gallons) or cubic meters
(cubic feet) as required by utility.
C. Description: AWWA C702, compound type, bronze case. Registers flow in liters (gallons)
or cubic meters (cubic feet) as required by utility.
1. Bypass Meter: AWWA C701, turbine type, bronze case; size not less than one-half
nominal size of main-line meter.
1. Bypass Meter: AWWA C701, turbine type, bronze case; not less than DN50
(NPS 2).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Install meters, gages, and accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions for
applications where used.
C. Install remote-reading dial thermometers in control panels with tubing connecting panel and
thermometer bulb supported to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.
D. Install separable sockets in vertical position in piping tees where fixed thermometers are
indicated.
E. Install thermometer wells in vertical position in piping tees where test thermometers are
indicated.
F. Duct Thermometer Support Flanges: Install in wall of duct where duct thermometers are
indicated. Attach to duct with screws.
A. Install pressure gages in piping tees with pressure-gage valve located on pipe at most
readable position.
C. Install liquid-filled-type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump, including
fire and booster pumps.
B. Install flow-measuring elements and meters at discharge of each pump, at inlet of each
hydronic coil in built-up central systems, and elsewhere as indicated.
E. Install permanently mounted meters for flow elements on walls or brackets in accessible
locations.
F. Install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow elements and meters as prescribed
by manufacturer's written instructions.
A. Install meters in hydronic supply piping. Install thermal well in return line for remote
sensor. Mount meter on wall if accessible; if not, provide bracket to support meter.
A. Install water meters, piping, and specialties according to AWWA M6 and utility's
requirements.
1. Install displacement-type water meters with shutoff valve on water meter inlet.
Install valve on water meter outlet and valved bypass around meter, unless prohibited
by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Install compound-type water meters with shutoff valves on water meter inlet and
outlet and on valved bypass around meter. Support meters, valves, and piping on
brick or concrete piers.
3. Install detector-type water meters with shutoff valves on water meter inlet and outlet
and on full-size valved bypass around meter. Support meter, valves, and piping on
brick or concrete piers.
A. Install roughing-in piping and specialties for water meter installation according to utility's
instructions and requirements.
3.9 CONNECTIONS
1. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and
maintenance.
2. Connect flow-measuring-system elements to meters.
3. Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters.
4. Connect thermal-energy-flowmeter transmitters to meters.
B. Make electrical connections to power supply and electrically operated meters and devices.
B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
C. Clean windows of meters and gages and clean factory-finished surfaces. Replace cracked
and broken windows, and repair scratched and marred surfaces with manufacturer's touchup
paint.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes basic requirements for factory-installed and field-installed motors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Show nameplate data and ratings; characteristics; mounting arrangements;
size and location of winding termination lugs, conduit entry, and grounding lug; and
coatings.
C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide motors specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
G. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Rated for continuous duty and sufficient to start,
accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, in indicated environment, with
indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering
service factor.
B. Motors Used with Reduced-Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for
indicated controller, with required motor leads brought to motor terminal box to suit control
method.
1. Critical vibration frequencies are not within operating range of controller output.
2. Temperature Rise: Match rating for Class B insulation.
3. Insulation: Class H.
4. Thermal Protection: Where indicated, conform to NEMA MG 1 requirements for
thermally protected motors.
D. Rugged-Duty Motors: Where indicated, motors are totally enclosed with 1.25 minimum
service factor, greased bearings, integral condensate drains, and capped relief vents.
Windings are insulated with nonhygroscopic material. External finish is chemical-resistant
paint over corrosion-resistant primer.
E. Source Quality Control: Perform the following routine tests according to NEMA MG 1:
A. Type: As indicated or selected by manufacturer from one of the following, to suit starting
torque and other requirements of specific motor application.
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split-phase start, capacitor run.
3. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B. Shaded-Pole Motors: Do not use, unless motors are smaller than 1/20 hp.
D. Bearings: Ball-bearing type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial
forces on motor shaft. Sealed, prelubricated sleeve bearings for other single-phase motors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ADJUSTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes steam and condensate piping and specialties for systems up to 1030
kPa (150 psig), inside the building.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
B. MP Systems: Medium-pressure systems operating at more than 104 kPa (15 psig), but at
less than 695 kPa (100 psig).
C. LP Systems: Low-pressure systems operating at less than 104 kPa (15 psig).
A. Steam and condensate piping for this Project is a two-pipe, mechanical flow, upfeed system.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of special-duty valve and steam trap indicated, including rated
capacities and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail flash tank assemblies and fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers,
special pipe support assemblies, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops and their
attachment to the building structure. Include dimensions, weights, loadings, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
D. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include the
following:
E. Maintenance Data: For steam traps, vacuum breakers, and meters to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials,
products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate
ASME label. Fabricate and stamp flash tanks to comply with the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of steam and condensate piping and suspension system
components with other construction, including light fixtures, hydronic piping, fire-
suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
C. Coordinate piping installation with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.
E. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Sections.
F. Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations through exterior walls and floor
assemblies. Coordinate with requirements for firestopping specified in Division 7 Section
"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for fire and smoke wall and floor assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Safety Valves:
2. Pressure-Reducing Valves:
3. Steam Traps:
5. Steam Meters:
a. EMCO Flowmeters.
b. ISTEC Corp.
c. Preso Meters Corp.
d. Spirax Sarco, Inc.
6. Condensate Meters:
A. General: Refer to Part 3 piping application articles for applications of pipe and fitting
materials.
A. Steel Pipe, DN 50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: ASTM A 53, Type S (seamless), Grade A,
Schedules 40 and 80, black steel, plain ends.
B. Steel Pipe, DN 65 through DN 300 (NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12): ASTM A 53, Type S
(seamless), Grade A, Schedules 40 and 80, black steel, plain ends.
C. Steel Pipe, DN 350 through DN 450 (NPS 14 through NPS 18): ASTM A 53, Type E
(electric-resistance welded) or Type S (seamless), Grade B, Schedule 30, black steel, plain
ends.
D. Steel Pipe, DN 500 (NPS 20): ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-resistance welded) or Type S
(seamless), Grade B, Schedule 20, black steel, plain ends.
1. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53, Schedules 40 and 80, black
steel; seamless for DN 50 (NPS 2) and smaller and electric-resistance welded for
DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger.
E. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125, 150, and 300.
H. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 125 and 250;
raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced.
I. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.
J. Wrought-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and
gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:
L. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, of the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical analysis
of pipe being welded.
M. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled; and design
temperatures and pressures.
2.4 VALVES
A. Gate, globe, check, ball valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."
A. Size and Capacity: As required for equipment according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code.
B. Bronze Safety Valves: Class 250, with threaded inlet and outlet; forged copper-alloy disc;
fully enclosed steel spring with adjustable pressure range and positive shutoff; factory set
and sealed.
1. Drip-Pan Elbow: Cast iron and having threaded inlet and outlet with threads
complying with ASME B1.20.1.
C. Cast-Iron Safety Valves: Class 250; forged copper-alloy disc with bronze nozzle; fully
enclosed, cadmium-plated steel spring with adjustable pressure range and positive shutoff;
raised-face flanged inlet and threaded outlet connections; factory set and sealed.
1. Drip-Pan Elbow: Cast iron and having threaded inlet and outlet with threads
complying with ASME B1.20.1.
D. Stop-Check Valves: Class 250, malleable-iron body and bonnet, cylindrical disc, removable
liner and machined seat, brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, polytetrafluoroethylene-
impregnated packing with 2-piece packing gland assembly, flanged end connections, and
cast-iron handwheel.
A. Size, Capacity, and Pressure Rating: Factory set for inlet and outlet pressures indicated.
B. Valve Characteristics: Pilot-actuated, diaphragm type, with adjustable pressure range and
positive shutoff. Valves shall have cast-iron body with threaded connections for valves
DN 50 (NPS 2) and smaller and flanged connections for valves DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and
larger; and hardened stainless-steel trim, replaceable head and seat, main head stem guide
fitted with flushing and pressure-arresting device, cover over pilot diaphragm, and non-
asbestos gaskets.
A. Thermostatic Traps: Class 125, bronze angle-pattern body with integral union tailpiece and
screw-in cap; balanced-pressure, stainless-steel or monel bellow element; and renewable,
hardened stainless-steel head and seat.
B. Thermodynamic Traps: Stainless-steel body and screw-in cap; maximum operating pressure
of 4140 kPa (600 psig); stainless-steel disc and seat; threaded ends.
C. Float and Thermostatic Traps: ASTM A 126, cast-iron body and bolted cap; renewable,
stainless-steel float mechanism with renewable, hardened stainless-steel head and seat;
maximum operating pressure of 860 kPa (125 psig); balanced-pressure, stainless-steel or
monel thermostatic bellow element.
1. Thermostatic air vent capable of withstanding 25 deg C (45 deg F) of superheat and
resisting water hammer without sustaining damage.
D. Inverted Bucket Traps: Cast-iron body and cap, pressure rated for 1725 kPa (250 psig);
stainless-steel head and seat; stainless-steel valve retainer, lever, and guide pin assembly;
and brass or stainless-steel bucket.
1. Contractor Options:
A. Float Vents: Cast-iron or brass body, seamless brass float, balanced-pressure thermostatic
bellows, and replaceable stainless-steel seat, float, and head.
A. Vacuum Breakers: 1035-kPa (150-psig) steam working pressure, 185 deg C (365 deg F)
maximum operating temperature, brass or stainless-steel body, and stainless-steel retainer,
spring, and ball; with plain or threaded outlet.
2.10 STRAINERS
A. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1725-kPa (250-psig) working steam pressure; ASTM A 126, Class B
cast-iron body; stainless-steel screen, No. 20 mesh for DN 50 (NPS 2) and smaller and
manufacturer's recommended perforations for DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger; tapped
blowoff plug. Threaded connections for strainers DN 50 (NPS 2) and smaller and flanged
connections for strainers DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger.
B. Basket Strainers: 1725-kPa (250-psig) working steam pressure; ASTM A 126, Class B cast-
iron body; stainless-steel screen; bolted cover; threaded connections for strainers DN 50
(NPS 2) and smaller and flanged connections for strainers DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger.
A. Shop or factory fabricated of welded steel according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code, for 1035-kPa (150-psig) rating; and bearing ASME label. Fabricate with
tappings for vents, low-pressure steam and condensate outlets, high-pressure condensate
inlet, air vent, safety valve, and legs.
2.12 METERS
B. Steam Meters: Pipeline sensor with stainless-steel wetted parts and flange connections and
with a piezoelectric sensor removable and serviceable without shutting down the process.
1. Turndown Ratio: At least 10:1 with plus or minus 1 percent accuracy over full flow
range.
2. Microprocessor Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4.
D. Condensate Meters: Brass body with threaded connections for meters DN 50 (NPS 2) and
smaller and flanged connections for meters DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger; positive
displacement turbine; magnetic coupling counter; suitable for temperatures up to 121 deg C
(250 deg F) and for 1725 kPa (250 psig) working pressure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Steam Piping, DN 50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Schedule 40 steel pipe, with threaded joints
using Class 125 cast-iron fittings.
B. Steam Piping, DN 65 through DN 300 (NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12): Schedule 40 steel
pipe, with welded joints using Schedule 40 wrought-steel welding fittings and Class 150
wrought-steel flanges.
C. Steam Piping, DN 350 through DN 450 (NPS 14 through NPS 18): Schedule 30 steel pipe,
with welded joints using Schedule 30 wrought-steel welding fittings and Class 150 wrought-
steel flanges.
D. Steam Piping, DN 500 (NPS 20): Schedule 20 steel pipe, with welded joints using
Schedule 20 wrought-steel welding fittings and Class 150 wrought-steel flanges.
E. Condensate Piping, DN 50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Schedule 80 steel pipe, with threaded
joints using Class 125 malleable-iron fittings.
F. Condensate Piping, DN 65 through DN 300 (NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12): Schedule 80
steel pipe, with welded joints using Schedule 80 wrought-steel welding fittings and
Class 150 wrought-steel flanges.
A. Steam Piping, DN 50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Schedule 40 steel pipe, with threaded joints
using Class 300 malleable-iron fittings.
B. Steam Piping, DN 65 through DN 300 (NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12): Schedule 40 steel
pipe, with welded joints using Schedule 40 wrought-steel welding fittings and Class 150
wrought-steel flanges.
C. Steam Piping, DN 350 through DN 450 (NPS 14 through NPS 18): Schedule 30 steel pipe,
with welded joints using Schedule 30 wrought-steel welding fittings and Class 150 wrought-
steel flanges.
D. Steam Piping DN 500 (NPS 20): Schedule 20 steel pipe, with welded joints using
Schedule 20 wrought-steel welding fittings and Class 150 wrought-steel flanges.
E. Condensate Piping, DN 50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Schedule 80 steel pipe, with threaded
joints using Class 300 malleable-iron fittings.
F. Condensate Piping, DN 65 through DN 300 (NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12): Schedule 80
steel pipe, with welded joints using Schedule 80 wrought-steel welding fittings and
Class 150 wrought-steel flanges.
A. General-Duty Valve Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following valve
types:
B. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at inlet connection to
each steam trap, and elsewhere as indicated.
B. Float and Thermostatic Traps: Steam main and riser drip legs, laundry equipment, kitchen
equipment, heat exchangers, and heating coils.
B. Inverted Bucket Traps: Steam main and riser drip legs, and laundry equipment.
C. Float and Thermostatic Traps: Kitchen equipment, heat exchangers, and heating coils.
D. Thermodynamic Traps: Steam main and riser drip legs, and heat tracer lines.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation requirements.
B. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and
servicing of valves.
C. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, DN 20 (NPS 3/4) ball valve, and short DN 20
(NPS 3/4) threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as
required for system drainage.
D. Install steam supply piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent downward in direction of
steam flow.
E. Install condensate return piping at a uniform grade of 0.4 percent downward in direction of
condensate flow.
F. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side down.
G. Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to steam mains using 45-degree
fittings in main pipe, with the takeoff coming out the top of the main pipe. Use of 90-degree
tee fittings is permissible if 45-degree fittings are impractical. If length of branch takeoff is
less than 3 m, pitch branch line down toward mains at a 0.4 percent grade.
H. Install unions in piping DN 50 (NPS 2) and smaller adjacent to each valve, at final
connections of each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
I. Install flanges in piping DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger at final connections of each piece of
equipment and elsewhere as indicated.
J. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid
valve, traps, and elsewhere as indicated. Install DN 20 (NPS 3/4) nipple and ball valve with
cap in blowdown connection of strainers DN 50 (NPS 2) and larger. Match size of strainer
blowoff valve and cap in blowdown connection for strainers smaller than DN 50 (NPS 2).
L. Install drip legs at low points and natural drainage points such as ends of mains, bottoms of
risers, and ahead of pressure regulators, control valves, isolation valves, pipe bends, and
expansion joints.
1. On straight runs with no natural drainage points, install drip legs at intervals not
exceeding 90 m where pipe is pitched down in direction of steam flow and a
maximum of 45 m where pipe is pitched up in direction of steam flow.
2. Size drip legs at vertical risers same size as pipe and extend beyond rise. Size drip
legs at other locations same diameter as main. In steam mains DN 150 (NPS 6) and
larger, dirt leg size can be reduced, but to no less than DN 100 (NPS 4).
3. Install gate valve at drip legs, dirt pockets, and strainer blowdowns to allow removal
of dirt and scale.
4. Install steam traps close to drip legs.
M. Pitch condensate piping down toward flash tank. If more than one condensate pipe
discharges into flash tank, install a swing check valve in each line. Install thermostatic air
vent at top of tank. Install inverted bucket or float and thermostatic trap at low-pressure
condensate outlet, sized for three times the condensate load. Install safety valve at tank top.
Install pressure gage, gate valve, and swing check valve on low-pressure (flash) steam
outlet.
A. Install steam traps in accessible locations as close as possible to connected equipment, but
not more than 1200 mm from connected equipment.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, install gate valve, strainer, and union upstream from trap;
install union, check valve, sight glass, and gate valve downstream from trap.
B. Install bypass piping around each pressure-reducing valve, with globe valve equal in size to
area of pressure-reducing valve seat ring, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Install pressure gages on low-pressure side of each pressure-reducing valve and ahead of
shutoff valve. Install pressure gages downstream from globe valve on pressure-reducing
valve bypass.
1. On two-stage pressure-reducing stations, install drip trap and pressure gage upstream
from second stage pressure-reducing valve.
A. Install lengths of straight pipe upstream and downstream from meters according to steam
meter manufacturer's instructions.
A. Install safety valves according to ASME B31.1. Pipe safety valve discharge without valves
to atmosphere outside building. Install drip-pan elbow fitting adjacent to safety valve and
pipe drain connection to nearest floor drain.
A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and
Supports."
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 6 m long.
2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 6 m or
longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 6 m or longer,
supported on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
C. Install hangers with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
D. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 3-m intervals between floors.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for joint
construction requirements for threaded, welded, and flanged joints.
A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment connections.
B. Install traps and control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If multiple, parallel control
valves are installed, only one bypass is required.
D. Install vacuum breaker downstream from control valve and bypass and close to coil inlet
connection.
E. Install ports for pressure and temperature gages at coil inlet connections.
A. Prepare steam and condensate piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
2. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.
3. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure
shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install
blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.
4. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure,
to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during
test.
1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage
due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping
may be used.
2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release trapped
air. Use drip legs installed at low points for complete draining of liquid.
3. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the
design pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel,
pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to
pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified
minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9,
"Building Services Piping."
4. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine
piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing,
or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
5. Prepare written report of testing.
3.15 ADJUSTING
A. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after steam and condensate system
balancing has been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.
3.16 CLEANING
A. Flush steam and condensate piping with clean water. Remove and clean or replace strainer
screens.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications, including
pipes, tubing, fittings, and specialties; special-duty valves; and refrigerants.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each valve type and refrigerant piping specialty specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping, specialties, and fittings, including pipe
and tube sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs,
wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial
relationship between piping and equipment.
1. Refrigerant piping indicated is schematic only. Size and design the layout and
installation of the piping, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and
tube sizes, to ensure proper operation and conformance with warranties of connected
equipment.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects/engineers and owners, and
any other information required by Engineer.
D. Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in the operation
and maintenance manual specified in Division 1.
A. ASME Compliance: Qualify brazing and welding processes and operators according to
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are UL listed and
labeled.
A. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. Deliver
to Employer.
1. Refrigeration Oil Test Kits: 2 each, containing everything required to conduct 1 test.
2. Refrigerant: 2 containers each, with 10 kg (22 lb) of refrigerant.
3. Filter-Dryer Cartridges: 3 of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Refrigerants:
B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88M, Type B (ASTM B 88, Type L), drawn temper.
C. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88M, Type B (ASTM B 88, Type L), annealed temper.
D. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88M, Type A (ASTM B 88, Type K), annealed temper.
2.5 VALVES
A. Diaphragm Packless Valves: 3450-kPa (500-psig) working pressure and 135 deg C (275
deg F) working temperature, globe or angle pattern, forged-brass or bronze body and
bonnet, phosphor bronze and stainless-steel diaphragms, rising stem and handwheel,
stainless-steel spring, nylon seat disc, with solder-end connections.
B. Packed-Angle Valves: 3450-kPa (500-psig) working pressure and 135 deg C (275 deg F)
working temperature, forged-brass or bronze body, forged-brass seal caps with copper
gasket, back seating, rising stem and seat, molded stem packing, with solder-end
connections.
C. Check Valves DN25 (1-Inch NPS) and Smaller: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure,
149 deg C (300 deg F) operating temperature; cast-brass body, with removable piston, PTFE
seat, and stainless-steel spring; straight-through globe design. Valve shall be straight-
through pattern, with solder-end connections.
D. Check Valves Larger than DN25 (1-Inch NPS): 3100-kPa (450-psig) operating pressure,
149 deg C (300 deg F) operating temperature; cast-bronze body, with cast-bronze or forged-
brass bolted bonnet; floating piston with mechanically retained PTFE seat disc. Valve shall
be straight-through or angle pattern, with solder-end connections.
E. Service Valves: 3450-kPa (500-psig) pressure rating, forged-brass body with copper stubs,
brass caps, removable valve core, integral ball check valve, with solder-end connections.
F. Solenoid Valves: Conform to ARI 760; 121 deg C (250 deg F) temperature rating, 2760-
kPa (400-psig) working pressure; forged brass, with PTFE valve seat, 2-way straight-
through pattern, and solder-end connections; manual operator; with NEMA 250, Type 1
solenoid enclosure with 13-mm (1/2-inch) conduit adapter, and 24-V normally closed
holding coil.
G. Pressure-Regulating Valves: Conform to ARI 770; pilot operated, forged brass or cast
bronze with pilot operator, stainless-steel bottom spring, pressure-gage tappings, 24-V dc
standard coil, and wrought-copper fittings for solder-end connections.
H. Pressure-Regulating Valves: Conform to ARI 770; direct acting, brass with pilot operator,
stainless-steel diaphragm, standard coil, and solder-end connections.
I. Pressure Relief Valves: Straight or angle brass body and disc, neoprene seat, factory sealed
and ASME labeled, for standard pressure setting.
K. Hot-Gas Bypass Valve: Adjustable, sized for capacity equal to last step of compressor
unloading; solder-end connections.
1. Filter Cartridge: Pleated media with integral end rings, stainless-steel support,
ARI 730 rated for capacity.
2. Filter-Dryer Cartridge: Pleated media with solid-core sieve with activated alumina,
ARI 730 rated for capacity.
3. Wax Removal Cartridge: Molded, bonded core of activated charcoal and desiccant
with integral gaskets.
E. Permanent Filter-Dryer: 2140-kPa (350-psig) maximum operating pressure, 107 deg C (225
deg F) maximum operating temperature; steel shell, and wrought-copper fittings for solder-
end connections; molded-felt core surrounded by desiccant.
F. Flanged Unions: 2760-kPa (400-psig) working pressure, 165 deg C (330 deg F) maximum
operating temperature; 2 brass tailpiece adapters for solder-end connections to copper
tubing; forged-steel flanges for 22- to 41-mm (1- to 1-1/2-inch) nominal copper-tube size
and ductile iron for 54- to 79-mm (2- to 3-inch) nominal copper-tube size with 4 plated steel
bolts, with silicon bronze nuts and fiber gasket; factory-applied rust-resistant coating on
flanges and bolts.
2.7 RECEIVERS
A. 150-mm (6-Inch) Diameter and Smaller: ARI 495, UL listed, steel, brazed; 2760-kPa (400-
psig) pressure rating, with tappings for inlet, outlet, and pressure relief valve.
B. More than 150-mm (6-Inch) Diameter: ARI 495, welded steel, tested and stamped
according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section 8D; 2760 kPa (400 psig) with
tappings for liquid inlet and outlet valves, pressure relief valve, and liquid-level indicator.
2.8 REFRIGERANT
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of refrigerant piping. Do not proceed with installation
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
C. Belowground for DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Type B (Type L) annealed-copper
tubing.
D. Belowground for Larger than DN50 (2-Inch NPS): Type A (Type K) annealed-copper
tubing.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15, “Safety Standards for Refrigeration
Systems.”
C. Install piping in short and direct arrangement, with minimum number of joints, elbows, and
fittings.
D. Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and service of compressor and other equipment.
Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection.
E. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers, or
between pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings,
sized to permit installation of full-thickness insulation.
G. Insulate suction lines and liquid lines, but insulate them together if adjacent.
1. Do not install insulation until system testing has been completed and all leaks have
been eliminated.
H. Install branch lines to parallel compressors of equal length, and pipe identically and
symmetrically.
I. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be
exposed to mechanical injury.
1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope of 0.4 percent
downward away from compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope of 0.4 percent downward to
compressor.
3. Install traps and double risers where indicated and where required to entrain oil in
vertical runs.
4. Liquid lines may be installed level.
L. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not
permitted, unless expressly indicated.
M. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with level side down.
N. Provide bypass around moisture-liquid indicators in lines larger than DN50 (2-inch NPS).
P. Install flexible connectors at the inlet and discharge connection, at right angles to axial
movement of compressor, parallel to crankshaft.
S. When brazing, remove solenoid-valve coils; remove sight glasses; and remove stems, seats,
and packing of valves, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply
heat near bulb of expansion valve.
V. Install pressure relief valves as required by ASHRAE 15, “Safety Standards for
Refrigeration Systems” Pipe pressure relief valves on receivers to outdoors.
W. Charge and purge systems, after testing, and dispose of refrigerant following ASHRAE 15,
“Safety Standards for Refrigeration Systems” procedures.
A. General: Hangers, supports, and anchors are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and
Supports." Provide according to ASME B31.5 and MSS SP-69.
B. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 6 m in length.
C. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 6 m or longer.
F. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
sizes. Tube sizes are nominal or standard tube sizes as expressed in ASTM B 88M
(ASTM B 88).
A. Basic pipe and tube joint construction is specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods."
B. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) during brazing to prevent
formation of scale.
B. Install valves on suction and discharge of compressor, for gage taps at compressor inlet and
outlet, for gage taps at hot-gas bypass regulators, on inlet and outlet, and on each side of
strainers.
C. Install check valves on compressor discharge and on condenser liquid lines on multiple
condenser systems.
E. Install globe valves on each side of strainers and dryers, in liquid and suction lines at
evaporators, and elsewhere as indicated.
G. Install solenoid valves ahead of each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install
solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.
I. Install pressure-regulating and relief valves as required by ASHRAE 15, “Safety Standards
for Refrigeration Systems”.
A. Install liquid indicators in liquid line leaving condenser, in liquid line leaving receiver, and
on leaving side of liquid solenoid valves.
B. Install strainers immediately upstream of each automatic valve, including expansion valves,
solenoid valves, hot-gas bypass valves, and compressor suction valves.
C. Install strainers on main liquid line where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers
are used.
F. Install replaceable-core filter-dryers in vertical liquid line adjacent to receivers and before
each solenoid valve.
H. Install solenoid valves in liquid line of systems operating with single pump-out or pump-
down compressor control, in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator systems, and in oil
bleeder lines from flooded evaporators to stop flow of oil and refrigerant into suction line
when system shuts down.
I. Install receivers on systems 18 kW (5 tons) and larger, and on systems with long piping
runs, sized to accommodate pump-down charge.
J. Install flexible connectors at or near compressors where piping configuration does not
absorb vibration.
3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Inspect and test refrigerant piping according to ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.
1. Pressure test with nitrogen to 1380 kPa (200 psig). Perform final tests at 186-kPa
(27-psig) vacuum and 1380 kPa (200 psig) using halide torch or electronic leak
detector. Test to no leakage.
B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.10 ADJUSTING
3.11 CLEANING
A. Before installation of copper tubing other than Type ACR, clean tubing and fittings with
trichloroethylene.
3.12 COMMISSIONING
1. Install core in filter dryer after leak test, but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump until temperature of 1.67 deg C (35
deg F) is indicated on vacuum dehydration indicator.
3. During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows, and low spots in piping.
4. Maintain vacuum on system for minimum of 5 hours after closing valve between
vacuum pump and system.
5. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 14 kPa (2 psig).
6. Complete charging of system, using new filter-dryer core in charging line. Provide
full-operating charge.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Division 2 Section "Fuel-Oil Distribution" for fuel oil storage tanks, fuel oil piping,
specialties, and accessories outside the building.
2. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for flexible
connectors.
3. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe supports, product descriptions,
and installation requirements. Hanger and support spacing is specified in this
Section.
4. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for pressure gages.
5. Division 15 Section "Steam And Condensate Piping" for valves.
6. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for strainers.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Specialty valves.
2. Fuel oil transfer pumps.
B. Shop Drawings: Fuel oil piping and equipment. Include plans and attachments to other
Work.
1. Drawings with dimensions and arrangement of pumps, motors, couplings, bases, drip
pans, duplex strainer, relief valves, back-pressure control valve, and supports and all
accessories.
2. Design and construction of pumps, motors, couplings, bases, drip pans, duplex
strainer, relief valves, back pressure control valves, all valves and accessories.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
4. Motor efficiency and power factor at full load.
5. Pressure and temperature limitations of pumps, duplex strainer, relief valves, back
pressure control valve and all valves.
6. ASTM number and pressure rating of pipe and fittings.
7. Performance data on pumps including discharge head, flow, suction lift and motor
power required at viscosity range shown. Refer to drawings for requirements.
8. Performance data on relief valves and back-pressure control valves.
9. Maintenance Data to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
D. Underground Tanks:
H. Tank and Piping Accessories: Design, construction, and dimensions of vent caps, fill boxes,
fill caps, spill containers and other accessories.
I. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of oil
transfer pumps and are based on the specific model selected. Other manufacturers' products
complying with requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements".
C. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for fuel oil piping materials,
installation, inspection, and testing.
D. Comply with NFPA 30, "Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code," and NFPA 31,
"Installation of Oil Burning Equipment," for fuel oil piping materials, components,
installations, inspection, and testing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2. Pressure-Reducing Valves:
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting
materials.
C. Joints: Socket or butt-welded for piping 50 mm (2 inches) and under. Piping 65 mm (2-l/2
inches) and over shall be butt-welded.
D. Fittings:
1. Butt-welded joints: Steel, ASTM A234, Grade B, ASME Bl6.9, same schedule as
adjoining pipe.
2. Socket-welded joints: Forged steel, ASME Bl6.ll, 13,790 kPa (2000 psi) class.
E. Unions: On piping 50 mm (2 inches) and under, forged steel, 13,790 kPa (2000 psi) class or
20,680 kPa (3000 psi) class.
G. Welding flanges: Weld neck, ASME B16.5, forged steel ASTM A105, 1025 kPa (150 psi).
H. Common Joining Materials: Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods" for joining materials not in this Section.
A. Oil Shutoff Valves: UL 842; metal-body ball valve with threaded ends according to
ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads.
B. Pressure-Reducing Valves: UL listed for fuel oil service. Include bronze body with 1035-
kPa (150-psig) minimum pressure rating.
C. Oil Safety Valves: UL listed for fuel oil service. Include metal body; broken-line, oil
shutoff feature; and 275-kPa (40-psig) minimum pressure rating.
1. Pipe Sizes 50 mm (two inches) and under: Rated for 1375 kPa (200 psi) water-oil-
gas, swing-type, threaded ends, ASTM B-62 bronze body. Provide union adjacent to
valve.
2. Pipe Sizes 65 mm (2 1/2 inches) and above: Rated for 1375 kPa (200 psi) water-oil-
gas, swing-type, 850 kPa (125 pounds) ASME flanged ends, ASTM A126 class B
cast iron body.
E. Foot Valves - Fuel Pump Suction: Double poppet, lapped-in metal-to-metal seats, double-
guided stems, 20 mesh inlet screen, same size as fuel suction piping. Foot valve shall be
removable to above grade through the tank manhole enclosure or through extractor fitting.
F. Extractor Fittings: Arranged to permit removal of foot valves, overfill prevention valves,
and other devices which are located below grade. Access point shall be through a cast iron
fill box-type manhole located at grade. Provide extractor wrench.
a. Pump Casing: steel designed for 1025 kPa (150 psi) minimum. Casing shall
have removable bolted sections to allow access to internal parts.
b. Power Rotors: Shall be ductile iron, alloy steel, or hardened or nitrided steel.
When service at viscosity of 2500 SSU or higher is required, ductile iron will
not be permitted.
c. Idler Rotors: Shall be ductile iron, pearlitic iron, or hardened gray iron, or
hardened or nitrided steel.
d. Shaft Seals: Provide mechanical seals.
e. Internal Relief Valves: Shall not be provided.
5. Electric Motor Drives: High efficiency, open drip proof. Select motor sizes so that
motors are not overloaded under all operating conditions. Motors shall be designed
for 40 °C ambient temperature.
6. Mounting - Pumps and Motors: Mount on steel base plates. Align pumps and motors
at the factory.
7. Shaft Couplings: Shall be all metal, flexible design which permits parallel, angular,
and axial misalignment. Coupling shall be sufficiently flexible to reduce transmission
of shock loads significantly. Coupling size selection shall be based on manufacturer's
recommendation for service. Provide coupling guard bolted to base plate.
B. Duplex Strainers: Provide duplex, basket-type cast iron strainers designed to allow one
basket to be removed for cleaning while the other is in service. Strainer shall include
diverter valve with handle which will select the strainer to be in use. Operation of the
diverter valve shall not stop the flow of fluid. Basket covers shall be clamp-type. Ratio of
free straining area to area of strainer pipe size shall be at least 4 to 1. Strainer baskets shall
stainless steel. Provide 60 mesh basket liners for No. 2 fuel oil. Strainers on suction side of
pumps shall be 345 kPa (50 psi), 93 °C (200 °F) minimum design; discharge side 1375 kPa
(200 psi), 93 °C (200 °F) minimum.
C. Pressure Relief Valves (Overpressure Protection): Provide at discharge of each oil pump.
Size valves to relieve the maximum pumping capability of each oil pump furnished, 965 kPa
(140 psi) set pressure of the relief valves plus 25 percent accumulation. Pressure settings
shall be adjustable. Valves shall have solid ungrooved plug and shall close bubble-tight.
D. Back Pressure Control Valve (Pump Pressure Control): Valve shall operate to maintain an
essentially constant pump discharge pressure. Pressure rise shall not exceed five percent of
set pressure. Flow range shall exceed the flow of the largest oil pump in the set. Set pressure
shall be adjustable plus or minus 20 percent of set pressure. Valve shall have stainless steel
disc and seat, bronze body. Valve disc and seat shall be renewable. Valve shall be designed
for fuel oil service as shown on the drawings.
E. Arrangement (Pump Set): Pumps, motors, valves, piping and accessories shall be furnished
as a factory-built unit. All items of equipment shall be mounted on a steel drip pan base with
an area sufficient to extend beyond the limits of all equipment, constructed of 3 mm
(1/8-inch) steel with 50 mm (2 inch) high vertical sides. Provide threaded 13 mm (1/2-inch)
plugged opening for draining. Arrange valves and piping on rigid steel supports welded to
the base. All items of equipment shall be readily accessible for operation and maintenance.
Pump set shall be suitable for the space available for rigging and placement.
F. Spare Parts: Complete mechanical seal for one oil pump. Complete set of casing gaskets for
one oil pump. Back pressure control valve, complete.
B. Construction:
1. Conform to UL 58, Type II, 360 degree secondary containment. Provide label of
conformance.
2. Conform to NFPA 30 or 31 as applicable.
3. The bottom 60 degrees of all lap or offset circumferential interior seams shall be seal
welded 30 degrees each way from bottom centerline to retard corrosion.
4. Design for surcharge loads due to backfill and paving as shown. In addition, in paved
areas, design for 14 500 kg (32,000 pound) axle loading.
5. Leaks and abrasions are not permitted. Maximum out-of-roundness is one percent of
the diameter.
C. Factory Cleaning: Clean interior and exterior. Remove all mill scale, dirt, rust, oil, welding
debris, loose coatings and coatings and material incompatible with fuel stored or protective
coating to be furnished. Sandblast exterior.
D. Factory Exterior Coating: UL 1746 and STI-P3 dielectric coating. Provide signed
certification that there are no holidays.
E. Cathodic Protection: Conform to UL 1746 and STI-P3, consisting of galvanic anodes, wire
conductors welded to the tank and connected to test station and anodes, insulating devices to
electrically isolate the tank from piping, test stations properly connected to permit required
tests.
1. Type: Above-ground, weatherproof. Enclosed terminals for test leads and leads
attached to protected system. Connection points for test instruments.
2. Housing: High-impact resistant plastic. Provide means to anchor housing below
grade. Locking cover for terminal board. Yellow color. Identification "CP TEST
STATION" molded in cover or otherwise permanently marked.
3. Terminal Board: High-impact resistant plastic board, cadmium or zinc-plated
hardware, accessible from front and rear, sufficient terminals for all required
connections. //
1. Conform to UL 58.
2. Pipe sizes 50 mm (2 inches) and smaller, threaded. Pipe sizes 65 mm (2 1/2 inches)
and larger, flanged, 1025 kPa (150 pound) ASME rating.
3. Welded joints required on steel piping located inside tanks.
4. Coordinate tank connection sizes and types with requirements of level gage unit, leak
detector sensor.
5. Dielectric insulation on all connections to steel piping.
6. All tank piping connections shall be within the tank manhole enclosure.
I. Tank Manholes: Provide two per tank. Bolted cover type, gasketed. Zinc plated bolts, nuts,
washers.
K. Wear (Striker) Plates: Provide 300 mm (12 inch) square 6 mm (0.25 inch) thick steel plates
welded to bottom of tank directly under the sounding opening, the fuel return discharge, and
the fill discharge.
M. Hold Down Straps: Provide quantity and design of EPDM-type rubber encased steel straps
as recommended by tank manufacturer to anchor tank to concrete ballast slab. Straps shall
have tension load capability equal to hold-down capability of ballast slab, with a minimum
safety factor of two. Provide complete anchorage devices, including turnbuckles, for
adjusting tension.
N. Vent pipe on underground tank: carry to nearest outside wall of building and as shown on
the drawings, carry up at least 4 m above grade with open end at least 1.5 m away from any
building opening. Pipe is to be sloped back to tank with no traps and is to be adequately
supported. End of pipe is to have a weatherproof and flame arrestor vent cap.
A. Provide at horizontal interface between soil and gravel backfill above tank. Mat must cover
entire horizontal area of gravel backfill.
B. Materials of Construction-Options:
1. Porous, non-woven polypropylene and nylon fabric, heat bonded, 135 g per sq. meter
(4 ounces per square yard), resistant to all alkalies and weak acids.
2. Porous fiberglass mat consisting of borosilicate glass fiber, average diameter 8 to 12
microns, 50 mm to 100 mm (2 to 4 inch) strands, bonded with phenol formaldehyde
resin.
3. Thickness of mat 6 mm to 13 mm (1/4 to 1/2 inch); minimum density 48 kg/m3 (3
lb./cu. ft.).
A. Vent Caps: Galvanized cast iron or aluminum with brass or bronze screens, arranged to
permit full venting and to prevent entry of foreign material into the vent line. Same pipe size
as vent pipe.
B. Fill Boxes: Spill-container type enclosing a fill cap assembly with camlock hose connector
with closure coordinated with fittings used by fuel supplier. Watertight assembly,
cylindrical body, quick-opening corrosion-resistant watertight sealable cover, polyethylene
spill containment compartment with minimum 15 gallon capacity. Integral drain valve with
discharge to fill pipe. Fill cap shall be lockable, tight-fill design with provision for padlock
on the top of the cap. Fill cap shall screw onto threaded adapter which can be removed
without removing fill box. Entire assembly shall seal tight with no leakage during filling and
when cap is in place. Spill-container type not required at locations designated only for
sounding tanks. Provide special tools necessary for opening fill boxes and fill caps. For
underground tanks, protect spill container from traffic by ramped, drain-slotted cast iron
body ring and cover. Design shall prevent transmission of traffic loads to the underground
tank.
C. Fill caps located above grade without fill boxes shall be lockable, tight-fill design, operated
by special wrench which shall be furnished. Entire assembly shall seal tight with no leakage
during fill and when cap is in place.
D. Support horizontal portion of pipes located inside tank every 2100 mm (7 feet) maximum.
E. Furnish gauging chart, liters versus mm and gallons versus inches depth.
F. Furnish sounding rod for each tank size. Mark rods in increments representing five percent
of tank capacity. Provide length of rod suitable for tank burial depth. Rods shall be
graduated in liters.
1. Fill Boxes at Grade Level: Aluminum, brass or bronze plate, anchored to concrete fill
box pad with stamped or engraved letters 18 mm (3/4 inch) high.
2. Fill Caps above Grade: Aluminum, brass or bronze plate, clamped to fill pipe, with
stamped or engraved letters 18 mm (3/4 inch) high.
3. Legend: "BURNER FUEL OIL FILL"
A. Enclose the fuel supply, return and fill pipes in a secondary containment conduit, complete
with end seals, with 25 mm (1.0 inches) minimum continuous annular space, 37 mm (1.5
inches) between carrier pipes, which shall contain all leakage and which has provisions for
leak detection system as specified.
B. Steel Conduit with Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Coating: Carbon steel pipe, ASTM
A53, Grade B, Schedule 40 for diameters through 125 mm (5 inches), 3.4 mm (0.134 inch)
thick for diameters greater than 125 mm (5 inches) up thru 650 mm (26 inches). All welded
construction. Blast clean exterior per SSPC SP-7. Apply fiberglass reinforced polyester
(FRP) external cladding at least 2.5 mm (0.10 inches) thick with ultra-violet inhibitor.
Cladding on field joints shall be equivalent to factory-applied cladding applied on remainder
of system. Test entire system for holidays using a 35,000 volt holiday detector. This system
not permitted when carrier pipe or tracing system contains steam or condensate.
C. Pipe Supports: Provide supports within conduit for fuel carrier pipes spaced 2100 mm (7
feet) apart except 3000 mm (10 feet) apart for carrier pipe size 50 mm (2 inches) through
100 mm (4 inches). Support design shall permit differential movement of pipes, allow
drainage of leakage to sumps, and maintain alignment of carrier pipes.
D. Conduit End Seals: Same material and coating as conduit, leak tight.
E. Leak Detector Sensor Locations: On each piping system, provide sumps at the low points
with water-tight openings above grade for access to leak detector sensors. Design sumps to
intercept all potential leakage. Maximum spacing between sumps, 3000 mm (100 feet).
A. Type: Microprocessor-based system for remote monitoring of fuel level in all fuel storage
tanks in the project. Float-type tank level sensors. High and low level alarms. Volumetric
tank-tightness testing. Complete with all transducing, transmitting, and receiving devices.
On board printer to provide complete report of all system functions upon command. System
may be combined with leak detection system.
B. Level Indicator:
1. Digital continuous readout, minimum 18 mm (0.7 inches) high, showing tank level in
liters, smallest reading one liter.
2. Tank and fuel characteristics contained in preprogrammed non-volatile field-
replaceable databases. Protected power supply.
3. Locate all indicators, selector switches and alarms on face of wall-mounted panel.
Construct panel of fiberglass, stainless steel, or aluminum. Provide engraved plastic
labels identifying product measured, measuring units, and the tank identification
number.
D. Float-Type-Mounted Level Sensors: Float units shall be designed for installation and
removal through a 100 mm (four inch) diameter vertical pipe mounted in the top of the tank
E. System Performance: Resolution 2 mm (0.07 inch) of fluid height, accuracy plus or minus 6
mm (0.25 inch) of fluid height. Automatic compensation for fluid temperature changes.
F. Underground Wiring and Piping: Enclose in water-tight PVC conduit sized and arranged as
recommended by system manufacturer.
A. Tape shall be 0.1 mm (0.004 inch) thick, 150 mm (6 inches) wide, yellow polyethelene with
a ferrous metallic core, acid and alkali-resistant and shall have a minimum strength of
12,000 kPa (1750 psi) lengthwise and 10,300 kPa (1500 psi) crosswise with an elongation
factor of 350 percent. Provide bold black letters on the tape identifying the type of system.
Tape color and lettering shall be unaffected by moisture and other substances contained in
the backfill material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise required, for fuel oil transfer
pumps. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Division 15 Section
"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
A. Extend fuel oil piping and connect to fuel oil distribution for service entrance into building.
A. General: Flanges, unions, transition, and special fittings with pressure ratings same as or
higher than system pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Piping, DN 25 (NPS 1) and Smaller: Steel pipe, steel threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
C. Piping, DN 32 to DN 50 (NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2): Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and
welded joints.
A. Refer to section “ STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPE” for specification of different valve
types
B. Fuel Oil: Discharge side of pumps. Conform to NFPA Code Nos. 30 and 3l.
C. Fuel Oil: Suction side of pumps and tank fill lines where tank is below fill point. Conform
to NFPA Code Nos. 30 and 3l.
D. Fuel Oil: Tank fill lines where tank is above fill point.
F. Drain Valves: Use hose-end drain valves that comply with MSS SP-110, bronze ball valve
with outlet connection according to ASME B1.20.7 for garden-hose thread with cap. Refer
to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for selection.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation requirements.
B. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level
side down.
C. Install strainer on inlet side of control valves, pressure-reducing valves, fuel oil pumps, and
oil burner connections.
D. Install sediment traps at points where sediment or condensate may collect. Locate where
readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate would
be subject to freezing.
1. Construct sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use
minimum-length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 75 mm long, and same
size as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor for
removal of plug or cap.
E. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping of each fuel oil pump set.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
joint construction.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices.
B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and
minimum rod sizes:
1. DN 15 (NPS 1/2) and Smaller: Maximum span, 1.5 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
2. DN 20 to DN 32 (NPS 3/4 to NPS 1-1/4): Maximum span, 2.1 m; minimum rod size,
10 mm.
3. DN 40 (NPS 1-1/2): Maximum span, 2.7 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
4. DN 50 (NPS 2): Maximum span, 3 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
C. Support vertical steel pipe at each floor and at spacing not greater than 4.5 m.
3.9 CONNECTIONS
B. Connect piping to equipment with oil shutoff valve and union. Install union between valve
and equipment.
C. Ground equipment.
B. Install tanks on 150 mm (6 inch) thick beds of clean, washed, inert sand which is placed on
concrete foundation. Secure tank to concrete ballast foundation with specified straps. Slope
tank. Completed tank installation shall successfully resist buoyant forces of flooding to top
of tank when tank is empty.
C. After tanks are set in place, prior to backfilling, test tanks by applying internal air pressure
of 35 kPa to 48 kPa (5 - 7 psi). Repair leaks in steel tanks by chipping to bare metal and
rewelding. Repair leaks in plastic tank jackets (if furnished) as recommended by tank
manufacturer. Retest tanks until all leaks are repaired.
D. Prior to backfilling, repair all damage to tank coating with the same coating material. Coat
all metal parts which will be below grade, including tie-down fittings and straps, bolts,
rings, pipes, with the tank coating material. Perform 10,000 volt holiday test on all areas of
coating which have been repaired.
E. Excavation, trenching and backfilling around the tanks is specified under Section,
EARTHWORK. Backfill material shall be same as bedding material and shall conform to
F. Do not place fluid in the tank until the backfilling and the piping connections to the tanks
are complete, and the tanks have been inspected internally by the Contracting Officer’s
Technical Representative (COTR) or Resident Engineer. Keep the tank excavation
dewatered.
1. Provide bedding and backfill material as specified for tanks of the same material of
construction.
2. Top of system 450 mm (18 inches) minimum below grade.
3. Design and locate leak detector sumps to intercept all potential leakage. Maximum
spacing along each system, 3000 mm (100 feet).
4. Seal all building and manhole wall penetrations with watertight flexible Linkseal
system, or equal.
5. After placing system, prior to backfill, repair all damage, including coatings, as
recommended in printed instructions of system manufacturer. Perform 10,000 volt
holiday test on coated steel systems.
6. On steel systems which do not have FRP cladding, install cathodic protection system.
C. Leak Test: Test carrier pipes with air pressure at 690 kPa (100 psi), and test the containment
piping with air pressure at 55 kPa (8 psi). Systems shall hold the pressure for 30 minutes.
Repair all leaks and retest.
D. Coatings for Steel Piping not in Secondary Containment System: Provide coating and
cathodic protection as specified in Article, SECONDARY CONTAINMENT FOR
UNDERGROUND PIPING SYSTEMS.
E. Buried Utility Warning Tape: Install tape 300 mm (12 inches) below grade above the piping
system.
A. Provide for tank fill, tank sounding, leak detector sensors, and extractor fittings. Set at grade
in concrete pads. Refer to fill box detail. Provide identification plate set into the concrete
pad which identifies the purpose of the device and type of fuel in the tank.
3.13 INSTALLATION AND TESTING, LEAK DETECTOR SYSTEMS FOR TANKS AND
PIPING
B. Locate control monitor panels 1500 mm (5 feet) above the floor on inside wall of boiler
room or generator room depending on type of fuel tank served, unless shown otherwise.
C. Test operation of each probe, and monitoring system with fuel and water. If type of probe
utilized is damaged by exposure to fuel, provide temporary probe for testing monitoring
system.
B. Locate level indicator and alarm panel 1500 mm (5 feet) above the floor on inside wall of
boiler room unless shown otherwise.
C. Locate remote high level alarm on exterior wall in view of tank fill point, 2400 mm (8 feet)
above grade.
A. All pipe penetrations shall be leak tight permitting no groundwater into enclosure.
A. Provide separate station for each tank and each piping system, anchor firmly, locate so that
terminal board is 600 mm (2 feet) minimum above grade. Connect wiring from all anodes
and protected structures to the test stations.
B. Test Instruments:
1. Volt-Ammeter.
2. Saturated copper-copper sulfate reference electrode.
3. Other instruments as required.
1. Potential of minus 0.85 volt between protected structure and reference electrode.
2. Minimum shift of minus 300 millivolts upon application of protective current.
Voltage measured between protected structure and reference electrode.
3. Minimum shift of minus 100 millivolts upon interruption of protective current.
Voltage measured between protected structure and reference electrode.
D. Test Report: Provide, to Engineer, complete report showing all test measurements,
calculations, list of instruments used.
A. Inspect and test fuel oil piping according to NFPA 30, "Testing" Paragraph and NFPA 31,
"Tests of Piping" Paragraph; and according to requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory results are
obtained.
C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.19 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes water distribution piping from locations indicated to fixtures and equipment
inside building.
1. Division 2 Section "Water Distribution Systems" for exterior water service piping.
2. Division 2 Section "Water Distribution Systems" for exterior water service piping and
water meters.
3. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for water meters, thermometers, pressure gages,
and fittings.
4. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, pressure gages, and fittings.
5. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for water distribution piping specialties.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Water Service Piping: Water piping outside building that conveys water to building.
B. Service Entrance Piping: Water piping at entry into building between water service piping and
water distribution piping.
C. Water Distribution Piping: Water piping inside building that conveys water to fixtures and
equipment throughout the building.
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following
minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Combined Fire-Protection and Domestic, Service Entrance Piping: 1725 kPa (250 psig).
2. Service Entrance Piping: 1100 kPa (160 psig).
3. Water Distribution Piping: 860 kPa (125 psig).
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping made to specified standards.
B. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.
C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic potable-
water piping components. Include marking "NSF-pw" on plastic potable-water piping.
D. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," Sections 1 through
9 for potable-water piping and components.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. Deliver
materials to Employer.
1. Keyed Couplings, DN100 (4-Inch NPS) and Smaller: 12 of each type and size installed.
Include one extra gasket with each coupling.
2. Keyed Couplings, DN125 (5-Inch NPS) and Larger: 6 of each type and size installed.
Include one extra gasket with each coupling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping
Applications" Article.
B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88M, Types A and B (ASTM B 88, Types K and L), water tube,
annealed temper.
C. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88M, Types B and C (ASTM B 88, Types L and M), water tube,
drawn temper.
E. Galvanized, Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53 or ASTM A 106, Schedule
40, seamless, steel pipe.
A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube fitting materials are indicated in Part 3
"Piping Applications" Article.
B. Copper, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18 cast-copper alloy or ASME B16.22
wrought copper.
C. Copper, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B 75M (ASTM B 75) copper tube or ASTM B 584 bronze
castings.
D. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges if
required to match piping.
F. Cast-Iron, Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, galvanized, standard pattern with threads
according to ASME B1.20.1. Furnish Class 250 fittings if required to match piping.
G. Steel, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM A 47M (ASTM A 47) malleable-iron casting, ASTM A 106
steel pipe, or ASTM A 536 ductile-iron casting with dimensions matching steel pipe.
H. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket
joint, metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces, and female threaded ends with threads according to
ASME B1.20.1. Furnish Class 300 unions if required to match piping.
I. Cast-Iron, Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125. Furnish Class 250 flanges if required to
match piping.
J. Ferrous Expansion Joints: Compound, galvanized steel fitting with telescoping body and slip-pipe
section. Include 1035-kPa (150-psig) minimum pressure rating, packing rings, packing, limit rods,
chrome-plated finish on slip-pipe section, flanged ends, and AWWA C550 epoxy interior coating.
A. General: Applications of the following piping joining materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping
Applications" Article.
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for commonly used
joining materials.
D. Brazing Filler Metal: AWS A5.8, BCuP, copper phosphorus or BAg, silver classification.
E. Copper, Keyed Couplings: Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to AWWA C606. Include
ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for hot water, and bolts and nuts.
F. Steel, Keyed Couplings: AWWA C606 for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing
sections, gasket suitable for hot water, and bolts and nuts.
G. Transition Couplings: Coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure rating at
least equal to, and with ends compatible with piping to be joined.
2.4 VALVES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be
used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Underground, Service Entrance Piping: Do not use flanges or valves underground. Use the
following:
1. DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Soft copper tube, Type B (Type L); copper, solder-joint
pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
2. DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: PVC, Schedule 80 pipe; PVC, Schedule 80 socket
fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
3. DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: PVC, Schedule 40 pipe; PVC, Schedule 40 fittings; and
solvent-cemented joints.
4. DN65 to DN90 (2-1/2- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS): Soft copper tube, Type B (Type L); copper,
solder-joint pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
5. DN65 to DN90 (2-1/2- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS): PVC, Schedule 80 pipe; PVC, Schedule 80
socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
6. DN65 to DN90 (2-1/2- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS): PVC, Schedule 40 pipe; PVC, Schedule 40
socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
7. DN100 to DN200 (4- to 8-Inch NPS): Galvanized steel pipe and cast-iron, threaded
fittings.
8. DN100 to DN200 (4- to 8-Inch NPS): PVC, Schedule 80 pipe; PVC, Schedule 80 socket
fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
9. DN100 to DN200 (4- to 8-Inch NPS): PVC, Schedule 40 pipe; PVC, Schedule 40 socket
fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
10. DN100 to DN200 (4- to 8-Inch NPS): PVC, Class 150 pipe and PVC, Class 150, bell-and-
spigot fittings.
1. DN40 (1-1/2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type B (Type L); copper, solder-
joint fittings; and soldered joints.
2. DN40 (1-1/2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type C (Type M); copper, solder-
joint fittings; and soldered joints.
3. DN40 (1-1/2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe and CPVC,
Schedule 80 threaded fittings.
4. DN40 (1-1/2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe; CPVC,
Schedule 80 socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
5. DN40 (1-1/2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 40 pipe; CPVC,
Schedule 40 socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
6. DN50 (2-Inch NPS): Hard copper tube, Type B (Type L); copper, solder-joint fittings; and
soldered joints.
7. DN50 (2-Inch NPS): Hard copper tube, Type C (Type M); copper, solder-joint fittings;
and soldered joints.
8. DN50 (2-Inch NPS): Hard copper tube, Type B (Type L) with grooved ends; copper,
grooved-end fittings; and copper, keyed couplings.
9. DN50 (2-Inch NPS): Hard copper tube, Type C (Type M) with grooved ends; copper,
grooved-end fittings; and copper, keyed couplings.
10. DN50 (2-Inch NPS): ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe and CPVC, Schedule 80
threaded fittings.
11. DN50 (2-Inch NPS): ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 80 socket
fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
12. DN50 (2-Inch NPS): ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 40 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 40 socket
fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
13. DN50 (2-Inch NPS): ASTM D 2846, CPVC pipe and fitting system and solvent-cemented
joints.
14. DN65 to DN90 (2-1/2- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS): Hard copper tube, Type B (Type L); copper,
solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints.
15. DN65 to DN90 (2-1/2- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS): Hard copper tube, Type C (Type M); copper,
solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints.
16. DN65 and DN80 (2-1/2- and 3-Inch NPS): Hard copper tube, Type B (Type L) with
grooved ends; copper, grooved-end fittings; and copper, keyed couplings.
17. DN65 and DN80 (2-1/2- and 3-Inch NPS): Hard copper tube, Type C (Type M) with
grooved ends; copper, grooved-end fittings; and copper, keyed couplings.
18. DN65 to DN90 (2-1/2- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS): ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe and
CPVC, Schedule 80 threaded fittings.
19. DN65 to DN90 (2-1/2- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS): ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe;
CPVC, Schedule 80 socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
20. DN65 to DN90 (2-1/2- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS): ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 40 pipe;
CPVC, Schedule 40 socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
21. DN100 to DN150 (4- to 6-Inch NPS): Hard copper tube, Type B (Type L) with grooved
ends; copper, grooved-end fittings; and copper, keyed couplings.
22. DN100 to DN150 (4- to 6-Inch NPS): Hard copper tube, Type C (Type M) with grooved
ends; copper, grooved-end fittings; and copper, keyed couplings.
23. DN100 to DN150 (4- to 6-Inch NPS): Galvanized steel pipe and cast-iron, threaded
fittings.
24. DN100 to DN150 (4- to 6-Inch NPS): Galvanized steel pipe with grooved ends;
galvanized steel, grooved-end fittings; and galvanized steel, keyed couplings.
25. DN100 to DN150 (4- to 6-Inch NPS): ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe and CPVC,
Schedule 80 threaded fittings.
26. DN100 to DN150 (4- to 6-Inch NPS): ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe; CPVC,
Schedule 80 socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
27. DN100 to DN150 (4- to 6-Inch NPS): ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 40 pipe; CPVC,
Schedule 40 socket fittings; and solvent- cemented joints.
28. DN200 (8-Inch NPS): Hard copper tube, Type B (Type L) with grooved ends; copper,
grooved-end fittings; and copper, keyed couplings.
29. DN200 (8-Inch NPS): Hard copper tube, Type C (Type M) with grooved ends; copper,
grooved-end fittings; and copper, keyed couplings.
30. DN200 (8-Inch NPS): Galvanized steel pipe and cast-iron, threaded fittings.
31. DN200 (8-Inch NPS): Galvanized steel pipe with grooved ends; galvanized steel, grooved-
end fittings; and galvanized steel, keyed couplings.
32. DN200 (8-Inch NPS): ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 80 socket
fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
33. DN250 and DN300 (10- and 12-Inch NPS): Galvanized steel pipe and cast-iron, threaded
fittings.
34. DN250 and DN300 (10- and 12-Inch NPS): Galvanized steel pipe with grooved ends;
galvanized steel, grooved-end fittings; and galvanized steel, keyed couplings.
F. Underground, Water Distribution Piping: Do not use flanges or valves underground. Use the
following:
1. DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type B (Type L); wrought-copper,
solder-joint pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
2. DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type C (Type M); wrought-copper,
solder-joint pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
3. DN65 to DN100 (2-1/2- to 4-Inch NPS): Hard copper tube, Type B (Type L); wrought-
copper, solder-joint pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
4. DN65 to DN100 (2-1/2- to 4-Inch NPS): Hard copper tube, Type C (Type M); wrought-
copper, solder-joint pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
1. DN90 (3-1/2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type B (Type L); solder-joint
pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
2. DN90 (3-1/2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type C (Type M); solder-joint
pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
3. DN90 (3-1/2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: PVC, Schedule 80 pipe; PVC, Schedule 80 socket
fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
4. DN100 to DN200 (4- to 8-Inch NPS): PVC, Schedule 80 pipe; PVC, Schedule 80 socket
fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
C. Plastic gate, globe, ball, butterfly, and check valves may be used with plastic piping.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
A. Extend service entrance piping to exterior water service piping in sizes and locations indicated for
service entrances into building. Refer to Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for water service
piping.
B. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside
building at each service entrance pipe.
C. Install water-pressure regulators downstream from shutoff valves. Refer to Division 15 Section
"Plumbing Specialties" for water-pressure regulators.
D. Ductile-Iron, Service Entrance Piping: Comply with AWWA C600. Install buried piping between
shutoff valve and connection to water service piping with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to wall or
floor at entrance. Include thrust-block supports at vertical and horizontal offsets.
1. Encase piping with polyethylene film according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
E. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service entrance pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make
installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"
for sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
B. Mechanically Formed Outlets: Form tee in copper tube according to equipment manufacturer's
written instructions. Use tool designed for copper tube, drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet,
dimple tube forming seating stop, and braze branch tube into collar.
C. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling
and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Solvent-Cemented, Thermoplastic Pipe and Fitting Joints: Handle cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements according to ASTM F 402.
A. Rough-in water piping for water meter installation according to utility company's requirements.
Water meters will be furnished by utility.
B. Rough-in water piping and install water meters according to utility company's requirements.
Water meters will be furnished by utility.
C. Rough-in water piping and install water meters according to utility company's requirements. Refer
to Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for water meters.
D. Rough-in water piping and install water meters according to utility company's requirements. Refer
to Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for water meters.
A. Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves close to main on each branch and riser serving plumbing
fixtures or equipment, and where indicated. Use gate or ball valves for piping DN50 (2-inch NPS)
and smaller. Use gate or butterfly valves for piping DN65 (2-1/2-inch NPS) and larger.
B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each water supply to equipment, on each supply to
plumbing fixtures without supply stops, and where indicated. Use gate or ball valves for piping
DN50 (2-inch NPS) and smaller. Use gate or butterfly valves for piping DN65 (2-1/2-inch NPS)
and larger.
C. Drain Valves: Install drain valves for equipment, at base of each water riser, at low points in
horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping.
1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.
D. Balancing Valves: Install in each hot-water circulation return branch, discharge side of each pump
and circulator, and where indicated. Use ball valve for piping DN50 (2-inch NPS) and smaller and
butterfly valve for piping DN65 (2-1/2-inch NPS) and larger. Refer to Division 15 Section
"Plumbing Specialties" for balancing valves.
E. Calibrated Balancing Valves: Install in each hot-water circulation return branch, discharge side of
each pump and circulator, and where indicated. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing
Specialties" for calibrated balancing valves.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices. Install
the following:
D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 10-mm minimum rods.
E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
diameters:
1. DN20 (3/4-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Maximum horizontal spacing, 1500 mm with 10-mm
minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 3 m.
2. DN25 (1-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1800 mm with 10-mm minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 3 m.
3. DN32 (1-1/4-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1800 mm with 10-mm minimum
rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 3 m.
4. DN40 and DN50 (1-1/2 and 2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 2400 mm with
10-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 3 m.
5. DN65 (2-1/2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 2700 mm with 13-mm minimum
rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 3 m.
6. DN80 (3-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3 m with 13-mm minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 3 m.
7. DN90 (3-1/2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3 m with 13-mm minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 3 m.
8. DN100 and DN125 (4- and 5-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3 m with 13-mm
minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 3 m.
9. DN150 (6-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3 m with 16-mm minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 3 m.
10. DN200 (8-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3 m with 19-mm minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 3 m.
F. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1. DN32 (1-1/4-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Maximum horizontal spacing, 2100 mm with 10-
mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
2. DN40 (1-1/2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 2700 mm with 10-mm minimum
rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
3. DN50 (2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3 m with 10-mm minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
4. DN65 (2-1/2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3.4 m with 13-mm minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
5. DN80 and DN90 (3- and 3-1/2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3.7 m with 13-
mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
6. DN100 and DN125 (4- and 5-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3.7 m with 16-mm
minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
7. DN150 (6-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3.7 m with 19-mm minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
8. DN200 through DN300 (8- through 12-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3.7 m
with 22-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.11 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect service entrance piping to exterior water service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
B. Connect water distribution piping to service entrance piping at shutoff valve, and extend to and
connect to the following:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
Engineer.
2. During installation, notify Engineer at least 24 hours before inspection must be made.
Perform tests specified below in presence of Engineer.
3. Reinspection: If Engineer finds that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required
corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by Engineer.
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each
test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced water piping until it
has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it
has been tested and approved.
3. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 345 kPa (50 psig) above operating
pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source
and allow to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must
be repaired.
4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.13 CLEANING
B. Clean and disinfect potable service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows:
D. Clean and disinfect service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing water piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by Engineer or, if method is not
prescribed, procedure described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or as described
below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 mg/L
(50 ppm) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least
200 mg/L (200 ppm) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.
c. Flush system with clean, potable water until chlorine is no longer in water coming
from system after the standing time.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to Engineer. Repeat procedure if biological
examination shows contamination.
F. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
3.14 COMMISSIONING
A. Fill water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is
full of water.
C. Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. Do not operate
water heaters before filling with water.
D. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
1. Water-Pressure Regulators: Set outlet pressure at 550 kPa (80 psig) maximum, unless
otherwise indicated.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sanitary drainage and vent piping, and storm drainage piping inside building
and to locations indicated.
1. Division 2 Sections "Sanitary Sewerage" and "Storm Drainage" for sanitary sewerage and
storm drainage.
2. Division 2 Section "Foundation Drainage Systems" for foundation drains.
3. Division 2 Section "Septic Tank Systems" for sewage disposal systems.
4. Division 2 Section "Interceptors" for sewerage and drainage system interceptors.
5. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for drainage and vent piping system
specialties.
6. Division 15 Section "Chemical-Waste Piping" for chemical waste and vent piping.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Sewerage Piping: Building sewer piping outside building that conveys sanitary sewage from
building.
B. Drainage Piping: Building sewer piping outside building that conveys storm drainage from
building.
C. Service Entrance Piping: Drainage piping at entry into building between outside building sewer
piping and inside drainage piping.
D. Drainage and Vent Piping: Piping inside building that conveys waste water and vapors from
fixtures and equipment throughout the building.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic and other piping materials:
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene.
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following
minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping made to specified standards.
B. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.
C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping
components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; "NSF-
drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and "NSF-
sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
D. Comply with International Plumbing Codes & Standards such as Uniform Plumbing Code "UPC"
and American Society of Plumbing Engineers "ASPE" data books.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. Deliver
materials to Employer.
1. Rubber Gaskets for Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe, DN125 (5-Inch NPS) and Larger:
8 of each class and size installed.
2. Couplings for Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Piping, DN100 (4-Inch NPS) and Smaller: 8 of each
type and size installed.
3. Couplings for Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Piping, DN125 (5-Inch NPS) and Larger: 6 of each
type and size installed.
4. Keyed Couplings, DN100 (4-Inch NPS) and Smaller: 4 of each type and size installed.
Include one extra gasket with each coupling.
5. Keyed Couplings, DN125 (5-Inch NPS) and Larger: 2 of each type and size installed.
Include one extra gasket with each coupling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping
Applications" Article.
B. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A 74, Service and Extra Heavy classes. Include
ASTM C 564 rubber gasket, with dimensions required for pipe class, for each hub.
E. Galvanized, Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53 or ASTM A 106,
Schedule 40, ERW, steel pipe.
F. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151 with mechanical- or push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end,
unless plain, grooved, or flanged ends are indicated.
A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube fitting materials are indicated in Part 3
"Piping Applications" Article.
C. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron, Soil-Pipe Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service and Extra Heavy classes, hub
and spigot. Include ASTM C 564 rubber gasket, with dimensions required for pipe class, for each
hub.
E. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket
joint, metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces, and female threaded ends with threads according to
ASME B1.20.1.
F. Cast-Iron, Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, galvanized, standard pattern.
G. Cast-Iron, Threaded Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.12, galvanized, recessed, drainage pattern.
I. Steel, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM A 47M (ASTM A 47) malleable-iron casting, ASTM A 106
steel pipe, or ASTM A 536 ductile-iron casting with dimensions matching steel pipe.
J. Ferrous Expansion Joints: Compound, galvanized steel fitting with telescoping body and slip-pipe
section. Include packing rings, packing, limit rods, chrome-plated finish on slip-pipe section, and
flanged ends.
K. Ferrous, Double Expansion Joints: Compound, galvanized steel fitting with telescoping body and
2 slip-pipe sections. Include packing rings, packing, limit rods, chrome-plated finish on slip-pipe
sections, and flanged ends.
N. Ductile-Iron, Flexible Expansion Joints: Compound fitting with combination of flanged and
mechanical-joint ends conforming to AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include 2 gasketed ball-
joint sections and 1 or more gasketed sleeve sections. Assemble components for offset and
expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111 ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
O. Ductile-Iron Deflection Fittings: Compound coupling fitting with sleeve and flexing sections for
up to 20-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends conforming to AWWA C110 or
AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111 ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
P. Ductile-Iron Expansion Joints: 3-piece assembly consisting of telescoping sleeve with gaskets and
restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections conforming to AWWA C110 or
AWWA C153. Select and assemble components for expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111
ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
A. General: Applications of the following piping joining materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping
Applications" Article.
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for commonly used
joining materials.
D. Hubless, Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal housing, corrosion-
resistant fasteners, and ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve or gasket with integral, center pipe stop.
Include the following:
a. Clamp Width: 75 mm (3 inches) wide with 4 clamps, for piping DN40 to DN100
(1-1/2- to 4-inch NPS).
b. Clamp Width: 100 mm (4 inches) wide with 6 clamps, for piping DN125 to DN250
(5- to 10-inch NPS).
E. Ductile-Iron, Keyed Couplings: AWWA C606 for ductile-iron-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous
housing sections, gasket suitable for water, and bolts and nuts.
F. Steel, Keyed Couplings: AWWA C606 for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing
sections, gasket suitable for water, and bolts and nuts.
G. Transition Couplings: Coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure rating at
least equal to, and with ends compatible with piping to be joined.
H. Flexible, Transition Couplings for Underground, Nonpressure Piping: ASTM C 1173 with
elastomeric sleeve. Include ends same sizes as piping to be joined and include corrosion-resistant
metal band on each end.
1. Sleeve Type for Plain-End Piping: Rubber or elastomeric sleeve and stainless-steel band
assembly, fabricated to match outside diameters of piping to be joined. Include the
following:
2. Gasket Type for Dissimilar-End Piping: Rubber or elastomeric compression gasket, made
to match inside diameter of pipe or hub, and outside diameter of adjoining pipe. Include
the following:
A. Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Piping: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105 polyethylene
film, 0.20-mm minimum thickness, tube or sheet.
2.5 VALVES
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves. Use valves specified for
"Domestic Water Systems" applications.
B. Backwater Valve: Flap type, hinged or pivoted, with revolving disc. Cast iron body with cleanout
of sufficient size to permit removal of interior parts. Hinge, pivot, disc and seat shall be nonferrous
metal. Normal position of disc shall be slightly open. Extend the cleanout to the finished floor and
fit with threaded countersunk plug. Provide clamping device wherever the cleanout extends
through the membrane waterproofing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be
used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
1. DN40 (1-1/2-Inch NPS): Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings;
and one of the following hubless, cast-iron, soil-piping couplings:
2. DN32 and DN40 (1-1/4- and 1-1/2-Inch NPS): Galvanized steel pipe and cast-iron,
threaded drainage fittings.
3. DN50 to DN100 (2- to 4-Inch NPS): Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron, soil-
pipe fittings; and one of the following hubless, cast-iron, soil-piping couplings:
4. DN50 to DN100 (2- to 4-Inch NPS): Galvanized steel pipe and cast-iron, threaded
drainage fittings.
5. DN125 and DN150 (5- and 6-Inch NPS): Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron,
soil-pipe fittings; and one of the following hubless, cast-iron, soil-piping couplings:
6. DN125 and DN150 (5- and 6-Inch NPS): Galvanized steel pipe and cast-iron, threaded
drainage fittings.
7. DN200 and DN250 (8-Inch and 10-Inch NPS): Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-
iron, soil-pipe fittings; and one of the following hubless, cast-iron, soil-piping couplings:
1. DN40 (1-1/2-Inch NPS): Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings;
and one of the following hubless, cast-iron, soil-piping couplings:
1. DN50 to DN150 (2- to 6-Inch NPS): Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron, soil-
pipe fittings; and one of the following hubless, cast-iron, soil-piping couplings:
2. DN50 to DN150 (2- to 6-Inch NPS): Galvanized steel pipe and cast-iron, threaded
drainage fittings.
3. DN200 and DN250 (8-Inch and 10-Inch NPS): Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-
iron, soil-pipe fittings; and one of the following hubless, cast-iron, soil-piping couplings:
1. DN80 to DN150 (3- to 6-Inch NPS): Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Extra Heavy
class; hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Extra Heavy class; and compression
joints.
2. DN200 and DN250 (8-Inch and 10-Inch NPS): Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Extra
Heavy class; hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Extra Heavy class; and
compression joints.
3. DN300 (12-Inch NPS): Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Extra Heavy class; hub-and-
spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Extra Heavy class; and compression joints.
4. DN375 (15-Inch NPS): Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Extra Heavy class; hub-and-
spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Extra Heavy class; and compression joints.
5. DN400 (16- Inch NPS): Ductile iron pipe with lock joint connection.
1. DN50 to DN100 (2- to 4-Inch NPS): Galvanized steel pipe; steel, grooved-end fittings;
and steel, keyed couplings.
2. DN125 and DN150 (5- and 6-Inch NPS): Ductile-iron, grooved-end pipe; ductile-iron,
grooved-end fittings; and ductile-iron, keyed couplings.
1. DN100 and DN150 (4- and 6-Inch NPS): Ductile-iron pipe; ductile-iron, mechanical- or
push-on-joint fittings; rubber gaskets; and mechanical or push-on joints.
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
C. Install backwater valve on all drainage line from electrical substation or as shown on plans.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
A. Refer to Division 2 Sections "Sanitary Sewerage" and "Storm Drainage" for sanitary and storm
sewer piping.
B. Extend building sanitary drain piping and connect to sanitary sewer piping in sizes and locations
indicated for service entrances into building. Install cleanout and extension to grade at
connections of building sanitary drains with building sanitary sewers.
C. Extend building storm drain piping and connect to storm sewer piping in sizes and locations
indicated for service entrances into building. Install cleanout and extension to grade at
connections of building storm drains and building storm sewers.
D. Extend building sanitary drain, force-main piping and connect to sanitary sewer piping in size and
location indicated for service entrance into building. Install cleanout, fitting with closure plug or
equivalent, inside building.
E. Extend building storm drain, force-main piping and connect to storm sewer piping in size and
location indicated for service entrance into building. Install cleanout, fitting with closure plug or
equivalent, inside building.
F. Ductile-Iron, Force-Main, Service Entrance Piping: Comply with AWWA C600. Install buried
piping inside building between wall and floor penetrations and connection to sewer piping outside
building with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to wall or floor. Install thrust-block supports at
vertical and horizontal offsets.
1. Encase piping with polyethylene film according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
G. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service entrance pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make
installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"
for sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.
A. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
B. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and
long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if
change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-
bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe.
Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not make change in direction of
flow greater than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if different sizes
of piping are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
C. Lay buried building drain piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and
alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream.
Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants,
cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as
completed.
D. Install drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Sanitary Building Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping DN80 (3-inch
NPS) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping DN100 (4-inch NPS)
and larger.
2. Horizontal, Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
3. Storm Building Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow.
4. Horizontal, Storm Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
5. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
F. Install engineered, sanitary drainage and vent systems in locations indicated and as follows:
1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
G. Install engineered, controlled-flow, storm drainage systems in locations indicated. Comply with
standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
H. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slab on grade if slab is
without membrane waterproofing.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
B. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1. Compression Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings.
2. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp.
C. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling
and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
A. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each pump discharge and where indicated. Use gate or
ball valves for piping DN50 (2-inch NPS) and smaller. Use gate or butterfly valves for piping
DN65 (2-1/2-inch NPS) and larger.
B. Check Valves: Install non-slam type, swing check valve on each pump discharge, downstream
from shutoff valve.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices. Install
the following:
D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 10-mm minimum rods.
E. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
diameters:
1. DN40 and DN50 (1-1/2- and 2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1500 mm with
10-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
2. DN80 (3-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1500 mm with 13-mm minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
3. DN100 and DN125 (4- and 5-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1500 mm with 16-
mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
4. DN150 (6-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1500 mm with 19-mm minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
5. DN200 through DN300 (8- through 12-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing,
1500 mm with 22-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
6. DN375 (15-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1500 mm with 25-mm minimum
rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
7. Spacing for horizontal pipe in 3-m lengths may be increased to 3 m. Spacing for fittings is
limited to 1500 mm.
F. Install hangers for steel and ductile-iron piping with the following maximum spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1. DN32 (1-1/4-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 2100 mm; 10-mm minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
2. DN40 (1-1/2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 2700 mm with 10-mm minimum
rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
3. DN50 (2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3 m with 10-mm minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
4. DN65 (2-1/2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3.4 m with 13-mm minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
5. DN80 (3-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3.7 m with 13-mm minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
6. DN100 and DN125 (4- and 5-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3.7 m with 16-mm
minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
7. DN150 (6-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3.7 m with 19-mm minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
8. DN200 through DN300 (8- through 12-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3.7 m
with 22-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
9. DN350 through DN450 (14- through 18-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3.7 m
with 25-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.10 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect service entrance piping to exterior sewerage and drainage piping. Use transition fitting to
join dissimilar piping materials.
B. Connect drainage piping to service entrance piping, and extend to and connect to the following:
C. Connect force-main piping to service entrance piping, and extend to and connect to the following:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
Engineer.
2. During installation, notify Engineer at least 24 hours before inspection must be made.
Perform tests specified below in presence of Engineer.
3. Reinspection: If Engineer finds that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required
corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by Engineer.
B. Test drainage and vent piping according to procedures of Engineer or, in absence of such
procedures, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each
test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or
concealed before it has been tested and approved.
3. Roughing-In Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside
leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water
to point of overflow, but not less than 3.m of head. Water level must not drop from 15
minutes before inspection starts through completion of inspection. Inspect joints for leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled
with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack
openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping
system equal to pressure of 250 Pa (1-inch wg). Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap
of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without
introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture
connections for gas and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
C. Test force-main piping according to procedures of Engineer or, in absence of such procedures, as
follows:
1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-main piping
until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed
before it has been tested and approved.
2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 345 kPa (50 psig) above operating
pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source
and allow to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must
be repaired.
3. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
4. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
A. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and
to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
D. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with 2 coats of water-based
latex paint.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining
materials, joint construction, basic installation requirements; escutcheons, dielectric
fittings, sleeves, and sleeve seals that are not in this Section.
2. Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty ball, butterfly, check, gate, and globe valves.
3. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, pressure gages, fittings, and
water meters.
4. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and identifying requirements.
5. Division 15 Section "Water Distribution Piping" for water-supply piping and connections.
6. Division 15 Section "Drainage and Vent Piping" for drainage and vent piping and
connections.
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following
minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each plumbing specialty indicated. Include rated capacities of selected
equipment and shipping, installed, and operating weights. Indicate materials, finishes,
dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components; and piping and wiring
connections for the following plumbing specialty products:
1. Backflow preventers.
2. Dishwasher air-gap fittings.
3. Water regulators.
4. Balancing valves.
5. Water filters.
C. Maintenance Data: For specialties to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, dimensional requirements, and characteristics
of plumbing specialties and are based on the specific types and models selected. Other
manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to
Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
B. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on plumbing specialties made to specified
standards.
C. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated plumbing specialties specified in this Section
that are listed and labeled.
D. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.
F. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic potable-
water piping components. Include marking "NSF-pw" on plastic potable-water piping and "NSF-
dwv" on plastic drain, waste, and vent piping.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. Deliver extra
materials to Employer.
1. Water Filter Cartridges: Furnish quantity not less than 200 percent of amount of each type
and size installed.
2. Operating Key Handles: Furnish one extra key for each key-operated hose bibb and
hydrant installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Backflow Preventers:
3. Water Regulators:
a. FLOMATIC Corp.
b. Honeywell Braukmann.
c. Spence Engineering Co., Inc.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
e. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
4. Calibrated Balancing Valves:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
c. ITT Fluid Technology Corp.; ITT Bell & Gossett Div.
d. Taco, Inc.
e. Tour & Andersson, Inc.; Valve Div.
f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
5. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves:
8. Outlet Boxes:
9. Washer-Supply Outlets:
11. Hydrants:
a. Josam Co.
b. Smith: Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.
c. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
e. Woodford Manufacturing Co.
f. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Josam Co.
c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Smith: Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.
e. Sparco, Inc.
f. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
b. MIFAB Manufacturing
a. Enpoco, Inc.
b. Josam Co.
c. Smith: Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Ancon Drain Div.
e. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.
b. BITUMAT Manufacturing
18. Cast Iron Floor And Roof Drains And Floor Cleanout
a. J.R.Smith
b. Josam
c. Zurn
a. Nicool
b. Dallmer
c. K.T.Terrain
A. General: ASSE standard, backflow preventers, of size indicated for maximum flow rate and
maximum pressure loss indicated.
1. DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
2. DN65 (2-1/2-Inch NPS) and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, steel, or stainless-steel body with
flanged ends.
1. Pressure Loss: 83 kPa (12 psig) maximum, through middle one-third of flow range.
1. Pressure Loss: 35 kPa (5 psig) maximum, through middle one-third of flow range.
1. Pressure Loss: 83 kPa (12 psig) maximum, through middle one-third of flow range.
G. Hose-Connection Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1052, suitable for at least 0.19-L/s (3-gpm) flow
and applications with up to 30-kPa (10-foot head) back pressure. Include 2 check valves;
intermediate atmospheric vent; and nonremovable, ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose thread on outlet.
H. Back-Siphonage Backflow Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1056, suitable for continuous pressure and
backflow applications. Include shutoff valves, check valve, test cocks, and vacuum vent.
A. General: ASSE 1003, water regulators, rated for initial working pressure of 1035 kPa (150 psig)
minimum, of size, flow rate, and inlet and outlet pressures indicated. Include integral factory-
installed or separate field-installed Y-pattern strainer.
1. DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
2. DN65 (2-1/2-Inch NPS) and Larger: Bronze or cast-iron body with flanged ends. Include
AWWA C550 or FDA-approved interior epoxy coating for regulators with cast-iron body.
3. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials.
4. Exterior Finish: Polished chrome-plate if used in chrome-plated piping system.
A. Calibrated Balancing Valves: Adjustable, with 2 readout ports and memory setting indicator.
Include manufacturer's standard hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying
case.
1. DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Bronze body with brass ball, adjustment knob, calibrated
nameplate, and threaded or solder-joint ends.
2. DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Bronze, Y-pattern body with adjustment knob and
threaded ends.
3. DN65 (2-1/2-Inch NPS) and Larger: Cast-iron, Y-pattern body with bronze disc and
flanged or grooved ends.
B. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves, DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: MSS SP-110, ball valve, rated
for 2760-kPa (400-psig) minimum CWP. Include 2-piece, ASTM B 62 bronze body with standard
port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, solder-joint ends,
and vinyl-covered steel handle with memory-stop device.
A. General: Combination water filter, stainless stell tank and ultraviolet sterilizer assemblies suitable
for potable water of size and at flow rate and pressure loss indicated. Package to Include pre-filter
to remove microscopic particles from the water, activated carbon filter to remove taste and odors
and chemicals, stainless steel tank to store water and ultra-violet sterilizer housing, fittings, filter
cartridges, and cartridge end caps. Unit to have flow regulator on discharge line to maintain flow.
1. Base Section: Floor-mounting section with inlet and outlet connections and removable top
section for one or more 10-micron-particulate removable-rating cartridges.
2. Connections, DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Threaded.
3. Connections, DN65 (2-1/2-Inch NPS) and Larger: Flanged.
C. Pre–Filter: Polished 304 stainless steel housing with no plastic parts, suitable for working
pressure indicated on the plans, remove water sediment down to 10 microns, includes drain cook
on bottom. Cover to be to be secured to housing with neoprene gasket.
D. Activated Carbon Filter: To remove chlorine, taste, odors and organic chemicals. Cell shall
contain at least 15 Kg of activated carbon for each 1 liter per second water flow.
E. Ultra-Violet Sterilizer: Stainless steel chambers with removable head, UV lamps, high powered
ballast, fuse, power safety switch all inside white enamel stainless steel cover.
F. Water Tank: as specified in division 15, section “POTABLE WATER STORAGE TANKS”.
A. General: ASSE 1017, manually adjustable, thermostatic water mixing valve with bronze body.
Include check stop and union on hot- and cold-water-supply inlets, adjustable temperature setting,
and capacity at pressure loss as indicated.
1. Bimetal Thermostat, Operation and Pressure Rating: 860 kPa (125 psig) minimum.
2. Liquid-Filled Motor, Operation and Pressure Rating: 690 kPa (100 psig) minimum.
1. Arrangement: One large-flow, thermostatic water mixing valve with flow-control valve,
pressure regulator, inlet and outlet pressure gages, and one small-flow, thermostatic water
mixing valve with flow-control valve. Include outlet thermometer, factory- or field-
installed inlet and outlet valves, and other indicated options.
2. Piping, of sizes and in arrangement indicated. Include valves and unions.
3. Piping Component Finish: Polished chrome-plate.
4. Piping Component Finish: Satin spray.
5. Piping Component Finish: Rough brass.
6. Cabinet: Stainless-steel box with stainless-steel hinged door.
7. Cabinet Mounting: Recessed.
2.7 STRAINERS
A. Provide on high pressure side of pressure reducing valves, on suction side of pumps, on inlet side
of indicating and control instruments and equipment subject to sediment damage and where shown
on drawings. Strainer element shall be removable without disconnection of piping.
B. Strainers: Y-pattern, unless otherwise indicated, and full size of connecting piping. Include
ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel screens with 1.2-mm round perforations, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Pressure Rating: 860-kPa (125-psig) minimum steam working pressure, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Bronze body, with female threaded ends.
3. DN65 (2-1/2-Inch NPS) and Larger: Cast-iron body, with interior AWWA C550 or FDA-
approved epoxy coating and flanged ends.
4. Y-Pattern Strainers: Screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown.
a. Drain: Factory- or field-installed, hose-end drain valve.
5. T-Pattern Strainers: Malleable-iron or ductile-iron body with grooved ends; access end cap
with drain plug and access coupling with rubber gasket.
6. Basket Strainers: Bolted flange or clamp cover, and basket with lift-out handle.
C. Drainage Basket Strainers: Non-pressure-rated, cast-iron or coated-steel body; with bolted flange
or clamp cover and drain with plug.
1. Basket: Bronze or stainless steel with 3.2- or 4.8-mm diameter holes and lift-out handle.
2. Female threaded ends for DN50 (2-inch NPS) and smaller, and flanged ends for DN65 (2-
1/2-inch NPS) and larger.
A. General: Assembly with fitting complying with ASME A112.18.1M and hose-connection outlet
with threads complying with ASME B1.20.7.
B. Mixing-Valve Hose Station: Hot- and cold-water mixing valve with shutoff and check valves on
inlets, hose with nozzle, and the following:
C. Mixing-Valve Hose Station: Steam and cold-water mixing valve with shutoff and check valves on
inlets, hose with nozzle, and the following:
1. Cabinet: Stainless-steel enclosure with exposed valve handles, hose connection, and hose
rack. Include manufacturer's standard thermometer in front.
2. Hose-Rack Material: Stainless steel.
3. Body Material: Bronze.
4. Body Material: Bronze with stainless-steel wetted parts.
5. Body Finish: Rough brass.
6. Body Finish: Rough brass or chrome plate.
7. Installation: Wall mounting. Include reinforcement.
8. Installation: Floor mounting on stainless-steel pedestal.
9. Supply Fittings: Two DN15 (1/2-inch NPS) gate, globe, or ball valves and check valves
and DN15 (1/2-inch NPS) copper, water tubing. Omit check valves if check stops are
included with fitting.
10. Supply Fittings: Two DN20 (3/4-inch NPS) gate, globe, or ball valves and check valves
and DN20 (3/4-inch NPS) copper, water tubing. Omit check valves if check stops are
included with fitting.
11. Hose: Manufacturer's standard for service fluid, temperature, and pressure; 15 m (50 feet)
long.
12. Hose: Manufacturer's standard for service fluid, temperature, and pressure; 7.5 m (25 feet)
long.
13. Nozzle: Manufacturer's standard.
D. Single-Valve Hose Station: Hot-water valve with shutoff valve on inlet, hose with nozzle, and the
following:
E. Single-Valve Hose Station: Cold-water valve with shutoff valve on inlet, hose with nozzle, and
the following:
1. Cabinet: Stainless-steel enclosure with exposed valve handles, hose connection, and hose
rack. Include manufacturer's standard thermometer in front.
2. Hose-Rack Material: Stainless steel.
3. Body Material: Bronze.
4. Body Material: Bronze with stainless-steel wetted parts.
5. Body Finish: Rough brass.
6. Body Finish: Rough brass or chrome plate.
7. Installation: Wall mounting. Include reinforcement.
8. Installation: Floor mounting on stainless-steel pedestal.
9. Supply Fitting: DN15 (1/2-inch NPS) gate, globe, or ball valve and check valve and DN15
(1/2-inch NPS) copper, water tubing. Omit check valve if check stop is included with
fitting.
10. Supply Fitting: DN20 (3/4-inch NPS) gate, globe, or ball valve and check valve and DN20
(3/4-inch NPS) copper, water tubing. Omit check valve if check stop is included with
fitting.
11. Hose: Manufacturer's standard for service fluid, temperature, and pressure; 15 m (50 feet)
long.
12. Hose: Manufacturer's standard for service fluid, temperature, and pressure; 7.5 m (25 feet)
long.
13. Nozzle: Manufacturer's standard.
2.9 HYDRANTS
A. Wall Hydrants: ASME A112.21.3M, nonfreeze, key operation. Provide one operating key.
B. Wall Hydrants: ASME A112.21.3M or ASSE 1019, nonfreeze, automatic draining, antibackflow
type, key operation, with DN20 or DN25 (3/4- or 1-inch NPS) threaded or solder-joint inlet, and
ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads on outlet. Include operating key for each hydrant.
1. Type: Projecting.
2. Type: Recessed.
3. Finish: Rough bronze.
4. Finish: Polished bronze.
5. Finish: Nickel bronze.
C. Wall Hydrants: ASME A112.21.3M, projecting, automatic draining, antibackflow type, key
operation. Include operating key for each hydrant.
D. Post Hydrants: ASME A112.21.3M, nonfreeze, bronze casing, cast-iron or cast-aluminum casing
guard, key operation. Include operating key for each hydrant.
A. Description: Nonfreeze, post hydrant with nondraining chamber for storing water trapped
downstream from inlet valve.
A. Hose-End Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, DN20 (3/4-inch NPS) ball valve, rated for 2760-kPa (400-
psig) minimum CWP. Include 2-piece, ASTM B 62 bronze body with standard port, chrome-
plated brass ball, replaceable seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle.
B. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, ball valve, rated for 1380-kPa (200-psig) minimum
CWP or MSS SP-80, Class 125, gate valve; ASTM B 62 bronze body, with DN6 (1/8-inch NPS)
side drain outlet and cap.
A. Horizontal Backwater Valves: ASME A112.14.1, cast-iron body, with removable bronze swing-
check valve and threaded or bolted cover.
1. Closed-Position Check Valve: Factory assembled or field modified to hang closed unless
subject to backflow condition.
2. Open-Position Check Valve: Factory assembled or field modified to hang open unless
subject to backflow condition.
3. Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class; full-size, cast-iron, soil-pipe extension to field-
installed cleanout at floor, instead of cover.
B. Drain Outlet Backwater Valves: Cast-iron or bronze body, with removable ball float, threaded
inlet, and threaded or spigot outlet.
A. Closed copper tube chamber with permanently sealed 410 kPa (60 psig) air charge above a triple
o-ring piston. Three high heat Buna-N 0-rings pressure packed and lubricated with FDA approved
Dow Corning No. 11 silicone compound. All units shall be designed in accordance with ASSE
1010 for sealed wall installations without an access panel. Size and install in accordance with
Plumbing and Drainage Institute requirements. Unit shall be as manufactured by Precision
Plumbing Products Inc., Watts or Sioux Chief. Provide water hammer arrestors at all solenoid
valves, at all groups of two or more flush valves, at all quick opening or closing valves, and at all
medical washing equipment.
A. CAPACITY: The fertilizer injector (ratio feeder) shall be 38mm self-contained, water operated single
head, positive displacement diaphragm proportioning pump capable of delivering additives at a constant
ratio to a variable water flow without regard to water pressure of 1-9kg/cm2 (15-125psi).
B. COMPONENTS: The ratio feeder shall consist of a positive displacement, rotating disc type water
motor, and a positive displacement diaphragm type pump. No additional valves or controls shall be
required to accomplish proportioning. Pump valves shall be ball type seating of "O"-ring type seat.
Output volume shall be adjustable while system is in operation from zero to maximum capacity. Pump
heads shall be designed to provide an air gap between the pumping diaphragm and the water supply.
C. CONSTRUCTION: The ratio feeder shall be of heavy brass wall construction with all parts in contact
with water of brass, stainless steel or plastic materials. Parts in contact with additives shall be of
chemical resistant plastic and elastomer construction. The diaphragm of the ratio feeder shall be of
vitron material. Each ratio feeder shall be equipped with totalizing register as supplied by the
Manufacturer.
D. INSTALLATION: The ratio feeder shall be installed as detailed on the Drawings, as recommended by
the Manufacturer and as herein specified. Ratio feeder by-pass piping shall be of line size unless
otherwise noted on the Drawings or specified herein.
E. CONTAINER: The fertilizer or solution container shall be constructed of virgin polyethylene plastic
material. The container shall have a capacity of 208 liters and shall be of open top design with
removable polyethylene cover.
F. SUPPORTS: The fertilizer injector assembly shall be installed with necessary supports as detailed on the
Drawings and as directed by the Engineer. The piping, as detailed, shall not be considered as adequate
support.
A. Water Hammer Arresters: ASME A112.26.1M, ASSE 1010, or PDI-WH 201, bellows or piston
type with pressurized cushioning chamber. Sizes are based on water-supply fixture units,
ASME A112.26.1M sizes A through F and PDI-WH 201 sizes A through F.
B. Hose Bibbs: Bronze body, with renewable composition disc, DN15 or DN20 (1/2- or 3/4-inch
NPS) threaded or solder-joint inlet. Provide ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads on outlet and
integral or field-installed, nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker.
1. Stack Vent Valve: ASSE 1050, designed for installation as terminal on soil, waste, and
vent stacks, instead of stack vent extending through roof, in DN50 to DN100 (2- to 4-inch
NPS).
2. Fixture Vent Valve: ASSE 1051, designed for installation on waste piping, instead of vent
connection, for single fixture, in DN32 to DN50 (1-1/4- to 2-inch NPS).
D. Roof Flashing Assemblies: Manufactured assembly made of 20-kg/sq. m, 1.6-mm thick, lead
flashing collar and skirt extending at least 200 mm from pipe with galvanized steel boot
reinforcement, and counterflashing fitting.
E. Open Drains: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron,
soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section of length to provide depth indicated;
and where indicated, increaser fitting of size indicated, joined with ASTM C 564 rubber gaskets.
Size P-trap as indicated.
F. Deep-Seal Traps: Cast iron or bronze, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping, cleanout
where indicated, and trap seal primer valve connection where indicated.
G. Floor-Drain Inlet Fittings: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap
seal primer valve connection.
H. Air-Gap Fittings: ASME A112.1.2, cast iron or cast bronze, with fixed air gap, inlet for drain pipe
or tube, and threaded or spigot outlet.
I. Stack Flashing Fittings: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating
roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.
J. Vent Caps: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include vented
hood and set-screws to secure to vent pipe.
L. Expansion Joints: ASME A112.21.2M, assembly with cast-iron body with bronze sleeve, packing
gland, and packing, of size and end types corresponding to connected piping.
M. Downspout Boots: ASTM A 48, gray-iron casting, with DN100 (4-inch NPS) outlet; shop-applied
bituminous coating; and inlet size indicated.
N. Downspout Boots: ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe.
O. Downspout Nozzles: Cast-bronze body with threaded inlet for pipe size indicated, and cast-bronze
wall flange with mounting holes.
A. Description: UL 1479, through-penetration firestop assembly for plastic soil, waste and vent
stacks, consisting of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug.
1. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing
flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
2. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48, cast-iron, hubless-pattern, wye-branch stack fitting with
neoprene O-ring at base and cast-iron plug in thermal-release harness in branch. Include
PVC protective cap for plug.
A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights
and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152M (ASTM B 152), of the following minimum weights and
thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
C. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653M (ASTM A 653), with 0.20 percent copper content and
1.016-mm minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include Z275 hot-dip galvanized, mill-
phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.
D. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 1-mm minimum
thickness.
F. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
2.18 CLEANOUTS
A. Same size as the pipe, up to 100 mm (4 inches); not less than 100 mm (4 inches) for larger pipe.
Cleanouts for chemical waste drain pipe shall be of same material as the pipe except where
cleanouts are exposed to outdoor. Cleanouts shall be easily accessible. Provide a minimum
clearance of 600 mm (24 inches) for the rodding.
B. Cleanout Access Covers: 178 x 178 square frame with anchor lugs and cover plate secured with
screws, as manufactured by Zurn No.Z-1460 or Josam No. 58642 or approved equal. Frame and
cover to be polished nickel bronze with smooth finish.
C. Cleanouts On Exposed uPvc Pipes to be polypropylene or uPVC access door for fixing from
outside of pipe similar to Key Terrain ref. 135 or approved equal.
D. Cleanout On Concealled uPvc to be uPVC access cap, solvent weld to any socketed fitting fitted
with screw cap and washer similar to Key Terrain ref. 136 or approved equal.
F. Provide cleanouts at or near the base of the vertical stacks with the cleanout plug located
approximately 600 mm (24 inches) above the floor. If there are no fixtures installed on the lowest
floor, the cleanout shall be installed at the base of the stack. Extend the cleanouts to the wall
access cover. Cleanout shall consist of sanitary tees. Furnish nickel-bronze square frame and
stainless steel cover with minimum opening of 150 by 150 mm (6 by 6 inches) at each wall
cleanout.
G. In horizontal runs above grade, cleanouts shall consist of cast brass tapered screw plug in fitting or
caulked/no hub cast iron ferrule. Plain end (no-hub) piping in interstitial space or above ceiling
may use plain end (no-hub) blind plug and clamp.
A. ANSI A112.21.1. Provide a no hub outlets for connection to cast iron pipe, screwed or no hub
outlets for connection to steel pipe, and side outlet when shown. Provide membrane clamp and
extensions if required, where installed in connection with waterproof membrane. Puncturing
membrane other than for drain opening will not be permitted. Double drainage pattern floor drains
shall have integral seepage pan for embedding into floor construction, and weep holes to provide
adequate drainage from pan to drain pipe. For drains not installed in connection with a waterproof
membrane, provide a 2.2 kg (16-ounce) soft copper membrane, 600 mm (24 inches) square.
B. Floor Drains Type FD-1: top plate 150 x 150 mm, bottom outlet similar to model no. SI as
manufactured by NICOOL (France) or approved equal.
C. Floor Drains Type FD-2: 150 mm round strainer with 178 mm round nickel bronze detachable
funnel, as manufactured by Zurn No. Z-415, Z-414 or Josam No. 30000-E2 or approved equal.
D. Floor Drains Type FD-3multiple side inlet and one side outlet, top plate 150 x 150 mm, similar to
model no. SEM as manufactured by NICOOL (France) or approved equal.
E. Floor Drains Type FD-8, Installed In Transformer Room And Loading Dock: Cast iron body, side
type drain set at wall and floor junction, vertical and horizontal nickel bronze grate, bottom outlet
with vandal proof screws. Approximately 150 mm depth, 150 mm length and 150 mm width.
F. Flower Bed Drains TYPE FBD-1: coated cast iron body, flashing flange and damp device, bottom
outlet suitable for connection to PVC pipes, fitted with copper mesh screen covered dome secured
in place by bolts, as manufactured by Josam No. 61080 or approved equal.
G. Floor Drains In Kitchen Area, Type FD-10: Sanitary Floor Sink: Type 304 stainless steel, 300
mm (12 inches) square, 200 mm (8 inches deep), polished interior, double drainage flange with
weep holes, internal dome strainer, heavy duty non-tilting loose set grate. Provide clamping
device.
A. Roof Drains: Cast iron with clamping device for making watertight connection. Free openings
through strainer shall be twice area of drain outlet. For roof drains not installed in connection with
a waterproof membrane, provide a soft copper membrane 300 mm (12 inches) in diameter greater
than outside diameter of drain collar. Provide an integral gravel stop for drains installed on roofs
having built-up roofing covered with gravel or slag. Provide integral no-hub, soil pipe gasket or
threaded outlet connection.
B. Roof Drains Type RD-1: Coated cast iron, large sump, elevated dome shaped strainer with
integral flange not less than 300 mm (12 inches) in diameter, bottom outlet suitable for uPVC
pipes and of same size as rainwater pipe. For insulated roofs, provide a roof drain with sump
receiver and deck clamp and an adjustable flashing clamping collar with integral gravel guard and
extension sleeve, which can be raised or lowered to meet required insulation heights. Bottom
section shall serve as roof drain during construction before insulation is installed, as manufactured
by J.R.SMITH Model 1015 or approved equal.
C. Roof Drain Type RD-2: Similar to RD-1 but side type for installation at junction of roof and
parapet, side or 45° outlet suitable for uPVC pipes and of same size as rainwater pipe, as
manufactured by J.R.SMITH Model 1520 or approved equal.
D. Gutters Drain Type GD-1: Coated cast iron, Horizontal angle type drain with flat bottom, 50 mm
(2 inches) high dome strainer with bottom outlet suitable for uPVC pipes and of same size as
rainwater pipe.
E. Protective Roof Membrane Insulation Assembly: Perforated stainless steel extension filter,
non-puncturing clamp ring, large sump with extra wide roof flange and deck clamp.
F. Expansion Joints: Heavy cast iron with cast brass or copper expansion sleeve having smooth
bearing surface working freely against a packing ring held in place and under pressure of a bolted
gland ring, forming a water and air tight flexible joint. Asbestos packing is prohibited.
G. Interior Downspouts: Provide an expansion joint, specified above, at top of run on straight,
vertical runs of downspout piping 12 m (40 feet) long or more.
H. Downspout Nozzle: The nozzle fitting shall be of brass, unfinished, with internal pipe thread for
connection to downspout.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
B. Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated at any point in the plumbing
system where the potable water supply comes in contact with a potential source of contamination,
at each water-supply connection to mechanical equipment and systems, and to other equipment
and water systems as indicated. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Locate backflow
preventers in same room as connected equipment. Install air-gap fitting on units with
atmospheric-vent connection and pipe relief outlet drain to nearest floor drain. Do not install
bypass around backflow preventer. Device shall be certified by the American Society of Sanitary
Engineers. Listed below is a partial list of connection to the potable water system which shall be
protected against backflow or back siphonage.
C. Install pressure regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and balance valve bypass. Install
pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
D. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure regulator, and solenoid valve, and
where indicated.
G. Install trap seal primer valves with valve outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum
of one percent and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.
H. Install backwater valves in building drain piping as indicated. For interior installation, provide
cleanout deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size
to remove valve cover for servicing.
J. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping as indicated, and where not
indicated, according to the following:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to DN100 (4-inch NPS). Use DN100 (4-inch NPS) for
larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 15 m for piping DN100 (4-inch NPS) and smaller and 30 m
for larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
K. Install cleanout deck plates, of types indicated, with top flush with finished floor, for floor
cleanouts for piping below floors.
L. Install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished
wall, for cleanouts located in concealed piping.
M. Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through floors
with waterproof membrane.
N. Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
O. Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 25-mm clearance
between vent pipe and roof substrate.
P. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished floor or as indicated. Size outlets as indicated.
Q. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set with
grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
1. Radius, 750 mm or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 6-mm total
depression.
2. Radius, 750 to 1500 mm: Equivalent to one percent slope.
3. Radius, 1500 mm or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 25-mm
total depression.
R. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise
indicated.
S. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining
flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
U. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's written
installation instructions. Size outlets as indicated.
V. Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining
roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
X. Install interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting, according to Engineer's
requirements, and with clear space for servicing.
1. Above-Floor Installation: Set unit with bottom resting on floor, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Flush with Floor Installation: Set unit and extension if required, with cover flush with
finished floor.
3. Recessed Floor Installation: Set unit in receiver housing having bottom or cradle supports,
with receiver housing cover flush with finished floor.
4. Pit Installation: Set unit in pit as indicated.
5. Install cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors not having integral cleanout on
outlet.
6. Coordinate oil-interceptor storage tank and gravity drain with Division 2 Section
"Interceptors."
Y. Install grease recovery units on floor. Include trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting according
to Engineer's requirements, and with clear space for servicing.
AA. Fasten recessed, wall-mounting plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into walls.
CC. Install individual stop valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball, gate, or globe
valve if specific valve is not indicated.
EE. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is
indicated.
FF. Locate drainage piping as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures and drains.
GG. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within
cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe
fittings.
HH. Include wood-blocking reinforcement for recessed and wall-mounting plumbing specialties.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection
requirements:
1. Install piping connections between plumbing specialties and piping specified in other
Division 15 Sections.
2. Install piping connections indicated between appliances and equipment specified in other
Sections; connect directly to plumbing piping systems.
3. Install piping connections indicated as indirect wastes from appliances and equipment
specified in other Sections, to spill over receptors connected to plumbing piping systems.
B. Install hoses between plumbing specialties and appliances as required for connections.
C. Arrange for electric-power connections to plumbing specialties and devices that require power.
Electric power is specified in Division 16 Sections.
D. Supply Runouts to Plumbing Specialties: Install hot- and cold-water-supply piping of sizes
indicated.
E. Drainage Runouts to Plumbing Specialties: Install drainage and vent piping, with approved trap,
of sizes indicated.
1. Grease Interceptors: Connect inlet and outlet to unit, and flow-control fitting and vent to
unit inlet piping. Install valve on outlet of automatic drawoff-type unit.
2. Grease Recovery Units: Connect inlet, outlet, and vent piping; controls; electric power;
and factory-furnished accessories.
3. Oil Interceptors: Connect inlet, outlet, vent, and gravity drawoff piping to unit; flow-
control fitting and vent to unit inlet piping; and gravity drawoff and suction piping to oil
storage tank.
4. Solids Interceptors: Connect inlet and outlet.
H. Arrange for electric-power connections to plumbing specialties and devices that require power.
Electric power, wiring, and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16 Sections.
A. Fabricate flashing manufactured from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage
shapes are required.
D. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and
roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 2500 mm, and
skirt or flange extending at least 200 mm around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 200 mm around sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 200 mm
around specialty.
G. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made
flashing fittings, according to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
H. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing
into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.
I. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes as indicated. Install
drain connection if indicated.
1. Test and adjust plumbing specialty controls and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and components.
3.5 COMMISSIONING
1. Energize circuits for electrically operated units. Start and run units through complete
sequence of operations.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and
to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and trim, faucets, other fittings, and related
components.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Accessible: Plumbing fixture, building, facility, or portion thereof that can be approached,
entered, and used by physically handicapped, disabled, and elderly people.
B. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of plumbing fixture. Fittings
specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and
tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, traps and waste pipes. Pipe fittings, tube fittings, and
general-duty valves are included where indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each plumbing fixture category and type specified. Include selected
fixture, trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports.
Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.
C. Maintenance data for plumbing fixtures and components to include in the operation and
maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each
category from one source and by a single manufacturer.
1. Exception: Where fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a
single manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for
this category.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures and components specified in
this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
C. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are
compatible.
A. Field Measurements: Coordinate roughing-in and final fixture locations and verify that
plumbing fixtures can be installed to comply with original design and referenced standards.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. Deliver
extra materials to Employer.
1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 10
percent of each type and size installed.
2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5
percent of each type and size installed.
3. Faucet, Laminar-Flow Fittings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 10
percent of each type and size installed.
4. Faucet, Flow-Control Fittings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 10
percent of each type and size installed.
5. Supply, Flow-Control Fittings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5
percent of each type and size installed.
6. Shower, Flow-Control Fittings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5
percent of each type and size installed.
7. Flushometer Valve, Repair Kits: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 10
percent of each type installed.
8. Provide hinged-top, wood or metal box, or individual metal boxes, having separate
compartments for each type and size of extra materials listed above.
9. Flushometer Tank, Repair Kits: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5
percent of each type installed.
10. Water-Closet Tank, Repair Kits: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5
percent of each type installed.
11. Toilet Seats: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5 percent of each type
installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Comply with ASME A112.18.1M and other requirements specified for lavatory, sink, and
similar-type-fixture faucet fittings. Include hot- and cold-water indicators; 0.16-L/s- (2.5-
gpm-) maximum flow rate; and polished, chrome-plated finish; except where otherwise
indicated. Coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes and outlet with spout and
fixture receptor.
A. Comply with ASME A112.18.1M and other requirements specified for bathtub and shower
faucet fittings. Include hot- and cold-water indicators; 0.16-L/s- (2.5-gpm-) maximum flow
rate; and polished, chrome-plated finish; except where otherwise indicated. Coordinate
faucet inlets with supplies and outlet with diverter valve; tub spout; and shower head, arm,
and flange.
A. Comply with ASME A112.18.1M and other requirements specified for fittings, other than
faucets. Include polished, chrome-plated finish, except where otherwise indicated.
Coordinate fittings with other components and connectors.
A. Comply with applicable standards below and other requirements specified for components
for plumbing fixtures, equipment, and appliances.
2.6 FITTINGS
A. Fittings for Plumbing Fixtures: Refer to plumbing fixture schedules at the end of this
Section for materials for supplies, supply stops, supply risers, traps, and other fittings.
B. Fittings for Equipment Specified in Other Sections: Fittings include the following:
1. Supply Inlets: Brass pipe or copper tube, size required for final connection.
2. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, angle or straight; compression, wheel-handle
type; same size as supply inlet and with outlet matching supply riser.
3. Supply Risers: DN10 (3/8-inch NPS) flexible copper tube with knob end. Use
chrome-plated tube for exposed applications.
4. Traps: Tubular brass with 1.1 mm (0.045-inch) wall thickness, with no-leak slip-joint
inlet, cleanout, wall flange, escutcheons, and size to match equipment. Use chrome-
plated tube for exposed applications.
5. Continuous Waste: Tubular plastic with no-leak slip-joint inlet and size to match
equipment.
6. Indirect Waste: Tubular plastic and size to match equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for potable, hot- and cold-water supply piping systems; soil, waste,
and vent piping systems; and supports. Verify that locations and sizes of piping and
locations and types of supports match those indicated, before installing and connecting
fixtures. Use manufacturer's roughing-in data when roughing-in data are not indicated.
B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Include supports for plumbing fixtures specified in this Section or other Sections, according
to the following:
1. Carriers: For wall-hanging water closets and fixtures supported from wall
construction.
2. Chair Carriers: For wall-hanging urinals, lavatories, sinks, drinking fountains, and
electric water coolers.
3. Heavy-Duty Chair Carriers: For accessible urinals, lavatories, and other fixtures
where indicated.
4. Reinforcement: For floor-mounted lavatories and sinks that require securing to wall
and recessed, box-mounted, electric water coolers.
5. Fabricate reinforcement from 50-by-100-mm or 50-by-150-mm fire-retardant-treated-
wood blocking between studs or 6-by-150-mm steel plates attached to studs, in wall
construction, to secure fixtures to wall. Include length that will extend beyond ends
of fixture mounting bracket and attach to at least 2 studs.
B. Include fitting insulation kits for accessible fixtures according to the following:
1. Lavatories: Cover hot- and cold-water supplies, stops and handles, drain, trap, and
waste to wall.
2. Sinks: Cover hot- and cold-water supplies, stops and handles, drain, trap, and waste
to wall.
3. Fixtures with Offset Drain: Cover hot- and cold-water supplies, offset drain, trap,
and waste to wall.
4. Other Fixtures: Cover exposed fittings below fixture.
A. Assemble plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, faucets, and other components according to
manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturers' written instructions, roughing-in
drawings, and referenced standards.
C. Install floor-mounted, floor-outlet water closets with closet flanges and gasket seals.
D. Install floor-mounted, back-outlet water closets with fittings and gasket seals.
E. Install wall-hanging, back-outlet water closets with support manufacturer's tiling frame or
setting gage.
H. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on
wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for handicapped
people to reach.
I. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side
of compartment.
K. Fasten floor-mounted fixtures to substrate. Fasten fixtures having holes for securing fixture
to wall construction, to reinforcement built into walls.
P. Set shower receptors and mop basins in leveling bed of cement grout.
Q. Install individual stop valve in each water supply to fixture. Use gate or globe valve where
specific stop valve is not specified.
S. Install faucet, laminar-flow fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts
when faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters when
required.
T. Install supply, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop
valves.
U. Install faucet, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts
when faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters when
required.
V. Install shower, flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.
W. Install traps on fixture outlets. Omit traps on fixtures having integral traps. Omit traps on
indirect wastes, except where otherwise indicated.
X. Install disposers in sink outlets. Install switch where indicated, or in wall adjacent to sink if
location is not indicated.
Y. Install hot-water dispensers in back top surface of sink or in counter with spout over sink.
Z. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal
protruding pipe fittings.
AA. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, 1-part,
mildew-resistant, silicone sealant according to sealing requirements specified in Division 7
Section "Joint Sealants." Match sealant color to fixture color.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
1. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and
plumbing equipment specified in other Division 15 Sections.
B. Supply and Waste Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Refer to plumbing fixture schedules
at the end of this Section for fitting sizes and connection requirements for each plumbing
fixture.
D. Ground equipment.
E. Arrange for electric-power connections to fixtures and devices that require power. Electric
power is specified in Division 16 Sections.
A. Verify that installed fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.
B. Check that fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.
C. Inspect installed fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized and demonstrate proper operation.
Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units
operate properly.
A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures,
fittings, and controls.
B. Operate and adjust disposers, hot-water dispensers, and controls. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning units and controls.
C. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, electric water coolers, faucets, shower valves,
and flushometer valves having controls, to produce proper flow and stream.
D. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
E. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings, including flush tanks, with manufacturers'
recommended cleaning methods and materials. Include the following:
1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall
strainers and spouts.
2. Remove sediment and debris from flush tanks and drains.
3.7 PROTECTION
B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities, except when approved in writing by
Engineer.
A. Water Closet EWC-1: Where plumbing fixtures of this designation are indicated, provide
products complying with the following:
a. Color: White.
b. Class: Commercial, Heavy Duty.
c. Size: Elongated.
d. Pattern: Open front without cover.
e. Hinge Type: Check (CK).
B. Water Closet AWC-1: Where plumbing fixtures of this designation are indicated, provide
products complying with the following:
A. Urinal UR-1: Where plumbing fixtures of this designation are indicated on the final Design
Drawings, drawing plumbing schedule, and in the specification Section and subject to
compliance with requirements, the following products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to the following:
12. Fixture Support: Type I, vertically adjustable, urinal, chair carrier with coupling;
heavy-duty, rectangular-steel, upright members; bearing plate; and feet.
13. Dimensions: 345 mm Length, 310 mm, 500 mm height.
A. Lavatory LAV-1: Where plumbing fixtures of this designation are indicated, provide
products complying with the following:
1. Vitreous-China Lavatory.
2. Fixture Color: White.
3. Fixture Dimensions: as shown on drawings.
4. Fixture Faucet-Hole Spacing: One hole, centered.
5. Mounting: Wall hanging.
6. Faucet Mounting Position: Centered on fixture deck.
7. Faucet Components: Include the following:
A. Shower SH-1: Where plumbing fixtures of this designation are indicated, provide products
complying with the following:
2. Fixture Enclosure: Built in-place, Enameled steel, with slip-resistant bathing surface.
3. Fixture Enclosure Dimensions: 900mm x 750mm.
4. Fixture Enclosure Drain: Integral corrosion-resistant metal with removable strainer
and DN50 (2-inch NPS) bottom outlet.
5. Fixture Enclosure Grab Bar: Field installed.
6. Faucet Construction: Cast-brass, dual, manual-control, pressure-equalizing-control
with high-temperature-limit control, single-handle mixing valve with check stops, and
escutcheon.
7. Faucet Components: Include the following:
a. Handle(s): Dual.
b. Shower Head, Arm, and Flange: with manual flow control in head.
c. Shower Arm, Flow-Control Fitting: 0.13 L/s (2 gpm).
8. Supplies: Copper tubing with ball, gate, or globe valve if check stops not included
with faucet.
9. Trap: DN50 (2-inch NPS) drainage piping.
A. Sink S-1: Where plumbing fixtures of this designation are indicated, provide products
complying with the following:
1. Stainless-Steel Sink.
2. Fixture Dimensions: as shown on the drawings.
3. Fixture Stainless-Steel Thickness: (0.078 inch) 1.6 mm (0.063 inch).
4. Fixture Faucet-Hole Spacing: One hole, centered.
5. Fixture Mounting: Counter.
6. Faucet Mounting: Centered on fixture deck.
7. Faucet Components: Include the following:
16. Supply Insulation Kit: Molded, soft-plastic covering for supplies from wall to fixture
with removable covering for stops and handles.
17. Drain Insulation Kit: Molded, soft-plastic covering for drain piping from fixture to
wall. Include manufacturer's standard fasteners, straps, and adhesives.
B. Sink KS-1: Where plumbing fixtures of this designation are indicated, provide products
complying with the following:
C. Sink KS-2: Where plumbing fixtures of this designation are indicated, provide products
complying with the following:
A. Utility Sink US-1: Where plumbing fixtures of this designation are indicated, provide
products complying with the following:
8. Trap Standard: DN50 (2-inch NPS) with grid strainer, enameled interior, cleanout,
floor support, and pipe waste to wall.
9. Drain: DN50 (2-inch NPS) with grid strainer.
10. P-Trap: DN50 (2-inch NPS) drainage piping.
11. Supplies: DN15 (1/2-inch NPS) copper tubing with ball, gate, or globe valve.
A. Water Tap WT: 15mm, chrome plated brass, back inlet connection.
A. Mop-Service Basin MS-1: Where plumbing fixtures of this designation are indicated,
provide products complying with the following:
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes pumps for the Hot water circulating systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities of selected models;
shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories for each
type and size of pump specified. Indicate pumps' operating point on curves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and connections for pumps. Include setting drawings with
templates, directions for installation of foundation and anchor bolts, and other anchorages.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and
differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Maintenance Data: For each pump specified to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of pumps through one source from a single
manufacturer.
A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
c. Crane Pumps & Systems, Inc.; Weinman Div.
d. Grundfos Pumps Corp.
e. ITT Fluid Technology Corp.; ITT Bell & Gossett Div.
f. Marshall Engineered Products Co.
g. Taco, Inc.
B. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors" with built-in thermal-
overload protection appropriate for motor size and duty.
C. End Connections for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded. Pumps available only with
flanged ends may be furnished with threaded companion flanges.
E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested units before
shipping.
F. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal
surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges,
pipe openings, and nozzles.
A. Description: Use for hot water and therapeutic pool systems, horizontal in-line circulator,
pump for hot water system shall be designed for 65 degrees C (150 degrees F) or 85 degrees
C (180 degrees F) water service as shown on plans, rated for 860-kPa (125-psig) minimum
working pressure. Pumps shall be centrifugal, single stage, constructed to prevent contact
of water with metal other than nonferrous, except casing. Driver shall be electric motor,
close coupled or connected by flexible coupling
1. In-line mounted.
2. Floor mounted set on common bed plate with drip lip.
D. Impeller: ASTM B 36/B 36M, rolled brass; or ASTM B 584, cast bronze; overhung, single
suction, and keyed to shaft.
E. Motors: Maximum 40 degrees C ambient temperature rise, dripproof, for operation with
current of voltage, phase and cycle shown in schedule on Electrical drawings, conforming to
NEMA 250-Type 4. Capacity to be such to operate pump without overloading. In-line
pump motors shall not exceed 1450 rpm and be provided with spring mountings to assure
quiet operation. Pump shall operate continuously with "on-off" switch for shut down.
F. Seal: Mechanical.
I. Shaft Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions and with access for periodic
maintenance, including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C. Suspend in-line pumps independent of piping. Use continuous-thread hanger rods and
vibration isolation hangers of sufficient size to support pump weight. Fabricate brackets or
supports as required. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for materials.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
1. Connect water distribution piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge pipe equal
to or greater than size of pump nozzles. Refer to Division 15 Section "Water
Distribution Piping."
2. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of pumps, and non-slam, silent type
check valve and throttling valve on discharge side of pumps. Install valves same size
as connected piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves
and Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for strainers.
3. Install pressure gages at suction and discharge of pumps. Install at integral pressure-
gage tappings where provided or install pressure-gage connectors in suction and
discharge piping around pumps. Refer to Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for
pressure gages and gage connectors.
C. Ground equipment.
3.4 COMMISSIONING
D. Final Checks before Starting: Perform the following preventive maintenance operations:
1. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for
operation.
2. Open circulating line valve if pump should not be operated against dead shutoff.
3. Start motor.
4. Open discharge valve slowly.
5. Check general mechanical operation of pump and motor.
6. Close circulating line valve once there is sufficient flow through pump to prevent
overheating.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged booster pumps to maintain pressure in the building potable-
water distribution systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities of selected models,
furnished specialties, and accessories for each type and size of packaged booster pump
indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and connections for packaged booster pumps. Include setting
drawings with templates, directions for installation of foundation and anchor bolts, and
other anchorages.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and
differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Operating And Maintenance Data: For each packaged booster pump to include in
maintenance manuals specified in Division 1 including wiring diagrams, technical data
sheets and information for ordering replaceable parts.
D. Certificate of shop test for domestic water booster system. Provide certified performance
curves.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of packaged booster pumps through one source from
a single manufacturer.
A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Aurora Pump.
c. ITT Fluid Technology Corp.; ITT Bell & Gossett Div.
d. PACO Pumps, Inc.
e. Peerless Pump Co.
f. SynchroFlo, Inc.
1. DN200 (NPS 8) and Smaller: ASTM B 88M, Type B (ASTM B 88, Type L), drawn,
copper, ASTM A 53, ductile iron pipe with threaded, cast-iron fittings and threaded
joints.
2. DN250 (NPS 10) and Larger: ASTM A 53, ductile iron pipe with threaded, cast-iron
fittings and threaded joints.
3. Header End Connections DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded.
4. Header End Connections DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
C. Piping Option: Piping, including valves and other components, may have grooved ends for
grooved joints.
D. Shutoff Valves, DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Class 125, or higher if required to
suit system pressure; bronze, rising-stem gate valve or MSS SP-110, 4135-kPa (600-psig)
minimum CWP, bronze ball valve with ends matching piping.
E. Shutoff Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, or higher if
required to suit system pressure; bronze-trim, OS&Y, cast-iron gate valve with flanged ends
or MSS SP-67, Type I for tight shutoff, 1206-kPa (175-psig) CWP, single-flanged, cast-iron
butterfly valve.
F. Check Valves, DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Class 125, or higher if required to
suit system pressure; bronze, non-slam, swing check valve.
G. Check Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: MSS SP-71, Class 125, or higher if required
to suit system pressure; bronze-trim, cast-iron, non-slam, swing check valve.
I. Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar
metals, to prevent galvanic action and to stop corrosion.
1. DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Factory-fabricated union assembly, for 1725-kPa (250-
psig) minimum working pressure at 82 deg C (180 deg F).
2. DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly; for
1035- or 2070-kPa (150- or 300-psig) minimum working pressure as required to suit
system pressures.
K. Control Panel: Automatic, with load control and protection functions. Comply with
NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.
1. Mounting and Wiring: Factory installed and connected as an integral part of unit.
2. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 12.
3. Motor Controller: Full-voltage, combination-magnetic type with undervoltage
release feature, motor-circuit-protector-type disconnect, and short-circuit protective
device.
L. Instrumentation: All instrumentation shall be factory installed and shall include the
following 115 mm (4-1/2 inch) dial gages with shut-off cock.
N. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested units before
shipping.
O. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal
surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembling and testing. Protect
flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles.
A. Description: Multiplex packaged unit, with pumps, piping, valves, sensors, controls, and
adjustable-speed-drive units for variable-speed operation.
1. Pressure Rating: Minimum 1200 kPa (175 psig), and as required to suit system
pressure.
2. Pump Arrangement: Triplex, with three equal-size pumps.
B. Pumps: Pumps shall be vertical turbine multistage short-coupled industrial turbine pumps.
8. Seal: Mechanical general purpose type, with sleeve mounting. Seal shall be rated at
1200 kPa (175 psi) maximum.
9. Adjustable Spacer Coupling: Removable type required so that pump seal can be
replaced without disturbing motor.
10. Motor: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors. Solid shaft
motors balanced to .22 mm (0.0085-inch) vibration amplitude shall be operated at any
point on the pump head curve without overloading the motor. Conform to NEMA
250-Type 2.
11. Pump Barrel: Schedule 40 steel pipe with two-coat "baked" internal lining to meet
the potable water requirements of U.S. Food and Drug Administration. Unlined
pump barrels are not acceptable. Provide drain tapping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 CONCRETE
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise required, for packaged booster
pumps. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Division 15 Section
"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install packaged booster pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions and with
access for periodic maintenance, including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and
accessories.
B. Support packaged booster pumps using the following vibration-control devices, unless
otherwise indicated. Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and
Seismic Restraints."
1. Install units with total of 7.5 hp or less, with rubber-isolator mount or spring-isolator
vibration isolators.
2. Install units with total of more than 7.5 hp, with concrete-filled, inertia-base vibration
isolation bases and spring-isolator vibration isolators.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
1. Connect water distribution piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge pipe equal
to or greater than size of unit suction and discharge headers.
2. Install flexible pipe connectors on piping connections to unit suction and discharge
headers. Install flexible pipe connectors same size as piping. Refer to Division 15
Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for flexible pipe connectors.
3. Install shutoff valves on piping connections to unit suction and discharge headers.
Install valves same size as unit suction and discharge headers. Refer to Division 15
Section "Valves" for general-duty valves.
D. Ground equipment.
3.5 COMMISSIONING
B. Controls: Set for automatic starting, stopping, sequential, and alarm operations.
C. Final Checks before Starting: Perform the following preventive maintenance operations:
1. Lubricate bearings.
2. Verify that each pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquids
is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. Do not operate pump if it is bound or drags,
until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
3. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.
1. Prime pumps by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pumps for
operation.
2. Open valves if pumps should not be operated against dead shutoff.
3. Start motors.
4. Open discharge valves slowly.
5. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.
6. Close valves once there is sufficient flow through pumps to prevent overheating.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sewage pumps for the building sanitary drainage systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include performance curves, furnished specialties, and accessories for each
type and size of pump indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and connections for pumps. Include setting drawings with
templates, directions for installing foundation and anchor bolts, and other anchorages.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and
differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Maintenance Data: For each type and size of pump specified to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Sewage Pumps:
B. Discharge Pipe End Connections DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded. Pumps available
only with flanged-end discharge pipe may be furnished with threaded companion flanges.
C. Discharge Pipe End Connections DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
D. Motors: Single speed, with grease-lubricated ball bearings, and non-overloading through
full range of pump performance curves.
E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested units before
shipping.
F. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal
surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembling and testing. Protect
flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.
3. Impeller: ASTM A 48, Class No. 25 A or higher cast iron; statically and dynamically
balanced, open or semiopen nonclog design, overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft,
and secured by locking cap screw.
4. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, open or
semiopen nonclog design, overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by
locking cap screw.
5. Impeller: ASTM A 532/A 532M, abrasion-resistant cast iron; statically and
dynamically balanced, open or semiopen nonclog design, overhung, single suction,
keyed to shaft, and secured by locking cap screw.
6. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel, with factory-sealed, grease-lubricated ball
bearings.
7. Seals: Double mechanical seals.
8. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type; with built-in overload protection;
lifting eye or lug; and three-conductor waterproof power cable of length required,
with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump.
9. Moisture-Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor, moisture alarm, and waterproof
cable of length required, with cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump.
10. Pump Discharge Piping: Factory or field fabricated, ASTM A 53, Schedule 40,
galvanized-steel pipe, bronze pipe, or copper tube.
11. Basin Cover: Multiple sections, steel, and suitable for supporting controls. Refer to
"Sewage Pump Basins" Article for other requirements.
12. Quick-Disconnect System: Include the following:
13. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure, pedestal mounted, unless wall mounting is
indicated; with three micropressure switches in NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosures;
mounting rod; and electric cables. Include automatic alternator to alternate operation
of pump units on successive cycles and to operate both units if one pump cannot
handle load.
14. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure, pedestal mounted, unless wall mounting is
indicated; with three mercury-float switches in NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosures;
mounting rod; and electric cables. Include automatic alternator to alternate operation
of pump units on successive cycles and to operate both units if one pump cannot
handle load.
15. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure, pedestal-mounted float switch; with floats,
float rods, and rod buttons. Include automatic alternator to alternate operation of
pump units on successive cycles and to operate both units if one pump cannot handle
load.
16. Float-Guide Pipe: Guide pipe or other restraint for floats and rods in basins of depth
greater than 1500 mm.
17. High-Water Alarm: Cover-mounted, compression-probe alarm, with electric bell;
220-V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell, unless battery
operation is indicated.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and
check valves. Use valves specified for domestic water, unless otherwise indicated. Include
features and devices indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 EARTHWORK
3.3 CONCRETE
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise required, for sewage pumps.
Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Division 15 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods."
3.4 INSTALLATION
B. Install pumps and arrange to provide access for maintenance, including removal of motors,
impellers, couplings, and accessories.
D. Wet-Pit-Mounted, Vertical Sewage Pumps: Suspend pumps from basin covers. Make
direct connections to sanitary drainage piping.
E. Submersible Sewage Pumps: Set pumps on basin floor. Make direct connections to
sanitary drainage piping.
F. Sewage Pump Basins: Install basins and connect to drainage and vent piping. Brace
interior of basins according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent distortion or
collapse during concrete placement. Set basin cover and fasten to basin top flange. Install
cover so top surface is flush with finished floor.
G. Packaged Pump Units: Install and make direct connections to drainage and vent piping.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Sanitary drainage and vent piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15
Section "Drainage and Vent Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and
specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:
1. Install discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles, and
connect to sanitary drainage piping.
2. Install non-slam, swing check valve and gate or ball valve on each sewage pump
discharge. Include spring-loaded or weighted-lever check valves for piping DN65
(NPS 2-1/2) and larger.
C. Electrical power and control components, wiring, and connections are specified in
Division 16 Sections.
D. Ground equipment.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Pump Controls: Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, and alarm operation as required
for system application.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks before Starting: Perform the following preventive maintenance operations:
1. Lubricate bearings.
2. Disconnect couplings and check motors for proper direction of rotation.
3. Verify that each pump is free to rotate by hand. Do not operate pump if it is bound or
drags, until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
4. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.
B. Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding safe motor power is as
follows:
1. Start motors.
2. Open discharge valves slowly.
3. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sump pumps for the building waste drainage systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include performance curves, furnished specialties, and accessories for each
type and size of pump indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and connections for pumps. Include setting drawings with
templates, directions for installing foundation and anchor bolts, and other anchorages.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and
differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Maintenance Data: For each type and size of pump specified to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Sump Pumps:
B. Discharge Pipe End Connections DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded. Pumps available
only with flanged-end discharge pipe may be furnished with threaded companion flanges.
C. Discharge Pipe End Connections DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
D. Motors: Single speed, with grease-lubricated ball bearings, and non-overloading through
full range of pump performance curves.
E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested units before
shipping.
F. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal
surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembling and testing. Protect
flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.
11. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure, pedestal mounted, unless wall mounting is
indicated; with three micropressure switches in NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosures;
mounting rod; and electric cables. Include automatic alternator to alternate operation
of pump units on successive cycles and to operate both units if one pump cannot
handle load.
12. Float-Guide Pipe: Guide pipe or other restraint for floats and rods in basins of depth
greater than 1500 mm.
13. High-Water Alarm: Cover-mounted, compression-probe alarm, with electric bell;
120-V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell, unless battery
operation is indicated.
A. Description: Cast-in-place concrete with steel curb frames and covers. Refer to Division 3
Section "Cast-in Place Concrete."
B. Curb Frames: Galvanized steel or steel with bitumastic coating of dimension to fit cover.
C. Pit Cover: Fabricate with openings with gaskets, seals, and bushings, for access, pumps,
pump shafts, control rods, discharge piping, vent connections, and power cables.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and
check valves. Use valves specified for domestic water, unless otherwise indicated. Include
features and devices indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 EARTHWORK
3.3 CONCRETE
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise required, for sump pumps.
Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Division 15 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods."
B. Concrete for pits and sumps is specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.4 INSTALLATION
B. Install pumps and arrange to provide access for maintenance, including removal of motors,
impellers, couplings, and accessories.
D. Wet-Pit-Mounted, Vertical Sump Pumps: Suspend pumps from basin covers. Make direct
connections to storm drainage piping.
E. Submersible Sump Pumps: Set pumps on basin, pit, or sump floor. Make direct
connections to storm drainage piping.
F. Sump Pump Basins: Install basins and connect to storm drainage piping. Brace interior of
basins according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent distortion or collapse
during concrete placement. Set basin cover and fasten to basin top flange. Install so top
surface of cover is flush with finished floor.
G. Sump Pump Pits: Construct concrete pits and connect to storm drainage piping. Refer to
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete work. Set basin cover and fasten
to top edge of concrete pit. Install so top surface of cover is flush with finished floor.
H. Packaged Drainage Pump Units: Install and make direct connections to storm drainage
piping.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
1. Install discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles, and
connect to storm drainage piping.
2. Install non-slam swing check valve and gate or ball valve on each sump pump
discharge. Include spring-loaded or weighted-lever check valves for piping DN65
(NPS 2-1/2) and larger.
3. Install non-slam swing check valve and gate or ball valve on each automatic,
packaged pump discharge.
C. Electrical power and control components, wiring, and connections are specified in
Division 16 Sections.
D. Ground equipment.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Pump Controls: Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, and alarm operation as required
for system application.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks before Starting: Perform the following preventive maintenance operations:
1. Lubricate bearings.
2. Disconnect couplings and check motors for proper direction of rotation.
3. Verify that each pump is free to rotate by hand. Do not operate pump if it is bound or
drags, until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
4. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.
B. Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding safe motor power is as
follows:
1. Start motors.
2. Open discharge valves slowly.
3. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes potable-water storage tanks and related specialties and accessories for
indoor installations.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Handle and store water storage tank systems, components, and parts to prevent distortions
and other damage that could affect their structural, mechanical, or electrical integrity.
Replace damaged items that cannot be restored to original condition.
C. Deliver paint in unopened containers with unbroken seals and labels showing designated
name, specification number, color, directions for use, manufacturer, and date of
manufacture, legible and intact at time of use.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished
specialties; and accessories. Indicate dimensions, wall thicknesses, insulation, finishes and
coatings, required clearances, methods of assembly of components, and piping connections.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and
the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
C. Manufacturer Certificates: For shop inspection and data reports as required by ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Confirm successful pressure and leak testing.
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements specified in "Field Quality Control" Article.
A. ASME Compliance for Steel Tanks: Fabricate and stamp steel, pressure water storage tanks
to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels."
B. ASME Compliance for Plastic Tanks: Fabricate and stamp plastic, pressure water storage
tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section X, "Fiber-
Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels."
C. NSF Compliance: NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," and
NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects." Include appropriate NSF
marking.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
j. Wessels Co.
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
c. Myers: F. E. Myers Co.
d. Smith: A. O. Smith; Aqua-Air Div.
e. Taco, Inc.
f. Wessels Co.
A. Pressure Rating of Pressure-Type Water Tanks: At least 860 kPa (125 psig), unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Pressure Rating of Specialties and Accessories for Pressure Systems: At least 860 kPa (125
psig), unless otherwise indicated.
C. Pressure Rating of Piping for Pressure Systems: At least 860 kPa (125 psig), unless
otherwise indicated.
D. Pressure Rating of Other Tanks and Piping Components: At least equal to system operating
pressure.
C. Construction: ASME code, steel, constructed with nontoxic welded joints, for 860-kPa
(125-psig) minimum working pressure, and as required to suit actual system working
pressure.
E. Tappings: Factory-fabricated stainless steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.
F. Manhole: Watertight, for tank more than 900 mm in diameter. Include same pressure rating
as tank.
G. Specialties and Accessories: Include relief valve; pressure gage and thermometer; air-
volume-operated control; air-charging connection; and gage glass, brass fittings,
compression stops, and gage-glass guard.
I. Horizontal Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel saddles, welded to tank before testing
and labeling.
J. Vertical Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel legs or steel skirt, welded to tank before
testing and labeling.
L. Tank Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61 barrier materials
for potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.
D. Cover for Open Tank: Steel, with lining same as or similar to tank lining and with shape
that encloses top of tank.
F. Tappings: Factory-fabricated stainless steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.
H. Specialties and Accessories: Include vacuum relief valve; free air vent with insect screen;
thermometer; and gage glass, brass fittings, compression stops, and gage-glass guard.
J. Horizontal Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel saddles, welded to tank before testing
and labeling.
K. Vertical Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel legs or steel skirt, welded to tank before
testing and labeling.
M. Tank Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61 barrier materials
for potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.
D. Construction: ASME code, steel, constructed with welded joints, for 860-kPa (125-psig)
minimum working pressure, and as required to suit actual system working pressure; factory
precharged to system operating pressure at tank.
F. Tappings: Factory-fabricated stainless steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.
G. Specialties and Accessories: Include air-charging connections, pressure relief valves, and
pressure gages.
H. Vertical Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel legs or steel skirt, welded to tank before
testing and labeling.
J. Tank Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61 barrier materials
for potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.
B. Construction: ASME code, steel, constructed with nontoxic welded joints, for 860-kPa
(125-psig) minimum working pressure, and as required to suit actual system working
pressure.
C. Construction: Steel, constructed with nontoxic welded joints, for 860-kPa (125-psig)
working pressure.
E. Tappings: Factory-fabricated stainless steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.
F. Manhole: Watertight, for tank more than 900 mm in diameter. Include same pressure rating
as tank.
H. Jacket: Steel, with manufacturer's standard baked-on enamel finish, unless otherwise
indicated.
I. Specialties and Accessories: Include relief valve; pressure gage and thermometer; air-
volume-operated control; air-charging connection; and gage glass, brass fittings,
compression stops, and gage-glass guard.
J. Vertical Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel legs or steel skirt, welded to tank before
testing and labeling.
K. Tank Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61 barrier materials
for potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.
4. Coating: Galvanized.
5. Coating: Nickel.
6. Coating: Glass.
A. Construction: Nonpressure rated, factory fabricated from ASTM A 794 steel sheets, with
nontoxic welded joints.
B. Construction: Nonpressure rated, field fabricated from ASTM A 794 steel sheets, with
nontoxic welded joints.
E. Tappings: Factory-fabricated stainless steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.
G. Specialties and Accessories: Include vacuum relief valve; free air vent with insect screen;
thermometer; and gage glass, brass fittings, compression stops, and gage-glass guard.
I. Horizontal Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel saddles, welded to tank before testing
and labeling.
J. Vertical Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel legs or steel skirt, welded to tank before
testing and labeling.
L. Tank Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61 barrier materials
for potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.
B. Construction: ASME code, FRP, for 860-kPa (125-psig) minimum working pressure, and
as required to suit actual system working pressure.
D. Tank Material: Composite plastic complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-
water tanks and according to the following:
E. Tappings: Factory fabricated of compatible materials, attached to tank before testing and
labeling.
F. Manhole: Watertight, for tank more than 900 mm in diameter. Include same pressure rating
as tank.
G. Vertical Tank Support: Factory-fabricated steel stand, supporting bottom of tank where
indicated.
C. Tank Material: Composite plastic complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-
water tanks and according to the following:
D. Tappings: Factory fabricated of compatible materials, attached to tank before testing and
labeling.
F. Cover for Open Tank: Plastic, same as or similar to tank material and with shape that
encloses top of tank.
G. Horizontal Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel saddles with steel insert for continuous
bottom support.
I. Vertical Tank Support: Factory-fabricated steel stand, supporting bottom of tank where
indicated.
A. Type: Hot pressed GRP (glass reinforced plastic) sectional panel, complete with tank
supports, piping and accessories as specified below. All internal metal parts to be
constructed from 304 grade stainless-steel.
D. Panel Color: Gray, completely opaque to prevent the growth of algae and micro organisms.
E. Panel Material Characteristics: GRP, 1.8 specific gravity. 30 percent min. glass content. 10
kPa tensile strength, 16.17 kPa flexural strength, 0.515 kPa impact strength, 29.5 kPa
compressive strength, 9.41 kPa shear strength, 2.16 x 10-5/deg. C thermal expansion. 0.02
kecal/m.hr deg. C thermal conductivity.
F. Components Materials:
G. Insulation: when specified, all tanks panel to be factory insulated with 25 mm thick
polyurethane of typical U value of 6 W/m2K.
H. Panels and Tank Accessories: To be shipped adequately packed in wooden crates for site
assembly complete with adequate quantities of bolts, nuts, washers, rubber sealant, etc.
I. Tank Top: to be provided with 610 mm round manhole with bolted cover and one 100 mm
diameter uPVC mosquito-proof cowled ventilator.
J. Tank: To be provided with all necessary piping connections of sizes as shown on the
Drawings Pipe connecting panels are to be specially designed at factory for that purpose and
shipped complete with pipe connections.
K. Ladders: 2 stainless-steel ladders are to be provided for each tank both inside and outside
the tank.
L. Tank: To be provided complete with level indicator, ball valve, level switches, flanges, and
bell mouth connection, etc.
N. Tests: After erection, tank to be filled with water to the level of overflow and left to stand
for 72 hours. During this period, no drop in water level will be allowed. If signs of
dampness or traces of leakage are noticed, the Contractor shall repair and re-test the tank to
the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
P. Guarantee: Tanks are to be fully guaranteed against manufacturing defects and utility of
substandard material for a period of 10 years.
2.11 ACCESSORIES
A. Overflow: The overflow for the tank shall consist of an overflow weir and outside drop
pipe, adequately supported. The overflow pipe shall be steel, ASTM A 53 or equal, and
shall terminate 300 to 600 mm above grade and shall be fitted with a flapper valve or screen
to prevent ingress of birds and insects.
B. Vent: Vent shall be tank manufacturer's standard type, factory supplied, mushroom vent
with aluminum bird screen. The free area of the vent shall be sized 50 percent in excess of
the pump-in rate.
C. Float Valves: The float valves shall be full bore, equilibrium ball type, designed to close
tight against maximum pressure when half submerged, with renewable, synthetic rubber,
valve disc and balancing piston bucket. Float valves to be all bronze construction including
levers and arms, with copper float and suitable for 1034 kPa cold water working pressure.
D. Altitude Valve: The supply to the tank shall be controlled by a altitude valve, automatic in
operation and accurately set to prevent overflow. The valve shall be cushioned when
opening and closing to prevent water hammer or shock. Valves shall be provided with a
travel indicator.
E. Drain Valve: AWWA C500, iron-body, bronze-mounted, non-rising stem with indicator, for
minimum working pressure of 1034 kPa, clear waterway equal to full nominal diameter,
hand wheel operated, and open by turning counterclockwise.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise required, for water tanks. Refer
to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods."
A. Install water storage tanks on concrete bases, level and plumb, firmly anchored. Arrange so
devices needing servicing are accessible.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to water storage tanks to allow service and maintenance.
B. Install thermometers and pressure gages on water storage tanks and piping. Thermometers
and pressure gages are specified in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages."
C. Connect water piping to water storage tanks with unions or flanges and with shutoff valves.
Connect tank drains with shutoff valves and discharge over closest floor drains.
D. Connect air piping to hydropneumatic tanks with unions or flanges and gate or ball valves.
Make connections to dissimilar metals with dielectric fittings.
A. Pressure Testing: Hydrostatically test ASME code, water storage tanks to ensure structural
integrity and freedom from leaks. Fill tanks with water, vent air, pressurize to 1-1/2 times
tank pressure rating, disconnect test equipment, hold pressure for 30 minutes with no drop
in pressure, and check for leaks. Replace tanks that fail test with new tanks and repeat until
test is satisfactory.
B. Pressure Testing: Hydrostatically test non-ASME code, pressure water storage tanks to
ensure structural integrity and freedom from leaks at pressure of 345 kPa (50 psig) above
system operating pressure, but not less than 1035 kPa (150 psig). Fill tanks with water, vent
air, pressurize tanks, disconnect test equipment, hold pressure for two hours with no drop in
pressure, and check for leaks. Repair or replace tanks that fail test with new tanks and
repeat until test is satisfactory.
C. Nonpressure Testing: Fill nonpressure water storage tanks to water operating level to
ensure structural integrity and freedom from leaks. Hold water level for two hours with no
drop in water level.
D. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until results are satisfactory.
3.5 CLEANING
B. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by Engineer or, if method is not
prescribed, use procedure described in AWWA C652 or as described below:
a. Fill tanks with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 mg/L (50 ppm) of
chlorine. Isolate tanks and allow to stand for 24 hours.
b. Fill tanks with water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 mg/L (200 ppm)
of chlorine. Isolate tanks and allow to stand for three hours.
3. Flush tanks, after required standing time, with clean, potable water until chlorine is
not present in water coming from tank.
4. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to Engineer. Repeat procedure if biological
examination shows evidence of contamination.
3.6 COMMISSIONING
B. Filling Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written procedures. Fill tanks with water to
operating level.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater. Include rated capacities; shipping,
installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail water heater assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of water heaters through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water
heaters and are based on specific units selected. Other manufacturers' products complying
with requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
D. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water heater, hot-water storage tanks to comply
with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.
E. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with performance efficiencies prescribed for the following:
1.5 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Description: Comply with UL 174, internally glass lined with heating element suitable for
operating on voltage, phase and cycle, shown in the schedule on the Electrical Drawings.
C. Heating Elements: Two, unless otherwise indicated; electric, screw-in, immersion type.
F. Safety Control: Automatic, high temperature limit and low water cut off
A. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and
complying with ASME PTC 25.3. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input
and include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief
valve with sensing element that extends into tank.
1. Option: Separate temperature and pressure relief valves are acceptable instead of
combination relief valve.
2. Exception: Omit combination temperature and pressure relief valve for tankless
water heater, and furnish pressure relief valve for installation in piping.
B. Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3.
Include pressure setting less than heat-exchanger working-pressure rating.
C. Vacuum Relief Valves: Comply with ASME PTC 25.3. Furnish for installation in piping.
D. Water Regulators: ASSE 1003, water-pressure reducing valve. Set at 172.5-kPa- (25-psig-)
maximum outlet pressure.
E. Shock Absorbers: ASSE 1010 or PDI WH 201, Size A water hammer arrester.
F. Water Heater Stand and Drain Pan Units: High-density-polyethylene-plastic, 450-mm high,
enclosed-base stand complying with IAPMO PS 103 and IAS No. 2. Include integral or
separate drain pan with raised edge and DN25 (NPS 1) drain outlet with ASME B1.20.1,
pipe thread.
G. Water Heater Stands: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated, steel stand for floor
mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water. Include dimension that will
support bottom of water heater a minimum of 450 mm above the floor.
I. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not less than
base of water heater and include drain outlet not less than DN20 (NPS 3/4).
J. Piping Manifold Kits: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated inlet and outlet piping
arrangement for multiple-unit installation. Include piping and valves for field assembly that
is capable of isolating each water heater and of providing balanced flow through each water
heater.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise required, for water heaters.
Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Division 15 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods."
1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial water heaters if installation on stand,
bracket, suspended platform, or direct on floor is indicated.
B. Install water heaters, level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and
referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so
controls and devices needing service are accessible.
E. Install temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief
valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend relief valve outlet with water
piping in continuous downward pitch and discharge onto closest floor drain.
F. Install pressure relief valves in water piping for water heaters without storage. Extend relief
valve outlet with water piping in continuous downward pitch and discharge onto closest
floor drain.
H. Install vacuum relief valves in water heater storage tanks that have copper lining.
I. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill into open drains or over floor
drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters that do
not have tank drains. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for drain valves.
J. Install thermometers on water heater inlet and outlet piping. Refer to Division 15 Section
"Meters and Gages" for thermometers.
K. Install pressure gages on water heater piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Meters and
Gages" for pressure gages.
L. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple water heaters.
Fabricate, modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each water heater.
Include shutoff valve, and thermometer in each water heater inlet and outlet, and throttling
valve in each water heater outlet. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty
valves and Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers.
M. Install water regulator, with integral bypass relief valve, in booster-heater inlet piping and
water hammer arrester in booster-heater outlet piping.
N. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks without
integral or fitting-type heat traps.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
C. Connect hot- and cold-water piping with shutoff valves and unions. Connect hot-water-
circulating piping with shutoff valve, check valve, and union.
D. Make connections with dielectric fittings where piping is made of dissimilar metal.
E. Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16
Sections. Arrange wiring to allow unit service.
F. Ground equipment.
B. In addition to manufacturer's written installation and startup checks, perform the following:
1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
2. Verify that piping system tests are complete.
3. Check for piping connection leaks.
4. Check for clear relief valve inlets, outlets, and drain piping.
5. Check operation of circulators.
6. Test operation of safety controls, relief valves, and devices.
7. Energize electric circuits.
8. Adjust operating controls.
9. Adjust hot-water-outlet temperature settings. Do not set above 60 deg C (140 deg F)
unless piping system application requires higher temperature.
10. Balance water flow through manifolds of multiple-unit installations.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights;
dimensions; required clearances; methods for assembling components; furnished specialties;
accessories; and installation and startup instructions for each model indicated.
B. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements.
D. Maintenance Data: For each condensing unit to include in the maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1.
1. Include a parts list for each condensing unit, control, and accessory; troubleshooting
maintenance guide; and servicing and preventive maintenance procedures and
schedule.
A. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated equipment specified in this Section that
is listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system according to ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for
Mechanical Refrigeration."
C. Fabricate and label water-cooled condensers according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
pad. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
specialties are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.6 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
B. Condensing coils shall be designed and sized specifically for air-cooled condenser service.
Coil frame shall be not less than 12-gage (2.8 millimeter) galvanized steel. Coils shall be
factory tested pneumatically under water at not less than 400 pounds per square inch (2758
kilopascal). A purging vent shall be provided at the highest point of the entering
refrigerant header of each coil circuit. Condenser coil and receiver shall have an excess
capacity of not less than 20 percent for storage of pumped-down refrigerant. Condensing
coil and remainder of refrigerant circuit shall be cleaned and factory charged with dry
nitrogen or refrigerant.
C. Drive shall be weather-protected. Drive and fan discharge and inlet shall be guarded. Fan
guards shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and shall be suitable for salt-air
atmosphere; electrogalvanizing is not acceptable.
E. Condenser-mounted control panel and intercomponent piping and wiring shall be provided.
Control panels exposed to the weather shall have NEMA 250, Type 3 enclosures and
NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosures if protected by casing. Electrical work shall conform to
NFPA 70 requirements.
1. Motor: Include thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay,
and contactor.
2. Two-Speed Compressor: Include manual reset, high-pressure switch and automatic
reset, and low-pressure switch.
D. Condenser Fan: Direct-drive, aluminum propeller fan; with permanently lubricated fan
motor with thermal-overload protection.
1. Low-voltage thermostat and subbase to control condensing unit and evaporator fan.
2. Precharged and insulated suction and liquid tubing.
3. Low ambient kit to permit operation down to 7 deg C (45 deg F).
4. Crankcase heater.
5. Automatic reset timer to prevent compressor rapid cycle.
6. Polyethylene mounting base to provide a permanent foundation.
F. Casing: Designed for outdoor installation with weather protection for components and
controls. Steel, finished with baked enamel; with removable panels for access to controls,
weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Mount service valves, fittings,
and gage ports on exterior of casing.
A. Description: Factory assembled and tested, air cooled; consisting of casing, compressors,
condenser coils, condenser fans and motors, and unit controls.
D. Condenser Fans: Propeller-type vertical discharge; either directly or belt driven. Include
the following:
F. Unit Casings: Designed for outdoor installation with weather protection for components
and controls and with removable panels for required access to compressors, controls,
condenser fans, motors, and drives. Additional features include the following:
1. Steel, galvanized or zinc coated, for exposed casing surfaces, treated and finished
with manufacturer's standard paint coating.
2. Lifting lugs to facilitate rigging of units.
3. Gasketed control panel door.
4. Unfused disconnect switch, factory mounted and wired, for single external electrical
power connection.
2.5 MOTORS
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory-installed motors.
C. Test and inspect shell and tube condensers according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated; maintain
manufacturer's recommended clearances.
C. Install ground-mounted units on minimum 100-mm thick, reinforced concrete base, 100 mm
larger than condensing unit on each side. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
requirements are specified in Division 3. Coordinate installation of anchoring devices.
E. Install units on seismically restrained spring isolators with a minimum deflection of 25-mm.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
B. Connect refrigerant piping to air-cooled condensing units; maintain required access to unit.
Install furnished field-mounted accessories.
C. Connect refrigerant and condenser water piping to water-cooled condensing units. Maintain
clear tube removal space.
D. Ground equipment.
A. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems with refrigerant and oil and test for leaks.
Repair leaks and replace lost refrigerant and oil.
B. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
operation, product capability, and compliance with requirements.
1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units and retest.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Clean units to remove dirt and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.
3.5 COMMISSIONING
B. Verify that units are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.
E. Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or binding.
J. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration
transmission to structure.
K. After startup and performance test, lubricate bearings and adjust belt tension.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged air-conditioning units with refrigerant compressors and
controls, intended for indoor installations, with [integral air-cooled condensers].
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished
specialties; and accessories for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of
units showing the full range of colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in latest
and relevant IEC standard, by a testing agency acceptable to the Engineer.
B. Paint finish shall be suitable for hot and humid climates. Unit shall be capable and suitable
of working at outdoor ambient temperature of 50 deg. C (122 deg. F).
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
B. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports, and
roof penetrations specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.3 CABINET
A. Frame and Panels: Structural-steel frame with galvanized steel panels with factory applied,
baked-enamel finish in color selected by Engineer from manufacturer's standard range, and
with access doors or panels.
B. Insulation: Minimum 13-mm thick, acoustic duct liner on cabinet interior and control panel.
D. Fan Sheaves: Steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed.
E. Motor Sheave: Variable and adjustable pitch selected so required rpm are obtained when set
at midposition.
2.5 COMPRESSOR
A. Description: Hermetically sealed, 3600 rpm maximum, and resiliently mounted with
positive lubrication and internal motor protection.
B. Refrigeration Circuit: A separate circuit for each compressor, with externally equalized
thermal-expansion valve, filter-dryer, and charging valves.
A. Description: Factory assembled and tested; consisting of condenser coil, fans and motors,
and cabinet.
1. Condenser Coil: Aluminum-fin copper tube with integral subcooler; leak tested to
2930 kPa (425 psig).
2. Condenser Fan: Direct-drive propeller type with permanently lubricated motor with
built-in thermal-overload protection.
3. Low Ambient Control: Cycles fans to permit operation down to minus 18 deg C (0
deg F).
2.9 CONTROLS
A. Control Package: Factory wired, including contactor, high- and low-pressure cutouts,
internal-winding thermostat for compressor, control-circuit transformer, and noncycling
reset relay.
1. Supply fan.
2. Compressor.
3. Condenser.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
C. Isolation: Mount cabinet and remote air-cooled condenser on spring isolators for mounting
under base of unit.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
C. Unless otherwise indicated, connect piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow units to
be disconnected without draining piping. Refer to piping system Sections for specific valve
and specialty arrangements.
D. Ground equipment.
B. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until
no leaks exist.
C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new
components, and retest.
D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.4 COMMISSIONING
B. Verify that units are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged air-conditioning units with refrigerant compressors and
controls, intended for indoor installations, with externally mounted air-cooled condensers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished
specialties; and accessories for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of
units showing the full range of colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
B. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports, and
roof penetrations specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.3 CABINET
A. Frame and Panels: Structural-steel frame with galvanized steel panels with factory applied,
baked-enamel finish in color selected by Engineer from manufacturer's standard range, and
with access doors or panels.
B. Insulation: Minimum 25-mm thick, acoustic duct liner on cabinet interior and control panel.
D. Isolation: Spring isolators for mounting under base of unit, with minimum static deflection
of 25 mm.
E. Discharge Plenum: Cabinet extension with duct openings for air discharge and lined with a
minimum of 50-mm thick duct liner.
C. Drive: Belt; with cast-iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and
keyed.
D. Motor Sheave: Variable and adjustable pitch selected so required rpm are obtained when set
at midposition.
G. Variable Air Volume: Inlet guide vanes with electric modulating actuator; linkage; and
adjustable, static-pressure controller responding to a static-pressure sensor.
J. Isolation: Mount fan and motor on common subbase and mount assembly on spring
isolators with minimum static deflection of 25 mm.
2.5 COMPRESSOR
A. Description: Hermetically sealed, 3600 rpm maximum, and resiliently mounted with
positive lubrication and internal motor protection.
B. Refrigerant Circuits: A separate circuit for each compressor, with externally equalized
thermal-expansion valve with adjustable superheat, filter-dryer, sight glass, high-pressure
relief valve, and charging valves.
A. Description: Factory assembled and tested; consisting of condenser coil, fans and motors,
and operating controls; suitable for roof mounting.
1. Condenser Coil: Aluminum-fin copper tube with integral subcooler; leak tested to
3110 kPa (450 psig).
2. Condenser Fans: Direct-drive propeller type with three-phase, permanently
lubricated, ball-bearing motors with built-in thermal-overload protection.
3. Terminate suction and liquid refrigerant piping with service valves within unit.
4. Low Ambient Control: Cycles fans to permit operation down to 7 deg C (45 deg F).
5. Low Ambient Control: Cycles fans and modulates condenser fan damper assembly to
permit operation down to minus 18 deg C (0 deg F).
6. Coil Guard: Painted galvanized steel with louvered grilles.
A. Description: Factory assembled and tested; consisting of condenser coil, fans and motors,
and cabinet.
1. Condenser Coil: Aluminum-fin copper tube with integral subcooler; leak tested to
3110 kPa(425 psig).
2. Condenser Fan: Direct-drive propeller type with permanently lubricated motor with
built-in thermal-overload protection.
3. Corrosion-Resistant Treatment: Phenolic coating applied in multiple dips and baked.
Corrosion treatment for condenser coils shall be factory applied.
2.10 CONTROLS
A. Control Package: Factory wired, including contactor, high- and low-pressure cutouts,
internal-winding thermostat for compressor, control-circuit transformer, and noncycling
reset relay.
1. Supply fan.
2. Compressor.
3. Condenser.
G. Microprocessor Control Panel: Controls unit functions, including refrigeration and safety
controls, and the following:
1. Supply fan.
2. Supply-fan motor speed.
3. Economizer control.
4. Compressors.
5. Air-cooled condenser.
6. Cooling tower pump.
7. Modulating, hot-water coil valve.
8. Modulating, steam coil valve.
9. Multistep, electric heater.
10. Panel-mounted control switch to operate unit in remote or local control mode, or to
stop or reset.
11. Panel-mounted indication of the following:
a. Operating status.
b. System diagnostics and safety alarms.
c. Supply-air temperature set point.
d. Zone heating-temperature set point.
e. Supply-air pressure set point.
f. Economizer minimum position set point.
g. Supply-air-pressure, high-limit set point.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
E. Install water-cooled units with thermometer and pressure gage at the water supply and
return connection.
F. Install vibration spring isolators under base of unit, with minimum static deflection of 25
mm. Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."
3.2 CONNECTIONS
C. Unless otherwise indicated, connect piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow units to
be disconnected without draining piping. Refer to piping system Sections for specific valve
and specialty arrangements.
D. Ground equipment.
B. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until
no leaks exist.
C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new
components, and retest.
D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.4 COMMISSIONING
B. Verify that units are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat pump units consisting of
separate evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for
exposed or concealed mounting, and may be connected to ducts.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Fan coil Unit: The part of the split-system air-conditioning unit that contains a coil for
cooling (heat rejection for heating operation in heat pump units) and a fan to circulate air to
conditioned space.
B. Condensing Unit: The part of the split-system air-conditioning unit that contains a
refrigerant compressor and a coil for condensing refrigerant (evaporator for heating
operation in heat pump units).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished
specialties; and accessories for each type of product indicated. Include performance data in
terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor
requirements, and electrical characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units of sections of
units showing the full range of colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of split-
system units and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers' systems
with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Substitutions."
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
B. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports, and
roof penetrations specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and
insulation on back of panel.
B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.
B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.
C. Fan and Motor: Centrifugal fan, directly driven by multispeed, electric motor with integral
overload protection; resiliently mounted.
A. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends, and discharge drain pans
with drain connection.
B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.
D. Fan and Motor: Centrifugal fan, directly driven by multispeed, electric motor with integral
overload protection; resiliently mounted.
A. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel, with removable panels for access to controls,
weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves,
fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.
B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation.
Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start
capacitor, relay, and contactor.
C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
C. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried,
pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Install fan coil unit components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely
fastened to building structure.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
C. Unless otherwise indicated, connect piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow units to
be disconnected without draining piping. Refer to piping system Sections for specific valve
and specialty arrangements.
D. Ground equipment.
B. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until
no leaks exist.
C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new
components, and retest.
D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.4 COMMISSIONING
B. Verify that units are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and
stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining units.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
3. Schedule training with Owner, through Engineer, with at least seven days' advance
notice.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include specialties and accessories for each unit type and configuration.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit the following for each fan-coil unit type and configuration:
D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for units with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section.
1. Maintenance schedules and repair parts lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and
filters.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of fan-coil units and suspension system components with
other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures,
HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Carrier Corp.
2. Trane Company (The); North American Commercial Group.
3. York International Corp.
2.2 CONFIGURATION
A. Horizontal Units: An assembly including filter, chassis, coil, drain pan, fan, and motor in
blow-through configuration with hydronic cooling coil and hydronic heating coil. Units to
be exposed or concealed as indicated on the drawings.
2.3 MATERIALS
B. Coil Section Insulation: 1-inch (25-mm) duct liner complying with ASTM C 1071 and
attached with adhesive complying with ASTM C 916.
1. Fire-Hazard Classification: Duct liner and adhesive shall have a maximum flame-
spread rating of 25 and smoke-developed rating of 50 when tested according to
ASTM E 84.
C. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain. Drain pan shall be insulated with
polystyrene or polyurethane insulation. Drain pan shall be formed to slope from all
directions to drain connection. Drain pan shall have extension to cover the area underneath
valve connections.
2.4 COILS
A. Cooling Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than
0.1 inch (2.5 mm) and with manual air vent. Coils shall be rated for a minimum working
pressure of 300 psig (2068 kPa) and a maximum entering water temperature of 275 deg F
(135 deg C).
2.5 FAN
A. Centrifugal, with forward-curved, double-width wheels and fan scrolls made of galvanized
steel or thermoplastic material; directly connected to or V-belt driven from motor.
B. Motors for Belt-Drive Units: Open dripproof with hinged mount and adjustable motor
pulley.
C. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes of connecting power circuit.
Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Two-Pipe, Valve Cycle Wall-mounted temperature sensor, with manual three speed,
electronic fan-speed switch, valves suitable to be connected to the central control system
specified in Division 15 "HVAC Controls and Instruments and BMS".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive fan-coil units for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before
fan-coil unit installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
C. Suspend fan-coil units from structure with rubber-in-shear vibration isolators (rubber
hangers). Vibration isolators are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration
Controls and Seismic Restraints."
D. Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to
match lighting controls.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
B. Unless otherwise indicated, install shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection.
D. Ground equipment.
A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing and report results in writing:
1. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
rotation and unit operation.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After installing units, inspect unit cabinet for damage to finish. Remove paint splatters and
other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. After installing units, clean fan-coil units internally according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
C. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and
stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout
Procedures."
3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
4. Schedule training with Owner, through Engineer, with at least seven days' advance
notice.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Division 7 Section "Manufactured Roof Specialties" for type and style of roof curbs
and equipment supports.
2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for
manufactured isolation bases.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each model indicated, including
rated capacities of selected model clearly indicated; dimensions; required clearances;
shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; accessories; and installation
and startup instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loadings,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection. Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof curb to roof structure.
Indicate coordinating requirements with roof membrane system.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and
differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
A. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for
Mechanical Refrigeration."
B. Energy Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy
Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section
that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
A. Deliver rooftop units as factory-assembled units with protective crating and covering.
C. Handle rooftop units to comply with manufacturer's written rigging and installation
instructions for unloading and moving to final location.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with roof
construction. Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for roof or slab installation; and
consisting of compressors, condensers, evaporator coils, condenser and evaporator fans,
refrigeration and temperature controls, filters, and dampers.
C. Evaporator Fans: Forward curved, centrifugal, directly driven with permanently lubricated
motor bearings.
D. Condenser Fans: Propeller type, directly driven with permanently lubricated motor
bearings.
E. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in galvanized steel casing
with equalizing-type vertical distributor.
G. Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard construction for gas-fired heat exchangers and
burners with the following controls:
H. Economizer Control: Return-, relief- and outside-air dampers, outside-air filter with
magnehelic gauge for dirty filter indication, fully modulating electronic-control system with
adjustable mixed-air thermostat and automatic changeover.
J. Thermostat: Programmable, electronic; with heating setback and cooling setup with 7-day
programming.
A. Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for roof or slab installation; and
consisting of compressors, condensers, evaporator coils, condenser and evaporator fans,
refrigeration and temperature controls, filters, and dampers.
C. Evaporator Fans: Forward curved, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable sheaves or direct-
drive fans; and with permanently lubricated motor bearings.
E. Condenser Fans: Propeller type, directly driven with permanently lubricated motor
bearings.
F. Filters: Class 1 bag filters with 90 to 95 percent dust-spot efficiency in galvanised steel
frame, with 50-mm thick, permanent, washable, aluminum type prefilters.
G. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in galvanized steel casing
with equalizing-type vertical distributor.
H. Compressors: Serviceable, fully hermetic compressors with integral vibration isolators and
crankcase heaters, thermal expansion valve and sight glasses.
I. Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard construction for gas-fired heat exchangers and
burners with the following controls:
J. Economizer Control: Return-, relief- and outside-air dampers, outside-air filter with
magnehelic gauge for dirty filter indication, fully modulating electronic-control system with
adjustable mixed-air thermostat and automatic changeover through adjustable enthalpy-
control device.
M. Thermostat: Programmable, electronic; with heating setback and cooling setup with 7-day
programming.
N. Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric detector located in both supply- and return-air plenum, to
de-energize unit.
1. Control Outputs: 2-stage cooling; and automatic or continuous fan operation and
economizer damper operation.
2. Control Sensors: Return-air-temperature sensor, fan airflow-proving switch, dirty-
filter switch, discharge-air-temperature sensor, room-temperature sensor, and night-
setback-override switch.
3. Control Features: Day/occupied modes for high or low enthalpy and
night/unoccupied mode.
A. Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for roof or slab installation; and
consisting of compressors, condensers, evaporator coils, condenser and evaporator fans,
refrigeration and temperature controls, filters, and dampers.
C. Evaporator Fans: Airfoil, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable sheaves and permanently
lubricated motor bearings.
D. Return-Air Fans: Airfoil, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable sheaves and permanently
lubricated motor bearings.
F. Exhaust/Relief Fans: Forward curved, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable sheaves and
permanently lubricated motor bearings.
G. Condenser Fans: Propeller type, directly driven with permanently lubricated motor
bearings.
H. Filters: 300-mm deep, Class 1 bag filters with 90 to 95 percent dust-spot efficiency in
galvanized steel frame; with 50-mm thick, permanent, washable, aluminum type prefilters.
I. Filters: 300-mm deep, Class 1 cartridge filters with 90 to 95 percent dust-spot efficiency in
galvanized steel frame; with 50-mm- (2-inch-) thick, fiberglass, throwaway prefilters.
J. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in galvanized steel casing
with equalizing-type vertical distributor and thermal expansion valve; tested to 3110 kPa
(450 psig) and leak tested to 2070 kPa (300 psig) with air under water. Insulate coil section.
valves, filter-dryers, sight glasses, compressor service valves, and liquid- and suction-line
service valves.
1. Refrigerant Circuits: Interlaced coil refrigerant circuiting with circuit for each
compressor.
2. Capacity Control: Cylinder unloaders with steps as scheduled.
3. Capacity Control: Hot-gas bypass valve and piping on one compressor.
4. Low-Pressure Cutout: Manual reset.
5. High-Pressure Cutout: Manual reset.
6. Compressor Motor Overload Protection: Manual reset.
7. Antirecycling Timing Device: Prevents compressor restart for 5 minutes after
shutdown.
8. Adjustable, Low Ambient Head-Pressure Control: Designed to operate at
temperatures as low as minus 18 deg C (0 deg F), by cycling condenser fans and
controlling speed of last fan of each circuit.
9. Oil-Pressure Switch: Designed to shut down compressors on low oil pressure.
L. Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard construction for heat exchangers and burners
designed for minimum 2-stage operation, with single gas connection with the following
controls:
M. Economizer Dampers: Return-, relief- and outside-air dampers with damper operator and
control package.
1. Leakage: Maximum leakage 2.5 percent at nominal airflow of 54 L/s per kW (400
cfm per ton) with 250-Pa (1-inch wg) pressure differential.
2. Damper Operator: 24 V, with gear train sealed in oil with spring return.
N. Economizer Control: Return-, relief- and outside-air dampers, outside-air filter with
magnehelic gauge for dirty filter indication, fully modulating electronic-control system with
adjustable mixed-air thermostat and automatic changeover through adjustable enthalpy-
control device.
R. Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric detector located in both supply- and return-air plenum, to
de-energize unit.
S. Electrical Convenience Outlet: 115-V, ac fused outlet, separately fused, located in unit
cabinet or in roof curb perimeter.
1. Control Outputs: Heating, cooling; and automatic or continuous fan operation and
economizer damper operation.
2. Return-air-, discharge-air-, outdoor-air-, space-, control set-point temperature LCD.
3. Outdoor enthalpy LCD.
4. Filter pressure drop LCD.
5. Status: Airflow, fans, system, unit operation, operating mode.
6. Inlet-vane and economizer-damper position LCD.
7. Duct static-pressure LCD.
8. Alarm LCD.
9. Control Features: Day/occupied and night/unoccupied modes, temperature reset.
2.6 MOTORS
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory-installed motors.
1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with ARI 270, "Standard for Sound Rating of
Outdoor Unitary Equipment."
ROOFTOP UNITS 15782 - Page 7 of 11
S08035-SPC-ME-01-REV 1
RIYADH METRO PROJECT
STATIONS AND BUILDINGS CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roof for compliance with requirements for conditions affecting installation and
performance of rooftop units. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
C. Curb Support: Install roof curb on roof structure, level. Install and secure rooftop units on
curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction.
D. Unit Support: Install unit on structural curbs and level. Coordinate wall penetrations and
flashing with wall construction.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
D. Ground equipment.
3.4 COMMISSIONING
C. Complete manufacturer's installation and startup checks and perform the following:
1. Level unit on housekeeping base, and flash curbs to unit and to roof.
2. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing.
3. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber.
4. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, air-cooled condenser coil, and fans.
5. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing.
6. Check that labels are clearly visible.
7. Clean furnace flue and condenser and inspect for construction debris.
8. Verify that controls are connected and operable.
9. Remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.
10. Verify that filters are installed.
11. Adjust vibration isolators.
12. Connect and purge gas line.
13. Check that burner and controls are suitable to operate at temperatures as low as minus
40 deg C (minus 40 deg F).
14. Check acoustic insulation.
15. Check operation of barometric dampers.
E. Check fan-wheel rotation for correct direction without vibration and binding.
H. Check and record performance of interlocks and protection devices; verify sequences.
J. Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing, and adjust burner
for peak efficiency. Adjust pilot to stable flame.
K. Calibrate thermostats.
N. Check outside-air damper for proper stroke and interlock with return- and relief-air
dampers.
O. Check controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and normal
and emergency shutdown.
Q. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on
fan curve.
1. Supply-air volume.
2. Return-air volume.
3. Relief-air volume.
4. Outside-air intake volume.
S. Verify operation of remote panel, including pilot-light operation and failure modes. Check
the following:
T. After starting and performance testing, replace filters with new, clean filters, change
vacuum heat exchanger and cooling and condenser coils, lubricate bearings, adjust belt
tension, and check operation of power vents.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes rectangular, round, and flat-oval metal ducts and plenums for heating,
ventilating, and air-conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10-inch
wg (minus 500 to plus 2490 Pa).
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for fire-resistant sealants for use around duct
penetrations and fire-damper installations in fire-rated floors, partitions, and walls.
2. Division 8 Section "Access Doors" for wall- and ceiling-mounted access doors for
access to concealed ducts.
3. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for intake and relief louvers and vents
connected to ducts and installed in exterior walls.
4. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Insulation" for duct insulation.
5. Division 15 Section "HVAC Casings" for factory- and field-fabricated casings for
mechanical equipment.
6. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-
mounted access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
7. Division 15 Section "Air Terminals" for constant-volume and variable-air-volume
control boxes, and reheat boxes.
8. Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."
9. Division 15 Section "Control Systems Equipment" for automatic volume-control
dampers and operators.
10. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air balancing and final
adjusting of manual-volume dampers.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air-moving and -
distribution equipment and other components of air system. Changes to layout or
configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Engineer.
Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed
layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
F. Record Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcement, support, and
installed accessories and devices.
A. Welding Standards: Qualify welding procedures and welding personnel to perform welding
processes for this Project according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," for
hangers and supports; AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum," for aluminum
supporting members; and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam
welding.
B. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Comply with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning
Systems," unless otherwise indicated.
D. Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations," Chapter 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated.
A. Deliver sealant and firestopping materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles
with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period
for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle sealant and firestopping materials according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
C. Deliver and store stainless-steel sheets with mill-applied adhesive protective paper
maintained through fabrication and installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating
designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
B. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold-rolled sheets; commercial quality; with
oiled, exposed matte finish.
C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 316, sheet form with No. 4 finish for surfaces
of ducts exposed to view; and Type 304, sheet form with No. 1 finish for concealed ducts.
E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for 36-inch (900-mm)
length or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900
mm).
A. Provide access doors, sized and located for maintenance work, upstream, in the following
locations:
B. Openings shall be as large as feasible in small ducts, 300 mm by 300 mm (12 inch by 12
inch) minimum where possible. Access sections in insulated ducts shall be double-wall,
insulated. Transparent shatterproof covers are preferred for uninsulated ducts.
2. For round and flat oval duct: Access sections shall be not less than 1.0 mm (20 gage)
housing welded or riveted to a duct section.
A. General: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner
Standard."
B. Materials: ASTM C 1071 with coated surface exposed to airstream to prevent erosion of
glass fibers.
A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive
or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and
mastics.
1. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches (50 mm) wide; glass-fiber fabric reinforced.
2. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with a gypsum mineral
compound and a modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape
to form a hard, durable, airtight seal.
3. Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl
sealant, formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
4. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealants,
complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;
compatible with duct materials.
D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
A. Ductwork shall be supported and braced to resist all directional (transverse, longitudinal and
vertical) forces.
1. Design and installation to meet the criteria listed above, and meet requirements of the
latest Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
(SMACNA), Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems for the
prescribed Seismic Hazard Level (SHL).
2. Where SMACNA requirements are not met completely, submit proposed alternate
details and calculations to completely address seismic bracing requirements. Such
designs shall use more severe of the Uniform Building Code requirements for
determining seismic forces, and be performed, stamped and signed by a specialist
engineer. Revise if necessary any details shown on the contract drawings for vertical
support and lateral bracing, and submit for the approval of the Resident Engineer to
meet the design criteria listed above.
A. General: Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other
construction with galvanized, sheet steel, according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible." Comply with requirements for metal
thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types and intervals.
B. Fabricate range hood exhaust ducts with 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, carbon-steel sheet
for concealed ducts and 0.0500-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel for exposed ducts.
Weld and flange seams and joints. Comply with NFPA 96.
C. Fabricate dishwasher hood exhaust ducts with 0.0500-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel.
Weld and flange seams and joints.
E. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches (480 mm)
and larger and 0.0359 inch (0.9 mm) thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. (0.93 sq. m) of
unbraced panel area, unless ducts are lined.
A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent coverage of
adhesive at liner contact surface area. Multiple layers of insulation to achieve indicated
thickness are prohibited.
B. Apply adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing.
C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge
overlapping.
E. Do not apply liners in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,
unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.
F. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm (12.7
m/s).
G. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches (100 mm) from corners and at intervals not
exceeding 12 inches (300 mm) transversely around perimeter; at 3 inches (75 mm) from
transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches (450 mm) longitudinally.
H. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have
either channel or "Z" profile or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings
at the following locations:
1. Fan discharge.
2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts.
I. Secure insulation liner with perforated sheet metal liner of same metal thickness as specified
for duct, secured to ducts with mechanical fasteners that maintain metal liner distance from
duct without compressing insulation.
1. Sheet Metal Liner Perforations: 3/32-inch (2.4-mm) diameter, with an overall open
area of 23 percent.
J. Terminate liner with duct buildouts installed in ducts to attach dampers, turning vane
assemblies, and other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout
means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct wall with bolts, screws, rivets, or
welds. Terminate liner at fire dampers at connection to fire-damper sleeve.
A. General: Diameter as applied to flat-oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of the size of
round duct that has a circumference equal to perimeter of a given size of flat-oval duct.
B. Round Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel and dishwasher exhaust ducts of
stainless steel according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and
Flexible."
C. Flat-Oval Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts with standard spiral lock seams or with butt-
welded longitudinal seams according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible."
A. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified
for longitudinal seam straight duct.
B. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps with no excess
material projecting from body onto branch tap entrance.
A. Manufactured type with a minimum 50 mm (two inch) length for insulated duct, and a
minimum 25 mm (one inch) length for duct not insulated. Test hole shall have a flat gasket
for rectangular ducts and a concave gasket for round ducts at the base, and a screw cap to
prevent air leakage.
B. Provide instrument test holes at each duct or casing mounted temperature sensor or
transmitter, and at entering and leaving side of each heating coil, cooling coil, and heat
recovery unit.
A. Sheet Lead: 3.1 mm (1/8 inch) thick, securely installed, free of waves, lumps or wrinkles
and with as few joints as possible.
B. Joints shall be made to obtain X-ray absorption equivalent to adjacent sheet lead, and
finished smooth and neat.
A. At the point of penetration of shielded rooms ducts shall be made electrically discontinuous
by means of a flexible, nonconductive connection outside shielded room.
B. Metallic duct portion inside shielded room shall be electrically bonded to shielding.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Battery Charging Room Exhausts: Constructed of 1.3 mm (18 gauge) stainless steel.
B. Duct for Negative Pressure Up to 750 Pa (3 Inches Water): Provide for exhaust duct
between HEPA filters and exhaust fan inlet including systems for Autopsy Suite exhaust.
1. Round Duct: Galvanized steel, spiral lock seam construction with standard slip joints.
2. Rectangular Duct: Galvanized steel, minimum 1.0 mm (20 gage), Pittsburgh lock
seam, companion angle joints 32 mm by 3.2 mm(1-1/4 by 1/8 inch )minimum at not
more than 2.4 m (8 feet) spacing. DUCTMATE SYSTEM or equal manufactured
joints are acceptable in lieu of companion angles.
B. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated.
D. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and
connections.
E. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct.
F. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and
perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and
permanent enclosure elements of building.
H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness.
I. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid
partitions, unless specifically indicated.
J. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting
layouts, and similar finished work.
K. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer vaults
and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
L. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and
exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and
duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as duct. Overlap
opening on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
M. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior
walls, install appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve, and firestopping sealant. Fire and
smoke dampers are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping
materials and installation methods are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping."
A. General: Seal duct seams and joints according to the duct pressure class indicated and as
described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
A. Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat-oval metal duct with support systems indicated in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches (600 mm) of each elbow and within 48 inches
(1200 mm) of each branch intersection.
D. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of
failure (proof-test) load.
F. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
3.6 CONNECTIONS
B. For branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections, comply with SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
C. Determine leakage from entire system or section of system by relating leakage to surface
area of test section.
D. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is less than maximum allowable.
E. Leakage Test: Perform tests according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test
Manual."
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust volume-control dampers in ducts, outlets, and inlets to achieve design airflow.
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for detailed procedures.
3.9 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect the
system. Vacuum ducts before final acceptance to remove dust and debris.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes HVAC casings for field-erected, air-handling systems and for housing
mechanical equipment.
1. Division 15 Section "Duct Insulation" for external insulation for HVAC casings.
2. Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting" for lighting within HVAC casings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For factory-fabricated casings, sealing materials, and acoustic liner materials.
1. Show sound-absorption coefficients in each octave band lower than those scheduled,
when tested according to ASTM C 423.
2. Show airborne sound transmission losses lower than those scheduled, when tested
according to ASTM E 90.
E. Record (As-Built) Drawings: Indicate actual fabrication and installation details of HVAC
casings and accessories.
A. Welding Standards: Qualify welding procedures and welding personnel to perform welding
processes for this Project according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," for
hangers and supports; AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum," for aluminum
supporting members; and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam
welding.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
specialties are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 (G90) coating
designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 6-mm minimum diameter for 900-mm length or less; 10-mm
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 900 mm.
A. General: Comply with NFPA 90A and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."
B. Materials: ASTM C 1071 with coated surface exposed to airstream to prevent erosion of
glass fibers.
1. Thickness: 25 mm.
2. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.037 at 24 deg C (0.26 at 75 deg F) mean
temperature.
3. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread rating of 25 and smoke-
developed rating of 50, when tested according to ASTM C 411.
4. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A and ASTM C 916.
A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive
or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and
mastics.
A. Shop fabricate casings to greatest extent possible with a minimum of joints and to minimize
field fabrication and assembly.
B. Fabricate casings with standing seam construction and angle reinforcement. Fabricate
close-off sheets from casing sides, top, and bottom to damper, coil, and filter frames.
Fabricate close-off sheets at joints between stacked coils. Bolt close-off sheets to frame
flanges and housings. Support coils on stands fabricated from galvanized steel angles or
channels.
D. Seal joints with liquid-type, high-pressure duct sealant to eliminate air leakage.
E. Fabricate drain pans for cooling coils, humidifiers, and eliminator blade sections in casings
with external connection and vented deep-seal trap for drainage piping with a 20-mm pipe
connection. Fabricate and reinforce drain pans of same material and thickness as housing,
50 mm deep with rolled edges. Solder seams.
F. Fabricate casings with reinforced openings for access doors at least 500 mm wide by 1200
mm high and located for access to each item of equipment housed. Refer to Division 15
Section "Duct Accessories" for access doors.
G. Fabricate casings to receive flexible or outlet connectors for fans. Refer to Division 15
Section "Duct Accessories" for flexible connectors.
B. Panel Construction: Standing-seam, galvanized, sheet steel exterior shell; and solid or
perforated, galvanized, sheet steel interior shell; with a 50- or 100-mm space, as indicated.
C. Trim Items: Fabricate from a minimum of 1.3-mm galvanized, sheet steel, furnished in
standard lengths for field cutting.
D. Access Doors: Fabricate personnel access doors at least 600 mm by 1500 mm in size, and
other access doors in size indicated.
1. Fabricate doors of same thickness as panels, with a minimum 1.0-mm solid interior
and exterior galvanized, sheet steel shell.
2. Install a minimum of two ball-bearing hinges and two wedge-lever-type latches,
operable from inside and outside. Install doors to open against air pressure
differential. Install neoprene gasket around entire perimeter of door frame.
3. Fabricate windows in doors consisting of double-glazed wire-reinforced safety glass
with an air space between and sealed with interior and exterior rubber seals.
1. Design outdoor casings with weatherproof coating and for wind loading of 720 N/sq.
m and snow loading of 1440 N/sq. m.
2. Acoustic Performance: Certified testing data from independent acoustic agency
listing sound-absorption and transmission-loss characteristics of panel assembly.
3. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.037 at 24 deg C (0.26 at 75 deg F) mean
temperature.
A. General: Miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes required to comply with
HVAC casing system requirements, including proper connection of ducts and equipment.
A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent coverage of
adhesive at liner contact surface area. Multiple layers of insulation to achieve indicated
thickness are prohibited.
B. Apply adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing.
C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
D. Fold and compress liner in corners of casings or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge
overlapping.
E. Do not apply liners with longitudinal joints, except at corners of casings, unless casing size
and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.
G. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 100 mm from corners and at intervals not exceeding
300 mm transversely around perimeter; at 75 mm from transverse joints; and at intervals not
exceeding 450 mm longitudinally.
H. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have
either channel or "Z" profile or are integrally formed from casing wall. Fabricate edge
facings at the following locations:
1. Fan discharge.
2. Intervals of lined casing preceding unlined casing.
3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in casings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine equipment bases and roof curbs for compliance with requirements for conditions
affecting installation and performance of HVAC casings. Do not proceed with installation
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Field-cut openings for pipe and conduit penetrations; insulate and seal according to
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
D. Support components rigidly with ties, braces, brackets, seismic restraints, and anchors of
types that will maintain housing shape and prevent buckling.
E. Align casings accurately at connections, with 3-mm misalignment tolerance and with
interior surfaces smooth.
F. Maintain duct seal class integrity throughout casing. Apply sealer to joints, connections and
mountings.
C. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is less than maximum allowable.
D. Leakage Test: Perform tests according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test
Manual."
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean dust and debris from each casing section as it is installed. Clean external surfaces of
foreign substances that might deteriorate metal or interfere with painting or insulating of
casings.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Manual-volume dampers.
3. Fire and smoke dampers.
4. Duct silencers.
5. Turning vanes.
6. Duct-mounted access doors and panels.
7. Flexible ducts.
8. Flexible connectors.
9. Duct accessory hardware.
1. Division 8 Section "Access Doors" for wall- and ceiling-mounted access doors and
panels.
2. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for intake and relief louvers and vents
connected to ducts and installed in exterior walls.
3. Division 15 Section "Air Terminals" for constant-volume and variable-air-volume
control boxes, and reheat boxes.
4. Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."
5. Division 15 Section "Control Systems Equipment" for electric and pneumatic damper
actuators.
6. Division 16 Section "Fire Alarm Systems" for duct-mounted fire and smoke
detectors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Manual-volume dampers.
3. Fire and smoke dampers.
4. Duct silencers.
5. Duct-mounted access doors and panels.
6. Flexible ducts.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loadings,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, location, and size of each field
connection. Detail the following:
C. Product Certificates: Submit certified test data on dynamic insertion loss; self-noise power
levels; and airflow performance data, static-pressure loss, dimensions, and weights.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating
designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
B. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold-rolled sheets, commercial quality, with
oiled, exposed matte finish.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for 36-inch (900-mm)
length or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900
mm).
B. Frame: 0.052-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, galvanized, sheet steel, with welded corners and
mounting flange.
H. Blades shall include field adjustable, zinc plated steel counter balance weights to allow that
0.01 inches wg (2.5 Pa).
A. General: Factory fabricated with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades
for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position
without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent
with pressure class.
1. Pressure Classifications of 3-Inch wg (750 Pa) or Higher: End bearings or other seals
for ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of
operating shaft.
1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized, sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch
(1.62 mm) thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where
indicated for attaching to walls; and flangeless frames where indicated for installing
in ducts.
2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- (1.62-mm-) thick, galvanized, sheet steel.
3. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
4. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
C. Jackshaft: 1-inch- (25-mm-) diameter, galvanized steel pipe rotating within a pipe-bearing
assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper
assemblies.
D. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- (2.4-
mm-) thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch (19-mm) hexagon locking nut. Include center
hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct
mounting.
C. Frame: SMACNA Type A with blades in airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-
inch- (0.85-mm-) thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
D. Frame: SMACNA Type B with blades out of airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-
inch- (0.85-mm-) thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 inch (1.3 mm) or 0.138 inch (3.5 mm) thick as indicated,
and length to suit application.
2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of
perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper
frame complies with sleeve requirements.
H. Horizontal Dampers: Include a blade lock and stainless-steel negator closure spring.
A. General: Labeled to UL 555S. Combination fire and smoke dampers shall be labeled for
one-and-one-half-hour rating to UL 555.
B. Fire Performance: Adhesives, sealers, packing materials, and accessory materials shall have
fire ratings not exceeding 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed when tested
according to ASTM E 84.
D. Round Units: Casings with sheet metal thicknesses for diameters listed below:
E. Sheet Metal Perforations: 1/8-inch (3-mm) diameter for inner casing and baffle sheet metal.
F. Fibrous Acoustic-Fill Material: Inert and vermin-proof fibrous material, packed under not
less than 5 percent compression.
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) wide, curved blades set
3/4 inch (19 mm) o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches (50 mm) o.c.;
and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ducts.
A. General: Fabricate doors and panels airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
B. Frame: Galvanized, sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
C. Door: Double-wall, galvanized, sheet metal construction with insulation fill and thickness,
and number of hinges and locks as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel
where indicated. Include 1-by-1-inch (25-by-25-mm) butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
D. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber.
B. Conventional, Indoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with
polychloroprene.
C. Conventional, Outdoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with
a synthetic-rubber, weatherproof coating resistant to the sun's ultraviolet rays and ozone
environment.
B. Flexible Ducts, Uninsulated: Spiral-wound steel spring with flameproof vinyl sheathing.
C. Flexible Ducts, Insulated: Factory-fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket
enclosing 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) thick, glass-fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner.
D. Pressure Rating: 6-inch wg (1500 Pa) positive, 1/2-inch wg (125 Pa) negative.
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw
cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments, and
length to suit duct insulation thickness.
B. Splitter Damper Accessories: Zinc-plated damper blade bracket; 1/4-inch (6-mm), zinc-
plated operating rod; and a duct-mounted, ball-joint bracket with flat rubber gasket and
square-head set screw.
C. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band
with a worm-gear action, in sizes 3 to 18 inches (75 to 450 mm) to suit duct size.
D. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to
gasoline and grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details shown in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass
Duct Construction Standards" for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Install volume dampers in lined duct; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
C. Provide test holes at fan inlet and outlet and elsewhere as indicated.
E. Install duct access panels for access to both sides of duct coils. Install duct access panels
downstream from volume dampers, fire dampers, turning vanes, and equipment.
1. Install duct access panels to allow access to interior of ducts for cleaning, inspecting,
adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units.
2. Install access panels on side of duct where adequate clearance is available.
3.2 ADJUSTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Propeller Fans
2. Gravity Turbine Ventilator
3. Welding Fume Extraction Equipment
C. Fan Unit Schedule: Performance requirements and data are described in equipment
schedule(s) on the Drawings.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data including rated capacities of each unit, weights (shipping, installed, and
operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and the following:
B. Shop Drawings from the manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating
dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components,
and location and size of each field connection.
C. Coordination Drawings, including floor plans and sections drawn accurately to scale.
Submit with Shop Drawings. Show fan room layout and relationships between components
and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support,
and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.
D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating clearly
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
E. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements.
F. Maintenance data for fan units to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified
in Division 1.
A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that
are listed and labeled by UL where available.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.
C. AMCA Compliance: Provide products that meet performance requirements and are licensed
to use the AMCA Seal.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in latest
and relevant IEC standard, by a testing agency acceptable to the Engineer.
A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with
protective crating and covering.
B. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
B. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are lubricated, and
fans have been commissioned.
A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete housekeeping pads. Cast anchor-bolt inserts
into pad. Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Description: Belt-driven or direct propeller fans, as indicated, consisting of fan blades, hub,
housing, orifice ring, motor, drive, and accessories.
B. Housings: Galvanized steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with baked-
enamel finish coat after assembly..
C. Steel Fan Wheels: Formed-steel blades riveted to heavy-gage steel spider bolted to cast-iron
hub.
A. Gravity type aluminum ventilator with wind driven vertical vanes, suitable for industrial
application and for installation on any roof type, complete with all accessories.
B. The units shall provide a continuous performance to the capacities shown on drawings. The
units shall be designed so that any static or dynamic loading shall be minimal and not
require any additional support structures to the roof system
C. The units shall be of robust construction and be supplied complete with a mounting and
flashing system allowing for a simple installation to a variety of roof types. The turbine head
shall be of the cylindrical vertical vane type mounted on a rotating shaft complete with
bearings and a turbine head support system. Aerodynamically proven vanes shall be fitted in
such a configuration that optimizes the airflow through the turbine head. The top turbine
head support arms shall be of the full-length fiber reinforced plastic type. The turbine head
shall be securely mounted on a circular throat, the size of the throat being as shown on the
drawings. The configuration of the turbine head construction shall minimize the inertia of
the unit to enhance low wind speed performance. The throat shall be adjustable to suit the
pitch of the roof system. A weather proof flashing shall be incorporated with the throat. The
entire unit shall be manufactured from high quality marine grade aluminum except for the
shaft, which will be of type 316 stainless steel. The bearings shall be of the double row
heavy-duty ball type and shall be factory-sealed for life. The units shall be powder coated
to an approved color.
D. The units shall be manufactured to appropriate tolerances that will ensure a stable
performance at all wind speeds. Unless otherwise approved, aluminum sheets shall be laser
cut to ensure clean edges. The whole unit shall be constructed so that its operation is noise
free and will prevent the ingress of water and dust.
E. Unit shall be complete with an auxiliary small motor to be utilized in case wind velocity is
not enough to ensure the required ventilation.
F. The units shall be tested in accordance with the relevant standards and the tests shall be in
accordance with internationally recognized third party inspection standards. Tests shall
include but not be limited to capacities at varying wind speeds, pressure drops and rain
leakage resistance. All test results shall be recorded on an approved test record sheet that
shall bear the mark of the approved testing authority.
G. The supplier of the units shall provide the information required in the relevant standards and
this information should be attested by an appropriate independent agency. Each unit shall
carry markings in accordance with the standard (Make and Model shall be stamp impressed
on the body of the unit).
H. The supplier shall unconditionally warrant the units for a period of not less than 15 years.
The supplier or his approved commercial agent shall certify this warranty. A copy of the
warranty certificate shall be included at the time of any offer to supply.
A. Ventilator Unit shall be of the lightweight extractor fan with electric motor to move
approximately 1550 m3/hr of air. Fan to be of low noise and suitable for the use with
exhaust arms. Supplied with welding smoke filter, flexible extraction arm, and necessary
accessories for installation to the wall brackets.
D. Filter: welding smoke high efficiency two-step filter, wall mounted in cabinet with brackets,
suitable for connection to the flexible extraction arm.
E. Arm: flame-proof double skin flexible fiber glass hose, PVC coated with internal steel
spiral, designed for extracting welding smoke.
F. Hood: 1.5m × 1.5 m welded or riveted hood of material to suit application, with safety mesh
on hose, and hood collar suitable for flexible arm connection with proper extension above
top of hood.
G. Controls: Provide control system for automatic/manual operation of fan and filter set.
2.5 MOTORS
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory-installed motors.
C. Paint finish of fans exposed to outdoor shall be suitable for the hot and humid climate of the
project.
D. Internal sides of fans used for 100 percent outdoor air shall be specially painted.
1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating
Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300,
"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA
Seal.
2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of
rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210,
"Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."
B. Fans used for smoke extract shall be UL listed and suitable for high temperature application
as indicated on Drawings.
C. Noise level of fans shall not exceed noise level specified for location of installation. The
overall efficiency shall be minimum 60%.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of the fans. Do not proceed with installation
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Support units using the vibration-control devices indicated. Vibration-control devices are
specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."
C. Suspend units from structure using threaded steel rods, vibration isolation springs and
seismic restraints. Vibration-control devices are specified in Division 15 Section "
Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct
connections with flexible connector.
3.5 ADJUSTING
C. Lubricate bearings.
3.6 CLEANING
A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction
debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum clean fan
wheel and cabinet.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following operations and checks before startup,
and report results in writing:
1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel.
Adjust fan to indicated RPM.
2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
C. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures for air-
handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions. Fix in
final position after balancing is achieved.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain axial fan units.
Refer to Division 1.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
C. Performance Criteria:
1. The fan schedule shows liter per second (l/s) or cubic feet per minute (CFM) and
design static pressure.
2. Provide fans and motors capable of stable operation at design conditions and at ll0
percent pressure but not to exceed 185 Pa (3/4-inch) additional pressure.
3. Lower than design pressure drop of approved individual components may allow use
of a smaller fan motor and still provide the safety factor. When submitted as a
deviation a smaller motor may be approved in the interest of energy conservation.
4. Select fan operating point as follows:
a. Forward curved and axial fans: Right hand side of peak pressure point.
b. Airfoil, backward inclined or tubular: Near the peak of static efficiency.
D. Safety Criteria: Provide manufacturer's standard screen on fan inlet and discharge exposed
to operating and maintenance personnel.
E. Noise level shall not exceed level allowed for place of installation. Noise level for all ceiling
mounted equipment shall not exceed NC35.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data including rated capacities of each unit, weights (shipping, installed, and
operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and the following:
C. Coordination Drawings, including floor plans and sections drawn accurately to scale.
Submit with Shop Drawings. Show fan room layout and relationships between components
and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support,
and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.
D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating clearly
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
E. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements.
F. Maintenance data for fans to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in
Division 1.
A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that
are listed and labeled by UL where available.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
C. AMCA Compliance: Provide products that meet performance requirements and are licensed
to use the AMCA Seal.
D. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with
protective crating and covering.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement to the final location following
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
B. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are lubricated, and
fans have been commissioned.
A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete housekeeping pads. Cast anchor-bolt inserts
into pad. Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in "Cast-in-
Place Concrete" Section.
A. Furnish one set of belts for each belt-driven fan that match products installed, are packaged
with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing
contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. General
1. Performance data for all fans and spare parts shall be determined in accordance with
the provisions of ASHRAE 51.
2. Sound pressure level ratings of ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301 and shall
be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300.
3. Sound pressure level ratings of non-ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301 and
shall be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300. Application of
sound pressure level ratings shall conform to AMCA 302. Unit construction shall
conform to applicable standards contained in AMCA 99 and to requirements
specified.
4. Safety provisions for power transmission equipment and non-ducted inlets and outlets
shall include guards and screens, unless other provisions are required, and shall be
constructed in accordance with applicable provisions of ASME B15.1. Installation
shall be such that fan vibration-isolation provisions are not negated.
5. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory.
B. Corrosion Protection: All steel shall be mill-galvanized, or phosphatized and coated with
minimum two coats, corrosion resistant enamel paint. Manufacturers paint and paint system
shall meet the minimum specifications of: ASTM D 1735 water fog; ASTM B 117 salt
spray; ASTM D 3359 adhesion; and ASTM G 23 weathermeter.
C. Air-Handling System Balancing Provisions: All necessary facilities shall be provided for
the adjustment of fan speed for each air-handling system during air-quantity balancing
operations. Facilities provided shall be one of the following:
1. A variable-pitch drive with variable range to produce the fan speed necessary for
proper air balance.
2. A continuously variable drive or power unit to produce the fan speed necessary for
proper air balance.
3. A series of fixed-pitch pulleys that can be interchanged until the proper fan speed has
been determined.
A. Factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory finished, with indicated
capacities and characteristics.
B. Description: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings,
motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and support structure.
2.4 HOUSINGS
A. Materials and Fabrication: Formed- and reinforced-steel panels to make curved scroll
housings with shaped cutoff, spun-metal inlet bell, and doors or panels to allow access to
internal parts and components. Use galvanized steel to fabricate fans downstream from
humidifiers.
1. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting and
supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.
2. Fabrication Class: AMCA 99 Class I, Class II, or Class III.
3. Horizontal Flanged Split Housing: Bolted construction.
4. Plug Fans: Fabricate without fan scroll and volute housing, with steel cabinet.
5. Tubular Centrifugal Fans: Fabricate tubular housing from formed- and reinforced-
steel panels with welded seams and the following:
2.5 WHEELS
A. Backward Inclined: Steel or aluminum construction with curved inlet flange, back plate,
backwardly inclined blades welded or riveted to flange and back plate; cast-iron or cast-steel
hub riveted to back plate and fastened to shaft with set screws.
2.6 SHAFTS
A. Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at the maximum
rated fan speed and motor horsepower (HP), with final alignment and belt adjustment made
after installation.
B. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a protective coating
of lubricating oil.
C. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of the first critical speed at the top of the
fan's speed range.
2.7 BEARINGS
A. Prelubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow- block-type ball bearings.
A. Description: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
B. Drives:
C. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing, dynamically balanced at
factory.
D. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of the
adjustment range at fan design conditions.
E. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives.
1. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA requirements; 2.7-mm thick, 20-
mm diamond-mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime
coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation.
Include provision for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer
with guard in place.
2.9 ACCESSORIES
A. Scroll Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll, with quick-opening latches and gaskets.
C. Fixed Inlet Vanes: Steel, with fixed cantilevered vanes welded to inlet bell.
D. Variable Inlet Vanes: Steel, with blades supported at both ends with 2 permanently
lubricated bearings. Variable mechanism terminating in single control lever with control
shaft for double-width fans.
E. Adjustable Inlet Vanes: Steel, with blades cantilevered with 2 permanently lubricated
bearings. Variable mechanism out of air stream terminating in single control lever with
control shaft for double-width fans.
F. Discharge Dampers: Heavy-duty steel assembly with blades constructed of 2 plates formed
around and welded to shaft, channel frame, sealed ball bearings, with blades linked out of
air stream to single control lever.
G. Inlet Screens: Galvanized steel welded grid screen, mounted inside shaft bearings.
H. Scroll Drain Connection: DN25 (1-inch) steel pipe coupling welded to low point of fan
scroll.
I. Shaft Cooler: Metal disk between bearings and fan wheel, designed to dissipate heat from
shaft.
K. Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width fans.
L. Weather Cover: Heavy-gage steel sheet with ventilation slots, bolted to housing.
2.10 MOTORS
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory-installed motors.
D. Motor Bases: Motor shall be provided with adjustable motor bases, except as otherwise
specified. Motors over 7-1/2 horsepower (5600 watt of power) with fixed-sheave standard
belt section drives shall be provided with adjustable, pivoted motor bases wherever
equipment configuration permits proper installation.
A. Sheet Metal Parts: Enamel or prime coat before assembly. Do not prime coat aluminum
parts.
B. Factory Finish for Fans Downstream from Humidifiers: Enamel or prime coat before
assembly with 2 coats of paint. Prime coating on aluminum parts is not required.
1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating
Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300,
"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA
Seal.
2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of
rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210,
"Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."
A. Unit central station, draw-through, horizontal, complete with electric motor, V-belt drive
fan, evaporator mattresses, circulating pump, water sump, wiring cables, control devices and
all necessary accessories. Units to be designed for dusty stormy weather conditions. The
unit to be factory supplied with supporting frame and adjustable feets.
B. Housing factory fabricated, unit casing and frame to be made of corrosion resistant
galvanized sheet steel with two coats of enamel paint. Special hat sections formed into
cabinet bottom to assure maximum blower/motor support.
C. Fan Section: O have formed channel base for integral mounting of fans, motor and casing
panels. Fan scroll and bearings to be rigidly mounted on an adequate frame rigidly fixed to
base. Fan section to be provided with compartment lighting and access door with glass
inspection window.
D. Fan Section: have one or more industrial grade fans, with air foil blades for
backward/inclined blades, rear discharge type, mounted and keyed on common heat-treated,
ground and polished solid steel shaft. Shaft to be supported on self-aligning pillow block
regreasible ball bearings. Fan wheels and scrolls to be bonderized steel painted with blaked
enamel or unpainted mill galvanized steel.
E. Fan Sound Power Level: mean sound power level at 1.5m from fan casing inlet not ducted
in free field conditions is not exceed 85 dBa.
F. Drive: to comprise fan pulley, adjustable or non-adjustable motor sheave depending on the
size of fans, V-belt guard and provision for belt tensioning adjustment as well as adjustment
mechanism.
G. Access Panel: full height removable panel to provide access to fan housing and discharge
side of wet section. Wet section to have removable top for access and pad replacement.
H. Motor: heavy duty, industrial grade, open face, drip proof sized to meet system
requirements, rated 50 deg. C. ambient condition, Class F insulation, with service factor 1.1
and with life-time sealed ball bearings.
I. Evaporator mattresses: manufacturer standard with 300 mm thick and 95% saturation
efficiency at 500 feet per minute face velocity. Media to be supported by a full width
stainless channel with punched holes on a staggered pattern to assure minimum of 50%
support of the media. Provide stainless plate extended from the bottom of the media into the
water to prevent air bypass under the media.
J. Water distribution: to be complete with pump recirculating system with metering valve and
bleed off line on pressure side of pump. Water to be delivered to PVC schedule 40 header
pipe. Water to be discharge upwards against a stainless steel water deflector that re-directs
the water back evenly onto the full width of the cooling media. Water pump to be provided
complete with thermal overload and locked rotor protection. The water sump to be stainless
steel and complete with water supplying kit, spreader, float valve and overflow.
K. Electrical controls: to consist of a fused disconnect with manual off/on switch. The
controls shall consist of Magnetic starter with thermal overload strips and pump contactor.
Remote controls (thermostat or manual switching) are available.
L. Dampers leakage rate: is not exceed the following for a pressure differential between the up-
stream part and down-stream part of damper of 1000Pa when damper is closed:
Number of Modules
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
M. Flexible Connection: units to be provided with flexible connection section where installed
above expansion joints as shown on the drawing. Flexible connection to be heavy duty, fire
retardant and resistant to the requirement of NFPA A 90A.
N. Vibration Isolators: to be provided on all units and to be spring type, free standing and
laterally stable without any housing and complete with 5mm neo-prene acoustical friction
pads between the base plate, and the support. All mountings to be no minimum additional
travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection.
A. Carbon Monoxide Exhaust System Rail: Shall consist of exhaust rail, fan, automatic damper
with micro switch, three numbers sliding hoses, balancers, connecting nozzles, supporting
elements and all other accessories required for the proper installation and operation of the
system.
B. Exhaust Rail: 160mm diameter delivered in parts which are multiples of 2.5m assembled to
the length shown on the drawings.
F. Fume Extract Fan: Zinc-coated steel housing painted and baked, impeller directly
connected to motor shaft and made of silumen to prevent build-up of static electricity.
H. Fume Extract Fan: Equipped with guard net on the inlet and outlet sides.
Or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of the fans. Do not proceed with installation
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Support units using the vibration-control devices indicated. Vibration-control devices are
specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."
C. Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods, vibration
isolation springs and seismic restraints. Vibration-control devices are specified in
Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."
1. Coordinate size of housekeeping bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct
base 100 mm larger, in both directions, than the overall dimensions of the supported
unit.
2. Form concrete pads with steel channels conforming to ASTM A 36M (ASTM A 36),
size and location as indicated. Miter and weld corner and provide cross bracing.
Anchor or key to floor slab.
3. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate
securing units.
4. Place concrete and allow to cure before installing units. Use portland cement
conforming to ASTM C 150, 27 MPa compressive strength, and normal-weight
aggregate.
5. Clean exposed steel form according to SSPC Surface Preparation Specifications SP 2
or SP 3 and apply 2 coats of rust-preventive metal primer and paint.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct
connections with flexible connectors.
3.6 ADJUSTING
C. Lubricate bearings.
3.7 CLEANING
A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction
debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum clean fan
wheel and cabinet.
3.8 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following operations and checks before startup,
and report results in writing:
1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel.
Adjust fan to indicated RPM.
2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
C. Refer to "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" Section for procedures for air-handling-system
testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions. Fix in
final position after balancing is achieved.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain centrifugal fan
units. Refer to Division 1.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 7 Section "Manufactured Roof Specialties" for roof curbs and equipment
supports.
2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for
vibration hangers and supports.
3. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control devices.
4. Division 16 Section "Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers" for disconnect
switches.
5. Division 16 Section "Motor-Control Centers" for starters and fusible switches.
C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include roof curbs for roof-mounted
exhaust fans.
C. Fan Unit Schedule: Performance requirements and data are described in equipment
schedule(s) on the Drawings.
D. Performance Criteria:
1. The fan schedule shows cubic feet per minute (CFM) and design static pressure.
2. Provide fans and motors capable of stable operation at design conditions and at ll0
percent pressure but not to exceed 185 Pa (3/4-inch) additional pressure.
3. Lower than design pressure drop of approved individual components may allow use
of a smaller fan motor and still provide the safety factor. When submitted as a
deviation a smaller motor may be approved in the interest of energy conservation.
a. Forward curved and axial fans: Right hand side of peak pressure point.
b. Airfoil, backward inclined or tubular: Near the peak of static efficiency.
E. Safety Criteria: Provide manufacturer's standard screen on fan inlet and discharge exposed
to operating and maintenance personnel.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data including rated capacities of each unit, weights (shipping, installed, and
operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and the following:
C. Coordination Drawings for roof penetration requirements and for reflected ceiling plans
drawn accurately to scale and coordinating penetrations and units mounted above ceiling.
Submit with Shop Drawings. Show the following:
D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating clearly
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
E. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements.
F. Maintenance data for power ventilators to include in the operation and maintenance manual
specified in Division 1.
A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that
are listed and labeled by UL where available.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
C. AMCA Compliance: Provide products that meet performance requirements and are licensed
to use the AMCA Seal.
D. NEMA Compliance: Provide components required as part of fans that comply with
applicable NEMA standards.
B. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are lubricated, and
fans have been commissioned.
A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete housekeeping pads. Cast anchor-bolt inserts
into pad. Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
C. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
A. Furnish one set of belts for each belt-driven fan that match products installed, are packaged
with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing
contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. General
1. Performance data for all fans and spare parts shall be determined in accordance with
the provisions of ASHRAE 51.
2. Sound pressure level ratings of ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301 and shall
be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300.
3. Sound pressure level ratings of non-ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301 and
shall be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300. Application of
sound pressure level ratings shall conform to AMCA 302. Unit construction shall
conform to applicable standards contained in AMCA 99 and to requirements
specified.
4. Safety provisions for power transmission equipment and non-ducted inlets and outlets
shall include guards and screens, unless other provisions are required, and shall be
constructed in accordance with applicable provisions of ASME B15.1. Installation
shall be such that fan vibration-isolation provisions are not negated.
5. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory.
B. Corrosion Protection: All steel shall be mill-galvanized, or phosphatized and coated with
minimum two coats, corrosion resistant enamel paint. Manufacturers paint and paint system
shall meet the minimum specifications of: ASTM D 1735 water fog; ASTM B 117 salt
spray; ASTM D 3359 adhesion; and ASTM G 23 weathermeter.
C. Bearings
1. Bearings shall be antifriction ball or roller type, unless otherwise specified, with
provisions for self-alignment and thrust-load requirements that may be imposed by
the service.
2. Bearings shall be constructed of vacuum degassed or processed steel alloys and shall
have a certified ABMA 9, L-10 minimum life expectancy rating of 200,000 hours.
Bearings shall have dusttight seals suitable for lubricant pressures encountered.
Housings shall be cast iron unless otherwise specified or approved.
3. Bearings shall be grease lubricated. Lubrication provisions shall preclude
overheating due to excess lubricant. Grease supply fittings shall be surface ball check
type. Where necessary, manual or automatic grease pressure relief fittings shall be
provided. Bearing and seal construction permitting, relief fittings shall be located on
the side opposite the supply fitting. Relief fittings shall be visible from normal
maintenance locations. Lubrication provisions shall include extension tubes where
necessary.
4. Bearings shall be dowelled in place with AISI 18-8 corrosion-resistant steel spiral
wrapped or split pins, unless otherwise specified or approved. Taper pins are not
acceptable.
5. Factory sealed antifriction bearings which conform to above specified materials and
ABMA 9, L-10 life expectancy requirements shall be provided for fans driven by
motors with a power rating of smaller than 1/2 horsepower (375 watt)
D. Drives:
6. Drives with motors over 40 horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be fixed-sheave,
high-capacity, supertype, with a service factor of not less than 1.5.
7. Belt drives shall be located outboard of bearings. Drive and driven shafts shall be
aligned by the four-point method.
8. Belt tension shall be adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
9. Alignment and final belt tensioning shall be performed in the presence of the
Engineer.
E. Belts:
A. Description: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings,
motor, drive assembly, and accessories.
B. Housings: Fabricated of steel with side sheets fastened with a deep lock seam or welded to
scroll sheets.
C. Fan Wheels: Single width, single inlet, welded to cast-iron or cast-steel hub and spun-steel
inlet cone, with hub keyed to shaft.
D. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel keyed to wheel hub.
E. Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings with
AFBMA 9, L-50 of 200,000 hours.
F. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
B. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece,
aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
F. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing, with the following
features:
1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel drive shaft keyed to wheel hub.
2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball
bearings.
3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust air stream.
B. Wind Band, Fan Housing, and Base: Reinforced and braced galvanized steel, containing
galvanized steel butterfly dampers and rain trough, motor and drive assembly, and fan
wheel.
C. Wind Band, Fan Housing, and Base: Reinforced and braced aluminum, containing
aluminum butterfly dampers and rain trough, motor and drive assembly, and fan wheel.
D. Fan Wheel: Replaceable, cast-aluminum blades fastened to cast-aluminum hub; factory set
pitch angle.
1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel drive shaft keyed to wheel hub.
2. Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball
bearings.
3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
4. Motor Mount: On outside of fan cabinet, adjustable base for belt tensioning.
G. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 50-mm thick, rigid, fiberglass
insulation adhered to inside walls; and 50-mm wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof
opening and fan base.
A. Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installing in ceiling, wall, duct, or for concealed
in-line applications.
C. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and
fan wheel shall be removable for service.
D. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle
for motor plug-in.
E. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 percent to less than
50 percent.
F. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard roof jack, wall cap, or duct collars, and transition
fittings.
A. Description: In-line, belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, outlet guide
vanes, fan shaft, bearings, drive assembly, motor and disconnect switch, mounting brackets,
and accessories.
B. Housing: Split, spun-aluminum housing, with aluminum straightening vanes; inlet and
outlet flanges; and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.
C. Direct-Drive Units: Motor encased in housing out of air stream, factory wired to disconnect
located on outside of fan housing.
D. Belt-Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure
around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside
of fan housing.
2.8 MOTORS
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory-installed motors.
1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating
Fan Sound Ratings From Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300,
"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA
Seal.
2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of
rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210,
"Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."
B. Fans used for smoke extract shall be UL listed and suitable for high smoke temperature of
260 deg. C (500 deg. F) for a minimum of four hours continuous operation.
C. Noise level of fans shall not exceed noise level specified for location of installation. The
overall efficiency shall be minimum 60%.
D. Fans utilized for kitchen extract shall be spark-resistant and suitable for kitchen operation.
Fans shall be UL and cUL listed for grease removal, tested under high temperature exhaust
of 190 deg. C (375 deg. F). Fans shall be tested in accordance with relevant NFPA
standard. Fan coating shall be as directed by the Engineer. Units shall include the
following:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements of installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of the power ventilators. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Support units using the vibration-control devices indicated. Vibration-control devices are
specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Control Controls and Seismic
Restraints."
1. Support utility set fans on concrete housekeeping bases or roof supports using
neoprene pads. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in housekeeping base.
2. Support utility set fans on concrete housekeeping bases or roof supports using housed
spring isolators. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in housekeeping base.
3. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware.
4. Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods, vibration
isolation springs, and seismic restraints.
5. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure using threaded rods or metal straps, and
neoprene washers.
1. Coordinate size of housekeeping bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct
base 100 mm larger, in both directions, than the overall dimensions of the supported
unit.
2. Form concrete pads with steel channels conforming to ASTM A 36M (ASTM A 36),
size and location as indicated. Miter and weld corner and provide cross bracing.
Anchor or key to floor slab.
3. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate
securing units.
4. Place concrete and allow to cure before installing units. Use portland cement
conforming to ASTM C 150, 27-MPa compressive strength, and normal-weight
aggregate.
5. Clean exposed steel form according to SSPC Surface Preparation Specifications SP 2
or SP 3 and apply 2 coats of rust-preventive metal primer and paint.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct
connections with flexible connectors.
3.6 ADJUSTING
C. Lubricate bearings.
3.7 CLEANING
A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction
debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum clean fan
wheel and cabinet.
3.8 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following operations and checks before startup,
and report results in writing:
1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel.
Adjust fan to indicated RPM.
2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
D. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures for air-
handling-system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
E. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions. Fix in
final position after balancing is achieved.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain power ventilator
units. Refer to Division 1 Section "[Demonstration and Training] [Closeout
Procedures]."
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
B. Definitions:
1. Air Handling Unit (AHU): A factory fabricated assembly consisting of fan, coils,
filters, and other necessary equipment to perform one or more of the following
functions of circulating, cleaning, heating, cooling, humidifying, dehumidifying, and
mixing of air. Design capacities of units shall be as scheduled on the drawings.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 15 Section "Vibration Control" for inertia bases, isolation bases, and
vibration isolation hangers and supports.
2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Insulation" for field-applied equipment insulation.
3. Division 15 Section "Humidifiers" for steam grid and evaporative humidifiers not an
integral part of central-station air-handling units specified in this Section.
4. Division 15 Section "Air Filters" for filters and housings not an integral part of
central-station air-handling units specified in this Section.
5. Division 16 Section "Disconnect Switches and Circuit Breakers" for field-installed
disconnect switches.
6. Division 16 Section "Motor Controllers" for field-mounted alternating-current
starters.
7. Division 16 Section "Motor-Control Centers" for motor-control centers used for
centralizing or grouping controls in building projects.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. The contractor shall furnish a complete submission for all air handling units covered in the
project. The submission shall include all information listed below. Partial and incomplete
submissions shall be rejected without reviews
1. Submittals for AHUs shall include fans, drives, motors, coils, humidifiers, sound
attenuators, mixing box with outside/return air dampers, filter housings, and all other
related accessories. The contractor shall provide custom drawings showing total air
handling unit assembly including dimensions, access sections, diffusion plates,
E. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
F. Coordination Drawings, including floor plans and sections drawn to scale. Submit with
Shop Drawings. Show mechanical-room layout and relationships between components and
adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and
weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.
G. Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance with specified
requirements. Submit written test procedures two weeks prior to factory testing. Submit
written results of factory tests for approval prior to shipping.
H. Maintenance data for central-station air-handling units to include in the operation and
maintenance manual specified in Division 1 Sections and Division 15 Section "Basic
Mechanical Requirements."
B. ARI Certification: Central-station air-handling units and their components shall be factory
tested according to the applicable portions of ARI 430, "Central-Station Air-Handling
Units," and shall be listed and bear the label of the Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration
Institute (ARI).
C. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide motors required as part of air-handling units that are
listed and labeled by UL and comply with applicable NEMA standards.
F. Non-ARI certified AHUs: If ARI certification is not available for the complete air handling
unit, compliance with the following minimum requirements shall be established for approval
and acceptance.
1. The individual components of the AHU shall be certified by the applicable standards,
that is, ASHRAE, AMCA, ARI, and UL, and shall bear the certification label.
2. All air handling units shall be factory tested prior to shipment, in accordance with
paragraph Test Procedure.
G. Performance Criteria:
1. Provide fans and motors capable of stable operation at design conditions and at
design liters per second (cubic feet per minute) and 110 percent pressure as stated
above.
2. Lower than design pressure drop of approved individual components may allow use
of a smaller fan motor and still provide the safety factor. When submitted as a
deviation, a smaller motor may be approved in the interest of energy conservation.
Such a deviation shall not qualify for any value engineering incentive claim or
reward.
3. Select fan operating point to right hand side of peak static pressure point and near the
peak of static efficiency.
4. Heating, Cooling, and Air Handling Capacity and Performance Standards: ARI 430,
ARI 410, ASHRAE 51, and AMCA 210.
5. Operating Limits: AMCA 99.
H. Condensation: During first year guarantee period, if condensation forms on any section of
air handler when unit is operating at design conditions, contractor shall replace or repair unit
to correct the situation. Repairs shall not impair unit or component accessibility and future
repairability and inherent access for maintenance.
B. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
base.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
C. Fan Belts: Furnish 1 set for each central-station air-handling unit fan.
D. Gaskets: Furnish 1 for each sectional joint of each central-station air-handling unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 GENERAL
A. General Description: Factory assembled, consisting of fans, motor and drive assembly,
coils, damper, plenums, filters, drip pans, and mixing dampers.
C. The contractor and the AHU manufacturer shall be responsible for insuring that the unit will
not exceed the allocated space shown on the drawings, including required clearances for
service and future overhaul or removal of unit components. All structural, piping, wiring,
and ductwork alterations of units, which are dimensionally different than those specified,
shall be the responsibility of the contractor at no additional cost.
D. AHUs shall be fully assembled by the manufacturer in the factory in accordance with the
arrangement shown on the drawings. The unit shall be assembled into the largest sections
possible subject to shipping and rigging restrictions. The correct fit of all components and
casing sections shall be verified in the factory for all units prior to shipment. Factory tested
units shall be fully assembled, tested and then split to accommodate shipment and job site
rigging. On units not shipped fully assembled, the manufacturer shall tag each section and
include air flow direction to facilitate assembly at the job site. Lifting lugs or shipping skids
shall be provided for each section to allow for field rigging and final placement of unit.
E. The AHU manufacturer shall provide the necessary gasketing, caulking, and all screws,
nuts, and bolts required for assembly. The manufacturer shall provide a local representative
at the job site to supervise the assembly and to assure the units are assembled to meet
manufacturer's recommendations and requirements noted on the drawings. Provide
documentation that this representative has provided this service on similar jobs to the
Contracting Officer. If a local representative cannot be provided, the manufacturer shall
provide a factory representative.
F. Gaskets: All door and panel gaskets shall be high quality which seal air tight and retain their
structural integrity and sealing capability after repeated assembly and disassembly of bolted
panels and opening and closing of hinged components. Bolted sections may use a more
permanent gasketing method provided they are not disassembled.
2.3 CABINET
A. Materials: Formed and reinforced galvanized steel panels, fabricated to allow removal for
access to internal parts and components, with joints between sections sealed.
B. Base:
1. Provide a heavy duty steel base for supporting all AHU major components. Bases
shall be constructed of wide-flange steel I-beams, channels, or minimum 152 mm (6
inch) high 3.5 mm (10 gauge) steel base rails. Welded or bolted cross members shall
be provided as required for lateral stability. Contractor shall provide supplemental
steel supports as required to obtain proper operation heights for cooling coil condense
drain trap and steam coil condensate return trap as shown on drawings.
2. AHUs shall be completely self supporting for installation on concrete housekeeping
pad, steel support pedestals, or suspended as shown on drawings.
3. The AHU bases not constructed of galvanized material shall be cleaned, primed with
a rust inhibiting primer, and finished with a rust inhibiting exterior enamel.
C. Insulation: Coated, glass-fiber insulation, complying with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," for insulation.
D. Floor:
1. Unit floor shall be level without offset space or gap and designed to support a
minimum of 488 kg/square meter (100 pounds per square foot) distributed load
without permanent deformation or crushing of internal insulation. Provide adequate
structural base members beneath floor in service access sections to support typical
service foot traffic and to prevent damage to unit floor or internal insulation. Unit
floors in casing sections, which may contain water or condensate, shall be watertight
with drain pan.
2. Thermal Conductance (C): Maximum overall thermal conductance of casing floors
shall not exceed 0.68 W/square meter. K (0.12 Btu/(h. square feet. degree F).
3. Where indicated, furnish and install floor drains, flush with the floor, with nonferrous
grate cover and stub through floor for external connection.
E. Access Panels and Doors: Provide in each access section and where shown on drawings.
Doors shall be a minimum of 50 mm (2 inches) thick with same double wall construction as
the unit casing. Doors shall be a minimum of 600 mm (24 inches) wide and shall be the full
casing height up to a maximum of 1850 mm (6 feet). Doors shall be gasketed, hinged, and
latched to provide an airtight seal. Each door shall include a minimum 150 mm x 150 mm (6
inch x 6 inch) double thickness reinforced glass or Plexiglas window in a gasketed frame.
1. Fan section shall have inspection and access panels and doors sized and located to
allow periodic maintenance and inspections.
2. Gaskets: Neoprene, continuous around door, positioned for direct compression with
no sliding action between the door and gasket. Secure with high quality mastic to
eliminate possibility of gasket slipping or coming loose.
3. Latches: Non-corrosive alloy construction, with operating levers for positive cam
action, operable from either inside or outside. Doors that do not open against unit
operating pressure shall be provided with safety "Vent lock"-style latches, which
allow the door to open approximately 75 mm (3 inches) and then require
approximately 0.785 radian (45 degrees) further movement of the handle for
complete opening. Latch shall be capable of restraining explosive opening of door
with a force equal to a minimum of 2986 Pa (12 inches water) of differential static
pressure or 1-1/2 times operating differential pressure whichever is greater.
F. Drain Pans: Formed sections of galvanized steel sheet. Fabricate pans in sizes and shapes
to collect condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections and return
bends) and humidifiers when units are operating at maximum catalogued face velocity
across cooling coil.
1. Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with foam insulation and seal
moisture tight.
2. Drain Connections: Both ends of pan.
3. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Elastomeric compound.
4. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan or drain trough to
collect condensate from top coil.
G. Provide sealed sleeves, metal or plastic escutcheons or grommets for penetrations through
casing for power and temperature control wiring and pneumatic tubing. Coordinate number
and location with electrical and temperature control subcontractors. Coordinate lights,
switches, and duplex outlets and disconnect switch location and mounting. All penetrations
and equipment mounting may be provided in the factory or in the field under AHU’s
manufacturer supervision. All field penetrations shall be performed neatly by drilling or saw
cutting. No cutting by torches will be allowed. Neatly seal all openings airtight.
B. Housings: Fabricate from formed- and reinforced-steel panels to form curved scroll
housings with shaped cutoff, spun-metal inlet bell, and access doors or panels to allow entry
to internal parts and components.
C. Fan Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous
operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor power. Fan wheel shall be double-width,
double-inlet type with backward-curved airfoil blades.
1. Airfoil Wheel: Steel; with smooth, curved inlet flange; back plate; die-formed,
hollow, airfoil blades; and cast-iron or cast-steel hub.
2. Shafts: Hot-rolled steel; turned, ground, and polished, and having keyway to secure
to fan wheel hub.
3. Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball or
roller bearings with the following:
4. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
5. Pulleys: Cast iron or steel with split, tapered bushing, dynamically balanced at
factory.
6. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch, selected so pitch adjustment is at middle of
adjustment range at fan design conditions.
7. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched for multiple belt drives.
8. Belt Guards: Fabricate to OSHA/SMACNA requirements, 0.1046 inch (2.7 mm)
thick, 3/4-inch (20-mm) diamond-mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or
equivalent, prime coated.
10. Vibration Control: Install fans on open-spring vibration isolators, minimum 1-inch
(25-mm) static deflection, with side snubbers.
D. Fan-Section Source Quality Control: The following factory tests are required.
1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating
Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300,
"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Fans shall bear AMCA-
certified sound ratings seal.
2. Factory test fan performance for flow rate, pressure, power, air density, rotation
speed, and efficiency. Establish ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory
Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."
E. Fan Power Level: Mean sound pressure level at 1.5 m from fan casing inlet not ducted in
free field conditions is not to exceed 81 dBA, spectrum of sound pressure at 1.5 m from fan
casing is not to exceed the following:
PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - Octave Pass Band (Hz) 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000
8000
2.1 MOTORS
C. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will
not require motor to operate in service factor range.
E. Service Factor: 1.15 for polyphase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors.
1. Bases: Adjustable.
L. Fan Motor and Drive For Variable Frequency Drive Types: Motors shall be energy efficient
type and suitable for use in variable frequency drive applications on AHUs where this type
of drive is indicated. Where variable frequency drives (VFD) are required they shall be
compatible with fan and motor.
N. Starters, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in
Division 16 Sections.
2.2 COILS
A. Coil Sections: Common or individual, insulated, galvanized steel casings for heating and
cooling coils. Design and construct to facilitate removal and replacement of coil for
maintenance and to assure full airflow through coils.
1. Multizone Units: Provide air deflectors and air baffles to balance airflow across
coils.
B. Coil Construction: Rigidly supported across full face, pitched to allow drainage.
C. Water Coils: Drainable with threaded plugs, serpentine with return bends in smaller sizes
and with return headers in larger sizes.
E. Coil-Performance Tests: Factory-test cooling and heating coils, except sprayed surface coils
for rating according to ARI 410, "Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils."
2.3 DAMPERS
A. General: Leakage rate, according to AMCA 500, "Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and
Shutters," shall not exceed 2 percent of air quantity at 2000-fpm (10-m/s) face velocity
through damper and 4-inch wg (1000-Pa) pressure differential.
B. Mixing Boxes: Outdoor air and return air dampers in opposed blade arrangement with
damper linkage for automatic operation. Connect operating rods with common linkage and
interconnect linkages so dampers operate simultaneously Dampers shall be of low leak
design with metal compressible bronze jamb seals and extruded vinyl edge seals on all
blades. Blades shall rotate on stainless steel sleeve bearings or bronze bushings. Maximum
damper length shall be 1500 mm (60 inches). Leakage rate shall not exceed 2.5 cubic
meters/min/square meter (8 cfm per square foot) at 250 Pa (1 inch water) and 3.7 cubic
meters/min/square meter (12 cfm per square foot) at 995 Pa (4 inches water) Electronic
operators shall be furnished and mounted in an accessible and easily serviceable location by
the air handling unit manufacturer at the factory. Damper operators shall be of same
manufacturer as controls.
C. Filter Section: Provide filter media holding frames arranged for flat or angular orientation,
with access doors on both sides of unit.
D. Permanent Filters: Cleanable, 2 inches (50 mm) thick, with aluminum- or stainless-steel
media and stainless-steel frames, clean airflow resistance of 0.10 inch wg (25 Pa) at face
velocity of 500 fpm (2.54 m/s), and ASHRAE 52.1 filter-arrestance efficiency of 60 to 80
percent.
E. Extended – surface disposable panel filters: refer to Division 15 Section "Air Filters."
A. Vapor-proof lights using cast aluminum base style with glass globe and cast aluminum
guard shall be installed in each access section. A switch shall control the lights in each
compartment with pilot light mounted outside the respective compartment access door.
Wiring between switches and lights shall be factory installed. All wiring shall run in neatly
installed electrical conduits and terminate in a junction box for field connection to the
building system. Provide single point 220 volt - one phase connection at junction box.
D. Disconnect switch and power wiring: Provide factory or field mounted disconnect switch.
Coordinate with Electrical Specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions to receive equipment, for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of central-station air-handling units.
C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service
and maintenance.
A. Coordinate size of housekeeping bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct base 4
inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than overall dimensions of supported unit.
B. Form concrete bases with framing lumber with form-release compounds. Chamfer top edge
and corners of base.
C. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate
securing units.
D. Place concrete and allow to cure before installing units. Use portland cement conforming to
ASTM C 150, 4000-psig (27.6-MPa) compressive strength, and normal-weight aggregate.
E. Clean exposed steel form according to SSPC-SP 2 or SSPC-SP 3 and apply 2 coats of rust-
preventive metal primer.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. The Drawings
indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are
specific connection requirements:
B. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final
duct connections with flexible connections.
1. Connect fan motors to wiring systems and to ground. Tighten electrical connectors
and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where
manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and
UL 486B.
2. Temperature control wiring and interlock wiring is specified in Division 15 Section
"Control Systems Equipment."
3.5 ADJUSTING
3.6 CLEANING
A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction
debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean
fan wheels, cabinets, and coils entering air face.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel.
Adjust fan to indicated rpm.
2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan
performance.
D. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air-handling system
testing, adjusting, and balancing.
3.8 TESTING
A. General:
1. ARI certified AHUs: The Engineer will determine the AHUs that shall be factory
assembled and tested prior to shipment. The tested units shall be shipped prior to any
untested units.
2. Non-ARI certified AHUs: All units shall be factory assembled and tested.
3. Units specified to be tested shall be factory assembled and tested in accordance with
specified Test Procedure to demonstrate compliance with required unit capacities,
ensure correct fit of all components and minimize field assembly labor.
B. Factory Test:
1. General: The test procedure, instrumentation and calculation shall use those methods
specified in Specification Section “TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING”,
however test methods including instruments used must be submitted and approved by
The Engineer prior to initiating testing. The AHUs shall be tested for air volume,
static pressure for AHU and each component, fan RPM and power consumption for
the maximum of present or future design conditions and noise criteria. Submit fan
curves showing test results.
2. Test Procedure (Airflow):
a. Provide straight runs of full size ducts at inlet and discharge of AHU with
lengths equal to 2-1/2 times fan diameter and with volume dampers to adjust
static pressure located at ends. Locate a four-point static pressure sensor 2/3 the
distance down the discharge duct and connected to an inclined manometer to
be used to measure external static pressure.
b. Six static pressure tap sensors shall be located on both entering and leaving
sides of cooling coil and a Meriam micro manometer used to read cooling coil
pressure drop. Unit cubic meters per minute (cubic feet per minute) may be
determined by dry coil air friction curve.
c. Adjust dampers to compensate for variations in pressure drops due to clean vs.
dirty filters, dry vs. wet cooling coils, and as required to simulate fan design
conditions.
d. Drain connections shall be plugged. Piped connection openings shall be sealed.
e. Correct cubic meters per minute (cubic feet per minute), static pressure and
watts (horsepower) to standard air conditions of 1.2 kg/cubic meter (0.075 lbs.
per cubic foot) density, 21 oC (70 oF) temperature, and 101 kPa (29.92 in. Hg)
barometric pressure at sea level. Measure supply air wet bulb and dry bulb
temperatures. Obtain barometric pressure readings from local airport.
f. Determine fan motor watts (horsepower) consumption by use of wattmeter,
voltmeter, ammeter and obtaining motor efficiency from manufacturer. Refer
to standard testing and balancing procedure. Determine fan RPM by use of
tachometer.
g. Obtain values for the items in the following formula. (Fan Total Static Pressure
= External Static Pressure + Specified Internal Losses + Unspecified Internal
Losses). Refer to AHU schedule on the drawings for additional information.
C. Approval:
1. Tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer and owner representative. Contractor shall
provide the Engineer with a minimum two-week notice prior to proposed schedule
test.
2. Failure of AHU to meet test requirements shall require correction of deficiency and
re-testing of unit.
3. Submit written results of factory tests for approval prior to shipping.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
1. Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Contract Closeout."
2. Schedule training with Owner, through Engineer, with at least 7 days' advance notice.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.
1. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall
vents, whether or not they are connected to ducts.
2. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-
control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.
3. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for balancing diffusers,
registers, and grilles.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in the
ceiling and comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions
and planes and arranged to promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air.
B. Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which can be
located in a sidewall, ceiling, or floor.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate
construction, finish, and mounting details.
2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings for
each type of air outlet and inlet.
3. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation, room
location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
4. Assembly Drawing: For each type of air outlet and inlet; indicate materials and
methods of assembly of components.
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and wall elevations drawn to scale to show
locations and coordination of diffusers, registers, and grilles with other items installed in
ceilings and walls.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer’s color charts showing the full range of colors
available for diffusers, registers, and grilles with factory-applied color finishes.
B. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A,
"Standard for the Installation of air-conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Use grilles where shown in unfinished areas, fabricate grille with 2 x 2 mesh 13 mm (1/2
inch) aluminum hardware cloth in a spot welded galvanized steel frame with approximately
40 mm (1-1/2 inch) margin.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service
and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as
directed, before starting air balancing.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed
surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that
have damaged finishes.
3. Material: Aluminum.
4. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Engineer.
5. Number and spacing of slots: As shown on drawings.
6. Maximum Noise-Criterion Rating: NC30.
7. Face Style: Linear.
8. Mounting: Flush or flanged
9. Dampers: Hit and miss.
10. Accessories: Include the following:
3. Material: Aluminum.
4. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Engineer.
5. Width: As shown on drawings.
6. Spacing: As shown on drawings.
7. Maximum Noise-Criterion Rating: NC30.
8. Face Style: Linear bar.
9. Mounting: Flush or flanged.
10. Patterns: Fixed 30º deflection.
11. Accessories: Include the following:
a. Mitered corners.
b. Single blade damper.
c. Insulated plenum for supply and return diffuser of dimensions as shown on
drawings.
d. Black finish blank-offs on dummy diffusers.
a. Titus.
3. Material: Aluminum.
4. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Engineer.
5. Size: As shown on drawings.
6. Maximum Noise-Criterion Rating: NC30.
7. Face Style: Linear.
8. Mounting: Flush or flanged.
9. Patterns: Down blow supply/return – horizontal and vertical discharge pattern,
suitable for heating and cooling air distribution.
10. Dampers: Opposed blade.
11. Accessories: Include the following:
a. Mitered corners.
b. Insulated plenum for supply and return diffuser of dimensions as shown on
drawings.
c. Black finish blank-offs on dummy diffusers.
3. Material: Aluminum.
4. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Engineer.
5. Duct Connection: Round or square.
6. Duct Connection Size: As shown on drawings.
7. Face Size: To suit acoustic tile size and to the approval of Engineer.
8. Maximum Noise-Criterion Rating: NC30.
9. Face Style: Round, square or rectangular as shown on drawings.
10. Perforated face type: Manual adjustment for 1, 2, 3, or 4 way horizontal air
distribution pattern without change of air volume or pressure. Provide equalizing or
control grid and opposed blade over overlapping blade damper.
11. Mounting: Surface mount.
12. Patterns: Adjustable and one way, or 2 way, or 3 way, or 4 way as shown on
drawings.
13. Dampers: Opposed blade.
14. Accessories: Include the following:
a. Equalizer deflectors.
b. Extractor.
c. Operating keys.
3.6 REGISTER
3. Material: Aluminum.
4. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Engineer.
5. Face Blade Arrangement: Fixed horizontal for return and exhaust registers.
6. Rear Blade Arrangement: Adjustable vertical for supply registers.
7. Frame: 1 inch (25 mm) wide.
8. Mounting: Countersunk screw.
9. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed-blade assembly.
10. Accessories: Include plaster frame.
3.7 GRILLE
3. Material: Aluminum.
4. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Engineer.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes factory-fabricated air-filter devices and media used to remove
particulate matter from air for HVAC applications.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include dimensions; shipping, installed, and operating weights; required
clearances and access; rated flow capacity, including initial and final pressure drop at rated
airflow; efficiency and test method; fire classification; furnished specialties; and accessories
for each model indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details to illustrate component
assemblies and attachments.
C. Maintenance Data: For each type of filter and rack to include in maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of air
filters and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers systems with
equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Substitutions."
C. ASHRAE Compliance: Comply with provisions of ASHRAE 52.1 for method of testing
and rating air-filter units.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Provide one complete set of filters for each filter bank. If system includes prefilters,
provide only prefilters.
2. Provide one container of red oil for inclined manometer filter gage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
a. AAF International.
b. Airguard Industries, Inc.
c. Barnebey & Sutcliffe Corp.
d. Columbus Industries, Inc.
e. Continental Air Filter Div.; NiCon Filter Corp.
f. Farr Co.
g. Flanders Filters, Inc.
h. International Air Filter, Inc.
i. Koch Filter Corp.
j. Research Products Corp.
2. Filter Gages:
C. Frame: Galvanized steel with metal grid on outlet side, steel rod grid on inlet side, hinged,
and with pull and retaining handles.
D. Duct-Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners and suitable
for bolting together into built-up filter banks.
B. Media: Fibrous material constructed so individual pleats are maintained in tapered form by
flexible internal supports under rated-airflow conditions. The filter media shall have an
average efficiency of 80 – 85% on ASHRAE 52.1 – 92 and shall have an average arrestance
of not less than 98% on that standard.
D. Duct-Mounting Frames: Welded galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners, and suitable
for bolting together into built-up filter banks.
A. Framing System: Aluminum framing members with access for either upstream (front) or
downstream (rear) filter servicing, cut to size and prepunched for assembly into modules.
Vertically support filters prevent deflection of horizontal members without interfering with
either filter installation or operation.
C. Sealing: Factory-installed, positive-sealing device for each row of filters to ensure seal
between gasketed filter elements to prevent bypass of unfiltered air.
D. Sealing: Incorporate positive-sealing gasket material on channels to seal top and bottom of
filter cartridge frames to prevent bypass of unfiltered air.
A. Description: Diaphragm type with dial and pointer in metal case, vent valves, black figures
on white background, and front recalibration adjustment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Position each filter unit with clearance for normal service and maintenance. Anchor filter
holding frames to substrate.
E. Install filter gage static-pressure tips upstream and downstream from filters to measure
pressure drop through filter. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum
in an accessible position. Adjust and level inclined gages.
3.3 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling and
air-distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filter media.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The BMS sub-contractor shall provide the Building Management System (BMS), shall
implement all features called for in this specification and shall implement the necessary
sequences for satisfactory operation of the system.
B. The Building Management System sub-contractor shall be responsible for the integration of
the BMS with the other low voltage building systems as detailed hereafter in Scope of
Works, drawings and the remainder of specifications.
C. The BMS sub-contractor shall be a sub-consultant to the mechanical contractor and shall be
a BMS specialist and meet the requirements of section 1.17 "BMS installer qualifications".
1.4 ABBREVIATIONS
1.5 DEFINITIONS
C. BACNet: The Building Automation and Control Network open protocol communication
standard developed by ASHRAE (ASHRAE SSPC/135) and which is now an ISO and
ANSI standard. BACNet can operate over multi media including Ethernet, ArcNet and
MSTP. The BACNet components shall be fully compliant with British standards DD ENV
1805-1:1998 (Data communication for HVAC Application Management Net. Building
automation and control networking), DD ENV 13321-1:1999 (Data communication for
HVAC application automation net. BACNet, Profibus, World FIP), ASHRAE BACNet
standard SSPC/135 and all other applicable codes.
D. BACnet Object: A physical or virtual point with a set of associated properties such as a
temperature sensor that has properties including, name, current value, maximum and
minimum values, high and low alarm levels, etc.
G. BACnet/IP: The building automation and control network open protocol communication
standard which complies with Annex J to the ASHRAE SSPC/135 standard.
H. Binary: A two-state system where a high signal level represents an “ON” condition and an
"OFF" condition is represented by a low signal level.
I. BMS: This shall mean the complete Building Management System including the
components at the Field, Automation and Management Levels.
J. Component: Any individual element of the BMS furnished under this sub-contract including
hardware, software and materials.
K. Control Wiring: This includes conduit, wire, and wiring devices to install complete HVAC
control systems, including motor control circuits, interlocks, sensors, PE and EP switches,
and like devices. This also includes all wiring from node to node, and nodes to all sensors
and points defined in the I/O summary shown on drawings or specified herein, and required
to execute the sequence of operation. Does not include line voltage power wiring.
L. Diagnostic Program: Machine-executable instructions used to detect and isolate system and
component malfunctions.
O. Furnish: Purchase and deliver to the appropriate installing sub-contractor, complete with
every appurtenance, document, commission and warranty.
P. Gateway: A device that contains an input/output (I/O) software driver to translate input data
from one communications protocol to output data in a second communications protocol.
R. Integration: Establishing communication and meaningful data transfer between two devices
based on a standard protocol or through the use of a standards based gateway.
S. Interoperability: The ability of systems from different manufacturers and of different types
to share information with each other without losing any of their independent functional
capabilities and without the need for complex programming.
U. LonMarked: Device has been certified for compliance with LonMark standards by the
LonMark association.
X. Native BACnet: This term is used to imply that BACnet devices (i.e. the BMS controllers
and workstation) only communicate in BACnet protocol and do not require a gateway for
protocol conversion. The BACnet devices shall be connected on a peer-to-peer network
using one of the approved LAN technologies such as Ethernet, ARCNET, MS/TP, LonTalk
or BACnet/IP.
Y. Network: A system of distributed control units that are linked together on a communication
bus. A network allows sharing of point information between all control units. Additionally,
a network provides central monitoring and control of the entire system from any distributed
control unit location.
Z. Operating System (OS): Software that controls the execution of computer programs and
which provides scheduling, debugging, input/output controls, accounting, compilation,
storage assignment, data management, and related services.
AA. Operator Interface Workstation (OIW): The OIW consists of a high-level processing
personal computer and peripheral I/O devices that enable access to the PC and to the entire
Management Level Network.
BB. Peer-to-Peer Communication: Communication directly between devices that operate on the
same communications level of a network, without intervention from any intermediary
devices such as a host or server.
CC. Peripheral I/O: Input/Output (I/O) equipment used to communicate to and from the
computer and make hard copies of system outputs and magnetic files. Peripherals include
VDU, printers, hard drives, disk drives, and modems, etc.
DD. Portable Operator Terminal (POT): Permits remote operator interface to facilitate network
management, node commissioning, diagnostics, and general operator interface with the
BMS.
EE. Programmable Device: A device that does not have a pre-established built in application.
An application creation software tool is required for an application to be created and
downloaded to the device.
FF. Provide: Furnish, install, commission, test and warrant. Refer to the definition of “furnish”.
GG. Router: A device that routes messages destined for a node on another segment sub-net or
domain of the control network. The device controls message traffic based on node address
and priority. Media converters which serve as communication links between power line,
twisted pair, fibre, coax, and RF media are sometimes referred to as Routers.
HH. Standard Network Variable Type (SNVT): LonWorks controllers use SNVTs to define data
objects. Each SNVT is identified by a code number that the receiving controller can use to
determine how to interpret the information presented.
II. Standing Standard Project Committee (SSPC): ASHRAE terminology for a technical
committee that oversees the maintenance of a standard.
JJ. Software: Generic term used for those components of the computer systems that are
intangible rather than physical. The term "software" is used to refer to the programs
executed by the computer systems as distinct from the physical hardware of the computer
systems and encompasses any programs such as operating systems, applications programs,
operating sequences and databases. The term "software" shall be interpreted to include
firmware if, in the context in which it is used, the term "software" does not exclude the use
of read-only memory and the use of firmware meets all of the applicable criteria detailed in
these specifications.
KK. Thin Client: Thin client technology involves delivering windows applications to client
workstations from a centrally based server. The thin client workstation has the ability to
process information but data storage, applications and administrative functions reside on the
terminal server. The applications run on the server and screen updates are sent from the
server to the client. The thin client workstation displays the screen updates and sends
operator entered requests/commands via the keyboard and mouse back to the server for
execution.
LL. Unitary Controller: A controller generally designed for a specific application and for a
single piece of equipment. They are generally of two types: application specific and
“freely” programmable. The “freely” programmable unitary controllers shall be provided
for this project.
MM. Virtual Private Network (VPN): This is a network that uses encryption and other
technologies to provide secure communications over the Internet or an Intranet.
NN. XIF: “External Interface File” contains the contents of the manufacturer’s product
documentation.
OO. XML/SOAP: Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP) is a simple eXtensible Mark-up
Language (XML) based protocol that enables applications to exchange information over
HTTP. Or more simply: SOAP is a protocol for accessing a Web Service.
1) When they are in upper case, when they are in lower case and when they are
capitalized.
2) In the singular and in the plural.
3) In all grammatical tenses.
A. The following is a description of the BMS architecture. This description is not intended to
indicate the number of components and neither is it intended to be the only acceptable BMS
configuration. The description of the system architecture is provided to illustrate the
relationship between the various components. Different BMS Specialists may have a
slightly different topology that generally will be acceptable provided that it meets the intent
of these specifications. For the purpose of describing the BMS system architecture it is
divided into 3 levels:
7) The Communications Controls Panels (CCP) shall be part of the Management Level
Network.
8) As an exception, certain of the CCP shall be at the Automation Level rather than the
Management Level. If a third party system provides monitoring and control for
equipment that is also monitored and controlled by a BMS DDC controller (such as
chillers for example), then the gateway between the third party system and the BMS
shall be at the Automation Level.
a. The third party ELV Building System Specialist shall provide the interface /
gateway, and shall connect the gateway to the data port at the third party
Building System and shall provide complete documentation to the BMS
Specialist.
b. The gateway shall be a BACnet to third party protocol gateway.
c. The BMS Specialist shall connect the gateway to the BMS Automation Level
Network and shall map the BACnet object to the associated DDC controllers.
d. The BMS Specialist shall provide the third party Specialist with the BACnet
objects for information that is to be transferred from the BMS Automation
Level Network to the third party system controller together with other relevant
information.
e. The third party Specialist shall map the points into the third party system
controller.
f. The BMS Specialist shall map the BACnet object IDs of the third party system
points into the servers. These points shall be treated in exactly the same
manner as any points monitored/controlled by the BMS control panels directly.
1) The automation level shall, primarily, include the DDC controllers that interface with
the field sensors and final control elements. It is anticipated that there will be 2 types
of DDC controllers within the BMS architecture:
1) The Field Level shall include the instrumentation interfaced to the Automation Level
DDC controllers such as the temperature, humidity, level, pressure sensors and
switches etc.
2) It shall also include the final control elements such as the valve and damper actuators
and the control relays.
3) All field level cables shall be in containment and shall be screened and LSF rated.
4) The control and monitoring signals between the Automation Level controllers and the
Field Level components shall be via industry standard analogue ranges, except where
detailed below, such as 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 4 to 20 mA, switched 0 and 5V, switched 0
and 10V, etc.
A. Provide a complete BMS turnkey installation as detailed in the sections of this specification.
The BMS shall comprise at minimum, the following components:
B. Map the BACnet objects into the servers, and present data for the third party ELV Building
Systems that are integrated at the BMS Automation Level.
1) Computer based.
2) Fully networked.
3) Real time.
4) Distributed processing.
5) No single point of failure.
D. All components of the BMS at the BMS Management level and at the BMS Automation
Level, except for the unitary controllers, shall operate on UPS. The UPS shall be provided
by the BMS Specialist.
E. The components furnished shall be the most recent products offered by the BMS
manufacturer that meet the specifications. If there are improved models of any components
that become available before the on-site commencement of installation then these shall be
offered by the BMS Specialist to the Employer at no additional cost to the Employer. The
Employer shall have the option to accept or decline the offer. The components offered shall
F. The BMS Specialist shall provide all software licenses necessary for the legal operation of
the BMS.
H. Provide the following support for all components furnished under this sub-contract:
A. The BMS Contractor shall coordinate the work of this contract with the work of all other
trades on the project.
B. Any task related to the BMS turnkey installation that is not clearly identified in this
document as being the responsibility of another trade shell be the responsibility of the BMS
Contractor.
B. Network architecture shall allow unlimited expandability by the addition of new sub
networks and associated routers, gateways, etc.
1) A minimum of 200 percent additional hardware (field) points with the addition of
CCP, DCP and UC.
2) A minimum of 200 percent additional system diagrams in addition to those required
to meet these specifications.
3) A minimum of X No. additional Operator Interface Workstations.
4) A minimum of X No. additional interfaces to low voltage building systems of a
similar nature to those integrated under this contract.
1) The BMS performance shall not be degraded in any manner and shall meet all
performance criteria detailed in these specifications.
2) Equipment installed under this sub-contract shall not become redundant as a result of
implementing these BMS expansion requirements.
A. Prepare an itemized listing of all shop drawings and equipment documentation submittal
data for the Project including all required submissions identified throughout the Contract
Documents. The itemized listing shall include a shop drawing sheet number or equipment
documentation submittal number, reference to the specific Specification section and
description of the shop drawing or equipment documentation submittal item. Submit the
itemized listing within two (2) weeks after commencing work.
B. Prepare all shop drawings, diagrams, equipment and device schedules, equipment technical
data sheets and software information necessary to ensure compliance with the
Specifications. Submit all shop drawings and equipment documentation submittal data for
the work within 1 months of receiving the notice to proceed except the cable and
containment shop drawings detailed below which shall be submitted within 15 days of the
notice to proceed.
C. The following information shall be included on the cover page for each shop drawing and
equipment documentation submittal:
1) Project name.
2) Date.
3) Submittal number and re-submittal (revision) number as appropriate.
4) Name and address of Engineer.
5) Name and address of Employer.
6) Name and address of BMS contractor.
7) Name and address of supplier or vendor if appropriate.
8) Name of manufacturer.
9) Reference to the applicable Specification Section by name and number.
10) Stamped and signed coordination certification stamp.
D. Shop drawings shall be CAD generated, minimum A1 plot size. Drawings shall include
diagrams, mounting instructions, installation procedures, equipment details and software
descriptions for all aspects of the system to be installed. At minimum, the shop drawings
shall include:
1.11 SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment submittals shall include design, performance and installation details for all
aspects of the system to be installed. At minimum, the equipment documentation submittals
shall include:
B. The BMS contractor shall not implement Operating sequences until the Engineer has given
approval. The BMS contractor shall make any changes to the operating sequences as
requested at the shop drawing stage and as requested by the Engineer following their
implementation up to the issue of the Certificate of Substantial Completion at no additional
cost to the Employer.
D. Comply with the requirements of the specifications. Any deviations from the specifications
will not be allowed. Submittals not in accordance with the specification requirements shall
be rejected. Before equipment, devices and materials are installed, they shall have
submittals that are stamped by the Engineer “Approved” or “Approved as Noted”.
Submittals stamped “Approved” or “Approved as Noted” shall not relieve the contractor
from the requirements to comply with the complete requirements of the Specifications.
Corrections or modifications to the work because of errors and/or omissions shall be at the
contractor’s expense.
E. Each submittal shall be reviewed, stamped and certified by the contractor prior to
submission to the Engineer. The certification shall be in the form of a rubber stamp that
states: "I hereby certify that the equipment shown on this shop drawing, product data and or
sample, complies in all respects with the requirements of the Specifications for this Project.
I further certify that all data shown hereon as to performance, dimensions, construction,
materials and other pertinent items is true and correct."
Signed:
Position:
Date:
A. The warranty period for all components of the BMS and their installation shall be 2 years
following the date of completion of the project.
B. Any material furnished by the BMS contractor which is defective or fails during normal
operation of the system, shall be remedied (replaced or repaired) immediately by the BMS
Contractor at no additional cost to the Employer, during the period prior to the issue of the
certificate of completion, and during the warranty period.
D. Repair work shall not include routine maintenance during the Defects Liability Period. The
cost of providing routine maintenance during the Defects Liability Period shall be provided
separately as an Optional Price as detailed below.
E. Respond and be on site within 4 hours of the Engineer and/or Employer placing a system
trouble call for items of an immediate nature (e.g.: failed component, non-functioning
controller, etc.).
F. Response to warranty call out by the Engineer and/or Employer shall be within 24 hours for
items not requiring immediate attention.
G. Work to troubleshoot and identify the cause of the BMS system or component failure shall
begin immediately and shall continue until repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer and
Employer.
H. Any software upgrades and new software programs that become standard product offerings
from the BMS Specialist and/or BMS equipment vendors during the Defects Liability
Period shall be brought to the attention of the Employer together with the cost and, if the
Employer wishes, he shall purchase the software. If at any time during the Defects Liability
Period, software patches that correct software errors become available the Employer shall be
notified immediately and they shall be made available to the Employer at no additional cost.
A. Submit an alternate price to provide routine maintenance services during the initial warranty
period. Provide the pricing as an add-on price not included in the base tender pricing. The
maintenance services shall cover routine preventative maintenance and shall not include
emergency maintenance or the cost of materials that are to be covered by the warranty.
B. Schedule maintenance and repair works with the employer’s representative to prevent
interference with normal building activities.
C. During routine maintenance components of the BMS shall be selectively inspected and
serviced during the Defects Liability Period. Provide, at minimum, preventative service
inspections at least once every 3 months during the Defects Liability Period. Perform, at
minimum, the following during each preventative service inspection:
a. Cooling fans
b. Power supplies
c. PC diagnostics
D. The routine maintenance services during the Defects Liability Period shall include 20 hours
per year of programming changes to the BMS as requested by the Employer.
F. Detail the minimum number of hours to be spent on routine maintenance during the Defects
Liability Period in the tender submittal.
G. The BMS Specialist shall maintain an inventory of common components in the local office
for the replacement of failed components as detailed under “Spare Parts”.
H. Provide replacement components within the specified time periods for the following
components. The Specialist shall guarantee to the Employer that the delivery of
replacement components will be provided within the specified time periods.
I. During the Defects Liability Period the BMS Specialist shall maintain a minimum of 10%
spare DCP, CCP and UC of each type installed on site under this contract. At the end of the
Defects Liability Period the BMS Specialist shall hand over DCP, CCP and UC of each type
to the Employer which shall, at minimum, be equal to 10% of the number of installed DCP,
CCP and UC of each type installed on site under this contract.
J. During the Defects Liability Period the BMS Specialist shall maintain a minimum of 10%
spare sensors of each type installed on site under this contract. At the end of the Defects
Liability Period the BMS Specialist shall hand over sensors of each type to the Employer,
which shall, at minimum, be equal to 10% of the number of installed sensors of each type
installed on Site under this contract.
A. Submit an Optional price to extend the Defects Liability Period and the maintenance during
that period for ten (10) one (1) year periods. The maintenance service contract shall be an
all-inclusive labor and parts contract but the Employer reserves the right to obtain parts from
alternative sources.
B. The requirements during each additional year shall be exactly the same as those detailed in
Part 1.10 "making good defects during the defects liability period" and part 1.11 "routine
maintenance during the defects liability period (optional price)".
C. The BMS Specialist shall enter into a direct contract with the Employer to provide the
maintenance services for a minimum period of ten (10) years. The Employer shall have the
option to renew each year if the Employer so wishes. The BMS Specialist shall submit the
cost for the maintenance service agreement in one of the following ways:
1. A fixed price for a ten (10) year Agreement with a break-out between labor and parts,
OR
2. A fixed price for the first year of the ten (10) year Agreement with a break-out
between labor and parts for the first year and:
a. A percent value or a table of percent values that the labor portion of the cost
would be escalated at during the succeeding nine (9) years
b. And a percent value or a table of percent values that the parts portion of the
cost would be escalated at during the succeeding nine (9) years, Or
3. A fixed price for the first year of the ten (10) year Agreement with a break-out
between labor and parts for the first year with the annual increase for labor and parts
over the succeeding nine (9) years based on the annual percent increase in a cost of
living index from one year to the next, the cost of living index to be used is to be
specified by the BMS Specialist in the tender submittal.
D. If at any time during the maintenance service contract, software patches that correct
software errors become available the Employer shall be notified immediately and they shall
be made available to the Employer at no additional cost.
E. During the Defects Liability Period the BMS Specialist shall maintain a minimum of 10%
spare DCP, CCP and UC of each type installed on site under this contract. At the end of the
Defects Liability Period the BMS Specialist shall hand over DCP, CCP and UC of each type
to the Employer which shall, at minimum, be equal to 10% of the number of installed DCP,
CCP and UC of each type installed on site under this contract.
F. During the Defects Liability Period the BMS Specialist shall maintain a minimum of 10%
spare sensors of each type installed on site under this contract. At the end of the Defects
Liability Period the BMS Specialist shall hand over sensors of each type to the Employer,
which shall, at minimum, be equal to 10% of the number of installed sensors of each type
installed on Site under this contract.
A. Obtain all required permits and inspection certificates. All permits and certificates shall be
made available to the Employer.
B. The latest requirements of all national, county, municipal and other authorities having
jurisdiction shall be met.
D. All electrical equipment, devices and components and their installation shall comply with
the latest edition of the IEE Wiring Regulations (BS 7671:1992 Requirements for electrical
installations) and all associated addenda
E. All components shall be IP 2X finger protected to BS 60529 such that live components
cannot be accidentally touched. Interior enclosures shall be, at minimum, IP 45 to BS
60529 and exterior enclosures shall be weather proof IP 65 to BS 60529 unless specifically
noted otherwise within these documents.
F. The BMS Specialist shall only offer equipment that meets UL 916 requirements and all
electrical components shall be UL listed and shall carry the UL label.
G. The BMS shall be listed and manufactured to ISO 9001 and ISO 9002.
H. All work shall conform to the requirements detailed in the electrical specifications. Where
there is any conflict between the requirements of the different project trade sub-contract
documents, statutes, codes, regulations, local ordinances and any requirement of an agency
having jurisdiction over the project, the most stringent requirement shall apply unless
determined otherwise by the Employer. Advise the Engineer of any discrepancy or conflicts
between the various requirements for the project.
I. Equipment, devices and materials shall conform to all performance requirements of the
specifications when exposed to the following interferences:
6) The BMS and all individual electrical equipment, devices and components shall
comply with the requirements of BS EN 50081-1 (General Emission Standard) and
BS EN 50082-1 and 2 (General Immunity Standard), the requirements of the Federal
Communication Commission rules and regulations Part 15, sub part J and all other
applicable codes and statutes with respect to the radiation and conduction of radio
frequency interference.
1.16 SCHEDULE
A. Complete all requirements of the BMS sub-contract in accordance with the project program
and prior to the scheduled Substantial Completion date for each phase.
C. Provide to the Engineer a schedule indicating the sequence of work, durations of individual
tasks, delivery dates for all material, devices and equipment and detail any interface that
must be coordinated with any other Specialists.
D. Provide written status reports at required intervals and in a format acceptable to the
Engineer. An updated schedule of work shall be included in each status report.
E. Comply with the Project Construction Schedule. Provide additional staffing or work
overtime as required to comply with the Project Schedule so as not to interfere with other
on-site Specialists in their effort to comply with the Project Schedule. Confirm, prior to
tender submittal that all equipment, devices, material and services proposed are available
and will be delivered accordingly to comply with the Project Schedule.
F. Provide written Request For Information (RFI) notices to the Engineer when specific
information or clarification of the specifications is required. Request For Information
notices shall be provided at least two (2) weeks prior to the need for the information.
1) Have a local staff, within 50 kilometers of the project site, of trained personnel
capable of giving instructions and providing routine and emergency maintenance on
the BMS, all components and software/firmware and all other elements of the BMS.
2) Have a proven record of experience in the supply and installation of equivalent
systems over a minimum period of ten (10) years in the project area.
3) Have comprehensive local service and support facilities for the total BMS that shall
be capable of responding to Client call-out within 2 hours, 7 days a week.
4) Maintain local, or have approved local sub-contracted access to, supplies of essential
expendable parts.
5) Undertake to maintain necessary project staff and maintenance personnel as per the
Employer’s requirements.
A. Work shall comply with all the requirements of the Health and Safety Commission and with
all of the instructions of the Engineer and Project Manager.
A. The BMS specialist is to provide a tender price for the complete BMS. In addition, the BMS
specialist shall provide unit prices for all items and equipment installed under the contract in
sufficient details to enable additions and deletions to the contract to be priced by the
employer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. When a specific reference to a manufacturer of a product is made, and the term "equal and
approved" is used, substitutions of a product by another manufacturer will be allowed, but
the substituted product must conform to all specified requirements. The Engineer’s
determination on the acceptability of substitutes shall be final. Approved substituted
equipment shall conform to available space requirements. Substituted equipment that does
not conform to the available space requirements shall be replaced or required modifications
shall be made at no additional cost to the Employer.
B. All equipment and materials shall be new and without any defect. All components of one
type shall be products of one manufacturer (temperature sensors, dampers, etc.).
C. Hazardous Materials Notification: In the event no product or material is available that does
not contain asbestos, PCB, or other hazardous materials as determined by the Engineer, a
written application shall be made by the BMS Specialist to the Engineer providing all
relevant details concerning a proposed product or material that contains hazardous material
prior to installation.
D. Asbestos and PCB Certification: After completion of installation, but prior to Substantial
Completion, the BMS Specialist shall certify in writing that products and materials installed,
and processes used, do not contain asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB).
A. The BMS Specialist shall certify in writing with the tender submittal that all components
proposed for this project comply with all of the following requirements:
1) Complete and thorough testing has proven that performance shall not be affected
when the building electrical distribution system experiences disturbances of the type
and magnitude normally encountered in buildings of this nature.
2) An independent testing laboratory has verified that the VAV terminal unit unitary
controller meets the performance requirements detailed in these specifications. If so
required by the Employer, the testing laboratory shall test a project VAV terminal
unit complete with the BMS unitary controller and the BMS Specialist shall
demonstrate that the VAV terminal unit UC can meet all of the requirements for
monitoring and control accuracy and can undertake all of the sequences of operation
associated with the VAV as detailed in these specifications. The independent testing
laboratory test report is to be submitted with the shop drawings.
3) Power line disturbance tests involving the cycling of mains voltage showed that all
components operated satisfactorily when the voltage dropped to 75% or less of the
nominal mains voltage and normal operation resumed when the voltage returned to
less than 85% of the nominal mains voltage. Following these brownout conditions
the components were free of any stress and/or damage, operated as normal and no
data at the PC, CCP, DCP and/or UC was lost or corrupted.
B. The BMS Specialist shall certify in writing with the tender submittal that all components are
free of date related problems and that the BMS complies with all aspects of British
Standards Institution standard BSI DISC PD2000-1.
A. Provide equipment, devices and materials for interior and exterior applications that shall be
capable of withstanding and operating satisfactorily in, at minimum, the following ambient
conditions:
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of the contract
Documents
C. Protect products from construction operations, dust, and debris by storing in conditioned
space.
A. Submit spare parts data for each different item of equipment furnished. Data to include a
complete list of the sources of supply, a list of parts and supplies that are either normally
furnished at no extra cost with the purchase of the equipment, or specified hereinafter as
EXTRA MATERIALS to be furnished as part of the sub-contract
2.7 LABELLING
A. Provide labelling for all DDC controllers, gateways, routers, hubs, field level components,
etc, panels and enclosures. Labelling shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Plastic laminated label that shall be affixed to the panel or enclosure with rivets or
permanent adhesive.
2) Lettering 6mm (0.25 inch) high that sharply contrasts the background colour.
3) Consistent throughout the project.
4) Indicated on the record documentation.
B. Provide labelling of all cabling and containment. Labelling shall meet, at minimum, the
following requirements:
A. Provide warning notices at all equipment controlled by the BMS and at all associated motor
starters and MCC panels where notices of a similar manner have not been provided by other
trades. Warning labels shall be installed, at minimum, at the following locations:
B. The warning notices shall be 75 mm by 125 mm (3in. by 5in.) minimum, with yellow
background and with black lettering. The notices shall state the following:
C. The warning notices shall be securely attached to the equipment at a location approved by
the Engineer and shall be highly visible. Submit a sample with shop drawings.
A. Provide panels and enclosures for all components of the BMS except where it is specifically
identified within these contract documents that the enclosure shall be furnished by another
trade. Panels and enclosures shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Painted steel panels with locking door. All panels shall be lockable with the same
key.
2) Ventilated to prevent excessive heat build-up, where required.
3) Field cabling shall be terminated on a terminal strip. Provide strain relief.
4) Internal components shall be installed to allow easy access for diagnostics,
maintenance, removal or replacement.
5) Panel or enclosure shall be suitable rated for the environment for which it is to be
installed. Interior enclosures shall be, at minimum, IP 45 to BS 60529 and exterior
enclosures shall be weather proof IP 65 to BS 60529 unless specifically noted
otherwise within these sub-contract documents.
6) Panel or enclosures shall have 20% spare space for future addition of BMS
controllers.
B. Panels and enclosures shall only be located as indicated on the drawings and at Engineer
approved locations.
C. The BMS Specialist shall not furnish MCC panels, motor starters, variable speed controllers
and local disconnect switches. The trade furnishing the motor starters and variable speed
drives shall provide an interface terminal strip in a dedicated enclosure which may be a
separate external enclosure or may be a compartment within the motor starter enclosure.
Refer to the sub-contract documents for the trade furnishing the motor starter and the
variable speed controllers for the details of the enclosures. The DDC controllers shall not be
located in the MCC panels
A. The BMS Specialist shall provide containment and cables as necessary for a fully
functioning system as detailed in these specifications.
B. Flexible metallic rustproof conduit shall be provided for the final one (1) metre before
connection from a non-vibrating location to equipment subject to vibration or movement.
Flexible metallic conduit shall be provided for between the last 300mm and the last
1000mm of connection to field instrumentation, relays and final control elements as
necessary to facilitate the removal of devices without the disconnection or the bending of
the non-flexible conduit. Watertight conduit to be provided where appropriate.
C. Conduit and trunking shall be securely mounted in accordance with IEE Regulations and
shall be concealed in all areas to which the public have access.
D. Conduit and trunking shall run parallel or perpendicular to the building lines and shall be
installed in a workmanlike manner. Avoid obstructions and crossovers where possible.
E. Conduit/trunking shall be installed such that any condensation in the conduit cannot run into
BMS equipment. Where necessary conduit shall enter enclosures from the bottom or shall
be sloped up to the enclosure.
F. Junction and pull boxes shall be securely fastened to the conduit, shall be accessible, and
shall be provided where required by code and where necessary to facilitate the pulling of
cables.
H. The BMS Specialist shall colour code all conduit/trunking at least every 3,000 mm (10 feet)
along the conduit with a blue and green band at least 50mm wide and colour code every
junction box in a bright yellow
I. Containment shall be provided for all BMS cable except where specifically noted otherwise.
J. BMS monitoring and control cable shall not share conduit with cable carrying voltages in
excess of 48 volts and shall be partitioned from higher voltage cable in trunking.
K. LAN cable shall not share conduit with any other cable or shall be in a dedicated partitioned
compartment in trunking.
L. When cable for digital outputs is installed in conduit it shall be in dedicated conduit and
when installed in trunking shall be partitioned from other cable.
M. All trunking, conduit and accessories shall comply with all applicable codes and standards.
A. Provide all cables for the BMS Automation and Field Levels and cable to interconnect the
BMS Management level devices and the BMS Management level Network as detailed in
these specifications. Cable shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
B. Power wiring shall be sized in accordance with the applicable codes and shall be a minimum
of 1.5 sq.mm stranded copper. The BMS Specialist shall provide all power cable and
containment and shall terminate the power cable at a power outlet close to the component to
be powered and shall provide the power outlet. The MEP Specialist shall terminate the
power cable at the MCC/distribution board as applicable.
C. Cable for all applications shall be rated for LSF and low halogen.
D. Terminations shall be mechanically and electrically secure. Twist type wire nuts shall not
be acceptable. Insulated tinned copper lugs shall be provided.
F. LSF cable not required to be in conduit (refer to requirements for conduit above) shall be
routed parallel and perpendicular with the building column lines. Provide cable rings and
supports to support the cabling. Supports shall be positioned in accordance with BS 7671.
G. All wiring terminations within field panels shall be terminated at terminal stripes and shall
be identification tagged on both sides of the terminal strip.
H. Cable run in vertical trunking shall have means of cable support, at minimum, every 3m.
I. Cables shall comply with all applicable codes including, but not limited to, the IEE wiring
regulations latest edition and the electrical sub-contract documents. Where there is a
conflict between any codes, standards, ordinances, regulations or the requirements of the
jurisdiction having authority, the most stringent requirements shall apply.
B. Fibre optic cable (data transmission) shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
5) Outdoors and below grade fibres shall be run in gel filled tube to protect against
moisture and micro bending. Tube and fibre shall have a kevlar braid surrounding,
with suitable outside protective jacketing.
6) Cable shall contain 100% more fibres than required for a single point-to-point
communications connection.
7) Outdoor fibre shall be equipped with a central non-conducting member for long pull
applications.
C. Fibre optic cable shall comply with BS EN 60794-1-2:1999 (Optical fibre cables. Generic
specification - Basic optical cable test procedures) and all other applicable codes.
A. The BMS contractor shall provide uninterruptible power to all OIW, PC and servers. The
UPS furnished by the BMS contractor shall only serve components furnished by the BMS
contractor.
B. The BMS contractor shall provide uninterruptible power to all BMS components, such as
CCP. DCP, routers, switches, gateways, field instrumentation, final control elements etc., as
necessary to ensure continuous monitoring and control by the BMS and the associated
satellite OIW of all equipment that operates on emergency power.
C. The BMS contractor may provide a single UPS at any one location to serve the UPS
requirements of all components at that location or may provide individual UPS units for
each system. Each BMS shall have its own UPS systems that shall be installed such that a
UPS serving one of these entities does not provide power to a component in another entity.
1) Sized to handle the continuous full load use of all components served by the UPS plus
an additional 25% for a period of five minutes. Minimum shall be 300VA.
2) Audible alarm when mains power is not available.
3) RF noise filtering.
4) Over voltage protection.
5) Four outlet receptacles minimum.
6) Visual alert status light.
7) Sealed maintenance free batteries.
8) Floor mounted unit with plug in cord power cord.
E. UPS installation shall conform with BS EN 50091-1-1 and 2, BS EN 50091-2 and 3 and all
other applicable codes and regulations.
A. The terminal servers shall be configured in a clustering fail over configuration using the
latest version of Microsoft Windows 2003, Enterprise Edition, operating software. Provide
terminal servers that are certified by a Microsoft OEM and provided as a complete package.
Each terminal server shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Quad Processor capable motherboard with a minimum of 4 PCI slots, 1 AGP slot and
16-gigabyte memory capacity.
2) Dual Xeon MP Processors minimum speed of 1.5 GHz. with ball bearing type CPU
fan/heat sinks.
3) 4 gigabytes of installed dual channel DDR memory.
4) Two 60 Gigabyte hard disks connected to a hardware based Raid 1 controller. These
drives shall be used for the operating system software and the application software.
5) Three 120 Gigabyte hard disks connected to a hardware based Raid 5 controller. Use
these disks for database storage.
6) Tower or rack mounting case with minimum of 3 Internal 5¼” drive bays, 500 watt or
greater capacity UL rated redundant hot swap power supplies, 3 Internal cooling fans
and external keyboard lock.
7) 2 Serial (16550 UART) and 1 Parallel ports.
8) One 1.44 floppy disk drive.
9) 24X IDE Internal CD-RW/DVD ROM.
10) Auto sensing full duplex PCI 10/100/1000Mhz Ethernet adapter with bus mastering
capabilities.
11) SVGA 64 Megabyte AGP video adapter.
12) All necessary mounting hardware and cables for all components.
13) Complete assembly, testing and 72-hour burn in, with complete diagnostic report
detailing burn in procedures and results.
14) SCSI II DAT Tape Backup Unit or Magneto Optical Disk and compatible software
with sufficient capacity to perform full daily-unattended backup of the database to
one tape or disk. Provide 10 tapes or disks with unit.
15) Provide software for automatic operation of redundant components should primary
components fail.
B. The following peripheral I/O devices shall be provided at one of the terminal servers to be
determined by the Employer:
C. All PC shall be the latest model at the time of purchase and shall be from a recognized
manufacture of PCs. Purchase of the PC shall be delayed until the latest time possible
without causing a delay in the schedule in order to ensure that it is state-of-the-art and is
based on the latest proven technology is purchased.
A. Provide two fault tolerant data servers. These servers shall be located in Central Facility
Management Control Room
B. The BMS data servers shall be configured in a clustering fail over configuration using the
latest version of Microsoft Windows 2003, Enterprise Edition, operating software. Provide
BMS data servers that are certified by a Microsoft OEM and provided as a complete
package. Each BMS data server shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Quad Processor capable motherboard with a minimum of 4 PCI slots, 1 AGP slot and
16-gigabyte memory capacity.
2) Dual Xeon MP Processors minimum speed of 1.5 GHz. with ball bearing type CPU
fan/heat sinks.
3) 4 gigabytes of installed dual channel DDR memory.
4) Two 60 Gigabyte hard disks connected to a hardware based Raid 1 controller. These
drives shall be used for the operating system software and the application software.
5) Three 120 Gigabyte hard disks connected to a hardware based Raid 5 controller. Use
these disks for database storage.
6) Tower or rack mounting case with minimum of 3 Internal 5¼” drive bays, 500 watt or
greater capacity UL rated redundant hot swap power supplies, 3 Internal cooling fans
and external keyboard lock.
7) 2 Serial (16550 UART) and 1 Parallel ports.
8) One 1.44 floppy disk drive.
9) 24X IDE Internal CD-RW/DVD ROM.
10) Auto sensing full duplex PCI 10/100/1000Mhz Ethernet adapter with bus mastering
capabilities.
11) SVGA 64 Megabyte AGP video adapter.
12) All necessary mounting hardware and cables for all components.
13) Complete assembly, testing and 72-hour burn in, with complete diagnostic report
detailing burn in procedures and results.
14) SCSI II DAT Tape Backup Unit or Magneto Optical Disk and compatible software
with sufficient capacity to perform full daily-unattended backup of the database to
one tape or disk. Provide 10 tapes or disks with unit.
15) Provide software for automatic operation of redundant components should primary
components fail.
C. The following peripheral I/O devices shall be provided at one of the terminal servers to be
determined by the Employer:
D. All PC shall be the latest model at the time of purchase and shall be from a recognised
manufacture of PCs. Purchase of the PC shall be delayed until the latest time possible
without causing a delay in the schedule in order to ensure that it is state-of-the-art and is
based on the latest proven technology is purchased.
A. Provide two fault tolerant Network Data Server (NDS). The NDS provided shall support
multiple levels of system redundancy. Provide two NDS configured as hot stand-by, fault
tolerant servers with redundant database architecture. The NDS shall meet, at minimum, the
following requirements:
1) Dual Processor Pentium III PCI/ISA Motherboard with a minimum of 4 PCI slots.
Flash BIOS support. Series 7 CPU mounting sockets. 512 kB level 2 cache memory.
2) Dual Processors minimum speed of 1.13 GHz. with ball bearing type CPU fan/heat
sinks.
3) 256 Megabytes of installed 133 Megahertz ECC SDRAM, spare slots capable of 6GB
total RAM.
4) Three 18 Gigabyte hard disks with 8ms. or faster access time for a hardware based
“Fault Tolerant Redundant Array of Independent Disks” (RAID) to a minimum of
RAID 5.
5) Rack mounted case with minimum of 3 Internal 5¼” drive bays, 500 watt or greater
capacity UL rated redundant hot swap power supplies, 3 Internal cooling fans and
external keyboard lock.
6) 2 Serial (16550 UART) and 1 Parallel ports.
7) One 1.44 floppy disk drive.
8) 40X Speed SCSI CD-ROM drives.
9) Auto sensing full duplex PCI 10/100 Ethernet adapter with bus mastering capabilities.
10) Microsoft Intellimouse and keyboard utilizing the motherboard PS2 style connectors.
11) SVGA 8 Megabyte SDRAM PCI video adapter.
12) All necessary mounting hardware and cables for all components.
13) Complete assembly, testing and 72 hour burn in, with complete diagnostic report
detailing burn in procedures and results.
14) Windows 2003 Server for minimum 15-user license on CD-ROM or approved equal.
15) SCSI II DAT Tape Backup Unit or Magneto Optical Disk and Windows NT Server
4.0 (or equal) compatible software with sufficient capacity to perform full daily
unattended backup of RAID to one tape or disk. Provide 10 tapes or disks with unit.
Alternatively provide a CD-Writer.
16) Provide software for automatic operation of redundant components should primary
components fail.
B. All PC shall be the latest model at the time of purchase and shall be from a recognised
manufacture of PCs. Purchase of the PC shall be delayed until the latest time possible
without causing a delay in the schedule in order to ensure that it is state-of-the-art and is
based on the latest proven technology is purchased.
A. Provide a web server. The Web Server shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Single Processor Pentium III PCI/ISA Motherboard with a minimum of 6 PCI slots.
Flash BIOS support.
2) Single Processor minimum speed of 800 MHZ with ball bearing type CPU fan/heat
sinks.
3) 128 Megabytes of installed 100 Mega Hertz RAM, spare slots capable of 256
Megabytes total RAM.
4) 20 Gigabyte EIDE hard disk.
5) Tower case with minimum of 3 Internal 5¼” drive bays, 300 watt or greater capacity
UL rated power supplies, internal cooling fan and external keyboard lock.
6) 2 Serial (16550 UART) and 1 Parallel ports.
7) One 1.44 floppy disk drive.
8) 40X Speed CD-ROM drive.
9) Auto sensing full duplex PCI 10/100 Ethernet adapter.
10) Microsoft Intellimouse and keyboard utilizing the motherboard PS2 style connectors.
11) SVGA 16 Megabyte DRAM PCI video adapter.
12) One internal analogue 56 Kbps modem, US Robotics or approved equal. Provide
software necessary to allow remote access and dial up
13) Internal Tape Backup drive, average transfer rate of 7.5 MB per second (12.5
Gigabyte uncompressed / 25 Gigabyte compressed), 5 tapes. Alternatively provide a
CD-Writer. Include software with the ability to schedule unattended backups.
14) All necessary mounting hardware and cables for all components.
15) Integral power supplies which shall be suitably rated for the service.
16) Real time software or hardware clock.
B. All PC shall be the latest model at the time of purchase and shall be from a recognised
manufacture of PCs. Purchase of the PC shall be delayed until the latest time possible
without causing a delay in the schedule in order to ensure that it is state-of-the-art and is
based on the latest proven technology is purchased.
A. The OIW shall comprise a PC and associated peripheral operator I/O devices. The OIW
shall be located as follows:
1) xxxx
2) xxxx
B. The OIW PC, shall have a Microsoft Windows XP Pro operating system or the latest version
of this software at the time of implementation and shall have, at minimum, the following
facilities:
1) Single Processor Pentium III motherboard with a minimum of 4 PCI slots. Flash
BIOS support. 256 megabyte RAM memory capability.
2) Minimum Processor speed of 2.4 GHz with CPU fan/heat sinks.
3) 40 Gigabyte hard disk.
4) 256 megabytes SDRAM memory.
5) 100/1000Mbps Ethernet adapter.
6) SVGA 16-megabyte DRAM video adapter.
7) One internal analogue 56 Kbps modem, dedicated for operator call in.
8) 2 Serial and 2 Parallel ports.
9) One 1.44 floppy disk drive.
10) 40X Speed CD-ROM drive.
11) Real time software or hardware clock.
12) Tower Case with minimum of 4 external 5¼” and 3 Internal 5¼” drive bays, 300 watt
or greater capacity rated power supplies, internal cooling fan and external keyboard
lock.
13) All necessary mounting hardware and cables for all components.
14) Integral power supplies which shall be suitably rated for the service.
15) Sound card for the annunciation of audible WAV file tones or pre-recorded messages
at the integral VDU stereo speakers.
C. Provide an alarm to uniquely identify a PC communication failure. One way that this might
be accomplished is by using a watchdog timer at a DDC controller.
D. Following a power failure, all PC shall return to a fully operational status without operator
intervention within two (2) minutes of the return of mains power. Software changes,
including modifications to database(s), shall not be lost in a power failure.
E. All PC shall be the latest model at the time of purchase and shall be from a recognised
manufacture of PCs. Purchase of the PC shall be delayed until the latest time possible
without causing a delay in the schedule in order to ensure that it is state-of-the-art and is
based on the latest proven technology is purchased. All PC shall be suitable for rugged and
continuous operation.
3) Alarm printer
G. The BMS OIW at each location shall have 1No. Report Printer. Where there are multiple
OIW at one location the printer shall be networked such that they are available to each OIW.
A. Printers: General
1) The operator shall be able to direct the hardcopy output to any printer. The BMS
Specialist shall set up the system such that all BMS generated messages such as
alarms, returns to normal, etc. are directed to the appropriate alarm printers and all
BMS automatically generated and operator requested reports are output to the
appropriate report printer.
2) The printers at one location shall be accessible from any OIW such that an operator at
one location can generate a hardcopy message at any other location.
a. Minimum print speed of twelve pages per minute black and three pages per
minute colour. Slower speed printers shall not be acceptable when printing in
normal quality.
b. Scalable fonts.
c. Single or double bin paper trays, capable of printing A3 size (297mm x
420mm) and A4 size (210mm x 297mm).
d. Page feed and page discharge controls.
e. Colour and black and white printing capability without changing ink or toner
cartridges.
f. 1200 dpi black and white and 600 x 300 dpi colour.
g. Laser jet technology.
D. Keyboard:
1) Provide a keyboard for operator access at each OIW, terminal server and data server
location. This shall be in addition to any other operator input device such as a mouse.
2) The keyboard shall be in a standard typewriter (QWERTY) configuration with a full
alphanumeric standard ASCII character set and with additional dedicated keys for
other functions associated with the BMS such as print screen. Keyboard shall be
wireless. Provide batteries sufficient for 24 months operation.
E. Mouse:
1) Provide a mouse at each OIW, terminal server and data server location and configure
the system such that cursor control can be undertaken from both the keyboard and
mouse as selected by the operator.
2) Mouse shall be wireless. Provide batteries sufficient for 24 months operation.
1) Provide a high-resolution LCD TFT display VDU at each OIW, terminal server and
data server location. The monitor shall be a flat panel type.
2) The VDU shall be used for the display of operator entered and requested data and the
output of BMS generated alarm and other information.
3) The VDU shall have a minimum screen diagonal measurement of 533mm (21
inches).
4) The VDU shall have a minimum resolution of 1280 by 1024 pixels with 80 Hz
minimum refresh rate.
5) The unit shall be capable of displaying both schematic and alphanumeric data at the
same time.
6) A minimum of 16.7 million discrete colors shall be available for display selection.
7) Integral stereo speakers.
A. The POTs devices shall not be used by the BMS Specialist for commissioning the BMS or
for any other purpose and shall be delivered new to the Employer immediately prior to the
acceptance testing.
B. Provide a jack at each DDC controller and at each mechanical and electrical room for the
plug connection of the POT. Provide two spare cables for plug connection for each POT.
The operator shall be able to communicate with the BMS via the POT using the same
operator interface as that at any OIW PC.
D. When connected to the BMS Automation Level at the DDC controllers or at a network data
port, the POT shall be able to undertake all of the control and monitoring functions that can
be performed at the OIW. One of the POT shall be used to configure the system
components.
E. All PC shall be the latest model at the time of purchase and shall be from a recognized
manufacturer of PCs. Purchase of the PC shall be delayed until the latest time possible
without causing a delay in the schedule in order to ensure that it is state-of-the-art and is
based on the latest proven technology is purchased.
A. HHWT shall not be used by the BMS Specialist for commissioning the BMS or for any
other purpose and shall be delivered new to the Employer immediately prior to acceptance
testing.
B. The operator shall be able to communicate with the BMS via the HHWT from any place in
the site. The hand held wireless terminal shall have a web browser. The operator shall,
subject to password access control, be able to undertake the same functions from the hand
held terminal as from a OIW. Detail any limitations of this device in the tender submittal.
C. The required transceiver hubs shall be part of the BMS Management level Network and
shall be provided by the CNE Specialist. The BMS Specialist shall advise the CNE
Specialist of any distance limitations on the hand held wireless terminal. The operator shall,
subject to password access control, be able to undertake all functions from the hand held
terminal as from an OIW.
E. The HHWT shall be able to communicate in wired mode either to the network or directly to
the UC, DCP, CCP or router.
F. The HHWT shall have the same login and access protections as the POT.
PART 3 - SOFTWARES
A. The BMS Specialist shall provide a site-wide software license that shall permit the
Employer to add a PC to the BMS Management level Network without the requirement to
obtain an additional software license.
B. The BMS shall have an “off-the-shelf” software package (Middleware) that shall be able to
import and export data in, at minimum, the following protocols over an Ethernet TCP/IP
backbone:
1) BACnet.
2) LonTalk.
3) Modbus.
4) SNMP.
5) XML/SOAP.
6) OPC.
7) EIB.
8) Shall be able to communicate with any DDE compliant application.
C. Data shall be output from the BMS in the appropriate protocol to the appropriate ELV
Building System. Note that it shall be possible to output the same data in different protocols
to different ELV Building Systems.
1) Requested by the operator. This includes requests made by the operator for the
immediate output of specific information and requests for information that are
optional and have been pre-programmed by the operator for display.
2) Scheduled by the operator. An example of this might be the output of a report at an
operator-defined time of day.
3) An alarm condition has been detected by the BMS. All alarm conditions detected by
the BMS shall be annunciated as detailed elsewhere in this section.
E. The operator interfaces for the Operator Interface Workstation and the Portable Operator
Terminal shall be the same.
F. The graphical user operator interface shall be "user friendly". The interface shall be such
that there is no need for the operator to reference documentation other than "help" menus on
the system in order for the operator to perform his normal duties after the training has been
received, as detailed in these specifications.
G. The operator interface shall be English language with metric units. The system shall be
capable of converting all engineering unit displays into the equivalent English values and
displaying such values with the appropriate unit identifiers. The switchover from metric to
English and vice versa shall be done with a single operator command. The engineering unit
switchover shall be for all measured and displayed variables and calculated points. Unit
conversion and display shall be carried through all possible display view including graphical
displays, text base displays, and software application packages.
H. The performance criteria detailed in these specifications for the operator interface shall
apply when all BMS are in their completed form and all software and hardware functions
are operational.
I. The terminal server operating system shall be Microsoft Windows 2003, Enterprise Edition,
operating software or the latest version of this software at the time of implementation. The
terminal Server applications software shall have a history of application in multi-vendor
environments.
J. The software shall be acceptable to all potential BMS Specialists. The terminal server
software package shall have a successful history of use with BACnet/IP and shall
incorporate all drivers required to meet these specifications.
K. The programs shall be designed to provide industrial quality real time data presentation.
The software shall enable the BMS Specialists to develop customized graphical views of the
mechanical and electrical systems and shall contain an advanced graphics library that
contains all potentially required images.
A. Access to the BMS at the OIW, HHWT and POT and any other I/O device shall be
protected by a password based access system. An operator shall not be able to access
information or perform any tasks at the BMS until a valid password has been entered.
Access shall terminate when an operator signs off or after a predetermined time-out period,
initially set at 10 minutes after the last operator access, whichever occurs first. The
password shall not be echoed at any terminal when it is entered. Any operator functions,
whether or not detailed within these specifications, shall be subject to the operator's
password being of a sufficiently high level to enable the operator to perform the function.
B. Each password shall have up to 6 No. alphanumeric characters, at minimum, with at least
500 million different combinations and it shall be possible to have a minimum of 10,000
active passwords at any time.
1) I/O terminals that can be used for access. This shall be defined for any terminal that
has access to the BMS (including the web browsing facility).
2) Functions that can be performed.
3) Points that can be accessed.
D. If the system has fixed defined function levels then there shall be at least five (5) levels.
Only the highest level shall be able to undertake changes to the passwords.
E. An operator with the highest level of password shall be able to make additions, deletions
and changes to the passwords on-line using an interactive procedure including the changing
of the time-out period. An operator with the highest level of password shall be able to
obtain a report detailing the passwords assigned to each operator and all relevant details of
the access privileges associated with each password.
A. An operator with the suitable level of access shall be able to access the network to perform
the following BMS functions:
1) Observe values of BMS monitored points, BMS outputs and BMS calculated values.
2) Observe and change control modes for motors, i.e. BMS manual control mode and
BMS software control mode.
3) Observe, add, delete and change a database including a database that defines a
monitored, controlled or calculated point, a database that defines schedules or a
database that is created to meet any of the many functions detailed in these
documents.
4) Issue commands to change the status of a digital output or the value of an analogue
output.
5) Observe and acknowledge BMS determined alarm conditions.
6) Initiate the outputs of add, delete and change reports.
7) Observe, add, delete and change operating sequences.
8) Observe, add, delete and change VDU system diagram displays.
9) Observe, add, delete and change control algorithms including PID control constants.
10) Other functions as expressly detailed in the BMS specifications or as required, even if
not expressed, in order to meet the intent of these specifications.
B. Operator access shall be by penetration through a hierarchy of menus and/or system displays
on the VDU using cursor control and by means of a series of alphanumeric inputs at a
keyboard. The menu selections shall be self-evident and shall easily guide the operator
through the execution of any of the functions. The alphanumeric input shall comprise short
English language statements and/or readily understood abbreviations. Whichever approach
is used, the process shall be via the most direct path and shall involve as few operations as
possible. It shall not be necessary for the operator to know the location, i.e. the DDC
controller, at which a point is monitored/controlled in order to access any information
concerning that point.
C. Following the completion of all steps by the operator performing an operator access
function, the function shall commence within two (2) seconds and shall be completed within
ten (10) seconds apart from those functions that are subject to the limitations of the output
rate of the printers.
D. An operator shall be able to edit his keyboard entries prior to attempted execution using
standard keys such as "delete" and "backspace". However, if an operator makes an incorrect
entry then the BMS will display a message that clearly details the nature of the error and
identifies the appropriate "help" menu that will assist the operator to successfully complete
the entry.
E. All operator entries shall be echoed, except passwords, at the VDU at the OIW, terminal
server and data server and on the screen on the POT and HHWT depending on where the
operator entry is made.
A. The BMS Specialist shall provide documentation detailing the methods and techniques
required to connect additional workstations, DDC controllers, gateways, routers and any
other BMS hardware and to add BACnet objects to the software as well as to export the data
in any of the previously mentioned standards to another system.
B. The system documentation shall be sufficiently detailed to enable the BMS’s incorporation
into another BACnet system in the future.
A. Each monitored, controlled and calculated point in the system shall be accessed via the
menu and the alphanumeric approaches as detailed in these specifications.
B. Access using the system schematic displays, as detailed in the previous sections, with the
addition that once the system display level is reached it shall be possible to progress to the
individual monitored, controlled or calculated point. Once a menu or system display
selection is made it shall take no more than five (5) seconds before the next menu or display
level appears on the VDU.
C. Access using the alphanumeric approach shall enable an operator to access any point via a
unique point name that may be a short English language descriptor or a readily
understandable mnemonic of the type used to identify points in the points schedules and
system diagrams.
D. Either approach shall enable the operator to observe or change any parameter associated
with a point and to add and delete points.
A. The operator shall be able to place any output in the BMS manual control mode and when in
that mode the operator shall be able to place any output to any required value subject to any
hardwired interlocks and any software interlocks that are specified to apply in the BMS
manual control mode.
B. The operator shall be able to place any setpoint that is determined by software into the
manual mode and to manually assign a value to the setpoint.
C. The operator shall be able to initiate the restart of equipment following a fire alarm and
following a power failure. Refer to the paragraphs titled "Equipment restart following a fire
alarm" and "Equipment restart following a power failure".
A. The operator shall be able to make on-line modifications, additions and deletions to all
databases at the PC, CCP, DCP, and UC using interactive procedures. Prior to the
acceptance of the changes by the BMS there shall be a restatement of the contemplated
database modification, addition or deletion together with a question of the type "Do you
wish to proceed?" which will require an affirmative answer before the change takes place.
B. The operator shall be able to modify a sequence, add a sequence and delete a sequence on-
line as detailed in the Section titled “BMS Software”.
C. The databases shall be open standards based on BACnet. The BMS Specialist shall provide
complete comprehensive documentation on writing to the databases, retrieving data from the
databases and sharing the data at the databases.
A. Alarms shall be generated by the BMS upon the occurrence of one of the following events:
C. In the event that the BMS detects a disparity between the actual and the required status of a
digital input, the BMS shall generate an alarm and shall set the control relay to the off state.
This shall occur when the digital output is in both the BMS manual control mode and the
BMS software control mode and shall automatically place the output in the BMS manual
control mode.
D. The operator shall be able to define alarm conditions for each analog input, at minimum, as
follows:
E. The operator shall be able to assign deviation limits to setpoint values. An alarm shall be
generated when a controlled variable deviates from setpoint by more than an operator-
defined amount.
F. The operator shall be able to assign alarm limits to analogue outputs. The BMS shall
generate an alarm when an analogue output reaches or exceeds an operator assigned high
limit and reaches or goes below an operator assigned low limit.
G. The operator shall be able to designate one state of a digital input as an alarm state.
H. The operator shall be able to assign a time delay following detection by the BMS of an
alarm condition such that if there is a return to normal during the assigned time delays the
alarm shall not be annunciated. If at the end of the time delay period the alarm condition
still exists then the BMS shall annunciate an alarm within two (2) seconds (end-to-end
time). The time delay shall be individually assignable to each alarm condition. All
monitored points shall meet these alarm annunciation criteria regardless of type of panel
used to monitor the point.
I. The operator shall be able to assign a deadband to all analogue high and low alarm limits so
as to minimize the too frequent and unnecessary annunciation of alarms. An analogue alarm
limit shall not have returned to normal until it is has returned beyond the alarm limit by a
sufficient amount to have also cleared the deadband. The same shall also apply to analogue
output high and low alarms.
J. A report shall be available to the operator detailing points in alarm and a further report shall
be available to the operator detailing the alarm limits established for the monitored,
controlled and calculated points.
L. The occurrence of designated alarms shall initiate a visual alarm at the OIW. A switch,
button or keyboard key shall be dedicated to the acknowledgment of alarms at the OIW.
The visual alarm shall cease after acknowledgment of an alarm unless another alarm is
awaiting acknowledgment. All alarms shall be acknowledged individually and the
acknowledgment shall be recorded on the alarm printer. The alarm message shall uniquely
identify the cause of the alarm together with the time of detection by the BMS. The
operator shall be able to associate an "event message" with any alarm occurrence. The
operator shall be able to designate at which workstation(s) the alarm shall be annunciated.
M. Alarms shall be allocated priorities by the operator on-line using an interactive procedure.
If there are concurrent alarms then they shall be annunciated in order of their priority. An
icon shall appear on the VDU when there are alarms other than those displayed. The cursor
and icon shall enable the operator to bring up an alarm report on the VDU at any time.
There shall be at minimum, three levels of alarm priority. Alarms shall be prioritized in the
following categories, with the following actions taking place:
N. Alarms shall remain on the OIW VDU alarm queue until the alarm has been acknowledged
by the operator and returned to the normal state. If the alarm returns to normal before
operator acknowledgment, then it shall be identified as such via different colour designation
on the alarm queue. If the alarm is acknowledged before is has returned to normal, then is
shall also be identified via a different colour designation.
Q. The BMS Specialist shall configure the alarms and their priorities in accordance with the
requirements of the Employer.
A. Reports shall be output when requested by the operator and when scheduled by the operator.
B. Reports shall be provided as detailed throughout these specifications and shall be output at
the VDU at the OIW, the printer designated by the operator at the report printer or the
screen at the POT whichever is selected by the operator. The default output device for
reports shall be the report printer at the OIW.
C. The operator shall be able to select reports to be output in the following manner:
D. Reports shall all have the time and date at which they were output recorded on them.
Reports shall be formatted in such a manner as to make them easily understandable to the
operator.
E. A menu of reports shall enable the operator to access any report on the BMS. Each report
shall contain the date and time.
F. The operator shall be able to configure customized reports. Standard and customized
reports shall be configured through the BMS. Use of third party reporting packages is not
allowed.
G. The BMS Specialist shall configure the reports in accordance with the requirements of the
Employer.
A. The operator shall create messages up to 64 characters in length, at minimum, which shall
be displayed upon the occurrence of a particular event. There shall be capacity for 1000
event messages at any one time and the operator shall be able to associate a single message
with more than one occurrence and shall be able to associate more than one event message
with a particular event.
B. The event message shall be output at all devices selected on-line by the operator using an
interactive procedure.
C. The operator shall be able to associate one or more event messages with the following
events:
1) An alarm
2) A change of status.
3) The return to normal of an alarm condition.
4) An operator entered schedule.
5) Any other event initiated by the BMS or monitored by the BMS.
A. VDU displays of system diagrams are discussed in the Section titled “VDU system diagram
display package” of these specifications.
B. VDU displays shall form the basis of the menu penetration means of operator access.
C. The time and date and the building kW shall appear on the VDU at all times and when there
are system diagrams displayed on the VDU the outside air temperature and relative
humidity shall be displayed.
D. Icons shall be used in conjunction with cursor control where possible to simplify access to
data and the execution of operator commands.
E. System diagrams shall appear on the VDU complete with all associated data within five (5)
seconds of the completion of the operator entry/ menu selection.
A. Operators and other authorized personnel shall have access to specific functions of the BMS
via a standard web browser interface, subject to password access assigned by the Employer.
B. Web based access to the BMS shall provide monitoring and limited control specific to the
user. The information displayed on the web pages shall be refreshed at least once every 10
seconds.
C. Where a Web page provides for the operator to input changes, the activation of the changes
shall require the operator to click on a "submit" button or similar feature before the changes
are sent. All web access actions shall be immediately echoed to all other OIW.
A. The Distributed Control Panels, Workstations and Unitary Controllers shall run under the
control of proven real-time executive operating software systems. These operating systems
are collectively referred to as the BMS operating systems.
C. The operating sequences and all databases related to monitoring and control functions shall
reside at the associated DCP and/or UC. Copies of these databases, operating sequences,
schedules and other programmable software shall reside at the PC at the OIW. It shall be
ensured that at all times there is no mismatch between software resident at the DCP and/or
UC and the software copy resident at the PC.
B. Where terms are used, such as “operator determined”, “operator changeable”, etc., which
indicate an operator originated decision; it shall mean that an operator shall be able to
amend a value, such as a setpoint, alarm limit, time delay, etc. through an interactive
approach. The term "interactive" is used to mean that the system shall operate in a
conversational mode whereby the operator shall receive English language prompts in the
form of:
C. The procedure by which an operator amends a value or implements a selection shall be such
that the operator can readily execute the task without reference to instruction manuals and
without knowledge of the BMS control language.
D. All setpoints, alarms limits, deadbands, software time delays, report configuration and
requests, operating time limits, schedules, etc. shall be operator definable through an
interactive procedure via the OIW, OIW, POT and HHWT. In addition, the setpoints and
schedules shall be changeable via the BMS/telephone and BMS/web facilities.
E. The equipment that is fed from emergency power and which is controlled by the BMS shall
operate normally under emergency power conditions and shall be monitored and controlled
by the BMS under emergency power conditions. Ensure that all equipment furnished under
this sub-contract that is associated with the control of equipment on emergency power is fed
from the emergency power service and can maintain normal equipment operations when the
equipment is on emergency power. Following a loss of normal power, the BMS shall
resume normal equipment control and monitoring functions for that equipment on
emergency power within 20 seconds of the availability of emergency power and similarly
when there is a return to normal power. If necessary provide an uninterruptible power
source in order to meet this 20 seconds resumption of operation requirement.
F. The BMS Specialist shall identify on the cable and containment shop drawings which
components are to be fed from emergency power and which components are to be fed from
a UPS source.
G. The BMS Specialist shall provide an easy to use means of defining the operating sequences
such as a high-level control language or a graphical/flowcharting facility.
H. The means provided for the creation of the operating sequences shall be suitable for the
implementation of the sequences detailed on the control diagrams that form a part of these
sub-contract documents.
I. If the BMS Specialist requires additional instrumentation to that indicated in the BMS Point
Schedules and Diagrams in order to implement the operating sequences as detailed on the
control drawings then the BMS Specialist shall include such additional instrumentation
within the tender price. Such instrumentation shall meet the requirements detailed in the
Section titled "BMS Field Instrumentation" or, where specifications are not provided, details
of such instrumentation shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
J. The operating sequences shall be written in a readily understandable high level control
language such as Pascal, Basic, C or equivalent or they shall be constructed using an easily
understood graphics interface package. Provide adequate English language notation in the
software to assist the operator understand the intent of the programmed sequences.
1) Addition
2) Subtraction
3) Multiplication
4) Division
5) Roots
6) Exponentials
7) Natural logarithms
L. The control language shall, at minimum, be able to implement the following logic
operations and relational operations:
1) and
2) or
3) not
4) nand
5) nor
6) If then else statement
7) less than
M. The BMS Specialist shall be responsible for the stable operation of all control loops. The
BMS Specialist shall provide self-tuning PID control algorithms. Verify that the control
loops are stable.
N. If any BMS or system component should fail during the operation of a system, then the
BMS shall execute the procedure detailed in the sequences of operation. Where a failure
mode is not provided for a BMS controlled item of equipment the BMS Specialist shall
obtain details of the required failure mode from the Employer.
O. Where there are multiple filter banks the BMS Specialist shall furnish a differential pressure
switch across each filter bank. The BMS Specialist may elect to monitor each filter alarm
individually or may elect to wire the differential pressure switches such that if any filter is in
alarm a general filter alarm shall be monitored by the BMS.
P. Any information required by the BMS Specialist for the implementation of the software
shall be requested in writing from the Engineer at least 2 weeks prior to the time it is
required. Submit the request for information in the form of tables or forms for the
Employer’s personnel to complete and return.
Q. The operating sequences detailed in this section shall only apply when the BMS is
controlling and monitoring the system in the BMS software control mode.
R. In cases where outside air duct cross-sectional area exceeds a certain amount, multiple
damper sections rather than a single section shall be furnished and shall be controlled in
groups. Refer to the mechanical trade documents to determine the number of damper
sections and the number of actuators.
S. Where indicated on the control diagrams, the BMS Specialist shall interlock motorised
dampers with fans such that when the dampers are closed the associated fans stop.
T. The BMS Specialist shall provide any modifications to the operating sequences as requested
by the Engineer without additional costs until the substantial completion of the entire BMS.
U. The sequences of operation are detailed on the control drawings that form part of these
documents. Where sequences have not been specifically identified for a mechanical,
electrical or public health system/component, the BMS Specialist shall obtain instruction
from the Engineer and shall implement the required sequences at no additional cost to the
Employer.
A. Scan rates at the DCP and/or UC shall meet the following requirements:
1) Each analogue and digital input point shall be scanned at least once every 5 seconds.
2) If a point is in alarm, then the alarm shall be annunciated at the OIW within 2 seconds
of the termination of the time delay period following detection of the alarm condition.
B. DDC outputs shall be updated at a frequency defined by the operator. The operator shall be
able to select a frequency, at minimum, in the range of 2 seconds to 256 seconds.
C. The operator shall be able to define a minimum time delay between successive starts of
equipment so that disturbances created on the building electrical system are minimised in
frequency and amplitude.
D. BMS analogue and digital outputs shall change as the result of either an operator entered
command or a BMS generated software command. These two modes of BMS output are
referred to as the BMS MANUAL CONTROL mode and the BMS SOFTWARE
CONTROL mode and differ as follows:
1) In the BMS manual control mode, the signal to a final control element such as a valve
or a damper actuator and to a relay such as a motor control relay shall change as the
result of a command manually entered at one of the operator terminals. When an
output is in the BMS manual control mode, there shall be no means by which it can
switch to the BMS software control mode or by which the value or state of the BMS
output can change without operator intervention.
2) In the BMS software control mode, the signal to the final control element or relay
shall be changed automatically as the result of software such as a schedule, operating
sequence or Applications Package such as the Optimised Scheduling feature.
E. The operator shall be able to select the mode of output control for each analogue and digital
output.
F. The operator shall be able to define the minimum time delay between the stopping of a piece
of equipment and its subsequent restart. This time delay shall be in effect for motors in the
BMS software control mode and for motors in the BMS manual control mode.
G. If there is a discrepancy between the actual and BMS commanded state of a motor then,
unless the discrepancy arises because of control of the motor by the fire alarm system or
because of a power failure, the motor control relay shall be set automatically to the OFF
state, an alarm shall be generated and the motor shall be placed in the BMS manual control
mode.
1) If the discrepancy has arisen because of override control by the fire alarm system,
then the motor shall be restarted by the BMS in accordance with the procedure
detailed in the paragraph titled "Equipment Restart Following a Fire Alarm".
2) If the discrepancy has arisen because of a power failure, then the motor shall be
restarted by the BMS in accordance with the procedure detailed in the paragraph
titled "Equipment Restart Following a Power Failure".
3) In all cases a motor shall only restart following an operator manually entered
command
H. The BMS shall not override any hardwired interlocks such as those provided at motor
starters for overload protection, damper interlock, pressure interlock, etc. and those provided
to facilitate control by the Fire Alarm System regardless of the BMS output control mode.
I. Unless stated otherwise elsewhere in these Specifications, the modulation of final control
elements by the BMS in the BMS software control mode shall be based on a Proportional-
Integral-Derivative (PID) control algorithm. The control constants for the PID algorithm
shall be definable by the operator. If self-tuning algorithms are provided, it shall still be
possible for the operator to manually tune the control loops. The software shall incorporate
facilities to enable the bumpless transfer of a modulating output from BMS manual control
to BMS software control and vice versa and the prevention of integral wind-up. PID
algorithms shall maintain the system operation within the desired tolerance around the
setpoint. Setpoint tolerances shall be as follows:
J. Software shall automatically inhibit the generating of an alarm on an analogue input when
the status of an associated digital input indicates that an alarm condition is to be expected.
Such would be the case, for example, when an air handling unit is off as it would be
expected that the supply air temperature would be outside the alarm limits established for
the operating state. An interactive procedure shall enable the operator to link any analogue
value to a digital input so as to inhibit unnecessary alarms. Points with their alarms locked
out shall continue to be displayed on reports and VDU displays. The alarms shall remain
locked out for an operator defined time delay following the start-up of the associated
equipment
K. If for any reason the operator wishes to terminate the monitoring of a particular digital or
analogue input, then it shall be possible to take the point out of service via an interactive
procedure. If the point is the monitored variable in a control loop, then the control loop
shall be disabled, any sequence dependent on the point shall also be disabled and all
associated BMS outputs shall go to the BMS manual control mode.
L. An interactive procedure shall enable the operator to add, delete and modify points
monitored and controlled by the BMS.
M. An interactive procedure shall enable the operator to configure control loops. The operator
shall define Setpoints for control loops or they shall be derived from software logic as
detailed in the sequences of operation.
N. All configuration tools shall be built into the BMS graphics software and all components of
the system shall be programmable from any OIW via the web browser including the
downloading of programs to the DDC controllers.
A. Applications software functions associated with the control and monitoring of the
mechanical and electrical systems by the BMS shall be resident at the DDC controllers and
OIW PC as appropriate. The application of these features shall be in accordance with the
details provided in the Sequences of Operation. The BMS Specialist is to implement all
applications programs. Where additional information is required the BMS Specialist shall
request the information in writing to the Employer at least two weeks before it is required by
the BMS Specialist.
B. These application software packages shall include but not be limited to the following:
a. HVAC control
C. HVAC Control
o. Determine how early it can shut down the system without adversely affecting
ventilation, by using the outside air temperature
p. Automatically determine the seasonal mode and worse case condition for each
day, by analyzing multiple building mass sensors
q. Analysis to require only easily obtained occupancy schedule data and desired
mass temperatures for implementation.
1) Supply Air Reset (SAR) Program is to:
1) Provide software to monitor and report electrical energy usage and instantaneous
energy demand. This feature shall also store data for recall via the historical data
trend package.
2) The BMS shall monitor the demand kW, kVA and kWh at the switchboards. The
BMS shall also monitor and provide reporting on kWh usage of controlled equipment
within the building based on equipment operating time and monitored kW for each
piece of equipment. If an item of equipment is not monitored then it shall be possible
for the BMS Specialist to input the kW of the equipment as a constant to be used in
the calculation. The kW value shall be obtained from the manufacturer’s literature
and shall be verified by the manufacturer.
3) The BMS shall provide a 15-minute interval counter for the metered inputs.
4) This software feature shall generate a report available on demand and on a scheduled
basis:
indicate the information required from the Employer and the format in
which it is to be provided.
E. Psychometric properties
1) Provide a software package that will accumulate the operating times for motors as
selected by the operator using an interactive procedure. Any piece of equipment that
has its status monitored by the BMS shall be selectable for inclusion in this feature. It
shall be possible to concurrently monitor the accumulated operating time for every
item of equipment monitored and/or controlled by the BMS. Data shall be stored at
the local controllers and shall be uploaded to the OIW at regular intervals. In the
event of loss of communications between the OIW and the local controller the local
controller shall continue to monitor and store data such that the data can be
downloaded when the communication is restored. The number of starts and stops of
motors shall also be accumulated.
2) The operator shall be able to establish on-line, using an interactive procedure, a value
for the accumulated operating time at which a suitably worded message shall be
output to the operator advising that the reporting limit has been reached for a specific
motor. The message shall be output at the designated alarm printer.
3) The operator shall be able to change the accumulated total for any motor to any value.
4) The accumulated operating times shall be updated at least every 15 minutes.
5) The operator shall be able to obtain a report on demand and on a scheduled basis
detailing the accumulated operating times.
6) Operating times and the number of equipment starts/stops shall be input by the BMS
equipment-scheduling program to the Employer's Facility Management System and
shall be the basis of maintenance programming.
1) Provide and implement a software program that will restart equipment, following the
return to normal condition that was shut down by the FAS or by the BMS as the result
of a fire alarm. The only equipment that shall be shut down by the BMS as the result
of a fire alarm shall be the VAV terminal units and FCU. The FAS shall shut down
all other equipment on an as required basis.
a. If an item of equipment is shut down by a source other than the BMS when
there is a fire alarm in effect then the BMS shall assume that the cause of the
shutdown is the FAS and shall not indicate an alarm.
b. The FAS shall communicate to the BMS a list of all equipment that it has shut
down as the result of a fire alarm.
c. If an item of equipment was presumed by the BMS to have shut down as a
result of the fire alarm but is not on the FAS list then an alarm shall be
annunciated for that item of equipment to indicate equipment failure. An alarm
shall also be generated if an item of equipment on the list does not have the
required status.
1) Provide and implement a program that will facilitate the restart of equipment
following a power failure.
2) This program shall be based on the BMS detection of a power failure and the return
of power. This feature shall operate on a per BMS basis and not a site wide basis and
shall be implemented for both emergency, normal power and UPS power.
3) When there is a loss of normal power, the BMS shall de-energise all units under its
control. When power is restored the BMS shall restart equipment on the basis of the
following as selected by the operator:
a. Manually entered operator command. A single command shall initiate the start
of all equipment controlled by a BMS or the equipment shall be started
individually as selected by the operator.
b. Automatically by the BMS when the return of power is detected by the BMS,
either utility power.
A. Data analysis and storage software shall reside at the terminal servers such that all PC on the
BMS Management level Network can present data in the same format. These features shall
comprise the following:
1) Dynamic Trending
2) Historical data trends
B. Dynamic Trending
1) Provide a software package that emulates, at minimum, a 3No. point strip chart
recorder. This program shall concurrently display 3No. or more (maximum of 6)
plots of variables in a graphical format. The graphs shall be plotted as the values are
sampled in a similar fashion to a chart recorder and when the plot reaches the right
hand side of the X-axis, the X-axis shall scroll to the left so as to accommodate newly
sampled data.
2) The variables to be plotted shall be selected by the operator from any input, output
point, BMS calculated value or any setpoint. It is envisaged that the primary use of
this facility will be for the tuning of control loops and the observance of control loop
performance. Typically this would require, for example, the concurrent plotting of
the loop setpoint, the monitored variable and the BMS output to the final control
element.
3) Each of the plotted variables shall be uniquely and clearly identified using a means of
differentiation such as different colors for each variable or different symbols for the
plotted points for each variable.
4) The X-axis shall be the time axis and shall have a scale selected by the operator using
an interactive procedure or shall be scaled automatically to accommodate a minimum
of 30 plotted points for each variable. The plot rate shall be selected by the operator
using an interactive procedure and shall have the following minimum ranges:
a. Plot rates for monitored variables shall range from their BMS scan rate to at
least once per day.
b. Setpoints shall be plotted at the same rate as the associated variable.
c. Plot rates for BMS outputs shall range from their BMS update rates to at least
once per day.
d. Plot rates for calculated points shall range from the rate at which the
calculation is performed to at least once per day.
1) The Y-axis shall be the value of the plotted variable. If plotted variables
have different ranges then provide separate Y-axes. The Y-axis for each
plotted variable shall be defined by the operator using an interactive
procedure or shall be scaled automatically using a technique that
displays the data in an optimum manner.
2) It shall be possible to have a minimum of 100 active trend plots at any
OIW on the network.
3) As part of the work of this sub-contract the BMS Specialist shall
implement all trend logs as requested by the Employer. Submit in
writing to the Employer, at least 2 weeks prior to the acceptance testing,
a request for points to be placed on the dynamic trending function. The
written request will clearly indicate the information required from the
Employer and the format in which it is to be provided.
1) Provide a software facility for the collection and storage of data at the data servers
and its subsequent retrieval and display in tabular and graphical form as selected by
the operator.
2) The operator shall be able to assign on-line, using an interactive procedure, any BMS
input or output point, calculated variable or setpoint to the historical data trend
facility. It shall be possible to have data collection and storage concurrently, at
minimum, for 250,000 variables and it shall be possible to have data collection for
each variable at 2 separate sampling rates.
3) Each variable shall be sampled at an operator-defined frequency using an interactive
procedure. The sampling frequencies shall be in the following ranges at minimum:
a. For BMS monitored points the sample rate shall be selectable individually for
each variable at between once per day and once per second or once per scan,
whichever is the less frequent.
b. Setpoints shall be sampled at the same rate as their associated variable.
c. For BMS outputs the sample rate shall be selectable individually for each
variable at between once per day and once per second or once per output
change, whichever is the less frequent.
d. For calculated points the sample rate shall be selectable individually for each
calculated value at between once per day and once every calculation.
1) Storage shall be provided for at least 10,000 pieces of sampled data for
each variable assigned to this feature. Recall of data shall be in either a
tabular form or in a graphical form and shall be displayed on the VDU
or output on one of the printers as selected by the operator. Whichever
form of output the operator selects it shall be possible to concurrently
output data for a minimum of 3No. variables. The time period to be
covered by the data output shall be selected by the operator using an
interactive procedure. When the storage capacity for a variable is full
the newly sampled data shall over-write the data first stored for that
variable. It shall be possible to store data for the same point at different
collection rates. For example, it shall be possible to store 10,000 values
of ambient temperature collected once per hour and it shall be possible
A. Data presentation software shall reside at the terminal servers such that all PC on the BMS
Management level Network can present data in the same format. These features shall
comprise the following:
1) Provide a software package to enable the operator to configure, modify and delete
system diagrams similar in scope to those on the control diagrams that form part of
these sub-contract documents. Real-time data shall be superimposed on the system
diagrams and shall be updated at intervals between 10 and 20 seconds. The data shall
be positioned on the display at points indicative of the instrumentation locations on
the system.
2) Provide a library of commonly used symbols in accordance with CIBSE standards
including all symbols used in the compilation of the system diagrams for this project.
3) Each system diagram shall indicate real-time data including analogue and digital
input and output points, setpoints and calculated values of the associated system. The
BMS Point Schedules and System Diagrams detailed on the control diagrams shall
provide a guideline for the selection of data to be displayed on a particular system
diagram. Preferably the status of motors, e.g. on, off, failed, etc., shall be indicated
by colour changes such as green for on, blue for off and red for failed. The system
diagrams shall also distinguish between outputs in the BMS manual control mode and
in the BMS software control mode. Where necessary to enhance the understanding of
the data displayed use alphanumeric text. The graphics shall be fully animated such
that they clearly indicate the status of motors.
4) Provide a hierarchy of VDU displays that will enable an operator, for example, to
progress from a diagram of the building, to a particular floor in the building and to a
particular zone on the floor. The selection at each stage shall be by cursor control
using a mouse or keyboard arrow buttons.
5) Provide icons on displays to enable easy access from one display to a related display.
For example, provide a target box on the system diagram for a group of VAV
terminal units that will enable one-step access to the associated air-handling unit.
6) A system diagram shall be provided, at minimum, for the following:
a. Each of the systems detailed in the point definition sections of these sub-
contract documents. This shall include at minimum each air handling unit and
each extract and supply fan system, each chilled and condenser water system
and each system monitored and controlled via a third party interface.
b. Each VAV/FCU terminal unit. This shall show the location of each VAV and
FCU on the floor, the zone temperatures, the mode of operation, e.g. occupied
mode, unoccupied mode, standby mode, etc. of the terminal units. The zones
covered by each VAV and FCU terminal unit shall be outlined and zones with
temperatures in alarm shall be red.
c. As for b. above but for the lighting.
d. As for b. above but for the combined lighting and VAV/FCU terminal units.
e. As for b. above but for the FAS.
f. As for b. above but for the security devices
g. Combined security, FAS and lighting on each floor. This shall show the
location of each security and fire alarm device on the floor, the status of each
security and fire alarm device and the status of each zone of lighting. A
device(s) that has indicated a security or a fire alarm shall be clearly identified.
It shall be possible by clicking on the appropriate icon on the full floor display
for the operator to zoom in on half of a floor.
h. All other schematics as detailed throughout these sub-contract documents.
1) The BMS Specialist shall submit a complete set of the proposed system
diagrams at the shop drawing stage of the project. The BMS Specialist
shall modify the system diagrams as requested by the Engineer
following shop drawing review at no additional cost to the Employer.
B. All BACnet controllers shall be based on native BACnet and shall support all applicable
BIBBs from the data sharing, alarm event, schedule, trend and device manager groups.
Standard BACnet object types supported by the controllers shall include:
5) Proprietary object types shall not be used unless specifically approved by the
Employer.
C. All LonWorks controllers shall use SNVTs which are approved by the LonMark
Association and which are published by the LonMark Association. Configuration properties
shall be standard configuration property types (SCPTs) as defined by the LonMark
Association.
D. Following a loss of power the PC, CCP, DCP and UC shall reboot in an orderly fashion and
attain a normal operating status within 2 minutes of the return of power. This shall be
accomplished without operator intervention.
A. The Communication Control Panels shall be programmable controllers on the BMS primary
LAN and shall undertake two roles:
1) A native BACnet/IP to LonWorks gateway between the BMS Management level and
LonWorks controllers at the BMS Automation Level. These shall only be provided if
the BMS Specialist is unable to offer native BACnet controllers. These gateways
shall allow peer-to-peer communication of all the LonWorks controllers with any
other LonWorks or BACnet controllers in the system.
2) A Gateway interface to thirds party monitors/controllers, if the data communicated
from the third party system cannot be provided in the form of BACNet Objects.
B. The CCP shall incorporate software as necessary to provide communications on the network
including Network Interface Cards if necessary. Additionally, if the CCP acts as a gateway,
then the CCP shall incorporate all software as necessary to perform this function including
any change of protocol between the networks. The BMS specialist shall provide the gateway
and complete documentation to the BMS specialist.
10) Provide interoperability documentation for the CCP. All the data related to the CCP
shall be presented along with their respective BACnet object ID created in the system,
along with their PICS, BIBBS, addresses and method statements to read and write
data via integration of the CCP with another system in future. This may be part of the
overall interoperability documentation.
11) The CCP shall have a port for the connection of POT and HHT.
12) The CCP shall be housed in the enclosure panels as detailed in the “PANELS &
ENLCOSURES” Paragraph.
A. The DCPs shall be standalone, shall reside on the automation level and shall meet the
following requirements:
1) DDC controllers shall be freely programmable and shall have an I/O capability to
handle major items of equipment such as air handling units.
2) DCP shall interface via Point Interface Modules (PIM) to the field instrumentation
and final control elements.
3) DCP may be used for any equipment monitored and controlled by the BMS. A
dedicated DCP shall be provided at minimum to monitor and control the following:
a. A single Air Handling Unit (each AHU shall have a dedicated DCP).
b. Other major items of equipment.
1) The DCP shall control its own communications so that the failure of any
one node, including any PC, shall not inhibit communications on the
network between the remaining nodes. Provide integral network
communication connections.
2) DCP shall be totally independent of any other primary and secondary
LAN nodes for their monitoring and control functions. DCP shall
monitor and control entire systems, multiple DCP for a single system
shall not be allowed.
3) Where a DCP receives data from other nodes, such as an outdoor air
temperature, which is used for a global system program strategy
executed at that DCP, then alternative control strategies shall be
automatically initiated, based on operator definable default values, if
there is a loss of communication of the required data.
4) DCP failure shall not place any BMS component or any BMS controlled
component in a situation that may cause damage to equipment or harm
or discomfort to building occupants and operations staff. The failure of
a DCP shall not affect the operation of any other network node.
5) The failure of any DCP shall be annunciated as a critical alarm at the
OIW.
6) Cabling shall be terminated on rugged and easily accessible terminal
strips. Each termination shall be clearly marked and shall be as detailed
in the shop and record drawings.
7) Each DCP shall have its own power supplies that shall be rated such that
they will adequately accommodate all foreseeable uses of the DCP.
8) Each DCP shall have, at minimum, a 16-bit microprocessor.
9) All operating sequences, schedules and trend data for equipment
controlled by the DCP shall reside at the DCP.
10) Provide each DCP with a battery back up for the protection of volatile
memory for a minimum of 72 hours. Provide a 10-hour minimum full
function battery support capability.
11) Provide a real-time clock at each DCP. The real-time clock at the DCP
shall be synchronized from the real-time clock at the terminal server at
least once every 24 hours.
12) The DCP shall have a port for the connection of the POT.
13) DCP shall be housed in enclosures that shall meet the requirements
detailed in Section titled “Panels and Enclosures” of these specifications.
The DCP shall be placed at the same location as the equipment they
control. The BMS Specialist shall provide a suitably rated enclosure for
all associated BMS components, including the controllers, relays, wiring
guides, terminal strips, etc. The installation of the control enclosure and
the installation of all cable and containment between the field
instrumentation, including any current sensing relays in the MCC panels,
and the DCP shall be by the BMS Specialist.
14) Interfaces to field instrumentation and final control elements shall have
Point Interface Modules (PIM) that shall:
c. Enable the DCP to receive signals from the digital and analogue
instrumentation.
d. Enable the DCP to output control signals to the final control elements.
E. UC shall provide an interface via PIM to the field instrumentation and final control elements
of the following types of equipment:
F. Panels meeting the requirements of DCP shall control all other types of equipment and
systems.
G. The UC shall be a node on the primary BMS LAN if it is a native BACnet/IP controller and
shall be a node on the secondary BMS LANs if it is a LonWorks controller. The UC shall
control its own communications so that the failure of any one node shall not inhibit
communications on the network between the remaining nodes and the BMS Management
level Network.
I. UC failure shall not place any BMS component or any BMS controlled component in a
situation that may cause damage to equipment or harm or discomfort to building occupants
and operations staff. The failure of a UC shall not affect the operation of any other
Management and BMS Automation Level components.
K. Cabling shall be terminated on rugged and easily accessible terminal strips. Each
termination shall be clearly marked and shall be as detailed in the shop and record drawings.
L. UC shall be powered from the electrical service that serves the equipment monitored and
controlled by the UC. The BMS Specialist shall furnish transformers suitably rated for the
application. The UC shall be housed in an enclosure that provides adequate physical and
electrical protection.
N. Provide each UC with a battery back up for the protection of volatile memory for a
minimum of 72 hours. Batteries shall be rated for a 7-year life. The UC serving VAV
terminal units and FCU shall not be placed on UPS power.
O. Provide a real time clock at each UC. The real-time clock at the UC shall be synchronized
from the real-time clock at the terminal server at least once every 24 hours.
P. UC shall be housed in enclosures that shall meet the requirements detailed in Section titled
“Panels and Enclosures”. The UC shall be placed at the same location as the equipment they
control. The BMS Specialist shall provide a suitably rated enclosure for all associated BMS
components, including the controllers, relays, wiring guides, terminal strips, etc. The
installation of the control enclosure shall be by the BMS Specialist and all cable between the
field instrumentation and the BMS DDC controllers shall be by the BMS Specialist.
Q. Interfaces to field instrumentation and final control elements shall have integral PIM that
will:
1) Enable the UC to receive signals from the digital and analogue instrumentation.
2) Enable the UC to output control signals to the final control elements.
S. Analogue input PIM shall have a minimum 8-bit analogue-to-digital conversion and shall
interface to all of the signal types listed in the Point Schedules.
T. Analogue output PIM shall have a minimum 8-bit digital-to-analogue conversion and shall
meet all of the output signal requirements detailed in the Point Schedules.
U. Digital input and output PIM shall have electrical isolation and all relay contacts shall be
suitably rated for the application.
V. UC shall control and monitor all points associated with a system. Multiple UC shall not be
used to control and monitor a single system.
X. Operating sequences for UC shall be resident at the UC. Database changes shall be
undertaken from the OIW and POT. Schedules and trend data shall reside at the UC.
Y. Control shall be based on either three term algorithms, i.e. proportional plus integral plus
derivative, or two term algorithms, i.e. proportional plus integral, unless specified otherwise.
AA. UC shall be native BACnet or LonWorks controllers and shall comply with all of the
requirements of ASHRAE SSPC/135 and ANSI/EIA-709.1 respectively.
BB. The BMS Specialist shall provide interoperability documentation for the UC. All the data
related to the UC shall be presented along with their respective BACnet object ID created in
the system, along with their PICS, BIBBS, addresses and method statements to read and
write data via integration of the UC with another system in future. This may be part of the
overall interoperability documentation.
CC. The BMS Specialist shall provide full documentation for the LonWorks controllers (if
provided) including details of all SNVTs, SCPTs, UNVTs, UCPTs and External Interface
Files (XIF) together with all addresses. The LonWorks interoperability data shall also
include the respective BACnet object ID generated in the system against their LonWorks
SNVT/SCPT data and method statements to read and write data via integration of the UC
with another system in future. This may be part of the overall interoperability
documentation.
A. Each VAV terminal unit shall have a UC. The number and location of terminal units and
airflow rates shall be as indicated on the Mechanical Drawings.
B. The terminal unit manufacturer shall provide the following components for each VAV
terminal unit for interface and mounting of the UC:
C. The BMS Specialist shall furnish the following components for each VAV terminal unit to
the VAV terminal unit manufacturer for factory installation by the VAV terminal unit
manufacturer:
D. The BMS Specialist shall furnish the temperature sensor and shall connect the temperature
sensor and its housing to the VAV terminal unit controller in the field and shall provide
cables of minimum length 15m. The sensor housing and cables shall be coiled and hung
alongside the VAV box above the ceiling during construction and enclosed in plastic wrap.
E. Provide the terminal unit manufacturer with the following documentation to coordinate the
mounting of the UC and related components:
1) Multi-colour point to point wiring diagram detailing the wiring and tubing of the UC
and other control equipment installed on the terminal devices.
2) Written instructions and drawings containing sufficient information to enable the
terminal unit manufacturer to undertake the installation satisfactorily.
F. The BMS Specialist shall visit the terminal unit manufacturer's facility before
commencement of fabrication to ensure that the terminal unit manufacturer's installation
procedures are satisfactory. The terminal unit manufacturer shall prepare a drawing of the
wiring for the UC and all associated instrumentation and final control elements based on the
information provided by the BMS Specialist. The terminal unit manufacturer and the BMS
Specialist shall both certify on the drawing that the drawing is correct and the drawing shall
be submitted as a shop drawing for review by the Engineer.
G. UC for each production run shall be at the terminal unit manufacturer’s factory at least 2
weeks prior to the scheduled shipment dates to the job-site. Obtain the terminal unit
shipping dates from the MEP Specialist.
H. The BMS Specialist shall visit the terminal unit manufacturer's facility at the completion of
the initial production run, prior to the shipping of any terminal units to the project site, to
inspect the installation of the UC and to verify proper operation via a POT.
I. The BMS Specialist shall enter all data into the UC and shall test the UC on site. The BMS
Specialist shall calibrate the pressure sensor and the flow rate reported by the controller
following the installation of the terminal unit in the ceiling plenum. This shall be done in
conjunction with the air-balancing Specialist and shall be based on the flow sensor
calibration curve (differential pressure versus flow rate) provided by the terminal unit
manufacturer. The BMS Specialist shall calibrate the space temperature sensor.
J. It shall be the responsibility of the BMS Specialist to verify the following with the VAV
terminal unit manufacturer prior to the tender submittal:
1) The pressure differential generated by the multi-point sensors is compatible with the
instrumentation to be provided by the BMS Specialist for the specified accuracy
requirements.
2) The damper assembly is compatible with the actuator to be provided by the BMS
Specialist.
K. Provide a wall mounted space temperature sensor for the monitoring of the terminal unit
space temperature. The sensor shall meet the following minimum requirements:
L. Provide differential pressure transducers for the monitoring of the terminal unit airflow rate.
The sensors shall be an integral component of the UC. The differential pressure transducer
shall meet, at minimum, the requirements:
M. Furnish damper actuators, for factory mounting, meeting the following requirements:
N. The VAV box UC shall each have the capability of monitoring and controlling the following
parameters for VAV terminal units:
1) Space temperature.
O. PI or PID algorithms shall maintain the system operation within + or - 0.5 Deg. C. of the
space temperature setpoints.
P. The operator shall be able to access the UC by connecting the POT to the secondary LAN at
the space temperature sensor enclosure. If there is a wall mounted temperature enclosure it
shall not be necessary for the operator to obtain access to the ceiling plenum in order to
obtain an operator interface to the UC. At minimum, the operator shall be able to undertake
the following functions via the POT when connected to the UC at the associated temperature
sensor enclosure, via the POT when connected at the temperature enclosure, the DCP and
the CCP and via the OIW and the HHWT:
Q. The POT shall be plug connectable at the space temperature sensor housing.
R. The BMS Specialist shall install data into the UC as necessary for the correct operation of
the terminal unit including:
S. Following installation of the terminal unit, the BMS Specialist shall calibrate on-site the
instrumentation associated with the following monitored parameters:
1) Space temperature.
2) Airflow rate sensor.
T. Following the installation of the terminal unit in the ceiling space the BMS Specialist shall
undertake the following tasks:
U. UC shall be native BACnet or LonWorks controllers and shall comply with all of the
requirements of ASHRAE SSPC/135 and ANSI/EIA-709.1 respectively.
V. The BMS Specialist shall provide full documentation for the BACnet DCP including the
PICS and details of all BIBBs and addresses.
W. The BMS Specialist shall provide full documentation for the LonWorks controllers (if
provided) including details of all SNVTs, SCPTs, UNVTs, UCPTs and External Interface
Files (XIF) together with all addresses.
A. Each fan coil unit shall have a UC. The number, type and location of FCU shall be as
indicated on the Mechanical Drawings.
B. The FCU manufacturer shall provide the following components for each fan coil unit for
interface and mounting of the UC:
C. The BMS Specialist shall furnish the following components for each FCU to the MEP
Specialist for installation by the MEP Specialist:
1) Unitary controller.
2) 24 Vac control transformer.
3) Temperature sensors for those FCU that have the temperature sensor located in the
recirculation port.
4) Chilled water valve and actuator. The MEP Specialist shall install the valve.
5) Provide the FCU manufacturer with the following documentation to coordinate the
mounting of the UC and related components:
a. Multi-colour point to point wiring diagram detailing the wiring and tubing of
the UC and other control equipment installed on the terminal devices.
b. Written instructions and drawings containing sufficient information to enable
the terminal unit manufacturer to undertake the installation satisfactorily.
D. Provide a wall mounted space temperature sensor for the monitoring of the space
temperature associated with the FCU. The sensor shall meet the following minimum
requirements:
E. Provide the MEP Specialist with the following documentation within 2 weeks of receiving
the request from the MEP Specialist:
1) Multi-colour point to point wiring diagram detailing the wiring of the FCU controller
and other control equipment installed on the terminal devices.
2) Wiring instructions for those units controlled by the intelligent thermostats. The BMS
Specialist shall provide a list of all FCU that shall have programmable thermostats.
3) Written instructions and drawings containing sufficient information to enable the
MEP Specialist to undertake the installation satisfactorily.
4) The BMS Specialist shall provide a list of all FCU that shall have the temperature
sensor located in the recirculation port.
F. The BMS Specialist shall meet with the MEP Specialist before commencement of the UC
installation and cabling to ensure that the proposed installation procedures are satisfactory.
The MEP Specialist shall prepare a drawing of the wiring for the UC and all associated
instrumentation and final control elements based on the information provided by the BMS
Specialist. The MEP Specialist and the BMS Specialist shall both certify on the drawing
that the drawing is correct and the drawing shall be submitted as a shop drawing for review
by the Engineer.
G. UC for each production run shall be handed over to the MEP Specialist at least 2 weeks
prior to the scheduled shipment dates to the job-site. Obtain the FCU shipping dates from
the MEP Specialist.
H. The BMS Specialist shall periodically meet with the MEP Specialist to inspect the
installation of the UC and to verify proper operation via a POT.
I. The BMS Specialist shall enter all data into the UC at the site after the FCU has been
installed.
J. The UC shall monitor and control the following parameters for FCU:
1) Space temperature.
2) Fan on/off control.
3) Cooling coil valve.
4) Setpoint reset (applicable only to those units with wall mounted enclosures having a
setpoint reset capability)
5) Fan speed control selection (applicable only to those units with wall mounted
enclosures having a setpoint reset capability)
K. PID algorithms shall maintain the system operation within + or - 0.5 Deg. C. of the space
temperature setpoints.
L. The operator shall be able to access the UC by connecting the POT to the UC LAN at the
space temperature sensor enclosure. It shall not be necessary for the operator to obtain
access to the ceiling plenum in order to obtain an operator interface to the UC. At
minimum, the operator shall be able to undertake the following functions via the HHWT
when communicating with the BMS Management level Network, via the POT when
connected at the temperature sensor housing, at the DCP and at the CCP and via any OIW:
M. The BMS Specialist shall install data into the UC on site as necessary for the correct
operation of the FCU including:
N. The BMS Specialist shall calibrate the space temperature sensor at the project site.
O. Following the installation of the FCU the BMS Specialist shall undertake the following
tasks:
Q. UC shall be native BACnet or LonWorks controllers and shall comply with all of the
requirements of ASHRAE SSPC/135 and ANSI/EIA-709.1 respectively.
R. The BMS Specialist shall provide interoperability documentation for the UC. All the data
related to the UC shall be presented along with their respective BACnet object ID created in
the system, along with their PICS, BIBBS, addresses and method statements to read and
write data via integration of the UC with another system in future. This may be part of the
overall interoperability documentation.
S. The BMS Specialist shall provide full documentation for the LonWorks controllers (if
provided) including details of all SNVTs, SCPTs, UNVTs, UCPTs and External Interface
Files (XIF) together with all addresses. The LonWorks interoperability data shall also
include their respective BACnet object ID generated in the system against their LonWorks
SNVT/SCPT data and method statements to read and write data via integration of the UC
with another system in future. This may be part of the overall interoperability
documentation.
A. Prior to shipping any VAV/CAV terminal units to site, the BMS Specialist and the
VAV/CAV terminal unit manufacturer shall perform the tests and inspections detailed
herein. A full report must be submitted to the Engineer for approval before shipping the
equipment. The Engineer may reject any result that is found to contradict the sub-contract
requirements.
B. Physical Inspection:
1) Inspect installation of damper actuator on the unit (Verify rigid installation. Observe
full open to full close stroking of actuator motor without binding.
2) Inspect installation of cabling and sensor tubing from the Unitary Controller (UC) to
end devices.
3) Inspect mounting of controller on unit. Verify accessibility for service after
installation.
6) If cold air is available in a controlled and conditioned space, verify that the controller
can maintain space conditions at + or - 0.5 Deg. C. around the setpoint (VAV boxes
only).
7) Set the air damper to maintain a fixed flow rate setpoint. Vary the inlet static
pressure from 25 to 400Pa. in 25 Pa upward increments. Record the flow rate
setpoint, UC controller reading of airflow rate, and the laboratory reading at each
setpoint. Vary the inlet static pressure from 400 Pa to 25 Pa in 25 Pa downward
increments noting the same readings. Plot the performance of this test to verify lack
of hysterisis effects. Perform this test at minimum and maximum air-cooling flow
rate setpoints.
D. UC Electrical Performance:
1) Reduce the input voltage on the UC to below 85% for an extended period. Note if
controller performance is affected.
2) Reduce the input voltage on the UC slowly to witness at what voltage the UC will
shut down and verify that the shut down was orderly.
3) Increase the input voltage on the UC slowly to witness at what voltage the UC will re-
enable itself and verify that the restart was orderly.
4) Verify that during the operation of the UC, electrical noise is not induced back into
the electrical system. This shall require an oscilloscope.
A. Provide all BACnet routers as necessary to meet the requirements of these specifications.
B. BACnet routers shall be native BACnet only. Proprietary and other standard protocols shall
not be provided. Routers shall be provided as necessary to connect one medium to another,
e.g. BACnet Arcnet to BACnet MS/TP, etc.
C. The BACnet routers shall, at minimum, support BIBBs for data sharing, alarm and event
management, scheduling, trending and device and network management.
5.1 GENERAL
(SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS NECESSARY FOR EACH BMS - NOTE THAT NOT ALL
INTERFACES WILL BE SOFTWARE INTERFACES AND THAT IN SOME
INSTANCES THE BMS SHALL MONITOR INFORMATION AVAILABLE IN OTHER
THIRD PARTY SYSTEMS VIA HARDWIRED INTERFACES. THESE INTERFACES
ARE TO BE CLEARLY IDENTIFIED IN THIS SECTION.)
A. The CCP used for third party systems integration shall be software programmable gateways
that shall provide a native BACNet/IP to third party ELV building system gateway if the
third party ELV building system does not provide data in a BACNet Object format meeting
all of the requirements of ASHRAE standard SSPC 135.
B. At minimum the third party protocols shall include Modbus, JBus, N2, OPC, and
LonWorks.
C. The third party ELV building system shall have a communications port and shall exchange
information with the Management Level Network in a BACNet/IP format.
1) Provide third party controller with a communication data port necessary for the data
exchange with the BMS.
2) Provide the Gateway that shall provide a native BACNet/IP to third party ELV
building system only if the third party ELV building system does not provide data in
a BACNet Object format meeting all of the requirements of ASHRAE standard SSPC
135.
3) Connect the Gateway if provided to the Third Party System.
4) Provide to the BMS supplier the BACNet Objects IDs of all BACNet Objects that are
to be transferred to the BMS, as well as complete documentation and information
required for the mapping.
5) Map the BACNet Object IDs as received from the BMS supplier to the third Party
Controller.
1) Provide the physical link (cable & necessary accessories) between the
Communication Control Panel (CCP) and the Third Party System Gateway or directly
to the Third Party System Data Port if third party ELV building system provides data
in a BACNet Object format meeting all of the requirements of ASHRAE standard
SSPC 135.
2) Map the BACNet Object IDs as received from the Third Party System Supplier to the
BMS
3) Provide the Third Party System Supplier with the BACNet Objects IDs of Objects to
be transferred to the Third Party System, as well as complete documentation and
information required for the mapping
A. The interface between the BMS and each third party ELV building system shall be
demonstrated. The tests shall be fully coordinated by the mechanical contractor who shall
liaise with each party concerned. It shall be conclusively demonstrated that a BMS
workstation on the Management Level Network can communicate with the third party
system and vice versa.
B. The testing of the interface between the Management Level Network and the third party
system shall verify, at minimum, that:
1) All data communicated from the third party system to the Management Level
Network is in the form of BACnet Objects that comply completely with ASHRAE
SSPC/135.
2) All data points mapped from the Management Level Network to the third party
system are displayed correctly on the third party system monitor.
3) All mapped points are identical with regard to value, the engineering units and
significant digits on the third party system and the BMS workstation.
4) All points mapped from the third party system to the Management Level Network
meet all of the specifications detailed in the BMS specifications for points directly
monitored/controlled by the BMS.
5) Communications speed between the two systems is satisfactory.
6) Both systems restart and communications between the two systems resume following
a power failure without operator intervention.
A. Each chiller shall have a microprocessor based unit controller. A chiller system controller
(Chiller Plant Manager) shall communicate with the individual chiller unit controllers. The
chiller system controller shall supervise all of the chiller unit controllers and shall have a
data port for the exchange of information with the BMS Automation Level.
B. The chiller system controller/BMS Automation Level interface shall, at minimum, enable
the following data to be transferred from the chiller system controller to the BMS at the
Automation Level Network (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS NECESSARY):
C. The chiller system controller/BMS Automation Level interface shall, at minimum, enable
the following data to be transferred from the BMS Automation Level to the chiller system
controller (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS NECESSARY):
A. The interface between the generator and the BMS shall be by means of hardwires and shall
be as listed in the schedule of control points found on the drawings. OR The emergency
generator shall have a microprocessor based monitoring and control system with a data port
to enable the exchange of information with the Management level Network.
B. The digital communications interface between the emergency generator monitoring and
control system and the Management level Network shall enable, at minimum, the following
monitoring information to be transferred to the Management Level Network (SPECIFIER
TO AMEND AS NECESSARY):
1) Generator set summary alarm (If available at the generator control centre the BMS
sub-contractor may alternatively monitor this point via a volt free contact)
2) Generator set engine oil pressure
3) Generator set high water temperature
4) Generator set low fuel level
5) Generator set battery voltage
6) Generator set overcrank alarm
7) Generator set overspeed alarm
8) High oil temperature
9) Low fuel pressure alarm
10) Generator set winding temperature alarm
11) Generator set bearing temperature alarm
12) Generator set engine run status
13) Low coolant level alarm
14) Generator set loss of field alarm
15) Engine fail to start alarm
16) Engine speed
17) Flue gas temperature
18) Phase-to-phase and phase-to neutral voltages
19) Phase-to-phase currents
C. The digital communications interface between the emergency generator monitoring and
control system and the Management level Network shall enable, at minimum, the following
monitoring information to be transferred from the Management Level Network to the
emergency generator controller (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS NECESSARY): SPECIFIER
TO PROVIDE DETAILS OF ANY EXCHANGE OF INFORMATION REQUIRED
FROM OTHER ELV SYSTEMS TO THE EMERGENCY GENERATORS SUCH AS THE
STATUS OF THE GAS TURBINES.
5.5 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BMS AND THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
A. The interface between the fire alarm and the BMS shall be by means of hardwires and shall
be as listed in the schedule of control points found on the drawings. OR The Fire Alarm
System shall be microprocessor based and shall have a data port to enable the transfer of
information to the Management level Network. The communication shall be uni-directional
from the FAS to the Management Level Network only. The FAS shall be on its own wide
area network.
B. The start and end of any message shall be uniquely identified and the message shall indicate
the following information at minimum (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS NECESSARY):
1) Time
2) Date
3) Zone of incidence
4) Indication of whether it is a fire alarm, return to normal or Fire Alarm System fault.
5) In the event of a fire the Fire Alarm System shall communicate a list of all equipment
shut down and started by the Fire Alarm System.
C. There shall be no transfer of data from the Management Level Network to the Fire Alarm
System.
D. The BMS shall automatically shut down all VAV and CAV terminal units and FCU serving
the zone of incidence in the event of a fire alarm and shall automatically restart equipment
following a return to normal message, as detailed in the Part titled “Equipment Restart
Following a Fire Alarm” in this Section of the documents.
E. The BMS shall generate an alarm if the status of any equipment differs from that
communicated by the Fire Alarm System to the Management Level Network.
5.6 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BMS AND THE LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. The interface between the lighting control system and the BMS shall be by means of
hardwires and shall be as listed in the schedule of control points found on the drawings. OR
The lighting controller shall be microprocessor based and shall have a data port to enable
the exchange of information with the Management Level Network.
B. The interface between the lighting controller and the Management level Network shall
enable, at minimum, the following information to be transferred from the lighting controller
to the Management Level Network (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS NECESSARY):
C. The interface between the lighting controller and the Management level Network shall
enable, at minimum, the following information to be transferred to the lighting controller
from the Management Level Network (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS NECESSARY):
5.7 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BMS AND VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES (VSD)
A. The interface between the VSD and the BMS shall be by means of hardwires and shall be as
listed in the schedule of control points found on the drawings. OR The variable speed drive
(VSD) controller shall be microprocessor based and shall have a data port that enables the
exchange of data between the VSD controller and the BMS Automation Level.
B. The interface between the variable speed drive controller and the Automation level Network
shall enable, at minimum, the following information to be transferred to the BMS
Automation Level (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS NECESSARY):
C. The interface between the VSD controller and the Management level Network shall enable,
at minimum, the following information to be transferred from the Management Level
Network to the VSD controller (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS NECESSARY):
A. The interface between the UPS and the BMS shall be by means of hardwires and shall be as
listed in the schedule of control points found on the drawings. OR The UPS controller shall
be microprocessor based and shall have a data port to enable the transfer of data between the
UPS controller and the Management Level Network.
B. The interface between the UPS controller and the Management level Network shall enable,
at minimum, the following information to be transferred from the Management Level
Network to the bms (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS NECESSARY):
C. The interface between the UPS controller and the Management level Network shall enable,
at minimum, the following information to be transferred from the Management Level
Network to the UPS (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS NECESSARY):
1) XXXXXX.
2) XXXXXX.
3) XXXXXX.
4) XXXXXX.
A. The interface between the packaged AC units and the BMS shall be by means of hardwires
and shall be as listed in the schedule of control points found on the drawings. OR The
Packaged A/C unit controller shall be microprocessor based and shall have a data port to
enable the exchange of data between the BMS Automation Level and the Packaged A/C unit
controller.
B. The interface between the Packaged A/C unit controller and the BMS Automation Level
shall enable, at minimum, the following information to be transferred from the Packaged
A/C unit controllers to the BMS Automation Level (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS
NECESSARY):
a. Unit Enable/disable
b. Unit Status
c. Unit Alarm
d. Unit Enable/disable Control
e. Fan Status
f. General Alarm
g. Unit Supply Air Temperature
h. Unit Static Pressure Sensor
i. Refrigerant System Alarm
j. Compressor Status
k. Dirty Filter Alarm
l. Unit Capacity
m. Any other information available from the packaged A/C controller as selected by the
Employer.
C. The interface between the Packaged A/C unit controller and the BMS Automation Level
shall enable, at minimum, the following information to be transferred from the BMS
Automation Level to the Packaged A/C unit controllers (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS
NECESSARY):
1) Stop/start enable.
2) reset temperature setpoint.
A. The interface between the computer room AC units and the BMS shall be by means of
hardwires and shall be as listed in the schedule of control points found on the drawings. OR
The Computer Room A/C unit controller shall be microprocessor based and shall have a
data port to enable the exchange of data between the BMS Automation Level and the
Computer Room A/C unit controller.
B. The interface between the Computer room A/C unit controller and the BMS Automation
Level shall enable, at minimum, the following information to be transferred from the
Computer Room A/C unit controller to the BMS Automation Level (SPECIFIER TO
AMEND AS NECESSARY):
1) Cooling Stages
2) Dehumidification
3) Humidification
4) High Temp Alarm
5) Low Temp Alarm
6) Air Flow Loss
7) High Hum. Alarm
8) Low Hum. Alarm
9) Change Filters
10) Local Alarm
11) High Head Pressure
12) Humidity Status
13) Temperature
14) Humidity
15) Unit Status
16) Any other information available from the computer room A/C unit controller as
selected by the Employer.
C. The interface between the Computer Room A/C unit controller and the BMS Automation
Level shall enable, at minimum, the following information to be transferred from the BMS
Automation to the Computer room A/C unit controllers (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS
NECESSARY):
1) Stop/start enable.
2) Reset temperature setpoint.
A. The interface between the switchboard electronic meters and the BMS shall be by means of
hardwires and shall be as listed in the schedule of control points found on the drawings. OR
The switchboard electronic meters shall be microprocessor based and shall have a data port
to enable the exchange of data between the Management Level Network and the meter.
Meters shall monitor all incomers of all MDBs and SMDBs. Additionally there shall be
hardwired interfaces between the BMS and the low voltage distribution boards as detailed
below.
B. The interface between the meter and the Management Level Network shall enable, at
minimum, the following information to be transferred from the meter to the Management
Level network (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS NECESSARY):
4) Peak current.
5) Watt-hours, three phase total.
6) Watts per phase and three-phase total.
7) KVA per phase and three-phase total.
8) Watt demand.
9) KVA demand.
10) KVAR per phase and three-phase total.
11) KVAR demand.
12) Power factor per phase and three-phase total.
13) Power factor average.
14) Peak readings for watts, KVA and KVAR.
15) KVARH Lag.
16) KVARH Lead.
17) Frequency.
18) Any other information available from the metering system as selected by the
Employer.
C. The interface between the meter and the BMS Automation Level shall enable, at minimum,
the following information to be transferred from the Management Level Network to the
meter (SPECIFIER TO AMEND AS NECESSARY):
1) XXXXXXXX
2) XXXXXXXX
A. The BMS shall have the following hardwired interfaces with the low voltage switchboards:
1) ON and OFF control of all circuit breakers in the MDBs and the SMDBs.
2) Open, closed and trip status for all feeder circuit breakers of all MDBs and SMDBs.
3) kW reading for all feeders of all MDBs and SMDBs. Provide necessary
instrumentation.
A. Outside Air Temperature sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Stainless steel probe of length between one-third and two-thirds of the duct width.
2) 100 or 1,000 ohm platinum RTD with a minimum temperature coefficient of
resistance of 0.00375 ohm/ohm/Deg. C.
3) Monitored temperature to be reported with an accuracy of 0.5 Deg. C. (1.0 Deg.
F.).
4) Provide a two wire 4-20 mA RTD transmitter. Where necessary to meet monitoring
accuracy requirements provide a 3-wire or 4-wire configuration.
5) Duct mounted moisture/waterproof housing with conduit fitting.
6) Temperature range of 0 Deg. C. to 50 Deg. C. (32 Deg. F to 122 Deg. F).
1) Probe length of 3.66m (12 feet) minimum or 3.25m per m2. (one linear foot per
square foot) of duct cross-sectional area., whichever is greater.
2) Copper sheathed construction.
3) 100 or 1,000 ohm platinum RTD with a minimum temperature coefficient of
resistance of 0.00375 ohm/ohm/Deg. C.
4) Monitored temperature to be reported with an accuracy of 1.0 Deg. C. (2.0 Deg. F.)
5) Provide a two wire 4-20 mA RTD transmitter. Where necessary to meet monitoring
accuracy requirements provide a 3-wire or 4-wire configuration.
6) Duct mounted moisture/waterproof housing with conduit fitting.
7) Suitable supports at all bends and at intermediate points to prevent movement in the
air stream.
8) Temperature range of 0 Deg. C. to 50 Deg. C. (32 Deg. F to 122 Deg. F.).
A. Provide wall mounted temperature sensor that meet the requirements for temperature
sensors as specified in section: "BMS CONTROLLERS: UNITARY CONTROLLER: VAV
TERMINAL UNITS".
A. Provide wall mounted temperature sensor that meet the requirements for temperature
sensors as specified in section: "BMS CONTROLLERS: UNITARY CONTROLLER: FAN
COIL UNITS CONTROLLERS".
1) Rigid stainless steel probe of length which is, at minimum, 20% of the pipe width.
2) 100 or 1,000 ohm platinum RTD with a minimum temperature coefficient of
resistance of 0.00375 ohm/ohm/Deg. C.
3) BMS shall report the monitored temperature with an accuracy of 0.25 Deg. C. (0.5
Deg. F.) accuracy.
4) Provide a two wire 4-20 mA RTD transmitter where required with a temperature
range that is appropriate for the application.
a. Range for chilled water and condenser water applications shall be:
Between 0 Deg.C. and +5 Deg.C. (+32 Deg.F. and +41 Deg.F.) at the
low end and
Between +40 Deg.C. and +50 Deg.C.(+104 Deg.F. and +122 Deg.F.) at
the upper end.
b. Range for hot water shall be selected such that it is between 30 Deg.C. and 50
Deg.C. (54 Deg.F and 90 Deg.F.) above and below the hot water temperature
range.
A. Provide strap-on mounted temperature sensors as indicated within the Field termination
schedules and/or control diagrams or where thermo well mounted sensors cannot be
mounted. Temperature sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
A. Outside air relative humidity sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
A. Duct mounted relative humidity sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
A. Wall mounted relative humidity sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
1) Wall mount enclosure with white cover. There shall be no manufacturer's logos,
name or thermometer on casing.
2) Two wire, 4-20 mA output proportional to relative humidity range of 0% to 100%.
3) Humidity sensor shall be replaceable.
4) 2% accuracy (5 - 95% RH).
5) Operating temperature range of O Deg. C. to 50 Deg. C. (32 Deg. F to 122 Deg. F.).
6) With LCD display.
A. Provide a combination wet bulb temperature and dry bulb temperature sensor for exterior
wall mounting. Web bulb temperature/dry bulb sensors shall meet, at minimum, the
following requirements:
1) Stainless steel probe with an IP65 to BS 60529 housing for an exterior housing.
2) Two wire, 4-20 mA output proportional to minimum wet bulb temperature range of -7
Deg.C. to +49 Deg.C. (+20 Deg.F. to +120 Deg.F.).
3) Two wire, 4-20 mA output proportional to minimum dry bulb temperature range of -
29 Deg.C. to +49 Deg.C. (-20 Deg.F. to +120 Deg.F.).
4) Monitored dry bulb temperature shall be reported with an accuracy of 0.5 Deg. C.
(1.0 Deg. F.).
5) Monitored wet bulb temperature shall be reported with an accuracyof3% of
reading.
6) Sensor shall have a solar screen.
A. Provide a combination wet bulb temperature and dry bulb temperature sensor for duct
mounting. Wet bulb temperature/dry bulb sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
1) Stainless steel probe with an IP54 to BS 60529 transmitter housing for an interior
application and an IP65 to BS 60529 housing for an exterior housing.
2) Two wire, 4-20 mA output proportional to minimum wet bulb temperature range of -7
Deg.C. to +49 Deg.C. (+20 Deg.F. to +120 Deg.F.).
3) Two wire, 4-20 mA output proportional to minimum dry bulb temperature range of -
29 Deg.C. to +49 Deg.C. (-20 Deg.F. to +120 Deg.F.).
4) Monitored dry bulb temperature shall be reported with an accuracy of 0.5 Deg. C.
(1.0 Deg. F.).
5) Monitored wet bulb temperature shall be reported with an accuracyof3% of
reading.
6) Probe shall be a minimum of 200mm.
A. Provide a combination wet bulb temperature and dry bulb temperature sensor for duct
mounting. Wet bulb temperature/dry bulb sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
A. Duct mounted static pressure sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) Input range shall be appropriate for the application. Select range such that it covers
from zero duct static pressure relative to the exterior of the duct up to a static pressure
of between 20% and 50% in excess of the maximum static pressure that could be
encountered in the duct relative to the duct exterior. Typically:
A. Space mounted static pressure sensors shall be designed for room pressure monitoring
applications with all electrical and pressure connection on back of unit. I addition, unit shall
meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
A. Provide static pressure sensor that meet the requirements for a "differential pressure
transducer" as specified in section: "BMS CONTROLLERS: UNITARY CONTROLLER:
VAV TERMINAL UNITS".
A. Water differential pressure sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
A. Multipoint averaging airflow measuring station shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
1) Sensor and sensor measuring flow range shall be appropriate for the application.
2) Multipoint averaging flow sensor complete with sensor, sensor housing and mounting
brackets. Sensor tubing shall be connected or removed without removing ductwork.
3) Sensing grid shall be of stainless steel construction.
4) Internal materials of the transducer shall be suitable for contact with air.
5) Integral signal integrator to minimize primary signal to noise from the output signal.
6) Output signal of 4-20 mA proportional to input pressure, into a 600 OHM load.
7) Temperature range of -18 Deg C to 60 Deg C (0 Deg F to 140 Deg F).
8) 5% accuracy of the measured value.
9) With LCD display.
A. Provide airflow rate sensors and transducers as indicated in the Field termination schedules
and/or control diagrams. Air flow rate sensors and transducer shall meet, at minimum, the
following requirements:
A. Air differential pressure sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
A. Water differential pressure switches shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
A. Liquid level float switches shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1) No moving parts.
2) Microprocessor-based.
3) 4-20 mA output.
4) Full lugged flanged.
5) Accuracy shall better than 5% of flowrate over a 33:1 turndown at all flow rates
above 1 fps.
6) The integrally mounted meter housing and flow meter sensor with a an IP54 to BS
60529 transmitter housing for an interior application and an IP65 to BS 60529
housing for an exterior housing. The flow sensor coil housing shall be steel and
withstand 3500 kPa external pressure in all conditions.
7) Electronics shall be remote mounted within the central plant either wall or column
mounted adjacent to the bypass piping area.
8) Flow meter transmitter shall be furnished in -an IP54 to BS 60529 transmitter housing
for an interior application and an IP65 to BS 60529 housing for an exterior housing,
with a character, 2 line 16 digit backlit display. The alphanumeric display shall
indicate user-defined flow units and flowrate. All menu advice and commands shall
be visible on this display.
9) The flow meter shall be suitable for operation at temperatures from -40 Deg F to 200
Deg F and at pressures from full vacuum to 2100 kPa.
10) The meter shall feature non-volatile sensor memory (EEPROM)) which shall contain
all the characteristics of the sensor (i.e. calibration factors, coil frequency, gain
settings) as well as user defined parameters on site. This memory shall facilitate
automatic transfer of pre-programmed data to new electronics in the event of a
transmitter fault, without requiring renewed calibration/programming.
11) The flow meter shall have a switching power supply having an operating range from
77-265 VAC 50 Hz (12-60 VDC). Power consumption shall not exceed 20 VA.
12) Carbon steel body.
13) Flow meter shall distinguish between direction of fluid flow.
14) Construction of flowmeter and associated components shall be rated for at least twice
the maximum static pressure.
B. Whenever the status of a single speed motor is monitored it shall be done via a current
sensing relay. Differential pressure switches shall not be used for this purpose. The BMS
contractor shall provide current sensing relays at the MCC starters. The BMS contractor
shall provide the current sensing relays for motors with local starters and no MCC starter.
A. Voltage sensing relays shall continuously monitor 3-phase power lines for phase loss, phase
reversal and low voltage. Voltage sensing relays shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
A. Provide kW and kWh transducers as identified in Field termination sheets and/or control
drawings. Transducer shall include, at minimum, the following:
1) Pickup rating, time and hold rating as required for individual applications.
2) Rated for a minimum of ten (10) million mechanical operations and a minimum of
500,000 electrical operations.
3) Provide complete isolation between the control circuit and the digital output.
4) Located in the DCP, UC or other local enclosures.
5) Malfunction of an BMS component shall cause the controlled output to fail to the
positions identified in the failure procedure within the operating sequences.
6) 10 amp contact rating.
7) Pin type terminals.
2) Output rating of 21-103 kPa (3-15psig) consuming 141 ml/s (515 scfm) maximum @
138 kPa (20 psig) supply.
3) Snap track mounted for panel applications or with an optional ABS enclosure.
4) Operating temperature range of 0ºC to 60ºC (32ºF to 140ºF)
5) Male barb fittings for flexible tubing.
A. Provide wall mounted air quality sensors as indicated within the Field termination schedules
and/or control diagrams. Sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
a. Methane
b. Ethylene
c. Hydrogen
d. Carbon Monoxide
e. Propane
f. Ammonia
A. Provide duct mounted air quality sensors as indicated within the field termination schedules
and/or control diagrams. Sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
a. Methane
b. Ethylene
c. Hydrogen
d. Carbon Monoxide
e. Propane
f. Ammonia
A. Provide a space or duct carbon dioxide gas detection sensor as indicated within the field
termination schedules and/or control diagrams. Carbon dioxide detection sensors shall
meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
A. Provide CO monitoring systems for the enclosed levels of the parking garage. Provide
complete coverage of the enclosed levels of the parking garage and provide systems for each
level. A CO monitoring system shall not cover an area on more than one level and the
failure of any component shall not affect more than one level.
A. Provide refrigerant leak monitoring as identified within the point schedules and/or control
diagrams. Refrigerant leak detection monitors shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
a. CFC
b. HCFC
c. HFC
g. At any other location in the chiller room as necessary to ensure that a person at
any location in the chiller room and room that can be entered from the chiller
room can see the visual alarm and hear the audible alarm and at any other
location required to meet the applicable codes.
1) System shall shut down all electrical equipment (chiller systems and
associated pumps, AHU, FCU, SRAC, etc.) and sequence emergency
extract equipment as required to meet regulations. Where combustion
equipment is employed, refrigerant vapour monitoring system shall
automatically shut down the combustion process in event of refrigerant
leakage if other alternative acceptable conditions are not applied.
Ventilation system, chiller and associated pumps and other equipment
shut down as a result of the refrigerant leak alarm shall return to normal
operation when the refrigerant monitoring system is no longer detecting
refrigerant levels above setpoints and alarms have been silenced.
2) Oxygen deficiency shall not be acceptable in lieu of TLV-TWA
monitoring for human safety exposure. At the TLV-TWA level the
system shall activate purge ventilation equipment.
3) Analyser shall be microprocessor based and employ infrared (IR) sensor
technology to sense to one part per million (ppm) and shall be
compound specific and/or monitor multiple compounds and be
calibrated for refrigerant in use by approved chiller system. Any
installed unit shall be switchable to monitor another refrigerant type by
changing one part and re-calibration. System shall be factory calibrated.
4) Provide a sequential sampling system integrated into one or more
analyser enclosures. Microprocessor shall sequentially control required
flow valves and communicate output signals to allow monitoring from
multiple remote sampling locations. Unit shall read and hold output
value of infrared sensor and control corresponding four point sequential
sampling assembly. Each sampling point shall have adjustable sampling
time and adjustable levels of alarm with sample line capability up to 500
feet.
5) System shall auto zero calibrate at one hour intervals and/or via operator
control. Zero calibration shall be achieved by drawing clean
uncontaminated air. Sampling of outside intake plenum shall be
acceptable if it meets requirements. Include built-in sample pump and
differential pressure flow switch for low flow indication. Provide a
separate 4-20 mA dc analogue output for each sampling point for BMS
monitoring or one digital communications link for the output of
refrigerant level for BMS monitoring. Unit shall be insensitive to
vibration and temperature variations and shall provide for a continuous
sample. Intermittent dump and purge, batch type samples with long
response time shall not be acceptable. Response time shall be 20 to 90
seconds typical. Electrochemical sensing technology employing
depletion sensors and short-term life sensors, which deplete as a normal
part of their operation or storage shelf life shall not be acceptable.
6) System shall have self-diagnostics and supply common malfunction
output. Loss of sample flow at either sample or ZERO line and
electrical malfunction shall annunciate to the BMS.
7) Provide two (2) additional particulate filters and zero gas filter
cartridges.
8) Provide self-contained breathing apparatus that is OSHA approved and
certified meeting the following requirements:
A. Provide water leak monitoring as identified within the Field termination schedules and/or
control diagrams. Water leak detection monitors shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
A. Provide ambient light level sensors as indicated within the field termination schedules
and/or control diagrams. Light level sensor shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
1) Light sensor shall have a 12 – 35 Vdc power at maximum 22mA current draw.
2) 4-20 mA output proportional to the ambient light level where 4 mA is light and 20
mA is dark.
3) Photo sensitive resistor with analog transducer.
4) Mounted on the exterior of a North wall on the roof.
5) Temperature range of -25ºC to 75ºC (-13ºF to 167ºF)
A. Furnish all valves controlled by the BMS as detailed in the mechanical trade documents and
as indicated on the control drawings which form part of these sub-contract documents. The
MEP Specialist shall install valves, except those for instrumentation. All other valves such
as check valves, relief valves, pressure reducing valves, self regulating valves, manually
operated valves, etc. shall be furnished and installed by the MEP Specialist. Provide details
of the manufacturer's installation requirements to the MEP Specialist. Coordinate the valve
body type and pipe connections with the mechanical trade.
B. Refer to the Mechanical plans and drawings and to the control drawings which form part of
these sub-contract documents for the design conditions on which to base sizing and ratings
of the valves and their actuators.
C. The complete valve (body and trim) shall be rated for a pressure that is at least 50% greater
than the maximum pressure to which it will be exposed. Where noted in this Section, the
valve shall be rated for a higher pressure. The complete valve shall be rated for a
temperature that shall be at least 50 deg. C. (90 deg. F.) greater than the maximum
temperature to which it will be exposed. The Manufacturer shall certify that each complete
valve is suitable for and meets all relevant standards for the application.
D. All valves shall be rated appropriately for the fluid, temperature and pressure and, at
minimum, shall have a 16 bar rating. Valves shall comply with BS 5793 and BS EN 60534.
F. Valves shall have the manufacturer's name and the pressure rating clearly marked on the
outside of the body. Where this is not possible manufacturer's name and valve pressure
rating shall be engraved on a minimum 50mm (2 inch) diameter stainless steel tag that shall
be attached to the valve by a chain in such a manner that it cannot be unintentionally
removed.
G. Valves 13mm to 50mm (0.5 inch to 2 inches) shall have screwed ends. Screwed ends shall
comply with BS 21:1985 (Specification for pipe threads for tubes and fittings where
pressure-tight joints are made on the threads - metric dimensions). Valves 63mm (2.5
inches) and larger shall have flanged ends. Flanged valves shall be furnished complete with
companion flanges, gaskets and bolting materials. Flanges, gaskets and bolting materials
shall meet the appropriate BSI requirements.
H. Verify and certify that the materials of construction of the pipe, weld, flange, bolts and valve
will not cause any galvanic corrosion.
J. Valve schedules shall be submitted for review and shall clearly show the following for each
valve:
1) Associated system.
2) Manufacturer and model number.
3) Valve size and line size.
4) Flow rate, flow coefficient (CV) - and pressure drop at design conditions
5) and
Valve authority, flow rate and pressure drop across the valve at design conditions and
pressure drop across the associated mechanical equipment, e.g., coil, heat exchanger,
etc., at design conditions.
6) Valve configuration (e.g. two way, three way, butterfly).
7) Leakage rate.
8) Maximum pressure shut-off capability.
9) Actuator manufacturer and model number.
10) Valve body pressure and temperature rating.
11) Normally open/closed and failure positions.
K. Where necessary to achieve the required performance and pressure drop a control valve may
be sized up to two nominal sizes below line size.
L. Valve bodies shall be cast iron, carbon steel, stainless steel or bronze subject to
requirements for valve body pressure and temperature rating and suitability of material for
application. Valve trim shall be stainless steel.
M. Valve seats shall be replaceable. Valve seats shall be metal, ceramic filled PTFE or
equivalent and must assure tight seating.
N. The BMS Specialist shall certify that the materials of construction are appropriate for the
application. In particular, valves used for the control of glycol solutions shall have a trim
that is suitable for a glycol solution.
A. Provide two-way globe control valves as indicated on the mechanical trade documents.
B. Pressure drop shall not exceed 35 kPa and shall conform to the following requirements:
1) Valves shall be selected such that the valve authority (N) shall not be less than 0.5 as
defined by the relationship: N=P1/(P1+P2); where:
C. Valve shall be capable of tight shut-off when operating at system pressure with the system
pump operating at shut-off head. Leakage rate shall not exceed 0.01% of the rated valve
capacity.
D. Valve shall be straight pattern type. Angle valves shall only be furnished where the piping
configuration does not permit the use of a straight valve.
E. Valves shall be single seat globe type. Double seat valves shall not be furnished.
F. Two-port valves when used to control heater and cooler batteries shall have an equal
percentage or modified parabolic characteristic. Two-port valves when used in liquid
applications systems not detailed above shall have a linear / linear characteristic.
G. Actual valve kvs values shall not deviate from the quoted kvs value by more than ±10%.
H. The kv of the valve shall not deviate from the stated characteristic curve by more than
±10%.
B. Pressure drop shall not exceed 35 kPa and shall conform to the following requirements:
1) Valves shall be selected such that the valve authority (N) shall not be less than 0.5 for
diverting valves and 0.3 for mixing valves as defined by the relationship:
N=P1/(P1+P2) where:
C. Three way control valves shall be of the mixing or diverting pattern type as indicated in the
mechanical documents. The inner valve shall have a V-port parabolic or linear plug and
stainless steel trim. Valves shall have metal-to-metal stainless steel seats to assure tight
seating.
D. Mixing valves shall be capable of tight shut-off between each inlet port and the outlet port
and diverting valves shall be capable of tight shut-off between each outlet port and the inlet
port when operating at system pressure.
B. The pressure drop across modulating butterfly valves at maximum design flow shall not
exceed 20 kPa .
C. Disc pins, where required to secure shaft to disc, shall be 316 stainless steel.
D. The butterfly valve manufacturer shall certify compliance with bubble tight shut-off
requirements at a differential pressure not less than the full rated design working pressure
and temperature specified with the downstream flange removed with flow in either
direction.
F. Where indicated in the Mechanical Trade documents provide linked butterfly valves that
shall comprise two butterfly valves meeting the above requirements mounted on a flanged
cast iron tee with a single actuator which shall modulate one valve open as it closes the
other such that when one is fully open the other is fully closed and vice versa.
A. Instrumentation, such as pressure sensors and flow rate monitors, which is provided for the
monitoring of parameters associated with liquid in pipes or tanks, shall be removable and
replaceable without the requirement to shut down a pump and without the requirement to
drain the pipe or tank and without causing liquid to leak from the pipe or tank. To facilitate
this, the BMS subcontractor shall furnish valves for installation by the mechanical trade.
B. Instrumentation that is mounted external to the pipe or tank and which is connected to the
pipe or tank by one or more sampling lines shall have a manual two-way on/off valve in
each sampling line meeting the following requirements:
5) Rated for 1050 kPa or for a pressure 50% greater then the system working pressure,
whichever is the greater.
6) Rated for a minimum of 50 deg. C (90 deg. F.) greater than the highest fluid
temperature.
7) Brass or stainless steel trim.
8) Valve seats shall be metal, reinforced TFE or equivalent and must assure tight
seating.
9) Valve shall be Whitey 40 Series or 80 Series or approved equal if it meets the
requirements detailed above.
C. Valves for insertion flow meters shall be full port gate valves sized for the flow meter in
accordance with the flow meter manufacturer’s instructions. If the flow meter manufacturer
offers the valve as an accessory then it shall be purchased by the BMS subcontractor from
the insertion flow meter manufacturer and shall be installed by the mechanical trade in
accordance with the insertion flow meter manufacturer’s instructions. The valve shall meet
the pressure and temperature requirements detailed for the control valves and shall have
zero leakage at the system maximum pressure.
A. The BMS Specialist shall provide actuators for valves that are furnished by the BMS
Specialist. All control valve actuators shall be modulating type.
B. Actuator shall be motor driven type. Valve stem position shall be adjustable in increments
of one (1) percent or less of full stem travel.
C. Actuator shall have an integral self-locking gear train, mechanical travel stops and two
adjustable travel limit switches with electrically isolated contacts.
E. Actuator shall be rated for continuous duty and have an input voltage of 220 Vac, 50 Hz or
24 V.
H. Actuator shall be sized to meet the shut-off requirements when operating at the maximum
system differential pressure and with the installed system pump operating at shut-off head.
J. Actuator shall fail as indicated on the control drawings that form part of these sub-contract
documents. Provide spring return to de-energised position on loss of power or loss of
control signal if so required by the sequences of operation.
K. Actuator shall accept control signals compatible with the BMS analogue or digital output
subsystem as appropriate. The valve stem position shall be linearly related to the control
signal.
L. Actuator shall have visual mechanical position indication, showing output shaft and valve
position.
M. Actuator shall operate the valve from the fully closed to the fully open position and vice
versa in less than two minutes.
N. Actuator shall be constructed to withstand high shock and vibration without operations
failure. Materials of construction shall be non-corroding.
O. Actuator shall be equipped with an integral position potentiometer to indicate the stem
position of the valve where required by the control sequences. All valve actuators shall
have integral end position indicators.
P. Actuator and valve shall be mounted and installed only in the location/orientation approved
by the manufacturer. Installation drawings shall clearly indicate the valve location.
Q. Actuator shall have a manual declutch lever to enable manual operation of the valve. It
shall be possible for an operator to manually modulate valves located in mechanical rooms
in the event of loss of power. The operator shall be able to manually modulate the valves
without having to climb a ladder or other non-permanent structure. It shall be ensured that
the valve installation is such that the valve cannot declutch under the influence of gravity
and/or vibration.
A. Provide actuators for all motorised dampers excluding motorised fire and/or smoke rated
dampers. All motorised damper actuators furnished by the BMS Specialist shall be
modulating actuators.
B. Multiple section two position dampers shall be controlled by one BMS output unless
indicated otherwise within the Point Schedules or Sequences of Operation.
D. Actuators shall be mounted to allow complete access for maintenance and removal.
Wherever possible provide damper actuators mounted on the exterior of the duct/damper
section. The installation of actuators within air streams will be permitted only where
damper configurations and site conditions require. Obtain approval for proposed
installations of actuators within ductwork, plenums, airstreams, etc. Furnish access doors
where required to allow access.
E. Damper actuators shall be configured for normal and failure positions as indicated in the
operating sequences and as indicated on the MEP Specialist Mechanical Drawings and
Specifications. Provide damper end switches on 2-position actuators and position feedback
for modulating damper actuators.
G. Provide damper actuator installations to comply with the acoustical requirements for the
project. Noise generated from damper actuators in air streams shall not be detectable in
occupied building spaces.
H. Damper actuators shall be controlled by the BMS where necessary to meet the required
sequences of operation. If the FAS also controls a damper then the FAS control shall
override the BMS control of the damper.
A. Provide electric damper actuators for all motorised dampers. Electric actuators shall meet, at
minimum, the following requirements:
1) Actuators for non-fire and/or smoke rated dampers shall be rated for
operation at ambient temperatures of minus 40 Deg.C. to 50 Deg.C. (-40
Deg. F. to 122 Deg. F.).
2) Complete with damper/actuator stroke position indicator.
3) Manual drive release mechanism and manual positioning mechanism.
B. Actuators shall be quiet in operation such that noise from actuator operation is not
detectable in any occupied spaces.
A. Provide all required hardwired interlocks between fans and any motor actuated dampers as
identified within these sub-contract documents.
B. Power for interlocked dampers shall be obtained from the associated air handling fan motor
control circuit. Coordinate actuator power supply wiring and fire alarm system override
control of dampers with MEP Specialist.
C. Where dampers are specified to be hard wire interlocked with fan motors the BMS
Specialist shall provide the damper position switches. Provide the damper end switch(s)
hard wire interlocked to achieve the operational requirements as specified in the Point
Schedules and the sequences of operation, and as indicated in the MEP Specialist Drawings
and Specifications. Provide damper end switches hard wire interlocked to prevent fan motor
operation in both the hand and auto position of hand/off/auto motor control circuit. Damper
position switches shall be set to indicate the open position when they are open by more than
80%.
D. Provide for each damper that is controlled by both the BMS and the FAS, a terminal strip
and associated control relays such as to allow control and monitoring as follows (as
applicable):
1) BMS two position open-closed control - contact closure of a BMS relay, thermostat
or interlocking device shall control the damper. Contact opening shall close the
damper.
2) BMS modulating control - modulating signal from the BMS of 0-10 Vdc or 4-20 mA
output to achieve the required sequence.
3) Damper open/closed status - allows FAS monitoring or interlock of damper open and
damper close status.
4) Damper open/closed status - allows BMS monitoring or interlock of damper open and
damper close status.
5) Override open control - contact closure of a FAS command relay or localized smoke
detector shall override any BMS modulating or open/closed control to open the
damper.
6) Override closed control - contact closure of a FAS command relay or localized smoke
detector shall override any BMS modulating or open/closed control to close the
damper.
7) Furnish and terminate cabling as follows:
a. Between all damper actuators and the associated damper terminal strip.
b. Between the BMS and the damper terminal strip for any damper monitored
and/or controlled by the BMS.
c. Between the damper terminal strip and interlocked motors, thermostats,
pressure switches, generators, pumps, etc.
E. Coordinate exact FAS interface requirements and terminal strip locations with the MEP
Specialist.
PART 9 - EXECUTION
9.1 TRAINING
A. Submit an outline of the training courses to be given for 2 trainees as assigned by the
employer. This outline shall include a schedule of the training sessions in at least one-half
day increments, indication of the topics to be covered in each session and any prerequisite
requirements that should be met prior to attendance. The training outline shall be submitted
with the initial shop drawing and submittals packages. Training shall not commence unless
the Engineer has approved a training outline. Training shall be coordinated with the
Employer’s designated training coordinator.
B. Training sessions shall include classroom type instruction and "hands on" instruction and
shall be given by the Specialist at the BMS Specialists facilities and on-site as detailed
below. The trainers shall be factory trained and certified from the manufacturer, shall be
experienced with the hardware and software and shall be experienced trainers. The resumes
of the trainers shall be submitted to the Employer and Engineer for approval. The resumes
shall indicate clearly the experience and expertise of the proposed training staff with regard
to both their technical and training capabilities. The BMS Specialist shall certify the
proposed training staff as specialist trainers. The BMS Specialist shall advise the Employer
of the recommended qualifications for the potential trainees.
C. Training shall consist of, 16 No. 4-hour sessions at the BMS Specialist’s facilities. These
training sessions shall be tailored to the construction schedule and they shall be presented in
accordance with a flexible schedule that shall be acceptable to the Employer. Follow up
training shall consist of 8 No. 4-hour sessions on-site using the installed components that
shall be given during the period immediately prior to the acceptance testing. Further follow
up training shall consist of 8 No. 4-hour sessions on-site during the warranty period. These
training sessions during the warranty period shall be scheduled with the Employer.
D. Provide all training materials (hand-outs, textbooks, workbooks etc.) and any audiovisual
equipment required to execute the training.
E. Training sessions shall be formatted to maximize the usage of time of the attendees and
prevent redundant coverage of materials for advanced students. Training sessions shall be
designed on the basis of experience and knowledge of the attendees scheduled to participate
and shall differentiate between the requirements of supervisory, operations and maintenance
personnel. The training shall be specific to this project and shall cover, at minimum, the
following:
F. Provide sufficient training to the Employer’s staff such that they shall be able to map
BACnet object Ids to the terminal server and shall be able to add points to the data storage,
analysis and retrieval functions.
A. Boring and patching for work undertaken by the MEP Specialist to install BMS components
shall be undertaken by the MEP Specialist but the BMS Specialist shall provide boring and
patching of work in those instances where the BMS Specialist has caused damage requiring
boring and patching. The BMS Specialist shall provide boring and patching for all
installation work undertaken by the BMS Specialist. Boring and patching shall meet, at
minimum, the following requirements:
A. The MEP Specialist shall provide fire stopping for components installed by the MEP
Specialist on behalf of the BMS Specialist but if the BMS Specialist damages fire stopping
installed by another trade or the work undertaken by the BMS Specialist requires that fire
stopping be replaced or added, the BMS Specialist shall seal all conduit, cable, or cable tray
penetrations of fire rated assemblies. Seal or fire-stop shall meet, at minimum, the
following requirements:
A. Install all equipment, devices, materials and components in compliance with the
manufacturers recommendations. Supports shall be suitable for the environment within
which the component is to be installed. Coordinate all hanging and supporting of
components with all trades.
B. Boring and cutting shall be kept to a minimum and conducted in a neat and workmanlike
manner. Provide reinforcing and fastening materials as necessary.
A. General Requirements:
1) All components shall be tested by the BMS Specialist to ensure compliance with the
specifications before they leave the BMS Specialist's premises and shall be tested
again on-site by the BMS Specialist before the commencement of acceptance testing.
The BMS Specialist shall not ship components to the project site until they have been
found to be fully compliant with the specifications and the BMS Specialist shall not
request the commencement of acceptance testing until such time as the BMS
Specialist has made a complete and thorough checkout of all equipment on site.
2) Any component furnished under this sub-contract shall be made available for
inspections or tests, as deemed necessary by the Engineer. Use of any component by
the Employer and Engineer shall not imply acceptance of the system or acceptability
of any component. Availability and demonstration of the systems shall not be
withheld and the use of components shall not imply the start of the Defects Liability
Period.
3) Costs associated with the required inspections and testing shall be included in this
scope of work. Additional charges will not be accepted.
4) The BMS Specialist shall make available all equipment, calibrated instruments and
ladders, as necessary to satisfactorily demonstrate the acceptability of the components
and systems. Instrumentation to be used for the verification of monitored parameters
shall be calibrated or supplied by an approved laboratory or manufacturer. Provide
copies of the calibration data with the component test sheets.
5) Installation, engineering, software and system personnel shall be available on-site
during the commissioning tests. These personnel shall be familiar with the installation
and shall undertake all tests as requested by the Engineer in order to verify that the
BMS components individually and in total meet the specifications.
6) The BMS Specialist shall confirm that the person(s) who will be conducting the
commissioning tests on behalf of the BMS Specialist has been actively involved (on
site) throughout the commissioning of the control system. Software shall be
developed, tested and demonstrated over a time span short enough to guarantee
continuity of personnel.
1) When the BMS Specialist has written and tested the software and prior to loading
software into controllers on site, the BMS Specialist shall demonstrate to the
Engineer that the software functions in accordance with the specifications. This shall
be accomplished by in-house simulation of plant operating conditions using switches,
potentiometers, voltmeters and lamps etc., via the BMS graphical interface.
2) The software functionality will be checked during the demonstrations on a clause-by-
clause basis with the specification, with reference to all applicable correspondence,
and with variation orders issued by the Employer.
3) Deficiencies shall be remedied and testing shall be repeated at no additional cost to
the Employer prior to the shipping of the components to the project site.
4) The Engineer shall be advised at least 2 weeks in advance of any scheduled factory
testing and the Engineer shall determine at that time whether the Engineer shall
witness the tests. If the Employer decides that the tests shall be witnessed the
Employer shall select a representative and the BMS Specialist shall pay the costs of
the representative to attend the tests.
1) Prior to commissioning tests, the BMS shall be available for use by the Employer and
Engineer. Use by the Employer and Engineer shall not imply acceptance of any
component of the BMS or the commencement of the Defects Liability Period.
2) Provide staff to assist the Engineer in the inspections made during the installation
period to review the progress and quality of the ongoing work. The Engineer will
generate Field Observation Reports on the findings of the inspection. The Engineer
shall advise the BMS Specialist during the inspection of any concerns noted with
respect to the installation and shall repeat the concerns in writing as soon as possible
after the inspection is completed. The BMS Specialist shall take corrective action to
meet the requirement of the specifications.
3) Failure of the Engineer to identify any error or omission during inspections shall not
relieve the BMS Specialist of any of the specification requirements and shall not
imply that a deviation from the specification has been accepted.
1) Prior to the scheduling of the commissioning tests with the Engineer, perform a
complete and detailed operational check of each BMS component. Tests shall be
documented as detailed below and shall cover all of the testing requirements detailed
in this Section for the commissioning tests. The Engineer shall undertake such
random testing as the Engineer considers necessary to verify the acceptability of the
components.
2) All component testing involving the verification of air and water flow rate monitoring
shall be scheduled in conjunction with the air and water-balancing Specialists. In
particular, this shall apply to the verification of all control and monitoring parameters
for terminal units.
3) Point to point checks shall be proven from the field device/interface operation to the
controller/outstation and from the controller to the presentation of the point on the
graphics. The results from the point-to-point tests shall be submitted for approval on
pre-defined schedules.
4) Point to point checks shall verify:
E. Systems Testing:
1) Systems testing shall not commence until all component testing has been successfully
undertaken and approved by the Engineer.
2) System testing shall be undertaken by the BMS Specialist and the BMS Specialist
shall complete the Specialist’s portion of the system performance verification sheets.
The completed system performance verification test sheets shall be submitted to the
Engineer.
3) The BMS Specialist shall schedule a repeat of the system performance verification
tests at a time convenient to the Engineer. These tests for the verification by the
Engineer shall not be scheduled until the BMS Specialist has verified that all systems
are operating in accordance with the specifications.
4) The Engineer’s verification tests shall be performed by the BMS Specialist and shall
be witnessed by the Engineer who shall complete the Engineer’s portion of the
system performance verification test sheets as each test is successfully undertaken.
The BMS Specialist shall remedy any deficiencies that are observed during the
system performance verification tests and retesting shall be scheduled at a time
suitable to the Engineer. If there are deficiencies remaining after the follow-up
systems performance verification testing that require further testing by the Engineer,
then the expenses of the Engineer incurred in providing the additional follow-up tests
to verify compliance with the specifications, including travel, subsistence,
accommodation and normal consulting fees, shall be paid by the BMS Specialist at no
additional cost to the Employer.
5) The following shall be demonstrated as a minimum:
b. Each and every point on the system including calibration checks and the
stroking of actuators.
c. All dynamic graphics comply with the mechanical and control specifications.
d. All system programs comply with the specification under the normal modes of
operation, emergency power, building fire detected and fireman's override
operating modes.
e. All system alarms comply with the specification.
f. System stability.
g. Dynamic tests to prove control stability and that environmental conditions are
being maintained.
F. Test Coordination:
1) Testing of the BMS during the systems and integrated testing shall be coordinated
with all other trades associated with the system being tested. The system shall be
tested as a complete entity during these tests. The BMS portion of the systems shall
not be tested in isolation.
1) The BMS Specialist shall develop and fully test all software required for the interface
between the BMS and equipment furnished by others prior to the delivery of the
associated hardware and software components to the project site. There shall be no
software development on site except that associated with the entry of database items
such as setpoints, alarm limits, control constants and schedules.
2) The third party interfaces shall be fully demonstrated to the Engineer at the BMS
Specialist’s facilities prior to the installation of any BMS microprocessor based
components at the project site. The demonstration shall include all hardware and
software components associated with the interfaces.
3) The third party interfaces shall be re-tested on site following the testing and
acceptance by the Engineer of the individual low voltage systems.
4) The BMS Specialist shall fully demonstrate that the BACnet objects are provided at
the BMS Management level network in accordance with the requirements of these
specifications.
H. Test Documentation:
1) Test results shall be documented using test sheets. The test sheets shall be prepared
in an appropriate format for the various categories of component and system to be
tested. Component test sheet forms included within this section indicate a minimum
acceptable standard. The final format of the proposed test forms shall be submitted
by the BMS Specialist for approval at the shop drawing stage. The component and
system performance verification sheets attached to this Section of the sub-contract
Documents are provided to the Specialist for information and to serve as a guide for
the minimum standards required. These attached examples of component and system
test sheets are generic in nature and may not accurately reflect the actual sequences of
operation that are to be implemented and not all systems and component types are
covered by these example test verification sheets. It is the responsibility of the BMS
Specialist to provide test verification sheets for each component and system that
accurately reflect the sequences of operation and appropriate data for the components
and systems as furnished under this sub-contract.
2) Completed component test sheets indicating the test results for each BMS component
within the system shall be submitted to the Engineer, together with a proposed
schedule for system commissioning tests, at least X weeks prior to the proposed
system commissioning tests. The Engineer shall determine on the basis of the BMS
Specialist's component testing, whether or not it is appropriate to commence system-
commissioning tests. It shall be the Engineer’s decision as to whether the system
commissioning tests can proceed as proposed by the BMS Specialist or whether
deficiencies have to be remedied and additional testing undertaken before the system
commissioning tests can proceed.
3) At minimum, component test sheets will be prepared to cover each of the following
items:
1) System test sheets shall be prepared for the testing of, at minimum, each
of the systems detailed in the point definition sheets. The test sheets
shall be based on the sub-contract requirements and not on the system as
installed.
2) All test documentation shall be maintained in electronic format and in
hard copy.
A. Prior to system acceptance and turnover and as a condition of system acceptance, the
following documents are to be submitted in four copies in accordance with requirements of
Division 1:
1) Tests and calibration data pertinent to each item installed in the systems.
2) Password at all levels.
B. The BMS sub-contractor shall handover all programmes, database, configuration and
network data to the Employer.
D. The BMS sub-contractor shall provide documentation detailing the methods and techniques
required to connect additional workstations, DDC controllers, gateways, routers and any
other BMS hardware and to add BACnet objects to the software as well as to export the data
in any of the previously mentioned standards to another system. The system documentation
shall be sufficiently detailed to enable the BMS’s incorporation into another BACnet system
in the future.
E. The BMS sub-contractor shall provide interoperability documentation for the BACnet
components. All the data related to the components shall be presented along with their
respective BACnet object ID created in the system, along with their PICS, BIBBS,
addresses and method statements to read and write data via integration of the components
with another system in future.
F. The documentation shall include comprehensive and complete details of the LonWorks
components (if provided) including details of all XIF, SNVTs, SCPTs, UNVTs, UCPTs and
External Interface Files (XIF). The LonWorks interoperability data shall also include their
respective BACnet object ID generated in the system against their LonWorks SNVT/SCPT
data and method statements to read and write data via integration of the LonWorks
components with another system in future.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce design
objectives, including the following:
1. Balancing airflow and water flow within distribution systems, including submains,
branches, and terminals, to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances.
2. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities.
3. Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment.
4. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment.
5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
6. Measuring sound and vibration.
7. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.
1. Testing and adjusting requirements unique to particular systems and equipment are
included in the Sections that specify those systems and equipment.
2. Field quality-control testing to verify that workmanship quality for system and
equipment installation is specified in system and equipment Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to
reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.
B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches,
and terminals, according to design quantities.
C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of
high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is
withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.
E. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
F. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In
a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.
G. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction
side.
H. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that
cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
I. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings
of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was
performance tested.
J. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves
the distribution system.
L. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and
reporting the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from the Contractor's Notice to
Proceed, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3 of
this Section.
C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
submit 2 copies of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and step-by-step
procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article below. Include a complete set of
report forms intended for use on this Project.
D. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports prepared,
as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and
balancing Agent.
E. Sample Report Forms: Submit 2 sets of sample testing, adjusting, and balancing report
forms.
F. Warranty: Submit 2 copies of special warranty specified in the "Warranty" Article below.
A. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by either
AABC or NEBB, or having at least 5 years of successful experience on projects with
testing, adjusting and balancing requirements similar to those required for this project.
B. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Conference: Meet with the Owner's and the Engineer's
representatives on approval of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and procedures
plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of testing,
adjusting, and balancing team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service
representatives, HVAC controls Installer, and other support personnel. Provide 7 days'
advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.
C. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing, adjusting,
and balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified testing,
adjusting, and balancing reports.
2. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the approved
testing, adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced in
this Specification.
D. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent's
standard forms approved by the Engineer.
1.6 COORDINATION
B. Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and
times.
C. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and water
distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of
systems and equipment.
1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of the
Contract.
2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells,
flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are
required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these
balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for
efficient system and equipment operation.
D. Examine Engineer's and Engineer's design data, including HVAC system descriptions,
statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and
statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves. Relate performance
data to project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create
undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
Calculate system effect factors to reduce the performance ratings of HVAC equipment when
installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was
performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and
charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's
"HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data
and installed conditions.
F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that
testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification
Sections have been performed.
H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing
devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing
valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and their locations
are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and
equipment operation.
I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
J. Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are
greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for
operation.
K. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes and mixing boxes, to verify that
they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.
L. Examine plenum ceilings, utilized for supply air, to verify that they are airtight. Verify that
pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed.
N. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
O. Examine open-piping-system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
P. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and
controls.
1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices operate by the intended controller.
2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully
closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing
boxes, and variable-air-volume terminals.
4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including 2-way valves are properly
connected.
5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts,
and cold walls.
6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
8. Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system reactions to
changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from design values.
9. Interlocked systems are operating.
10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to design values.
R. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and
balancing procedures.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step
procedures.
B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the
following:
7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
8. Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations can be
met.
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and this
Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and
balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those
removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifications for this
Project.
C. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material,
including damper-control positions, valve indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar
controls and devices, to show final settings.
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes
with required fan volumes.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow
measurements.
E. Check the airflow patterns from the fresh air louvers and dampers and the return- and
exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
A. The procedures in this Article apply to constant-volume supply-, return-, and exhaust-air
systems. Additional procedures are required for variable-air-volume systems and process
exhaust-air systems. These additional procedures are specified in other articles in this
Section.
B. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm listed by the
fan manufacturer.
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable
and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible
connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan
as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct
restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the
plenum that houses the fan.
a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance
personnel must change filters.
3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat
recovery equipment, and air washers under final balanced conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static
pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with
calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend
corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
5. Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design with the approval of the Engineer.
Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to
accommodate fan-speed changes.
6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-
motor amperage to ensure no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling,
full heating, and economizer modes to determine the maximum required brake
horsepower.
C. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to design
airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a. Where sufficient space in submains and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-
tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and
calculate the total airflow for that zone.
2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submains and branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances.
E. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflows within specified
tolerances of design values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors
and the dampers at the air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified tolerances of design
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.6 MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
A. Verify proper rotation of fans and measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures. Record
compressor data.
A. During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in temperature
regulation within the automatic temperature-control system.
B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of 2
successive 8-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final
temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.
B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect
control functions.
C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.
E. Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve
operators.
F. Verify sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions
and correlate with airflow and water-flow measurements. Note the speed of response to
input changes.
I. Verify main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.
J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine if the system operates on
a grounded or nongrounded power supply.
K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.
3.10 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
3.11 REPORTING
B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and
balancing engineer.
1. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
C. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the following:
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Manufacturers' test data.
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved
Shop Drawings and Product Data.
D. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data in
the final report, as applicable:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Engineer's name and address.
6. Contractor's name and address.
7. Report date.
8. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report.
9. Summary of contents, including the following:
E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems.
Present with single-line diagrams and include the following:
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.
F. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches
(mm).
j. Number of belts, make, and size.
k. Number of filters, type, and size.
3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in fins per inch (mm o.c.).
f. Make and model number.
2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches
(mm).
3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
I. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
J. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the
following:
2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
K. Pump Test Reports: For pumps, include the following data. Calculate impeller size by
plotting the shutoff head on pump curves.
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Service.
d. Make and size.
e. Model and serial numbers.
f. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s).
g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa).
h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig (kPa).
i. Pump rpm.
j. Impeller diameter in inches (mm).
k. Motor make and frame size.
l. Motor horsepower and rpm.
m. Voltage at each connection.
2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
A. Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional testing
and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to
correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not performed
during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing, and
adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
B. Electrical Work, unless otherwise specified, includes the supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of the complete electrical systems, equipment and materials shown on the
Drawings and/or described in the Specification together with all associated ancillary work,
support work and builder's work in connection.
A. Regulations: Carry out electrical work in accordance with the current issue of the local
codes of practice, local power authority regulations and [Requirements for Electrical
Installations – IEE Wiring Regulations (BS 7671) as published by the Institution of
Electrical Engineers National Electrical Code (NEC / NFPA 70) as published by the
National Fire Protection Association where not in contradiction with the local codes of
practice and regulations, herein referred to collectively as 'the Regulations'.
C. Standards: Unless otherwise specified, equipment and materials are to be manufactured and
installed in compliance with the relevant recommendations of the following or other equal
and approved standards:
D. Local standards, where enforced and relevant, are to have precedence over the Standards.
A. The Local Power Authority will provide incoming power supply and connection at 13.8kV
to the location shown on the Drawings.
C. kWH-metering: Liaise with the Local Power Authority and provide necessary
instrumentation, enclosures and accessories required by them to effect a complete kWH-
metering installation.
1. Medium voltage: 13.8 kV, 3phase, 3 wire low impedance neutral earthing.
2. Low voltage: 380/220 V, 3 phase, 4 wire, solidly earthed neutral.
3. Frequency: 60 Hz.
F. Distribution systems are to be supplied or derived from the voltage system previously
described, as shown on the Drawings, or as otherwise specified.
A. The Local Telephone Authority will bring telephone public exchange lines into the premises
to the location shown on the Drawings and/or to be agreed with the Authority. Liaise with
the Local Telephone Authority to confirm location of connection of public telephone
exchange lines into the premises.
1.6 EQUIPMENT
A. Equipment Spaces and Rooms: Verify that dimensions, structure, ventilating and cooling
arrangements and other provisions in equipment spaces and rooms are suitable for
installation, operation and maintenance of proposed equipment. Note any discrepancies on
the shop and construction drawings.
B. Equipment is to be designed for the system voltage and frequency previously described,
unless otherwise specified. Special provisions are to be made for equipment sensitive to
power supply frequency and voltage variations and for equipment operated at other
voltages/frequencies or by direct current sources.
A. Equipment, including transformers, switchgear, cables, relays, lighting fixtures, motors etc.,
is to be designed and derated for continuous and trouble free service under the following
climatic conditions:
B. Where design and operating conditions, different from the above are required for particular
equipment, they are described in the specification of the equipment concerned.
1.8 DRAWINGS
A. Equipment locations shown on the Drawings indicate approximate locations and general
layout of equipment. Exact and final locations and layouts together with dimensions,
weights, mounting methods and accessories, where relevant, are to be shown on Contractor's
shop and construction drawings.
B. Symbols: In order to provide sufficient detail and a minimum degree of clarity on the
Drawings, the symbols used for various electrical devices, particularly wall mounted
devices, take up more space on the Drawings than the device does on the wall. Because of
drafting limitations these locations must be considered as being indicative rather than exact
physical locations of the devices. The devices shall be installed with prime regard for
convenience of operation and the proper usage of the wall space rather than to coincide with
the scaled locations of the symbols. In locating the outlets, follow the criteria provided on
detail Drawings where provided, and coordinate with furniture. Do not scale from design
Drawings.
C. Wiring layouts shown on the Drawings are to be used as a guide only to defining basic
positions, circuiting, loading and switching arrangements. Actual layouts and details of
routing of circuits are to be shown on the Contractor's shop and construction drawings.
D. Wiring layouts shown on the Drawings for work not included in the Electrical Work, such
as motor control centres/panels, cables to motors and other similar electrically operated
equipment are shown for convenience and reference only.
1.9 SUBMITTALS
A. Generally: Submit for approval, manufacturers' technical literature, shop and construction
drawings and other information required by the Specification, before ordering equipment or
materials and before executing any related work on site.
D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
E. Coordination Study: Carry out a short circuit and protection coordination study, for the
electrical distribution network, and submitted to Engineer for approval.
G. List of Proposed Manufacturers: Of all equipment and materials, including all items for
which choice of manufacturer is at own discretion, is to be submitted for approval.
I. Test Certificates and Reports: Submit manufacturer's type and routine test certificates and
reports for equipment and devices. Complete test results are to be submitted in clearly
identified and organised booklets, indicating item of equipment, make, model, type, date of
tests, type of tests, descriptions and procedures. Include in the test reports the Quality
Assurance Certification, the standards to which the equipment comply, and the standards to
which the equipment was tested.
K. Spare Parts Schedules: Submit with the Tender itemised schedules of spare parts to be
provided, as required by the Specification, and state against each item the manufacturer's
unit price including packaging and delivery to site.
L. Tools And Instruments Schedules: Submit with the Tender itemised schedules of tools and
instruments to be provided, as required by the Specification, and state against each item the
manufacturer's unit price including packaging and delivery to site.
M. Labeling Schedule: Submit for approval, prior to installation, a schedule of all equipment
and devices to be labeled and the suggested details, lettering, position and fixing methods of
each label indicating its application.
N. Samples: Submit samples of all equipment and materials for approval. Major items of
equipment for which samples cannot be submitted are to be demonstrated in existing
installations or by manufacturer's information, test certificates and reports.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and
arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical
installations that follow.
1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other
structural components as they are constructed.
B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for
efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning
before closing in the building.
D. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by
finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access
Doors."
F. Where acoustical ceilings and similar finishes will conceal electrical identification markings
and devices, coordinate installation of these items before ceiling installation.
A. Availability: Confirm availability of equipment and materials proposed for use in the work
prior to submission for approval. If, after approval, equipment or materials cease to be
available, submit alternative items of equal quality and type for approval.
G. Defective Equipment: The Employer reserves the right to operate operable defective
equipment during the Defects Liability Period until it can be removed from service for
repair or replacement.
I. Spare Parts: Not later than the date of substantial completion, provide spare parts required
by the Specification, together with suitable means of identifying, storing and securing same.
J. Tools and Instruments: Not later than the date of substantial completion, provide sets of
tools and instruments required by the Specification, together with suitable means of
identifying, storing and securing same.
K. Label and identify all equipment, instruments, control and electrical devices etc. to indicate
duty, service or function, to the satisfaction of Engineer. Labels are to have English.
Alternative methods of labelling may be submitted for approval. Fix labels with non-
corrodible screws to equipment, or to adjacent permanent surfaces or as approved by
Engineer.
L. Systems used before substantial completion are to have all consumable elements, such as
lamps etc. and defective equipment replaced by new, within 7 days prior to the date of
substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
C. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 14-mm diameter
slotted holes at a maximum of 50-mm centers in webs.
D. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded
C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or
click-type hangers.
A. Identification Devices: A single type of identification product for each application category.
Use colors prescribed by these Specifications.
B. Raceway and Cable Labels: Minimum size of letters for legend and minimum length of
color field for each raceway and cable size to meet Standards.
C. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl
tape, not less than 25 mm wide by 0.08 mm thick.
E. Tape Markers for Wire: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with
preprinted numbers and letters.
F. Equipment Nameplates: Non-corroding, robust metal, inscribed in English, and firmly fixed
to equipment at factory. Nameplates are to indicate name and address of manufacturer,
model, serial number, basic characteristics and ratings of equipment and are to include
elementary diagrams etc., all in accordance with the Standards.
G. Color-Coding Cable Ties: Nylon, self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme.
H. Engraved-Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock, melamine plastic
laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1.6-mm minimum thickness for signs
up to 129 sq. cm and 3.2-mm minimum thickness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black
letters on white background.
K. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless steel screws or No. 10/32
stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
A. Covers in electrical rooms and the like, unless otherwise specified or shown on the
Drawings, are to be flanged checkered steel plates with angle or channel- section frames,
suitably reinforced to support anticipated loads, and finished with zinc chromate primer and
two coats gray enamel.
A. Brackets, supports, rails and tracks for supporting electrical installations are to be
galvanized steel, fixed with expansion bolts of approved size and material. Plastic inserts
and lead anchors are not acceptable unless approved for specific light duty installations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Installations Generally:
1. Carry out Electrical Work in accordance with the Drawings, Specification and
Regulations, ensuring compliance with design and performance requirements, to
provide safe and protected systems with equipment readily accessible for operation,
maintenance and repair.
2. Installations are to be complete, ready for operation and fully integrated and
coordinated with all other work.
3. Provide accessories necessary to complete the installations, of the types specified or
recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer of the equipment or accessories.
B. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,
arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.
C. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other
building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
E. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at
least four; minimum of 90-kg design load.
A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical
components.
B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways.
Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies
and for securing hanger rods and conduits.
D. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent
minimum in the future.
F. Install 6-mm- diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is
carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.
I. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support.
Support sheet-metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar
hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the
raceway with an approved fastener not more than 600 mm from the box.
J. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control
enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are
mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength.
K. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-
drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and
fire-rated gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves
during erection of concrete and masonry walls.
L. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise
indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are
indicated:
A. Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and
maintenance of equipment.
B. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical
identification with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or
required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
E. Tag and label circuits designated to be extended in the future. Identify source and circuit
numbers in each cabinet, pull and junction box, and outlet box. Color-coding may be used
for voltage and phase identification.
F. Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling, for exterior
underground power, control, signal, and communication lines located directly above power
and communication lines. Locate 150 to 200 mm below finished grade. If width of multiple
lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 400 mm, overall,
use a single line marker.
G. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where needed to ensure safe operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved
plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for
system or equipment operation. Install metal-backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.
A. Apply fire stopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall
assemblies to achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Fire stopping materials and
installation requirements are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop
System."
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated or otherwise required, but not less than
100 mm larger, in both directions, than supported unit. Follow supported equipment
manufacturer's anchorage recommendations and setting templates for anchor-bolt and tie
locations, unless otherwise indicated. Use 21-MPa, 28-day compressive-strength concrete
and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
A. Support frames for switchgear located over cable trenches, where shown on the Drawings or
required by equipment design, are to be installed prior to pouring concrete.
A. Drilling for anchor bolts is to be carried out using appropriate electric drills and in approved
positions.
B. Holes and chases in in situ concrete are to be cast in. Do not cut hardened concrete or drill
holes larger than 10-mm diameter without prior approval.
C. Holes and Chases in Pre-cast Concrete: do not cut or drill pre-cast concrete without prior
approval.
D. Holes in Structural Steelwork: Do not cut or drill structural steelwork without prior
approval.
F. Cutting Masonry:
G. Preformed Holes in Masonry: Submit proposals for bridging over holes for ducts etc. which
exceed 450-mm width.
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to
permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent
undisturbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing fire stopping has been
disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades
involved.
A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following:
A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in
Division 9 Section "Painting."
1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats
to suit the degree of damage at each location.
2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for
timing and application of successive coats.
3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating
recommended by manufacturer.
B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes,
and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. The following Sections contain special requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 2 Section "Underground Ducts and Utility Structures" for ground earth pits.
2. Division 13 Section "Lightning Protection" for additional grounding and bonding
materials.
3. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
4. Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables".
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes complete installations to earth every source of energy and to provide
protective earthing and equipotential bonding, based on the TN-S system arrangement,
including:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The following terms used on the Drawings and in the Specification are equivalent and may
be used interchangeably: "earth" and "ground"; "earthing" and "grounding".
B. Earth: Conductive mass of the Earth whose electric potential at any point is conventionally
taken as zero.
C. Earth Electrode: Conductor or group of conductors in initial contact with, and providing
electrical connection to, Earth.
D. Exposed Conductive Part: Any part which can be readily touched and which is not a live
part, but which may become live under fault conditions.
E. Extraneous Conductive Part: Any conductive part not forming part of the electrical
installation such as structural metalwork of a building, metallic gas pipes, water pipes,
heating tubes etc. and non-electrical apparatus electrically connected to them i.e. radiators,
cooking ranges, metal sinks etc. and non-insulating floors and walls.
F. Protective Conductor: Conductor used for some measure of protection against electric shock
and intended for connecting together any of the following parts:
G. Electrically Independent Earth Electrodes: Earth electrodes located at such distance from
one another that maximum current likely to flow through one of them does not significantly
affect the potential of the other(s).
H. Main Earthing Terminal or Bar: The terminal or bar provided for the connection of
protective conductors, including equipotential bonding and functional earthing conductors if
any to the means of earthing.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Prior to ordering materials, submit data for approval including, but not
limited to, manufacturer’s catalogues for each type of product indicated including the
following:
1. Ground rods.
2. Connecting clamps.
3. Earthing conductors, protective conductors, and bonding conductors.
4. Connectors and other accessories.
5. Exothermic welding kits and tools.
B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects/engineers and owners, and
other information specified or required by Engineer.
C. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports to include the following:
D. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Exact location of earth pits, rods and details of installation and connections.
2. Exact routing of buried earthing conductors with indication of cross-section, depth of
laying and covering.
3. Cross sectional area of all earthing, protective and bonding conductors.
G. Calculation as specified in this section to ensure proper earthing system as per specified
standard.
2.1 MANUFACTURERS:
1. BICC (England)
2. Furse (England)
3. G.E.C. (England)
4. Copper weld (U.S.A)
B. Earth electrode is to consist of one or more earth rods, interconnected by buried earthing
tape or cable, which is to have a total combined resistance value, during any season of the
year and before interconnection to other earthed systems or earthing means, not exceeding 5
ohms. Distance between two rods is not to be less than twice the length of one rod driven
depth.
C. Ring type earth electrode is to consist of earthing conductors, in a closed loop, buried in
exterior wall foundations underneath the water-proofing, or alternatively at 0.6 m around the
perimeter of the building foundations, as shown on the Drawings. Connect all earthing
conductors to this ring. Insulated connection flags into the building, of same material as
earthing conductors, are to be located at positions of service entrance and main switchboard
rooms, terminating in bolt-type earth points (studs) or test- links for connection of main
earth bar(s). Additional earth rods connecting with the earth ring are to be provided, as
necessary, to bring down earth electrode resistance to an acceptable value.
D. Functional earth electrode is to be provided separately from, but interconnected to, other
earth electrode(s) through suitably rated (470 V) spark gap. Functional earth electrodes are
to be used for earthing electronic equipment (communication equipment, digital processors,
computers etc.) as required by the particular Section of the Specification and
recommendation of manufacturer.
E. Alternative Earth Electrode: other types of earth electrode may be used, after approval,
including:
F. Main earthing bar is to be provided at point of service entrance or main distribution room,
and as described in the Specification or shown on the Drawings. Connect all earthing
conductors, protective conductors and bonding conductors to the main earthing bar. Provide
two insulated main earthing conductors, one at each end of the bar, connected via testing
joints to the earth electrode at two separate earth pits. Conductor is to be sized to carry
maximum earth fault current of system at point of application with final conductor
temperature not exceeding 160 deg. C for at least 5 second. Main earthing conductors are to
be minimum 120 mm2 or as otherwise required by the particular Section of the
Specification.
G. Testing joints (test links) are to be provided, in an accessible position, on each main earthing
conductor, between earthing terminal or bar and earth electrode.
H. Protective conductors are to be separate for each circuit. Where protective conductor is
common to several circuits, cross-sectional area of protective conductor is to be the largest
of the conductor sizes.
I. Protective conductors are not to be formed by conduit, trunking, ducting or the like. Where
armored cable is specified and armor is steel, it may be used as a protective conductor, if
approved and if not otherwise shown on the Drawings.
K. Earth Fault Loop Impedance: For final circuits supplying socket outlets, earth fault
impedance at every socket outlet is to be such that disconnection of protective device on
over-current occurs within 0.4 seconds. For final circuits supplying only fixed equipment,
earth fault loop impedance at every point of utilization is to be such that disconnection
occurs within 5 seconds.
1. Use appropriate tables and present same for approval by the Engineer (IEE
Regulations: Tables 41A1 and 41A2, Appendix 7 and Regulation 543).
M. Main Equipotential Bonding: Main incoming and outgoing water pipes and any other
metallic service pipes are to be connected by main equipotential bonding conductors to main
earth terminal or bar. Bonding connections are to be as short as practicable between point
of entry/exit of services and main earthing bar. Where meters are installed, bonding is to be
made on the premise side of the meter. Cross-sections of conductors are not to be less than
half that of the earthing conductor connected thereto, and minimum 6 mm2.
A. Buried Earth Conductors: Bare annealed copper strip conductors 25 x 3 mm, or annealed
stranded copper conductors 120 mm2 cross-section.
C. Protective Conductors: Single core stranded annealed copper, PVC insulated cables, having
rated insulation grade compatible with circuit protected, or to be a conductor forming part of
a multi-core cable, color coded.
D. Protective Bonding Conductors: Bare copper strip conductor, annealed stranded copper
cable or flexible strap (flexible braid) of cross-sectional area as described in Article
"General Requirements" hereof.
E. Main Earthing Bar: Hard drawn copper, 40 x 4 mm where formed into a closed loop, and 50
x 6 mm where open-ended. Earth bar is to be labeled 'Main Earth Bar' and is to be drilled,
for connection of conductors, at a spacing not less than 75 mm, and is to be supplied with
copper alloy bolts, nuts and washers and wall mounting insulators.
F. Testing Joints (Test Links): Copper or copper alloy, with bolted end connections,
disconnectable by use of a tool, and suitably sized for earthing conductors or earth bar
connection. Links are to be fixed to porcelain or other approved insulating supports.
Contact surfaces are to be tinned.
A. Copper or copper alloy, purpose made, of approved design, compatible with points of
connection, and of adequate cross-section and current carrying capacity.
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's
written instructions.
A. Ground Rod: 16-mm diameter high strength, low carbon steel core of high tensile strength
(600 N/mm2), with 99.99% pure electrolytic copper molecularly bonded into steel core,
0.25 mm minimum thickness. Driving head is to be high strength steel. Couplings are to be
long length silicon bronze, internally threaded. Threads are to be rolled onto rod to ensure
uniform layers of copper and strength. Earth rod is to be complete with couplings, head and
bolted connector of sufficient size, and number of bolted clamps to connect all cables
terminated thereto.
B. Tape Mats: Where earth rods are not likely to be used, earth electrode is to consist of
parallel and perpendicular copper strip, 2.4 m apart, welded together by exothermic welds to
form a grid. Tape is to be 25 x 3-mm strip conductor.
C. Earth Pit: Precast, square or circular section concrete handhole (minimum 450 mm internal
diameter), with concrete cover, and extending to about 150 mm below top of earth rod.
Earth pit is to be provided for each earth rod where connected to an earthing conductor.
Cover is to have inset brass plate with inscription 'Earth Pit - Do Not Remove'.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. MV switchgear is to have separate main earthing bar connected to framework or earth bar of
each item by bare conductor and the earth-electrode by two insulated earthing conductors,
one at each end of bar, via testing joints. Earthing conductor is to be minimum 50 mm2.
B. Outdoor ring main units, which are individually mounted, are to be connected to earth
electrode by one insulated earthing conductor, bolted at earthing terminal.
C. LV switchgear is to have separate main earthing bar connected to framework or earth bar of
each item by bare conductor and the earth electrode at two extreme ends by two insulated
earthing conductors through testing joints. Earthing conductor size is to be minimum 120
mm2.
F. Lightning arresters are to be directly connected to earth electrode, following the shortest
path. Each lightning arrester is to be connected at a dedicated earth rod.
A. Main earthing bar is to be provided in main distribution room and connected to earth
electrode by two insulated conductors (minimum 120 mm2) via testing joints.
B. Earthing bars of main distribution boards are to be connected, by bare earthing conductor,
directly to main earthing bar at main distribution room and by protective conductor run with
incoming feeder from respective supply point.
D. Socket outlets are to be earthed by protective conductor looped around with the branch
circuit and connected to earth terminal within socket outlet box and to which socket outlet
terminal is to be connected.
E. Final Ring Sub-Circuits: Protective conductor of every final ring sub-circuit is to be in the
form of a ring having both ends connected to earth terminal at origin of circuit in
panelboard.
F. Lighting fixtures and other exposed conductive parts of electrical installations, such as
switches, heaters, air conditioning units etc. are to be connected by protective earth
conductors to earthing terminals of respective panelboards.
A. Generator neutral (star point) is to be connected by insulated earthing conductor through the
neutral earthing link or device to main earthing bar. Neutral earthing conductor is to be
suitably sized to carry maximum earth fault current for time it takes the system protection to
operate with final conductor temperature not exceeding 150 deg. C, but not less than 30
mm2 per 100 kVA of generator rating, with a minimum of 50 mm2.
C. Switchgear (ATS) and Control Gear: Earthing terminals or bars of switchgear and control
gear are to be connected by separate protective conductors to respective normal and
emergency main distribution board earth bars.
D. Extraneous conductive parts including steel frames, battery racks, day-tank, pumps and
piping are to be connected by bare copper earthing conductors to main earth bar in
compliance with bonding regulations.
A. Main earthing bar or loop is to be conveniently located in mechanical plant rooms, and
connected by earthing conductors to exposed conductive parts of motor control centre at its
earthing bar, and to motors, switches and other electrical equipment etc. at their earthing
terminals, using 20 x 2 mm bare copper strips or 35 mm2 bare copper conductor
(minimum size) or as required to carry maximum earth fault current for 1 second with final
conductor temperature not exceeding 200 deg. C. Conductors are to be securely fixed,
recessed in floor grooves or niches, or fixed to walls by appropriate staples. Earth bar or
loop is to be securely fixed to building wall with copper or brass saddles.
B. Main earthing bar or loop is to be connected at two extremely separate points to earth
electrode, directly through two test joints by insulated earthing conductors, or connected to
main earth bar by protective conductors.
C. Motor and other equipment earth terminals are to be connected also by protective earth
conductors of each branch circuit to earth terminal/bar at motor control centre, panel or
distribution unit.
A. Earthing Cables: separate protective earthing cables for lighting column circuits are to be
run with power circuit, terminated at LV supply position in lighting control panel and
looped into column earthing terminals. The last column is to be bonded via an earthing bolt
to a single 14 mm diameter copper covered steel rod, 2.5 m long, driven into ground
adjacent to column. Bonding is to be 16 mm2 stranded bare copper conductor.
B. Connections between rods and earthing conductors are to be made by the Cadweld process
producing a fused joint. Bolted connections may be used for connection to removable items
of equipment only.
A. Signal and Communication Systems: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other
communication systems, provide 16mm2 minimum insulated grounding conductor in
raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring
closet, and central equipment location.
1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding
conductor on a 6.4-by-50-by-300-mm grounding bus.
2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.
3.7 INSTALLATION
B. Earth Rods: While siting earth rods, ensure that resistance areas associated with individual
rods do not overlap. Earth rods are to be located at a distance greater than 600 mm from
foundations of buildings. Where rock is encountered, a hole of sufficient size is to be drilled
before lowering the rod. Conductive filler such as Marconite or Bentonite or equal filler
that will not corrode, is to be provided around the rod.
C. Buried earthing conductors are to be laid at a depth not less than 0.8 m from ground surface.
D. Earthing conductors are to follow shortest path between earth rods and main earthing
terminals or bars, and are to run in PVC conduit fastened to building structure by approved
supports and extending 0.2 m above level, and are to be protected against mechanical
damage and corrosion.
E. Protective Conductors: Separate protective conductors, which are not part of a cable, are to
be fixed on same support or drawn into same conduit as circuit conductors.
F. Protective Bonding: Remove any non-conductive paint, enamel or similar coating at threads,
contact points and surfaces and ensure that bonding is made by fittings designed to make
secure bonds.
3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Protection against Corrosion: Protect bolted connections against corrosion either by filling
with vaseline or coating with a special anti-corrosion compound and proper capping.
C. Connections: Where earth connections between dissimilar metals must be made, use
bimetallic fittings and protect by coating with moisture resisting bituminous paint or
compound, or by wrapping with protective tape to exclude moisture.
E. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in applicable Standards.
A. Combined resistance of earth electrodes is to be measured during dry season and checked
against specified resistance.
C. Electrical continuity of all earthing and protective conductors including main and
supplementary equipotential bonding conductors is to be checked.
D. Earth fault loop impedance of all circuits is to be measured and checked against calculated
impedance figures.
A. Restore surface features, including vegetation, at areas disturbed by Work of this Section.
Reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. If sod has been removed, replace it
as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore areas disturbed by trenching,
storing of dirt, cable laying, and other activities to their original condition. Include
application of topsoil, fertilizer, lime, seed, sod, sprig, and mulch. Comply with Division 2
Section "Landscaping." Maintain restored surfaces. Restore disturbed paving as indicated.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes low voltage (LV) feeder cables, branch circuit wiring, control and
signal cables, termination, jointing and splicing.
1. Division 7 Section “Fire Stopping” for fire stopping material and installation
equipment.
2. Division 16 Section “Basic Electrical Material and Methods”.
3. Division 16 Section “Cable Trays” with its related section.
4. Division 16 Section “Raceway and boxes” with its related section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
B. Samples of each cable and wire and, if requested by Engineer, other accessories.
C. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Exact routing layouts, sections and profiles of trays, feeder, sub-feeder cables and
branch circuits, with indication of any equipment to show and verify coordination
between various trades.
2. Details of supports and fixings for buses, trays and cables.
3. Details of connections to transformers, switchboards, panelboards etc.
4. Details of terminations, splices and tapings where permitted, glands and bushings at
enclosures.
5. Number and size of conductors in conduit for all branch circuits in accordance with
final conduit routing.
D. Certificate of Origin: For each lot of cable supplied, provide a certificate of origin issued by
manufacturer stating origin, date of manufacture, composition, standards to which it
complies and test certificates. All test certificates are to comply with the test requirements of
the relevant standard to which the cable is manufactured.
E. Cable Jointing Qualifications: Submit details of the proposed cable jointers qualifications
prior to work commencing on site.
F. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced and certified cable splicer to install, splice
and terminate low-voltage cables.
B. Standards: Wires and cables are to comply with IEC or other equally approved standards
and are to bear the mark of identification of the Standards to which they are manufactured.
Wires and cables not having this identification will be rejected.
C. Current carrying capacities of conductors have been determined in accordance with the
Regulations for specified type of insulation and expected conditions of installation. No
change will be accepted in specified type of insulation unless warranted by special
conditions and approved by Engineer. Check various loads and current carrying capacities
and report any discrepancies or insufficiency of sizes indicated to Engineer.
A. Deliver wires and cables properly packaged in factory packed or fabricated containers,
wound on factory reels.
B. Store wires and cables in dry areas, and protect from weather, fumes, water, debris, etc.
C. Handle wire and cable carefully to avoid abrasing, puncturing and tearing wire and cable
insulation and sheathing. Ensure that dielectric resistance integrity of wires/cables is
maintained.
1.6 COORDINATION
B. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated, as required to suit field conditions and
as approved by Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. B.I.C.C. (England)
2. Pirelli-General (England)
3. Siemens (Germany)
4. Saudi Cables (Saudi Arabia)
5. Jeddah Cable Company (Saudi Arabia)
2.2 GENERALLY
A. Conductors: Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, cables and other feeders
are to have copper conductors. Cable conductors are to be stranded for sections 4 mm2 and
above, based on IEC 60228 Class 2. Signal and control cables are to have solid conductors
unless otherwise specified. Flexible cords are to have finely stranded conductors.
Conductors of single-core cables 25-mm2 and above are to be compacted. Multi-core
cables 35-mm2 and above is to be sectoral shape.
B. Conductor sizes are to be metric and as shown on the Drawings. Conductors with cross-
sectional area smaller than specified will not be accepted.
D. Maintain color coding throughout installation. Phase-conductors for which outer jacket is
not color-coded are to have engraved alphanumeric mark (L1, L2, L3) or color coded heat-
shrinkable sleeves.
E. Buried Cables: Cables buried directly in the ground are to be armored type, unless otherwise
indicated in particular Sections of the Specification or on the Drawings.
A. Single Core PVC Insulated Cables (Building Wires): Unless otherwise specified, single
conductor cables for wiring in conduit are to have annealed copper conductors, compacted,
generally with concentric strands and insulated with flame retardant, moisture and heat
resistant PVC/E to IEC 60227 (type 5 to BS 7655), suitable for wet locations and for
conductor temperature of 70 deg. C. Wires and cables are to be 450/750 V grade.
B. Multi-Core PVC Insulated Cables (0.6/1 kV): To have annealed, copper conductors,
compacted, insulated with PVC/E to IEC 60227 (type 5 to BS 7655), flame retardant,
moisture and heat resistant, suitable for wet locations and conductor temperatures of 85 deg.
C, laid up, bedded with suitable filler and sheathed with PVC. Armored cables are to have
single layer of galvanized steel wire armor with PVC over-sheath. Cables are to comply
with IEC 60502 and IEC 60811.
C. Single Core PVC Insulated Cables (Building Wires): Unless otherwise specified, single
conductor cables for wiring in conduit are to have annealed copper conductors, compacted,
generally with concentric strands and insulated with flame retardant, moisture and heat
resistant PVC to IEC 60227 (or to BS 7655), suitable for wet locations and for conductor
temperature of 70 deg. C. Wires and cables are to be 450/750 V grade.
D. Single Core XLPE Insulated Feeder Cables (0.6/1 kV): Single-core circular stranded,
annealed copper conductors, compacted, insulated with flame retardant, moisture and heat
resistant cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), suitable for wet locations and conductor
temperatures of 90 deg. C. and PVC over-sheath. Armored cables are to have taped
bedding, single wire aluminum armor and PVC over-sheath.
E. Multi-Core XLPE Insulated Feeder Cables (0.6/1 kV): Single core annealed copper
conductors, compacted, XLPE insulated, for conductor temperature of 90 deg. C, laid up
and bedded with suitable non-hygroscopic material compatible with the insulation and flame
retardant PVC over-sheathed, color black. Armored cables are to have single layer of
galvanized steel wire applied helically over extruded PVC bedding (which may be an
integral part of filling) and over-sheathed with flame retardant PVC/ST2, color black to
IEC60502.
F. Low Smoke and Fume (LSF) Cables: 600/1000 V grade, copper conductor, compacted,
insulated with extruded LSF material in compliance with BS 6724 for armored cables and
BS 7211 for un-armored cables. Materials used in construction of LSF cables are to be
nominally free from halogens (fluorine, chlorine and bromine). When material is tested in
accordance with BS EN 50267, Part 1 and IEC Publication 60754, Part 1, the acidic gas
evolved during combustion is to be less than 0.5%. When tested in accordance with BS EN
50267, method 141D or ASTM method S2863, the oxygen index of bedding and sheathing
materials is not to be less than 30. Completed cable is to meet the requirements for tests
under fire conditions when tested in accordance with BS EN 60332-1, Part 1 and NMV 1.5
of BS EN 50266 Part 3. Cores and cross sectional area are to be as shown on the Drawings.
Phases are to be color coded in conformity with the Standards, and overall cable sheath is to
be extruded black LSF material.
G. Flexible cable for connection to appliances, window fans, pendants etc. is to be 300/500 V
grade to BS 6500, three or four core, with tinned finely stranded copper wires, EPR
insulated, twisted and Sheathed With Chlorosulphonated Polyethylene (CSP) Compound
And With Strengthening Cord.
H. High Temperature Cable - Type FP 200 gold, or approved equal): Solid or stranded plain
annealed copper conductors to BS 6360 (in sizes up to 4 mm2), fire resistant insulation to
BS 6899 (0.6 mm radial thickness), laminate aluminum/screen and low smoke zero halogen
(LS0H) composite sheath with tinned earth continuity conductor/drain wire. Cable is to be
rated 300/500 V, capable of accepting voltage surges up to 5 kV, to operate continuously at
150 deg. C and for short durations at 200 deg. C. It is to be certified to have passed IEC
60331 and IEC 60332-1 and IEC 60332-3 flame resistance fire retardant and reduced flame
propagation tests and to comply with category CWZ of BS6387.
I. Fire resistant cable (similar to Perilli FP400- or equal): plain copper stranded circular
conductor complying with BS 6360 with fire resistant insulation comply with BS 7655
operating temperature 90 degree C, galvanized steel wires armor and extracted low smoke
zero halogen (LS0H) over sheath. Cables are to be rated 600/1000 V. It is to be certified to
have passed IEC 60331, IEC 60332-1 and IEC 60332-3 and IEC fire retardant and reduced
flame propagation test and to comply with category CWZ of BS 6387. Cables are to be
used to feed the fire pumps.
A. Multi-Core PVC Insulated Control Cables: 0.6/1 kV rating, solid 1.5 mm2, 2.5 mm2 or
stranded 4 mm2 plain circular copper conductors, with heat resistive PVC/E to IEC 60227
(PVC type 5 to BS 7655), rated for 70 deg. C, of 7, 12, 19, 24, 30 or 37 cores. Cores are to
be laid up together and filled with non-hygroscopic material, PVC over-sheathed, to form
compact and circular cable for use in switchgear, control gear and generally for control of
power and lighting systems. Armored cable is to have extruded PVC bedding which may be
an integral part of the filling, galvanized steel wire armoring, and over-sheath of PVC type
ST2 to IEC 60502, color black. Core identification is to be white printed numbers 1, 2, 3
etc. over black insulation.
B. PE insulated control and signal cables, for use on data systems, are to be generally 300 V
rating, polyethylene insulated, color-coded, tinned copper conductors (0.6-mm diameter),
twisted together into pairs. Multi-pair core assembly is to be covered with binder tape,
spirally wound 0.075-mm bare copper shielding tape and provided with drain wire and
overall PVC sheath.
C. Control and signal cables, enclosed in conduit and raceways with power cables, are to be
insulated for same voltage grade.
A. Connector - Type A-1: Pressure indent type, for terminating or making T-taps and splices on
conductors 10 mm2 and smaller. Connector is to be non-ferrous copper alloy applied to
conductor by mechanical crimping pressure, with vinyl insulating sleeves or phenolic
insulating covers.
B. Connector - Type A-2: Bolted pressure split type for terminating or making T-taps and
splices on conductors 16 mm2 and larger. Connector is to be cast non-ferrous copper alloy
applied to conductor by clamping with minimum of two screws and provided with phenolic
insulating cover.
C. Connector - Type B-1: Pre-insulated, spring type, for branch circuit and fixture wiring.
Connector is to be steel encased spring with shell, insulated with vinyl cap and skirt, type
Scotchlok brand, as manufactured by Minnesota Mining & Mfg. Co. or other equal and
approved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine raceways and building finishes to receive wires and cables for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of wires
and cables. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
B. Before pulling wires in conduit check that inside of conduit (and raceway in general) is free
of burrs and is dry and clean.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Building wires and cables are to be installed in conduit, trunking or ducts indoors
and in conduit outdoors, unless otherwise shown the Drawings.
B. Circuits: Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, final branch circuit wiring is to be run
inside trunking or conduits, D.C. wiring is to be run in separate conduits from A.C. wiring,
and emergency lighting and power circuits are to be run in separate conduits from normal
circuits.
C. Branch circuit work originating from light and power panelboards is to be arranged as
shown on the Drawings. Loads on various phases of panelboards are to be balanced. Ensure
that the lighting load and other loads are balanced with a difference of not more than 10%
between the phases.
D. Control cables may be fixed to racks, installed directly on cable trays or pulled in conduit
and trunking indoors, and in underground ducts or in conduit outdoors.
F. Lubricants are to be used for pulling wire or cable if character of pull would otherwise
damage conductors, insulation or jacket. Lubricants are to be approved by the Engineer.
G. Pull conductors into raceways simultaneously where more than one is being installed in the
same raceway.
H. Support: Cables and wires pulled inside very high conduit risers are to be supported at upper
end of risers and at intermediate points by split rubber grommets to relieve any stresses on
conductors, where required.
J. Extra Length: At every branch circuit outlet and pull-box, every cable passing through is to
be left slack to allow inspection and for connections to be made. Cables terminating in
outlet boxes are to be left with at least 250-mm extra length for terminations.
K. Joints or taps in wires and cables, if permitted, are to be permanently accessible or made
only in boxes or cabinet gutters.
L. Connectors for terminating or making T-taps and splices are to be Type A-1 on conductors
10 mm2 or smaller, Type A-2 for conductors 16 mm2 and larger, and Type B-1 for branch
circuit and fixture wiring.
N. Switch legs for local wall switches are to have distinctive color, selected as complementary
to cable color coding used in the project.
O. Terminations: Conductors of wires and cables up to 16mm2 are to be tightly twisted and
where possible doubled back before being clamped with set screws. Where two or more
wires are looped into same terminal these conductors are to be tightly twisted together
before inserting into terminals. In no case is bare conductor to be allowed to project beyond
any insulated shrouding or mounting of a line terminal. Cables sizes 16 mm2 and larger are
to terminate in tunnel lugs with setscrew, or by using bolted or sweated compression
connectors.
P. Tagging: Tag main and feeder cables in pull-boxes, wireways and wiring gutters of
panelboards or distribution cabinets. Tags are to identify cable or circuit number and
conductor size in accordance with the Schedules.
Q. Tagging: Where two or more circuits are run to or through a control device, outlet box or
ceiling junction box, each circuit is to be tagged as a guide in making connections.
A. Cables generally are to be run through duct-banks, shafts or special recesses, clamped to
steel racks or cable trays. Cables run through ventilation shafts are to be installed in steel
conduits.
B. Fixing: Single cables above suspended ceilings or in concealed spaces are to be fixed
directly to walls or ceilings but must be accessible. Where two or more cables are run in
parallel, they are to be fixed on galvanized steel perforated trays or on other approved
special cable supporting and protecting arrangement.
C. Clamps: Where cables are fixed to steel trays or supporting structures, approved galvanized
cast steel clamps (or molded plastic clamps for single core cables) are to be used at distances
not exceeding 20 diameters.
D. Joints or splices will not be accepted on main and sub-feeders. Cables are to be supplied in
lengths sufficient for straight-through un-jointed termination to termination pull.
E. Directly buried cables crossing under roads, pipe banks or other services, are to be laid in
heavy duty PVC duct banks. In no case are cables to be directly buried in concrete, in
masonry or in floor finishing.
F. Buried cables liable to mechanical damage are to be drawn through PVC conduit or asbestos
cement pipe. If steel conduit is used, all three-phase conductors, neutral and protective earth
circuits are to be in the same conduit.
G. Exposure to Heat: Route wires and cables to prevent exposure to excessive heat or to
corrosive agents. If such condition is unavoidable, cables are to be type designed for
particular condition.
H. Insulating covers are to be applied to prevent exposure of bare cable connections. Insulating
cover is to be purpose made and is to provide minimum insulation level equal to that of
conductor insulation.
I. Glands for various single-core and multi-core cables are to be purpose made and suitable for
rigid mounting to equipment enclosure.
J. Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements using approved fire-stopping material
according to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems".
K. Identify wires and cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods."
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Through joints will not be allowed in feeder cables where adequate manufacturer's lengths
are available. Where a joint is necessary, it has to be made inside boxes, handholes or
manholes.
C. Jointing: Joints are to be filled with epoxy resin after taping unless contrary to cable
manufacturer's recommendations. Sample site constructed cable terminations and through-
joints are to be submitted prior to commencing work on site. Samples are to be constructed
in the presence of the Engineer and are to be available for test and inspection in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Cutting tools for jointing and terminating cables are to be purpose made, to prevent damage
to insulation in general, and to cable shielding of MV cables.
E. Cleaning of lacquer on conductors is to be by use of 'Scotch Brite' sponge and white spirit or
equal approved.
F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals including screws and bolts, in accordance with
manufacturers published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torquing
requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with
international standards.
A. Cable tests are to be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Regulations and
Standards.
B. Test Equipment: Provide megger testers of various ranges as applicable, and HV test
equipment as necessary for testing MV installations. Use 500 V megger on installations with
nominal voltage up to 500 V, and 1000 V megger on installations with nominal voltage over
500 V up to 1000 V.
D. Insulation resistance for control and signal cables is to be minimum 10000 Megohm-km for
PE insulated cables and 100 Megohm-km for PVC insulated cables, all measured core-core
and core-earth, in accordance with the Regulations.
E. Prior to energization of circuitry, check installed wires and cables with megohm meter to
determine insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled.
F. Prior to energization, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short-circuits.
G. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in
accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then
retest to demonstrate compliance.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes cables and related splices, terminations, and accessories for
medium-voltage electrical distribution systems above 1000V rating.
1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for cable and
termination supports.
2. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for cable markers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
C. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not
limited to, the following:
D. Certificate of Origin: For each lot of cable supplied, provide a certificate of origin issued
by manufacturer stating origin, date of manufacture, composition, Standards to which it
complies and test certificates. All test certificates are to comply with the test requirements
of the relevant standard to which the cable is manufactured.
E. Cable Jointing Qualifications: Submit details of the proposed cable jointers qualifications
prior to work commencing on site.
G. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
I. Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of cables and accessories with requirements
based on comprehensive testing of current products.
J. Maintenance Data: For cables and accessories to include in the maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1.
B. Standards: Cables are to comply with IEC or other equally approved Standards, and are to
bear the mark of identification of the Standards to which they are manufactured. Cables
not having this identification will be rejected.
C. Current carrying capacities of conductors have been determined in accordance with the
Regulations for specified type of insulation and expected conditions of installation. No
change will be accepted in specified type of insulation unless warranted by special
conditions and approved by the Engineer. Check various loads and current carrying
capacities and report any discrepancies or insufficiency of sizes indicated to Engineer.
B. Store cables on reels on elevated platforms in a dry location. Protect from weather,
fumes, water, debris, etc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. B.I.C.C. (England)
2. Cables de Lyon (France)
3. Pirelli-General (England)
4. Siemens (Germany)
5. Saudi Cables (Saudi Arabia)
2.2 15 kV MV CABLE
A. Three Core MV Cable (17.5 kV maximum between phases), XLPE insulated, for use on
systems with voltages up to 17.5 kV, is to comply with IEC 60502, and have the
following characteristics:
B. Short-circuit: 21.5 kA (minimum) for one second rating for 150mm2Single Core MV
Cable (17.5 kV maximum between phases), XLPE - insulated, for use on systems with
voltages between 12 kV and 17.5 kV, is to comply with IEC 502, and have the following
characteristics:
C. Armored cable, where required or shown on the Drawings, is to have single layer of
aluminum wire or two layers of aluminum tape between bedding and over-sheath.
2.3 33 kV MV CABLE
A. Three Core MV Cable (36 kV maximum between phases), XLPE insulated, for use on
systems with voltages up to 17.5 kV, is to comply with IEC 60502, and have the
following characteristics:
6. Filling and Bedding: Polypropylene extruded over laid up cores to form compact
circular bedding.
7. Outer Sheath: Flame retardant extruded PVC (color red) type ST2 to IEC 60502.
8. Embossing: "Electric cable 33,000 V".
B. Short-circuit: 21.5 kA (minimum) for one second rating for 150mm2Single Core MV
Cable (36 kV maximum between phases), XLPE - insulated, for use on systems with
voltages between 18 kV and 30 kV, is to comply with IEC 502, and have the following
characteristics:
C. Armored cable, where required or shown on the Drawings, is to have single layer of
aluminum wire or two layers of aluminum tape between bedding and over-sheath.
2.4 EXECUTION
2.5 EXAMINATION
2.6 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables" for feeder and sub-feeder cable
installation requirements applicable to this Section.
D. Use pulling means; including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips
that will not damage cables or raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment
to cable.
G. Install direct-buried cables on leveled and tamped 75-mm bed of clean sand at bottom of
trench. Separate cables crossing other cables or piping from those items by a minimum
of 100 mm of tamped earth. Install permanent markers at ends of cable runs, changes in
direction, and buried splices.
I. In manholes, handholes, pull boxes, junction boxes, and cable vaults, train cables around
walls by the longest route from entry to exit and support cables at intervals adequate to
prevent sag.
J. Seal around cables passing through fire-rated elements using approved fire-stopping
material according to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems".
A. Through joints will not be allowed in feeder cables where adequate manufacturer's
lengths are available. Where a joint is necessary, it has to be made inside boxes,
handholes or manholes.
D. Cutting tools for jointing and terminating cables are to be purpose made, to prevent
damage to insulation in general, and to cable shielding of MV cables.
E. Cleaning of lacquer on conductors is to be by use of 'Scotch Brite' sponge and white spirit
or equal approved.
F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals including screws and bolts, in accordance
with manufacturers published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torquing
requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with
international standards.
A. Cable tests are to be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Regulations
and Standards.
B. Test Equipment: Provide megger testers of various ranges as applicable, and HV test
equipment as necessary for testing MV installations. Use 1000 V megger on installations
with nominal voltage over 500 V up to 1000 V, and 5000 V megger on MV installations
(up to 13.8 kV) for initial checks.
1. MV Cable Testing: Provide cable test set with D.C. output voltage and ampere
range sufficient to test MV cables. Cables are to be laid in position (trench or duct
bank), jointed where applicable, but left uncovered, with ends free of equipment
and clear of ground.
2. MV Cable Testing: D.C. test voltage is to be applied between core under test and
the screen in steps, pausing one minute or more each step (first step being the A.C.
rms rated voltage of the cable, followed by two equal steps) up to maximum test
voltage. At each step, and for the last 5-15 minutes duration at maximum test
voltage, the ammeter (normally a micro-ammeter) is to be monitored closely and
recorded. If, except as voltage is increased, the current starts to increase, test is to
be stopped and the installation inspected and tested for the fault.
3. MV Cable Testing: Each cable/core is to be tested independently. Maximum D.C.
test voltage for grounded neutral system is to be 3 times rated A.C. rms voltage of
cable.
4. MV Cable Testing: Alternative test is to apply A.C. rms voltage up to 1.5 times
A.C. rms rating of cable (26 kV for 17.5 kV cable), applied for 15 minutes, by an
approved A.C. test set. Readings are to be within same range and in accordance
with IEC 60502.
D. Correct malfunctioning cables and accessories at Project site, where possible, and retest
to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
2.9 PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes boxes and raceways including conduits, wireways, and related
installations and accessories necessary to support and protect cables, feeders, sub-feeders,
branch circuit wiring and wiring of low current systems, communications and signal cables.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, manufacturers'
catalogues with specifications of raceways including conduits, trunking, boxes, etc. and
related accessories
B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Exact routing of conduits, trunking etc. with indication of boxes, accessories and
expansion joints, size and type of conduits and boxes.
2. Typical assembly details of installation of trunking, trays etc.
3. Construction details of pull boxes.
4. Typical installation details including connection of conduits to metal enclosure,
connection of flexible conduits, vapour-tight installations in cold rooms,
weatherproof installations outdoors etc. and earthing connections.
A. Regulations and Standards: Conduits, wireways, cable trays and fittings are to be designed,
constructed and installed to give safe installation and reliable mechanical protection for
wires and cables in accordance with the Regulations. Standards of products are to be as
specified.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways and boxes with other construction elements
to ensure adequate headroom, working clearance, and access.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
a. Egatube (England)
b. M.K. (England)
A. Material: Heavy gauge drawn and welded steel, threaded at both ends, to CEE 23, BS 4568
Part 1 and BS 31 Class B (threaded), with class 4 protection for rigid steel conduit, zinc
coated inside and outside by hot-dip process or sherardizing.
B. Fittings Generally: Threaded type, galvanized or cadmium plated malleable cast iron.
Fittings used in corrosive atmospheres are to be specially treated. Fittings and components
are to comply with CEE 23, BS 4568 Part 2 and BS 31.
C. Locknuts for securing conduit to metal enclosure are to be heavy hexagonal or castellated
pattern, for fastening.
E. Miscellaneous fittings including reducers, chase nipples, three piece unions, split couplings
and plugs are to be standard fittings designed and manufactured for the particular
application.
A. Material: Welded steel, non-threaded type, galvanized externally and protected internally
with corrosion resistant enamel, and to U.S. Federal Specifications.
B. Corrosion Resistance: Conduits used in corrosive atmospheres are to be copper silicon alloy,
highly resistant to corrosion.
C. Fittings Generally: Threadless pressure type, galvanized or cadmium plated malleable cast
iron. Fittings used in corrosive atmospheres are to be specially treated.
A. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): rigid high grade mild strip welded steel, hot dip
galvanized over the entire length including factory made treads after cutting with organic
corrosion resistant polymer inside coating and to US federal Specification, UL 1242 and
ANSI C80.6.
B. IMC Fittings Generally: Threaded fittings and connectors and terminations with rigid
coupling, concrete tight where required, and with red lead coated threads where site cut.
Factory made bend are to be provided where site bending is not possible.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Welded steel, non-threaded type galvanized externally
and protected internally with corrosion resistant enamel, and to U.S. Federal Specifications,
UL 797 and ANSI C80.3.
D. EMT Fittings Generally: Threadless pressure type, galvanized or cadmium plated malleable
cast iron. Fittings used in corrosive atmospheres are to be specially treated. Factory made
bend are to be provided where site bending is not possible.
E. Corrosion Resistance: Conduits used in corrosive atmospheres are to be copper silicon alloy,
highly resistant to corrosion.
A. Material: Steel, cold rolled and annealed, non-threaded type, formed from continuous length
of helically wound and interlocked strip steel, with fused zinc coating on inside and outside,
and to BS 731.
C. Fittings Generally: Threadless, hinged clamp type, galvanized or cadmium plated malleable
cast iron. Fittings used in corrosive atmospheres are to be specially treated.
D. Straight Connectors: One piece body, female end, having hinged clamp and deep slotted
machine screws for securing to conduit, male end having thread and locknut.
A. Material: Rigid unplasticized polyvinyl chloride with high impact and high temperature
resistance, flame retardant, non-hygroscopic and non-porous, to CEE 26, BS 4607 and BS
60998, DIN 49016 or other equal and approved standards conforming to IEC 423, 614-1 and
614-2-2.
A. Material: Flame retardant, heat resistant, non-hygroscopic PVC, high resistance to impact,
ribbed on circumference for flexibility.
A. Sleeves Through Outside Walls: Cast iron, with end and intermediate integral flanges, and
internal diameter larger than diameter of through-conduit. Length is to correspond to wall
thickness. Space between sleeve and conduit is to be packed with oakum to within 50 mm
of both faces of wall, remainder of sleeve packed with plastic compound or lead, held in
place by heavy escutcheon plates bolted at both ends to flanged ends of sleeve.
Alternatively, sleeves are to be O.Z/Gedney, Type WSK or other equal and approved, with
cable or conduit bolted pressure sealing.
B. Supports and Hangers: Galvanized malleable cast iron straps or structural steel sections with
hot dip galvanized bolts and nuts.
C. Expansion Joint for Embedded Steel Conduits - Type A: Watertight, flexible conduit with
end fittings to receive fixed conduits. Length is to allow movement within range of joint
and is not to be less than 20 times diameter of conduit. Conduit is to be covered with thick
rubber tubing with 5 mm minimum gap all around tube. Bonding jumper with earth clamp
is to electrically connect both sides of joint. Fitting is to be O.Z/Gedney, Type DX or other
equal and approved.
D. Expansion Joint for Exposed Steel Conduits - Type B: Sleeve with fittings to permit
telescoping of one conduit into sleeve. Movable conduit is to be fitted with watertight
bushing. Joint is to be weatherproof, of galvanized malleable iron or steel. Bonding jumper
with earth clamp is to electrically connect both sides of joint. Expansion fitting is to be
O.Z/Gedney, Type DXX or other equal and approved.
E. Expansion Joint for Exposed Steel Conduits - Type C: PVC sheathed flexible steel conduit
terminating in pull boxes and securely fixed on each side of structural expansion joint.
Bonding jumper is to electrically connect both sides of joint.
F. Tags: 50 mm diameter steel with indented lettering, rust inhibiting treatment and baked
enamel finish.
A. Components are to include wireway base, clip-on covers, couplings, end plates, wall
flanges, panel to trunking rubber grommets, elbows, tees, adaptor plates and necessary
hangers, supports and accessories.
B. Steel Trunking: To BS 4678 Part 1, galvanized sheet steel, minimum 1.5 mm thick,
protected internally and externally with corrosion resistant finish such as zinc or cadmium
with top coat of enamel.
C. PVC Trunking: high impact, heavy duty, self-extinguishing, rigid PVC with grooved double
locking action of the clip-on cover. Design is to be approved by Engineer before ordering
materials. Trunking is to be capable of receiving functional slot-in hangers and
demountable separators to segregate wiring systems as needed.
A. Type: Hot-dip galvanized sheet steel trunking and cover, similar to Simplex, Power Center
type or other equal and approved.
B. Construction: Trunking is to have outwardly turned flanges to receive cover, and internal
sleeve coupling between sections, permitting cutting of trunking on site.
C. Gaskets: Neoprene bonded cork gaskets are to be fitted throughout, between any two
attached surfaces.
D. Screws: Removable flanged covers are to be secured with galvanized steel holding screws.
A. Type: Comprising wireway base, snap-on cover, couplings, end plates, wall flanges, elbows,
tees, adapters, if required, and necessary clamps, hangers, supports and accessories. Wires
and cables are to laid from front and held in place by clamps.
B. Steel Skirting Trunking: Sheet steel, 1.5 mm minimum thickness, protected internally and
externally with corrosion resistant finish such as zinc or cadmium with top coat of enamel.
C. UPVC Skirting Trunking: High impact resistant, flame retardant UPVC (unplasticized
polyvinyl chloride) to BS 476 Part 5 and Part 6.
B. Components comprise wireway base, snap-on covers, couplings, end plates, wall flanges,
panel to wireway rubber grommet, elbows, tees, adaptor plates and necessary hangers and
supports.
C. Construction: 1 mm (0.04 inch) thick, galvanized steel, gray enameled (ANSI-61 gray).
Sizes are to be selected to comply with the NEC and provide at least 25% space for future
wiring.
A. Surface or recessed boxes are to be suitable for type of related conduit or cable system.
Shapes and sizes of boxes are to be of compatible standards as switches and socket outlets
specified under Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices", and lighting fixtures selected and of
various types and mounting methods required.
B. Unused openings in outlet boxes are to be closed with knock-out closers manufactured for
the purpose.
A. For installation in floor screed, laid on unfinished concrete floor, secured and grouted flush
with screed.
B. Material 3.3 m (10-foot) lengths of 2 mm thick (14 gauge) galvanized sheet steel, protected
by corrosion resistant coating on inside and outside surfaces. Single, double or triple
systems, as required, are to be as shown on the Drawings. Dimensions are to be as
indicated.
C. Ducts are to have 32 mm (1-1/4 inch) openings spaced at 600 mm (24 inch) with screw
plugs for receiving initial or future installation of outlet boxes. Screw plugs are to be
replaced by brass ferrules, inserted and securely fastened by crimping tool, for installation
of pedestal type outlet boxes.
F. SUPPORTS are to be capable of adjustment for height and arranged for maintenance of
alignment and spacing of raceways during concreting.
G. RECESSED SERVICE FITTINGS: Modular fittings that match with preset inserts and
include covers/ receptacles, outlets and associated device plates to provide service indicated
at each location. Covers are to be flush with floor and have a recess to match floor finish
and level with the area. Boxes covers are to be firmly held in place and non-rocking.
Coordinate with architectural designs and materials approved for finishes and for electrical
devices. Internally mounted receptacle / outlets are to be as shown on drawings.
Man: Legrand
Ref: 89620
A. Recessed and Concealed Boxes: Galvanized pressed steel, with knock-outs for easy field
installation. Special boxes are to be punched as required on Site.
B. Exposed Surface Mounted Boxes: Galvanized cast iron with threaded hubs.
C. Outdoor Surface or Recessed Boxes: Galvanized cast iron with threaded hubs and PVC
gaskets to ensure water tightness and with stainless steel or non-ferrous, corrosion resistant
screws.
D. Floor Boxes - Type A: Watertight, cast iron or cast metal alloy with corrosion resistant
finish, adjustable mounting, standard duty, round or square, factory drilled and tapped for
required conduit sizes, and with brass cover and flange with brushed finish free from
markings other than required for mounting screws.
E. Floor Boxes - Type B: Non-standard size, flush floor mounted, cast metal alloy, with
watertight neoprene gasketed and hinged cover, and with drilled and tapped conduit entries
and adjustable mounting. Metal barriers are to separate services for power and low current.
A. Type: Boxes and covers used with PVC conduit systems are to be heavy gauge pressure
moulded plastic, minimum 2 mm thick, self extinguishing, with softening point not less than
85 deg. C. Boxes are to have provision for securely terminating conduits and are to be
manufacturer's standard for required application.
B. Fittings: Boxes are to have brass inset threads to receive cover screws and for mounting
devices or accessories, push-fit brass earth terminals, and steel insert clips to provide
additional support for pendants or for heat conduction. Neoprene gaskets are to be provided
for weatherproof installations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive raceways and boxes for compliance with installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of raceway installation. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A. Use: Unless otherwise specifically indicated all light and power circuits, communications,
signal and low current systems wiring are to be drawn inside conduits or wireways up to the
various electric power consuming equipment as shown on the Drawings.
B. Separate conduits and wireway installations are to be used for medium voltage cables, low
voltage feeders and sub-feeders, normal light and power circuits, emergency light and power
circuits and communication, signal and other low current systems wiring. Cables of different
voltages are not to be mixed within the same conduit or wireway as per the regulations.
C. Boxes: Junction, pull, and splice boxes of ample capacity are to be provided as indicated or
required. Boxes are to remain permanently accessible.
D. Recessed steel electrical boxes installed in fire resistant walls, on opposite sides of the wall,
shall be separated by a horizontal distance of not less than 610 mm.
E. Exposed Outlet Boxes: Securely fasten to wall with machine screws to permanent inserts or
lead anchors.
F. Recessed Outlet Boxes: Make neat openings, to the satisfaction of Engineer, allowing for
thickness of finishings, and use extension rings if required. Repair damaged finishings to
original condition before installation of fittings or plates.
G. Boxes Mounting Heights and Location: As specified under Division 16 Section "Wiring
Devices".
H. Tools and accessories for forming and installing conduit and wireway systems are to be
purpose made for the particular application and used in accordance with manufacturers'
instructions.
J. Sizes of conduits and wireways, not shown on the Drawings, are to be selected in
accordance with the Regulations and in relation to the number and size of conductors and
the space factor as recommended by the regulations. Minimum size of conduit for all
applications is to be 20 mm diameter, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
K. Mechanical Continuity: Conduits and wireways are to be effectively joined together and
connected to electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets to provide firm mechanical assembly.
Earthing jumpers are to be installed on steel conduits where required to ensure effective
electrical continuity irrespective of whether a separate protective earth conductor is required
or not.
N. Miscellaneous fittings such as reduces, chase nipples, 3 – piece unions, split couplings and
plugs that have been specifically designed and manufactured for their particular application
are to be installed as necessary.
O. Conduits are to be tested with a mandrel. Conduits that reject a mandrel are to be replaced.
Restore conduit and surrounding surfaces to original condition.
A. Conduits and wireways installations are to be as described below, unless otherwise shown
on the drawings or described in the particular section of the Specification.
B. Rigid heavy gauge steel conduit is to be used for all exposed installations comprising
lighting, power, low current, communication and signal system wiring, including
mechanical equipment rooms, electrical equipment rooms, and service areas. Use rigid steel
conduit in areas classified as hazardous explosive area. Flexible conduit is not acceptable.
C. Electrical metal tubing (EMT) is to be used for exposed installations over false ceilings
when the false ceiling is used as a return plenum.
D. Electrical metal tubing (EMT) is to be used for exposed and above false ceiling wiring
installations used in conjunction with exit and escape route lighting circuits, fire alarm and
security installations.
E. Electrical metal tubing (EMT) is to be used for all installations in elevator machine rooms
and shafts, electrical equipment rooms, mechanical rooms, parking floors, kitchen, laundry
and solid waste rooms.
G. Rigid heavy gauge PVC conduit is to be used for lighting and power circuits, low current,
communication and signal system wiring, where embedded in concrete masonry earth,
underfloor, except where otherwise shown on the Drawings or described in the particular
section of the Specification.
H. Rigid heavy gauge PVC conduit is to be used above false ceilings for lighting and power
circuits, low current, communication and signal system wiring, when the false ceiling is not
used as return plenum – and in furred walls. Use flexible PVC conduits from outlet boxes to
fixtures in conjunction with the use of PVC conduits.
J. Flexible steel conduit is to be used in movable partitions and from outlet boxes to fixture
over false ceilings when used as a return plenum. Conduits are to be liquid tight in damp
areas.
K. Liquid-tight flexible steel galvanized conduit is to be used in one or more of the following
conditions:
1. Exterior location.
2. Moist or humid atmospheres where condensate can be expected to accumulate.
3. Corrosive atmosphere.
4. Subjected to water spray or dripping oil, water or grease.
L. Exposure to Damage: Conduit considered being subject to undue risk of damage by shock or
corrosion is to be brought to the attention of the Engineer. Copper silicone alloy tubes may
be used in corrosive atmospheres.
N. Clearances: Install conduits at least, 150 mm clear of and preferably above pipes of other
non- electrical services. (Hot water pipes, etc.). Wherever possible, install horizontal
conduit and wireways runs above water and steam piping.
O. Sleeves: Obtain approval for positioning sleeves where conduits pass through reinforces
concrete. Additional opening may be allowed in finished slabs, but are to be drilled. Fix
sleeves rigidly to maintain position and alignment during construction work.
Q. Expansion Fittings: Provide in each conduit and wireways run every 30 meters, or wherever
structural expansion joints are crossed.
R. Make good all holes for conduits passing through walls, floors and ceilings with cement or
similar fire-resisting material to full thickness.
S. Bends: Conduit runs between outlet and outlet, fitting and fitting or outlet and fitting are not
to contain more than the equivalent of 2 quarter bends (180 degree total).
T. Bending is to be made without damaging conduit or tubing and without reducing internal
diameter. Methods of field bending are to be approved.
V. Conduits entering cold stores are to be made vapour tight, so that vapour from outside
cannot enter conduit.
W. Draining: Arrange conduits so that condensed moisture can drain to screwed plug at lowest
point.
X. Before wiring, conduits are to be swabbed through. Do not draw cables into any section of
system until conduit and draw boxes are fixed in position, and the raceway installation is
completed.
Y. Capping: Conduits are to be properly capped until wiring conductors are drawn in.
Z. Conduit and fittings installed outdoors are to be watertight and highly resistant to corrosion.
Use appropriate fittings, threaded and hubbed boxes, gaskets with screw on covers and the
like.
AA. Terminations: Do not terminate or fasten rigid conduits to motor frame or base.
BB. Length and radius of flexible conduit used for motors and vibrating equipment are to permit
bending of feeder cables without damage to conductor or insulation.
CC. Flexible conduit for slide rail mounted motor is to have sufficient slack to allow for
movement of motor over entire slide rail length.
DD. Pulling Wire: Install 3 mm galvanized stranded steel wire or equivalent strength cord with
wooden blocks fastened at ends, in empty service conduits (power, low current and signal).
EE. Standard elbows are to be used for conduit sizes over 40 mm. For smaller sizes, field bends
may be used provided no damage occurs to conduit.
FF. Tags: Fit to conduits entering or leaving floors, walls or ceilings for identification of conduit
and circuits. Tags are also to be placed at suitable intervals throughout the system.
GG. Non – ferrous conduit is to be installed for circuits operating above 60 Hz.
A. Termination: Conduit entering sheet metal enclosure or outlet boxes, when not terminated in
a threaded hub, is to be securely held in place by two lock-nuts, placed inside and outside
enclosure, and terminated with an insulating bushing.
B. Running Threads: Do not use running threads at joints and terminations, but use 3-piece
unions or split couplings.
C. Additional threaded cuts on galvanized steel conduits are to be painted with zinc based
coating resistant to corrosion.
E. Outdoor Mounted Steel Conduit: Apply anti-corrosion coating of zinc-chromate based paint
and two weather resistant finish coats of enamel, of approved colour, or other equal and
approved coating.
F. Galvanized conduit run in screed is to be painted with heavy coat of emulsified bitumen.
G. Galvanized steel conduits buried in ground or placed in wet or damp locations are to be
coated with two heavy coats of hot bitumen. Conduits are to be covered by at least 600 mm
of earth if buried in planting soil and by 300 mm if under walkway.
H. Plugs: Use hardwood or threaded iron plugs for blanking ends of steel conduit not used.
A. Coupling of conduit and/or termination into spouted fittings are to be made watertight and
permanent using special cement.
C. Ends of conduit and conduit fittings are to be cleaned and jointed using PVC cement
recommended by manufacturer.
E. Bends: Conduits not exceeding 25 mm diameter may be cold bent using bending springs.
Conduits over 25 mm are to be hot bent by an approved method.
A. Conduits In Concrete Slabs: Place conduits parallel or at right angles to main reinforcing
steel, between bottom reinforcing and top reinforcing steel. Fasten conduits to reinforcing
steel by positive wire, fasteners at the proper distance from the concrete face. Embedded
conduit diameter is not to exceed 1/3 of slab thickness. Special cases shall be referred to
Engineer.
E. PVC conduits in reinforced concrete structures are generally to be installed after placing
reinforcement and before concreting, if protected against damage, or are to be placed in
grooves formed in the concrete, if approved.
B. Supports: Use approved clamps, hangers or clips fastened by machine screws to expansion
sleeves in inserts or to lead anchors.
C. Spacing of clamps or clips for supporting steel conduits is not to be greater than:
1. 20 3.00
2. 25 3.60
3. 32-38 4.25
4. 50-63 5.00
5. 75 and larger 6.00
D. Spacing of clamps or clips for supporting PVC conduits is not to be greater than:
E. Bends and Fittings: Firmly fasten conduit at each side of bends and within 900 mm of each
outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting.
F. Outlets: Do not run more than the permissible numbers of conduits to any surface wall
outlet.
G. Exposed conduit work is to be installed so as not to interfere with ceiling inserts, lights or
ventilation ducts or outlets.
A. Installation: Secure trunking of all sizes at intervals not exceeding 1200 mm. Joints are not
to overhang a fixing by more than 500 mm.
B. Trunking passing through walls and ceilings is to have the cover fixed solidly for 25 mm
either side of walls and for 150 mm either side of floors and ceilings.
C. Vertical sections of trunking over 900 mm long are to have staggered insulated tie-off studs
to support weight of cables.
D. Cabling Provisions: Separation of power, low current and control circuits is to be by two
channel trunking or by barriers inserted in trunking before installation of cables. Cable
retaining straps are to be provided at not more than 600 mm centers. Openings in front of
trunking are to facilitate drawing-in cables.
E. Coupling: Trunking parts are to be mechanically and electrically coupled without causing
abrasion to wiring.
F. Earthing: Do not use metal trunking as earth continuity conductor. Provide protective
conductor in accordance with Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding" of the
Specification.
A. Lay and assemble ducts in accordance with Division 2 Section "Underground Ducts and
Utility Structures".
3.10 PROTECTION
3.11 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish, including chips,
scratches, and abrasions.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes cable trays, cable ladders and related installations and accessories
necessary to support and protect cables, feeders, sub-feeders, branch circuit wiring and
wiring of low current systems, communications and signal cables.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Detail fabrication and installation of cable tray / ladder, including plans, elevations,
and sections of components and attachments to other construction elements.
Designate components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods,
splice-plate connectors, expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths, fittings and
earthing connections.
C. Coordination Drawings: Include floor plans and sections drawn to scale. Include scaled
cable tray / ladder layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural and
mechanical elements.
E. Maintenance Data: For cable trays to include in the maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1
A. Source Limitations: Obtain cable tray components through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Comply with related BS Standards. EN/ISO 1449 – Part 1 – 1991 or equivalent for sheet
steel and BS EN ISO 1461-1999 for hot galvanizing.
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by the Employer or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.
1. Notify Engineer not less than 2 days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer's written permission.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of cable tray / ladder with other installations.
1. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field
conditions and as approved by the Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Niedax (Germany)
2. Swifts (U.K.)
3. Tolmega (France)
4. B-Line Systems, Inc. (U.S.A.)
5. MP Husky Corp. (U.S.A.)
6. Mono-Systems, Inc. (U.S.A.)
A. Components: To include cable trays or ladders (as shown on the Drawings), bends, elbows,
tees, couplings and plates, rubber grommets, hangers, bracket supports and other system
accessories required for safety and protection of the cable installations.
B. Trays: Provide to carry the maximum load of cables with a factor of safety 300%.
C. Trays: Heavy gauge perforated sheet steel, hot-dip galvanized after manufacture, minimum
1.5 mm thick, with sides not less than 45 mm deep, and as shown on drawings. Fittings are
to be same material as tray. Covers, where shown on the Drawings, are to be minimum 1.0
mm thick galvanized sheet steel, Snap-On or bolt type, forming a rigid assembly with the
tray.
D. Ladders: to be hot-dip galvanized after manufacture, fabricated from 2mm mild carbon
steel. Ladder side channels are to be minimum 127 x 32 mm, strengthened by reinforcing
inserts for torsional rigidity. Rungs are to be slotted to take cable cleats or ties and conduit
clamps. Rungs are to be minimum 50 x 25 mm channels, spaced at 300 mm centers.
E. Galvanizing to be in accordance with BEN ISO 1461 (335 g/m2), applied after fabrication,
with local coat thickness of 45 μm.
G. Coating applied to cable tray or cable ladder is to be applied after priming coat.
H. Sizes: Trays and ladders are to be standard metric sizes,150, 300, 450, 600 and 900 mm
wide, and at least 2.4 m length of section. Size of tray or ladder is to be determined by
number and sizes of cables in accordance with the Regulations and / or as shown on the
Drawings. Tray or ladder is to have strength and rigidity to provide support for cables
contained within. Deflection between supports is not to exceed 1/350 under full loading
capacity.
I. Earthing connector for plastic coated trays or ladders is to be provided on each coupling
between adjacent sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install cable tray / ladder level and plumb according to manufacturer's written instructions,
Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.
C. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays / ladders. Fix trays / ladders using approved
suspension rods or steel angle brackets at spacing not exceeding 1.5 m and generally as
shown on the Drawings.
D. Cables: Secure to tray / ladder with purpose made straps or saddles and arrange in one layer
only, evenly spaced, or as shown on the Drawings, with minimum spacing of one diameter
of the larger of the two adjacent cables or of a trefoil formation of single core cable circuit.
E. Fasten cable tray / ladder supports securely to building structure as specified in Division 16
Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods," unless otherwise indicated.
1. Design supports, including fastenings to the structure, to carry the greater of the
calculated load multiplied by a safety factor of 4. Submit calculations for approval.
F. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable tray / ladder and to
equipment. Support cable tray / ladder independently of fittings. Do not carry weight of
cable tray / ladder on equipment enclosure.
G. Install expansion connectors where cable tray / ladder crosses a building expansion joint and
in cable tray / ladder runs that exceed 27 m. Make changes in direction and elevation using
standard fittings.
I. Locate cable tray / ladder above piping, unless accessibility to cable tray / ladder is required
or unless otherwise indicated.
J. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Division 7 Section "Through-
Penetration Firestop Systems."
K. Sleeves for Future Cables: Install capped sleeves for future cables through fire stopping-
sealed cable tray / ladder penetrations of fire and smoke barriers.
L. Workspace: Install cable trays / ladders with sufficient space to permit access for installing
cables. Minimum clearance of 250 mm is to be maintained between top of tray / ladder and
ceiling, beams and other services and between tray / ladders in multi-tier formation.
M. Barriers: Where tray / ladders carry conductors of different systems, such as power,
communications and data processing, or different insulation levels, such as 600V, 5000V,
and 20, 000 V use separate cable tray / ladders. In case of absolute necessity, install
insulating barriers to separate the systems after obtaining the Engineer’s approval.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. After installation of cable trays / ladders is completed, install warning signs in visible
locations on or near cable trays / ladders.
A. Grounding: Test cable trays / ladders to ensure electrical continuity of bonding and
grounding connections.
B. Grounding: Do not use metal trays / ladders as earth continuity conductor. Connect trays /
ladders by flexible tinned copper straps to nearest bare earthing conductor and at maximum
30-m spacing.
C. Anchorage: Test pullout resistance for toggle bolts and powder-driven threaded studs for
each type and size of anchorage material.
1. Furnish equipment, including jacks, jigs, fixtures, and calibrated indicating scales,
required for reliable testing.
3.5 CLEANING
A. On completion of cable tray / ladder installation, including fittings, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes, including chips,
scratches, and abrasions.
3.6 PROTECTION
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by cable tray
/ ladder manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating
recommended by cable tray / ladder manufacturer.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes wiring devices, lighting switches, socket outlets, cord outlets,
automatic and manual lighting control equipment, dimmers, outlet boxes and plates, etc.
B. Components are to be standard manufactured items, uniform and modular, complying with
one set of approved Standards.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Submit data for approval, including catalogues, detailed literature,
manufacturer's name, catalogue number, rating, specification, overall dimensions and
special features, as applicable for each item.
B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Exact indication of position of each item and outlet box and fitting on layout
drawings, with box and equipment types and sizes.
2. Installation details of special devices including fans etc.
3. Wiring diagrams of special items.
C. Samples: Submit samples of each type of device for approval, unless otherwise agreed in
writing by the Engineer.
D. Maintenance Data: For materials and products to include in maintenance manuals specified
in Division 1.
A. Furnish 2% (with minimum of one each) extra materials for all products that match those
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with
labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Employer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Blank Plates: Blank plates are to be installed on outlet boxes, specified under Division 16
Section "Raceways and Boxes", on which no apparatus is installed or where apparatus
installed does not have suitable cover for box. Blank plates for wall outlets are to be
attached by a bridge with slots for horizontal and vertical adjustment.
A. Design: Square, rectangular or round designed to cover outlet box and to closely fit
electrical device, and with polished chromium plated recessed head fixing screws.
Combination plates are to be used for grouped outlets and devices.
B. Cord extension plates are to have threaded cord grip bushings of same material and finish as
plates.
C. Plastic Plates: Heavy gauge, break resistant, pressure molded plastic, white color, for
general use in service areas (back of the house) and toilets.
1. Man: MK
2. Ref: Logic Plus
D. Metal Plates: Heavy gauge, minimum 1 mm thick, refer to AR specification for finish
selection.
E. Cable/cord outlet (electric outlet) is to be used for up to 45 A, 250 V rating for connection
of power/control cable of fixed appliances. Plate is to have threaded cord grip to anchor
cable securely to cover. Box is to include fixed terminal block and cable clamp for
termination of cable/cord within.
F. Ceiling and wall Lighting outlet is to consist of steel outlet box 75mmx75mm installed flush
mounted or recessed in concrete, cover plate, and necessary accessories ready for
connection to lighting fixture.
G. Floor mounted outlet is to consist of watertight steel outlet box 75mmx75mm with IP 55
and necessary accessories ready for connection to lighting fixture.
2.3 SWITCHES
A. Generally: Quick-make, quick-break type with silver alloy contacts in arc resisting molded
base, with toggle, rocker or push-button as specified, for inductive or resistive loads up to
full rated capacity, and arranged for side and/or back connection.
B. Types: Single, two-way or intermediate, single pole or double pole, as shown on the
Drawings.
C. General Lighting Switch (S1): 10 A, 240 V a.c., rocker operated, grid-switch with plastic
plate, for service area and indoor installations in general, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Man: MK
2. Ref: Logic Plus
D. Push Button Switch (S2): As type (S1) but with push button controls (push to make, push to
break).
1. General Lighting Switch (S3): similar to
E. Weatherproof Switch (S4): 10 A, 250 V, for installation outdoors, wet and dusty areas, with
weatherproof plate, synthetic gasket, weatherproof outlet box, on/off indication, IP 56
enclosure.
1. Man: MK
2. Ref: MasterSeal
F. Double Pole Switch (S20): Rated 20 A or (as shown on the Drawings), 250 V a.c., tumbler
operated, to BS 3676, with stainless steel or molded plastic plate (as required in application
area), marked (etched) with equipment controlled (i.e. cooker, air conditioner, water heater)
and with red neon pilot light for "on" position. Switch is to be mounted to flush or surface
box, as required or as shown on the Drawings, and provided with cord outlet and cord
extension to equipment controlled.
1. Man: MK
2. Ref: Logic Plus/Insignia
1. Man: MK
2. Ref: K5423 WH WHI, or other equal and approved.
C. Duplex sockets are to be mounted in parallel under one common plate with break-off feature
for two-circuit connection.
D. Weatherproof socket outlets are to be any of the types indicated, enclosed in surface
mounted cast metal/polycarbonate box and with cover comprising spring-retained gasket
hinged flap. Enclosure is to be pre-designed box and cover for type of socket outlet
specified.
E. Standard German Socket Outlet - Type R01: for plug with 3mm round pins at 19 mm
centers, single phase, two wires and with side earthing, in accordance with German
standards and rated 16 A, 250 V a. c. for indoor general installation, as shown on the
Drawings.
1. Man: M.K.
F. Standard European (German type) Weatherproof Socket Outlet - Type R05 (220 V
SERVICE): 16 A, 250 V, 2 pole with grounding accordance to IEC 60884-1, enclosed in
flush mounted polycarbonate box with flush mounted frame and with cover comprising
spring- retained gasket hinged flap.
1. Man: MK
2. Ref: Masterseal 56483
G. Power Socket - Type R41: single switched outlet, single phase, three wires, 32 A, 250 V,
2P+E, IP44, body made of impact resistant poly carbonate. Contact pins and sleeves are
solid bran with stainless steel springs, with matching plug.
1. Man: MK
2. Ref: Commando K9643
H. Industrial Socket Outlet - Type R44: Similar to (R41) but three phase, four wire, 32A, 415
V and 3P + N+E, with matching plug.
1. Man: M.K.
2. Ref: 9640 RED
I. Pendent socket cube with one or four weather proof socket 16A/230V with helix cable. for
socket cube details refer to kitchen consultant catalogue cuts.
2.5 PLUGS
A. Type: Compatible with type of socket outlet specified, break resistant, of impact resistant
molded insulating material (separable construction), with solid brass pins and cord grip and
of shapes Providing Easy Hand-Grip for Removal.
B. Quantity: Supply number equal to 20% of total number of each type of socket outlet
supplied.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locations: Drawings generally show approximate locations of outlets and equipment. Exact
locations are to be determined from interior finishing and detail drawings. Any condition
that would place an outlet in an unsuitable location is to be referred to the Engineer. Locate
switches at strike sides of doors, whether shown on the Drawings or not. In locating outlets
allow for overhead pipes, ducts, variations in arrangement, thickness of finishing, window
trim, paneling and other engineering features.
B. Mounting heights for outlet boxes and similar equipment are to be uniform within the same
or similar areas. Mounting is to be as shown on the Drawings or as approved by Engineer.
Unless otherwise shown or instructed, mount lighting switches and socket outlets generally
at 1200 mm and 300 mm from finished floor level respectively. Mount switches with long
dimension vertical and operating handle, if of the toggle type, up when in the on position.
D. Recessed Outlet Boxes: Make neat openings, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, allowing
for thickness of finishing, and use extension rings if required. Repair damaged finishing to
original condition before installation of fittings or plates.
E. Appearance: Install exposed boxes and plates plumb, square and parallel to finished wall
surface. Exposed plates covering recessed boxes are to rest neatly on wall surface without
gaps, and fully covering the box.
F. Grouped Outlets: Arrange neatly so that use of fittings is convenient and clear.
H. Damaged Fittings: Reject damaged fittings or plates with damaged finish. Protect fittings
and plates against damage after installation and until handed over.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
1. Switches: Where three or more switches are ganged, and elsewhere as indicated,
identify each switch with approved legend engraved on wall plate.
2. Receptacles: Identify panel board and circuit number from which served. Use
machine-printed, pressure-sensitive, abrasion-resistant label tape on face of plate and
durable wire markers or tags within outlet boxes.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Single pole switches are to switch the phase wire. Do not run neutral wire through switches
having neutral shunt or bridge.
B. Exposed Outlet Boxes: Securely fasten to wall with machine screws to permanent inserts or
lead anchors.
C. Connection Of Appliances:
1. Where appliance is designed to adapt directly to outlet box, extend electrical wiring
to incoming terminals inside appliance.
2. Where appliance is not designed to adapt to outlet box, install the connecting wiring
in flexible conduit firmly fixed to outlet box cover plate and to terminal box on
appliance.
A. Visual Inspection: Fittings and equipment are to be inspected for fixing and workmanship.
B. Megger tests are to include switch and socket outlet tests together with insulation resistance
of wiring installations.
C. Operation: Devices are to be tested for operation and are to perform as intended at full load
without any signs of heating.
D. Equipment is to be insulation tested and observed, under full-load for not less than 3 days
operation, with respect to undue heating and performance in general.
3.5 CLEANING
Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes, and enclosures. Replace stained or improperly
painted wall plates or devices.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and
multipole lighting relays and contactors.
B. Connection to BMS system, including interface elements such as relays, transducers, etc.
as detailed in Division 15 Specification Sections BMS schedules and /or shown on the
Drawings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include dimensions and data on features, components, and ratings for
lighting control devices.
B. Samples: Occupancy sensors, manual switches and plate for color selection and
evaluation of technical features.
C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain lighting control devices from a single source with total
responsibility for compatibility of lighting control system components specified in this
Section, and in Division 16 Section "Dimming Controls."
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of devices specified in this Section with systems and components
specified in other Sections to form an integrated system of compatible components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2. Time Switches:
3. Photoelectric Relays:
a. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation.
b. Area Lighting Research, Inc.
c. Fisher Pierce.
d. Grasslin Controls, Corp.
e. Intermatic, Inc.
f. Paragon Electric Co., Inc.
g. Rhodes: M H Rhodes, Inc.
h. SSAC, Inc.
i. Tork, Inc.
4. Occupancy Sensors:
c. Bryant Electric.
d. Honeywell, Inc.; Home and Building Controls.
e. Hubbell Lighting, Inc.
f. Lightolier.
g. Lithonia Control Systems.
h. MyTech Corporation.
i. Novitas, Inc.
j. RAB Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc.
k. SenTec, Inc.
l. Sterner Lighting Systems, Inc.
m. Tork, Inc.
n. Touchplate.
o. Unenco Electronics (A Hubbell Co.).
p. Watt Stopper, Inc. (The).
1. Astronomic dial.
2. Two contacts, rated 30-A unless otherwise indicated.
3. Two pilot-duty contacts, rated 2-A unless otherwise indicated.
4. Eight-day program uniquely programmable for each weekday and holidays.
5. Skip-day mode.
A. Description: Solid state, with single-pole, double-throw dry contacts rated to operate
connected relay or contactor coils or microprocessor input.
E. Indoor Skylight Units: Housed in a threaded plastic fitting for mounting under skylight.
F. Outdoor Sealed Units: Weathertight housing, resistant to high temperatures and equipped
with sun-glare shield and ice preventer.
B. Safety: Control is to be designed such that in case of failure, unit fails in the on position.
C. Contacts are to close or open as illumination level increases to set level with respect to
requirements shown on the Drawings.
D. Enclosure: Heavy duty cast metal, with translucent dome of 'Lexan' (by G.E.) or other
equal and approved, to protect against high ultra violet rays, and 180 deg. swivel base and
16 mm threaded conduit mounting. Enclosure is to be weatherproof and protected
against high winds and storms.
B. Ceiling-Mounting Units: Unit receives 24-V dc power from a remote source and, on
sensing occupancy, closes contacts that provide signal input to a remote microprocessor-
based lighting control system.
C. Switch-Box-Mounting Units: Unit receives power directly from switch leg of the live ac
circuit it controls and operates integral power switching contacts rated 1000 W at ac,
minimum.
D. Operation: Turns lights on when room or covered area is occupied and off when
unoccupied, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Time Delay for Turning Lights Off: Adjustable over a range from 1 to 15 minutes,
minimum.
2. Manual Override Switch: Turns lights off manually regardless of elapsed time
delay.
3. Ambient-Light-Level Control: Adjustable for setting a level of ambient
illumination above which sensor will not turn lights on when occupancy is sensed.
4. Isolated Relay Contact: Operates on detection of occupancy or vacancy, as
indicated, to activate an independent function.
1. Relays rated for a minimum of 20-A normal ballast load or 13-A tungsten filament
or high-inrush ballast load.
2. Sensor Power Supply: Rated to supply the number of connected sensors.
G. Ultrasonic Type: Emits a beam of ultrasonic energy and detects occupancy through use
of Doppler's principle in discerning movement in zone of coverage by sensing a change
in pattern of reflected ultrasonic energy.
1. Current Rating for Switching: Consistent with type of load served, including
tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballasts with 15 percent or
less total harmonic distortion of normal load current).
2. Control Coil Voltage: Match control power source.
• On and Up button.
A. Remote Lighting Relay Panel (RLRP): Comprise set of heavy duty long life service
relays, rated 20 A, 220 V a.c. for switching tungsten or fluorescent lighting loads, SPST
maintained (mechanically latched), with 24 V a.c. split-coil (1/2-on and 1/2-off) for
control by remote push button on/off switches, via 24 V control transformer.
B. Push Button Switch (LS): SPDT, momentary contact, normally open switch with pilot
light and red jewel Lens, Rated 3 A, 25 V A.C.
C. Master Selector Switch Panel (MSSP): Comprise set of push button switches type (LS),
assembled in one unit comprising box and cover, with individual switch per circuit
controlled, and one master switch for all-circuit control.
D. System is to allow local and remote centralized switching of group of lighting circuits
and from any number of individual points. System is to use low voltage (low current)
control circuitry to operate relay switches on branch circuits.
A. General: Control panels are to be of equivalent construction to panel boards with respect
to cabinet and interior standards of manufacture, and are to be surface mounted with see-
through door and lock.
C. Control: Switching relays controlled remotely by the BMS are to be provided with over-
riding manual local individual controls. Appropriate interface components are to be
provided and coordinated with the BMS described elsewhere in the Specification.
D. Relays, switching components, pilot lights, control transformers, fuses etc. are to be
neatly arranged and mounted inside dust-tight and, where necessary, water-tight cabinets.
Control and indication devices are to be continuously visible and accessible for
monitoring and control.
F. Control panels are to incorporate three ammeters, one per phase for local readings.
H. Contactors are to be class AC-2 and AC-3 to IEC 60158-1 and generally as described
under paragraph 16140 thereof. Each contactor is to be protected by an equally rated
circuit breaker of suitable short-circuit capacity at point of application.
I. Overcurrent relay is to be provided with all other accessories. Upon detecting fault on
monitored control panel, corresponding plug-in breaker unit is to trip, and fault signal is
to be sent to BMS.
K. Current Transformers: Bar primary type to IEC 60185 class 0.5 for metering. Current
rating is to be the next higher standard value above maximum demand load current.
L. Ammeters and Voltmeters: Long scale, switchboard type, with shadow proof covers for
semi-flush mounting. Meters are to be approximately 100 mm square with scale covering
approximately 250 degrees.
M. Voltmeter Selector Switches: Rotary type with cam operated contacts, and having 7
positions (off, R-Y, Y-B, B- R, R-N, Y-N, B-N).
N. Test blocks and plugs are to be provided for testing all instruments and instrument
transformers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment level and plumb and according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Mounting heights indicated are to bottom of unit for suspended devices and to center of
unit for wall-mounting devices.
A. Install wiring between sensing and control devices according to manufacturer's written
instructions and as specified in Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables" for low-
voltage connections and Division 16 Section "Voice and Data Systems" for digital
circuits.
E. Ground equipment.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 16 Section
"Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
A. Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least seven days'
advance notice.
B. Inspect control components for defects and physical damage, testing laboratory labeling,
and nameplate compliance with the Contract Documents.
C. Verify settings of photoelectric devices with photometer calibrated within previous six
months.
D. Electrical Tests: Use particular caution when testing devices containing solid-state
components. Perform the following according to manufacturer's written instructions:
E. Correct deficiencies, make necessary adjustments, and retest. Verify that specified
requirements are met.
F. Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and
workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Record repairs and adjustments.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Cleaning: Clean equipment and devices internally and externally using methods and
materials recommended by manufacturers, and repair damaged finishes.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system
installation. Refer to Division 1 Section "[Demonstration and Training] [Closeout
Procedures]."
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each item of parking control equipment. Include manufacturer's standard
details and installation and maintenance instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: For each item of parking control equipment. Include plans, elevations, and
details of typical members and other components. List all components of the system, supported by
catalogues and manufacturer's technical data. Show layout and installation details, including
anchorage details and mounting methods.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for parking control equipment operator, signal, and control
systems and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Show
locations of connections to electrical service provided in other Sections.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for equipment with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of architects/engineers and owners, and other information
specified or required by Engineer.
F. Maintenance Data: For parking control equipment components to include in the maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1. Gate Arms: Two replacement breakaway gate arms for each gate installed. Include
required accessory components.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Parking control system is to be fully coordinated with traffic requirements and traffic sign types.
A. Provide an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) at 240 V, 50 Hz in the control room to serve
detectors or detector-counters and central control equipment. All required power supply
equipment and cabling from this source is to be provided under this Section of the work.
Changeable signs, barriers etc., are to be served power from emergency lighting panel boards at
240V, 50Hz.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. General Requirements: Central control is to provide integrated, segmented, car parking system to
minimize inconvenience to users and redundant traffic circulation, achieved by programming
system control to allow efficient use of parking spaces (taking into consideration standby reserved
spaces for outstanding traffic in approaches, free space for seasonal users and other circumstances)
using re- programmable system.
B. Automatic Functions: Parking control system is to perform the following automatic functions
(with the possibility of manual over-ride):
1. Automatic rising barrier with built-in vehicle presence detector for automatic closing after
exiting.
E. Operation of changeable signs is to be in accordance with the Drawings. Queuing cars and season
parkers are to be catered for by programming the CCU. 'Full' sign status is not to prevent season
Parker (allocated definite space on any floor), proceeding normally through automatic operation of
barriers. The same privilege is to be given to cars within queuing space or entrance road to car
park, as pre-programmed (normally 0.5 - 1% of car park capacity).
A. Components: Gate arm linked to control cabinet enclosing motor mechanism, control logic
circuitry, built-in self tuning loop detector for automatic barrier closing and electrical connections
for control and power circuits.
B. Cabinet: Outdoor type, welded cold rolled galvanized sheet steel (minimum 1.5 mm thick)
finished with epoxy paint, air-drying enamel or other approved anti-corrosive finish, color selected
by the Engineer from manufacturer’s standard range, and with one gasketted door with flush-
mounted T-handle.
C. Gate Arm: Lightweight aluminum, minimum 3 m long, finished in painted diagonal stripes.
D. Gate Arm Drive: Single-phase, instant reversing motor connected by double V-belts to heavy
duty 60 to 1 single reduction speed reducer. Direct gear drive and chain drive are not acceptable.
Power is to be transmitted to gate arm drive shaft through activating crank and connecting rod.
Cranks, connecting rod and main shaft are to be solid steel bar, cadmium plated. Cams are to be
provided to allow adjustment of gate arm travel. Gate arm motor is to have built-in overload
switch protection.
E. Switches: Auto/manual and on/off switches are to be located behind lockable door.
G. Operation: In automatic mode, gate controller is to provide one-way traffic control. Barrier is to
be automatically closed by in-built loop detector, and count pulse is to be transmitted to counting
device at CCU. Gate controller is to discriminate between open commands initiated by ticket
dispenser, card reader and cashier CPU.
A. Type: Solid-state device capable of generating two different loop frequencies, selectable via front
end DIP- switch, to minimize cross talk and interference. Detector is to include tailgate
recognition system to provide accurate count of passing vehicles, and one 3 A, 220 V contact
actuated by in-built relay to control remote functions.
B. Enclosure: Approved weatherproof construction, with gasketted and bolted removable cover for
access for repair and adjustment. Alternatively, unit may be placed inside weatherproof cabinet
with other major equipment/devices.
D. Tuning is to be fully automatic, with detector capable of re-tuning to loop to which it is connected
when reset or when mains power supply is turned on. Detector is to tune to any loop in the
inductance range 20 to 1000 micro- henries.
E. Operational led indicators are to be included for presence detection, detector in-tune, sensitivity
mode and power supply status.
F. Loop Wire: Stranded bare copper conductor, of size, number of turns and method of installation
in accordance with loop detector manufacturer's recommendations.
A. Type: Solid-state summation device, to automatically maintain count of available parking spaces
by accepting single inbound and outbound traffic counts (pulses) from entry and exit detectors.
Counter is to be programmed to display spaces available as variably pre-set at CCU with
allowance for reserve spaces and is to send output signal upon reaching zero count.
B. Functions: When parking zone (floor) or block is full, differential counter is to:
C. Characteristics:
A. Type: Microprocessor-based, comprising entry keyboard with LCD display panel, season card
encoding terminal, alpha- numeric report printer, interfaces and connections necessary for
automatic or manual control of operating functions of parking equipment. CCU is to comprise
individual differential counting assembly for each zone (floor) for system reliability and control of
respective changeable signs.
1. Receive signals from entrances and exits of each car park and each zone (floor) separately,
to keep decrement/ increment count of total traffic (transient and seasonal) and zone (floor)
traffic.
2. Monitor status on indicating panel for each zone (floor).
3. Effect output control signals to changeable full/ vacant signs at various positions, in
response to requirements of system operation and to deactivate gate barriers or ticket
dispensers and magnetic card readers in case of default and by intentional instruction.
4. Receive data from cashier computers, card readers, ticket dispensers and barrier operations
for audit.
5. Provide reports for daily, monthly and annual car park transactions.
C. Control Assembly: Modular, designed to facilitate system phasing, expansion and servicing, and
consisting of plug- in solid state cards, all enclosed in housing, using standard 19-inch rack
system. Housing is to be made of steel, treated against corrosion and finished with epoxy enamel
or other approved finish of color to be selected by the Engineer. Components are to be easily
accessible for operation through hinged front panel, and for maintenance through removable side
panels.
D. Man-machine interface equipment for card encoding/ decoding and primary programming is to be
purpose-made and compatible with the system, and as proposed by manufacturer.
E. Indicating panel is to have 'full' sign display, laid out in general pattern of parking zones (floors),
as schematically shown on the Drawings, indicating status (full or not full) of each zone (floor) of
car park, and is to contain one display for each parking zone (floor), arranged on an anodized
aluminum base plate with zone (floor) reference inscriptions. Housing is to be surface wall
mounted steel box, treated against corrosion and finished with epoxy enamel or other approved
finish, of color selected by the Engineer from manufacturer’s standard range. Access for
maintenance is to be through hinged and lockable, framed glass front panel fixed to trim.
A. Lot "Full" Signs Single-faced signs consisting of illumination source contained in welded steel
bodies with extended hood and baked-enamel finish. Sign copy shall be [4 inches (102 mm)] tall
as required by the client/ engineer .
1. Operation: Automatic by system controller.
B. Led Display composed of high intensity outdoor Led module, driving circuit, controlling circuit,
frame and other parts. It shall receive the parking space statistics from the controller, displaying
the total available parking spaces in real time. Internal procedure can be revised at any time
according to the user’s demands, displaying other information.
C. Signs shall have a minimum cone of vision of 30 degrees and 7 pixel high x 5 pixel wide character
format.
D. The VMS housing will be constructed from seamlessly welded high grade 2mm, aluminum. The
face of the aluminum housing shall be punched to form a contrast mask. This serves to make the
VMS more legible as well as protect the face of the VMS from damage and vandalism.
C. Power supply cables to various equipment of system are to be PVC insulated, single core in
conduit, and multi-core, non-armored in duct banks, as described in Division 16 Section
"Conductors and Cables".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Before installation, examine areas to receive parking control equipment. Verify that critical
dimensions are correct and conditions are acceptable. Proceed with installation only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide templates for anchor bolts and other items encased in concrete or below finished surfaces
so as not to delay the Work.
3.3 INSTALLATION
B. Loop Detectors: Cut grooves in pavement and bury and seal wire loop according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Connect to related equipment operated by detector.
C. Builder's Work: Coordinate positions and foundations for gates, dispensers, readers, etc. Prepare
detailed drawings, indicating curbs and any service lines, cable ducts, handholes/cable boxes, etc.,
and templates required for construction. Obtain Engineer's approval before executing any work.
D. Fixings: Supply steel frame bases, holding-down bolts, nuts, washers etc., before construction of
foundations and bases.
E. Before pulling cables or wires, fix all major equipment in final position and complete all
raceways, duct-banks, conduits, handholes/cable boxes and covers.
F. Changeable Signs: Check and confirm positions of changeable signs as shown on the Drawings,
and provide conduit outlets and control wiring necessary for their operation.
G. Electrical Work: Coordinate provision of all necessary electrical components provided by others,
and to which control and power wiring is to be provided.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, which ensure parking control equipment is without damage or deterioration at the time of
Substantial Completion.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Equipment and Labor: Provide all testing equipment and specialists for testing system.
B. Tests are to include insulation resistance, continuity, loop characteristics, signal measurements and
analysis, logic routines etc. in accordance with manufacturer's test plan, to be submitted two
months before testing, and fully cove performance of components.
C. Operational tests are to be carried out on system for one week, to test performance of system as if
fully operational at peak periods, with all normal and abnormal functions checked and analyzed.
Trained staff is to be stationed at various positions to carry out operations and report results.
Operations are to include, without limitation, actual vehicular movement over detector loops,
performance of counters, cashiers equipment, central control unit and the like, issue of tickets,
card reader operation and consequent operations etc. as well as auditing and management
functions.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes standby/emergency power plant installation comprising the following:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit full technical data of equipment for approval including, but not
limited to, the following:
4. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine generator set and other
components specified, weights and forces, mounting methods, vibration protection
etc.
5. Battery type, make, charge/discharge characteristics, capacity and constructional
features.
6. Battery charger, method of charging, equalizing and trickle charging.
7. Daily fuel tanks, pipes and accessories; materials and construction.
8. Exhaust system and silencers; materials and construction.
9. Control instruments, protection, alarms, cut-outs, indicating lamps, indicating
instruments and all other devices or components.
10. Time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device.
11. Synchronization system where specified for two or more sets are in parallel, including
technical data, instruments, governor and voltage regulation, with characteristic
curves etc.
12. Calculated noise levels in dBA at typical points within engine room and at various
locations inside and outside.
13. Details of sound attenuator.
14. Details for foundation and vibration.
B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited
to, the following:
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
D. Routine Tests and Factory Test Reports: Fully assembled plant or equipment is to be tested
at the factory, before shipping. Complete performance tests are to be carried out under site
simulated conditions, in accordance with the Standards and as described in the
Specification, showing evidence of compliance with specified requirements.
E. Field Test and Observation Reports: Indicate and interpret test results and inspection records
relative to compliance with performance requirements.
I. Maintenance Data: For each packaged engine generator and accessories to include in
maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following:
1. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at the Project for ready
access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply.
2. Detail operating instructions for both normal and abnormal conditions.
A. Local Representative: Provide evidence that proposed equipment manufacturer has a locally
established and authorized organization which can be called upon for professional advice
and maintenance as may be required, and which can immediately supply spare parts to
support day to day and emergency maintenance requirements. Failure to satisfy Engineer
may disqualify a manufacturer.
B. Standards: Equipment and component parts are to comply with ISO 3046, ISO 8528, IEC
60034, IEC 60085 and CISPR, or equivalent NEMA, ANSI, IEEE and DIN Standards and
recommendations of ABGSM (Association of British Set Manufacturers) where such
standards meet with or supersede the ISO and IEC Standards.
C. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 emergency power supply system.
D. Seismic Zone: Comply with Code requirements for seismic risk zone 2A, as per UBC code.
A. Deliver engine generator set and system components to their final locations in protective
wrappings, containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent
damage from construction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is safe from
such hazards.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Spare Parts: Provide manufacturer's recommended spare parts for 1000 hours operation of
the plant. Provide list of manufacturer's spare parts for 2000 hours operation together with
current prices. Pack with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing
contents.
B. Tools and Instruments: Provide tools and instruments required for normal routine
inspection, testing, operation and general maintenance, as recommended by the
manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Caterpillar (U.S.A.)
2. Cummins (Onan) (U.S.A./ U.K.)
3. Deutz (Germany)
4. Kohler (U.S.A.)
5. M.T.U. (Germany)
6. MAN-B&W (Germany)
7. Volvo (Sweden)
8. Wartsila (Finland)
A. Performance Class: Diesel generator set is to be class G3 voltage drop / free drop at 100%
loading) to IS08528-1.
B. Generator Set Assembly: Compact package type, with all equipment mounted on one rigid
steel bed frame suitable for skidding. Radiator is to be mounted on the set or remotely as
shown on the Drawings. Design is to permit easy operation, maintenance and repair.
D. Noise reduction is to be achieved by approved methods at source of noise, with sound level
measured at nearest façade of the building limited to 50 dBA at 20 Hz down to 41 dBA at
10,000 Hz.
E. Cold Starting: Engine is to be fully equipped to start and pick up initial load specified at
specified minimum ambient temperature. Provide coolant heater.
1. Cold starting aids, such as engine jacket water heater, lubricating oil heater, intake-air
heater, battery and all devices, accessories, connections, thermostatic switches and
off-duty disconnects with pilot lights and necessary protection, are to be
supplemented as recommended by the manufacturer and approved.
F. Equipment ratings are to be as shown on the Drawings or the next higher standard ratings
provided by the manufacturer. Ratings are to be net [Standby][Prime power with no
limited operational hours (with capability of 10% overload for one hour in every 12
hours] to consumer, excluding fan and any auxiliaries, auxiliary drives and losses, delivered
at specified frequency, voltage and power factor and under worst climatic conditions on site.
G. Generator shall be located in a seismic Zone 2A area. Generator design and installation shall
prevent any damage due to a Zone 2A event.
C. Starting and Stopping: When in the automatic mode the set is to start and stop automatically
by a signal sensed through an auxiliary contact in the load transfer switchgear. The set is to
stop, after an adjustable cool- down period (2 - 30 minutes).
D. Duty: Plant is to reach full speed within 10 seconds from start impulse and accept
immediately 60 % of net rated output (load being mixed, steady and inductive, with motor
starting loads as shown on the Drawings). Transient voltage variation is not to exceed 15 %
under any step-load application for which the system is intended, up to full rated load,
recovering to within +/-2% within a few cycles.
E. Failure to Start: Should engine fail to start following a start impulse, the system is to come
to rest for a few seconds. Two further starting attempts are to be automatically made with
intermediate 20-second maximum periods of rest. Should the set fail to start after three
attempts, an alarm is to sound and a 'start failure' signal illuminate.
G. Regular Exercising: While on 'auto', the set is to start regularly and automatically every
week and is to operate for 30 minutes before stopping.
A. Design: Diesel engine is to be designed for type of load and application required. Engine
and governor are to be selected to meet operating requirements and response specified.
F. Flywheel is to be suitably sized for type of service and constraints specified, and capable of
being rotated at 125% of rated speed without failure. Torsion vibration dampers are to be
provided.
G. Engine rating is to be such that alternator can deliver net specified rated output as specified
earlier, with temperature rise not exceeding rise allowed by the Standards.
J. Cooling System: Engine is to be water cooled with gear- driven water pumps. System is to
be pressurized, with heavy-duty tropical radiator cooled by reverse flow fan. Fan cowl and
hand protection guards are to be fitted. Coolant temperature is to be controlled by one or
more thermostats as determined by design of system. Radiator is to be sized for continuous
performance at 110% rated load at worst operating ambient conditions with a 7 to 8 deg. C
temperature differential. Radiator is to be non-ferrous metal, incorporating pressure valve,
radiator cap and drain cock and with integral expansion tank. Direct acting modulating
thermostatic diversion valve is to control engine cooling water temperature. Under normal
operation, by-pass is not to be fully closed. Treated or fresh cooling water and anti-
corrosion and anti-freeze additives are to be used as recommended by Manufacturer for
Specific Conditions of Installation.
K. Cooling Airflow: Obstructions in path of cooling air flow (openings, louvers, grilles, mesh,
ducts, bends etc.) are not to reduce air flow below that needed at full rated output. Fan and
radiator characteristics are to be selected accordingly. Advise if additional booster fans are
required and provide necessary control gear for automatic operation.
L. Cylinders are to have removable liners. Wet type liners are to have witness hole between
liner sealing rings of each cylinder for early detection of coolant or oil leakage. Each
cylinder is to have drilled and tapped hole and valve for connections of pressure indicator.
M. Lubricating Oil System: Pressurized circulating type, using two engine-driven, gear type
lubricating oil pumps with full flow filters and replaceable elements and lubricating oil heat
exchanger. Filter system is to have spring loaded by-pass valve to permit oil circulation if
filters become clogged. Audible and visual alarms are to cut-in when valve starts opening.
Lubricating oil cooler is to be shell and tube heat exchanger with water from engine radiator
as the cooling medium. Direct acting thermostatic diversion valve is to control oil
temperature. Under normal operation by-pass is not to be fully closed.
N. Fuel system is to have injection pump and injectors that are easily removable and
replaceable for servicing. Engine is to have integral, gear type, engine driven transfer pump
to lift fuel against a head of 2.5 m and supply it through filters to injection pump at constant
pressure. Fuel filter elements are to be easily replaceable.
O. Exhaust system is to be complete with flanged, bolted, galvanized, seamless steel pipe
sections, long sweep elbows, flexible expansion sections, clean-outs, residential silencer,
wall thimbles and supporting steelwork. Silencer is to be independently supported. Indoor
hot exhaust parts are to be insulated with mineral wood / rock wool material, not less than
50 mm thick, retained by wire ties and cladded with sheet metal aluminum (22 - SWG)
covers to protect insulation. Exhaust system is to be designed to reduce back-pressure to
below maximum specified by the manufacturer, in relation to exhaust pipe length shown on
the Drawings.
Q. Storage Battery: Lead-acid, sealed-in-plastic type, complete with battery rack and inter-cell
connectors. Battery is to have sufficient capacity to provide minimum four cranking
periods.
R. Battery Charger: 25% over-rated, solid state, full-wave rectifier type, adequate to fully
recharge depleted battery in not more than 8 hours and to automatically control rate of
charge (providing a high-charge rate to a depleted battery and reducing to a trickle-charge
rate when battery is fully charged). Ammeter is to be provided to indicate charging rate,
which is to be adjustable. Battery charger is to be mounted in control cubicle, unless
otherwise approved.
T. Governor over-speed trip is to automatically close fuel pump racks in event of engine over-
speed. Device is to be separate and independent from governing mechanism.
U. Protective system is to comprise automatic engine shut- down and generator trip with visual
and audible alarms in event of over-speed, low lubricating oil pressure, high cooling water
temperature and over cranking.
A. Type: Synchronous, low reactance, high efficiency, revolving field type, with brushless
exciter and flexible coupling, sized to pick up effective load without exceeding transient and
steady-state voltage deviation limits specified up to its full nominal rating and designed for
the performance stipulated in the Specification. It is to be two-bearing construction with
bearings of the sleeve or sealed ball type.
B. Leads and Cables: Phase leads are to be brought out fully insulated to a terminal cable box
of heavy gauge sheet steel, protection IP 44. Control and protection cables are to be brought
out to a separate terminal box.
C. Maximum voltage difference between the three phases at 100%-balanced load is not to
exceed 1%. With unbalanced load up to 8% on one phase at unity power factor and zero
load on other phases, the line-to-neutral voltages are not to differ by more than 2%.
D. Characteristics:
1. Number of Phases: 3.
2. Rated Voltage, Frequency, and Net Rated Output: As shown on the Drawings.
3. Rated power factor: 0.8.
4. Winding Connection: Re-connectable with ends brought out and fully insulated.
5. Maximum Unbalanced Load Current, (negative sequence component of current) with
none of the Phase Currents Exceeding Rated Current: 8% of the rated current.
6. Overload 10% of name plate rating for 1 hour every 12 hours.
7. Rotor: Salient pole type, incorporating damping grid.
8. Excitation: Brushless, with rotating armature rectifiers and discharge resistors.
9. Voltage Regulator: Automatic, with readily accessible controls for voltage level.
10. Insulation: Class H for stator and class H for rotor & exciter, with class F
temperature rise, unless other indicated on the drawings.
11. Enclosure: Drip proof and screen protected (IP 21 to IEC 60529).
12. Cooling: Built-in centrifugal fans.
13. Maintained Short Circuit: 250% for 2 seconds.
14. Over-speed: 120% (minimum) for 2 minutes.
15. Total harmonic factor (THF) at no load 3%max.
16. Waveform Distortion Factor at no Load: 5% max.
E. Voltage Regulation: Overall voltage deviation within normal speed variations is to be within
limits specified from no-load to full-load, from hot to cold and with load power factor from
0.8 lagging to unity. Regulator is to automatically reduce voltage if load exceeds capacity
of generator. Voltage build-up is to be positive and rapid even when full load is suddenly
applied. Line-to-line voltage waveform deviation factor is not to exceed +/-5%. Total
harmonic content is not to exceed 5% and that of one harmonic not to exceed 2%. Radio
interference suppression is to be within the limits set by the Standards, grade (N).
output voltage within limits specified for any load up to 110% generator rating and under
any sudden load changes specified.
G. Voltage Regulator: Solid state, volts/Hz type, utilizing silicon semi-conductor devices in
control and power stages, with built-in Electro-magnetic interference suppression and
designed for single or parallel operation. Manual adjustment to +/-5% of regulated voltage
level is to be possible by a potentiometer at control panel. All components are to be sealed,
moisture and heat resistant, with a suitable environmentally protected enclosure. Voltage
regulator is to automatically reduce voltage if load exceeds capacity of generator and is to
sustain a 3-phase short- circuit current at the generator terminals for the period for which the
short-circuit protection operates and at least for 3 seconds. Voltage regulator power is to be
supported by generator voltage and current to maintain excitation field power.
A. Generating Set Instruments, Protection And Controls: Control relays, sensing equipment,
switchgear protective relays and devices and start, stop and shutdown controls are to be
provided as necessary for operation specified. Generating set, instruments, protection and
controls are to be mounted preferably in one control cubicle.
C. Instruments and controls for a non-paralleled set are to include at least the following:
1. Voltmeter and 7-position selector switch.
2. Ammeter and 4-position selector switch.
3. Frequency meter.
4. Off/test/manual/auto duty switch.
5. Manual-start and stop push buttons.
6. Kilowatt-hour meter.
7. Power factor meter.
8. Service-hour running counter.
9. Plant exerciser.
10. Potentiometer for voltage level control.
11. Speed raise/lower device.
12. Cool-down time setting controls.
13. Illuminated indicator panel with LEDs at least for low oil pressure, high water
temperature, over-speed, fail-to-start, generator overload, reverse-power, generator on
load, battery low charge state
14. Lamp test push-button.
15. Indicating gauge and low level fuel alarm.
16. Battery charger, on/off switch, pilot lights.
17. D.C. ammeter.
18. Alarm sounder and reset controls.
19. Anti-condensation heater.
D. Protective gear is to ensure orderly engine stop or shutdown with reset relays, as required
for safety and operational reliability, and is to include the following:
1. Output [Power air circuit breaker (PACB) with solid state trip unit, in accordance
with Division 16 Section "Switchboards", (electrically operated and electrically
tripped by shunt release) for over-current and external earth fault protection.
2. Over-voltage protection with voltage and time lag adjustment.
3. Loss-of-field/ under excitation protection.
4. Phase unbalance via negative phase sequence protection.
5. Restricted earth-fault protection, with current adjustable settings between 0 and 20%
of rated current, and time adjustable settings 0 to 3 seconds.
6. Reverse power relay (for sets operating in parallel).
E. Control and Protective Gear Cubicles: Generator set mounted instrument and/or control
cubicles are to be resiliently mounted, preventing transmission of vibration to the
components. Separately mounted instrument and control cubicles are to be self-supporting,
floor mounted and free- standing. Cubicles are to be sheet steel construction, ventilated
indoor type, vermin and dust-proof, (IP 42 to IEC 60947-1), with lockable hinged doors and
instrument panels, separate compartments for control devices, protective relays, circuit
breaker(s) and neutral earthing device. Inner and outer surfaces of steel enclosures are to be
cleaned, phosphatized, primed with heavy-duty rust inhibiting primer and finished with two
coats of enamel. Wiring is to be 600 V, modularly arranged, with connections made at front
terminal blocks with no live conductors exposed. Wires are to have approved numbered
ferrules at each terminal. Printed circuit plug-in boards, where applicable, are to be of
industry standards, accessible and withdrawable, mounted in standard racks.
G. Step Loading: An automatic step loading system is to be provided for sequential application
of emergency loads with an adjustable (0- 30 sec) time delay between each two steps as
described on the drawings. The system is to comprise all necessary control equipment
including under over/ voltage sensing relays, time delay relays, interface devices and wiring
with respective circuit breakers.
I. Relays: Front adjustable, sealed type, with dust-tight enclosures, removable covers, test
terminal blocks and plugs for testing relay without removal from case. Removal from
casing is to automatically short-circuit respective current transformer secondary windings.
J. Instruments are to be housed in enameled metal cases for switchboard flush installation,
with scales and markings protected and sealed. Indicating meters are to be minimum 76 mm
square. Accuracy is to be within 2% unless otherwise specified. Voltmeters and ammeters
are to be moving iron type for A.C. measurements and moving coil type for D.C.
measurements.
M. KWH Meter: 3-element type for unbalanced 3-phase, 4- wire loads, fitted with 6-digit
cyclometer.
A. Day-tank Construction: Closed cylindrical steel, inclined at least 3 degrees from horizontal
and fitted with drain plug, inlet and outlet pipe connectors and breather pipe.
B. Day-tank breather pipe is to have replaceable paper air filter or breather caps with air filters.
C. Day-tank instruments are to include float switch, solenoid valve and dial-type level indicator
to give alarm on over-fill and low-level.
A. Manually Operated Overhead Hoist: Chain operated, self aligning, low headroom type,
comprising trolley with gear mechanism combined into a compact unit, designed to run on
lower flanges of I-beam runway. Hoist is to have shock resistant suspension, positive action
Western type local brake; lifetime lubricated sealed bearings and load safety hook. Trolley
is to have four alloy cast iron wheels. Safety factor is to be minimum of 5. Capacity of hoist
is to be as indicated on the Drawings, and is to be tested to 1.5 times rated capacity.
B. Power and Control Cables: Comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables", and
Section “Control/Signal Transmission Media" of the Specification and as shown on the
Drawings.
C. Earthing Equipment: Comply with Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding" of the
Specification.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, equipment foundations, and conditions, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged
engine generator performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated or otherwise required for packaged engine
generators. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Division 16 Section
"Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Bases: Ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for installation of
equipment are constructed in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings and
manufacturers' equipment drawings and that holes for fixing bolts and provisions for
passage of cables etc. are provided as required.
B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access for periodic maintenance, including
removal of drivers and accessories.
C. Built-In Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for passage
of feeders and cables which are to be built into concrete foundations, bases or building
structure are provided as and when required and that they are properly installed.
• All the exhaust piping and duct inside the generator room should be fixed directly to
the ceiling. The ventilation and the silencers must be taken into consideration for the
selection of the generators. If the static pressure of the generator fan is not enough,
booster fans should be foreseen. The noise outside the generators room should not
emerge from the background noise more than (3dB) during the night at the closet
sensible are.
• Inlet and outlet sound attenuators should be calculated for not having more than (50
dB) at the façade of the building and/or at any eventual neighbor. The pressure drop
for each silencer shall not exceed 45 Pa.
• Outside the generator room, the exhaust pipe should be fixed on vibration isolators.
E. Supervision: Carry out equipment installation under the direct supervision of a qualified
technician, licensed by and trained at the factory. Final adjustments and putting into
satisfactory operation are to be made by a specialist delegated by the factory.
F. Generating Set: Install to maintain alignment and minimize engine and generator stresses.
Protect instrumentation and control equipment including engine mounted instruments from
machine vibration. Mountings and method of mounting are to be as recommended by the
manufacturer and approved by Engineer.
G. Engine exhaust piping is to be slightly sloped away from engine to avoid condensation
returning to engine and is to have drain plugs or clean-out at lower end as required.
H. Engine Hot-Air Exhaust Duct: Install approved canvas duct with metal frames between
radiator and louvered opening in wall for radiator exhaust air.
I. Tank Vent Pipe: Extend to nearest outside wall of building and carry up to at least 2 m
above ground level with end at least 1 m away from any building opening. Slope vent pipe
back to tank without traps and support securely. Provide replaceable dust filter and
gooseneck bend or approved weatherproof vent cap at top of pipe.
J. Pipe Hangers And Supports: Fasten securely to building structure with approved masonry
expansion bolts, minimum 20 mm diameter and install in accordance with manufacturers'
instructions.
K. Earthing: Install earthing system in accordance with Division 16 Section "Grounding and
Bonding" of the Specification.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
C. Ground equipment.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Equipment: Inspect equipment upon delivery to Site and report any loss or damage to
Engineer.
B. Earthing resistance tests if any are to be carried out to verify specified requirements.
C. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of
each element of engine generator system before and during system operation. Check for air,
exhaust, and fluid leaks.
D. Load tests are to be carried out at low loads to overload conditions, at various power factors.
Measurements are to include voltage and frequency deviations and regulating time under
various step loading conditions, temperature measurements and pressure measurements at
various locations, and in accordance with an approved plan under conditions equal to worst
site ambient conditions.
F. Load Banks: If actual loads are not made available at time of acceptance testing, provide
load banks to carry out complete test cycle of the system under loading and switching
conditions necessary to prove compliance with the Specification.
G. Piping System: Using carbon dioxide or nitrogen from pressurized cylinder, test each
system to 1.5 times normal operating pressure. Do not subject equipment, apparatus or to
pressure exceeding prescribed test pressure obtained from nameplate data or from
manufacturers' published data. Apply tests before connecting piping to equipment. Remove
or disconnect and blank off relief valves, instruments and devices that might be damaged by
test pressure. Maintain test pressure on system for 24 hours during which time there is to be
no noticeable drop in pressure. Check for leaks using soap solution. Isolate source of
pressure during testing.
H. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.
I. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
requirements are met.
J. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and
measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a
label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
K. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to applicable
standards, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration
records available for examination on request.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
3.8 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect system components. Remove paint splatters and other
spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. Clean components
internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system
installation. Refer to Division 1 Section.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes three-phase, on-line, static-type, uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
system installation, comprising the following:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment Data: Submit full technical data of equipment for approval including, but not
limited to, the following:
B. Batteries calculation
C. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Plans and front and side elevations, with indication of built-on control and indicating
devices and instruments, exact dimensions and weights, cabling etc.
2. One-line diagram with ratings of each piece of equipment, cabling, grounding etc.
3. Control and elementary diagrams, wiring diagrams and the like.
4. Installation and mounting details.
5. Batteries arrangement and mounting details.
6. Rating/de-rating selection calculation to be included.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Test Certificates: Submit type test and routine test certificates. System is to undergo a
functional and load test program approved by the Engineer, and is to undergo a minimum 72
hours 'burn-in' test, under site simulated conditions, prior to shipment.
G. Field Test Reports: Indicate test results compared with specified performance requirements,
and provide justification and resolution of differences if values do not agree.
I. As-Built (Record) Drawings: At project close-out, submit record drawings of installed UPS,
in accordance with requirements of the Specification.
B. Local Representative: Provide evidence that proposed equipment manufacturer has a locally
established and authorized organization which can be called upon for professional advice
and maintenance as may be required, and which can immediately supply spare parts to
support day to day and emergency maintenance requirements. Failure to satisfy Engineer
may disqualify a manufacturer.
C. Standards: Installation is to comply with relevant IEC, BS, EIA, NEMA and IEEE or equal
Standards. Materials and components are to be manufacturer's latest design, and Standards
used are to be approved prior to manufacture. Radio frequency interference (RFI)
suppression is to be in accordance with CISPR and IEC 60315–4 recommendations.
A. Deliver equipment in fully enclosed vehicles after specified environmental conditions have
been permanently established in spaces where equipment is to be placed.
A. Temperature limits within which equipment is to be designed to operate are zero to +40 deg.
C at 100% rated output. Equipment is to be capable of operating under up to 55 deg. C
ambient conditions with derating factor of 1.25% per deg. C over 40 deg. C.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Spare Parts: Provide manufacturer's recommended spare parts for 1000 hours operation of
UPS system. Provide list of manufacturer's spare parts for 2000 hours operation together
with current prices.
B. Tools and Instruments: Provide tools and instruments required for normal routine
inspection, testing, operation and general maintenance, as recommended by the
manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. System is to be of the programmable type, microprocessor based with CPU and memory
capabilities for storage of alarms, faults, status change, etc. The UPS shall permit setting
parameters for the environment and type of usage to be specified by the Engineer. UPS is to
be of the self-diagnostic type, equipped with a self-test function to verify correct system
operation. The self-test shall identify the parts of the UPS requiring repair in case of a fault.
The system shall be provided with multi-password levels to limit access to software and
data.
B. General: System is to be interposed between normal a.c. power supply and critical load, to
secure a minimum period of continuity of no-break battery back-up for 60 minutes in case
of failure of normal a.c. supply and maintain output voltage, frequency and phase deviation
within specified tolerances.
D. Normal a.c. power supply will be available from one protected source fed from either
normal a.c. network or from a.c. Characteristics of output of generator set (when provided)
and UPS system are to be coordinated for best results. Study and advise on special
requirements of generator characteristic output and stability.
E. System overall efficiency is not to be less than 93 % at full load and 90 % at half load.
F. Noise level of complete assembly is not to exceed 65 dB(A) at 1.0 m distance anywhere
within UPS room.
A. Under normal conditions inverter(s) are to be synchronized and phase locked to normal a.c.
supply. Upon loss of normal a.c. supply, battery is to continue supply of no-break power to
inverters, which then free-run on self- generated UPS frequency reference. Upon restoration
of normal a.c. supply, inverters are to re-synchronize to a.c. line, gradually (at slew rate), if
frequency and voltage deviation of normal a.c. supply is within preset limits specified.
C. Re-Transfer To Inverter: Re-transfer of critical load from auto by-pass source to inverter
(UPS mode) is only to be possible under the following conditions:
D. Lock-out feature is to inhibit re-transfer if by-pass source conditions are outside preset
tolerances or if UPS output and by-pass are not synchronized and phase locked or if UPS
output is not restored to normal conditions.
F. Provide maintenance disconnecting switch fully rated to carry the full load input current of
the UPS.
A. Rectifier/Charger Input:
B. Rectifier/Charger Output:
C. Static Inverters:
1. Nominal net system power output rating: with load power factor 0.7-lag to 0.9- lead.
2. Nominal output voltage: 400 V, three phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz, adjustable +/-5% of
nominal.
3. Output voltage regulation:
a. Balanced load: +/-1% (0 - 100% load)
A. Materials and Parts: Electronic devices are to be solid state, hermetically sealed. Indicator
lights are to be twin LED type, those denoting blown fuse conditions are to be seen by
operator without removing panels or opening cabinet doors. Power connections and remote
alarm and control wiring are to be accessible at terminal boards. Power semi- conductors
are to be fused. Metal surfaces including copper and aluminium heat sinks and busbars are
to be treated with permanent protective coating. Electro-mechanical power devices and
relays are to be vacuum impregnated, insulated for maximum operating voltage conditions,
and enclosed in dust-tight enclosures. Cables are to be fire resistant high temperature grade.
D. Sub-assemblies and components are to be mounted on pull- out and/or swing-out trays, of
the plug-in type where possible. Where it is not possible to mount components in pull-out or
swing-out trays, they are to be easily accessible inside the enclosure. Assemblies shall be
replaceable without requiring any adjustments or settings in the UPS.
E. Ventilation: For units rated over 5 kVA, an integral, forced-air, cooling system is to be
provided in each UPS module to remove dissipated heat efficiently, and ensure components
operate within environmental ratings. Air is to enter bottom of cabinet through replaceable
filters, and exhaust through the top. At least two fans are to be provided for ventilating each
enclosure. No degradation of performance is to occur in the event of a single fan failure.
F. Rectifier/charger unit is to have mainline circuit breaker and two-winding dry-type, Class H
insulated, class B temperature rise, with metallic electrostatic shielding, high efficiency
(98%), regulating transformer and is to be automatic with soft start-up (walk-in) feature,
using silicon controlled rectifiers (thyristors) with control logic circuitry to control firing
angles to thyristors to suit power output requirements and protect against primary power
surges, lightning transients, under-voltage and over-voltage conditions. Output is to be
passed through LC filters to d.c. bus.
G. Rectifier/charger unit is to be capable of supplying full load power to inverter, and to charge
the battery from a discharge condition to 95% charge within ten times discharge period, and
maintain full charge at floating voltage until next operation. Charger current is to be voltage
regulated and current limited. Where three-phase supply is involved, rectifier is to be at least
six-pulse type for UPS ratings up to 80 kVA, and 12-pulse type for 80 kVA ratings and
above.
H. Inverter is to employ Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBT) technology in three leg,
pulse width modulation (PWM) design with high frequency switching technique, and
complete with output transformer and filters. Inverter start-up is to be automatic, to reach
full voltage within milliseconds and deliver power to the load within 2 seconds. Inverter is
to start at any load including short-circuit. Output transformer is to be two-winding dry-
type, Class H insulated, class B temperature rise, with metallic electrostatic shielding, high
efficiency (98%),
I. Inverter oscillator is to operate and maintain output frequency of inverter within specified
tolerances, and be capable of synchronization and phase-locking to normal power supply
frequency. When inverter is phase-locked to normal power supply, and latter fails,
oscillator is to automatically revert to free running state (quartz oscillator) and maintain
specified limits.
J. Automatic static transfer switch is to be continuously rated at full load (100% FL), hybrid
type (make-before-break), solid state transfer device with logic thyristor assembly isolatable
or completely removable for maintenance. When signal to close switch is initiated,
thyristors are to instantaneously conduct power to prevent deviations and breaks in load
voltage outside specified tolerances.
M. UPS Output Neutral: Designed to continuously carry twice the full load phase current.
N. Input Filter Disconnection: UPS control system is to disconnect the input filters in case of
interruption of utility power supply failure while the UPS is operating at light loads (less
than 25%).
O. Battery: High rate discharge, heavy duty, industrial, high impact resistant, clear plastic
encased, sealed lead- acid (gas recombination) type cells with automatically re-closing
explosion proof safety vents. Electrolyte specific gravity is not to exceed 1.25 when fully
charged at 25 deg. C. Ampere-hour rating is to be sufficient for emergency period specified
with all inverters operating at full rated output, to a discharge limit of not less than 1.65 V
per cell. Cells are to be normally maintained at 2.25 V per cell. Guaranteed life is not to be
less than 10 years, with a capacity drop down to not less than 80% under normal expected
service. Batteries configuration is to be minimum of two strings in parallel; each string is to
be capable to supply the demand load for half the backup period.
P. Battery Racks: Steel construction, with plastic insulating rails at points of contact with
battery cases. Racks are to be painted with electrolyte resistant paint, are to be of
appropriate design for space in which installed, and directly accessible for maintenance.
Cables are to be rubber insulated electrolyte resistant type.
Q. Mimic Panel: UPS assembly is to include a mimic diagram with digital and LED displays,
indicating instruments and control devices, in true relative positions.
R. Local panel instruments are to include at least the following (digital readings):
1. Inverter on/off.
2. Battery input circuit breaker.
3. Auto/manual reset-test switch.
4. Manual reset switch.
5. Hybrid switch transfer test push-button.
U. Local built-in alarms causing horn to sound, with tripping command if required, are to
include at least the following:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Bases: Ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for installation of
equipment are constructed in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings and
equipment manufacturers' drawings and that holes for fixing bolts and provisions for
passage of cables etc. are provided as required.
B. Built-In Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for passage
of feeders and cables which are to be built into concrete foundations, bases or building
structure are provided as and when required and that they are properly installed.
D. Supervision: Carry out equipment installation under the direct supervision of a qualified
technician, licensed by and trained at the factory. Final adjustments and putting into
satisfactory operation are to be made by a specialist delegated by the factory.
3.2 GROUNDING
A. Provide direct interference free grounding circuit in accordance with Division 16 Section
"Grounding and Bonding" of the Specification.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Electrical Tests and Inspections: Perform tests and inspections according to manufacturer's
written instructions and as listed below to demonstrate condition and performance of each
component of the UPS:
B. Power Supply Output Disturbance: Provide microprocessor based instrument, and monitor
and record power supply output disturbance of voltage and frequency. Instrument details
are to be submitted for approval.
C. Test Periods are to be prolonged (over 24 hours) and as requested by Engineer, to verify and
obtain realistic voltage and frequency profile under any loading and switching conditions
within the criteria specified.
D. Data logging is to include high and low average voltage, sags and surges, spikes and spike
bursts, drop-outs; high and low frequencies etc. with print-out and storage on cassette tape
for subsequent re-entry into instrument's memory for display or print-out.
E. Tests are to include loads at various power factors from low-load to overload condition, and
measurements of temperature, heat losses, output voltage, wave shape, and harmonic
content and frequency stability.
F. Retest: Correct deficiencies and retest until specified requirements are met.
G. Record of Tests and Inspections: Maintain and submit documentation of tests and
inspections, including references to manufacturers' written instructions and other test and
inspection criteria. Include results of tests, inspections, and retests.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system
installation. Refer to Division 1 Section.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes normal-transfer battery inverters that automatically sense loss of
normal ac supply and use an electronic switch to transfer loads from normal to battery-
inverter supply, and that automatically retransfer to normal supply when normal power is
restored.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include dimensions and data on features and components for each product
specified. Include wiring diagrams and elevation view of front panel showing control
and indicating devices. Include data on ratings, and a detailed description of operating
modes and any load limitations that may apply.
B. Record of field tests covering tests and commissioning efforts required by Part 3 of this
Section.
C. Standards: Installation is to comply with relevant IEC, BS, EIA, NEMA and IEEE or
equal Standards. Materials and components are to be manufacturer's latest design, and
Standards used are to be approved prior to manufacture. Radio frequency interference
(RFI) suppression is to be in accordance with CISPR recommendations.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Spare Parts: Provide manufacturer's recommended spare parts for 1000 hours operation
of the system. Provide list of manufacturer's spare parts for 2000 hours operation
together with current prices.
B. Tools and Instruments: Provide tools and instruments required for normal routine
inspection, testing, operation and general maintenance, as recommended by the
manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 GENERAL
The Central Battery System (CBS) shall be fully automated, digitally controlled and consists of
LCD meter indicating battery voltage, battery current or battery compartments temperature.
Voltage is default, others displayed using push buttons. Display mode for charger, inverter, and
alarms shall be indicated by LED.
Following are the system ratings:
C. INVERTER: is to employ pulse width modulation design with high frequency switching
technique with necessary output filters. The inverter output is to be sinusoidal with
stable frequency and regulated amplitude in order to compensate the variations of the
battery voltage and the load’s consumption. The inverter is to automatically shut down
when the input voltage drops below an unsafe value, to be recommended by the
manufacturer, for protection of the electronic components. Inverter is to have the
following characteristics:
B. Load Description: Supply power without noise, vibration, pulsation of load, or abnormal
output or visual appearance for the following loads types, in any combination and at any
percentage of unit capacity:
1. Fluorescent lights.
2. Incandescent lights.
3. Halogen lights.
D. Operation: Unit normally supplies power to output circuits from a single, external,
normal supply source. When normal power fails, unit automatically transfers from
normal source to internal battery source and feeds output circuits through the inverter.
When normal power is restored, load automatically retransfers to normal supply and
battery is recharged.
Output Frequency: Automatically regulated to within plus or minus 1 Hz, from no load
to full load at unit power factor over the operating range of the battery voltage.
G. Battery: Valve Regulated Lead Acid type designed for maintenance-free operation,
including no addition of water for the service life of the battery. Battery must support
the total lighting load connected to the system for 1.5 hours with lifetime of 10 years.
Lead Acid cells shall be supplied with transducers to monitor battery compartment
temperature.
2. Charge light.
3. Inverter supply load light.
4. Battery voltmeter.
5. AC output voltmeter.
6. Load ammeter.
7. Test switch to simulate ac failure.
8. Meter accuracy within 2 percent or scale range.
I. Control Substation (ECBSS): feeds and controls up to 40 lighting fixtures. The ECBSS
shall monitor and control the fittings via a combined power/data cable. Each ECBSS
can monitor up to 8 local maintained, switched maintained and/or non-maintained
circuits.
J. 4-Way Power Feeding Module (PFM): Module for Feeding Maximum 4 Mains
Luminaires to connect them to the Central Battery System. The module is to be
provided for mains luminaires connected to the system. The maximum current per
luminaire is 1A at 220 volt.
M. Dimming Systems: System must be compatible with digital and analogue dimming
systems.
N. Remote Access: Software and test reports must be accessible remotely via LAN or
internet connection. The system must be capable of exporting data to BMS in
LONWORKS or BACNET format.
O. Testing: Automatic, periodic and mandatory tests of emergency lighting lamps and
control gear must be carried out to verify the correct operation of the central battery
system. The periodic test is to be programmed via a standard desk top PC and the
output of the test is to be printed out by the printer
P. Exit and Emergency Lighting Fixtures: are to be equipped with all devices that make
them part of the central battery system.
2.3 FINISH
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Clearance: According to manufacturer's written instructions, but not less than 900 mm
in front of unit.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
B. Provide the services of a qualified testing agency to perform the tests listed below
according to manufacture’s recommendations upon completion of installation of
system. Load the system using a variable load bank simulating KVA, KW, and power
factor of load for which unit is rated. Use instruments that have been recently calibrated
according to approved standards.
- Tests of harmonic content of input and output current fewer than 25 percent, and 100
percent of rated load.
3.4 CLEANING
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
3.6 COMMISSIONING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes automatic power factor correction equipment rated 600 V and less.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include dimensions; shipping, installed, and
operating weights of multiple capacitor cells or elements; and data on features, ratings, and
performance.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, method of field
assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Show access and
workspace requirements and required clearances.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail internal and interconnecting wiring and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
1. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended for storage at Project site.
2. Detailed instructions covering operation under both normal and abnormal conditions.
A. Comply with:
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sensor-communication module package with SCADA and with monitoring equipment
specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for successful
transmission and remote readout of remote monitoring data specified in this Section.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver extra
materials to Employer.
1. Fuses: 10 % of each type and rating, but not less than 3 of each.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Construction: Multiple capacitor cells or elements, factory wired in three-phase groups and
mounted in metal enclosures.
B. Capacitor Cells: Dry, metallized-dielectric, self-healing type. Each cell shall be encapsulated in
thermosetting resin inside plastic container.
D. Capacitor-Bank Fuses: Current limiting, non-interchangeable type; factory installed in each phase
and located within the equipment enclosure. Features include the following:
F. Enclosure: NEMA 250, steel or aluminum, arranged to contain the fluid leakage from capacitor
cells; factory equipped with mounting brackets suitable for type of mounting indicated.
G. Anti Harmonic Reactors are to be provided in series with the capacitors and properly tuned to limit
the harmonic currents in order to avoid over loading the capacitors. The reactor rating is not to
exceed 7% of the capacitors to be protected.
B. Internal Wiring: Factory wired, ready for field connection to external circuits at a single set of
pressure terminals.
A. Comply with IEC 60831-1, 2 and IEC 60871-1, 2 and IEC 60931-1, 2 or NEMA ICS 2.
C. Performance Requirements: Controls permit selection of a target power factor, adjustable to any
value between unity and 0.80 lagging. Controls continuously sense the power factor on circuits
being corrected and, when the power factor differs from the target setting for more than 10
seconds, operate a contractor to switch a capacitor bank into or out of the circuit. Contactors are
opened or closed as required to bring the corrected circuit power factor closer to the target setting.
Switch only one capacitor bank at a time.
1. Undervoltage relay that interrupts capacitor switching and disconnects capacitors for power
supply interruptions longer than 15 minutes.
2. "Advance" and "Retard" push buttons on the control panel to permit manually controlled
capacitor-bank switching.
E. Contactors: Three pole; rated for the repetitive high-inrush-switching duty in the capacitor
application.
G. Fuses for Protection of Capacitor Banks: Rated to protect contactor, interconnecting wiring, and
capacitors.
H. Inductors: Air-core-type, connected in capacitor circuits; rated to limit switching surges to within
contactor ratings.
I. Mechanical Bracing for Current-Carrying Parts: Adequate to withstand the maximum fault
current to which they may be exposed.
K. Enclosure Access: Hinged door with hand-operated catch. Door is interlocked with controls or
main circuit breaker to de-energize capacitors when door is opened.
M. Current Transformer: Type, configuration, and ratio to suit sensing and mounting conditions.
N. Main Circuit Breaker: Operable from outside the enclosure to disconnect the unit.
A. Factory test power factor correction equipment before shipment. Comply with IEC 60831-1,2 and
IEC 60871-1,2 and IEC 60931-1,2 or NEMA CP 1. Include the following:
1. Routine capacitor production tests, including short-time overvoltage, capacitance, leak, and
dissipation-factor tests.
2. Functional test of all operations, controls, indicators, sensors, and protective devices.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
C. Connect remote monitoring communication module to electrical power monitoring and control
data network through appropriate network interface unit.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-control
testing.
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuits have been energized, connect and observe units
to confirm proper operation.
C. Inspection: Perform external and internal inspections of capacitor equipment for damage and for
compliance with the Contract Documents and manufacturer's documentation. Check electrical and
mechanical bolted connections for required torquing.
D. Testing: Perform the following and certify compliance with test parameters:
1. Test insulation resistance between capacitor terminals and case. Follow manufacturer's
written instructions or those below:
a. Use test voltages 500 V minimum, for equipment rated 250 V and less, and 1000 V
minimum, for equipment rated more than 250 V.
b. Apply test voltage for 60 seconds.
c. Investigate, report, and resolve insulation resistance less than that stated by
manufacturer's literature or less than allowable 25 megohms for equipment rated
250 V and less and 100 megohms for equipment rated more than 250 V.
E. Correct deficiencies shown by inspections and tests on site where possible, and retest; otherwise,
remove and replace with new units and retest.
3.4 ADJUSTING
3.5 CLEANING
A. After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters and
other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system installation.
Refer to Division 1 Section [Demonstration and Training
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes secondary unit substations, each consisting of the following:
1. Incoming section.
2. Transformer section.
3. Secondary distribution section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: submit full technical data of equipment for approval including, but not
limited to, the following:
B. Shop And Construction Drawings: submit drawings for approval including, but not
limited to, the following:
C. Technical Literature: submit the following for approval prior to equipment manufacture:
1. Schedule of selected circuit breakers, relays and control gear, with complete
identification of each component and its characteristics.
2. Protection coordination scheme, including pick-up settings and time-grading,
together with time-current curves and range of adjustments etc. as required to
coordinate with upstream and downstream protective devices of the complete
system.
D. Type Test Certificates: are to be submitted to verify compliance of main equipment with
the relevant IEC Standards, including the following:
E. Routine Tests: each complete switchgear unit is to undergo routine tests at the
manufacturer's works in accordance with the relevant standards. Submit routine test
reports, prior to shipping equipment, indicating ambient test conditions and guaranteed
rating of equipment under site conditions.
F. Routine Tests and Special Test for power Transformers are to include measurement of
noise level, winding resistance, voltage ratio, check of polarity/ vector group, impedance
voltage, load loss, no-load loss, no load current, induced overvoltage withstand test and
separate source voltage withstand test.
G. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
B. Standards: equipment and component parts are to comply with the following Standards:
1. Common Clauses for HV Switchgear and Control Gear Standards: IEC 60694.
2. A.C. Metal-Enclosed Switchgear and Control Gear for Rated Voltages above 1 kV
and up to and including 52 kV: IEC 62271-200.
3. HV A.C. Circuit Breakers: IEC 62271-100.
4. Insulation Coordination: IEC 60071.
5. HV a.c. Fuse-switch combinations and Fuse-Circuit-Breaker Combinations: IEC
62271-105.
6. A.C. Disconnectors (isolators) and Earthing Switches: IEC 62271-102.
7. HV Switches: IEC 62271-103.
8. Surge Arrestors: IEC 60099.
9. Metering and Protective Current Transformers (CTs): IEC 60044-1.
10. Metering and Protective voltage Transformers (VTs): IEC 60186.
11. Relays: IEC 60255.
12. Reading Instruments: IEC 60051.
13. Watt-Hour Meters: IEC 60521.
14. Power Transformers: IEC 60076, & 60726.
15. Climate Conditions: IEC 60721-3-3 & 60721-3-4.
16. Insulating oil: IEC 60296.
17. Sulfur hexa-fluoride: IEC 60376.
18. Fuses: IEC 60282 -1.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Deliver in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path
as indicated.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Spare Parts: provide spare parts, as recommended by the manufacturer, for one year
maintenance as expected under local conditions, and to allow for emergency replacement
due to accidental breakage or failure. Spare parts are to include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1. Two sets of each type of lamp, fuse, auxiliary switch, trip coil, control switch,
selector switch, neon indicator and the like.
2. HV and LV Bushings
3. Drain blug
B. Tools And Instruments: provide tools and instruments required for normal routine
inspection, testing, operation and maintenance including levering crank, manual charging
handle, manual shutter operator, testing jumpers and HV test bushings, set of rail
extensions, digital micro ohm-meter, set of mobile lifting and handling equipment etc. as
necessary for the type of switchgear.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. A.B.B. (Sweden/Germany)
2. A.E.G. (Germany)
3. Cutler Hammer. (U.S.A.)
4. G.E. (U.S.A.)
5. Merlin-Gerin (France)
6. Siemens (Germany)
A. Type: single integrated metal housing, comprising three totally segregated compartments,
accommodating MV switch- gear, transformer and LV switchgear. Degree of protection
is to be IP 54 for switchgear (MV or LV) enclosures and IP 23 for transformer housing.
MV and LV connections to corresponding transformer terminals are to be insulated and
inaccessible without the use of tools.
B. Package is to be designed and constructed for shipping, lifting and handling as one piece.
F. Access: lockable double swing doors are to give access independently to MV and LV
compartments. Access to transformer is to be through demountable bolted panels. It is to
be impossible to reach equipment or live parts from outside the housing.
G. Finish: metal parts of housing are to be cleaned, primed with rust inhibiting and
waterproofing primer and finished with corrosion and weather-resistant enamel and final
coat of air drying enamel. Alternative finish may be used subject to approval.
H. Signs: heavy cast metal identification and danger signs, each not less than 200 x 300 mm,
are to be installed on all sides of substation.
I. Lighting and convenience power outlets are to be provided within the compartments, via
a fused circuit.
J. Earthing: exposed conductive parts are to be earthed via earth bars, with one earth bar for
MV and one earth bar for LV compartments.
1. Two N.C. and two N.O. auxiliary contacts on each switch shunt trip release on
fuse-switch combination
2. Earth fault indicator, operated by core-balance type current transformer, located
near and outside cable box/terminations with indicator visible from front and with
automatic reset.
3. Shunt trip release on fuse-switch combination.
AA. Sealed Liquid Immersed Power Transformer Construction: variable volume steel tank,
with corrugated wall design forming integral cooling pockets, heavy rolled and welded
steel bottom and base frame and hermetically sealed bolted-on cover. Tank is to be
completely filled with insulating liquid drawn in under vacuum. Tank cover is to have
provision for two thermometers or temperature sensors, lugs for lifting, four lashing lugs
and filler- pipe with valve. Tank is to have drain valve at bottom, earthing bolt on cover
and earthing pad on base-frame, and a rating plate.
BB. Sealed Liquid Immersed power transformer Noise Level: in general A-weighted sound
pressure level measured at 1 m at any direction from transformer is to be less than 56
dBA (without fan).
DD. Sealed Liquid Immersed Power Transformer Bushings: porcelain, tank-cover mounted, or
tank-side mounted to manufacturer's standard, and as approved, with plug-in or bolt-on
arrangements as described hereof.
EE. Sealed Liquid Immersed Power Transformer Finish: surfaces are to be steel grit blasted,
caustic washed and phosphatized, primed with waterproof primer and finished with
weather-resistant enamel and final coat of air- drying enamel. Alternative finish may be
used subject to approval.
The above accessories may be replaced by a digital protective unit for transformer monitoring and
protection against oil level, oil temperature and oil pressure with thermometer for indication of oil
temperature, oil level indicator, 2 N.O. contacts for oil temperature alarm and trip, 2 N.O. contacts
for oil level alarm and trip and one N.O. contact for oil pressure trip functions.
HH. LV Compartment Construction: dead front type, consisting of main circuit breaker,
busbars, outgoing circuit breakers, where shown on the Drawings, instrumentation and
accessories.
II. LV compartment main circuit breaker is to have solid state trip unit with long-time, short-
time and ground-fault pick up and time- delay adjustments and with high instantaneous
over-current trip, to correspond with transformer rating and LV interrupting capacity at
location, time and current coordinated with MV protection on primary side and circuit
breakers or protective devices downstream, generally as described in Division 16 Section
"Switchboards" of the Specification and as shown on the Drawings.
JJ. LV compartment shunt trip device is to be provided, operated by pressure relief device
and thermometer.
KK. LV compartment busbar assembly is to comprise fully insulated set of 3- phase and
neutral copper busbars. Neutral is to be fully rated. Earth bar is to be provided at lower
end of compartment.
LL. LV Compartment Outgoing Circuit Breakers: to be type and rating shown on the
Drawings, time/current coordinated with upstream and downstream LV distribution
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locations and Layout: Exact locations and physical layout of equipment and components
may be varied as required to suit manufacturer's design and as approved, provided the
required functions and operations are accomplished; follow the identification of the units
indicated on Drawings exactly to ease checking and building maintenance procedures.
B. Equipment Bases: ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for installation of
equipment are constructed in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings
and equipment manufacturers' drawings and that holes for fixing bolts and provisions for
passage of cables etc. are provided as required.
C. Cable Trenches: ensure that trench construction and covers provided for installation of
power and control cables are in accordance with approved shop and construction
drawings.
D. Built-In Items: ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for
passage of feeders and cables which are to be built into concrete foundations, bases, cable
trenches or building structure are provided as and when required and that they are
properly installed.
E. Equipment: install on concrete bases etc., and assemble completely plumb and level,
before grouting in holding-down bolts.
F. Supports And Terminations: install all incoming and outgoing cable supports, cable ends
and termination fittings required for MV, LV and control cables.
G. Relays: set in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the Local Power
Authorities requirements.
I. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, brackets, and
temporary blocking of moving parts from switchgear units and components.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified in
Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten bus joint, connector, and terminal bolts according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in applicable Standards.
A. Equipment: inspect equipment upon delivery to site and report any damage to the
Engineer.
B. Components: check component ratings, types, sizes and wiring connections, including
current and voltage transformers, fuses, switches, instruments and relays.
1. Close circuit in sequence, load gradually to peak loads and observe overheating,
using appropriate instruments/sensors.
2. Observe overheating of transformer and switchgear and take and record readings
bi-hourly for 72 hours.
3. After a prolonged test run, isolate circuit breakers, inspect isolating contacts, and
main contacts or contact mechanism whilst slowly closing circuit breaker, and take
necessary measurements for comparison with manufacturer's standards.
4. Inspect for loose bolts, switch contacts and the like.
5. Follow manufacturer's instructions for testing and commissioning and record all
readings.
E. Cables: with circuit breaker in disconnected position, ensure that HV testing of feeder
cable and respective termination is carried out as required under cable tests.
F. Manufacturer's instructions are to be followed under all circumstances. Carry out and
record measurement and tests recommended by the manufacturer.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Inspect interior and exterior of installed equipment. Remove paint-splatters and other
spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit full technical data of equipment for approval including, but not
limited to, the following:
B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited
to, the following:
C. Technical Literature: Submit the following for approval prior to equipment manufacture:
1. Schedule of selected circuit breakers, relays and control gear, with complete
identification of each component and its characteristics.
2. Protection coordination scheme, including pick-up settings and time-grading, together
with time-current curves and range of adjustments etc. as required to coordinate with
upstream and downstream protective devices of the complete system.
D. Type Test Certificates: Submit to verify compliance of main equipment with the relevant
IEC Standards, including the following:
E. Routine Tests: Each complete switchgear unit is to undergo routine tests at the
manufacturer's works in accordance with the relevant standards. Submit routine test reports,
prior to shipping equipment, indicating ambient test conditions and guaranteed rating of
equipment under site conditions.
F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
G. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
B. Standards: Equipment and component parts are to comply with the following Standards:
1. Common Clauses for HV Switchgear and Control Gear Standards: IEC 60694.
2. A.C. Metal-Enclosed Switchgear and Control Gear for Rated Voltages above 1 kV
and up to and including 72.5 kV: IEC 62271-200.
3. HV A.C. Circuit Breakers: IEC 62271-100.
4. Insulation Coordination: IEC 60071-1.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Deliver in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path as
indicated.
1. Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer’s written permission.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchgear with other construction and room
dimensions. Advise the Engineer in case of conflict.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete or mounting bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and
formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These
items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
A. Spare Parts: Provide spare parts, as recommended by the manufacturer, for one year
maintenance as expected under local conditions, and to allow for emergency replacement
due to accidental breakage or failure. Spare parts are to include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Two sets of each type of lamp, fuse, auxiliary switch, trip coil, control switch,
selector switch, neon indicator and the like.
B. Tools and Instruments: Provide tools and instruments required for normal routine
inspection, testing, operation and maintenance including levering crank, manual charging
handle, manual shutter operator, testing jumpers and HV test bushings, set of rail
extensions, digital micro ohm-meter, set of mobile lifting and handling equipment etc. as
necessary for the type of switchgear.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
C. Earth Bus: Copper of not less than minimum size required by the Standards, designed to
withstand worst earth- fault current of power system without showing any signs of thermal
or mechanical damage or degradation. Earth bus is to extend full length of switchgear.
D. Power Cable Terminations: Fixed bolted type, unless otherwise specified, complete with
standard fittings and accessories for connection of incoming and outgoing cables. Cable
compartment is to be designed to permit cables to enter enclosure and connect at respective
E. Potential Indicators: Neon indicators are to be provided at front of each switchgear unit, one
per phase, using capacitive potential divider to indicate voltage state on cable terminals.
G. Keys and padlocks are to be provided for manually interlocking two or more units if
required. Electrical and mechanical interlocks are to be provided for automatic safe and
functional operation of the system as shown on the Drawings/Schedules.
H. Earthing facilities are to be provided for earthing and/or short-circuiting the feeder at its
terminals through built-in, safety-interlocked, quick-make earthing switch, without use of
loose attachments.
I. Metal cases of instruments and control devices are to be connected by bare copper
conductors of not less than 2.5mm2 cross-section to nearest earth bar.
J. Ferrules: Cable and wire ends are to be fitted with numbered ferrules of approved type at
each termination. Colour coding is to be as required by the Regulations and the applicable
Section of the Specification.
K. Test terminal blocks are to be provided inside insulating covered bases for instruments,
instrument transformers, relays etc. in LV compartments.
M. Finish: Inner and outer surfaces of steel enclosures and structure are to be cleaned,
phosphatized, primed with rust inhibiting primer and finished with two coats of baked
enamel, color standard gray (RAL 7033) unless otherwise approved. Finish is to be vermin
and fungus proof and suitable for worst climatic conditions on site.
N. MV Switchgear Ratings:
A. Type: Indoor metal-enclosed type, factory built and dispatched as a complete assembly.
B. Insulation type:
1. SF6 switching and insulated copper busbars.
C. Components: Unit is to consist of two metal enclosed network ring main switch-
disconnectors and outgoing fuse- switch combination, as shown on the Drawings, with cable
terminal fittings behind dead-front panels, and front- mounted switchgear operation, control,
indication and metering devices.
D. Degree of Protection: IP 65 to IEC 298 and IEC 529 for MV switchgear and parts and IP41
for enclosure.
G. Switch-disconnector earthing switch of the quick-make type, front operated (operation being
independent of operator), is to close onto cable terminals and be interlocked such that it will
close only after load-break switch- disconnector is opened. Earth blades are to be visible
through an inspection window. Access to cable compartment is to be prevented unless
earthing switch is closed.
H. Switch-Disconnector Ratings:
A. Instruments Generally: Housed in enameled, square steel cases for switchboard flush
installation, size 96 x 96 mm with 5 mm frontal, protected and sealed white background
dials with black pointers (in general) and anti- parallax shadow-proof glass covers.
Accuracy of instruments is to be class 1.5 unless otherwise specified. Moving parts are to
be damped, revolving on hard-stone bases, with zero adjustment screw.
B. A.C. Voltmeters: Moving iron type, operating from VT secondaries, and with the following
characteristics:
C. Voltmeter Selector Switch: 7-position, rotary type, with cam-operated contacts, permitting
line-to-line and line- to-neutral voltage readings, and with off position.
D. Ammeters: Moving iron type, operating from CT secondary, and with the following
characteristics:
E. Power Factor Meters: Totally enclosed, 3-phase, electro- dynamic type, with cross-coil
meter movement and accuracy of 1% from at least 20% - 100% rated current at rated
voltage.
F. Current Transformers (CTs): Indoor dry type (cast- resin), with the following
characteristics:
G. Rated primary current, core size and accuracy limit factors are to be determined in
accordance with nominal current of plant protected, short-circuit level and burden. CT is to
perform under specified conditions without exceeding accuracy limit. Submit error curves
for approval. Thermal short-circuit rating is to be 100 times rated primary current with
dynamic short-circuit rating of 2.5 times thermal rating.
H. Voltage Transformers (VTs): Magnetic, single-phase, indoor, dry type (cast-resin), with the
following characteristics:
1. Rated Voltage:
a. Primary: 33/SQRT3 kV.
b. Secondary: 110/SQRT3 V.
2. Accuracy Class: 0.5.
3. Rated Voltage Factor: 1.2 continuous, 1.9 for 30 seconds.
I. Check associated burden and ensure VT can perform satisfactorily under specified
conditions. Submit error curves for approval.
1. Reference: RMU.
2. MV Switchgear Type: Ring main unit
3. MV Switchgear Assembly is to comprise the following:
a. Two of incoming feeder unit(s).
b. Two of outgoing feeder unit(s).
c. Instrumentation/metering unit.
1. Set of copper busbars, rated equal to that stated in subparagraph 2.5B.1 above.
2. Fuse switch disconnector 400 A
1. Earthing switch.
2. Set of cable termination and accessories.
1. Set of copper busbars, rated equal to that stated in subparagraph 2.5B.1 above.
2. VT unit comprising three single phase VTs (Y-Y) with set of fuses 0.3 A, for
protection.
3. 3 CTs for consumer metering, as required.
4. LV terminal blocks and protective fuses or c.b.
5. Voltmeter with selector switch.
Unit is to comply with the Local Power Authority's requirements for consumer
metering.
C. Control power is to be drawn from the monitored incoming AC line terminal connections.
Device is to have non-volatile memory and not require battery backup. In the event of a
power failure, the device is to retain preset parameters.
D. Unit is to allow user to disable undesired values or functions and to later reactivate them if
required. In the event of trip or alarm condition, a built-in reset button is to allow a manual
reset of the unit. Unit is also to be capable of being remotely reset via its communication
port.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locations and Layout: Exact locations and physical layout of equipment and components
may be varied as required to suit manufacturer's design and as approved, provided the
required functions and operations are accomplished; follow the identification of the units
indicated on Drawings exactly to ease checking and building maintenance procedures.
B. Equipment Bases: Ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for installation of
equipment are constructed in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings and
equipment manufacturers' drawings and that holes for fixing bolts and provisions for
passage of cables etc. are provided as required.
C. Cable Trenches: Ensure that trench construction and covers provided for installation of
power and control cables are in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings.
D. Built-In Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for passage
of feeders and cables which are to be built into concrete foundations, bases, cable trenches
or building structure are provided as and when required and that they are properly installed.
E. Equipment: Install on concrete bases etc., and assemble completely plumb and level, before
grouting in holding-down bolts.
F. Supports and Terminations: Install all incoming and outgoing cable supports, cable ends and
termination fittings required for MV, LV and control cables.
G. Relays: Set in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the Local Power A's
requirements.
I. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, brackets, and
temporary blocking of moving parts from switchgear units and components.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified in
Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
B. Diagram and Instructions: Frame under clear acrylic plastic on the front of switchgear.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten bus joint, connector, and terminal bolts according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in applicable Standards.
A. Equipment: Inspect equipment upon delivery to site and report any damage to the Engineer.
B. Switchgear: Inspect and check switchgear for completeness and as recommended by the
manufacturer and check phasing of buses, contact alignment and clearances.
C. Components: Check component ratings, types, sizes and wiring connections, including
current and voltage transformers, fuses, switches, instruments and relays.
E. Cables: With circuit breaker in disconnected position, ensure that HV testing of feeder cable
and respective termination is carried out as required under cable tests.
1. Breakers are to be closed, one at a time, with as little load on the feeder as possible;
check meters as load is increased and any indication of overheating detected by
appropriate instruments or sensors.
2. Open and withdraw circuit breaker after a prolonged test run, inspect and check
circuit breaker conditions, isolating contacts, contacts on all instruments and control
switches, connections at terminal blocks etc., busbar connections and busbars for any
indication of overheating; check for loose connections and bolts etc. and finally re-
apply megger tests to ensure same quality of insulation as before energization.
3. Close circuit breaker slowly, while in the disconnected position and inspect contacts
and/or contact movement and compare with design figures.
G. Manufacturer's instructions are to be followed under all circumstances. Carry out and
record measurement and tests recommended by the manufacturer.
H. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than two months after the
end of the Defects Liability Period, perform an infrared scan of switchgear assembly. Make
bus joints and connections accessible to a portable scanner and perform scanning during a
period of normal working load as advised by Employer.
1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform one additional follow-up infrared scan at same
locations as before, 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
2. Instrument: Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or
detects significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for
scanning device used for electrical distribution equipment.
3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report identifying all connections
checked and describing results of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected,
remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Inspect interior and exterior of installed switchgear. Remove paint-splatters and other spots,
dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system
installation. Refer to Division 1.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include full technical data on features, components, ratings, and
performance for each type of transformer specified. Include dimensioned plans, sections,
and elevation views. Show minimum clearances and installed devices and features.
Submit Manufacturers' catalogues.
B. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring and identify terminals for tap changing and connecting
field-installed wiring.
D. Type Test Certificates: Submit to verify compliance of main equipment with the relevant
IEC Standards.
E. Routine Tests: Each transformer unit is to undergo routine tests at the manufacturer's
works in accordance with the relevant standards. Submit routine test reports, prior to
shipping equipment, indicating ambient test conditions and guaranteed rating of
equipment under site conditions.
F. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not
limited to, the following:
H. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
B. Standards: Equipment and component parts are to comply with the following Standards:
1. Common clauses for HV switchgear and control gear standards: IEC 694.
2. Power transformers: IEC 60076. 60076-11.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Temporary Heating: For indoor, dry-type transformers, apply temporary heat according
to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit
throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and is not in a space that is
continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.
1.7 COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. A.B.B. (Sweden/Germany)
2. Cuttler Hammer (U.S.A.)
3. France Transfo (France)
4. G.E. (U.S.A.)
5. GEC Alsthom (France)
6. Siemens (Germany)
7. Trafo-Union (Germany)
A. Type: 3-phase, indoor type, two winding, solventless cast epoxy resin, vacuum pressure
impregrated windings, with minimum class F insulation on inner LV cores and class B on
outer MV cores, rated for continuous operation under worst site ambient conditions at full
load, and complying with IEC 60726-11. Temperature rise is not to exceed 70 deg. C
over an average ambient of 40 deg. C for class B insulation and 90 deg. C over an average
ambient of 40 deg. C for class F insulation.
D. Rubber sound isolation pads are to be provided between core and coil assemblies, and
between base and housing.
E. All electrical transformers shall be provided with roller anti vibration pads, which shall
be placed under transformers’ rollers in order to avoid the transmission of vibration from
the transformers to the surrounding environment.
F. Sound level : All transformers with their accessories shall be designed and manufactured
to reduce noise and vibration to acceptable level. The average surface sound level of
transformers shall not exceed 66 db (maximum sound level) for the 2000 kVA
transformer. The transformer shall be subjected to noise measurement as per IEC 60076-
10.
G. Cooling fans, where specified, are to permit 30% increase in rated power.
H. Mounting and Handling: Transformer base and structure are to have lifting hooks or lugs,
towing and lashing eyes or lugs and provision for roller wheels.
K. Earthing bolts or copper pads are to be provided on main frame of transformer. Earthing
busbars are to be provided on LV and MV sides of housing.
L. Housing: Sheet steel construction, IP 21 with provision for roof fans for indoor
installation.
M. Characteristics:
O. The transformer shall be located in a seismic Zone 2A area and shall be designed for
Uniform Building Code Zone 2A. The transformer design and installation shall prevent
any damage due to a Zone 2A event.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locations and Layout: Exact locations and physical layout of equipment and components
may be varied as required to suit manufacturer's design and as approved, provided the
required functions and operations are accomplished; follow the identification of the units
indicated on Drawings exactly to ease checking and building maintenance procedures.
B. Equipment Bases: Ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for installation of
equipment are constructed in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings
and equipment manufacturers' drawings and that holes for fixing bolts and provisions for
passage of cables etc. are provided as required.
C. Cable Trenches: Ensure that trench construction and covers provided for installation of
power and control cables are in accordance with approved shop and construction
drawings.
D. Built-In Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for
passage of feeders and cables which are to be built into concrete foundations, bases, cable
trenches or building structure are provided as and when required and that they are
properly installed.
E. Equipment: Install on concrete bases etc., and assemble completely plumb and level,
before grouting in holding-down bolts.
F. Supports and Terminations: Install all incoming and outgoing cable supports, cable ends
and termination fittings required for MV, LV and control cables.
G. Relays: Set in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the Local Power
Authorities requirements.
I. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, brackets, and
temporary blocking of moving parts from switchgear units and components.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify transformers and install warning signs according to Division 16 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten bus joint, connector, and terminal bolts according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in applicable Standards.
A. Equipment: Inspect equipment upon delivery to site and report any damage to Engineer.
B. Components: Check component ratings, types, sizes and wiring connections, including
current and voltage transformers, fuses, switches, instruments and relays.
C. Manufacturer's instructions are to be followed under all circumstances. Carry out and
record measurement and tests recommended by the manufacturer.
E. Test Labeling: On satisfactory completion of tests for each transformer, attach a dated and
signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.
F. Schedule tests and provide notification at least 7 days in advance of test commencement.
G. Report: Submit a written report of observations and tests. Report defective materials and
installation.
H. Tests: Include the following minimum inspections and tests according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
I. Test Failures: Compare test results with specified performance or manufacturer's data.
Correct deficiencies identified by tests and retest. Verify that transformers meet specified
requirements.
3.5 GROUNDING
A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding" for materials and installation
requirements.
3.6 CLEANING
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. After installing and cleaning, touch up scratches and mars on finish to match original
finish.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes individually mounted enclosed switches and circuit breakers used for
the following:
C. Components are to be standard manufactured items, uniform and modular, complying with
one set of approved Standards.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Submit data for approval, including catalogues, detailed literature,
manufacturer's name, catalogue number, rating, specification, overall dimensions and
special features, as applicable for each type of switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and
component indicated.
B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited
to, the following:
C. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:
D. Samples: Submit samples of each type of equipment for approval, unless otherwise agreed
in writing by the Engineer.
E. Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers and for components to
include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements
specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the following:
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with other
construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain
required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and
panels.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match product installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver
extra materials to Employer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Cutler-Hammer. (U.S.A.)
2. G.E. (U.S.A.)
3. G.E.C. - Henley Ltd. (England)
4. Siemens (Germany)
5. Westinghouse (U.S.A.)
or other equal and approved.
A. Rating: 500 V, 2, 3 or 6 pole, load break, short-circuit make, in accordance with IEC 60947-
3, utilization category 22 for heating and lighting loads, category 23 for motor circuits, and
with ampere rating shown on the Drawings.
B. Design: non-fused, air-break switch disconnector, single throw, safety type, housed in
separate metallic enclosure with arc quenching devices on each pole.
D. Enclosure: general purpose sheet steel for indoor use IP 42, and weather-proof type cast-
metal or sheet steel for outdoor installations IP 65, unless otherwise required or shown on
the Drawings. Locking of operating handle is to be possible in open and closed positions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for
compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
C. Damaged Equipment: Reject damaged equipment. Protect equipment against damage after
installation and until handed over.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Install equipment grounding connections for switches and circuit breakers with ground
continuity to main electrical ground bus.
B. Install power wiring. Install wiring between switches and circuit breakers, and control and
indication devices.
B. Operation: Devices are to be tested for operation and are to perform as intended at full load
without any signs of heating.
1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch, circuit breaker, component, and
control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each line- and load-side circuit.
3.6 CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:
2. Bypass/isolation switch.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Include ratings and dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations showing
minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and
devices, and material lists for each switch specified.
B. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for transfer switches and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Show both power and control wiring.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that products furnished comply with
requirements and that switches have been tested for load ratings and short-circuit closing
and withstand ratings applicable to units for Project.
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test and inspection results for compliance with
performance requirements.
F. Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1. Include all features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. List
all factory settings of relays and provide relay setting and calibration instructions, including
software, where applicable.
A. Local Representative: Provide evidence that proposed equipment manufacturer has a locally
established and authorized organization which can be called upon for professional advice
and maintenance as may be required, and which can immediately supply spare parts to
support day to day and emergency maintenance requirements. Failure to satisfy the
Engineer may disqualify a manufacturer.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switch, bypass/isolation switch and related
control panels through one source from a single manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers: Obtain automatic transfer switch equipment from one of the
following:
A. Type: Conforming to IEC 60947-6 or UL 1008 and to applicable standards. Wall or floor
mounted, galvanized sheet steel cubicle of equal construction to control cubicle, comprising
double throw single switch and controls necessary for automatic transfer of power supply
from normal source to stand-by source, voltage and frequency sensing control relay and
time delay relays to signal generator start and stop, auxiliary switches and indicating lights
etc. as necessary for the required operation of the system. ATS is to be class PC utilization
category AC-33A and having rated short time withstand and short circuit current to IEC
60947-01 and based on short circuit level at equipment location.
B. Operation: When voltage and/or frequency of any phase drops below an adjustable setting
(80- 100%) of normal supply, for an adjustable period of 1 - 300 seconds, power failure
relay is to actuate engine starting control, whilst normal mains contactor is to open. After an
adjustable period of 0 - 10 seconds from sensing stabilized rated voltage and frequency of
generator at the ATS, (Voltage pick-up adjustable from 85% to 100% nominal); frequency
pick-up adjustable from 90% to 100% nominal, the emergency contactor is to close. Upon
restoration of normal mains supply to above the preset limits, adjustable between 90% and
100% of rated voltage and/or frequency, for an adjustable preset period of 2 - 30 minutes,
the ATS is to transfer the load to normal position.
C. Engine Shutdown: Initiate after retransfer of the load to normal source. (Refer to generator
set controls upon shut-down).
D. ATS dedicated for fire pumps are to meet the requirement of NFPA 20, installation of
“Central Fire Pumps”, NFPA 70. National Electrical Code” and are to be listed by the
underwriter laboratories UL-508, “Industrial Control Equipment”. Integrated fire pump
ATSE and control panel is acceptable.
2. Another selector switch is to be provided for two positions, "With load" and "Without
load" for testing or exercising:
a. "With Load": the generating set is to carry the load during testing or exercising
periods.
b. "Without Load": generating set is to start but not assume the load.
I. Wiring: Moisture and heat resistant, silicon rubber insulated, stranded copper conductors,
modularly and neatly arranged on master terminal blocks, with suitable numbering strips
and appropriate cartridge type fuses where required. Flexible wiring is to be used on all
hinged/draw-out components.
J. Connections are to be made at a front terminal block with no live metal exposed. Power
cables are to terminate on fixed insulated copper connectors suitably sized to receive
specified cables. Cable glands and gland plates are to be provided.
K. Metal Cases of instruments, control switches, relays etc. are to be connected by flexible
protective conductors, of not less than 2.5 mm2 section, to nearest earthing bar or terminal.
M. Ferrules: Wire ends are to be fitted with numbered ferrules of approved type at each
termination.
A. Provide Manual Bypass Switches to combine manual and automatic transfer operation with
a drawout isolation system. Bypass switch is to consist of non-automatic Kirk-key
interlocked switches or circuit breakers, fully rated, manually operated and rated for same
loads as automatic transfer switch.
C. An engine start switch is to be provided to allow generator set to be started when bypass is
on emergency sources.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and communications
requirements of transfer switches as recommended by the manufacturer. Increase raceway
sizes at no additional cost to Employer if necessary to accommodate required wiring.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
B. Coordinate tests with tests of generator plant and run them concurrently.
C. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and
measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each
tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters
and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system
installation. Refer to Division 1 Section.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes Main Distribution Board(s) work for low voltage (LV) distribution,
ancillary mounting frames, fittings, cable termination accessories and supports.
B. Connection to BMS system, including interface elements such as relays, transducers, etc. as
detailed in Division 15 Specification Sections BMS schedules and /or shown on the
Drawings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
F. The following terms used on the Drawings and in the Specification are synonymous and
may be used interchangeably: "Switchboard" and "Main Distribution Board".
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit for approval detailed description of main distribution boards including
all components supported by manufacturer’s catalogues, indicating compliance with the
Standards specified under "Quality Assurance" Article, equipment characteristics, details of
construction, operating data, dimensions and weights etc. Give details of miscellaneous
items including incoming and outgoing feeder terminal arrangement, connections at busbars,
isolating, earthing, interlocks, control devices, indicating and metering instruments etc.
Boards are to be factory assembled and tested and shipped as complete package (s).
B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Plans and elevations with indication of built-on equipment, exact dimensions, and
weights.
2. Arrangement of boards inside rooms allocated, indicating spaces and clearances.
3. Arrangement of equipment inside board.
4. One-line diagram of power system showing current ratings of switchgear and busbars
and types and locations of protective gear (relays, instruments, CTs, VTs etc.)
5. Schematics and wiring diagrams of control circuits. Differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
6. Foundation details and grouting holes installation details.
7. Arrangement of incoming and outgoing feeders, terminal fittings, instruments, busbar
connections etc.
8. Utility Company’s metering provisions with indication of approval by utility
company.
9. Mimic-bus diagram.
C. Technical Literature: Submit the following for approval prior to placing orders for
equipment manufacture:
D. Samples: Representative portion of mimic bus with specified finish, for color selection.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. Provide
evidence of applicable registration or certification.
F. Tests and Certificates: Submit complete certified manufacturer’s type and routine test
records, in accordance with the Standards specified in "Quality assurance" Article.
G. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:
I. Updated mimic-bus diagram reflecting field changes after final main distribution board load
connections have been made, for record.
J. Maintenance Data: For main distribution boards and components to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 1 include
the following:
1. Routine maintenance requirements for main distribution boards and all installed
components.
2. Manufacturer’s written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
1. IEC 60439-1: Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies: Type-Tested
and Partially Type-Tested Assemblies.
2. IEC 60947-1: Low voltage switchgear and control gear part 1 : general rules.
3. IEC 60947-2: Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear: Circuit Breakers.
4. Relevant IEC Standard for other components, where not otherwise specified.
5. IEC 60831-1&2 for power factor correction capacitors.
E. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for main
distribution boards, including clearances between main distribution boards, and adjacent
surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
F. Seismic Zone: Comply with Code requirements for seismic risk zone 2A, as per UBC code.
A. Deliver in sections of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path. Deliver
MDBs and components properly packaged and mounted on pallets, or skids to facilitate
handling of heavy items. Utilize factory-fabricated type containers or wrappings for MDBs
and components to protect equipment from damage. Inspect equipment to ensure that no
damage has occurred during shipment.
B. Store indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect
from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.
C. If stored in areas subjected to weather, cover main distribution boards to provide protection
from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing
and flammable materials from inside main distribution boards; install electric heating (250-
W per section) to prevent condensation.
D. Handle MDBs carefully to prevent physical damage to equipment and components. Remove
packaging, including the opening of crates and containers, avoiding the use of excessive
hammering and jarring which would damage the electrical equipment contained therein. Do
not install damaged equipment; remove from site and replace damaged equipment with new.
A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels, and
structures to provide pathway for moving main distribution boards into place.
1. Notify Engineer not less than seven days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
Identify extent and duration of utility interruptions.
2. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities.
C. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of main distribution boards and components with other
construction and electrical work, including conduit, piping, equipment, adjacent surfaces,
raceways, electrical boxes and fittings, and cabling/wiring work. Maintain required
workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
A. Contractor is to submit a complete coordination and protection study for all the electrical
system. The coordination shall be fully detailed to show the short circuit currents at each
panel location. The study shall show that the protective devices provided do ensure the
proper protection and coordination. Any breakers not satisfying the study shall be replaced
by proper ones to ensure proper system operation. The coordination study has to be
associated with a coordination study for earth fault currents throughout the system to ensure
proper selection of earth fault setting for all breakers to ensure discrimination and proper
protection of all system components.
A. Spare Parts: Provide manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for emergency replacement
and/or one year’s maintenance including, but not limited to, the following:
1. One set of fixed and moving contacts for every type of replaceable (consumable)
contact set.
2. One operating motor and/or coil for each type of electrically operated circuit breaker.
3. Two sets of each type of indicating lights, fuses, LEDs, control switches, and similar
devices subject to failure or breakage at any time.
B. Tools and Instruments: Provide tools and instruments required for normal routine inspection
and maintenance and testing of circuit breakers and protective devices as appropriate for
type of switchgear supplied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. A.B.B (Germany)
2. Cuttler - Hammer (U.S.A.)
3. G.E. (U.S.A.)
4. Merlin Gerin (France)
5. Moeller (Germany)
6. Siemens (Germany)
A. Generally: Main distribution boards are to be dead-front type, metal enclosed, multi-cubicle,
floor mounted, free standing, with 1000V rated insulation voltage, and 600 V rated
operational voltage, with fixed or draw-out switchgear, manually or manually and
electrically operated, as shown on the Drawings, with matching vertical sections to form a
continuous integral and rigid structure. Outgoing sections are to be of equal width.
B. Generally: Coordinate with Building Automation and Control System (BMS) supplier and
provide all necessary interfaces, relays, transducers, etc, necessary for the functions
specified in the BMS schedules and/or shown on the Drawings.
C. General Construction: Rigidly framed and bolted, with Electro-galvanized sheet steel
enclosures, minimum thickness 2 mm, phosphatized, primed with rust inhibiting primer and
finished with thermal polymerized polyester epoxy powder coating, gray color (RAL 7703
or ANSI 61) to approval. Switchgear is to be vermin, dust and rodent proof, IP42 protection
to IEC 60529 for indoor installations, with adequate lifting means and base-frames and
capable of being moved into position and directly bolted to floor without additional sills.
E. Main distribution boards are to have a minimum short circuit withstand current rating 25%
higher or next available standard to the calculated short circuit at respective point of
application in the network and/or as shown on the drawings, for short circuit duration of (1
sec) to the approval of the Engineer.
G. Extension of structure and busbars is to be possible at either end of switchboard for form 3
and form 4 type switchboards.
H. Arrangement is to permit incoming and outgoing busbars and cables to enter enclosure as
indicated on the Drawings and connect at respective terminals without inconvenience to
installation or maintenance.
I. Removing Circuit Breakers: Suitable arrangements and equipment are to be provided for
extracting, lifting and unloading switchgear from enclosures as appropriate for type of
switchgear.
K. Busbars: Site rated for normal current as shown on the Drawings or at least site rated to
same rating of main circuit breaker frame size, and braced for a symmetrical rms short-
circuit duty as specified. Busbars are to be copper, of sufficient size to limit temperature
rise to allowable insulation or equipment temperature ratings, and to maximum 90 deg C.
Connections and buswork are to be bolted with copper alloy hardware and are to be
accessible for inspection and maintenance unless otherwise recommended by the
manufacturer and approved by Engineer. Contact surfaces are to be Electro-silver plated.
L. Connections from busbar to switchgear are to be rated to carry full continuous current rating
of switchgear frame and are to be insulated.
M. Full size neutral is to be continuous through all sections. Neutral bus is to be insulated and
separate from earth bus and connected to it with removable links, at every bus section.
Links are to be of the same cross-section of the earth bus.
N. Earth bus is to extend full length of board, firmly fixed to each section in accordance with
the Regulations and Standards, complete with two main earthing lugs (one at each end), and
required number of feeder protective earth connectors.
1. Form 3b.
2. Incoming: Withdrawable type PACB.
3. Tie: Withdrawable type.
4. Outgoing: Fixed MCCB type unless otherwise shown on drawings.
R. Drawout circuit breaker assembly is to have disconnecting contacts, wheels and interlocks
to prevent connecting or disconnecting circuit breaker unless in the open position, and to
prevent closing circuit breaker while racking into any of the three positions (connect, test,
disconnect). Racking mechanism and rail assembly are to be approved worm and lever
mechanism. It is to be possible to close the unit door with breaker in any of the three
positions and when removed. External position indicator is to be provided. Fixed
disconnecting primary contacts are to be accessible and replaceable from front and are to be
silver plated copper. Moving primary disconnect contacts are to consist of self-aligning,
silver plated, spring pressure, finger-cluster, copper contact fitted on line and load studs of
circuit breaker.
T. Front and rear accessible, front and rear aligned, individually mounted fixed MCCB
distribution sections as basic construction for form 3 and form 4 switchboards, are to be
compartmentalized construction, consisting of front modular circuit breaker compartments,
busbar system compartments and rear cable termination compartments (as per the form type
selected), with insulating barriers between front compartments and busbar compartments
and between rear compartments and busbar compartment (removable for maintenance).
MCCBs are to be closely coupled to busbars (to minimize chances of bus-side faults), and to
rear cable terminals, through compatibly frame-sized insulated connectors. MCCB modules
are to be covered on the front, by recessed frame-type bolted covers, 1.5 mm minimum
thickness, to protect circuit breaker handles. Top, sides and rear are to be covered with
removable screw-on plates having formed edges all around.
U. Switchboard shall be located in a seismic Zone 2A area. Switchboard design and installation
shall prevent any damage due to a Zone 2A event.
A. Type: Encased in high strength, high temperature resistant, molded plastic insulating
materials, for normal operation at maximum temperature within enclosure at point of
application, tested to approved standards, manually operated for normal functions, and
automatically tripped under over-current conditions. Trip power is to be derived from main
power circuit, with sufficient tripping energy to reliably trip circuit breaker. Fixed mounted
circuit breaker is to be rear connected.
C. Control Power: For electrically charged circuit breaker and/or for shunt trip device, where
required, control power is to be 120V ac obtained from in-built MDB control power
transformer connected and fused on line-side of circuit breaker. Where shunt trip and/or
under voltage release are required, a sufficient capacitor trip device is to be provided.
D. Rating: 3-pole, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. 750 V rated insulation voltage,
600 V rated operational voltage, with continuous current rating (frame size) as shown on the
Drawings, ranging between 1600 and 5000 A (1600, 2000, 2500, 3000, 4000 A and 5000
A), , fully rated (100%) for service under worst site conditions. Breakers are to be rated for
a symmetrical rms service short-circuit breaking capacity as shown on the Drawings, to IEC
60947-2 sequence II (rated service short-circuit breaking capacity) at specified voltage and
frequency, meeting IEC 60947-2, sequence I, II, III and IV tests (for circuit breakers of
utilization category B), tested in an enclosure substantially the same as the enclosure in
which they are to be installed.
E. Trip Unit: Totally enclosed, programmable, solid state device, interchangeable for
compatible frame sizes, pluggable into front of circuit breaker, tamper-proof and with
transparent, sealable cover. Trip unit is to measure sinusoidal and non–sinusoidal current
wave forms (fundamental to thirteenth harmonic) by continuously sampling each phase
through out every cycle. Trip unit is to be direct acting trip device, current transformer
operated, with flux transfer shunt trip that requires no external power. It is to have
adjustable current setting (0.5 - 1.0 times trip unit rating) with adjustable long-time delay,
short-time pick-up and short-time delay, earth-fault pick-up and time delay instantaneous
over current pickup. Current setting range is to be by means of replaceable trip-units within
the maximum frame size rating. Once removed, circuit breaker is to remain in the trip-free
position. Earth-fault trip is to be adjustable, range 10% to 60% of normal current rating of
the circuit breaker and a maximum of 1200A, with adjustable time delay between 0.1 and
0.5 seconds. Short time delay is to be adjustable in steps, 2 - 9 times current setting, with
pre-settable or adjustable time band having maximum delay of 0.3 to 0.5 seconds.
Instantaneous trip is to be adjustable in steps at least 2 – 13 times the trip unit rating. Over-
ride protection is to allow full sensitivity up to interrupting capacity of Circuit Breaker.
F. Trip Unit shall have the metering functions for each phase comprising:
1. Voltage.
2. Frequency.
3. Energy.
4. Total power.
5. Peak power demand.
H. Trip Unit Status Display: Shall indicate in words the status of normal breaker operation,
long time over current pick up, instantaneous time over current trip, short time over current
trip, ground fault trip. Unit shall have integral resetable counter to count long time, short
time, instantaneous and ground fault trips.
I. Position Indicators: Positive with trip indication target. Target indicator is to be mechanical
and is to give indication even when control power has been lost.
J. Trip unit shall have inputs from conventional potential transformers for every phase.
Current sensors transformers for every phase. Current sensors shall be encased in epoxy
filled plastic housing to protect against damage and moisture and shall be integrally
mounted in breakers.
K. Neutral Current Transformer: Provide on the neutral conductor of each main, tie or outgoing
circuit having earth fault protection. Rating and characteristics of the neutral current
transformer are to be suitable for proper operation of the earth fault protection system.
M. Auxiliary Contacts: Include N.O. and N.C. contacts on switchgear as required for remote
monitoring and control, plus 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. spare contacts.
N. Electrical Interlock: If electrical interlock is required between power air circuit breakers (as
shown on the drawings), the mechanical closing button of the circuit breaker is to be
disabled in the connect position and an additional electrical push button is to be provided for
the closing of the circuit breaker through the breaker’s shunt close coil. The electrical
interlock is to be provided on both shunt trip and close coils of the circuit breaker in order to
perform simultaneous tripping and inhibit closing functions on the interlocked breaker.
A. MCCBs generally are to be electronic solid-state trip type. All circuit breakers are to be 3-
pole unless otherwise shown on drawings.
B. Construction: Totally enclosed, molded case, constructed from high quality, high
temperature resistant, tropicalized, molded insulating materials, for normal operation at 70
deg. C within enclosures, to approved standards, provided with quick-make, quick-break,
trip-free switching mechanism manually operated by front toggle type handle and
automatically tripped under over-current conditions. Multi-pole breakers are to have
common integral trip bar for simultaneous operation of all poles. Contacts are to be non-
welding silver alloy with arc quenching metallic devices of approved construction. Cable
terminals are to be solder-less anti-turn box lug or clamp type with set screws suitable for
copper or aluminum cables.
C. MCCB shall be of such a design to accept various types of remote and automatic control
devices for operation under a control/logic system and/or the BMS.
D. Thermal over-current trips are to be compensated to allow for ambient temperature higher at
breaker than at protected circuit or device. Compensation is to be applicable between 25
and 50 deg. C. In case of adjustable thermal settings, range of adjustment is not to exceed
maximum trip rating shown on the Drawings.
E. Electronic trip circuit breakers are to have solid state trip units with long time delay setting
range at least between 0.5 and 1.0 times maximum trip rating, short time delay range 3 to 10
times maximum trip rating with maximum clearing time of 0.2 seconds, and instantaneous
protection adjustable from 5 to 10 times continuous rating. Solid state trip units are to be
insensitive to changes in ambient temperature between -20 and +55 deg. C. Earth fault
protection is to be built into trip unit where specified, and is to be adjustable between 0.2
and 0.6 normal phase current pick-up with maximum time delay of 0.2 seconds, and is to be
suitable for connection to external current sensor. Push-to-trip button is to be provided on
cover for testing the trip unit.
G. Interchangeable Trips: Circuit breakers 250 A to 400 A frame size are to have
interchangeable electronic trip units.
H. Sealing: Non-interchangeable trip circuit breakers are to have sealed covers. Circuit
breakers with interchangeable trips are to have trip unit covers sealed to prevent tampering.
I. Circuit breaker ratings are to be non-current limiting, fully rated (100%) with continuous
duty at site conditions, and with frame size and interrupting capacity to IEC60947-2,
sequence II (rated service short-circuit breaking capacity), and maximum trip rating as
shown on the Drawings. Interrupting capacities at specified voltage and frequency are to
meet IEC 947-2 test sequence I, II, III and IV for circuit breakers of utilization category B
(with intended short time withstand capability).
J. Accessories: Circuit breaker design is to allow addition of electrical operator, control and
interlocking functions, under-voltage release, shunt-trip coils, alarm and auxiliary switches,
padlocking devices, key-lock devices, and the like.
A. Generally: Instruments are to be housed in enameled, square, metal cases for flush
installation. Scales and markings are to be protected and sealed. Accuracy of instruments is
to be within 2% unless otherwise specified.
B. Voltmeters: Moving iron type, with center zero adjuster, range 1.25 times nominal system
voltage, 90 degree angle, size 76 x 76 mm.
D. Ammeters: Moving iron type, with center zero adjuster, range 2 times nominal circuit
amperage, 90 degree angle, size 76 x 76 mm.
F. Provide p.f. meter moving iron type with center zero adjuster, size 76 x76mm.
G. Current Transformer (CT): Indoor dry type, rated secondary current 5 A. Rated primary
current, core size and accuracy are to be determined in accordance with nominal current of
plant protected, short-circuit level and burden.
H. Voltage Transformer (VT): Provide where required, complete with primary and secondary
fuses and disconnecting device.
A. Generally: Multi step automatic PF correction system is required to bring up power factor of
LV system to better than 0.92.
D. Steps are to be rated at maximum 40 kVA, 3-phase, operating for loads between 100 kVA
and 2000 kVA having PF below 0.85 (refer to the Drawings for total rating and
configuration).
G. Anti harmonic reactors are to be provided in series with the capacitors and properly tuned to
limit the harmonic currents in order to avoid over loading the capacitors. The reactor rating
at 50 Hz is not to be less than 7% of the capacitors to be protected.
H. Accessories: Each capacitor is to have its own connection terminals, HRC fuses, contactor,
indicator lamp and set of discharge resistors.
I. Regulator is to be housed in front door of one cubicle, and is to have setting knob for PF
selection between 0.8 and 1.0, manual control position, and signal lights. Regulator controls
are to be solid-state, microprocessor-based controls, including the following:
1. Under voltage relay that interrupts capacitor switching and disconnects capacitors for
power supply interruptions longer than 15 minutes.
2. "Advance" and "Retard" push buttons on the control panel to permit manually
controlled capacitor-bank switching.
3. Three pole contactors rated for the repetitive high-inrush-switching duty in the
capacitor application.
4. Plated copper buses.
5. Fuses for protection of capacitor banks rated to protect contactor, interconnecting
wiring, and capacitors.
6. Air-core-type inductors connected in capacitor circuits; rated to limit switching
surges to within contactor ratings.
7. Mechanical bracing for current carrying parts adequate to withstand the maximum
fault current to which they may be exposed.
8. LED indicating lamps on front panel, to identify the energized capacitor banks.
9. Hinged door with hand-operated catch and interlocked with controls or main circuit
breaker to de-energize capacitors when door is opened.
10. LED or liquid crystal digital type display unit mounted in the enclosure door
11. Current Transformer if required.
K. Fixed Capacitors: are to be integrally fused, unless otherwise indicated. Internal Wiring is
to be factory made, ready for field connection to external circuits at a single set of pressure
terminals
2.7 WIRING
A. Arrangement: Wiring is to be modularly and neatly arranged on master terminal boards with
suitable numbering strips and appropriate cartridge type fuses where required.
B. Connections are to be made at front of terminal board and with no live metal exposed.
C. Metal cases of instruments, control switches, relays etc. are to be connected, by bare copper
conductors not less than 2.5 mm2 section, to nearest earthing bar.
D. Control Wiring: Copper, PVC insulated, 85 deg. C, 600 V grade, and PVC sheathed for
multi-core cables. Finely stranded copper conductor, silicon rubber insulated cables are to
be used in proximity to higher temperature components and as flexible cable.
E. Ferrules: Wires are to be fitted with numbered ferrules of approved type at each termination.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS
A. Anti-condensation heaters with disconnect switch and pilot lamp are to be provided in
switchboard, controlled by thermostat and/or hygrostat.
B. Schematic and wiring diagram is to be provided suitably located within each cubicle.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive main distribution boards for compliance with
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Notify Engineer in
writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Equipment Bases: Ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for installation of
equipment are constructed in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings and
equipment manufacturers’ drawings and that holes for fixing bolts and provisions for
passage of cables etc. are provided as required.
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from main distribution board units and components.
D. Cable Trenches: Ensure that trench construction and covers provided for installation of
power and control cables are in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings.
E. Built-in Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for passage
of feeders and cables which are to be built into concrete foundations, bases, cable trenches
or building structure are provided as and when required and that they are properly installed.
F. Equipment: Install on concrete bases etc., and assemble completely plumb and level, before
grouting in holding-down bolts.
G. Supports and Terminations: Install all incoming and outgoing cable supports, cable ends and
termination fittings required for power and control cables.
I. Make Good damage painted surfaces, clean and apply rust-inhibiting prime coat and two
finishing coats of approved enamel upon delivery of equipment to site, or as required by
Engineer.
J. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for main
distribution boards, including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency
procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear
acrylic plastic. Mount on front of main distribution boards.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
B. Main Distribution Board Nameplates: Label each main distribution board compartment
with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant
screws.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to
manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer’s torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in applicable Standards.
A. Equipment: Inspect equipment upon delivery to Site and report any damage to Engineer.
B. Switchgear: Inspect and check switchgear for completeness, component ratings, types, sizes,
and wiring connections. Check phasing of busbars, contacts and clearances.
D. Tests: After installation and before hand-over, carry out all visual and mechanical inspection
and electrical tests required by the governing codes and any other tests the Engineer may
require to check compliance of installation with the Specification, including, but not limited
to, the following. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
1. Insulation resistance tests for each main distribution board bus, component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Continuity tests of each circuit.
3. Operational tests.
E. Main and Control Circuits: Using 1000 V megger (2000 Megohm range), check insulation
resistance between phases, between phases and earth/enclosure and between neutral and
earth.
F. Primary Injection Tests: Provide portable test equipment to test time-delay characteristics of
circuit breakers by simulating an overload or fault condition. Measure and record all test
results and ambient conditions and compare with manufacturer’s data.
G. Instantaneous Trip Elements: Test by high current primary injection, using high-current
primary injection test-sets and reports all readings.
H. Routine Tests on Site: Carry out on every main distribution board in accordance with the
Standard specified (IEC 439 or BS 5486: Part 1) for FBAs assembled from standardized
components outside the works of the manufacturer. Routine tests are also to be carried out
on every FBA, delivered to site, if requested by Engineer.
3.6 ADJUSTING
3.7 CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Panelboards for distribution and subdistribution of electric power and for protection of
circuits, including fixing and supporting materials and materials for termination of feeders,
sub-circuits and branch circuits for the following types:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
C. LP, PP, SDP: Final branch circuit panelboards, power panelboards and subdistribution
panelboards respectively, for secondary lighting and power distribution with either
miniature circuit breaker (MCB) or molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) protection on sub-
feeder or branch circuits, as shown on the Drawings.
D. DP: Distribution panelboards for power distribution with MCCB protection on main
incoming and outgoing feeder circuit breakers Type 1 or Type 2.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
B. Tests and Certificates: Submit complete certified manufacturer's type test and routine test
records in accordance with the Standards.
C. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Exact composition of each panelboard, indicating busbar rating, frame and trip ratings
of circuit breakers.
2. Typical installation details of panelboards, indicating main feeder and branch circuit
conduit connections, terminal provisions, tags, labels, mounting methods and
materials used.
D. Details of Electrical Closets: Submit details to verify clearances, spaces and ventilation of
the installation of proposed equipment, prior to starting construction.
E. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:
F. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards submit final versions after load
balancing.
A. Comply with
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction
that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of
equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements.
1.7 SCHEDULES
A. Schedules shown on drawings indicate the designation and required type of panelboard
using the following criteria:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. ABB (Italy)
2. Alsthom (Unelec) (France)
3. General Electric Co (U.S.A.)
4. Merlin Gerin (France)
5. Siemens - ITE (Germany or USA)
6. Square D Co. (U.S.A.)
7. Moeller (Germany)
B. Panelboards are to be totally enclosed, dead front type, protection code IP 42 for indoor
installations and IP 55 for outdoor installations, in accordance with IEC 60947-1 and IEC
60529, and are to be factory designed and assembled.
F. Series (cascade) coordinated protection (integrated equipment short-circuit ratings) will only
be acceptable within final branch circuit panelboards, between branch circuit breakers and
the main incoming circuit breaker, in accordance with an integrated series combination chart
prepared by the manufacturer, tested and certified in the country of origin by an
internationally authorized organization, where short-circuit ratings are beyond available
fully rated types specified, and with the approval of Engineer.
H. Circuit Breaker Arrangement: Panelboards are to have one main incoming circuit breaker or
molded case switch as shown on drawings and the required number of branch circuit
breakers, arranged as shown on the schedules, including spare circuit breakers and spaces
for future expansion. Three-phase panelboards are to be designed for sequence phase
connection of branch circuit devices.
A. Type: General purpose type, suitable for relevant ambient conditions, flush or surface
mounted as shown on the drawings, comprising box, trim, or trim and door to approved
manufacturer's standards and sizes.
B. Construction: Box, trim and doors where required, are to be Electro-galvanized sheet steel
of gauges not less than specified and in accordance with the standards. Welded joints are to
be galvanized after manufacture. Gutter spaces are to conform to the standards, adequate
for the utilized cables/wires subject to the engineers’ approval and in no case less than 100
mm on all sides. Enclosure is to have pre-designed angles or threaded end studs to support
and adjust mounting of interior panelboard assembly.
C. Trims are to cover and overlap front shield, covering all terminals and bus compartments, to
form a dead front panel. Trims are to be fixed to cabinet/box by quarter-turn clamps
engaging flange of box (use of screws engaging holes in flange of box is not acceptable).
Screws where used are to be oval-head, countersunk and flush. Trims for flush mounted
panelboards are to overlap box and front shields by at least 20 mm. Trims for surface
mounted panelboards are to be exactly sized to form flush fit to box.
D. Doors are to have concealed hinges integral with trim, and flush combination cylinder lock
and catch. Doors over 1000 mm high are to have vault-type handle and multiple point latch
mechanism. Locks are to be keyed alike.
E. Finish: Inner and outer surfaces of cabinet/boxes, trims, doors etc. Are to be cleaned,
phosphatized, chrome passivated and treated with final thermosetting epoxy powder
modified by polyester resins providing high resistance to mechanical injury, heat, acid and
alkali solvents, grease, aging and corrosion and of standard gray color to the approval of
Engineer.
G. Outdoor enclosures are to be heavy duty sheet steel cabinets, minimum 1.5 mm thick, fully
weatherproofed (IP 55), without knockouts, but with removable sealed/gasketed bottom
gland plates and gasketed doors.
2.4 BUSBARS
A. Type: One piece, 98% pure electrolytic copper, based on total maximum operating
temperature of 90 deg C at any point of the bus, at full continuous rating. Bolted or
clamped contact surfaces are to have maximum current density not exceeding requirements
of the approved standards. Aluminum is not to be used for busbars or panelboard parts.
B. Design: Busbars are to be shrouded/insulated and rigidly designed so that branch circuit
devices can be removed without disturbing adjacent units or changed without additional
machining, drilling or tapping. Busing is to be full size without reduction. Busing and
blank plates are to allow installation of future circuit devices, where indicated on the
drawings.
D. Short-circuit Duty: Busbars are to carry at least 125% of the maximum short-circuit
level at point of application for one second, without showing any signs of
degradation.
F. Neutral bar is to be solid and fully insulated from cabinet or box. One solder-less
box type set-screw connector is to be provided for neutral wire of each branch
circuit and one bolted clamp-type connector or anti-turn lug with set-screw for main
incoming neutral wire. Neutral is to be fully sized and rated as for phase busbars.
A. Type: Tested to approved standards, totally enclosed, molded case, constructed from high
quality, high temperature resistant, tropicalized, molded insulating materials, for normal
operation at maximum temperature within enclosures at point of application, and provided
with front operated single toggle type handle mechanism for manual operation of main
contacts in addition to automatic operation under over-current conditions. Multi-pole
breakers are to have common integral trip bar for simultaneous operation of all poles.
Ampere rating is to be clearly visible. All terminals are to be box lug or clamp type with set
screws, suitable for copper or aluminum conductors.
B. Circuit Breaker Trip Units: Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, circuit
breakers up to and including 150/160 a frame size, are to be thermal-magnetic type, having
bi-metallic inverse time delay over-current element for small overloads and instantaneous
magnetic over-current trip element for operation under short-circuit conditions on each pole.
Circuit breakers 250 and larger are to have adjustable instantaneous trips.
D. Trip current rating (amps) indicates nominal maximum rating at which overload element is
set to operate.
E. MCCBs for LPs, PPs, SDPs and DPs Type 2: Comply with IEC60947-2 test sequences I, II,
utilization category A, and are to have rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacities
(sequence III) to meet the electrical requirements at the panelboard location, with preferred
ratings in accordance with following tables.
F. MCCBs for DP Type 1: Rated for maximum voltage of 600v A.C., 250 v D.C. and
utilization category b (with an intended short time withstand capability), and are to have
rated service short circuit breaking capacities (sequence ii) with suitably selected frame
sizes and trip ranges to meet the electrical requirements at the distribution panelboard
location and schedules shown on the drawings, with declared ratings as percentage (100%,
75% or 50%) of the ultimate ratings as quoted by the circuit breaker manufacturer marked
on the circuit breaker rating plate.
G. Frame size is defined as maximum continuous current rating of circuit breaker which
corresponds with its maximum trip range listed below and which is to be related to
minimum acceptable short-circuit interrupting ratings, based on fully rated interrupting
duties: normal duty (N), high break (H), or current limiting (L), as specified.
H. Frame sizes are generally to be selected with minimum interrupting capacities at specified
voltages and rated frequency, in accordance with the following table:
J. Interchangeable Trips: Thermal-magnetic trip circuit breakers 150/160 A frame sizes to 600
A frame sizes are to have interchangeable trip units.
K. Sealing: Circuit breakers with non-interchangeable trip units are to be sealed. Circuit
breakers with interchangeable trip units are to have trip unit covers sealed to prevent
tampering.
M. Electronic trips units, applicable to circuit breakers 250 A frame size and larger, are to be
solid state with long time delay settings between 0.5 and 1.0 times maximum trip rating,
short time delay range of 3 to 10 times maximum trip rating with a maximum clearing time
of 0.2 seconds, and instantaneous protection adjustable from 5 to 10 times continuous rating.
Solid state trip units are to be insensitive to changes in ambient temperature between -20
and +55 deg C. Earth fault protection is to be built into trip unit where specified, and is to
be suitable for connection to external current sensor. Push-to-trip button is to be provided
on cover for testing the trip unit.
O. Residual current operated earth leakage trip devices (RCDs) are provided as add-on or built-
in earth leakage accessories, where required(for equipments/devices installed in wet areas)
and as shown on the Drawings. Protection against earth fault current, in addition to over-
current and short-circuit protection, is to be in accordance with the Regulations. Trip
current sensitivity on breakers for branch circuits is to be 100mA for lighting circuits and
30mA for others, and for main breakers ratings are to be as shown on the Drawings. Circuit
breakers are to include current transformer with tripping coil assembly, test button and trip
free mechanism to ensure circuit breaker cannot be held closed against earth faults.
P. Current Limiting Circuit Breakers: Molded case type without fusible elements. When
operating within current limiting range, the I2t of let-through current is to be less than 1/2
cycle wave of symmetrical protective short-circuit current as compatible with breaker
construction.
Q. Current limiting circuit breakers are to have, on each pole, adjustable inverse time-delay
over-current characteristics for overload protection and instantaneous trip for short-circuit
protection. Operation of main contacts is to be based on Electro-magnetic repulsion forces
between contacts created by fault current. Ratings are specified at rated voltage for an rms
value of prospective short-circuit current.
A. Type: Thermal magnetic non-adjustable type, tested in accordance with IEC 60898.
D. MCBs and combination devices are to be modular, of unified profile and suitable for
mounting either to a standard din rail, or a plug-in system.
F. Ratings: Preferred rated currents are to be 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80 and 100 a,
calibrated at 40deg.c, available as 1, 2, 3 and 4-pole circuit breakers. De-rating above 40
deg C is not to exceed 1% per deg C and loading is not to exceed 70% of circuit breaker
rating.
G. Residual current devices for earth leakage protective circuit breakers are to be add-on
devices, or built-in and integral with the standard circuit breaker. Non-adjustable
sensitivities of 30 ma, 100 ma and 300 ma are to be available for all ratings of 2-pole and 4-
pole circuit breakers.
H. Auxiliaries where shown on the drawings, are to include alarm switch, auxiliary switch,
shunt trip, under voltage trip and similar units which are to be modular additions to the
circuit breakers.
A. DP TYPE 1: to be from 1 to IEC 60439-1, and have a rated insulation voltage of 690 V a.c.,
240 V d.c., surface mounted to wall or free standing , with doors (unless otherwise shown
on the Drawings), suitable for ratings of main breaker (or MCS on main incoming as shown
on the drawings) and busbars ranging from 400 A to 1250 A, 3-phase, 4-wire (or 3-wire
where specifically indicated), suitably and orderly arranged for any selected combination of
branch MCCBs ranging from 150 A to 1250 A frame size and short-circuit interrupting
ratings as shown on the Drawings. Circuit breakers smaller than 225 A frame size, where
indicated, may be grouped on an integral sub-assembly mounted to main chassis.
B. DP TYPE 2: to be Form 1 to IEC 60439-1, and have a rated insulation voltage of 690 V
a.c., Panelboard is to be recessed or surface mounted type, as shown on the Drawings,
complete with trim and door, adjustable trim fixation for flush panels, and with ratings of
main circuit breaker (or MCS on main incoming as shown on the drawings) and busbars of
100 A, 150/160 A, 250 A.., 3-phase, 4-wire, with 2 or 3-pole branch circuit breakers, 100 A
or 150/160 A frame size.
C. Construction: Sheet steel, minimum 1.5 mm thick for cabinet/box and minimum 2 mm
thick for trim or trim and door. Fronts are to be single or twin covers to shield circuit
breakers, terminals and live ends.
E. Molded insulators are to have minimum temperature rating of 130 deg C and insulation
grade of 3.5 kV for one minute.
F. Circuit breakers are to be mounted in twin arrangement (except for larger circuit breakers)
and bolted rigidly to copper cross and center bus connectors.
A. Type: Rated insulation voltage rating of 690 V and a rated operational voltage of 400/230
V.
B. Internal Assembly: Comprise removable back plate or back pan of rigid construction,
attached to enclosure by four captive screws through keyhole fixings, and provided with
DIN rails in horizontal arrangement for SPN panels and in vertical arrangement for TPN
panels. Assembly is to be complete with neutral terminal block, earthing bar and one piece
insulated bolt-on/comb-type phase busbar. Busbars are to be single-phase or 3-phase with
spade connectors for fixing by tightening a single screw on circuit breaker. Insulation is to
be high thermal rating, capable of carrying maximum short-circuit current for one second
without overheating beyond acceptable limits required by the Standards. Panelboards are to
comply with BS 5486 Part 12.
C. Internal Assembly: Comprise removable back plate or back pan of rigid construction,
attached to enclosure by four captive screws through keyhole fixings, and provided with
busbars in horizontal arrangement for SPN panels and in vertical arrangement for TPN
panels. Assembly is to be complete with neutral terminal block, earthing bar and one-piece
insulated phase busbar. Busbars are to be single-phase or 3-phase with spade connectors for
fixing by tightening a single screw on circuit breaker. Insulation is to be high thermal
rating, capable of carrying maximum short-circuit current for one second without
overheating beyond acceptable limits required by the Standards.
D. SPN type panelboards are to be suitable for 240 V maximum service voltage, single-phase
and neutral, with MCBs on branch circuits and main incoming.
E. SPN type main circuit breaker is to be double-pole MCB, with or without earth leakage
device (RCD), as shown on the Schedules.
F. Single-pole and double-pole MCBs for 240 V service, are to have trip ratings between 6 A
and 50 A, with ICs as required in the Schedules.
G. TPN type panelboards are to be suitable for up to 415 V A.C. maximum service voltage, 3-
phase and neutral, with MCBs on branch circuits and 3 or 4-pole MCB , MCCB or MCS
main incoming, as shown in the Schedules or on the Drawings.
H. Triple-pole branch circuit breakers are to have trip ratings between 6 A and 100 A, with IC
as required in the Schedules.
I. TPN type panelboard main circuit breakers are to be MCB or MCCB, 100A continuous
current rating, with trip range from 25 A to 100 A, or 225 A MCCB with trip range 70 A to
225 A, normal (N) or high-break (H) duty with/without RCD as shown on the Drawings.
J. Short-circuit Rating: TPN panelboards may only have integrated equipment (series) short-
circuit ratings in accordance with clause paragraph F of Article 7
"Moeller (Germany)
A. Assembly is to be as specified for MCB or MCCB type of branch circuit panelboard, but
with split-bus arrangement, part of which is controlled by in-built submain contactor or
circuit-protective device for group control of a number of branch circuits. Panelboard is to
have main circuit breaker for protection and isolation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fixing Generally:
B. Panelboard Interiors: Do not install in cabinets until all conduit connections to cabinet have
been completed.
C. Wiring Inside Panelboards: Neatly arranged, accessible and strapped to prevent tension on
circuit breaker terminals. Tap-off connections are to be split and bolted type, fully
insulated.
D. Trim: Fix plumb and square prior to painting. Fix trim for flush mounted cabinets flush
with wall surface finish.
E. Protection: Treat concealed surfaces of recessed cabinets with heavy field application of
waterproof compound prior to installation.
F. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 1880 mm above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with
fronts uniformly flush with wall finish.
H. Circuit Directory: Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing
panelboard loads. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create
directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
J. Provision for Future Circuits at Flush Panelboards: Stub four empty conduits from
panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the
future. Stub four empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Generally: Carry out all tests, required by the governing codes and by the Engineer, on
panelboards after installation, to verify compliance with the specifications and standards.
Inspect conditions within panelboards and verify insulation conditions by use of a megger.
B. Circuit Breakers: Tests are to include operation of every circuit breaker manually. Check
automatic operation of selected circuit breakers, as required by Engineer, by applying
necessary short-circuit, overload and earth leakage current for tripping circuit breaker as
applicable and compare with manufacturer's data/characteristic curves. Measure and report
ambient temperature inside enclosure.
C. Insulation Check Tests: Carry out insulation tests on all busbars, between phases and
between phases and earth/cabinet, and between neutral and earth. Record all readings, using
500 V megger for equipment on 240 V systems, and 1000 V megger for equipment on
systems up to 600 V, for 1-minute, with circuit breakers in open position.
D. Routine tests on site are to be carried out, in accordance with the Standards, on all
panelboards assembled from standardized components of the manufacturer outside the
works of the manufacturer.
1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
F. Testing: After installing panelboards and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
3.5 ADJUSTING
3.6 CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting position, mounting method,
vertical supports, materials, firestops, and weatherstops for each component.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of enclosed bus assemblies including plans,
elevations, sections, component details, and attachments to other construction elements. Detail
connections to switchgear, switchboards, transformers, and panel boards. Detail supports and
connections to building.
C. Coordination and Construction Drawings: Include floor plans and sections to show enclosed bus-
assembly layouts and relationships between components and adjacent structural and mechanical
elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate and
certify field measurements.
D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed bus-assembly components through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Standards:
A. Field Measurements: Verify existing dimensions by field measurements. Verify clearances and
locate obstructions within manufacturing and installation tolerances of enclosed bus assemblies.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match product installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Plug-in Units: 2 percent of installed units, but not less than one unit of each type installed.
2. Hook stick operator for plug-in units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Plug-in and feeder types, indoor, for tap off applications, feeder type for non tapped
straight runs and direct connections between equipment, as applicable and / or shown on the
drawings, complete with manufacturer's recommended fittings and accessories where indicated
and as required for a complete, functioning and safe installation .
B. Busway is to include bus bars, electrical insulators, enclosures, switchboard flanges, elbows,
offsets, cable tap boxes, transformer flange connections with flexible copper braid link, generator
flange connection with flexible copper braid link and vibration absorber,, power take-off sections,
expansion joints, end closures, supports, and other components and accessories needed to form
complete systems.
C. Ratings: three phase with voltage and current ratings and requirements for neutral and ground
conductors as indicated and specified. Short circuit ratings of busbars shall be in excess of those
indicated for each location.
D. Busway Conductor Material: hard drawn Copper with not less than 98 percent conductivity.
E. Busways: tin plated and insulated over entire length, with flame retardant 130 deg C class epoxy
insulation.
F. Hot Spot Temperature Rise: not in excess of 55 deg C above an ambient temperature of 40 deg C
at any point in the busway when busway is operated at rated load current and system frequency.
A. Type: Indoor, 600/1000 V grade, 3-phase, 5-wire with fully sized neutral and half size earth bar,
insulated, totally enclosed, non-ventilated and of compact design to provide degree of protection
of IP54 to IEC 60529, with ratings as shown on the Drawings at site maximum ambient
temperature conditions. Busbar is to comply with approved standards. Short-circuit capacity is to
be at least equal to value at main protective device, for 1 second. Where indoor busway is partially
running through outdoor / wet areas, these portions are to be IP66 rated.
C. Conductor joints for one modular length to the next shall are to be arranged in joint stacks
incorporating busbar conductors, and each joint stack shall is to be arranged for tightening with a
single bolt. Joint design shall is to be such that any length or fitting of a run may be removed
without disturbing the connecting lengths.
E. Accessories: Busbar is to be complete with necessary factory made adaptor boxes, junction boxes,
bends, expansion connections, fittings, fire barriers etc. as may be required to provide complete
system between terminal points indicated on the Drawings. Fixing and mounting materials are to
be galvanized steel. For vertically mounted busbars, spring suspension type hangers are to be used
for equalizing weight of trunking between all supports.
F. Terminal adaptors or chambers are to be factory made. Coordinated components at both ends are
to match equipment connected thereto. Connections are to be made with insulated copper bars of
equivalent sections and of exact shapes to fit and be fixed with bolts and spring washers.
G. Busbar is to be ordered from the country of origin with proper lengths and shapes. Busbar cutting
on site is not acceptable.
H. Plug-In Openings: five, dead-front, hinged cover openings per side of each 3 m (10 ft). length of
busbar. Openings shall be useable simultaneously.
A. General: compatible with the connected busbar and of types as indicated. Plug-in devices shall
are to be equipped with spring reinforced contact fingers arranged so they will not make contact
with bus bars during plug insertion until the device housing is positively earthed to the busbar.
Plug-in devices shall are to lock in position mechanically and make positive earthing contact
before to the power connection when in the fully inserted position. Provide Safety interlock are to
be provided on bus plugs having "on" and "off" positions to prevent insertion when they are in the
"on" position. Mounting hardware shall is to be captive on bus plug housing.
B. Plug-in units (tap off units) are to be of rating shown on the Drawings, and comprise circuit
breaker, made by same manufacturer of the busbar unless otherwise is approved by the engineer,
housed in sheet steel enclosure complete with stabs, stab shields and earthing stab. No cables are
permitted for connection of the breaker to the busbar stabs. Protective interlocks (releasable) are to
be provided to prevent opening of cover whilst circuit breaker is plugged in and in the closed
position, to prevent insertion or removal of unit when circuit breaker is in the closed position, and
to prevent closing circuit breaker with cover open. Circuit breaker is to be as described in
Division 16 Section "Panelboards".
B. Spring Mounted Vertical Riser Supports: adjustable for leveling and spring tension and arranged
to permit relative movement between floor and busbar.
D. Expansion Section: capacity and conductor provisions same as adjacent busbar section. Arranged
to absorb expansion and contraction of bus bars and housing.
A. General: materials approved for fire ratings consistent with penetrated barriers. Refer to Section
"Basic Electrical material and methods" and Division 7 "Fire Stopping".
B. Wall and Floor Flanges: sheet steel, 2 mm (12-gage) minimum thickness close fitting to busbar
arranged to close the wall or floor opening at the busbar penetration.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Install busbars and accessories as indicated and in compliance with applicable requirements of
applicable codes/regulations. Conform to manufacturer's written instructions except where more
stringent requirements apply.
B. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where
manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to
comply with tightening torques specified in the approved applicable standards.
C. Expansion Fittings: install at locations where busbar crosses a building expansion joint. In
addition, install at intervals in long runs or risers not exceeding manufacturer’s recommendations
for the type and material of busbar installed.
D. Fire Stops: install fire stops where busbar penetrates fire- -rated walls and floors. Seal between
busbar and opening and around opening with sealant or sealing mortar having fire rating not less
than that of wall, or floor penetrated. Where busbar manufacturer's sealing and stopping devices
are not fire rated, provide fire stopping as required to satisfy authority having jurisdiction and
Engineers approval.
E. Weather Seal: install integral weather seal where busbar penetrates exterior wall or roof. Provide
appropriate flange and seal around openings to make weather tight.
G. Support busbar from the building structure independently from other suspended items.
I. Strength of each support including fastenings to the structure shall be adequate to support busbar
load multiplied by a safety factor of at least four or 90 kg ( 200 lb), whichever is greater.
J. Fastening Supports: unless otherwise indicated, fasten supports securely to the building structure
as specified in Division 16 Section "Supporting Devices".
3.2 EARTHING:
A. Provide electrical bonding and equipment earthing connections for busbars as indicated and
specified in Division 16 Section “Grounding and bonding”.
B. Tighten bonding and earthing connections to comply with tightening torques specified in
applicable Standard or to assure permanent and effective earthing.
A. Test busbar runs prior to energizing as follows and provide written report of tests.
B. Phasing: verify that proper phase relationships exist between source, busbar, and connected
equipment using phase rotation meter and verifying phase continuity from source to equipment.
C. Insulation Resistance: measure IR for all busbar components with 1000 Volt d.c. mega-ohmmeter
and compare in report with manufacturer's stated acceptable values. Measure each phase to phase
and each phase to earth. Any reading should be better than 50 mega-ohm meter.
E. Test Failures: correct deficiencies identified by tests and make ready for retest. Verify that
equipment meets the specified requirements.
A. Upon completion of installation of busbars, remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair
damaged finish including chips, scratches and abrasions.
B. Galvanized Finish: repair damage using a zinc-rich paint recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Paint Finish: repair damage using matching touch-up coating recommended by the manufacturer.
3.5 ADJUSTMENT:
A. Align busbar runs vertically and horizontally to eliminate sags and twists. Provide support
stiffeners at locations where indicated and where there is excessive movement.
B. Check bus plug circuit breaker trip settings, fuse ratings, and starter overload elements against
connected loads and revise as required to conform to recommended values.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection to ensure that moisture does not enter bus assembly.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion perform an infrared scan of bus
assembly including joints and plug-in units.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system installation.
Refer to Division 1 Section Demonstration and Training and Closeout Procedures."
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes motor control centers and panels for use on ac circuits rated 600 V
and less.
C. Connection to BMS system, including interface elements such as relays, transducers, etc. as
detailed in Division 15 Specification Sections BMS Schedules and/or shown on the
drawings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Include dimensions, ratings and data on features and components.
C. Shop and Installation Drawings: Submit for each motor control center, and prior to ordering
materials and equipment, specified in this Section. Include dimensioned plans, elevations,
and component lists. Show ratings, including short time and short-circuit ratings, and
horizontal and vertical bus ampacities.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain motor control devices through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Comply with the Following Standards: ANSI; NEMA; BS; VDE; DIN; IEC; UTE.
A. Deliver in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path as
indicated.
B. Store so condensation will not occur on or in motor control centers. Provide temporary
heaters as required to prevent condensation.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of controllers and accessory devices with pilot devices and control
circuits to which they connect.
B. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each motor controller with the ratings and
characteristics of the supply circuit, the motor, the required control sequence, and the duty
cycle of the motor and load.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. AEG (Germany)
2. Allen-Bradley Co. (U.S.A.)
3. Cutler Hammer (U.S.A.)
4. General Electric(U.S.A.)
5. Klockner Moeller (Germany)
6. Merlin Gerin (France)
7. Siemens (Germany)
8. Square D (U.S.A.)
A. Furnish complete variable frequency drives as specified herein for the fans and pumps
designated to be variable speed. All standards and optional features shall be included within
the VFD enclosure, unless otherwise specified. VFD enclosure shall be NEMA MC 1 with
inlet air filters. Drive shall be mounted on a floor stand.
B. VFD shall convert three-phase, 50 hertz utility power to adjustable voltage and frequency,
three phase power for stepless motor speed control from 10% to 100% of the motor's 50
hertz speed. Input voltage shall be as specified on the drawing schedules.
C. VFD shall include a converter and an inverter section. The converter section shall convert
fixed frequency and voltage AC utility power to DC voltage. All VFDs shall include input
line reactors or an isolation transformer as required. The inverter section of the VFD shall
invert the DC voltage into a quality output waveform, with adjustable voltage and frequency
for stepless motor speed control. The VFD shall maintain a constant V/Hz ratio. The VFD
and options shall be tested to ANSI/UL.508. The complete drive, including all specified
options, shall be listed by a nationally recognized testing agency such as UL or ETL.
D. Power line noise shall be limited to a voltage distortion factor and line notch as defined in
IEEE 519 1981 Edition, "Guide for Harmonic Control and Reactive Compensation of Static
Power Converters". The total voltage distortion shall not exceed 5 percent.
E. The VFD shall not emit radiated RFI in excess of the limitations set forth in the FCC Rules
and Regulations, FCC Part 15 for Class A computing devices. The VFD shall carry a FCC
compliance label. PWM type drives shall include RFI filters.
F. Motor noise as a result of the VFD shall be limited to 3 dB over across the line operation
measured at 1 meter from the motor's centerline.
G. VFD's full load amp rating shall meet or exceed NFPA 70, NEC Table 430-150.
1. Door mounted Hand/Off/Auto selector switch to start and stop the VFD. In the Auto
position, the VFD will start/stop from the controller. In the Hand position, the VFD
will run regardless of the remote contact position.
2. Manual speed control capability.
3. Local/Remote selector switch. In the Remote position, motor speed is determined by
the follower signal. In the local position, motor speed is determined by the manual
speed control.
4. Power/On light to indicate that the VFD has tripped on a fault condition.
5. Digital meter with selector switch to indicate percent speed and percent load.
6. A set of form-C dry contacts, to indicate when the VFD is in the Run mode.
7. A set of form-C dry contacts, to indicate when the VFD is in the Fault mode.
8. A 0 to 10 V output signal to vary in direct proportion to the controller's speed.
9. VFD to have terminal strip and N.C. safety contacts such as freezstats, smoke alarms,
etc. VFD to safety shut down in drive or bypass mode when contacts open.
L. Special features will include the following features in the VFD enclosure while maintaining
its UL to ETL listing:
1. Manual by-pass shall provide all the circuitry necessary to transfer the motor from the
VFD to the power line or from the line to the controller. The by-pass circuitry shall
be mounted in a separate section of the VFD enclosure. Motor overload protection
shall be provided in both drive and by-pass modes.
2. A door interlocked, pad lockable drive disconnect switch shall be provided to
disconnect power from the VFD only (the disconnect shall be clearly marked as
such).
3. A motor circuit protector, MCCB, shall be provided as a means of disconnecting all
power to both the VFD and by-pass circuits as well as providing short circuit and
locked rotor protection to the motor while in the by-pass mode.
4. The disconnect and by-pass functions may be accomplished via disconnects,
contractors and overloads, or with a four position Drive/Off/Line/Test switch with
motor starter and by-pass fuses.
2.3 STARTERS
A. Starters for three phase motors to be magnetic type to automatically disconnect motor from
power supply in case of supply failure, excessive voltage drop, overcurrent and lack of
balance in phases. Overload trips to be provided for three phases.
B. Motor Data: Obtain from equipment supplier before ordering any motor starter, or check
motor nameplate for full load current rating and allowable temperature rise in order to select
proper overload thermal element for motor starter.
C. Short circuit protection device fitted to starter to be independent of controller and overload
protection.
D. Control voltage for starters and control circuits is not to exceed 110 V.
F. Control Circuit Protection: Use high rupturing capacity fuses or circuit breakers.
G. Auxiliary supply for controls other than from main power circuit, to be effectively isolated
by auxiliary contacts on main isolator.
I. Starter type A for single phase motors not exceeding 1/2 HP to be surface or flush mounted,
manual two pole toggle type, for non reversing across the line starting, fitted with one
overload element.
J. Starter type B for three phase motors not exceeding 10 HP to be direct on line, non
reversing, magnetic type, with manual reset, 3 pole overload relay and low voltage
protection, unless otherwise required by local regulations.
K. Starter type C for three phase motors over 10 HP, but not exceeding 50 HP, to be automatic
star delta magnetic non reversing type, with 3 pole overload relay and low voltage
protection, unless otherwise required by local regulations.
L. Starter type D for three phase motors over 50 HP to be multiple step auto transformer non
reversing magnetic type, with 3 pole overload relay, low voltage protection, unless
otherwise required by local regulations.
M. Individually mounted starters to be totally enclosed in sheet steel enclosure with baked
enamel finish. Design is to suit location and application. It is to be impossible to open
enclosure door unless isolator is in open position.
O. Contactors: Comply with IEC 60947-4, utilization category AC3, and be 3-phase, 4-pole,
magnetic type, 600 V rating, capable of interrupting at least ten times rated current inductive
or non-inductive loads under normal service conditions and are to have replaceable main
arcing contacts and arc quenching devices. Contactors are to withstand, without welding or
burning of contacts, an inrush current of 20 times normal rating for 4 seconds upon closing
and are to be capable of closing on the heaviest short-circuit of the system and withstand the
short-circuit for period required by upstream short-circuit protective device to operate.
Three N.O. and three N.C. spare contacts are to be provided on each contactor.
P. Starter Co-Ordination: Motor starter devices shall be of type 2 co-ordination to IEC 60947-
4-1.
A. Components to comprise magnetic starter switch disconnector and short circuit protection
devices required by the Standards, in approved sheet metal enclosure to suit application.
B. Switch Disconnector Operating Mechanism: Quick make, quick break, with external
operating handle mechanically interlocked with enclosure cover necessitating disconnecting
switch to be in OFF position for access to inside of enclosure. Means are to be provided for
by passing interlocks. Position of isolating switch to be clearly indicated on cover.
C. Short circuit protection gear to be HRC fused cartridges or molded case circuit breakers of
appropriate current rupturing capacity. Switch disconnectors are not required if circuit
breakers are used for the short circuit protection. In this case the circuit breaker will perform
the disconnection function.
A. Push buttons to be one unit momentary contact START/STOP with normally open or
normally closed contacts as required by wiring diagrams and with lockout attachments.
Heads to be color-coded and STOP button to be protected. Push buttons controlling one
piece of equipment to be housed in separate enclosure.
2.6 RELAYS
A. Motor Circuit Protector: Molded case, magnetic break type with adjustable instantaneous
setting suitable for motor protection.
B. Motor circuit protectors are to be in compliance with IEC 60947-2, utilization category B,
sequence II (service capacity) for motor control centers and sequence III (ultimate capacity)
for motor control panels and combination starters unless otherwise indicated on the
drawings.
C. Molded Case Switch: Similar to circuit breakers but without overload/short circuit
protection. Short time rating of switches is to be not less than the short circuit current at
switch location for 3 cycles. Switches are to have a suitable self-override instantaneous
protection and to be in compliance with IEC 947-3.
D. Main incoming switches to be equipped to provide earth fault under voltage and phase
sequence protection through shunt trip coil. Earth fault detection and interruption to be time
coordinated with those of main incoming breaker on main distribution board.
A. Type: Totally enclosed, IP 42 for indoor installation, and IP 55 for outdoor installation and
in wet areas (e.g. pump rooms), free-standing sectionalized type, modular, compartmented,
form 3 to IEC 60439 with separate withdrawable section for each motor starter and separate
fixed section for main incoming breaker / switch and each outgoing feeder circuit breaker.
Sections to be designed to allow other sections to be easily added or removed.
B. Construction: 2 mm thick sheet steel, adequately reinforced and braced for maximum
rigidity, sand blasted, rust inhibited after fabrication and sprayed with one coat primer and
two coats enamel internally and externally.
1. Main incoming circuit breaker or isolating switch as shown on the Drawings for
terminating incoming supply cables and isolating the busbar system.
2. Main copper horizontal full-length busbars rated as main incoming circuit breaker or
as shown on the Drawings.
3. Branch copper vertical full height busbars of adequate capacity to distribute power to
each circuit breaker and starter served.
4. Neutral copper busbar rated at half capacity of main busbar and distributed
throughout whole motor control center.
5. Earth copper busbars minimum 25 x 6 mm extending full length of motor control
center.
6. One voltmeter with commutator, range 0-415 V.
7. Ammeters on main supply with necessary current transformers.
8. Starters, circuit breakers, push buttons, indicating lights, switches, relays, contactors
and accessories as shown on the Drawings.
9. Interconnecting and interlock wiring.
E. Busbars to be adequately isolated and braced to sustain maximum possible short circuit
current.
G. Spare Positions: Fully equipped cells, ready for connection to motors, are to be provided in
adequate number.
H. Space Positions: Fully equipped cells ready to receive control unit are to be provided in
adequate number. Space positions to have blank cover plates.
I. Starters, switches, other components and electrical devices to be clearly labeled in English
as to number and function, with incised letters on black Bakelite with white laminated core.
Labels to be permanently fixed under each component.
J. Incoming line connections to be made with solderless, terminal four bolt type clamps.
K. Labels: Starters, switches, electrical devices and accessories to be clearly labeled in English
as to function and number. Labels to be permanently fixed under each component.
L. Schematic and wiring diagrams to be firmly fixed within motor control centre, showing each
component and cross- referenced with component labels.
M. Submit for approval electrical schematic diagram of whole installation suggested layout of
motor control centre, interior wiring details and complete technical literature on all proposed
components, prior to fabrication or purchase.
A. Type: Wall mounted or unit mounted, lockable type, IP 42 for indoor installation.
B. Construction: Minimum 1.5 mm thick hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, finished with one coat
etch primer and one coat stove enamel internally and externally.
C. Panels installed outdoors and in wet areas to have weatherproof totally sealed water and
dustproof IP 55 enclosures.
D. Components: Panels are to contain necessary breakers, starters, push button switches,
selector switches, relays, indicating lights, interconnecting and interlock wiring and all
devices and accessories required for automatic or manual operation of equipment as
specified under equipment concerned.
E. Labels: Starters, switches, electrical devices and accessories to be clearly labeled in English
as to function and number. Labels to be permanently fixed under each component.
A. Float Switch: Level operated, heavy duty, bracket mounted type, suitable for application in
open tanks, complete with 178 mm spun copper float, brass rod, two stops, floor mounting
stand, lever and counterweight. Switch to have oil tight and dust tight enclosure and 2 pole
double throw silver contacts that open on liquid rise:
B. Pressure Switch: Industrial, heavy-duty bellows actuated type, suitable for water service,
with contacts to close on falling pressure. Range to be 0.1 to 8 kg/cm2. Switch to be good
for 1720 kPa operating pressure and to have 6 mm pipe tap bottom connection. It is to have
oil tight and dust tight enclosure, single pole double throw contacts and setting adjustment:
C. Low Suction Pressure Switch: Industrial, sensitive, low range, diaphragm actuated type,
suitable for water service, with range of 2 to 20 kPa of falling pressure, preset at factory to 3
kPa. Switch to be good for 690 kPa operating pressure and to have 6 mm pipe tap bottom
connection. It is to have oil tight and dust tight enclosure, single pole double throw
contacts, range adjustment knob, sealing cap and range locking nut:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Select features of each motor controller to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of
supply circuit and motor; required control sequence; duty cycle of motor, drive, and load;
and configuration of pilot device and control circuit affecting controller functions.
C. Push-Button Stations: In covers of magnetic controllers for manually started motors where
indicated, start contact connected in parallel with sealing auxiliary contact for low-voltage
protection.
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Anchor each motor control center assembly to steel-channel sills arranged and sized
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by tack welding or bolting. Level
and grout sills flush with motor control center mounting surface.
E. Power and Control Wiring: Run in separate conduits unless otherwise specified.
F. Rigid conduits are not to terminate in nor be fastened to a motor frame or base.
G. Flexible conduits to be used at motor connections. Allow sufficient slack to permit motor to
slide over adjustable length of motor base.
H. Flexible Conduits: Length and radius to be sufficient to permit bending of feeder cables
without damage to conductor or its insulation.
I. Flexible Conduits: Do not use in place of rigid conduits except at motor connections, unless
otherwise specified.
K. Conduits are not to cross pipe or vent shafts, ducts or openings. They are to be run a
minimum 100 mm away from pipes of non-electrical services.
L. Conduits: Install so that moisture can drain to lowest point. Provide screw plug at all low
points for draining.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs according to
Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for motor control centers,
including control sequences, and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood
or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of motor control
centers.
C. Starters: Fix detailed wiring diagram inside enclosure cover to clearly indicate circuits.
D. Starters: Identify control and power wires either by distinctive colored insulation, engraved
tags or other approved method.
B. Protect circuits with high rupturing capacity fuses or circuit breakers. Auxiliary supply for
controls other than from main power circuit, to be effectively isolated by auxiliary contacts
on main isolator.
1. Connect selector switches to bypass only the manual and automatic control devices
that have no safety functions when switch is in the hand position.
2. Connect selector switches with motor control circuit in both hand and automatic
positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-
temperature cutouts, and motor-overload protectors.
3.5 EARTHING
A. Earth motors by connecting green insulated conductor from earthing bushing in starter to
motor frame. Run earth conductor together with circuit wiring and terminate in motor
terminal box, provided earth terminal in box is connected to motor frame. If this is not
feasible, extend earth conductor through insulated bushed opening in terminal box and
connect to motor base.
B. Earth equipment by connecting non-current carrying metal parts of system to earth source.
Non-currents carrying metal parts include conduits, cable trays, outlet boxes, cabinets,
enclosures, doors, grilles, and barriers protecting or shielding electrical equipment from
direct access.
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten motor control center bus joint, electrical connector, and terminal bolts according to
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values.
A. Testing: After installing motor control center and after electrical circuitry has been
energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
B. Circuit Breakers: Co-ordinate earth fault detection and interruption with those of main
incoming breaker on main distribution panel.
C. Pressure Switches: Test after installation to ensure dependable operation and correct setting.
D. Low Suction Pressure Switches: Test after installation to ensure dependable operation and
correct setting.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Inspect interior and exterior of motor control centers. Remove paint splatters and other
spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.
Clean devices internally, using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system
installation. Refer to Division 1 Section.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes interior lighting fixtures, lighting fixtures mounted on exterior
building surfaces, lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units, mounting provisions and
connection to circuit wiring and to corresponding lighting control equipment.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Detailed literature on each fixture, lamp and control gear including manufacturer's
name, catalogue number, rating, material specification, overall dimensions, operating
characteristics and principles
2. Details of changes to standard fixtures for adaptation to condition of installation and
to the Specification
3. Photometric data for lighting calculations including polar light distribution curves,
coefficient of utilization, glare classification, efficiency, depreciation factors etc.
4. Dimensions of fixtures.
5. Certified results of independent laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for electrical
ratings and photometric data.
6. Certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for photometric
performance.
7. Emergency lighting unit battery and charger.
8. Fluorescent and high-intensity-discharge ballasts.
9. Types of lamps.
C. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit Drawings for approval including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Exact position of each fixture on reflected ceiling plans, with indication of ceiling
features, structural members, ducts, pipes and other fittings, as applicable and
pertinent to the installation.
2. Installation details including suspension and mounting provisions.
3. Purpose made fixtures or lighting assemblies with full details.
D. Samples: Submit fully equipped sample of each fixture type, modified if required, together
with color and texture samples of each fixture.
E. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and sections drawn to scale and
coordinating fixture installation with ceiling grid, ceiling-mounted items, and other
components in the vicinity. Include work of all trades that is to be installed near lighting
equipment.
A. Fixture Design and Standards: The Specification and the Drawings are a guide to the
selection of lighting characteristics and lighting fixtures, giving general features of
construction, materials, method of installation and conditions of operation. Unless
otherwise specified, fixtures are to be manufacturer's standard series, designed and
manufactured for the purpose and application required, generally in accordance with the
Schedule of Lighting Fixtures and complying with IEC 60598 and CISPR 15.
B. Mockups: Provide lighting fixtures for room or module mockups. Install fixtures for
mockups with power and control connections.
C. All lighting fixtures to have test certification from approved and certified, photometric
laboratories.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain dimming controls from a single source with total responsibility
for compatibility of lighting control system components specified in this Section and in
Division 13 Section “Lighting Controls”.
E. All luminaries and lighting fixtures shall be provided with a permanent label within the
luminaire clearly identifying, the name of the manufacturer, the model name and model
number, the country of origin, the IP rating of the fixture the type, rating and number of
lamps to be used and the year of manufacture.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Design Layout: Fixture layout has been determined from photometric data of specified
fixtures to achieve desired level and uniformity of illumination. Reflected ceiling plans are
to be checked to ensure exact positions of fixtures with respect to structural members, ducts,
pipes, other installations and ceiling panels/tiles, where required. Certain fixtures are shown
in provisional positions, pending preparation of final equipment layout drawings. Such
fixtures are to be located in coordination with final equipment layout so that illumination is
as intended by the design.
B. Fixtures, Mounting Hardware, and Trim: Coordinate layout and installation of lighting
fixtures with specific ceiling system in each area and other construction to ensure that space
exists for installation and removal of lighting fixture.
C. In general the lamps in the luminaries used for the normal lighting is to be selectively
allocated for emergency lighting also.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match product installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Lamps: 20 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of
each type.
2. Diffusers and Lenses: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at
least one of each type.
3. Louvers: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least 1 of each
type.
4. Battery and Charger Data: For emergency lighting units.
5. Ballasts/Control gear: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at
least one of each type.
6. Globes and Guards: 5 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least
one of each type.
7. Lamp Holders: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least 1
of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated
for each designation in the Lighting Fixture Schedule shown on Drawings. The products are
to be the latest standard of a reputable manufacturer and full compliance with the
specifications.
A. Generally: Construction and wiring of fixtures are to comply with the Regulations and
Standards. Fixtures are to be fabricated, assembled and wired entirely at factory.
Manufacturer's name, factory inspection stamp and official quality label is to be fixed to
each fixture supplied.
C. Sheet Steel Housings: Electro-galvanized sheet steel, not less than 0.6 mm thick, and thicker
when required by the Specification or the Standards.
D. Sheet Steel Reflectors: Electro-galvanized sheet steel, not less than 0.5 mm thick.
E. Aluminum Reflectors: Electro-galvanized sheet steel, not less than 0.7 mm thick, unless
otherwise approved.
F. Fabrication: Metalwork is to be mitred, welded and ground smooth without tool marks or
burrs. Flat metal parts are to be stiffened by forming grooves and edges during fabrication.
Metal parts are to have finish free from irregularities.
G. Rust-proof Ferrous Base: Ferrous metal parts are to be bonderized (treated with corrosion
resistant phosphate solution) and given an approved rust-inhibiting prime coat before
application of final finish.
H. Finish for Non-Reflecting Metal Surfaces: Approved baked enamel paint. Paint color on
fixture frames and trims are to be as specified or as selected by the Engineer.
I. Finish for Light Reflecting Surfaces: White baked enamel paint having reflection factor not
less than 85%. Mirror reflectors, where specified, are to be highly polished, anodized
aluminum with reflection factors not less than 97%.
J. Mechanical Resistance of Finish: After finish has been applied on steel surfaces and cured,
it is to withstand a 6 mm radius bend without showing signs of cracking, peeling or
loosening from base metal.
L. Heat Resistance: Finishes, wires and components inside fixtures are to be certified materials
to resist the temperatures or other conditions encountered in the fixtures.
M. Wiring Inside Fixtures: Not less than 1.5 mm2, and insulated for 240 V application.
Insulation is to have acceptable characteristics to resist maximum temperatures inside
fixtures. Wiring is to be terminated on screw type, fixed, insulating, terminal blocks.
N. Hinges: Fixtures with visible frames and hinged diffusers are to have concealed hinges and
catches, and stain-less steel retaining clips. Other alternative equally durable products may
be submitted for approval.
O. Suspension Aligners: Provide for pendant fixtures for axial, vertical and horizontal
alignment. Vertical adjustment is to be minimum 25 mm.
P. Recessed Fixtures: Construct to fit into suspended ceilings without distorting fixture or
ceiling. Plaster rings are to be provided for plaster or concrete ceilings.
Q. Recessed Down Light Fixtures: shall be provided with “trims” to architectural approval and
shall not have visible fixing screws or clips.
R. Outdoor Fixtures: Non-ferrous metal or specially molded material for outdoor use.
A. Lamp Holders Generally: To IEC 400, heavy duty, molded white plastic with non-corroding
spring contacts.
B. Lamp Holders for Industrial Fittings: Spring loaded turret type, heavy duty, dust protected.
C. Ballasts Generally: To IEC 60921. Only single or two-lamp ballasts are to be used in any
one fixture. Two-lamp ballasts are to be lead-lag, series type. Equipment is to be enclosed
in sheet steel casing with corrosion resistant finish.
D. Ballast thermosetting compound is not to soften, liquify or support combustion under any
operating condition or upon ballast failure, and is to fill ballast enclosure and dampen
vibrations. Temperature rise, under normal operating conditions, is not to exceed 55 deg. C
above maximum ambient temperature of 40 deg. C.
E. Ballast Protection: Each ballast is to have one-time external fuse and fuse holder rated in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
F. Ballast Type: Electronic type power factor corrected to above 0.9, having manufacturer's
lowest case temperature. Sound rating is not to exceed level given in the Standards.
G. Ballast Rating: Ballast is to be manufactured and certified for the specific lamp it controls
and for operation from nominal power supply, with voltage and frequency equal to nominal
voltage and frequency of distribution network.
H. Capacitors: To IEC 61049, having snap-type connectors and fastening, bolt type M8, for
fixing to fixture.
I. Starters, if required, are to comply with IEC 60155, and are to be selected in conjunction
with respective ballast and lamp.
J. Electronic ballasts for use on 16 mm, 26 mm and 38 mm diameter krypton or argon filled
tubes are to be used in conjunction with electronic dimming controls. Dimming is to be
possible down to 5% of normal output. Ballasts are to be as manufactured by Helvar or
Osram or other equal and approved, with service life in excess of 10000 hours.
A. Incandescent Lamp Sockets: To IEC 60061 and IEC 60238, high-grade porcelain, heat
resistant plastic to CAT T2 BS EN 61180; E27 (ES) screw sockets for lamps not exceeding
200 W and E40 (GES) screw sockets for lamps 300 W and over.
B. Body shall be cast aluminium alloy or pre-galvanized sheet steel with non-toxic paint.
A. Type: Fixtures are to be complete units including integral ballasts (and ignitors for HPS
lamps where indicated) and lamps of required number and type, and are to have lighting
distribution characteristics equivalent to model and manufacturer indicated in the fixture
description.
B. Accessories: Fixtures are to have mounting accessories, such as suspension rods or chains,
rails or brackets, and protective glass covers with gaskets for protection against dust and
humidity or type of corrosive atmosphere predominant in the location.
C. Ballasts and ignition devices are to be power factor compensated to at least 0.9 lagging, and
type specially selected for lamp type and size used. Lamp is to be able to start with at least
+/-10% variation from nominal line volt-age and continue in normal operation with dips
attaining 20% for four seconds. Compensation is to ensure there is no great increase in
operating current during starting and that gear losses do not exceed 10% of normal wattage.
RF suppression circuit is to be provided.
2.6 LAMPS
B. Incandescent Lamps for General Lighting Service (GLS): To have screw base type ES for
lamps 200 W and below and type GES for lamps 300 W and above. Inside frosted (IF)
lamps are to be used unless otherwise specified. Guaranteed rated life is to be above 800
hours and luminous output above the following:
C. Reflector Lamps (R): For indoor and outdoor use, with silver reflector and prismatic lens.
Light beam is to be narrow (spot), wide (flood) or extra-wide (wide flood) as indicated in
the fixture description.
E. Straight Tubular Fluorescent Lamps: To IEC 60081 (SSA 138 and SSA 139) and, unless
otherwise specified, are to be switch start type, bi-pin, rated as indicated in the fixture
description and with improved fluorescent internal coating. Color of light is to be warn
white color with temperature 3000 K, unless otherwise specified. Lamps are to be low
energy type. Lamps are to be low energy type with tube diameter 26 mm. Guaranteed rated
life is to be above 8000 hours and luminous output above the following:
G. SL Lamps: Compact, low pressure, discharge lamps, integral with control gear, housed in
opal prismatic glass bulb, with ES screw base, and rated as indicated in the fixture
description. Guaranteed rated life is to be above 5000 hours and luminous output, for clear
prismatic lamps, above the following:
H. PL-C Compact Lamps: Single ended, compact-miniature lamp, consisting of four narrow
fluorescent tubes welded together, with integral instant starter and capacitor and with special
two-pin plug-in base and socket. Color by the light is to be warn white 3000 K. Guaranteed
rated life is to be above 5000 hours and luminous output above the following:
Lamps are to be type PLC as manufactured by Osram, Philips or other equal and approved,
with warm color impression.
I. High Pressure Mercury Vapor Lamps: To IEC 60188, and to include quartz discharge tube
in an internally coated ovoid outer tube. Coating is to be yttrium vanadate phosphor with
color temperature of 3300 deg. K. Guaranteed rated life is to be above 8000 hours and
luminous output above the following:
J. High Pressure Sodium Lamps: Type SON-T (tubular), with guaranteed average rated life
(down to 80% output) above 10000 hours, lamp shall be provided with E40 base. Control
gear shall be provided from same manufacturer as the lamp, and having initial luminous
output above the following:
K. Metal Halide Lamps: Comprising quartz discharge tube enclosed in clear tubular hard-glass
outer bulb, operating on same principle as all gas discharge tubes with iodide additives
indium, thallium and sodium in the mercury discharge, to increase intensity in three spectral
bands; blue, green and yellow-red with high color rendering.
L. Metal Halide lamps rated 150 Watts and less shall be ceramic discharge tube type with UV
stop outer bulb and have control gear from the same manufacturer as the lamp. The light
output shall have a Color Rendering Index class of 1 and the minimum lumen output and
color temperatures after 100 hours “burning-in” shall be as follows:
i. 35 Watt- 3300 Lumen @ 3000 o K
ii. 70 Watt- 6 000 Lumen @ 4000 o K
iii. 150 Watt- 13,500 Lumen @ 4000 o K
M. Metal Halide lamps rated above 150 Watts shall be provided with UV stop outer jacket and
shall have control gear from the same manufacturer as the lamp. The lamps shall also be
suitable for operation with HPSV control gear. Guaranteed average rated life (down to 80 %
output) shall be not less than 18,000 hours. The light output shall have a Color Rendering
Index class of 2 and the minimum lumen output and color temperatures after 100 hours
“burning-in” shall be as follows:
i. 250 Watt- 20,000 Lumen and 4200 o K
ii. 400 Watt- 40,000 Lumen and 4200 o K
iii. 1000 Watt- 80,000 Lumen and 4000 o K
N. Metal Halide lamps are to be to IEC 60188 with E40 base. Lamp voltage 230V. Permissible
base temperature is to be not greater than 250 deg. C (482 deg. F), and maximum bulb
temperature not greater than 550 deg. C (1022 deg. F).
O. Low Voltage Halogen Dichroic lamps: are to be 12V, 20W/35W/50W as per the
requirement. The lamps shall be provided with a certified UV stop and a clear flat glass
sealed lens. Certified average rated life shall be not less than 4000 hrs. Color temperature
shall not be less than 3000 o K
A All control gear shall be certified to contain r.f.i. Suppression and comply with EN 55015
and EN 55022.
B All control gear shall be certified to have transient protection in compliance to IEC 929.
C All control gear shall be certified to contain harmonic compliance to EN 61000.
D All control gear shall be suitable for 230V, 50 Hz.
E All control gear shall be provided with input supply over current protection device.
F All control gear shall be metal encased.
G All control gear shall be from approved internationally reputed and recognized
manufacturers and shall be procured through the lighting fixture manufacturer.
H All control gear shall be certified to be suitable for operation in an ambient of +55 o C (122
deg. F).
I All control gear for fluorescent lighting shall be electronic type.
J All control transformers for low voltage lamps shall be electronic type.
K All control gear for fluorescent lamps and other discharge lamps shall be electronic type
unless specifically permitted otherwise.
L All control gear interconnection wiring shall utilize LS0H insulated insulation wires.
M All control gear shall have permanent label indicating name of manufacturer, model
number, country of origin, approvals, rating and operating temperature information.
N Total power losses on control gear shall be tested and certified less than 5 % of lamp rating
by recognized and approved independent testing laboratory.
O Control gear for discharge lamps shall have “anti-cycling” feature to prevent multiple re-
strike in the event of lamp failure.
P All control gear shall be provided with p.f improvement to ensure a level not less than 0.95.
Q Control gear shall use only copper conductors. Aluminum windings/wires are not permitted.
R Starter/capacitors shall be metal can type, protected against fire/explosion and material used
shall be non-toxic and certified “environment friendly”.
S Al control gear shall be certified to be compatible with the lamp used, by the manufacturer.
A Enclosure shall be either 2mm aluminum sheeting or 2mm thick pre-galvanized sheet steel
with sufficient bracing and with non-toxic paint powder coating of approved color.
B Enclosure is to be IP 20 and provided with adequate ventilation openings, which are protected
by brass wire mesh against rodents and insects.
C Illuminated face may be high temperature, transparent or translucent material (as per
requirement) and shall be tested and certified to be non-inflammable and also non-toxic in
case of exposure to fire.
D Internal illumination shall be done with approved lamp source and control gears necessary.
E All internal wiring shall consist of LS0H insulated wires and cables.
F All lamp holders and connector blocks shall be ceramic or high temperature hydrocarbon
material certified to withstand 105 o C, non-inflammable and non-toxic.
G Lamp holder positions shall be permanently aligned by using standard luminaires and not as a
field assembly of components.
H R.f. suppression shall be provided for all control gear used herein.
I All control gear used herein shall be suitable for an ambient of 50 o C.
J Fixing screws shall be of captive type, which is held in place and do not fall off during
maintenance.
K Any gaskets used shall be non-inflammable type.
L Each light box shall be provided with an input over current protective device suited to the
electrical protective device “upstream” in the circuit and also an earth leakage circuit breaker.
M All supports and packing within the light box shall be metal and usage of any inflammable
material is not allowed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Generally: Install fixtures level, aligned and parallel or square to building lines and at
uniform heights as shown on the Drawings or as approved by Engineer. Make final height
adjustment after installation.
B. Ensure that luminaire is positioned so that it can be removed and re-fixed without having to
disturb other equipment.
C. Ensure that luminaires are fed from plug-in type ceiling roses, which are located within
“hand-reach” of the luminaire unless directed otherwise.
D. Fixture Support: Provide fixture and/or fixture outlet boxes with hangers, brackets and
flanged bolted fittings, as necessary, to support weight of fixture. Submit details of hangers
etc. and method of fastening for approval. Rigidly secure fixtures mounted on outlet boxes
to fixture studs. Install hooks or extension pieces, when required, for proper installation.
Provide one point of support in addition to the outlet box fixture stud for individually
mounted fixtures longer than 600 mm.
E. Stem Hangers: Provide two stem hangers for individually mounted pendant fixtures. Stems
are to have suspension aligners and are to be of suitable length for suspending fixtures at
required height.
G. Solid Ceilings: Coordinate dimensions of recesses in ceilings with exact fixture dimensions
and structural elements.
H. Continuous Rows: Arrange fixtures so that individual fixture can be removed without
dismantling remaining fixtures. Provide minimum spacing between fixtures.
I. Cover Plates: Install cover plates over fixture outlet box or opening in ceiling or structure
when left unused.
J. Flush Recessed Fixtures: Install to completely eliminate light leakage within fixture and
between fixture and adjacent finished surface.
K. Ventilation: Keep ventilation channels free after fixture is installed, if required by the design
of the fixture.
M. Tightness: Ensure that enclosed fixtures are reasonably insect/dust tight when installed, and
completely weather- proof for installations subject to weather conditions.
N. Lamps for Permanent Installation: Place new lamps in fixtures immediately prior to hand-
over and when instructed by Engineer. Lamps used for temporary service are not to be used
for final lamping of fixtures.
O. Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceiling and walls, and secure according to
manufacturer's written instructions and approved submittal materials. Install lamps in each
fixture.
P. Support for Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid for support.
1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture.
Locate not more than 150 mm from fixture corners.
2. Support Clips: Fasten to fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture
corner.
C. Operation: Check lighting installations for operation including control and regulation
equipment.
D. Electrical Data: Measure power factor, current and voltage at start for installations with
discharge lamps.
E. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
H. Tests: As follows:
I. Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat procedure
until units operate properly.
A. Clean fixtures internally and externally after installation. Use methods and materials
recommended by manufacturer.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes exterior lighting units with luminaires, lamps, ballasts,
poles/support structures, and accessories and related power distribution and control,
protective earthing and related builder's work including column foundations, cable pits,
cable trenches and ductwork.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment Data: For each type of lighting unit indicated submit complete data for
approval including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Detailed literature, in English, for each type of luminaire or fixture, lamp and
control gear including manufacturer's name, catalogue number, rating, material
specification, overall dimensions, operating characteristics and principles, and any
modification to a standard product if applicable
2. Detailed specification and drawings for each column type including shape,
base/mounting flanges, bolts, nuts etc, cross-sections, design criteria and
calculations, brackets, finishes, provisions for cabling, cut-out or circuit-breaker
etc.
3. Photometric data for lighting calculations including polar curves, coefficients of
utilization, efficiency and depreciation factors.
4. Materials and dimensions of luminaires and poles.
5. Certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for electrical ratings and
photometric data.
6. High-intensity-discharge luminaire ballasts.
B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not
limited to, the following:
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
A. Standards: Luminaires generally are to comply with IEC 60598 and the applicable CISPR
recommendations. Manufacturer is to verify compliance with these standards and the
applicable local regulations and design standards.
B. Technical Requirements: Minor deviations from the Drawings may be considered for
improvement in construction details, but no changes are to be made without the written
approval of the Engineer.
A. Store poles on decay-resistant treated skids at least 300 mm above grade and vegetation.
Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.
B. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on poles until just before pole installation. Handle
poles with web fabric straps.
A. Spare Parts: Provide items necessary for maintenance, and up to 5% (or nearest whole
unit) of installed quantities of each type of lamp, control gear, fuses, luminaire covers,
special bolts or nuts, lamp-holders and the like which are subject to burning, breakage or
failure.
B. Furnish extra materials described below that match product installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of
each type.
2. Glass and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: 1 for every 100 of each
type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
3. Ballasts: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of
each type.
4. Globes and Guards: 1 for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at
least one of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Construction: Columns are to be circular section, tapered, formed sheet steel, electrically
welded, and of height specified. Columns up to 12-m height are to be one piece section.
Columns above 12 m and up to 20-m height may be supplied in two piece sections, of the
slip joint type with sufficient overlap to ensure correct vertical alignment of column after
assembly. Columns are to have minimum wall thickness of 3 mm at base. Sheet steel is
to have minimum rupturing resistance of 37 kg/mm2 and minimum yield strength of 24
kg/mm2.
C. Column Design: Column cross-section, thickness of steel, joints, welds, bolts etc. are to
be designed to withstand gust wind velocity of 160 km/hr blowing in the most
unfavorable direction at a height 10 m above ground level, with column fully equipped.
Fatigue of steel is in no case to exceed half elasticity limit, taking into account dynamic
stresses due to vibrations. Steel flange plate, of adequate thickness, is to be solidly
welded onto lower edge of column as shown on the Drawings, and is to have specified
number of holes for holding down bolts together with central cable access hole not less
than 150 mm diameter.
E. Finish: Welds are to be smooth with spatter removed; inside and outside surfaces of
column are to be cleaned by pickling or blasting and are to be free of grease. Steel
components of columns to be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Minimum thickness of
zinc coating is to be 500 g/m2 on both inside and outside surfaces of column.
Galvanizing is to be to NFA 91 121 or BS 729. Any damage to galvanizing is to be
rectified during erection by wire brushing affected area and treating with approved rust
converter to the satisfaction of Engineer. Flange plate and inside and outside of column
base are to be coated with heavy bitumen paint prior to erection.
F. Protection and Wiring: Columns with one or two luminaires are to be connected over one
phase and neutral. Columns with three or more luminaires are to be connected over 3
phases and neutral, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Bolted terminals and cable
lugs are to be provided with 3 phases and neutral terminals, for incoming and outgoing 3
phase 4-wire cable, and of the sizes shown on Drawings. One circuit breaker, single pole
6 A is to be provided for each phase leading to a luminaire. Circuit breakers are to be
compensated and rated for 50 deg. C ambient with interrupting capacity of at least 9 kA,
and are to be mounted in weatherproof enclosure at baseboard. Wiring is to be PVC
insulated 3 core or 4 core 85-deg. C conductor temperature. Cable is to be at least 4 mm2
copper conductor.
A. Construction: Totally enclosed, dust protected and splash proof, conforming to at least IP
54 of IEC 60529, shock resistant and specially designed to house required lamps,
electrical gear and accessories. Body is to be corrosion resistant, extruded, pressure die-
cast or fabricated aluminum alloy.
B. Finish: Exposed metal parts of luminaires are to be factory finished, stove enameled, with
suitable corrosion resisting paint capable of resisting heat emitted by lamp during
continuous operation, and under full sunlight conditions. Color is to be agreed with
Engineer.
C. Mirror Reflectors: 99.5% purity, glazed and anodized aluminum or die-cast, super-purity
aluminum vapor-deposited, and coated with transparent layer of silicon protection against
wiping.
D. Luminaire Protectors: Heat and shock resistant glass, mounted into suitable frame
assembly fixed to body by captive screws, and secured by extra safety clamps to allow
replacement of protector and reflector. Ozone resistant ethylene propylene or approved
equivalent rubber is to ensure sealing of the front glass.
G. HRC fuse cartridges, suitably rated and conforming to IEC 269 or BS 88, are to be
provided, complete with base, for protection of the luminaire. Fuse is to be rated to
withstand starting current and is to be preferably located in control gear enclosure.
2.4 LAMPS
A. High Pressure Sodium Lamps: Type Sont (tubular), with guaranteed average rated life
(down to 80% output) above 10000 hours, and having initial luminous output above the
following:
B.
1. 15000 lumens for 150 W lamps
2. 25000 lumens for 250 W lamps
3. 50000 lumens for 400 W lamps
4. 135000 lumens for 1000 W lamps.
C. Metal Halide Lamps: Comprising quartz discharge tube enclosed in clear tubular hard-
glass outer bulb, operating on same principle as all gas discharge tubes with iodide
additives indium, thallium and sodium in the mercury discharge, to increase intensity in
three spectral bands; blue, green and yellow-red with high color rendering. Lamps up to
150 W are to be provided with electronic ballast. Lamps are to be to IEC 60188 with E40
base. Guaranteed average life is not to be less than 10000 hours and luminous outputs,
after 100 hours burning, are to be above the following:
Permissible base temperature is to be not greater than 250 deg. C, and maximum bulb
temperature not greater than 550 deg. C. Lamp burning position for 2000 W, 220 V lamp
is to be possible up to 75 degrees.
2.5 FLOODLIGHTS
A. Type: Totally enclosed type, weather, dust and shock resistant, IP 64 of IEC 60529.
B. Housing: High pressure die-cast aluminum alloy, closed on front by hinged framed
protector highly resistant to thermal and mechanical shocks, and set in position by at least
eight heavy duty stainless steel spring clamps with silicon sealing gasket. Enclosure is to
be in accordance with IEC Publication 60598-2-5 and BS 5489, and is to be suitable for
operation in an ambient temperature of 70 deg. C.
C. Reflectors: High purity (over 99% reflectance) anodized aluminum, secured in precision
aligned internal tracks to provide beam distribution required.
E. Control Gear: Plug-in type, 220 V, 60 Hz, power factor compensated to at least 0.9
lagging. Ballasts and ignitors are to be type specially adapted for make of lamps selected.
Ignitors are to be electronic thyristor type. Lamp is to be able to start with at least +/-
10% line voltage, and with normal operation dips up to 20% for four seconds.
Compensation is to ensure that there is no large increase in operating current during
starting. Control gear losses are not to exceed 10%. Cables for internal wiring in control
gear compartments are to be single core 2.5 mm2 copper conductors with high
temperature insulation and sheath.
F. Finish: Exposed metal parts of floodlights are to be painted with corrosion and heat
resistant paint, resisting operating temperatures attained in direct sunlight while lamp is
burning.
A. Cold Cathode Lamps: are to be 25 mm diameter 48, 100 or 200 mA, lead glass with 1.25
mm (0.05″) min wall thickness, with a minimum 21% lead content, tri-phosphor coated,
surface and cove mounted, straight, curved and circular runs, dimmable and non-
dimmable type at the various areas as shown on the drawings, premium, warm white
delux colour (3000°K), unless otherwise shown on the drawings, and subject to the
Architect and Engineer’s approval, suitable for operations on 220V, 60 HZ power supply,
with minimum flux output of 150, 300 or 600 lumen per linear foot of lamp length for 48
mA, 100 mA or 200 mA ratings respectively.
B. Cold Cathode Lamps: are not to depreciate more than 20% of output lumens after 10,000
hours of normal operation. Lamps are to be processed with a high speed mechanical
pump of at least 100 liters free air capacity, backed up by a 3-stage oil diffusion pump
able to produce a vacuum of 10-7 and accurate gauges and meters for measuring and
controlling pressures, temperatures, carrier gas and mercury. Completed lamps are to be
silicon coated and aged for a minimum of 50 hours. Suitable for external installation,
Lamps showing end darkening, stains, discolorations, spiraling or sputtering are to be
rejected.
C. Lamp Holders: are to be surface mounted, suitable for external installations, architectural
grade, UL listed, glazed white porcelain with bronze spring contacts.
A. Description: this work shall consist of supplying, complete with the necessary base,
mounting, testing and putting into satisfactory operation of feeder pillars which shall
generally be used to feed electrical lighting and other installations as required.
B. Construction: the feeder pillar shall be totally enclosed fully self-contained dust-proof,
weather proof and suitable for mounting outdoors exposed to dust, rain and sunlight.
D. Characteristics: the feeder pillar shall be complete with all equipment and fittings
incorporating moulded case circuit breakers controlling the main supply in and the
outgoing circuits. The pillar shall have the following main characteristics:
Voltage 1000 volts.
Moulded Case Circuit Triple/single pole rated as shown on Drawings
Breakers (MCCB) For Incoming and outgoing circuits.
Interrupting Capacity 35000 amperes RMS symmetrical
E. Contactors: shall be triple-pole, inductive type, rates as shown on the project drawings.
G. Internal Cabling: to be PVC/PVC single core 1000 volt grade with copper conductors and
rated as required taking into account manufacturers recommended temperature and
"bunching" derating factors. All internal wiring shall be suitably "laced" or clipped.
H. Control: the LV panel circuits serving the street lighting shall be supplied through triple
pole contactors which shall be photo-electric controlled. An over-ride facility shall be
provided for maintenance. The photo-electric controls shall consist of an omni-
directional cadmium cell thermal relay of high quality employing solid state photo-
variable conductance elements giving a 2:1 on/off ratio with sensitivity to switch on
lights when the daylight illumination reduces to 70 lux.
I. Feeder Pillars: shall have a 50 mm x 6 mm high conductivity copper main earth bar for
grounding purposes complete with test (see "earthing"). Also, permanently fixed to the
inside of the door there shall be a distribution diagram showing all circuit connections,
MCCB ratings, cable sizes and references, etc.
J. Feeder Pillar: shall be secured against unauthorized access by means of wedge locks
protected by brass plugs and operated by a special key to be agreed with the Engineer or
as applied by the local authority. The pillar final finish and final colour shall be to the
approval of the Engineer and similar to the colour of Power Distribution Boards.
3.2 LV CABLING
A. Cables: shall be multicore with copper conductors, PVC or XLPE insulated 1000 V and
shall be as specified under section 16120.
PART4 -EXECUTION
4.1 INSTALLATION
B. Column Bases: Install columns on concrete bases as detailed on the Drawings. Before
commencement of construction, ensure that bases are suitable for column installation.
C. Holding Down and Plumb Adjusting Nuts, Washers, Locknuts or Nyloc Nuts: Stainless
steel or cadmium plated.
D. Columns: Erect columns so that luminaires are located on a line parallel to theoretical
profile of road. Alignment of columns, both horizontally and vertically, is to be
secured to the satisfaction of Engineer. Brackets are to be set at 90 degrees to
longitudinal axis of road.
a. Use web fabric slings (not chain or cable) to raise and set poles.
b. Mount pole to foundation with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque
level recommended by pole manufacturer.
c. Secure poles level, plumb, and square.
d. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use non-shrinking or
expanding concrete grout firmly packed in entire void space.
e. Use a short piece of 13-mm diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout.
Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole.
J. Cabling Conduits and Ductwork: Carry out in accordance with Division 16 Section
"Conductors and Cabling". Cable ducts are to be directly buried except at crossings
with other service work or roads.
B. Insulation resistance and continuity tests are to be carried out on each circuit and piece
of equipment before energization, with circuit breakers in the open position and lamps
not installed.
C. Operational tests are to be carried out on all circuit breakers and control gear, with
lamps installed, including recording voltage at terminals of ballasts on final columns of
each circuit and at distribution panel or the like.
D. Performance tests are to be carried out after 100 hours normal operation, and are to
include measurement of lighting and uniformity levels on required illuminated
surfaces.
E. Other tests are to be carried out as required by the Engineer to verify conformity with
the Specification.
I. Tests and Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing
luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source, and as follows:
4.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground Equipment:
B. Adjust amiable luminaries and luminaires with adjustable lamp position to provide
required light distributions and intensities.